Knowledge Base 知識庫

Knowledge Base 知識庫 KCTang
  1. This Knowledge Base is purely for the sharing of the knowledge of quantity surveying, and does not constitute as terms and conditions of our consultancy services. Our actual practice may vary to suit individual circumstances. This Knowledge Base shall not be used as evidence of practice and interpretations that we must adopt.

    此知識庫純粹用作分享工料測量的知識,並不構成為敝公司顧問服務的條件及條款。敝公司的實際做法可能因應個別情況而有所變化。此知識庫不能作為我司必須採用某做法及釋義的依據。

  2. This Knowledge Base was first published on Friday, 26th December, 2014 and was previously a WiKi site created on Thursday, 14th January, 2010.

    此知識庫首先於2014年12月26日星期六發布,之前是一個於2010年1月14日星期四建立的 Wiki 網頁

Quality Alerts 質量提示

Quality Alerts 質量提示 KCTang

Go to End

Note

  • 4 Nov 2015: Created.

Where is the satisfaction?
滿足感在那裡?

  1. Winning the trust of clients, being consulted frequently
    客戶信任,時常諮詢
  2. Problem solved
    解決到問題
  3. Proper monitoring of prices, without unpleasant surprises to the clients
    造價跟蹤管理得宜,不出客戶意料之外
  4. Considered fair and reasonable by both the Employers and the Contractors
    發包方及承包方都覺得公平合理

Invisible hand
無形的手

  1. Always be prepared to be audited by a third party
    隨時準備有第三者審計
  2. Professional misconduct would cause damage to the Company not compensable by professional liability insurance
    專業失當就算有保險都不能補償對公司造成的破壞

Treating the counter-parties
對待對手

  1. Fair
    公平
  2. Reasonable
    合理
  3. Non-corruptive
    廉潔

Attending meetings
開會

  1. Be prepared
    要有準備
  2. Watch out deportment
    注意儀態良好
  3. Refrain from smoking
    不要抽煙
  4. Present oneself appropriately
    洽當表現自已
  5. Should not keep silence without contribution
    不要默不作聲毫無貢獻
  6. Should not speak unnecessarily
    不作無謂發言
  7. Say “To check and reply” if necessary cannot answer
    真的不會答時, 不怕答“容後補答”、“要查證再覆”

Estimates for maintenance and renovation
維修裝修估算

  1. Estimates for maintenance and renovation may place greater emphasis on classification by locations. It is not appropriate to classify items under them according to so many elements used for new works, but structured levels are still necessary to facilitate easier reading and understanding. Therefore, the items can be grouped and listed as follows (the locations may be classified before or after them but should not be too trivial):
    維修裝修估算項目比較著重按地方分類,之下不宜再如新建工程的分部分得那麼多,但又要有層次,便於閱讀理解,故可分類排列如下(地方可先分或後分但不宜太瑣碎):
    • Scaffolding
      棚架
    • Removal of existing
      移除現有
    • Walls, Windows and Doors
      牆窗門
    • Fittings
      裝置
    • Finishes (no need to put under headings of floor, wall and ceiling)
      裝飾 (之下不必分地面、牆面、天棚等標題)
    • M&E
      機電
  2. Schedule of Works should be similar
    工程項目清單亦是這樣

Measurement of quantities
計量

  1. Do not rely too much on on-screen measurement of cad or pdf files because there is no record of what have been measured and no detailed breakdown
    不要太依賴用cad或pdf檔 在螢幕計工程量,因計了那裡都無紀錄,又無細數
  2. Use hardcopy and dimensions to measure or use scale where necessary in case of no dimensions
    用紙張件及標示尺寸計算或在無標示尺寸時用尺量
  3. Colour on the hardcopy to indicate extent measured
    在紙張件著色識認計算了那裡

Price information
價格資訊

  1. Build-up a database
    建立資料庫
  2. Collect directive circulars and prices published by Government and authorities
     收集政府、權力機構的指令性通知、價格
  3. Collect market prices through other commercial sources (i.e. cost software vendors)
    收集其他商業渠道的市場價格(例如造價軟件公司)
  4. View newspapers, periodicals, internet
    檢閱報章、期刊、互聯網
  5. Collate internal information
    整理自身的資料
  6. Analyse content ratios and unit costs of past projects
    分析過往工程含量及單位造價
  7. Obtain through tendering
    通過招投標取得

Cash flow table
資金流量表

  1. Use horizontal table with a chart
    盡量使用橫式有圖表那個款
  2. Include complete remarks
    要加齊註釋

Standard documents
標準文件

  1. Use standard documents/templates to prepare fee proposals, tender documents, tender reports and other documents, but may refer to other projects for useful changes
    要用標準文件編寫顧問費報價、招標文件、投標分析報告及其他文件,但可參考其他工程有用的改動
  2. Do not adapt from other projects, unless really appropriate, but should check  the standard documents for any updates
    不要直接用其他工程的改, 除非真的合適,但仍要核對標準文件有無最新的改動

Lead in water problem
鉛水問題

  • Check tender documents for expressions using lead, and check with the designers whether this is appropriate
    檢查招標文件有無用鉛的字句,及與設計單位了解是否適合

Insurance provisions in tender documents
招標文件保險條款

  1. Ensure that the name list of the joint-insured as specified in the Contractors’ All Risks and Third Party Liability insurance provisions is comprehensive; apart from the Employer, the Contractor and sub-contractors of all tiers, note whether the list should include:
    確保規定工程一切險及第三者責任險的條款的聯名被保險人的名單齊全;除發包方丶承包方及各層分包方外,還要注意是否要加入:
    • the Building Manager (being a manager of the relevant properties, he may be held liable)
      物業管理人(因他為相關物業的管理人,可能被追討責任)
    • other contractors employed by the Employer (because their works will be carried out currently with the Works, and the liability for accident may not be clearly separable)
      發包方聘用的其他承包商(因其工程與本工程同時執行,意外責任未必能分得清)
    • consultants (because they are not directly performing the Works, and the insurances can only cover risks caused by the performance of the Works, therefore, it is doubtful whether they should be included as one of the joint-insured) 
      顧問(因他們不是直接執行工程者,而保險只保障執行工程所造成的風險,因此,把他們作為聯名被保險人之一的效用存疑)
  2. Adjust the old term “separate specialist contractor” to match the term used in the new Standard Forms of Contract
    調整“separate specialist contractor”這舊有叫法以符合新標準合同的叫法
  3. State the values of their works for inclusion as part of the sum insured to avoid inadequate insurance cover
    列出他們的工程金額,作為保額的一部分以免保額不足
  4. State expressly work outside boundaries to avoid lack of insurance cover
    特別列出工地外的工程以免保險範圍甩漏
  5. Include in the amount of removal of debris the costs of demolition of building, hoardings (if not included in the present contract), scaffolding for demolition, etc; review whether the $1M stated in the standard documents are adequate and adjust as appropriate
    計算保險的殘礫清理保額時要包括拆樓、圍街板(假設本合同價未包括圍街板)及拆樓用的棚架;檢討標準文件寫的100萬元是否足夠及作適當的修改
  6. State the values of the previous works such as foundations and hoardings for inclusion as part of the sum insured under the material damage section to ensure full cover; alternatively, if the risk of total loss is low, insure as the principal’s properties under the third party liability section, but the limit of indemnity will be lower
    列出之前的工程,例如基礎、圍街板等的價值,加入物質損壞保險的保險額內以取得全額保;或者,如全毀的風險低,可以作為工程委託方的財産形式在第三者保險部份受保,但賠償額較低

Preparing Bills of Quantities or Schedule of Rates
編寫工程量清單或單價表

  1. Read the Standard Method of Measurement, whether you are experienced or not; do not just listen to other people
    任何時間都要睇工程量計算規則,無論生手定熟手,不要光聽人講
  2. Note concrete mix, beam depth stages, height stages, edges, shoulders, straight / sloping / curved, etc.
    計混凝土工程時要注意混凝土的標號、樑深的層級、高度的層級、邊沿、接肩、直斜彎,等等!
  3. Do not blindly follow past Bills of Quantities or Schedule of Rates because they may have simplified the measurement which may not be applicable to every project, and may in fact be wrong
    不能盲目照跟舊有的工程量清單或單價表因為它們可能把計法簡化了,但此不是單單工程都合用,而其實可能根本就錯了,

Preliminaries Bills
開辦營運費清單

  • Draw horizontal lines to separate items in Preliminaries Bills containing clause headings only to enable entry of prices in alignment with the item descriptions
    用橫線把只列條款標題的開辦營運費清單內的項目間開以便填寫價格時對齊項目說明

Documentary exchange with tenderers
與投標者的來往文件

  • Keep the hardcopies and softcopies of documents, correspondence, faxes and emails exchanged during tendering under a separate folder for each tenderer to enable easy tracking and compilation of contract documents
    把招投標標的 所有來往文件、信件、傳真及電郵的打印或電子件按每一投標者分開歸檔,以便追蹤及製作合同文件

Tender clarification queries
詢標問卷

  • Clarify in the tender clarification queries only those incorrectly priced high or low rates, not comparatively high or low rates
    在詢標問卷應只問錯誤地高或低的單價,而不是相對高或低的單價

Financial reports
最終造價估算報告

  1. Estimated Amount = Reasonably estimated maximum amount for budgetary purposes
    估計價 = 合理估計的最大金額,供投資預算用
  2. First Claimed Amount = Amount initially claimed or the biggest amount claimed by the Contractor
    原報價 = 承包商第一次或最大的一次的報價
  3. Latest Claimed Amount = Latest revised amount claimed by the Contractor, or the current amount after negotiated reduction
    最新報價 = 承包商最新的修訂報價,或通過談判應已減低了的金額
  4. Assessed Amount = Amount accurately or roughly assessed to be comfortably payable finally, in other words, the minimum final amount payable
    審核價 = 經準確或大約計算得的可安心作為最終應付的總額,亦即等如最低的最終應付總額
  5. When Assessed Amount = Claimed Amount, Estimated Amount should also be = Assessed Amount
    當審核價 = 報價時,估計價亦應 = 審核價
  6. In the final stage of final account, the Estimated Amount should be smaller than the Claimed Amount
    到結算後期,估計價應低於報價

Approximately
大約

  • Write “approximately X Nos.” instead of  “approximate X Nos.”
    寫成“approximately X Nos.” 而不是  “approximate X Nos.”

Replace by or with
更換

  • “replace by” or ”with” may be distinguished by this example: in “replace A by B with C”, A is the replaced, B is the one who takes action, and C is the substitution
    “replace by”定”with” 可以此例子分辨:”replace A by B with C” 中A是被更換者、B 是行動者、C是代替者

Final account item descriptions
結算項目說明

  1. Note that if the words "revise", "change", "replace" and similar are used in the final account item descriptions, cost omission and addition are both expected
    注意當”修改”、”改變”、”更換”等類似用詞在結算項目說明使用時,意味應同時有減帳及加帳
  2. Make sure that the final account item descriptions are consistent with the cost effects
    確保結算項目說明是與費用影響匹配

End of Page

Personnel Organisation 人員編制

Personnel Organisation 人員編制 KCTang

Go to End

Note

20 Dec 2014: Moved form wiki.

Personnel organisation to consider
人員編制要考慮

  1. How many people
    要多少人
  2. Types and number of professional personnel
    專業人員的類別及人數
  3. Types and number of supporting personnel
    輔助人員的類別及人數
  4. Continuing learning
    持續學習

Kind of persons to employ
請什麼類形的人

  1. Enduring
    克苦
  2. Hard working
    實幹
  3. Attentive to details
    細心
  4. Highly analytical
    分析力強
  5. Eager to learn
    肯學習
  6. Able to use computer
    會用電腦
  7. Able to use common office software
    會用常用的辦公室軟件
  8. Literate in Chinese and English
    具中英語文能力

End of Page

Administrative Management 行政管理

Administrative Management 行政管理 KCTang

Go to End

​​ Note 注​​​​​​​

  • 19/1/2023: Updated to reflect the established practice.
    更新以反映既定慣例。
  • 30/7/2021: "Use of recycled paper" added.
    添加了“回收紙的使用”。
  • 13/7/2021: "Sending back source files" added.
    添加了“發回源文件”。
  • 7/7/2021: "Use of emails" expanded. "Filing of letters and emails" added.
    擴展了“電郵的使用”。 添加了“信件和電郵的歸檔”。
  • 7/4/2019: "Issuing Tender Documents just before holidays" added.
    添加了“臨假期前出標”。

​​ Joining the Company 加入公司

  1. Company:
    公司:
    • Add new member's name to company address book (using Google Contacts).
      將新成員的姓名添加到公司地址簿(使用 Google 通訊錄)。
    • Create a Google calendar for the new member.
      為新成員創建一個 Google 日曆。
    • Assign a name for the calendar in the format of "AB.Ccc" where AB are the initials and Ccc is the family name.
      以“AB.Ccc”格式為日曆分配名稱,其中 AB 是首字母,Ccc 是姓氏。
    • Give the Google account name and password to the new member.
      將 Google 帳戶名和密碼提供給新成員。
  2. New member:
    新成員:
    • Sign in the Google account to access the calendar and contacts.
      登錄 Google 帳戶以訪問日曆和聯繫人。
    • Fill in own full name in English and Chinese (if applicable), office phone number, private email address and private phone number.
      填寫自己的中英文全名(如適用)、辦公室電話號碼、私人電郵地址和私人電話號碼。
    • Record own daily office appointments and leaves on the calendar.
      在日曆上記錄自己每天的辦公室約會和休假。
    • Update the times after finishing the appointments.
      完成約會後更新時間。
    • Change the name of the computer and user name on the computer assigned for use to reflect own name.
      在指定使用的電腦上更改電腦名稱和用戶名以反映自己的名稱。

(added 添加, 19/1/2023)

​​ Office Hours 辦公時間

  1. Office:
    辦公室:
    • Normal office hours from 8:45 am to 5:45 pm from Monday to Friday except general holidays.
      正常辦公時間為周一至周五上午 8:45 至下午 5:45,公眾假期除外。
    • Lunch hour from 1:00 pm to 2:00 pm.
      午餐時間 1:00 pm 到 2:00 pm。
    • Normal office hours must be fulfilled before counting for overtime.
      在計算加班時間之前,必須完成正常的辦公時間。
  2. Staff members:
    職員:
    • Clerks must be punctual for the normal office hours.
      文員必須準時上班。
    • Some slight late arrivals of other staff members is tolerable but up to 9:30 am only.
      其他職員員的一些輕微遲到是可以容忍的,但僅限於上午 9:30前。
    • Any late arrival beyond that should be compensated by an equal amount of working time with no pay after fulfilling the normal office hours.
      超過此時間的任何遲到都應在完成正常辦公時間後以等量的無薪工作時間作為補償。
    • Sign in and out whenever they come and go.
      每當出入時都要簽到和簽出。
    • Fill in the timesheets everyday before leaving the office or just after coming back on the next day. (Timesheets will be subject to sample checks for salary payment purposes. If more than the actual time is recorded, the recorded time will be discounted based on the percentage error for salary payment purposes.)
      每天在離開辦公室之前或第二天剛回來時填寫考勤表。(計算薪酬時,會抽樣檢查考勤。如記錄超過實際的時間,計算薪酬的時間將按百分比誤差打折扣。)
    • Get the director-in-charge's consent before taking casual / annual leave.
      休事假/年假前須徵得主管董事的同意。
    • Notify all colleagues through WhatsApp before taking sick / casual / annual leave (the day before in case of pre-planned leave).
      在病假/臨時假/年假之前用 WhatsApp 通知所有同事(如果是預先計劃的假期,請提前一天)。
    • Submit doctor's certificate for sick leave afterward.
      之後提交病假醫生證明。

(Added 添加, 19/1/2023)

​​ Issuing Tender Documents just before holidays 臨假期前出標​​​​​​​

  1. If issuing Tender Documents on Friday, remind the tenderers that our office is closed on Saturday and not available for collection of documents.
    若星期五出標,提醒投標者敝公司星期六不辦公、不要到取文件。
  2. If issuing Tender Documents just before the Chinese New Year Holidays, ensure that the tendering period can accommodate the different lengths of holidays of the tenderers and their suppliers and factories. Factories usually close for longer time than the public holidays.
    若臨農曆年假前出標,確保投標期可以包容投標者及他們的供應商及工廠的不同的假期長度。工廠通常放假較公眾假期長。

(Added 添加, 7/4/2019)

​​ Office appliances 辦公用具

  1. Paper
    紙張
    • Use recycled paper as much as possible.
      盡可能使用再生紙。
    • Print on single side of new paper.
      在新紙上單面打印。
    • Reserve the other side for recycled use.
      保留另一頁以供回收使用。
    • Avoid printing on both sides because it will increase the workload when sorting out single and double sided printed paper in the future for scanning or disposal.
      避免雙面打印,因為這會增加日後整理單雙面打印的紙張進行掃描或處理時的工作量。
    • Print on both sides for thick documents only.
      僅厚文檔用雙面打印。
  2. 4-in-1 Printer, photocopier, scanner and fax machine
    4 合 1 打印機、複印機、掃描儀和傳真機
    • Rotate the use of recycled paper on different machines to reduce the wearing on any particular one.
      在不同的機器上輪換使用再生紙,以減少任何個別機器的磨損。
    • Rotate once every month.
    • 每月輪換一次。
  3. Binding machine
    釘裝機
  4. Telephone
    電話
  5. Broadband connection
    寬頻接線
  6. Internet service
    互聯網服務
  7. Intranet
    內聯網
  8. Computer
    ​​​​​​​電腦
    • Close software when leaving the desk for long.
      長時間離開辦公桌時關閉軟件。
    • Switch off the computer after leaving the office (except when remote desktop is required for use).
      離開辦公室後關閉電腦(需要使用遠程桌面時除外)。
  9. Client software
    客戶端軟件
    • Office automation - Windows 10 and 11, Office 360.
      辦公自動化 - Windows 10 和 11、Office 360。
    • Pdf and compression - Acrobat, Wondershare, WinRar.
      Pdf 和壓縮 - Acrobat、Wondershare、WinRar。
    • CAD and BIM - Autocad, Intellicad, Revit.
      繪圖及立體資訊模擬 - Autocad、Intellicad、Revit。
  10. Server software - Ubuntu
    伺服器軟件 - Ubuntu
    • File server - Samba.
      檔案伺服器 - Samba。
    • Email server - Postfix and Dovecot.
      電郵伺服器 - Postfix 和 Dovecot。
    • Web server - Drupal.
      網頁伺服器 - Drupal。

(Updated 更新, 19/1/2023)

​​ Passwords 密碼

  1. Unless authorised, do not watch, memorize or use passwords used by the Company to assess internal or external websites.
    未獲授權不應觀看、記下及使用公司使用的內外網站的密碼。
  2. Do not disclose passwords used by the Company to outside persons.
    不得對外人披露公司使用的密碼。

​​ Fax machine setting 傳真機的設定

  1. Set time clock.
    設定時鐘。
  2. Set sender’s identity.
    設定發送者的識別。

​​ Printer driver 影印機的驅動程式

  1. Do not install those provided by Windows.。
    不要安裝Windows 提供的。
  2. Install those provided by the printer companies.
    安裝打印機公司提供的。
  3. Copy the file saved in the “Installation Sources” folder in the server to the local computer, install, set to use A4, black and white, single sided and recycled paper, and delete the file after successful installation
    把存儲在伺服器”Installation Sources”檔案夾內的安裝檔抄到自己電腦,安裝,設定用A4、黑白、單面、再用紙,裝後刪除安裝檔。

​​ Protocol when answering phone calls 接聽電話的禮儀

  1. Answer first with company name or own name.
    先報上公司名稱或自已名稱。
  2. Pick up phone calls for other colleagues when they are not at their desk.
    當其他同事不在辦公桌前時,為他們接聽電話。
  3. Ask for the name, contact number, company and project name of the calling person and record on a paper.
    詢問來電人的姓名、聯繫電話、公司和項目名稱,並記錄在紙上。
  4. Take photo of the paper note and send immediately by WhatsApp to the colleagues intended to be called for follow-up.
    拍照紙上筆記,並立即通過 WhatsApp 發送給被找的同事跟進。​​​​​​​

(Updated 更新, 19/1/2023)

​​ Use of recycled paper 回收紙的使用

  1. Recycle paper which has been printed on one page only.
    回收再用僅打印在一頁的紙。
  2. Only recycle paper which is in good conditions and does not have stamped marks on the printed page visible on the blank page.
    僅回收狀況良好且在空白頁上不會見到打印頁上的印記的紙張。
  3. Use recycled paper to print emails and drafts not intended for sending out as hardcopies.
    使用回收紙打印不打算作為硬拷貝發送的電子郵件和草稿。
  4. Do not send out recycled paper to outside parties because it may contain confidential information.
    不要將回收紙發送給外方,因為它可能包含機密信息。
  5. Put recycled paper in the standby storage boxes and printer trays following the facing directions indicated at the standby storage boxes or printers.
    按照備用儲物箱或打印機上指示的朝向,將回收紙放入備用儲物箱和打印機托盤中。
  6. Inspect the recycled papers to be free of staples and in the correct directions before putting them in the printer trays.
    在將回收紙放入打印機紙盒之前,檢查回收紙是否沒有釘書釘並且方向正確。
  7. Put the recycled paper in the printer trays in such a way that the previously printed page will be on the back and upside down a後fter re-printing.
    將回收紙放入打印機托盤中,使之前打印的頁面在再打印後在背面倒置。
  8. Draw a diagonal line after re-printing on the last back page of such recycled paper.
    在再打印後在最後一頁畫一條對角線。
  9. Draw a diagonal line after re-printing on each of the previously printed pages not turned upside down .
    在再打印後在沒有倒置的舊打印頁的每頁畫一條對角線。
  10. Note that recycled pages which do not have the previously printed pages turned upside down will cause confusion when reading and when the document is to be scanned in the future.
    注意,沒有將舊打印的頁面倒置的回收紙會在閱讀時和將來掃描文檔時造成混亂。

(Added 添加, 30/7/2021)

(Updated 更新, 19/1/2023)

​​ Use of emails 電郵的使用

(Expanded 擴展, 7/7/2021)

(Updated 更新, 19/1/2023)

Generally
一般

  1. Follow the template for folder structure under the email Data folder to create new folder structure for new jobs.
    參照Data電郵夾下的電郵夾結構模板” template for folder structure” 的概念把所有工程的電郵夾分類及統一名稱。
  2. Do not print emails except when printed copies are required for use (particularly when drawings are to be printed for taking-off and colouring for evidence of taking-off).
    不要打印電郵,除非需要使用打印副本(特別是當需要打印圖紙以進行計量和著色以作為計量證據時)。
  3. Delete spam emails on sight, to reduce everybody’s abortive time to read (permanent clearance from the Deleted Items folder will be done by the Administrator).
    一見垃圾電郵就立刻刪除,以免人人都要花時間看(從刪除郵件夾永久刪除由管理員做)。
  4. Ignore all emails received from time to time calling for security verification regarding iTune, Apple ID, Microsoft, PayPal, HSBC, etc. since they are mostly malicious emails.
    千祈不要理會不時收到的關於iTune、 Apple ID、Microsoft、PayPal、HSBC 等等要人重新輸入認證的電郵,黑郵居多。
  5. Do not open or save attachments received from unknown persons, and do not click open links.
    不要打開或儲存來自不認識的人的附件,亦不要打開連結。

Sending emails
發送電子郵件

  1. bcc all outgoing emails back to our office.
    發出所有電郵時,密件抄送回自己公司。
  2. Check that the bcc copies are received by our office to prove that the outgoing server is working.
    檢查自己公司是否收到密件抄送副本,以證明發送伺服器正常工作。
  3. Check that there are no delivery failure message (should appear within 5 minutes) to prove that the delivery is successful.
    檢查沒有發送失敗消息(應在 5 分鐘內出現)以證明發送成功。
  4. Handle any delivery failure immediately by contacting the intended recipient for the proper address, and re-send with a remark "Re-sent due to delivery failure", cc all others on the original email to make them know.
    立即處理任何送達失敗,聯繫預期收件人以獲取正確地址,重新發送,註明“因送達失敗而重新發送”,並抄送原始電郵中的所有其他收件人以知會他們。
  5. For urgent email failed to be delivered after retry or failure to contact the intended recipient, fax the email copy to his/her company with a remark "Faxed due to email delivery failure" and the date. Email the front page back to the office.
    緊急電郵在重試後仍未能送達或未能聯繫到預期的收件人,將電郵副本傳真給他/她的公司,並註明“因電郵送達失敗而傳真”和日期。 將首頁通過電郵發回自己公司。
  6. Email source files (Word, Excel, etc.) back to our office after sending out pdf files. Mark at the beginning "Source files attached".發送 pdf 文件後,將源文件(Word、Excel 等),電郵發送回自己公司。 在開頭標記“附加的源文件”。

Correspondence not by emails
非電郵的來往文件

  1. All outgoing and incoming documents not sent by email should be emailed back to our office for the record on the same day.
    所有非通過電郵發送的來往文件應在同一天通過電郵發送回自己公司以資記錄。

 

Printing frequency (no longer adopted)
打印頻率(不再採用)

  1. Print all emails once every half-an-hour as far as possible.
    盡可能每半小時打印一次所有電郵。
  2. Print before lunch break all emails received before 12 am.
    午休前打印所有在上午 12 點之前收到的電郵。
  3. Print before close of a day's work all emails received before 5 pm.
    在一天的工作結束前打印下午 5 點之前收到的所有電郵。
  4. Print upon starting a day's work all emails received before that.
    在開始一天的工作時打印之前收到的所有電郵。

Persons responsible for filing emails
電郵歸檔負責人

  1. Be responsible for filing the softcopies of emails of their own projects.
  2. Assign more junior or newly joined staff members to file softcopies of emails for a team of staff members.
  3. Define filters.
  4. Clerical staff (if available):
  5. Assign a person as the final guard to remind all others to print their emails by the 12 am and 5 pm deadlines, and print all remaining emails not falling within the scope of the any particular team.
  6. The above principle still applies if a clerk is employed to do the printing.

Printing

  1. Print the newly received pages of the emails only, i.e., excluding linked pages of past emails which have been received before.
  2. Print on one-sided recycled paper. (One-sided printout will be easier for reading and future scanning for archiving.)
  3. Print on double-sided paper only when required by the surveyor responsible.
  4. Print the one with track-changes if both Word or Excel and pdf files are received.

Not to print

  1. ​​​​​​​Delete spam emails.
  2. Delete promotional emails not relevant to our industry, profession or business.
  3. Do not delete nor print promotional emails relevant to our industry, profession or business. File them under their relevant folders, if available, otherwise under "Sales Promotion".
  4. Permanent deletion from the Trash folders should only be made by the director.
  5. Do not print documents which are too thick, say more than 30 pages. Ask the surveyor responsible to see whether the thick documents should be printed.

Emailed copies of faxes

  1. Treat emailed copies of faxes similarly.
  2. Convert emailed copies of faxes to proper emails by forwarding each email with attached fax back to the office but stating a proper subject title and inserting an image of the first page in the email beforehand.

Documents sent through links

  1. Do not download from links sent by unknown senders for unknown purposes. Check with the senders if in doubt.
  2. Download ALL documents received through genuine links and and email them back to our office for the record.
  3. Email ALL documents sent out through links back to our office for the record.
  4. Split them into several emails if the file size is too large.

Emails attached to emails

  1. Save emails attached to an email received on to the computer desktop and move them back to the email folder. They will appear at the positions of their original email dates. This would enable reading the story in a chronological order, and easy tracing later.
  2. Print such emails like other emails.

Handling of printed emails

  1. When there are more than one attachment, identify whether they belong to one submission or several submissions each bearing its own serial number or date (e.g., letters, site memos, proposed variations, instructions, variation quotations, payments, minutes, regular reports, etc.).
  2. Separate between different submissions by staples or clips.
  3. Arrange different submissions according to the dates stated on them (not the dates received).
  4. Within the same submission, arrange the attachments in logical sequence, usually covering letter or site memo at the front and drawings at the back. Descriptive documents are usually in the middle. Summaries may be put before or after the details depending on the authors. Follow the specific contents page or the list of items stated in the email. Do not follow the order of the attachments to the email because they have no logical sequence.
  5. Fold thin A3 attachment (say, not exceeding 5 pages) forward from right to left along the centre line into A4 size, and then fold the top flap from left to right along the centre line into half A4 size. 
  6. Fold thick A3 attachment backward from right to left keeping the edge clear from the left punch holes.
  7. Stamp the date received on the top right hand corner of each separate submission received (but no need for different parts of the same submission which are not supposed to be taken out for use separately).
  8. Stamp the date received on the top right hand corner on each programme and on the bottom right hand corner on each drawing because they may be filed or taken out for use separately.
  9. Mark near the date chop the relevant instruction numbers.
  10. Stamp neatly and clearly at a blank space.
  11. Do not stamp on submissions emailed by our office unless they are returned with emails received.
  12. Write on the emails simple reference numbers and dates of those separate submissions which are filed not immediately after the relevant emails to enable future tracing.
  13. Initial neatly on the bottom left corners of the emails after arranging the emails and attachments.
  14. File the emails directly in the appropriate email sub-folders of the relevant projects.
  15. If the emails are printed by somebody other than the relevant team members, file the emails under the "00Printed" email folder for subsequent filing by the relevant team members. 
  16. Distribute the printed emails once every half-an-hour to the relevant project team members for reading.
  17. Circulate within the relevant team starting from the director to the assistant. If any person is absent, pass on to the next one present.
  18. Read and initial on the top right hand corners of the emails and the first pages of separate submissions.
  19. Take immediate actions as required by the emails.
  20. File the emails in the relevant hardcopy folder after all team members have read and initialled and when no further immediate action is required.
  21. File different submissions according to their dates even though those dates may be sometime in the past so that they can tell the complete story when the files are read sequentially sometime later. The date received stamp can help to trace that emails sending them though the submission and the email may be filed separately.​​​​​​

 

​​ Filing of letters and emails 信件和電郵的歸檔

  1. Create a separate folder section for each preliminary cost estimate, proposed instruction, confirmation of verbal instruction, formal instruction, other item to appear in the final account (e.g., group of provisional quantities, provisional sum), financial report, payment valuation, etc.
  2. Name the email folders or label the hardcopy folder flysheets by their serial numbers.
  3. If an email covers more than one folder section, email it back to the office with a note added to the subject so as to distinguish. Do not just make copies because identical copies will be deleted if a "remove duplicate" check is done.
  4. File requests for estimates and estimates under the proposed instruction folders. Move them to the formal instruction folders after the issuance of the formal instructions.
  5. Move confirmations of verbal instructions to the formal instruction folders after the issuance of the formal instructions.
  6. Change the folder or label names to reflect or track the move.
  7. File quotations and assessment related to a formal instruction under the same folder section, i.e., all matters related from cost estimate until agreement are to be filed together to tell the complete story.
  8. Spilt into more folders if an instruction covers more than one variation or final account item.
  9. Update the financial report descriptions and amounts to match whenever a new or revised quotation or assessment is received or issued.
  10. File communications with each tenderer separately. This is important for tracking the development, preparing the letter of award/intent, and contract binding.
  11. In principle, all incoming and outgoing documents in the email folders and hard copy folders should mirror each other, except for working documents not sent out.
  12. Bind tender documents as a book, not to be filed.

(Added 添加, 7/7/2021)

​​ Use of WhatsApp 短信的使用

  1. Read Company chat group regularly.
  2. Reply immediately upon receipt of messages relating to self or all people, whether within or outside office hours.
    在公司群組收到關於自已或關於全部人的短訊要即覆
  3. Report after completion of the task.
    在事件完成後要報告
  4. Delete messages after completion of the task.
  5. Learn from others' messages to avoid committing the same mistakes and to adopt good practice.
  6. Delete non-relevant messages not worth keeping.

​​ Revit

  1. Use the License Transfer Utility provided by Revit to transfer Standalone License from one computer to another computer without infringing the license
    使用Revit提供的許可證轉移工貝(License Transfer Utility)把單機許可證從一部電腦, 轉移到另一部機而不違反許可證
  2. Use Revit 2015 because some outside companies still use Revit 2013 or 2014 and models of new version cannot be converted back to older versions
    使用Revit 2015版,此乃因為外面有些公司仍只用Revit 2013或2014版,但新版本的模型不能改回舊
  3. Use Revit 2015 for trial
    2016版屬試用

​​ Documentary system 文書機制

  1. Use standard documents and templates
    使用標準檔、範本
  2. Implement file management
    執行檔案管理
  3. State file names, reference numbers, project names, contract names, subjects
    註明檔案名稱、編號、項目名稱、合同名稱、主旨
  4. State date of receipt or dispatch, and affix acknowledgement chop
    註明收發的日期及蓋簽收章
  5. Carry out internal check
    執行內部審核
  6. Double-check after printing
    列印後要覆核
  7. Double-check after calculating
    計算後要覆核
  8. Double-check after transferring figures
    搬移數字要覆核
  9. Check quantities and rates
    覆核數量、單價

​​ File compression 檔案壓縮

  • Set Winrar to use zip format to enable users who do not have Winrar to open (Windows file explorer can open zipped files)
    把Winrar 檔的格式設定為zip方便沒有Winrar的人打開(Windows file explorer可打開zipped 檔

​​ Generate pdf file from Word file 轉換 Word 檔成 pdf 檔

  • 按以下優先次序以減少檔案大小:
    • Print CutePDF (如有)
    • Print - Save as Adobe PDF (如有)
    • Print - Adobe PDF (如有)
    • xport
    • Save as

​​ Travelling expense 交通費

  • State the destination on all taxi fare receipts for the record
    在所有的士單據上列明目的地,以作記錄

​​ Use of toilets 衛生間的使用

  1. Use the toilet roll plastic wrapper after unwrapping as the base cushion to the toilet roll to avoid wetness and reduce dirt
    把廁紙膠套在剝除後用作廁紙的座墊,以便防濕及減髒
  2. Place a new roll as reserve when the toilet roll is about to be used up
    廁紙接近用完,主動取放一卷作後備

End of Page 

Hong Kong Quantity Surveyors and Mainland Cost Engineers 香港工料測量師及內地造價工程師

Hong Kong Quantity Surveyors and Mainland Cost Engineers 香港工料測量師及內地造價工程師 KCTang

Go to End

Note

18/2/2023: Updated.

11/3/2020: Updated.

20/12/2014: Moved from wiki.

Quantity Surveyor

  • Is a construction cost and contract consultant.
  • Originated in Britain as a profession.

Nicknames of Quantity Surveyor

  • cost engineer” as used in the mainland China and the USA.
  • construction cost manager” to recognize his expertise in managing construction costs.
  • construction contract specialist” to recognize his expertise in understanding the law of contracts, the standard forms of construction contracts, and giving advice accordingly to other project team members.
  • construction economist” to recognize his expertise in understanding construction cost factors, variables, and impacts.
  • risks manager” to recognize his ability to draft contract and cost clauses to present the risks clearly to help tenderers submit adequate prices, and reduce post contract surprise claims and disputes.
  • lubricant” (my own invention) to recognize his skill in providing fair and reasonable cost and contractual advice to resolve deadlocks which may exist between other project team members on opposite sides of the table.

Professional Bodies which include Quantity Surveyors and Cost Engineers (or their Professional Bodies) as Professional Members (not exhaustive)

  1. The Hong Kong Institute of Surveyors (HKIS)
  2. Africa Association of Quantity Surveyors (AAQS)
  3. Association for the Advancement of Cost Engineering International (AACE)
  4. Association of Cost Engineers (ACostE)
  5. Association of South African Quantity Surveyors (ASAQS)
  6. Australian Institute of Quantity Surveyors (AIQS)
  7. Brazilian Institute of Cost Engineers (IBEC)
  8. Building Surveyors Institute of Japan (BSIJ)
  9. Canadian Association of Consulting Quantity Surveyors (CACQS)
  10. Canadian Institute of Quantity Surveyors (CIQS)
  11. Chartered Institute of Building (CIOB)
  12. Chartered Institution of Civil Engineering Surveyors (ICES)
  13. China Cost Engineering Association (CCEA)
  14. Commonwealth Association of Surveying and Land Economy (CASLE)
  15. Conseil Européen des Economistes de la Construction (CEEC)
  16. Consejo General de la Arquitectura Técnica de España (CGATE)
  17. Dutch Association of Quantity Surveyors (NVBK)
  18. European Federation of Engineering Consultancy Associations (EFCA)
  19. Fédération Internationale des Géomètres (FIG)
  20. Fiji Institute of Quantity Surveyors (FIQS)
  21. Ghana Institution of Surveyors (GhIS)
  22. Ikatan Quantity Surveyor Indonesia (IQSI)
  23. Indian Institute of Quantity Surveyors (IIQS)
  24. Institute of Engineering and Technology (IET)
  25. Institute of Quantity Surveyors of Kenya (IQSK)
  26. Institute of Quantity Surveyors Sri Lanka (IQSSL)
  27. Institution of Civil Engineers (ICE)
  28. Institution of Surveyors of Kenya (ISK)
  29. Institution of Surveyors of Uganda (ISU)
  30. International Cost Engineering Council (ICEC)
  31. Italian Association for Total Cost Management (AICE)
  32. Korean Institution of Quantity Surveyors (KIQS)
  33. Fachverein für Management und Ökonomie im Bauwesen (maneco)
  34. New Zealand Institute of Quantity Surveyors (NZIQS)
  35. Nigerian Institute of Quantity Surveyors (NIQS)
  36. Pacific Association of Quantity Surveyors (PAQS)
  37. Philippine Institute of Certified Quantity Surveyors (PICQS)
  38. Property Institute of New Zealand (PINZ)
  39. Real Estate Institute of Botswana (REIB) Royal Institute of British Architects (RIBA)
  40. Royal Institution of Chartered Surveyors (RICS)
  41. Royal Institution of Surveyors Malaysia (RISM)
  42. Singapore Institute of Building Limited (SIBL)
  43. Singapore Institute of Surveyors and Valuers (SISV)
  44. Sociedad Mexicana de Ingeniería Económica, Financiera y de Costos (SMIEFC)
  45. Society of Chartered Surveyors Ireland (SCSI)
  46. Union Nationale des Economistes de la Construction (UNTEC)

Major Types of Employers of Quantity Surveyors in Hong Kong
香港顧問工料測量師的主要僱主類別

  • Consultant quantity surveying practices工料測量顧問公司(as directors, partners, or quantity surveyors of different grades).
  • Contractors 承建商(as directors, commercial managers, contract managers, quantity surveying managers, or quantity surveyors of different grades).
  • Government, quasi-government organizations, and tertiary educational institutions 政府、半官方機構、大專院校(as directors, project managers, or quantity surveyors of different grades).
  • Developers 發展商(as directors, project managers, and monitoring quantity surveyors of different grades).

Major Scope of Services of Consultant Quantity Surveyors in Hong Kong
香港顧問工料測量師的主要服務範圍

  • Preparation of pre-construction cost estimates.
    編訂概算
  • Cost planning during the design stage.
    設計階段造價控制
  • Preparation of tender documents.
    編訂招標文件
  • Pre-qualification of tenderers.
    投標單位預審
  • Tender analysis.
    審標
  • Tender negotiation.
    議標
  • Contract award.
    定標
  • Preparation of contract documents.
    編訂合同文件
  • Checking of insurance policies and performance bonds.
    審核保險單、履約保證書
  • Valuation of progress payment applications.
    審核進度款
  • Cost monitoring during the construction stage.
    施工階段造價控制
  • Valuation of amounts of variations and claims.
    審核變更費、索賠
  • Negotiation and agreement of final accounts.
    商議結算

Specialized Services of Some Consultant Quantity Surveyors in Hong Kong
香港某些顧問工料測量師的特別服務範圍

  • Claims consultancy.
    索賠顧問
  • Dispute resolution advisory, mediation and arbitration.
    解決爭議、調解、仲裁
  • Insurance loss adjustments.
    保險理賠
  • Facilities management.
    設施管理
  • Value management.
    價值工程
  • Partnering facilitation.
    促進夥伴關係

Areas of Specialization as written by HKIS

Characteristics of Consultant Quantity Surveyors in Hong Kong
香港顧問工料測量師的特色

  • Full services from inception of project to completion of construction and defects rectification.
    由項目構思到建造完成的全過程造價諮詢服務
  • Now extending to post completion maintenance until redevelopment.
    現在申延到建造後的維修直至重建
  • Dynamic management with constant review and updating.
    不斷檢討及更新的動態管理
  • Cost and contract management of various kinds.
    造價及合同管理多樣化
  • Self-regulated by professional bodies.
    自我約制(通過專業團體)
  • No Government control, though there is a Surveyors Registration Ordinance.
    沒有政府監管(雖然有測量師註冊條例)
  • Mainly handling contracts with Bills of Quantities, but also contracts without Bills of Quantities.
    主要處理有工程量清單的合同,但亦處理沒有工程量清單的合同

Major Scope of Services of Contractor Quantity Surveyors in Hong Kong
香港承建商的工料測量師的主要服務範圍

  • Similar to that described for Consultant Quantity Surveyors but starting from the tender stage.
    與顧問工料測量師的差不多但從投標階段開始
  • Essentially commercial and contract management for the contractors.
    主要負責承建商的商務及合同管理
  • Dealing with upstream clients and consultants.
    處理上游的委託方及顧問
  • Dealing with downstream sub-contractors, suppliers and workers.
    處理下游的分包商、供應商及工人

Surveyors Registration Ordinance

  • There is a Surveyors Registration Ordinance with a Surveyors Registration Board set up to register professional surveyors.
  • Surveyors so registered are entitled to be called “Registered Professional Surveyors” such as “Registered Professional Surveyors (Quantity Surveying)”.
  • Such title is required for undertaking outsourced Government projects but is not mandatory for civil servants or working on private projects.

Getting professionally qualified

Training Path of a Typical Consultant Quantity Surveyor

  • Join a consultant quantity surveying practice.
  • Check the arithmetic of calculations done by others.
  • Measure quantities for approximate cost estimates, bills of quantities, variations, and remeasurement.
  • Get to know the Standard Method of Measurement better throughout the process.
  • Get to know the geometric forms and names of the components making up the whole construction.
  • Draft bills of quantities for editing by the senior.
  • Participate in counter-checking the measurement done by team members.
  • Assist in monthly valuation of contractors’ payments.
  • Visit the site for the purposes of doing the valuation.
  • Assist in preparing monthly financial reports.
  • Accompany the senior to attend pre-contract design meeting or post contract site meetings.
  • Price the variations and remeasurement.
  • Price the approximate cost estimates and the bills of quantities.
  • Agree final accounts with the contractors.
  • Assist to prepare the comparison tables attached to tender reports.
  • Assist to checking the typo corrections of tender documents drafted by the senior.
  • Assist to draft tender documents.
  • Assist to comment on insurance policies and bonds.
  • Attend meetings independently.
  • Give advice on tendering procedure, contractual arrangement and choices of contract clauses.
  • Draft tender documents independently.
  • Interview tenderers.
  • Prepare tender reports independently.
  • Supervise assistants.
  • Perform independently.
  • Continue to give advice on post contract contractual issues.
  • Help avoid and resolve disputes.

Personal Attributes

  • Fair and reasonable – While Consultant Quantity Surveyors are engaged by their clients to protect the clients’ interest under the construction contract, they also have a duty under the construction contracts to act fairly and reasonably. Being fair and reasonable can in fact avoid unnecessary disputes under the construction contracts.
  • Integrity – Quantity Surveyors are dealing with money though no money is actually passing through him. However, any corruptive act would mean a huge sum of money lost by the clients or contractor-employers. Quantity Surveyors must serve with the highest degree of integrity.
  • Patience and persistence – Quantity Surveyors need to spend a long period of time to measure the quantities required for bills of quantities time and again. This would need patience and persistence to the task. Quantity Surveyors have to negotiate with contractors over contractual and monetary claims. Differences in opinions can lead to heated arguments. Patience is again very important.
  • Attention to details – Quantity Surveyors must be accurate in his words and cost figures. Great attention to details to ensure error free is a must. Self-checking and cross-checking are both essential.

(updated, 18/2/2023)

Core Skill-sets Required

  • Construction technology - Good knowledge of construction technology is the foundation stone of any surveyors.
  • Building services – While traditionally cost management of building services is handled by the building services engineers, for over 3 decades in Hong Kong Quantity Surveyors have already been providing measurement and cost management services for building services. Therefore a good knowledge of building services is also required.
  • Mathematics – Daily life mathematics is enough. Use of calculus is rare.
  • 3-D visualization – Quantity Surveyors should be able to visualize the 3-dimensional geometry based on 2-dimensional drawings.
  • Measurement – Good measurement knowledge and skill are the next higher level of foundation stone of Quantity Surveyors.
  • Language – Quantity Surveyors have to read many documents ranging from Standard Method of Measurement, Specifications, Forms of Contract, legal textbooks, occasionally case laws, insurance policies and bonds. Quantity Surveyors have to draft terms and conditions into the tender documents for construction contracts and loopholes must be avoided. Consultant Quantity Surveyors have to write to advise their clients and other members of the consultant teams. Contractors’ Quantity Surveyors must also be able to write properly to put forward the Contractors’ case. The language skills of Quantity Surveyors must be high in order to rise up the career ladder.
  • Use of computers and software – Quantity Surveyors have to know how to use the usual office automation software with proficiency.
  • Site visit – Quantity Surveyors should like to go to site periodically.

(updated, 18/2/2023)

Valued Added Skill-sets

  • Building Information Modelling – This is an important technology which must be learned and used by the present-day construction related professionals. Some Quantity Surveyors have developed special interest to realise the potential of BIM for Quantity Surveyors.
  • Software programming skills – While the majority of Quantity Surveyors do not have the need and therefore the aptitude to possess software programming skills, better use of BIM requires the knowledge to write scripts or programmes.
  • Digital transformation – Transforming and running the business work flow and deliverables in digital mode are the upcoming trend of all business sectors. Quantity Surveyors cannot fall behind.
  • Carbon emission reduction – Calculating carbon emissions and formulating carbon emission reduction measures will be the required upcoming skills of Quantity Surveyors.

(updated, 18/2/2023)

Types of Projects Involved

  • Public sector works and private sector works
  • Building and civil engineering works
  • New build, maintenance, alterations and additions, and renovation

Employment

  • Good Quantity Surveyors are always in good demand both by consultant quantity surveying practices and contractors and even big sub-contractors.
  • When the economy is booming with many new-build projects, Quantity Surveyors have to work a lot of overtime throughout the year. However, working overtime is common amongst the construction related professionals. The extent of overtime worked by Quantity Surveyors is not the worst as compared to other professions.
  • When the economy is bad, new-build projects will be less but people would spend money in maintenance, alterations and additions, and renovation. Final accounts for completed new-build projects are still to be settled. These offer a cushioning effect over the possible redundancy of Quantity Surveyors. Over the years with many recessions, Quantity Surveyors are less hard hit as compared with other construction related professionals.
  • Quantity Surveyors working for contractors will have higher pay.
  • Quantity Surveying graduates tend to choose to work for consultant quantity surveying practices first at a lower pay in order to gain training experience for the Assessment of Professional Competence. After getting qualified, they would have more choices.
  • In good times, consultant quantity surveying practices offer overtime pay. In the best time (not in recent years), the basic salary can become doubled.
  • Qualified Quantity Surveyors working for Government are on the same pay scale as other construction related professionals.

Where is the satisfaction?

  • Winning the trust of clients, being consulted frequently.
  • Problems solved.
  • Proper monitoring of prices, without unpleasant surprises to the clients.
  • Moving projects ahead to get through tendering.
  • Considered fair and reasonable by both the clients and the contractors.
  • Seeing projects constructed successfully.
  • Closing final accounts to all parties’ satisfaction.

Traditional Scope of Services of Cost Engineering Consultants in Mainland China (before 1990)
內地造價工程咨詢單位的傳統工作範圍(1990年前)

  • Preparation of pre-construction cost estimates, tender drawing cost estimates and final accounts, and usually as separate services.
    只做概算、預算及結算,而通常是分開的服務
  • Pre-construction cost estimates are done one or twice only, not following through the whole design stage.
    概算只做一、二次,不跟蹤整個設計階段
  • Not providing contract advisory services.
    不提供合同咨詢服務
  • Tender drawing cost estimates are usually for the client's reference for tender negotiation, not for tendering purposes and usually are subject to remeasurement when settling the final accounts.
    預算通常只是給委託方參考作為議標用,不作為招標用,而通常在結算時重算
  • Not providing contract advisory services.
    不提供合同咨詢服務
  • Not significantly involved in the tendering stage.
    招標階段不顯著參與
  • Not significantly involved in the construction stage.
    施工階段不顯著參與

Recent Scope of Services of Cost Engineering Consultants in Mainland China
內地造價工程咨詢單位的近年的工作範圍

  • Evolving progressively to provide full scope of services like Quantity Surveyors.
    陸續演變到好像工料測量師般提供全過程服務

Competitors
.競爭對手

  • Same profession:
    同專業
    • Local
      本地
    • Other provinces
      外省市
    • Foreign countries.
      國外
  • Other professions:
    不同專業
    • In-house employers of developers
      建設單位自有人員
    • Other professions within the same industry or outside.
      行裡行外的其他專業

Measures to Compete with Others
克服競爭對手的手法

  • Government policies, qualification requirements, tax - only applicable to the mainland China:
    政策、資質、稅收 - 只適用於內地
    • against: other provinces, foreign countries.
      對:外省市、國外
  • Customary practice, alliance, attachment - applicable to the mainland China:
    慣例、掛鈎、掛靠 - 適用於內地
    • against: local.
      對:本地
  • Capability, service contents, lower prices, integrity.
    實力、服務內容、平價、誠信

End of Page

Factors affecting Business Survival 影響企業生存的因素

Factors affecting Business Survival 影響企業生存的因素 KCTang

Go to End

Note

20/12/2014: Moved form wiki.

Favourable

  1. Professional competence
  2. Quality management
  3. Complaint avoidance
  4. Timely response
  5. High efficiency
  6. Innovation
  7. Integrity (this being listed last not because it is of the least importance but because it is a matter of course without saying)

Adverse

  • Professional negligence

End of Page

QS's Measures to Enhance Cost Effectiveness of Projects and Processes

QS's Measures to Enhance Cost Effectiveness of Projects and Processes KCTang

Go to End

Note

20/12/2014: Moved form wiki.

Estimating

  1. Provide early and quick advice on costs of preliminary design to avoid abortive design effort
  2. Provide early and quick advice on costs of alternative designs to select the better alternatives
  3. Participate actively in project meetings to voice out areas of design with possible imbalanced cost allocations
  4. Participate in value management workshops to evaluate different design options to enhance values of proposed designs
  5. Update the pre-construction cost estimates regularly in line with design development to ensure no uncontrolled budget overrun
  6. Advise on the cost implications of major changes likely to cause budget overrun to see whether the changes are justified and value for money
  7. Suggest savings to off-set unexpected changes contributing to budget overrun

Tender Documentation

  1. Suggest how the contracts should be packaged to give a proper balance between long lead time to complete design for the whole project, risks and hence higher tender prices to allow for long lag time to actually carry out some work sections, single line of responsibility, etc.
  2. Suggest how the design responsibilities should be shared between the Architect & Engineer and the Contractor to ensure proper share without undue high costs and unbearable risks while benefiting from the Contractor's design-and-build expertise
  3. Observe and follow the standard practice and procedures and use standard templates to reduce abortive work to team members in scrutinising the deliverables
  4. Request for the most up-to-date client's practice manuals, standard templates and house rules which may not yet be available on the web site yet to avoid abortive work
  5. Scrutinise the standard templates for preparing tender documents and make suitable amendments to reflect the project specifics to ensure that the tenderers are sufficiently alerted to when pricing the tenders
  6. Seek early approval on authority to use alternative standard provisions and on deviations from the mandatory standard provisions
  7. Check actively the tender drawings and tender specification to ensure sufficient details and no discrepancies, and request the Architect and Engineer to supplement and clarify accordingly
  8. Prepare the cost estimates and bills of quantities in good quality following a due process of quality control to eliminate chances of errors or omissions.
  9. Use provisional quantities or schedule of rates as a supplement to the bills of quantities in case the relevant design is not fixed and firm yet for tendering so to obtain rates for post contract pricing

Tender Analysis

  • Scrutinise the tenders received to ensure no irregularities in pricing

Post Contract Cost Contract

  1. Advise on the cost implications of every proposed variation as well as instruction involving expenditure of provisional items during construction
  2. Update the post contract cost reports regularly considering all variation instructions, expenditure of provisional items, claims, etc. to ensure no uncontrolled budget overrun
  3. Suggest savings to off-set unexpected changes contributing to budget overrun
  4. Value payments fairly and reasonably so as not to cause unfair and unnecessary cash flow burden on the Contractor, which will eventually result in higher final account claim
  5. Advise on proper contractual interpretation to fairly treat reasonable claims and resist unreasonable claims
  6. Suggest alternative solutions to help resolve problems encountered by the Contractor to avoid the problem to escalate into a cost claim without chance of mitigation
  7. Adopt the principle of mediation where parties should seek to achieve win-win situation instead of arguing over the rights and wrongs

End of Page

Development Cycle 建設流程

Development Cycle 建設流程 KCTang

Go to End

Note

  • 18/2/2023: Revised.
  • 17/3/2020: Revised.
  • 20/12/2014: Moved from wiki.

Varieties of construction project developments

  • Sectors:
    • Private sector
    • Public sector.
  • Types
    • Building works
    • Civil engineering works.
  • Site acquisition:
    • Leasing land
      租地
    • Purchasing buildings
      買樓
    • Renting buildings.
      租樓 
  • New or existing:
    • New development 
      新建
    • Redevelopment 
      重建
    • Conversion
      改造
    • Fitting out and renovation 
      翻新
    • Alterations, additions, repair, maintenance and renewal.
      改建、加建、维修、保養及更新
  • Purposes:
    • For self-use
    • For sales
    • For rental.

(revised, 18/2/2023)

Stages of design and construction

  • The names may vary between different countries or even within Hong Kong between different stakeholders.
  • Simplest classification: 
    • Feasibility study
      可行性研究
    • Planning approval 
      規劃許可
    • Design
      設計
    • Tender documentation
      招標文件
    • Tendering
      招投標
    • Construction
      施工
    • Defects rectification.
      修補
  • Sales and rental marketing run concurrently.
  • Occupancy / use / repair and maintenance after construction. 
    使用/維修保養

Pre-contract stage

  • The period before awarding a contract for construction, generally referring to the main contract but actually can refer to any separate contract.

Post contract stage

  • The period after awarding a contract for construction.

Post-completion or occupancy stage

  • The period after completion of construction.

Estate management / property management / facility management

  • "estate management" is an old UK term.
  • "property management" is a new term.
  • "facility management" appears to originate from the US, but is now more commonly used every where.
  • Such management starts to take over after completion of construction.

End of Page

Organization of Parties to Construction 建設組織架構

Organization of Parties to Construction 建設組織架構 KCTang

Go to End

Note

  • 18/2/2023: Revised.  
  • 28/2/2022: Revised.
  • 28/3/2021: Contracting hierarchy added.
  • 20/12/2014: Moved from wiki.

Usual contracting hierarchy

(Excluding those not directly related to construction.)
(The one at higher level is the buyer and the other at the immediate lower level is the seller.)

  • Developer / Employer / Client (contract terms in Hong Kong or the UK) / Owner (contract term in US):
    • Consultants and site supervisory staff
    • Contractor / Main Contractor / General Contractor / Head Contractor / Management Contractor:
      • Direct labour
      • Suppliers (Nominated / Domestic)
      • Sub-Contractors (Nominated / Domestic):
        • Direct labour or suppliers
        • Sub-sub-contractors (many tiers):
          • Direct labour and suppliers.
    • Other Separate Contractors and Suppliers
    • Statutory undertakers / public utility companies / government departments.

Developer / Owner / Employer
建設單位 / 業主 / 發包方

  1. Project Manager.
    項目經理
  2. Consultants:
    顧問團
    • Architect
      建築師
    • Structural Engineer
      結構工程師
    • Building Services Engineer / M&E Engineer
      屋宇設備工程師 / 機電工程師
    • Interior Designer
      室內設計師
    • Geotechnical Engineer
      地質工程師
    • Landscaping Architect
      園境師
    • Quantity Surveyor.
      工料測量師
  3. Clerk of Works / Building Services Inspector.
    現場監工 / 機電監工

Main Contractor
總承包方

  1. Sub-Contractors:
    分包方
    • Nominated
      指定
    • Domestic.
      自選
  2. Suppliers:
    供應商 / 供貨方
    • Nominated
      指定
    • Domestic.
      自選

Other Separate Contractors and Suppliers
其他獨立承包方及供應商

Statutory Undertakers and Public Utility Companies
法定承辦商及市政配套單位

Purchasers and Users
買家 / 用家

End of Page

Estimating and Pricing

Estimating and Pricing KCTang

Note

  • 20/2/2023: Split into various pages.
  • 18/2/2023: Revised.
  • 7/3/2022: Cost geometry and most significant cost parameters moved from Pre-Contract Cost Planning and Control.
  • 17/2/2021: Term contract edition updated.
  • 17/3/2020: Revised.
  • 26/2/2020: Revised.
  • 17/2/2020: Tender price indices links updated.
  • 20/12/2014: Moved from wiki.

Rates and Prices

Rates and Prices KCTang

Go to End

Note

  • 20/2/2023: Split from "Estimating and Pricing". Incorporating mark-up, margin, wastage, bulkage and shrinkage.

Cost and price

  1. Cost” and “Price” are often used interchangeably.
  2. Between the two parties to a transaction, the price quoted by the Seller / Contractor is the cost to the Buyer / Employer / Client.
  3. For the same party, Cost + Profit = Price.
  4. Seller's price = buyer's cost.

Values

  1. Values can be monetary prices or other benefits.
  2. Cost can also include non-monetary costs.

​​​​​​​Price build-up

  1. The total price is built up from:

          Labour costs (​人工費) 

+       Material costs (材料費)

+       Plant costs (機械費)                                                  

          Direct costs (直接費)

+       Site and project overheads (現場及項目管理費)

+       Head office overheads (公司管理費)                       

          Costs (成本)

+       Profit and risks allowance (利潤及風險費)           

          All-in price before value added tax (稅前綜合價)

+       Value added tax (從價稅)                                       

          All-in price (稅後綜合價)                                          

  1. The value added tax here means a tax chargeable upon the net total price before this tax or the gross total price after this tax. Hong Kong does not implement valued added tax. Hong Kong only charges profit tax on the realisable profit annually.
  2. Some of the site and project overheads are not directly related to a particular work item but are commonly shared by more than one item. It is normal to price for these site and project overheads as the Preliminaries. The all-in rate for the work item will then only include the balance of the site and project overheads not included in the Preliminaries.
  3. Profit and overheads are usually allowed for as a percentage of the direct costs. The usual norm for variation is 15%, but it will be very different in competitive tenders. The profit and overheads allowed in the prices for different items can be different.
  4. Some part of the Works may be sublet to sub-contractors. They will include their own overheads in their prices to the Contractor. They may also share to provide some of the site overheads otherwise provided by the Contractor. Therefore, the mark-up on sub-contractors' prices for profit and overheads should be less than that on direct labour and materials.

Mark-up and margin

  1. 100 x (1 + 15%) = 100 + 15 = 115:
    • 115 has a mark-up of 15%.
  2. 85 + 15 = 100:
    • 100 has a margin of 15%.
  3. 15/115 = 13.04%:
    • A mark-up of 15% is equal to a margin of 13.04%.
  4. 15/85 = 17.64%:
    • A margin of 15% is equal to a mark-up of 17.64%.

(revised, 18/2/2023)

Cost, price, profit, mark-up and margin

  1. Simple approach:
    • When we face with the above terms, what should be the mathematical formulae to handle them and how can we remember the formulae?
    • Instead of using x, y and z to represent the formulae, it would be easier to derive the formulae based on some simple numerical values using 100 as the base.
  2. cost + profit = price.
  3. profit markup % = profit / cost x 100%.
  4. profit margin % = profit / price x 100%.
  5. Given profit markup and price, how to get the cost?
  6. A long way:
    • Cost + cost * profit markup % = price
    • Cost * (1 + profit markup %) = price
    • Cost = price / (1 + profit markup %) = price x 100 / (100 + profit based on 100).
  7. A quicker way:
    • If cost = 100 and profit markup = 15%, then profit = 15 and price = 115
      • This means, cost = price x 100 / 115
    • If cost = 100 and profit markup = 10%, then profit = 10 and price = 110
      • This means, cost = price x 100 / 110
    • To conclude, if profit markup = P%, then cost = price x 100 / (100 + P).

% wastage

  1. If a finished qty of work of 100 requires a material qty of 120. The qty wasted is 20.
  2. Should the wastage be 20/100 = 20% or 20/120 = 16.67%?
  3. Both can be correct depending on which is used as the base.
  4. However, in pricing, when the payment is based on the finished qty, the qty wasted should be borne by the finished qty. 
  5. In the above example, the addition to cover the qty wasted is 20/100 = 20%, so the wastage should be 20%.
  6. If a 3 x 6 finished board requires a 4 x 8 uncut board, the wastage to be allowed is (4 x 8) / (3 x 6) - 1 = 32/18 - 1 = 77.78%.
  7. To conclude, the wastage to be allowed
    = qty wasted / finished qty
    = (qty used - finished qty) / finished qty
    = (qty used / finished qty) - 1.
  8. The denominator is the payable qty (finished qty).

% bulkage (excavation)

  1. How to allow for the extra volume to work on if payment is based on the volume before bulking?
  2. Bulkage or bulking factor = volume after bulking / volume before bulking.
  3. Volume after bulking = volume before bulking x bulkage.
  4. The addition to cover the extra volume is volume before bulking x bulkage. This should be simple.

% shrinkage (concrete, mortar, plaster, screed) or % compaction (soil backfilling)

  1. How to allow for shrinkage if payment is based on the quantity after shrinkage?
  2. If shrinkage = 20%, for each 100 qty, qty shrunk = 20, qty left = 80.
  3. The addition to cover the qty shrunk = 20/80 = 25%.
  4. If shrinkage = 30%, for each 100 qty, qty shrunk = 30, qty left = 70.
  5. The addition to cover the qty shrunk = 30/70 = 42.86%.
  6. If shrinkage = S%, then the addition factor = S/(100-S).
  7. The denominator is the payable qty (qty left).

All-in rates and unit of quantity

  1. All-in rate = all-in price / quantity.
  2. Not all the costs are directly proportional to the quantity of the work, it can be a combination of:
    • Variable costs
    • Fixed costs.
  3. Cost = f(weight) + f(volume) + f(area) + f(length) + f(number) + f(quality) + f(quality) + f(time) + f(others).
  4. When the total price of a work item is required to be broken down into quantity and rate, the unit of the quantity to be used should be one which represents the most cost significant variable.
  5. If there are more than one cost significant variable, then the work item should be broken down into more than one sub-item.
  6. It is usual and easier to estimate the cost of a bigger sample quantity of a work item first and divide the cost by the quantity to obtain the unit rate so that:
    • Those costs not directly related to the quantity of the work item can be shared
    • Wastage, laps, etc. which are not measured in the quantity can be allowed for.

(revised, 18/2/2023)

Rate build-up

  1. Labour costs:
    • Daily rates to include for:
      • daily basic wage
      • travelling and meal allowances
      • allowances for hand tools and personal accessories
      • allowances for holidays with pay
      • mandatory provident fund (MPF) contribution
      • year end bonus
      • incentive payments
      • levies and insurances if not priced separately
      • etc.
    • ​Time to consider:
      • taking from stores, hoisting, lowering
      • placing, fixing
      • non-productive travelling and recess time
      • etc.
  2. Material costs:
    • Rates to include for:
      • ex-factory costs, package
      • export transportation, transit insurance
      • customs clearance and duties
      • demurrage, off-site storage
      • local delivery
      • off-loading, returning package
      • etc.
    • Quantities to consider:
      • basic quantities
      • breakage, damage, theft
      • wastage (cutting, conversion)
      • unmeasured laps
      • bulkage, consolidation, shrinkage
      • etc. 
  3. Plant costs (called "Equipment costs" in civil engineering contracts): 
    • Rates to include:
      • Use of plant (not purchasing of plant)
      • Mobilization, relocation and demobilization costs, if not measured separately
      • Fuels and consumables
      • Maintenance and repair.
    • Time to consider:
      • Time used
      • Unavoidable idling time
      • Mobilization, relocation and demobilization time, if not measured separately.
  4. Site and project overheads
    • Expenses on site or off-site specifically due to the project, not specifically related to any particular group of work but are commonly shared.
  5. Head Office Overheads
    • Expenses in running the head office, shared between different concurrent projects.
  6. Profit
    • The expected profit with allowance for risks.
  7. Tax if charged based on total price (not in Hong Kong which implements profits tax on the realisable profit annually, not value added tax on turnover).
  8. Rates build-up applicable to measured work as well as preliminaries.

Tender pricing

See Tender Pricing for more details.

End of Page

Consultants' Cost Data

Consultants' Cost Data KCTang

Go to End

Note

  • 20/2/2023: Split from "Estimating and Pricing".
  • 18/2/2023: Revised.
  • 7/3/2022: Cost geometry and most significant cost parameters moved from Pre-Contract Cost Planning and Control.
  • 17/2/2021: Term contract edition updated.
  • 17/3/2020: Revised.
  • 26/2/2020: Revised.
  • 17/2/2020: Tender price indices links updated.
  • 20/12/2014: Moved from wiki.

Consultants' source of data

  1. Tenderers when tendering will get their cost data by making enquiries with their prospective sub-contractors and suppliers.
  2. Consultants may make enquiries with prospective contractors, sub-contractors and suppliers for cost data but may only be able to obtain some indicative budgetary prices which may differ from that obtained under circumstances of real business opportunity and competitive tendering.
  3. To evaluate whether tender prices received are reasonable market rates, other cost data not received for the same tender would need to be used to compare.
  4. Consultants would therefore rely more on past cost data for cost estimating and for evaluation of tenders.
  5. Consultants would know the rates and prices in tenders received but would not normally know the costs, profit and overheads in the tenders. It does not really matter when the Consultants are interested more on the all-in rates. The details of costs, profit and overheads are only essential when handling claims.
  6. When estimating composite rates covering more than one work item, the quantity ratios of the constituent work items would be important.
  7. Rates:
  8. Quantity factors and ratios:
    • Cost Analyses of Other Projects
    • Analyses by sampling.

Adjust for time differences

  1. There can be up or down fluctuations of costs and prices over time. When using past cost data for the present or future work, adjustments should be made for the time differences.
  2. Indices for adjusting for time differences:
    • Cost indices – reflecting labour and material costs
    • Tender price indices – reflecting prices of work
    • Consumer price indices – reflecting general consumer prices not just for the construction industry.
  3. Cost indices and tender price indices can change at different rates. Cost indices can rise but tender price indices may fall in case of severe competitive market lacking work.

Index references

  1. Census and Statistics Department - Index Numbers of the Costs of Labour and Materials used in Public Sector Construction Projects
  2. Census and Statistic Department - Average Wholesale Prices of Selected Building Materials
  3. Architectural Services Department - Building Works Tender Price Index
  4. Architectural Services Department - Building Services Tender Price Index
  5. Rider Levett Bucknall Construction Cost Update Hong Kong
  6. Arcadis Quarterly Construction Cost Review Hong Kong and China

End of Page

Cost Geometry 造價幾何

Cost Geometry 造價幾何 KCTang

Go to End

Note

  • 27/2/2023: Revised.
  • 20/2/2023: Split from "Estimating and Pricing".

Cost vs quantity

Not a straight-line relationship between costs and quantities

  1. Cost = f(weight) + f(volume) + f(area) + f(length) + f(number) + f(quality) + f(quality) + f(time) + f(others).
  2. But, the pricing unit of an item of work or material is based on one kind of unit of measurement.
  3. This means that all other costs not related to that unit have to be converted to use that unit as the base.
  4. These other cost factors do not change in direct proportion to the pricing unit.

​​​​​​​Total cost vs quantity

  1. The total cost of factory production (and therefore sales of materials and goods) does not increase in proportion to the increase in the quantity produced, since there are some initial fixed costs (e.g. factory, equipment, rental deposits) and recurring fixed costs (e.g. monthly rents, additional equipment when the existing capacity is exceeded) not in proportion to the quantity to be included.
  2. The total sales value may also not increase in proportion to the increase in the quantity sold (e.g. bulk discount, delivery vehicle not used to full capacity).
  3. The total cost is usually higher than the total sales value initially, but the total sales value must rise up to exceed the total cost eventually for the business to be viable.

Linear items

  1. For linear items, there can be fixed costs which do not change when the length changes.
  2. The unit rate per length can decrease if the length is increased without any change to the fixed components.
    • e.g. 10 m @ $4/m + 2 No. @ $5/No. = $40 + $10 = $50;
      • $50 / 10 m = $5.00/m;
    • while 15 m @ $4/m + 2 No. @ $5/No. = $60 + $10 = $70;
      • $70 / 15 m = $4.67/m.

(revised, 18/2/2023)

Superficial items

  1. For superficial items, the perimeter length increases less rapidly than the increase in the superficial area (300% vs 800% in the table below):
  2. The ratio of perimeter length / area decreases if the area is increased.
  3. This means the unit rate per superficial area would have the same effect.
  4. However, for the same area, the perimeter length can increase considerably if the shape is elongated:​​​​​​​​​​​​​​
  5. The shape is important.

Cubic items

  1. For cubic items, the rates of change of the side area and volume relative to the base area would depend on which dimension is changed:
    • ​​​​​​
  2. For the same height, the volume increases in proportion to the increase in the base area (i.e. fixed volume/base area), while the side area increases less rapidly resulting in a decrease in the side area/base area ratio:
  3. For the same base area, the side area and volume increase in proportion to the increase in the height (as shown in the graph below). Their rates of change are the same:
  4. If both the height and the base area are increased, the volume/base area will increase, but whether the side area/base area will increase or decrease will depend on the relative rates of changes of the height and the base area.
  5. In all cases, the unit cost and unit sales value should therefore not remain constant.
  6. The appropriate unit cost and unit sales value should be determined based on the quantity required, and suitably adjusted in case of changes in the quantity.

(table added, 27/2/2023)

Impact on unit cost and unit rate

  1. Making a unit rate competitive enough to secure sales volume and produce profit is important.
  2. Works or sales contracts usually require the unit rates to be fixed even though the quantities may be varied. If the variation is significant, there can be a huge loss or profit. Some contracts permit the adjustment of the unit rates in case of unexpected big changes.
  3. The quantity of any item of work can vary between different construction projects and how to estimate an appropriate unit rate is crucial.

Breakdown into more or less items

  1. It would be more expedient if less items need to be measured to arrive at the total cost or price.
  2. This means that the unit rate has to allow for the costs of other related items not measured separately.
  3. However, when the costs of other related items do not vary in proportion to the quantity of the item measured, the unit cost of the item measured would change significant to become unrealistic, then such other related items should be measured separately for costing.
  4. Therefore, the unit rates should only be required to include for related items which change in proportion to the quantity measured or for non cost significant ancillary items. Yet, significant changes to the quantity may still make the non cost significant ancillary items to become significant. This is an area for contractual claims.

Building form and shape

  1. Appreciate the effect of different site areas for the same building:​​​​​​​​​​​​
  2. Appreciate the effect of doubling the number of storeys:
  3. Appreciate the effect of elongating the building without increasing the floor area:
  4. ​​​​​​​Unit cost per floor area:
    • Construction costs are usually compared based on unit cost per floor area.
    • The above suggests that the unit cost per floor area cannot be a constant for the same type of buildings of different forms and shapes.
  5. Impact on design:
    • The relationship of number, length, area and volume is more important for the design of the building form and shape.
    • Whether a building is more economical or expensive than the other for the same floor area and type would primarily depend on the ratios of the numbers, lengths, areas and volumes of the building components to the floor areas, and then on the materials and standards.​​​​​​​​​​​

Most significant cost parameters

  1. Appreciate which cost portions should bear more direct proportions to each parameter:
    ​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​瞭解那部份的成本內容與那個造價參數有較直接的比例關係:​​​​​​​​​​​​​​
    • ​​​​​​​​​​​​​​
  2. Parameters:
    • Floor area (above ground + below ground)
      樓面面積
    • Ground area (= roof area)
      地面面積 (=屋面面積)
    • Transfer structure area
      轉換結構面積
    • External elevation area
      外立面面積
    • Basement screen wall area or more effectively basement volume of excavation
      地下室外牆面積或較有效的地下室土方體積
    • Site area
      工地面積
    • External area (site area - ground area)
      室外面積
    • Number of equipment
      台數
    • Refrigeration tonnage
      冷噸
    • Other elemental quantities.
      ​​​​​​​其他功能分部工程量。
  3. Quick cost estimating:
    • Using this small number of cost parameters can enable quick cost estimating.
  4. Accurate measurement:
    • The values (quantities) of those parameters which will be used extensively throughout a cost estimate should be accurately measured, unlike the general message here that the cost estimates should be approximate.

End of Page

Cost Factors

Cost Factors KCTang

Go to End

Note

  • 20/2/2023: Title changed.
  • 18/2/2023: Revised.
  • 3/3/2022: Modular integrated construction added.
  • 29/3/2021: Full stops added.
  • 2/3/2021: Revised.​​​​​​​
  • 17/3/2020: Created.​​​​​​​

Generally

  1. Cost factors may be asked from different perspectives at different stages:
    • Feasibility study before choosing site:
      • What type of development?
      • Which country and place to invest and develop?
      • Why cost differently between countries, places and sites?
    • Planning and design after fixing site:
      • What design, provisions, types, standards of the whole and its components?
      • Why cost differently?
    • Tendering:
      • Why tender prices so different?
    • Construction:
      • Why original contract sum changes?
  2. Cost factors generally:
    • Some factors affect the quantities, and therefore the total cost.
    • Some factors affect the unit cost per area or unit cost per length (e.g., roads, rails, tunnels, bridges, etc.).
    • Some factors affect the unit rate per quantity of work.
    • Price changes during the post contract stage are excluded here.
  3. Think and brainstorm:
    • The factors can equally apply to other industries or commercial or even social sectors.
    • Common sense knowledge is to be applied.
  4. Classify systematically:
    • There is no absolute answer to "which classification is the best?".
    • A systematic classification should help people think further systematically in the future and present the more relevant factors systematically depending on the perspective and stage.

(3 and 4 added, 2/3/2021)

No fixed prices

  1. One important thing to learn is that there is no fixed (constant) set of unit prices in any economy, as evidenced by the many factors suggested.
  2. Free market economies operate on free market competition of the prices. They would only regulate prices for using government services and some public utility services.
  3. The mainland, China used to fix a constant set of unit prices (by issuing standard price books) with moderate periodic inflationary adjustments but when foreign materials and equipment using foreign currencies are involved, the price fluctuations can become serious. After opening up the market, the mainland has admitted significant free market competition though some measures to regulate the prices are still implemented.
  4. Hong Kong operates as a free market economy. Therefore, there is no fixed set of unit prices for construction works. An exception to this is that Hong Kong Government publishes Schedule of Rates for term contract works. See notes at the end.

(Section added, 2/3/2021)

Reasons for variances in unit rates in the same city

  1. Even for work items of the same description, the rates can be quite different between projects due to various reasons.
  2. Design:
    • Functions
    • Materials and construction
    • Standard.
  3. Site location:
    • ​Transportation
    • Restrictions.
  4. Construction:
    • Project size
    • Extent of mechanization
    • Extent of standardization
    • Extent of repetition
    • Extent of pre-fabrication
    • Volume of bulk purchasing
    • ​Workmanship
    • Weather
    • Extent of safety measures
    • Extent of environmental protection measures.
  5. Economic environment:
    • Level of market competition
    • Exchange rates
    • Time differences.
  6. Contractual:
    • Degree of contractual risks
    • Harshness of contract terms
    • Payment terms
    • Degree of design liability and statutory submission obligations
    • Extent of warranties.
  7. Human factors:
    • Consultants’ attitude
    • Owners and occupiers’ attitude and co-operation
    • Tenderers’ pricing strategy in distributing the costs, profit and overheads differently across different work sections.

(Section added, 2/3/2021)

​​​​​​​Country (assuming putting a done design to a different country)

  1. Different planning and design regulations.
  2. Different environmental requirements.
  3. Different tax requirements.
  4. Planned economy or free market economy.
  5. Significance of government intervention.
  6. Different purchasing power of local currencies.
  7. Availability of foreign currencies.
  8. Availability of local supply of labour, materials, plant and management.
  9. Degree of reliance on foreign supply of labour, materials, plant and management.
  10. Different requirements on holidays and restriction on working hours.
  11. Different productivity of local labour.
  12. Different extent of availability of public roads and utilities.
  13. Different degree of ease of evacuation of existing occupiers.
  14. Significance of corruption.

Site location and conditions

  1. Extreme climatic conditions: hot, cold, frozen work period, typhoon.
  2. Seismic zones.
  3. Existing status of use: greenfield or brownfield.
  4. Existing type of use: urban, rural or agricultural.
  5. Existing site topography: flat, hilly, mountainous, offshore, etc.
  6. Ground conditions: soft, rocky, reclaimed, submerged, swampy.
  7. Obstructions underground and above-ground.
  8. Availability of public roads and utilities.
  9. Ease of evacuation of existing occupiers.
  10. Congested site or sufficient space for storage and maneuvering.

Planning and design

  1. Functional type of the building or civil engineering construction.
  2. Class and standard of the construction.
  3. Planning and design regulations for different sites and constructions.
  4. Environmental requirements.
  5. Structural form of the construction (brick, reinforced concrete, steel, timber, composite).
  6. Plan shape of the construction. (Different elevation area to floor area ratios. Square building costs less than rectangular building on external elevations.)
  7. Storey height. (Storey height will affect the vertical elements of the building both internally and externally. Higher storey height will increase the volume of the building to be heated or cooled, and therefore HVAC services.)
  8. Number of storeys. (Different shares of the roof and ground slab and beam costs. Need to have staircases for non-single storey buildings. Need to have lifts and refuge floors for tall buildings.)
  9. Height of the construction. (Heavier loading on taller buildings.)
  10. Orientation of the construction. (Thermal transmission on external surfaces. Use of sunlight.)
  11. Impact on neighbouring properties.
  12. Extent of provision of construction components.
  13. Functions, materials and quality of components.
  14. Extent of site works and external works shared by the main construction (affecting unit cost per area or length).

Economic environment

  1. Stability of economy.
  2. Forecast of cost fluctuations.
  3. Level of market competition.
  4. Exchange rates and their changes.
  5. Time differences (if compared between projects at different times).

Construction

  1. Project size.
  2. Period of construction and its reasonableness.
  3. Ease of transportation.
  4. Access restrictions.
  5. Changing labour, material and plant costs over time.
  6. Extent of plant required and availability of plant.
  7. Availability of supervisory staff.
  8. Extent of hoardings, covered walkways, scaffolding required.
  9. Extent of temporary works required.
  10. Extent of safety measures required during construction.
  11. Extent of environmental protection measures required during construction.
  12. Extent of mechanisation.
  13. Extent of standardisation.
  14. Extent of repetition.
  15. Extent of pre-fabrication.
  16. Volume of bulk purchasing.
  17. Workmanship expected.
  18. Weather which may be encountered.
  19. Availability of temporary water and electricity.
  20. Risks of safety, health, environmental hazards.
  21. Risks of changing government policies and neighbourhood and social expectations.

Contractual

  1. Procurement method.
  2. Degree of contractual risks.
  3. Harshness of contract terms.
  4. Payment terms.
  5. Degree of design liability and statutory submission obligations.
  6. Extent of insurances, bonds and warranties.

Tenderers' ability and perception (causing differences in tender rates)

  1. Labour, material and sub-contract costs which can be sourced at the time of tendering.
  2. Availability of plant.
  3. Availability of supervisory staff.
  4. Availability of expertise.
  5. Availability of sufficient cash flow or reliance on loans.
  6. Reasonableness of the period of construction.
  7. Consultants’ attitude.
  8. Owners and occupiers’ attitude and co-operation.
  9. Tenderers' profit expectations.
  10. Tenderers’ pricing strategy in distributing the costs, profit and overheads differently across different work sections.

How about modular integrated construction?

  1. Designers’ capabilities.
  2. Statutory requirements.
  3. Factory capabilities.
  4. Early involvement of contractors.
  5. Off-site costs, delivery and logistics, factory’s environmental impact.
  6. On-site storage, hoisting, special jointing, fixings, weatherproofing, fire-resistance.
  7. Shortened period of site overheads.
  8. Local environment impact.
  9. Local workers’ prospect.

End of Page

Pre-Contract Cost Planning and Control 施工合同前造價計劃和控制

Pre-Contract Cost Planning and Control 施工合同前造價計劃和控制 KCTang

Go to End

Note 註

  • 5/3/2023: IPMS revised. Various images updated.
  • 18/2/2023: Revised.
    修改。
  • 8/4/2022: Chinese version partially added. Minor adjustments made.
    添加了部分中文版。進行了細微調整。
  • 16/3/2022: Re-sequencing and minor corrections made.
    進行了重新排序和小幅修正。
  • 10/3/2022: Minor adjustments made.
    進行了細微調整。
  • 7/3/2022: ICMS split out on its own. Cost geometry and most significant cost parameters moved to "Estimating and Pricing".
    ICMS 分拆獨立。造價幾何和最重要的造價參數移至"估算和定價"。
  • 3/3/2022: Minor adjustments made.
    進行了細微調整。
  • 1/3/2022: Updated for ICMS 3 and IPMS.
    針對 ICMS 3 和 IPMS 進行了更新。
  • 23/2/2022: Minor adjustments made.
    進行了細微調整。
  • 18/3/2021: 9 sections added or revised. Punctuation style revised.
    添加或修改了 9 個部分。標點樣式修改。
  • 13/3/2020: Usual payment terms added.
    添加了通常的付款條件。
  • 26/2/2020: Minor adjustments made.
    進行了細微調整。
  • 20/12/2014: Moved from wiki.
    從 wiki 移來。

Pre-contract cost management 施工合同前的造價管理

  1. Principal cost management tasks during the pre-contract stage:
    施工合同前的主要造價管理任務:
    • Prepare cost estimates or cost plans
      編製估算概算或造價計劃
    • Prepare cash flow tables
      編製現金流量表
    • Attend design meetings
      參與設計會議
    • Monitor the design
      監控設計
    • Adjust the cost estimates and reconcile
      調整估算概算及解釋變化
    • Compare alternatives.
      比較備選方案。
  2. Estimate, plan, update and control.
    估計、計劃、更新和控制

Need for pre-construction cost estimates 為何需要施工前概算

  1. Know the costs for investment decisions:
    知道成本造價以作投資決定:
    • Calculate land bid price
      計算買地投標價
    • Calculate acceptable rental
      計算可接受的租金
    • Evaluate the feasibility of the investment.
      評估投資的可行性。
  2. Establish a project (development) budget.
    確定發展項目的投資預算。
  3. Obtain funding.
    獲取資助。
  4. Borrow money from the bank.
    從銀行借錢。
  5. Formulate a design brief which defines the scope and standard of the project.
    制定設計任務書以說明發展項目的範圍和標準。
  6. Monitor the design development to control the costs within budget.
    ​​​​​​​監控設計的深化以控制不超出投資預算。
  7. Estimate fees or review fee percentage.
    估算顧問費或覆核顧問費率。

Best time to plan and control the costs 計劃和控制造價的最佳時機

  1. As early as possible during the development process.
    在項目發展階段中越早越好。
  2. Better chances to make design changes to find a better solution.
    較有機會修改設計取得更好的方案。
  3. To reduce abortive design costs and time.
    減少設計返工成本和時間。

Ways to calculate cost estimates 計算造價估算的方法

  1. Techniques:
    • Estimates should be done using expedient methods, approximations and shortcuts to reduce estimating time and costs in order to afford more estimates.
  2. Methods:
    • By unit cost per floor area / length / number estimates
    • By measuring the most significant cost parameters
    • By measuring elemental quantities
    • By measuring approximate quantities
    • By pricing the bills of quantities ready for issuance or already issued for tendering.

​​​​​​​​​​​​​​Estimating mottos 四字真言

  1. From big to small.

    由大到小。

  2. From rough to fine.

    從粗到細。

  3. Focus on the important.

    重點出擊。

  4. Make bold assumptions.

    大膽假設。

  5. Verify carefully.

    小心求証。

  6. Compare with the unlike.

    觸類旁通。

  7. Conduct self-checking.

    自我覆核。

  8. Reconcile with the previous.

    瞻前顧後。

  9. Empathize with the Client.

    ​​​​​​​設身處地​​​​​​。

(gerunds changed to verbs, 8/4/2022)

​​​​​​​Different names of pre-construction cost estimates 概算的不同名稱

  1. Rough Indication of Costs ("RIC").
    大約估算。
  2. Preliminary Indication of Costs.
    初步估算指標。
  3. Preliminary Cost Estimates.
    概算。
  4. Elemental Cost Estimates.
    功能分部概算。
  5. Cost Plans.
    成本計畫。
  6. Cost Models (An American term).
    成本模型 (美式用詞)。
  7. Pre-tender Estimates.
    標底。

Budgets, cost estimates and cost plans

  1. Budget:
    • A budget is the maximum sum a Developer is willing and able to spend on a project.
  2. Cost estimate:
    • A cost estimate is a forecast of the probable ultimate cost based on the current design.
    • It is required to be done throughout the pre-construction stages as well as the construction stage until the estimated costs become fixed prices.
    • A cost estimate for now, if satisfactory and approved, will become the cost plan for the future design.
  3. Cost plan:
    • A cost plan is a detailed cost framework for controlling future design.
    • It sets out the portions of the total budget allocated to different parts of the construction so as to serve as the cost limits to the relevant parts of the construction.
    • It may just be based on some interpolation from the cost data of other projects or may be based on some detailed cost estimate specifically prepared for the relevant design.
    • It usually refers to the cost plan before the award of the principal contract. After that, the cost plan will be replaced with regular final statements.
  4. Rough indication of costs ("RIC"):
    • It is a kind of cost estimates. It may be just based on unit cost / number or unit cost / floor area or unit cost / other functional unit to be used in the feasibility study or early design stage based on some ideas or sketch designs
    • HK ArchSD still calls it "Rough Indication of Costs" when the estimate is still in the early stage though the details may be more than just based on unit cost per floor areas.
  5. Approximate estimate:
    • Approximate estimates should be done using expedient methods, approximations and shortcuts to reduce estimating time and costs in order to afford more estimates.
    • This principle should be applied to pre-construction cost estimates or post contract cost estimates.
  6. Detailed cost estimate:
    • It is a more detailed cost estimate prepared when the design is more developed.
    • "Detailed" refers to the number of items measured, rather than to the accuracies of the quantities estimated.
    • Some consultants call it "Preliminary Cost Estimate", and some call it "Cost Plan".
    • It may become the Budgetary Estimate if approved.
  7. Pre-tender estimate (按工程量清單計算標底):
    • A pre-tender estimate is no longer an approximate estimate and is prepared by pricing the bills of quantities ready for issuance or already issued for tendering.
  8. A logical sequence is like this:
    • Rough Indication of Costs => Detailed Cost Estimate => Cost Plan / Budgetary Estimate => Pre-tender Estimate.

(revised, 18/2/2023)

Elemental cost classifications

  1. Trade by trade classifications:
    • Pricing documents for tendering are usually arranged in trade by trade or works section orders or work breakdown structures according to the local standard method of measurement or local practice.
  2. Elemental cost classifications:
    • Instead of following the same order, pre-construction cost estimating in many countries (not all) adopt an elemental cost classification, which divides the costs of a construction project into various parts ("elements") each serving a specific function or common purpose such that the costs of alternatives serving the same function or purpose can be compared, evaluated and selected irrespective of their trades, works sections, design, specification, materials or construction.
  3. Classifying the costs of a building (or other construction) into elements would facilitate:​
    • Comparison of the costs of different design options serving the same elemental function
    • Comparison with costs of other projects by elements
    • Rationalizing the budget allocation between different elements for better use
    • Quicker estimating based on elemental quantities which are easier to measure
    • Analysis of data for different projects on the same basis and classification.
  4. Different elemental cost classifications in Hong Kong:
  5. Many other places outside Hong Kong also have their own elemental cost classification systems, e.g.:
  6. ICMS:

(revised, 5/3/2023)

Construction floor area and gross floor area in Hong Kong

  1. Different areas:
    • For costing, leasing and sales of buildings and related land, people usually have to refer to unit cost or price per floor area of the buildings as the most important controlling parameter.
    • However, there are many types of floor areas being defined for different purposes in Hong Kong or other places outside Hong Kong. An understanding of their possible differences is important.
  2. CFA:
    • Quantity Surveyors measure the construction floor area (CFA) in order to estimate the total construction cost of a building.
  3. GFA:
    • Lands leased by the Government in Hong Kong are subject to limitation on the gross floor areas (lease GFA) of the buildings which may be built on the land. Some of the construction floor area is not accountable for the lease GFA. The Lands Department is responsible for the control. Read the Lands Department's Practice Note on Accountable and Non-Accountable GFA under Lease at https://www.landsd.gov.hk/en/images/doc/1998_1A_text.pdf.
    • Building plans have to be submitted to the Buildings Department for approval and consent before construction. The gross floor areas (GFA) are also controlled by the Buildings Regulations. Read the Buildings Department's Practice Note on Calculation of Gross Floor Area and Non-accountable Gross Floor Area at https://www.bd.gov.hk/doc/en/resources/codes-and-references/practice-notes-and-circular-letters/pnap/APP/APP002.pdf.
    • The Lands Department's Practice Note says while the Lands Department is usually prepared to follow the Buildings Department's ruling in exemptions from GFA calculations, it reserves its right and absolute discretion to do otherwise in individual cases.
  4. Saleable area:

International Property Measurement Standards (IPMS)

  1. The International Property Measurement Standards at https://ipmsc.org/standards/ are intended to unify the rules of measurement of various kinds of floor areas for different types of buildings.
  2. A single harmonised standard covering All Buildings has been published on 15 January 2023 to supersede all previously published standards for individual asset classes.
  3. IPMS 1 (gross external floor area) and IPMS 2 (gross internal floor area) are referred to by ICMS.
  4. Read this and appreciate the diagrammatic illustration.
  5. CFA in Hong Kong is close to IPMS 1 with one exception: accessible rooftop terraces are included in IPMS 1 but not in Hong Kong CFA.

(revised, 18/2/2022, 5/3/2023)

Need for historical cost analyses

  1. Before talking about the cost estimates, it may be appropriate to talk about cost analyses first.
  2. Cost analyses are needed to:
    • Benchmark new projects
    • Provide cost data for new estimates
    • Provide cost parameters for new estimates​​​​​​​.

(revised, 18/2/2023)

Cost analyses

Example adopting ICMS

​​​​​​​​​​​​​​

(image updated, 5/3/2023)

Classify total costs

  1. A cost analysis analyses the awarded or final prices of a project and re-classify the costs following the same classification used for the cost estimates or cost plans.
  2. When classified in elemental format, the cost of each element or sub-element is summed up into a single line item.
  3. The cost is called “elemental cost” in Hong Kong.

Identify elemental quantities

  1. A single representative quantity is measured for that line item.
  2. The single quantity is called "elemental quantity" in Hong Kong. “representative” means that the quantity can best represent the cost changes in case of quantity changes.

Get elemental unit rates

  1. The cost of that cost item is then divided by the elemental quantity to give a single all-inclusive rate.
  2. The single all-inclusive rate is called "elemental unit rate" in Hong Kong.
  3. That means:
    • elemental cost / elemental quantity = elemental unit rate,
    • or
    • elemental quantity x elemental unit cost = element cost,
    • depending on the order of presenting the columns in table form.
  4. The elemental unit rates are very useful when the cost of a new project is required to be estimated before any detailed design is available.

Apply the elemental unit rates to new projects

  1. Elemental quantities can be measured for the new project and priced at elemental unit rates of the reference projects.
  2. There are not too many items of elemental quantities to be measured. The cost estimating process can therefore be very fast.
  3. Of course, the elemental unit rates may not be directly applicable to the new project.
  4. It should at least be adjusted for the changes in the price levels from the times it was applicable to the reference project to the time of the new project, and then for other changed factors.

Get quantity ratios or factors

  1. A cost analysis should also contains quantity ratios or factors such as:
    • elevation area : floor area
    • concrete volume per floor area
    • formwork area per concrete volume or floor area
    • rebar weight per concrete volume or floor area
    • etc.
  2. These quantity ratios can serve as useful references when estimating the costs of new projects.
  3. Apart from using the data in a cost analysis to estimate the cost of a new project in the absence of detailed design, the data can also be used to benchmark the cost of a new project after a more detailed cost estimate is done to ensure that the new project would not go out of order.
  4. Hong Kong Government uses this technique to control the costs of new project at the design stage.
  5. The Architectural Services Department has published a very detailed Project Cost Analysis Form.

Changes in cost and price levels

  1. Due to changes in the market conditions, the unit rates for exactly the same description of work may change over time.
  2. The market conditions may include fluctuations in the costs of labour, materials and plant, market competition, and other factors.
  3. Unit rates applicable in the past would need to be adjusted to the current level.
  4. Tender price or cost indices are therefore prepared to provide the adjustment factors.
  5. Their differences should be appreciated.
  6. Tender price indices and cost indices can fluctuate at different rates because price = cost + profit, and the price may increase less than the cost increase in order to secure projects or may increase more in case the market is full.

​​​​​​​(revised, 18/2/2023)

Different methods of approximate cost estimating 計算概算的方法

Different methods

  1. Unit method (common).
  2. Superficial method or area method (common).
  3. Cubic method (seldom used for buildings).
  4. Storey enclosure method (seldom used now).
  5. Elemental cost estimates (common):
    • Elemental quantity method
    • Approximate quantity method.
  6. Condensed elemental method using the most significant cost parameters.

Pre-tender estimate:

  1. A pre-tender estimate is no longer an approximate cost estimate and is prepared by pricing the bills of quantities ready for issuance or already issued for tendering.

Unit method (按功能單元個數計算)

  1. The estimated cost of a building is calculated based on the number of functional units provided by the building x unit cost per functional unit.
  2. ICMS has suggested the following functional units for buildings: number of occupants | number of bedrooms | number of hospital beds | number of hotel rooms | number of car parking spaces | number of classrooms | number of students | number of passengers | number of boarding gates.
  3. The unit method is a crude method serving as an early indication of the probable order of cost of the average building of the relevant type.
  4. It is not useful for forecasting with a high degree of accuracy the costs of newly proposed buildings of the same type because their designs can be very different.
  5. However, it may be used by clients and in particular government departments to serve as a cost yardstick controlling the budget of newly proposed projects.
  6. It is still also useful to serve a check that a unit cost per floor area may sound reasonable but, when expressed in unit cost per functional unit, the unit cost can be out of order because of excessive floor area per functional unit.

Superficial method or area method (按樓面積計算)

  1. The estimated cost of a building is calculated based on the floor area of the building x unit cost per floor area.
  2. This is the most commonly used method, possibly because the sales and rental prices are also expressed in unit cost per floor area.
  3. Note however that there are many definitions of "floor area". The same definition should be consistently applied.

Cubic method (seldom used for buildings) (按樓體積計算(現少用))

  1. The estimated cost of a building is calculated based on the volume of the building x unit cost per volume.
  2. In theory, the volume can take care of the different storey heights of the building.
  3. This is not commonly used probably because the floor areas are more readily available, and calculating the volumes would mean a further step to be done.
  4. The cubic method may be useful for site formation works or civil engineering works involving massive volume of work.

​​​​​​​Storey enclosure method (seldom used now) (按樓板及外殼面積加權計算(現少用)

  1. In essence, the estimated cost of a building is calculated based on the total of the weighted areas of bottom slabs (basement or ground), suspended floor slabs, roof slabs, and walls below and above ground x unit cost per total weighted area.
  2. Each type of slabs or walls are given different fixed weightings to reflect their relative ratios of costs.
  3. The calculation is much more complicated than the superficial method or the cubic method.
  4. With so many varieties of construction components and materials, whether the fixed weightings can truly reflect the relative ratios of costs is doubtful.
  5. This method is seldom used these days.
  6. Search the internet for details and examples.

(revised, 18/2/2023)

Elemental quantity method (按功能分部工程量計算)

  1. The building cost is classified into different elements (or Groups or Sub-Groups as used in ICMS as shown under the "Sections" column in the example below which follows ICMS classifications).
  2. Each element is represented by an appropriate elemental quantity which best represents the elemental cost (i.e., changing proportionally).
  3. It can be seen from the example below that the elemental quantities generally adopt the values of the most significant cost parameters discussed here and below.
  4. The estimated cost of a building is calculated based on the total of (elemental quantity x elemental unit rate).
  5. It takes into account the different forms, provisions and standard of the proposed new building better than the average unit cost per floor area.
  6. It is therefore a more accurate method than the superficial method.
  7. However, while the elemental quantities are simple to measure, the elemental unit rates would rely on reliable cost data from other projects or may need careful build-ups.
  8. This method should only be used at the early stage of design.
  9. At the time of the elemental quantity cost estimates, there would not be much details to measure approximate quantities and one has to rely on past cost analyses or some estimated quantity factors and ratios to estimate the elemental unit rates.
  10. The elemental unit rates, quantity factors and ratios should be critically reviewed to see whether they should remain unchanged or adjusted when the design of the building is changed even though the elemental quantities can remain unchanged.
  11. The price levels of past projects must be adjusted to the present day for use.

(image updated, 5/3/2023)

Approximate quantity method (按分項大約工程量計算)

  1. The estimated cost of a building is calculated based on the total of (approximate quantity of major item of work x unit rate per quantity of major item of work inclusive of costs of minor items):
  2. It does not usually show the elemental quantities and elemental unit rates just to save time.
  3. As the design is more developed, it is possible to measure the work constituting the building more accurately and apply more appropriate unit rates relevant to the materials and standard chosen.
  4. The quantities are approximate to reduce the time to measure so that a quicker cost estimate can be produced to reflect the updated cost of the design and enable any subsequent measures to control any unexpected costly design.

(image updated, 5/3/2023)

Condensed elemental method using the most significant cost parameters

  1. Users of the elemental quantity method may find that many elemental quantities are the same for different elements and can in fact be reduced into a few most significant cost parameters:​​​​​​​​​​​​
    • Floor area (above ground + below ground)
    • Ground area (= roof area)
    • Transfer structure area
    • External elevation area
    • Basement screen wall area or more effectively basement volume of excavation
    • Site area
    • External area (site area - ground area)
    • Number of equipment
    • Refrigeration tonnage
    • Other elemental quantities.
  2. The estimated cost of a building is calculated based on the total of (quantity of the above cost parameter x composite unit rate per quantity of cost parameter).
  3. This can provide a quick and equally reliable cost estimate though not as detailed as the elemental quantity cost estimate.

​​​​​​​​​​​​​Contents of cost estimates ​​​​​​​概算的內容

  1. Cover page:
    • Estimate Number
    • Project Name
    • Project Location
    • Estimate Date
    • List of Contents (if simple enough to list here)
    • Consultants’ Names.
  2. Contents page (for longer list)
  3. Grand Summary (in table form):
    ​​​​​​​大匯總:

    • Total Cost of Each Section of the Project
      建設項目每區域的總造價
    • Floor Area of Each Section
      每區域的樓面面積
    • Unit Cost per Floor Area.
      ​每區域的樓面面積的單價。
  4. Descriptions:
    編製說明:

    • Project Name
      項目名稱
    • Project Location
      項目地點
    • Scope of the Estimate
      估算範圍
    • Areas:
      面積:
      • Construction Floor Area / Covered Floor Area
        建築面積/有蓋樓面面積
      • Ground Area
        地面面積
      • Site Area
        地塊面積
      • Lease Gross Floor Area
        地契樓面面積
      • (Non-)Accountable GFA
        可豁面/不豁面地契樓面面積
      • Bay Window Area
        窗臺面積
    • Basis of the Estimate:
      估算依據:
      • Drawings used
        依據的圖紙
    • Price Levels:
      價格水準:
      • Current Prices
        現行價格
      • Fluctuations from Date of Preparing the Estimate to Tendering
        由編製到招標的價格浮動
      • Fluctuations from Tendering to Completion of Construction
        由招標到竣工的價格浮動
    • Outline Specification of Design and Materials
      分部設計及用料大綱
    • Finishes Schedule
      裝飾表
    • Exclusions.
      不包項目。
  5. Elemental Summary of each Section (in table form):
    每區域的功能分部匯總:

    • Floor Area of the Section
      該區域的樓面面積
    • Item Reference
      項目編碼
    • Total Cost of Each Element of the Section
      該區域的每功能分部總造價
    • Unit Cost per Floor Area
      每功能分部的樓面面積單價
    • % Proportion of each Element.
      每功能分部所占百分比。
  6. Detailed Build-up (Arranged by Elements or Cost Groups):
    ​​​​​​​​具體項目(按功能分部排列):

    • ​Item Reference
      ​​​​​​​編碼
    • Descriptions
      子目說明
    • Quantities (rounded off to tens or thousands)
      數量(拾位元或百位元整數)
    • Rates (rounded off to two significant figures)
      單價(兩個有效數字)
    • Extension (rounded off to ten thousands)
      合價(萬位元整數)
    • Elemental Totals
      功能分部總價
    • Possible additional information:
      可能的附加資料:

      • Elemental Quantities
        功能分部數量
      • Unit Costs per Elemental Quantities.
        ​功能分部單價。

​​​​​​​Adjust published unit costs per floor area

  1. Some Consultant QS firms publish unit costs per floor area for public information.
  2. When using these unit costs, care should be exercised to understand the scope of inclusions and exclusions, and their applicability.
  3. The General Practice Division of the Hong Kong Institute of Surveyors has published a Building Cost Pro-Forma for Private Sector Developments in Hong Kong.pdf.
  4. This should serve as a useful checklist, but the items and figures suggested there should be verified for individual projects.

Presentation of cost estimates

  1. Rounding off:
    • The quantities, unit rates and costs should be suitably rounded off.
  2. Word wrapping:
    • Text in table cells should be word-wrapped to avoid hiding of text at the end.
  3. Comparison tables:
    • When the cost estimates need to give comparison tables to show different options and the differences between options to help reading and appreciation of the relative costs, instead of showing all the columns of each option together, the columns can be re-arranged in the following sequence to save some space and enable easier reading:

Item

Section

Elemental Cost
HK$

Difference from Original HK$

Cost per m2 CFA
HK$

Remarks

Original

Option 1

Option 2

Option 1

Option 2

Original

Option 1

Option 2

Option 1

Option 2

Item

Section

Elemental Qty

Elemental Unit and Description

Elemental Unit Rate

Remarks

Original

Option 1

Option 2

Original

Option 1

Option 2

Option 1

Option 2

  • When spanning over more than one page, the Item and Section columns and column header rows should be repeated.
  • The contents under the Remarks columns can be very flexible, for adjustment methods, calculations, rationale, etc., subject only to space limitation.
  • The remarks can be “Assumed no change”, “Original qty x 2”, “Original rate x 1.2”, etc.
  • If there is not enough space, and the remarks are repeating, just insert “(a)”, “(b)”, “(c)”, in the Remarks columns, and define them below the table to mean:
    • Legend:
    • (a) Assumed no change
    • (b) Original qty x 2
    • (c) Original rate x 1.2 for higher rate due to complexity.
  • Instead of showing the quantity and rate adjustments separately, the adjustment can be made directly against the cost, such as:
    • Legend:
    • (a) Option 1 CFA / Original CFA = 2
    • (b) Original cost x 2
    • (c) Original cost x 2 x 1.2 for higher rate due to complexity
    • (d) Original cost x (new elemental qty / original elemental qty) x (new elemental unit rate / original elemental unit rate).
  • Example (d) can in fact save the need to show the columns for elemental qty, unit and unit rates.
  • The adjustment calculations can also cover inflationary factors.

Comments on specific ICMS Sub-Groups

Foundation piling

  1. Scope:
    • This Sub-Group includes all foundation piling underneath the building with or without basement.
  2. Elemental quantity:
    • Foundation piling supports the whole building.
    • Its costs are more related to the total construction floor area (CFA) of the building including the basement CFA, which should be used as the elemental quantity.
    • Elemental unit rate:
      • Equals to unit cost per construction floor area based on some similar projects.
  3. Approximate quantities:
    • The costs can be estimated, after consulting the Structural Engineer for a preliminary design, based on:
      • Piling plant mobilisation and demobilisation – Item
      • Piles – Number with each length/depth stated or total length/depth
      • Pile testing – Item.
    • It should be noted that the pile depths in ground and the pile core lengths are two different things.
    • All ancillary work not measured should be allowed for in the rates.

Foundations up to top of lowest floor slabs

  1. Scope:
    • This Sub-Group includes that shown in blue below (pile caps, footings, substructure columns and walls, and lowest floor slabs and beams) beyond the footprint of the basement, and excludes foundation piling.
    • Foundations (excluding piles) underneath the basement are usually integrated with the basement bottom and should therefore be included in the “Basement sides and bottom”.
    • Therefore, this Sub-Group's costs are not related to the basement footprint or the basement floor areas.
  2. Elemental quantity:
    • Pile caps, footings and substructure columns and walls, which support the whole building, are more related to the total CFA and building height.
    • Lowest floor slabs and beams are more related to the ground area (GA) of the building.
    • On the conservative side, the total CFA should be used as the elemental quantity to obtain the elemental unit rate for future references.
    • However, when applying this elemental unit rate to a building of significantly different building height and different CFA to GA ratio (approximately equal to the number of floors), the elemental unit rate can be broken into two parts for application.
    • For example, from the cost analysis of a reference building:
    • The unit rates at (a) and (d) can then be applied to the proposed building, subject to further adjustments for other dissimilarities.
    • Similar method can be adopted to split the elemental unit rates into different parts to handle those parts which do not vary in proportion to the elemental quantity.
  3. Approximate quantities:
    • For approximate quantity cost estimates, the costs can be, after consulting the Structural Engineer for a preliminary design, estimated based on:
      • Excavation (rates to include disposal) – volume of excavation from commencing level of excavation to bottom of blinding layer with allowance for working spaces beyond the volume of the concrete work
      • Lateral supports in the form of planking and strutting for shallow excavation – allowed for in the rates for excavation
      • Lateral supports in the form of planking and strutting for deep excavation – as described for “Basement sides and bottom”
      • Raft footings, pile caps, column bases, wall footings, strap beams and tie beams – concrete volume, formwork area and reinforcement weight
      • Substructure walls and columns – ditto
      • Lowest floor slabs and beams – ditto
      • Lift pits – number.
    • ICMS gives a good checklist of the above.
    • All ancillary work not measured should be allowed for in the rates.
    • The concrete member sizes can be based on the preliminary design drawings.
    • Simplification into approximate average sizes x number can speed up the measurement.
    • It may even be quicker to estimate the average thickness per the building footprint from the preliminary design drawings or from some reference projects of similar height or adjusted for the differences in heights.
    • Following the same logic, the composite elemental unit rate build-up can be as follows:
      • Average concrete thickness / building footprint @ $/m3
      • Average formwork area / building footprint @ $/m2
      • Average concrete thickness / building footprint x steel ratio kg/m3 concrete @ $/kg
      • Average excavation depth / building footprint @ $/m3
      • Sum of the above = composite rate / building footprint
    • Of course, the concrete thickness and steel ratio should have taken into account the building height.

Basement sides and bottom

  1. Scope:
    • This Sub-Group includes that shown in blue below (sides and bottom) of a basement and excavation for the basement, and excludes foundation piling.
  2. Elemental quantity:
    • This is a difficult Sub-Group for choosing the appropriate elemental unit because:
      • part of its costs is related to the volume of the basement (excavation, disposal, and shoring and strutting)
      • part related to the basement footprint (basement bottom)
      • part related to the side area (basement side and vertical retaining support which can be twice the basement depth).
    • The volume of the basement should be the best choice for use as the elemental quantity.
    • The basement floor area may also be a reflection of the volume.
    • However, it would be better to estimate the costs from a number of approximate quantities rather than a single elemental quantity.
  3. Approximate quantities:
    • For approximate quantity cost estimates, the costs can be, after consulting the Structural Engineer for a preliminary design, estimated based on:
      • Excavation (rates to include disposal) – volume of excavation from commencing level of excavation to bottom of blinding layer with allowance for working spaces beyond the volume of the concrete work
      • Vertical lateral support – area of excavated surfaces retained (from commencing level of excavation to bottom of blinding layer) x 2 or more to account for the embedded depth below the blinding layer
      • Horizontal or raking shoring to lateral support - area of excavated surfaces retained (suitable for raking shoring) or volume of excavation (suitable for flying shoring, i.e. horizontal shoring spanning across the whole site with intermediate vertical posts to support), unless more detailed measurement is used
      • Bottom slabs and blinding (including all foundations underneath but excluding piles) – concrete volume, formwork area and reinforcement weight
      • Basement sides – area
      • Vertical waterproof tanking, drainage blanket, drains and skin wall – area of tanking
      • Horizontal waterproof tanking, drainage blanket, drains and topping slab – area of tanking
      • Insulation – area
      • Lift pits, sump pits, sleeves – number of lift pits and sump pits.
    • ICMS gives a good checklist of the above.
    • All ancillary work not measured should be allowed for in the rates.
    • The concrete member sizes can be based on the average thicknesses from the preliminary design drawings or from some reference projects of similar height or adjusted for the differences in heights.
    • Simpler cost build-up can take the following form:
      • Volume of excavation – composite rates to cover excavation, disposal, and horizontal or raking shoring per m3 of excavation
      • Area of basement bottom – composite rates to cover all horizontal elements, with different ratios per basement bottom area to account for different elements
      • Area of basement sides – composite rates to cover all vertical elements, with different ratios per basement side area to account for different elements
      • Lump sum – to cover other standalone elements.

​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​Basement suspended floors (up to top of ground floor slabs)

  1. Scope:
    • This Sub-Group includes all structural walls and columns, beams, slabs and staircases inside the basement, but excludes basement sides and bottom.
  2. Elemental quantity:
    • The elemental quantity should be the CFA of the basement.
    • Elemental unit rate build-up (per basement CFA):
      • Similar to that for the "Frames and slabs".

Frames and slabs (above top of ground floor slabs)

  1. Scope
    • This Sub-Group includes all structural walls and columns, beams, slabs and staircases above the top of ground floor slabs.
  2. Elemental quantity
    • The elemental quantity should be the CFA above ground, not the total CFA including the basement CFA.
    • Elemental unit rate build-up (per CFA above ground):
Concrete m3 concrete / m2 floor area @ $/m3
Formwork m2 formwork / m2 floor area @ $/m2
Reinforcement

kg reinforcement / m3 concrete

x m3 concrete / m2 floor area

or

kg reinforcement / m2 floor area

@ $/kg
  • The quantity ratios are usually based on some similar projects or by sampling based on a typical bay.

Roof beams and slabs for Buildings under "Structure"

  1. Scope:
    • Roofs can occur at the top of buildings or at lower floors. Any suspended floor without cover above is considered as a roof.
    • “roof beams and slabs” for Buildings should also include such roofs at the top or at lower floors.
    • In principle, the roof area on plan at various levels should be equal to the projected building footprint area on plan.
      • ​​​​​​​
  2. Elemental quantity:
    • The elemental quantity should be the roof area if roof beams and slabs are separately estimated.
    • Otherwise, it should be part of the total CFA including the basement CFA.

External elevations

  1. Scope:
    • This Sub-Group includes all external walls including applied finishes, cladding, curtain walls, windows, doors, shop fronts and shutters on the external elevations, but excludes external structural walls.
  2. Elemental quantity:
    • The elemental quantity should be the external elevation area.
    • ICMS defines it as "total area of external wall finishes, facade cladding and curtain walls, windows, doors, shop fronts, roller shutters, fire shutters, etc. on the external elevations including all surfaces of

      external railings, parapets and features, but ignoring the presence of canopies".

    • Elemental unit rate build-up (per elevation area):
Aluminium windows a% elevation area @ $/m2
Finishes on structural walls, columns and beams b% elevation area @ $/m2
External non-structural walls and finishes c% elevation area @ $/m2
Roller shutters d% elevation area @ $/m2
  • a%+b%+c%+d% = 100% elevation area.
  • The percentages are approximate proportions of the total external elevation area of a sampled section of the elevation.

Roof finishes, skylights and landscaping (including waterproofing and insulation)

  1. Scope:
    • This Sub-Group include those to such roofs at the top or at lower floors.
  2. Elemental quantity:
    • Roof area
    • Element unit rate build-up:
      • Similar to other Sub-Groups.

Internal divisions

  1. Scope:
    • This Sub-Group includes ​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​all kinds of divisions including internal windows, doors and shutters.
  2. Elemental quantity:
    • The elemental quantity can be the total CFA including the basement CFA.
    • Element unit rate build-up (per CFA):
Internal non-structural concrete walls m2 walls / m2 floor area @ $/m2
Internal brick walls m2 walls / m2 floor area @ $/m2
Doors No. of doors / m2 floor area @ $/No.
etc.    
  • The quantity factors are based on a similar project or approximate wall areas per construction floor area of a sampled floor, which layout may be just an educated guess.
  • The wall areas have door openings deducted.
  • The elemental quantity can also be the total wall areas without deducting door openings
  • The elemental unit rate build-up will then be (per total wall area):

Internal non-structural concrete walls a% of wall area @ $/m2
Internal brick walls b% of wall area @ $/m2
Extra for doors No. of doors / m2 wall area @ $/No.#
etc.    
  • a% + b% = 100%.
  • # = after deducting cost of wall.
  • The percentages are approximate proportions of the total wall area of a sampled floor, which layout may be just an educated guess.

Fittings and sundries

  1. Scope
    • This Sub-Group basically includes all the metal work and joinery, and interior landscaping.
  2. Elemental quantity
    • The elemental quantity can be the total CFA including the basement CFA, or the relevant functional quantity.
    • Elemental unit rate:
      • Generally based on similar projects.

Finishes under cover

  1. Scope
    • This Sub-Group includes all floor and ceiling finishes and false ceilings whether internal or external, and internal wall finishes and cladding.
  2. Elemental quantity
    • The elemental quantity can be the total CFA including the basement CFA.
    • Elemental unit rate build-up of floor finishes (internal and external) (per CFA):
Floor finish A a% of floor area / CFA @ $/m2
Floor finish B b% of floor area / CFA @ $/m2
Floor finish C c% of floor area / CFA @ $/m2
Add 10% for skirting    
  • a%+b%+c% = an estimated percentage of floor area / CFA after deducting voids, and wall and column base areas, i.e. less than 100% of CFA.
  • Elemental unit rate build-up of internal wall finishes and cladding (per CFA):

Wall finish A a% of wall area / CFA @ $/m2
Wall finish B b% of wall area / CFA @ $/m2
Wall finish C c% of wall area / CFA @ $/m2
  • The quantity factors are based on a similar project or approximate internal wall finishes areas per CFA of a sampled floor, which layout may be just an educated guess.
  • Note the approximate formula: internal wall finishes = internal wall area x 2 + external wall area.
  • False ceiling voids and unfinished lift shafts would affect this formula.
  • Elemental unit rate build-up of ceiling finishes and false ceilings (internal and external) (per CFA):

Ceiling finish A a% of ceiling area / CFA @ $/m2
Ceiling finish B b% of ceiling area / CFA @ $/m2
Ceiling finish C c% of ceiling area / CFA @ $/m2
  • a%+b%+c% = an estimated percentage of the ceiling area / CFA after deducting voids, and wall and column areas, but adding beam sides, i.e. more than 100% of CFA.

Services and equipment

  1. The costs of services and equipment are generally estimated based on $/CFA for each sub-system.
  2. If part of the building is not served by a sub-system, the CFA used may be only the area served.
  3. In the case of toilets and kitchens, the estimate may be based on the number of toilets and kitchens.
  4. For a more detailed cost analysis or cost estimate, the costs can be broken down into the following portions:
    • Costs related to main equipment (chillers, cooling towers, air handling units, transformers, boilers, etc.)
    • Costs related to terminal service outlets (air grilles, diffusers, lighting points, power points, sprinklers, speakers, cameras, sanitary fittings, etc.)
    • Costs related vertical up-feed and down-feed
    • Costs related to horizontal distribution
    • Costs related to isolated locations (e.g. toilets, kitchens, plant rooms, etc.).

Movement systems

  1. While using the CFA as the elemental quantity for movement systems cannot be treated as wrong particularly when the CFA is big and there are many lifts and escalators, the cost should better be estimated based on cost per number of lift or escalator.

Elemental quantities based on % of other costs

  1. It would be more appropriate to use % of other costs (base costs) as the elemental quantities to allow for preliminaries and risk allowances as the base costs may change when the CFAs remain the same.

Steel ratios

  1. The steel ratios of structural walls and columns should be bigger than those for beams and slabs.

Unit cost / CFA of taller buildings

  1. The $/CFA of foundations, substructure and structure should be higher for taller buildings because of increased loading on the lower floors and increased wind load.
  2. The $/CFA of services and equipment should be higher for taller buildings because of longer running lengths of vertical pipes and cables, and increased lift speeds and capacities.
  3. Refuge floor would need to be added.
  4. Taller buildings take longer times to complete, causing higher unit rates and higher preliminaries costs. While it is usual to use the same % for preliminaries for different projects, when carrying out comparative cost studies for buildings with very different construction periods, the % should reflect the differences. Instead of adjusting all the unit rates, it may as well be simpler to adjust only the preliminaries to also cover the higher unit rates.

Composite rates for approximate quantities ​​​組合單價的測算

Composite items

  1. The approximate quantity method measures major work items as composite items so as to reduce the need and time to break down the work items into components for detailed measurement.
  2. Examples are:
    • lump sum allowances for mobilisation and demobilisation of major construction plant
    • m or No. piles of specific cross-sectional size
    • m3 excavation including disposal (backfill or remove from site)
    • m2 or m concrete members including formwork and reinforcement
    • m2 brick or block work including lintols
    • m2 cladding or curtain walls or window walls or windows including glazing
    • m or No. extra over m2 or m for special features
    • No. doors including frames, architraves, fixings, glazing, painting, fire rating, etc.
    • No. of major metal or joinery fittings
    • m2 roof finishes including surface layer, protective screed, waterproofing layer, levelling screed, insulation, etc.
    • m2 rendering including surface treatment
    • m2 plastering including painting
    • m2 tiling including screeding
    • No. of vertical stacks of water supply or disposal pipes including all pipe fittings and ancillaries
    • No. of kitchens or bath rooms or other serviced rooms including all sanitary fittings and branches
    • No. of sanitary fittings including all accessories
    • No. of terminal M&E fittings including conduits or wiring or cables
    • No. of main M&E equipment
    • m conduits or wiring or cables
    • m2 ducts
    • lump sum allowances for sundries
    • lump sum for or No. of costly tests
  3. Different sizes or types may be separated or grouped together depending on their cost significance.
  4. Average sizes may be stated or varying sizes deemed.

Composite rates

  1. Building up of composite rates would be required for such composite items.
  2. Buffers should be allowed in the approximate quantities and composite rates to cover the costs of unmeasured minor items.

Using BIM

  • When preliminary BIM models are used to generate quantities for preparing cost estimates, the quantities would not reflect the work items not modelled. Extra allowances in the approximate quantities or the composite rates should be made to cover the costs of unmodelled but necessary items.

Build-up of composite rates using properly set out dimension tables

  1. The following gives examples of composite items and build-ups of composite rates.​​​​​​​
  2. Example 1:
    • ​​​​​Note that in Hong Kong, beam concrete and formwork are measured those parts below slab soffit. Beam reinforcement includes those at the intersection of slab and beam.
  3. Example 2:
    • ​​​​​​​​​
    • Note that a typical bay of 6 x 6 m is measured to average out the beam quantities.
    • Note also that the four beams around each typical bay are shared with adjacent slabs, and their quantities are therefore halved.
  4. Example 3:
    • ​​​​​​​
  5. Example 4:

(first image added, 18/2/2023)

Handling empty cells instead of entering “1”

  1. Note that 36.00 at cell I46 uses the formula: "=PRODUCT(C48:H48)" which can treat empty cells within the range of C48:H48 as 1 without the need for entering 1.
  2. However, if the individual cell values within the range of C48:H48 contain more than 2 decimal places, the PRODUCT() function using the hidden values will not give the same result as the displayed value. To ensure proper match, a formula based on the displayed values should be used. Such accuracy would be required for Bills of Quantities and Final Account and should not be needed for Cost Estimates.

(added, 5/3/2023)

Using dash lines to bound ranges

  • Note that 65,917 at cell L46 uses the formula "=SUM(L47:L54)" which covers the range from the upper dash line to the lower dash line. Those dash lines embrace the rows of constituent items between them and ensure that the formula will not be corrupted due to addition or deletion of rows.

(added, 5/3/2023)

Round unit rates to 2 significant digits

  1. Note that 1,900 = 65,917/36.00 = 1,831.03 has been rounded up to two significant digits as 1,900.
  2. The formula used is "=IF(INT(L46/I46)>0,ROUNDUP(L46/I46,2-LEN(INT(L46/I46))),ROUNDUP(L46/I46,2))".
  3. L46/I46 is the quotient. Let's call it "Q".
  4. The formula will become "=IF(INT(Q)>0,ROUNDUP(Q,2-LEN(INT(Q))),ROUNDUP(Q,2))".
  5. It can be read as: if integer of Q > 0, then round it to 2 significant digits, else round up Q to 2 decimal places).
  6. INT(Q) = 1831.03, it is > 0.
  7. 2 - LEN(INT(Q)) = 2 - 4 = -2.
  8. ROUNDUP(1831.03, -2) = 1900.
  9. If Q = 0.1234, then ROUNDUP(Q, 2) = 0.13.
  10. The unit rates used in Cost Estimates are approximate rates.
  11. It would not make sense to show them in many digits and with decimal places to make them look like very accurate.
  12. 2 significant digits should be sufficient.
  13. Estimates should include buffers.
  14. Rounding up is appropriate.

(added, 5//3/2023)

Build-up of composite rates using compact format for showing in the Cost Estimate

  1. The following shows another method to present the composite rate calculations in the Cost Estimate.
  2. Example 5:
    • Note that the reinforcement refers to the concrete quantities already calculated at cells E15 and E23 above.
  3. Example 6:
    • Note that the function FORMULATEXT() is used to display the formula of the quantity of 0.48 above for checking. The cell entry must be preceded with "=" for it to be recognised as a formula.
    • Using this function will eliminate the need to type the formula separately as an explanation in addition to entering the formula in the calculation cell and risking mismatch errors.
    • The formula column can be hidden or deleted when issuing the Cost Estimate.
    • Note also that the estimated costs have been rounded to the nearest 10,000, using the formula "=ROUND(Rate*Qty, -4)".
    • This would give the image that the figure is an approximate estimate rather than an accurate figure.
  4. Example 7:
  5. Example 8:
  6. Example 9:
    • ​​​​​​​​​​​​​​
  7. Example 10:

Prepare cash flow tables 編製現金流量表

Use S-curve 用S線圖

​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​

  1. ​​​​​​​​​​​​​​Divide the horizontal axis into parts equal to the number of months of construction.
    ​​​​​​​將水平軸按施工的月份數目分段
  2. For each month, interpolate from the curve the cumulative payment percentage on the vertical axis.
    利用曲線找出每個月在垂直軸相對的累計進度百份率
  3. Find the monthly payment percentages from the cumulative percentages.
    用累計進度百份率計出每月進度百份率
  4. Apply the monthly payment percentages to the total cost to obtain the monthly payment values.
    每月進度百份率乘總造價得出每月進度款。

Use Bar Chart Programmes 用條形進度計畫表

  1. Follow the bar chart programme, assign the monthly payment percentages for each activity bar.
    跟從條形進度計企劃表,對每條活動配以每月進度百份率
  2. Apply the monthly payment percentages to the total cost of each activity bar to obtain the monthly payment values.
    將每月進度百份率乘該條活動的造價得出每月進度款
  3. Ensure that the total of each activity bar is correct.
    確保每條活動的合計無誤。

For both methods

  1. Separate stage payments.
    要把分期付款及大型採購分列
  2. Separate Retention.
    要把保修金分列
  3. Watch out time lag between work carried out, payment certification and honouring of payment.
    注意施工、批款及付款的時間差。
  4. Payment terms:

    • Usual payment terms for construction contracts in Hong Kong:
      • no advance payment;
      • monthly payments for materials delivered to site and work done subject to 10% retention on the gross total up to a maximum equal to 5% of the original Contract Sum;
      • half of the retention to be released upon Practical Completion / Substantial Completion (*); and
      • the balance to be released upon the issue of the Defects Rectification Certificate / Certificate of Completion of Making Good Defects / Maintenance Certificate (*) after rectification of defects found during the Defects Liability Period / Maintenance Period (*) usually of 12 months.
      • (*) = Different terms used by different standard forms of contract.
    • Possible payment terms for lift and escalator contracts / sub-contracts:
      • 10% upon award;
      • 20% when ready for shipment;
      • 30% on delivery to site;
      • 25% on issue of Use Permit by the EMSD;
      • 10% on Practical Completion / Substantial Completion; and
      • balance upon the issue of the Defects Rectification Certificate (as above).
    • Suppliers:
      • Usually require deposits or advance payments which can be moderately up to 30% or sometimes up to 50%.
    • Lower tiers sub-contractors:
      • Require shorter payment periods and no retention.

Reconciliation 概算變化的解釋

  1. Presented vertically:
    垂直列出:
  2. Presented side by side:
    並排表示:
    ​​​​​​​​​​​​​​
  3. A legend of “(a)”, “(b)”, “(c)”, etc. can be used for stating common reasons, similar to the legends suggested for “comparison tables” under “Presentation of Cost Estimates” above.

Pre-tender Estimates ​​​​​​​標底

  1. Method:
    • By pricing the Bills of Quantities before formal issue of tender documents or before return of tenders.
      在發出招標檔前或在回標前利用工程量清單套取單價計價。
  2. Purposes:
    • For checking whether the cost so priced is within the previous estimate and the Budget
      以檢查得出的總價是否仍在前概算或投資預算之內
    • For making design changes and issuing tender addendum to keep the costs within the Budget
      作出設計修改並發出招標檔變更通知以便維持造價在投資預算之內
    • For checking against tenders returned for reasonableness
      用作評核回標價的合理性。

End of Page

International Cost Management Standard

International Cost Management Standard KCTang

Go to End

Note

  • 15/3/2022: Expanded.
  • 7/3/2022: Split from Pre-Contract Cost Planning and Control.

Intro

  1. International Cost Management Standard (ICMS) (https://icms-coalition.org/the-standard/), formally called "International Construction Measurement Standards", is intended to provide global consistency in presenting construction life cycle costs and carbon emissions.

Aims

  1. Provide global consistency in classifying, defining, measuring, recording, analysing and presenting entire construction life cycle costs and carbon emissions at a project, regional, state, national or international level.
  2. Allow costs and carbon emissions to be managed and potentially reduced.
  3. Allow:
    • construction life cycle costs and carbon emissions to be consistently and transparently benchmarked (comparative benchmarking)
    • the causes of differences in life cycle costs and carbon emissions between projects to be identified (option appraisal)
    • properly informed decisions on the design and location of construction projects to be made at the best value for money (investment decision-making) and
    • data to be used with confidence for construction project financing and investment, decision-making, and related purposes (certainty).

Characteristics

  1. Global: co-existing with the locals.
  2. High level.
  3. For the first time, building works, civil engineering works and carbon emissions are now also covered by the same classification at the high level.
  4. Same for costs and carbon emissions.

Timeline

  1. 17 June 2015: Formation of ICMS Coalition – a non-governmental, not-for-profit professional coalition.
  2. November 2015: Standards Setting Committee starting to work.
  3. July 2017: Release of the 1st Edition covering capital construction costs of building and civil engineering works,
  4. August 2019: Release of the 2nd Edition extended to cover other life cycle costs and more civil engineering project types at the PAQS Congress in Malaysia.
  5. November 2021: Release of the 3rd Edition extended to cover carbon emissions and more civil engineering project types. Change of names to International Cost Management Standard and Standard Setting Committee.

Evolution of cost classification

 

  1. "elements" in the traditional QS sense was called "Cost Groups" and "Cost Sub-Groups" in ICMS 1 and 2.
  2. With the addition of carbon emissions in ICMS 3, it is now called "Groups" and "Sub-Groups" to make them common for costs and carbon emissions.

Hierarchical framework

  1. Simple
    • This framework is simpler than that commonly used in Hong Kong, which is for building works only.
  2. Shared groups
    • Construction, Renewal and Maintenance all share the same Groups.
  3. Composite and prefabricated work
    • It is covered.
  4. Development budget
    • For new developments, the total of the Acquisition Costs and Construction Costs represents the capital cost of development or development budgetary cost.

Codes

  1. Code: 01.2.03.030
    • Meaning: Buildings: Construction: Structure: Frames and slabs (above top of ground floor slabs).
Level 1 Project Type 01. Buildings
Level 2 Category 2. Construction
Level 3 Group 03. Structure
Level 4 Sub-Group 030 Frame and Slabs

Relationship between ICMS, LCC and WLC

  1. ‘Occupancy Costs’ are considered part of the ‘Non-Construction Costs’.
  2. Compatible with ISO 15686-5:2017 Buildings and constructed assets – Service life planning – Part 5: Life-cycle costing.

Carbon reporting framework

  1. The reporting structures for costs and carbon emissions are identical.

Groups and Sub-Groups

Acquisition Groups and Sub-Groups

  1. Carbon emissions are reported for Acquisition only if they are significant.

  2. 2-digit code for Groups and 3-digit code for Sub-Groups.

Code Description
    Group (Level 3)
    Sub-Group (Level 4)
 
1.   Acquisition Costs (AC) | Acquisition Carbon Emissions (AE) (each Sub-Group includes Risk Allowances
  01. Site acquisition
  01.010 Costs and premium required to procure site
  01.020 Compensation to existing occupiers
  01.030 Demolition, removal and modification of existing properties by way of payment to existing owners instead of carrying out physical work
  01.040 Contributions for the preservation of heritage, culture and environment
  01.050 Related fees to agents, lawyers, and the like
  01.060 Related taxes and statutory charges
  02. Administrative, finance, legal and marketing expenses
  02.010 Client’s general office overheads
  02.020 Client’s project-specific administrative expenses:
•    in-house project management and design team
•    supporting project staff
•    project office venue, furniture and equipment if not included in Constructor’s preliminaries | site overheads
•    stores and workshops
•    safety and insurances
•    staff training
•    accommodation and travelling expenses for in-house team and external parties
  02.030 Interest and finance costs
  02.040 Legal expenses
  02.050 Accounting expenses
  02.060 Sales, leasing, marketing, advertising and promotional expenses
  02.070 Taxes and statutory charges related to sales and lease
  02.080 License and permit charges for operation and use

Construction | Renewal | Maintenance Groups and Sub-Groups: Buildings

  1. Carbon emissions are reported at the Sub-Group level by exception.

  2. 2-digit code for Groups and 3-digit code for Sub-Groups.

Code Description
    Group (Level 3)
    Sub-Group (Level 4)
 
2.   Construction Costs (CC) | Construction Carbon Emissions (CE)
3.   Renewal Costs (RC) | Renewal Carbon Emissions (RE)
5.   Maintenance Costs (MC) | Maintenance Carbon Emissions (ME
    (CC | CE, RC | RE, and MC | ME share the same Groups below, so far as applicable. Those separated by ‘ | ’ in [ ] are respective alternative terms.)
  01. Demolition, site preparation and formation
  01.010 Site survey and ground investigation
  01.020 Environmental treatment
  01.030 Sampling of hazardous or useful materials or conditions
  01.040 Temporary fencing
  01.050 Demolition of existing buildings and support to adjacent structures
  01.060 Site surface clearance (clearing, grubbing, topsoil stripping, tree felling, minor earthwork, removal)
  01.070 Tree transplant
  01.080 Site formation and slope treatment
  01.090 Temporary surface drainage and dewatering
  01.100 Temporary protection, diversion and relocation of public utilities
  01.110 Erosion control
  02. Substructure
  02.010 Foundation piling and underpinning:
•    mobilisation and demobilisation
•    trial piles and caisson
•    permanent piles and caisson
•    pile and caisson testing
•    underpinning
  02.020 Foundations up to top of lowest floor slabs:
•    excavation and disposal
•    lateral supports
•    raft footings, pile caps, column bases, wall footings, strap beams, tie beams
•    substructure walls and columns
•    lowest floor slabs and beams (excluding and beyond basement bottom slabs)
•    lift pits
•    composite or prefabricated work
  02.030 Basement sides and bottom:
•    excavation and disposal
•    lateral supports
•    bottom slabs and blinding
•    sides
•    vertical waterproof tanking, drainage blanket, drains and skin wall
•    horizontal waterproof tanking, drainage blanket, drains and topping slab
•    insulation
•    lift pits, sump pits, sleeves
•    composite or prefabricated work
  03. Structure
  03.010 Structural removal and alterations
  03.020 Basement suspended floors (up to top of ground floor slabs):
•    structural walls and columns
•    beams and slabs
•    staircases
  03.030 Frames and slabs (above top of ground floor slabs):
•    structural walls and columns
•    upper floor beams and slabs
•    roof beams and slabs
•    staircases
•    fireproofing to steel structure
  03.040 Tanks, pools, sundries
  03.050 Composite or prefabricated work
  04. Architectural works | Non-structural works
  04.010 Non-structural removal and alterations
  04.020 External elevations:
•    non-structural external walls and features
•    external wall finishes except cladding
•    facade cladding and curtain walls
•    external windows
•    external doors
•    external shop fronts
•    roller shutters and fire shutters
  04.030 Roof finishes, skylights and landscaping (including waterproofing and insulation):
•    roof finishes
•    skylights
•    other roof features
•    roof landscaping (hard and soft)
  04.040 Internal divisions:
•    non-structural internal walls and partitions
•    shop fronts
•    toilet cubicles
•    moveable partitions
•    cold rooms
•    internal doors
•    internal windows
•    roller shutters and fire shutters
•    sundry concrete work
  04.050 Fittings and sundries:
•    balustrades, railings and handrails
•    staircases and catwalk not forming part of the structure, cat ladders
•    cabinets, cupboards, shelves, counters, benches, notice boards, blackboards
•    exit signs, directory signs
•    window and door dressings
•    decorative features
•    interior landscaping
•    access panels, fire service cabinets
•    sundries
  04.060 Finishes under cover:
•    floor finishes (internal and external)
•    internal wall finishes and cladding
•    ceiling finishes and false ceilings (internal or external)
  04.070 Builder’s work in connection with services:
•    plinth, bases
•    fire-proofing enclosure
•    hoisting beams, lift pit separation screens, lift shaft separator beams
•    suspended manholes
•    cable trenches, trench covers
•    sleeves, openings and the like not allowed for in ‘Fittings and sundries’
  04.080 Composite or prefabricated work
  05. Services and equipment
  05.010 Heating, ventilating and air-conditioning systems/air conditioners:
•    seawater system
•    cooling water system
•    chilled water system
•    heating water system
•    steam and condensate system
•    fuel oil system
•    water treatment
•    air handling and distribution system
•    condensate drain system
•    unitary air-conditioning system
•    mechanical ventilation system
•    kitchen ventilation system
•    fume and smoke extraction system
•    anaesthetic gas-extraction system
•    window and split-type air conditioners
•    air-curtains
•    fans
•    related electrical and control systems
•    submissions, testing and commissioning
  05.020 Electrical services:
•    high-voltage transformers and switchboards
•    incoming mains, low-voltage transformers and switchboards
•    mains and submains
•    standby system
•    lighting and power
•    uninterruptible power supply
•    electric underfloor heating
•    local electrical heating units
•    earthing/lightning protection and bonding
•    submissions, testing and commissioning
  05.030 Fitting out lighting fittings
  05.040 Extra low voltage electrical services:
•    information and communications technology system
•    staff paging/location
•    public address system
•    building automation
•    security and alarm
•    close circuit television
•    communal aerial broadcast distribution and the like
•    submissions, testing and commissioning
  05.050 Water supply and drainage above ground or inside basement:
•    cold water supply
•    hot water supply
•    flushing water supply
•    grey water supply
•    cleansing water supply
•    irrigation water supply
•    rainwater disposal
•    soil and waste disposal
•    planter drainage disposal
•    kitchen drainage disposal
•    related electrical and control systems
•    submissions, testing and commissioning
  05.060 Supply of sanitary fittings and fixtures (installation included in ‘Water supply and above ground drainage’ unless not separable from costs of ‘Fittings and sundries’)
  05.070 Disposal systems:
•    refuse
•    laboratory waste
•    industrial waste
•    incinerator
•    submissions, testing and commissioning
  05.080 Fire services:
•    fire hydrant and hose reel system
•    wet risers
•    sprinkler system
•    deluge system
•    gaseous extinguishing system
•    foam extinguishing system
•    audio/visual advisory system
•    automatic fire alarm and detection system
•    portable hand-operated appliances and sundries
•    related electrical and control systems
•    submissions, testing and commissioning
  05.090 Gas services:
•    coal gas
•    natural gas
•    liquid petroleum gas
•    medical gas/laboratory gas
•    industrial gas/compressed air/instrument air
•    vacuum
•    steam
•    submissions, testing and commissioning
  05.100 Movement systems:
•    lifts | elevators
•    platform lifts
•    escalators
•    travellators | moving walkways
•    conveyors
•    submissions, testing and commissioning
  05.110 Gondolas
  05.120 Turntables
  05.130 Generators
  05.140 Energy-saving features
  05.150 Water and wastewater treatment equipment
  05.160 Fountains, pools and filtration plant
  05.170 Powered building signage
  05.175 Audio/visual entertainment system
  05.180 Kitchen equipment
  05.190 Cold room equipment
  05.200 Laboratory equipment
  05.210 Medical equipment
  05.220 Hotel equipment
  05.230 Car park or entrances access control
  05.240 Domestic appliances
  05.250 Other specialist services
  05.260 Builder’s profit and attendance on services
  06. Surface and underground drainage
  06.010 Surface water drainage
  06.020 Storm water drainage
  06.030 Foul and wastewater drainage
  06.040 Drainage disconnections and connections
  06.050 CCTV inspection of existing or new drains
  06.060 Buried Process Pipe
  07. External and ancillary works
  07.010 Permanent retaining structures
  07.020 Site enclosures and divisions
  07.030 Ancillary structures
  07.040 Roads and paving
  07.050 Landscaping (hard and soft)
  07.060 Fittings and equipment
  07.070 External services:
•    water supply
•    gas supply
•    power supply
•    communications supply
•    external lighting
•    utility disconnections and connections
  08. Preliminaries | Constructors’ site overheads | general requirements
  08.010 Construction management including site management staff and support labour
  08.020 Temporary access roads and storage areas, traffic management and diversion (at the Constructors’ discretion)
  08.030 Temporary site fencing and securities
  08.040 Commonly shared construction plant
  08.050 Commonly shared scaffolding
  08.060 Other temporary facilities and services
  08.070 Technology and communications: telephone, broadband, hardware, software
  08.080 Constructor’s submissions, reports and as-built documentation
  08.090 Quality monitoring, recording and inspections
  08.100 Safety, health and environmental management
  08.110 Insurances, bonds, guarantees and warranties
  08.120 Constructor’s statutory fees and charges
  08.130 Testing and commissioning
  08.140 Extras for extreme climatic or working conditions (if priced separately according to local pricing practice)
  09. Risk Allowances
  09.010 Design development allowance
  09.020 Construction contingencies
  09.030 Price Level Adjustments:
•    until tendering
•    during construction
  09.040 Exchange rate fluctuation adjustments
  10. Taxes and Levies
  10.010 Paid by the Constructor
  10.020 Paid by the Client in relation to the construction contract payments
  11. Work and utilities off-site (including related risk allowances, taxes and levies)
  11.010 Connections to, diversion of and capacity enhancement of public utility mains or sources off-site up to mains connections on-site:
•    electricity
•    transformers
•    water
•    sewer
•    gas
•    telecommunications
  11.020 Public access roads and footpaths
  12. Production and loose furniture, fittings and equipment (including related risk allowances, taxes and levies)
  12.010 Loose production, process and operating furniture, fittings and equipment not normally provided before completion of construction
  12.020 Fixed production, process and operating furniture, fittings and equipment installed before completion of construction
•    production (including process and operating) equipment (including furniture and fittings)
•    related instrument and control systems
•    related safety and environmental control systems
•    related storage and transfer systems
•    services and equipment as described in Group 05 but dedicated to serve production equipment
•    surface and underground drainage as described in Group 06 but dedicated to serve production equipment
•    testing and commissioning
•    licences and certifications to start production
•    risks allowances
•    taxes and levies
  13. Construction-related consultants and supervision (including related risk allowances, taxes and levies)
  13.010 Consultants’ fees and reimbursable:
•    architects (architectural, landscape, interior design, technical, etc.)
•    engineers (geotechnical, civil, structural, mechanical, electrical and plumbing, technical, etc.)
•    project managers
•    surveyors (quantity surveying, land surveying, building surveying, cost engineering, etc.)
•    specialist consultants (environmental, traffic, acoustic, facade, BIM, etc.)
•    value management studies
  13.020 Charges and levies payable to statutory bodies or their appointed agencies (in connection with planning, design, tender and contract approvals, supervision and acceptance inspections)
  13.030 Site supervision charges (including their accommodation and travels)
  13.040 Payments to testing authorities or laboratories

Construction | Renewal | Maintenance Groups and Sub-Groups - Civil Engineering Works

  1. Carbon emissions are reported by exception at the Sub-Group level.

  2. 2-digit code for Groups and 3-digit code for Sub-Groups.

Code Description
    Group (Level 3)
    Sub-Group (Level 4)
2.   Construction (CC | CE)
3.   Renewal (RC | RE)
5.   Maintenance (MC | ME)
    (CC | CE, RC | RE, and MC | ME share the same Groups below, so far as applicable. Those separated by ‘|’ in [ ] are alternative terms for respective Groups)
  01. Demolition, site preparation and formation
  01.010 Site survey and ground investigation
  01.020 Environmental treatment
  01.030 Sampling of hazardous or useful materials or conditions
  01.040 Temporary fencing
  01.050 Demolition of existing structures and support to adjacent structures
  01.060 Site surface clearance (clearing, grubbing, topsoil stripping, tree felling, minor earthwork, removal)
  01.070 Tree transplant
  01.080 General site formation and slope treatment (including embankments / cuttings required by more than one Sub-Project)
  01.090 Temporary surface drainage and dewatering
  01.100 Temporary access roads and storage areas (provided under an advance contract)
  01.110 Temporary protection, diversion and relocation of public utilities
  01.120 Erosion control
  01.600 Water surface development (including common facilities and services, and dredge spoil recovery area)
  01.610 Dredge spoil recovery area
  01.620 Hydrographic / bathymetry surveys
  01.630 Water quality monitoring
  01.640 Excavation (of soft silt, peat, sands, gravels, clay, rock, etc., including mobilisation and demobilisation of excavators, blasting, transportation, disposal, reclamation, compaction and monitoring)
  01.650 Dredging (of soft silt, peat, sands, gravels, clay, rock, etc., including mobilisation and demobilisation of dredgers and barges, blasting, transportation, disposal, reclamation, compaction and monitoring)
  01.660 Special disposal and treatment of contaminated sediment
  01.670 Reclamation or filling (with imported rock, concrete, or other hard materials)
  01.680 Reclamation or filling (with dredged materials)
  01.690 Surcharging or consolidation of lands and monitoring of settlement
  01.700 Habitat protection systems
  02. Substructure
  02.010 Embankments / cuttings (specifically required for the Project or Sub-Project)
  02.020 Excavation, disposal and lateral supports (specifically to receive any substructure construction but excluding general site formation and slope treatment)
  02.025 Geotextile or other geomembranes
  02.030 Trenching / common trenches
  02.040 Drilling / boring
  02.050 Piling / anchoring
  02.060 Structural backfill / ground remediation
  02.070 Earth-retaining structures
  02.080 Abutments / wing walls
  02.090 Pile caps / footings / bases (nearest to the ground level or water level if constructed in water)
  02.100 Sub-base to pavements and rail track structures
  02.110 Bases to supports for tanks, pipes, well heads and the like
  02.120 Beds and surrounds to underground pipes
  02.600 Pile retaining walls (combi walls / H-pile walls / secant piled walls
•    sheet piled walls
•    gravity quay walls
•    relieving platforms
•    pile supported structures
•    special types
  02.610 Diaphragm walls
  02.620 Quays / docks / wharfs / moorings / piers /dry dock structure foundations
  02.630 Marine anchor systems
  02.640 Mooring dolphins
  02.650 Breakwaters
•    cores
•    primary armour (interlocking units)
•    secondary armour
  02.660 Rock revetments / gabions
  02.670 Cofferdams
  02.680 Bank protection
  03. Structure
  03.010 Piers and towers
  03.020 Suspension system
  03.030 Decks
  03.040 Bearings
  03.050 Tunnel lining
  03.060 Roads / track bases
  03.070 Pavements
  03.080 Service roads and approaches
  03.090 Parapets / edge treatment
  03.100 Main structures (in case of land formation and reclamation, referring to those of project types not separately reported as Sub-Projects)
  03.105 Service stations and houses for district utility services
  03.110 Tanks, rigs, storage containers and the like
  03.120 Supports for tanks, pipes and the like
  03.130 Civil pipework
  03.140 Valves and fittings
  03.600 Seawalls
  03.610 Lake and river lining
  03.620 Prefabricated marine structures – off-site fabrication
  03.630 Prefabricated marine structures – transport to site location
  03.640 Prefabricated marine structures – installation on site location
  03.650 Slipways / gangways / linkways
  03.660 Dock and lock gates
  03.670 Pontoons
  03.680 Coastal protection systems
  03.690 Deck / surface structures (ground bearing or suspended concrete slabs)
  03.700 Locks and guidance structures
  03.710 Revetments
  03.720 Flood defences
  03.730 Navigational aids
  03.740 Dry docks structures
  03.750 Weirs
  03.760 Aqueducts
  04. Non-structural works
  04.010 Non-structural removal and alterations
  04.020 Non-structural construction
  04.030 Running surface
  04.040 Signage, markings and the like
  04.050 Gantries and the like
  04.060 Safety facilities
  04.070 Barriers / rails and means of access
  04.080 Special equipment and fittings
  04.090 Interior landscaping
  04.100 Builders’ work in connection with services
  05. Services and equipment
  05.005 District heating, ventilating and cooling systems
  05.010 Mechanical systems
  05.020 Lighting systems
  05.030 Illuminations
  05.040 Low-voltage power supply
  05.050 Cables/cable trays
  05.060 Other electrical services
  05.070 Control systems and instrumentation
•    signalling systems
•    telecommunications systems
  05.080 Pipe racks / supports (localised)
  05.090 Water supply and drainage above ground or inside underground construction (localised)
  05.100 Refuse and waste disposal systems
  05.110 Fire services
  05.115 Gas services
  05.120 Movement systems: lifts / elevators / conveyors
  05.600 Boat lifts
  05.610 Cranes / rigs/ rails
  05.620 Under water / sea service pipe installation
  05.630 Under water / sea electrical / data cabling
  06. Surface and underground drainage
  06.010 Surface water drainage
  06.020 Storm water drainage
  06.030 Foul and waste water drainage
  06.040 Pumping systems
  06.050 Drainage connections
  07. External and ancillary works
  07.010 Site enclosures and divisions
  07.020 Ancillary structures
  07.030 Roads and paving (not amounting to a Sub-Project)
  07.040 Landscaping (hard and soft)
  07.050 Fittings and equipment
  08. Preliminaries | Constructors’ site overheads | general requirements
  08.010 Construction management including site management staff and support labour
  08.020 Temporary access roads and storage areas, traffic management and diversion (at the Constructors’ discretion)
  08.025 Temporary concrete batching yard, precast concrete casting yard
  08.030 Temporary site fencing and securities
  08.040 Commonly shared construction plant
  08.045 Marine plant and equipment (e.g. ships / barges / vessels, floating cranes, dredgers, floating drill rigs, cofferdams, caissons, etc.)
  08.050 Commonly shared scaffolding
  08.055 Workpeople living accommodation
  08.060 Other temporary facilities and services
  08.065 Mobilisation and demobilisation where significant and not elsewhere reported
  08.070 Technology and communications: telephone, broadband, hardware, software
  08.080 Constructor’s submissions, reports and as-built documentation
  08.090 Quality monitoring, recording and inspections
  08.100 Safety, health and environmental management
  08.110 Insurances, bonds, guarantees and warranties
  08.120 Constructor’s statutory fees and charges
  08.130 Testing and commissioning
  08.140 Extras for extreme climatic or working conditions (if priced separately according to local pricing practice)
  09. Risk Allowances
  09.010 Design development allowance
  09.020 Construction contingencies
  09.030 Price level adjustments
•    until tendering
•    during construction
  09.040 Exchange rate fluctuation adjustments
  010. Taxes and Levies
  010.010 Paid by the Constructors
  010.020 Paid by the Client in relation to the construction contract payments
  11. Work and utilities off-site (including related risk allowances, taxes and levies)
  11.010 Connections to, diversion of and capacity enhancement of public utility mains or sources off-site up to mains connections on-site:
•    electricity
•    transformers
•    water
•    sewer
•    gas
•    telecommunications
  11.020 Public access roads and footpaths
  12. Production and loose furniture, fittings and equipment (including related risk allowances, taxes and levies)
  12.010 Loose production, process and operating furniture, fittings and equipment not normally provided before completion of construction
  12.020 Fixed production, process and operating furniture, fittings and equipment installed before completion of construction
  13. Construction-related consultants and supervision (including related risk allowances, taxes and levies)
  13.010 Consultants’ fees and reimbursable:
•    architects (architectural, landscape, interior design, technical, etc.)
•    engineers (geotechnical, civil, structural, mechanical, electrical and plumbing, technical, etc.)
•    project managers
•    surveyors (quantity surveying, land surveying, building surveying, cost engineering, etc.)
•    specialist consultants (environmental, traffic, acoustic, facade, BIM, etc.)
•    value management studies
  13.020 Charges and levies payable to statutory bodies or their appointed agencies (in connection with planning, design, tender and contract approvals, supervision and acceptance inspections)
  13.030 Site supervision charges (including their accommodation and travels)
  13.040 Payments to testing authorities or laboratories

Operation Groups and Sub-Groups

  1. Carbon emissions are reported by exception at the Sub-Group level.
  2. 2-digit code for Groups and 3-digit code for Sub-Groups.
Code Description
    Group (Level 3)
    Sub-Group (Level 4)
4.   Operation Costs (OC) | Operation Carbon Emissions (OE)
  01. Cleaning
  01.010 External cleaning (routine and periodic)
  01.020 Internal cleaning (routine and periodic)
  01.030 Specialist cleaning (define type)
  02. Utilities
  02.010 Fuel (state type: gas / electricity / oil and other fuel sources)
  02.020 Water, drainage and sewerage
  03. Waste management
  03.010 Waste collection and disposal
  03.020 Recycling and savage
  04. Security
  04.010 Physical security
  04.020 Remote monitoring
  05. Information and communications technology
  05.010 Communication systems
  05.020 Specialist technology / sensors
  06. Operators’ site overheads | general requirements
  06.010 Administration
  06.020 Property insurance
  07. Risk Allowances
  07.010 Operation related (user definable)
  07.020 Contractual obligations
  08. Taxes and Levies
  08.010 Taxes
  08.020 Levies

End of Life Groups and Sub-Groups

  1. Carbon emissions are reported by exception at the Sub-Group level.
  2. 2-digit code for Groups and 3-digit code for Sub-Groups.
Code Description
    Group (Level 3)
    Sub-Group (Level 4)
6 6. End of Life Costs (EC) | End of Life Carbon Emissions (EE)
  01. Disposal inspection
  01.010 Dilapidations report
  01.020 Contractual hand-back obligations
  02. Decommissioning and decontamination
  02.010 Shutdowns and decommissioning
  02.020 Decontamination
  03. Demolition, reclamation and salvage
  03.010 Demolition
  03.020 Reclamation
  03.030 Salvage
  04. Reinstatement
  04.010 Agreed reinstatement works
  04.020 Contractual obligations
  05. Constructors’ site overheads | general requirements
  05.010 Administration
  05.020 Overheads (project specific)
  06. Risk Allowances
  06.010 End of life specific (user definable)
  06.020 Abnormal risks (user definable)
  07. Taxes and Levies
  07.010 Taxes
  07.020 Levies
  07.030 Credit for grants

Rationale for some classifications

Composite or prefabricated work

  1. There are items for ‘composite or prefabricated work’, but in principle their costs and/or carbon emissions are to be split into the relevant Groups and Sub-Groups as much as possible to facilitate analysis and comparison with non-composite or prefabricated work.
  2. Include in the ‘composite or prefabricated work’ only if the composite or prefabricated work integrates different construction components across different Groups and Sub-Groups serving the functions of more than one Sub-Group and is priced without further breakdown in the contract.

Substructure and Structure Delineation

  1. “Superstructure” is not used.
  2. The “Substructure” and “Structure” delineation for various project type is shown in the diagrams below.
  3. Why are they delineated into “Substructure” and “Structure”, not “Substructure” and “Superstructure”?
  4. Usually, substructure refers to the structure below the ground surface and superstructure refers to the structure above ground.
  5. However, as shown in the diagrams, many of the main structures for civil engineering works (such as roads, tunnels, tanks, pipelines, wells, boreholes, etc.) can be totally below the ground surface, if these main structures are classified as substructure, there would be nothing left to be reported for the superstructure.
  6. Therefore, ICMS classifies all the main structures as “Structure” whether or not they are underground or underwater, and classifies all structures supporting or encasing the main structures as “Substructure”.

Split of Basement for Buildings

  1. The basement sides and bottom (shown in deep blue in the diagram below) are classified as an item (code [2|3|5].02.030.030) under the Substructure Group, while the basement suspended floors (shown in red box in the diagram below) are classified as a Sub-Group (code [2|3|5].03.020) under the Structure Cost Group.
  2.  
  3. Why are the basement sides, bottom and suspended floors not grouped together as substructure or basement, like common language use? It is also usual for tender pricing to group the basement works under a section.
  4. Answers:
  5. The design of the basement sides and bottom do not vary in direct proportion to the total building floor area nor to the total basement floor area, and is highly dependent on the site conditions even for the same building design. The cost of the basement sides and bottom should therefore be reported separately from the cost of the basement suspended floors.
  6. If the basement suspended floors are reported separately from the superstructure, the “unit cost per total building floor area” of the basement suspended floors ($400/m2) and of the superstructure ($2,700/m2) as given in the high-level cost summary, as shown in the example below, would not be useful when one wants to roughly estimate how much a similar building of 12,000 m2 would cost. One would need to know the floor areas of the basement and the superstructure or their proportions, and use $4M and $27M for pro-rata calculations.
  7. While it may be easy to separate the architectural works | non-structural works into basement and superstructure, it would not be logical from the costing point of view to do a similar separation for services and equipment because it is often required to put main services and equipment serving the whole building in the basement, but allocating the costs of main services and equipment based on their locations would give a misleading unit cost per basement floor area and unit cost per superstructure floor area for further use.
  8. If the basement suspended floors and superstructure are grouped together, the unit cost per total building floor area ($3,100/m2) as shown in the example below would then be more useful for quick pro-rata calculation and comparison. Furthermore, per their respective floor areas, the design of the basement suspended floors is generally heavier than that of the superstructure, but the former is exclusive of external structural walls, while the latter is inclusive. The two aspects can have an off-setting effect such that $4,000/m2 and $3,000/m2 in the above example can be closer to each other, and grouping together would be appropriate.
  9. ICMS is for high-level cost presentation for comparative benchmarking and option appraisal, etc. The above classification should make the unit costs more readily useful for such purposes. For tender pricing, users can choose to group the basement works in their preferred ways.
  10. If one wants to show the basement and superstructure costs separately in the cost report to match the sections in tender pricing, one can adopt the following presentation:

External structural walls as structural parts vs External elevations

  1. Some cost classifications classify external structural walls as part of the “External elevations” or as “External walls” whether above or below ground. Why does ICMS 2 not so classify but classify the external structural walls as structural parts?
  2. Answers:
  3. External structural walls serve two functions, one taking structural loading of the building, and the other enclosing the building. 
  4. It is considered difficult to separate the external structural walls (reinforcement in particular) at “A” below from the rest of the core structure, and it would give an incomplete structural cost if both the external structural walls at “A” and “B” below are grouped under “External elevations”, say, when answering the question “what would be the structural cost without non-structural parts?”. 
  5. For construction, the structural parts should come first before the non-structural parts are added on. Therefore, the external structural walls are classified as structural parts under:
    • [2|3|5].02.030: Basement sides and bottom – sides
    • [2|3|5].03.030: Structure – Frames and slabs – structural walls and columns
  6. For present day buildings, the design of the external structural walls above ground and that below ground can be very different, the walls are therefore separated as above.

Fitting out lighting fittings / Supply of sanitary fittings

  1. Lighting fittings (decorative) and sanitary fittings are usually chosen by the architects instead of the building services engineers, and their costs are not usually included in the cost estimates provided by the engineers, they are therefore separately as two Sub-Groups.
  2. However, since they are more related to Services and Equipment, they are therefore included as part of “Services and Equipment”.

Builder's profit and attendance on services

  1. Services and equipment are likely the subject of nominated sub-contracts on which the builders price profit and attendance separately. This Sub-Group is intended for such profit and attendance.
  2. The costs of other works should include profit and attendance.

Project Attributes and Values

  1. To enable consistent and concise evaluation and comparison between different Projects or different design schemes, ICMS provides a set of Project Attributes and Values describing the principal characteristics of each Project or Sub-Project.
  2. The Project Attributes are given under the following groups:
Common Each Project Type
  • Report
  • Construction Cost Price Level
  • Construction Cost Currency Conversion
  • Construction Programme
  • Site
  • Construction Procurement
  • Life Cycle Cost Related
  • Carbon Emissions Related
  • Code
  • Works
  • Project Quantities
  1. Examples:

Project Quantities

  1. ICMS provides the following Project Quantities (physical or functional) such that the total costs can be expressed as unit cost per unit project quantity for comparison and benchmarking purposes.
Projects Project Quantities (Physical) Project Quantities (Functional)
Buildings
  • Site area (within legal boundary of building site, excluding temporary working areas outside the site) (m² | ft²)
  • Covered area on plan (m² | ft²)
  • Gross external floor area as IPMS 1 (EXTERNAL) (m² | ft²)
  • Gross internal floor area as IPMS 2 (INTERNAL) (m² | ft²)
  • number of occupants | number of bedrooms | number of hospital beds | number of hotel rooms | number of car parking spaces | number of classrooms | number of students | number of passengers | number of boarding gates | production capacity (specifics to be stated) | other stated
Roads and motorways
  • Total length (between two places, irrespective of number of lanes) (km | miles)
  • Equated lane length (being the length of all lanes along the route, including those in passing loops, sidings and depots reduced toa single length) (km | miles)
  • Total paved area (m² | ft²)
  • capacity (vehicles per hour)
Railways
  • Route length (between start and finish points of longest route plus start and finish points of ancillary routes irrespective of number of tracks) (km | miles)
  • Equated track length (being the length of all tracks along the route, including those in passing loops, sidings and depots reduced to a single length) (km | miles)
  • weight of traffic expressed as estimated gross million tonnes or tons per annum (M tonnes | M tons/year)
  • passenger journeys (million journeys per year)
Bridges
  • Deck length measured from face to face of abutments (km | miles)
  • Surface area of deck (m² | ft²)
  • capacity (vehicles | litres | gallons | tonnes | tons per hour)
Tunnels
  • End to end length (km | miles)
  • Equated track length (being the length of all tracks inside the tunnel) (km | miles)
  • Equated lane length (being the length of all tracks inside the tunnel) (km | miles)
  • Volume of excavation (m³ | yd³)
  • capacity (vehicles | litres | gallons | tonnes | tons per hour)
Wastewater treatment works
  • Site area (area of land covered by permanent work, excluding temporary working areas outside the site) (hectares | acres)
  • capacity (mega litres | litres | million gallons | gallons per day)
Water treatment works
  • Site area (area of land covered by permanent work, excluding temporary working areas outside the site) (hectares | acres)
  • capacity (mega litres | litres | million gallons | gallons per day)
Pipelines
  • Total length of pipes (km | miles)
  • Length from servicing inlets to outlets (km | miles)
  • capacity (litres | gallons | m³ | ft³ per hour)
Wells and boreholes
  • Total length drilled/bored (m | ft)
  • capacity (m³ | ft³ | litres | gallons per hour)
Power-generating plants
  • Site area (area of land covered by permanent work, excluding temporary working areas outside the site) (hectares | acres)
  • capacity (MW)
Chemical plants
  • Site area (area of land covered by permanent work, excluding temporary working areas outside the site) (hectares | acres)
  • output of products (m³ | ft³ | tonnes | tons | litres | gallons per day)
Refineries
  • Site area (area of land covered by permanent work, excluding temporary working areas outside the site) (hectares | acres)
 
Refineries
  • Site area (area of land covered by permanent work, excluding temporary working areas outside the site) (hectares | acres)
  • input of crude oil (tonnes | tons | litres | gallons | barrels per day)
  • output of products (tonnes | tons | litres | gallons | barrels per day)
Dams and reservoirs
  • Site area (surface area of stored liquid at maximum capacity) (square km | square miles)
  • reservoir capacity (million m3 | million yd3)
  • power generation capacity (MW)
Mines and quarries
  • Site area (area of land covered by permanent work, excluding temporary working areas outside the site) (hectares | acres)
  • ore extraction (tonnes | tons per annum)
  • throughput of product (tonnes | tons per day)
Offshore structures
  • Surface area of platform (m2 | ft2)
  • Mass prefabricated offshore structure (tonnes | ton)
  • crude oil production (tonnes | tons/day | barrels/day)
  • natural gas production (measured at 100 kPa (0.987 atmosphere) and 15oC or 14.696 psi (1 atmosphere) and 60oF (m3 | ft3)
  • electricity production MWh | BTU
Nearshore works
  • Quay length + retaining height (m + m | ft + ft)
  • Number of fenders
  • Fender surface load (kN/m² | Ib/ft²)
  • Surface area of quayside (m2 | ft2)
  • Site area (area of land covered by permanent work including land reclaimed from the sea, excluding temporary working areas outside the site) (hectares | acres)
  • description and units to be provided where possible
Ports
  • Quay length + height (from seabed to top of retaining structure) (m + m | ft + ft)
  • Surface area of structure (m2 | ft2)
  • Volume of breakwaters/dredging/ other stated (m3 | ft3)
  • Site area (area of land covered by permanent work including land reclaimed from the sea, excluding temporary working areas outside the site) (hectares | acres)
  • functional units (ships | passengers | tonnes | tons per year)
Waterway works
  • Length of structure (m | ft)
  • Site area (area of land covered by permanent work including land reclaimed from the sea, excluding temporary working areas outside the site) (hectares | acres)
  • description and units to be provided where possible
Land formation and reclamation
  • Total land area (hectares | acres)
 

 

End of Page

Procurement Strategy 採購策略

Procurement Strategy 採購策略 KCTang

Go to End

Note 註

29/1/2024: Revised.

19/2/2023: Revised.

20/12/2014: Moved from wiki.

Intro 介紹

Need 需要

  • Quantity Surveyors need to have knowledge to advise on the procurement strategy and contractual arrangement.
    工料測量師需具備就採購策略和合約安排提供建議的知識。

(added, 19/2/2023)

Why contract out? Why call for tenders? 為什麼要外包? 為什麼要招標?

  1. Find someone to do it for you.
    找人幫你做
  2. Someone:
    該人:
    • More capable
      較有能力
    • Statutorily qualified
      有法定資格
    • Less costly.
      成本較低
  3. Accountability in case of joint venture.
    合資企業的問責。

When to decide? 什麼時候決定?

  • As early as when the first project programme is developed.
    早在第一個項目計劃制定時。

Which types of contractual arrangement? 哪些類型的合同安排?

  • Traditional or special? 傳統還是特殊?

Classification of contract types based on 不同的合同形式的分類

Contract scope 按承包範圍分類

  1. Design.
    設計
  2. Build.
    施工
  3. Design and build / turnkey / package deal / engineering, procurement and construction:
    設計和施工 / 交鑰匙 / 統包  /  設計、採購和施工
    • 優點:
      • 工程太簡單不必請建築或工程師。
      • 取得承包方特有而一般的建築或工程師沒有的特殊設計優點。
      • 取得承包方特有的建造方法或產品。
      • 設計及施工時間可重疊,相應縮短了工期。
      • 總的來說可省一些設計費。
      • 由承包方單一負責,而減少多方參與責任不清的程度。有時這個好處被視為最大優點,使到根本不存在上述2及3點的工程都採用。
      • 總造價較有保証。
      • 可規定成品能滿足意向功能,此乃高於一般只需行使合理技能的標準。
      • 在全包的情況下,承包方的索賠機會較少。
    • 缺點:
      • 發包方的要求寫得太死,承包方沒有自由設計的空間。
      • 發包方的要求寫得太鬆,不能表達到預期的成果,或有空間給承包方索賠。
      • 發包方不能隨意改動要求。
      • 發包方對設計的改動要求,是屬於原要求範圍內還是超出範圍,往往會有爭議。
      • 真的超出範圍而需計算增加費用時,因可能要與一個尚未設計好便改動了的方案比較,難度比較大。減內容亦有類似的問題。
      • 鑑於總造價是基本封頂的,發包方會傾向在具體設計時增加內容及取最高的標準,令承包方吃虧。
      • 鑑於總造價是基本封頂的,承包方會傾向在具體設計時盡量省料及取最低的標準,令發包方吃虧。
      • 雙方合作不愉快時,爭議反為多了。
  4. Design, build and operate.
    設計、施工、營運

Contract relationship 按承包關係分類

  1. Traditional main contracting.
    傳統總承包
  2. Management contracting.

    管理承包

  3. Construction manager.

    施工管理經理

Pricing basis 按投標基礎分類

  1. Based on firm bills of quantities, with reference to drawings and specification.
    按確定工程量清單,參閲圖紙及規範
  2. Based on provisional bills of quantities, with reference to drawings and specification.
    按暫定工程量清單,參閲圖紙及規範
  3. Based on drawings and specification, without bills of quantities. Submitted as quotations / schedule of rates / schedule of quantities and rates / activities schedules.
    只按圖紙及規範,不含工程量清單。以報價單 / 單價表 / 有量單價表 / 活動表提交
  4. Based on pre-priced schedule of rates, competing on adjustment percentages.
    按預設單價表,競爭調整費率

Pricing nature 按標價形式分類

  1. Lump sum total, with unit rates.
    總價報價,輔以單價
  2. Rates only, without total.
    單價報價,無總價
  3. Percentage.
    費率報價

Degree of risks 按風險程度分類

  1. Fixed price.
    固定價
  2. Price with fluctuation.
    可調價
  3. Cost plus fee (lump sum fee, fixed percentage fee, scaled percentage fee, sharing).
    成本加服務費(一筆過、固定費率、遞減費率、分成)
  4. Ceiling price / Guaranteed Maximum Price.
    封頂價

Funding arrangement 融資安排

  1. All funded by the employer.
    • 全由發包方安排
  2. Public-private partnerships:
    公私營合作

Degree of commitment

  1. One-off contracts.
  2. Term contracts.
  3. Serial contracts.
  4. Standing offers.
  5. Framework contracts:
    https://www.designingbuildings.co.uk/wiki/Framework_contract
  6. Prime contracts:
    https://www.designingbuildings.co.uk/wiki/Prime_contract

How to package contracts?

  1. Optimum balance between the time required to complete every design and the time required to construct.
  2. Optimum balance between single line responsibility and more control over choosing sub-contractors and suppliers.
  3. Specialist works by specialist contractors/sub-contractors.
  4. Responsibility for delivery time and wastage to be watched out if nominated supply contracts are used.

Usual contract packaging 總包分包的分拆

  1. Site Survey Contract.

    現場勘察合同

  2. Ground Investigation Contract.

    地質勘察合同

  3. Demolition Contract.
    拆卸工程合同
  4. Piling Contract.
    基樁合同
  5. Main Contract.
    主合同
  6. Sub-Contract.
    分包合同
  7. Supply Contract.
    供應合同
  8. Other Direct Contracts.
    其他獨立合同

Which form of contract?

  1. Private or public?
  2. Domestic or international?
  3. Standard form or specially drafted?
  4. Old or new versions?
  5. With how much amendments?
  6. How harsh?
  7. See Forms of Contract.

Risks sharing 風險的分擔

  1. Soil conditions.
    土質
  2. Underground obstructions.
    地下障礙物
  3. Phased possession of site and completion.
    分階段交付工地及竣工
  4. Time for completion.
    工期
  5. Liquidated damages.
    誤期賠償
  6. Grounds for extension of time.
    工期延長的許可原因
  7. Grounds for monetary claims.
    索賠的許可原因
  8. Insurances and bonds.
    保險及擔保
  9. Defects liability period / defects rectification period.
    保修期
  10. Payment terms.
    付款辦法

End of Page

Guaranteed Maximum Price 封頂價

Guaranteed Maximum Price 封頂價 KCTang

Go to End

30/1/2024: Some typos corrected.

20/12/2014: Moved from wiki.

  1. What does “guaranteed maximum price” mean?
    • It means the maximum price payable to the Contractor after completion of the Works and defects rectification.
  2. Who is to bear when the final price is more than the guaranteed maximum price?
    • The Contractor.
    • From the Contractor’s point of view, individual cost overruns must be allowed to be balanced by individual cost savings.
  3. Who is to gain when the final price is more than the guaranteed maximum price?
    • The Employer. 
    • The Contractor may have a share.
  4. Why a guaranteed maximum price is required?
    • The Employer wants certainty in budgetary control.
  5. When would a guaranteed maximum price arrangement be feasible?
    • The design is not fixed yet such that the Contractor can design to stay within the guaranteed maximum price
    • The design is complete but the Contractor can provide better alternatives.
  6. What kinds of employers would prefer a guaranteed maximum price contract?
    • Non-professional developers and owners.
    • Those who want certainty in budgetary control.
    • Those who want to seek excellence in design and construction management.
  7. What types of contractors are qualified for a guaranteed maximum price contract?
    • Those who have design expertise.
    • Those who have site management team understanding the risks of guaranteed maximum price contract.
  8. Why are guaranteed maximum price contracts used more in the United States?
    • The Contractor is on-board upon the inception of early design stage.
    • The Contractor is responsible for the design or the development of design.
    • The Architect only provides schematic design or design intent.
  9. When can the guaranteed maximum price be varied?
  10. What should constitute a Variation?
    • “A material change in the nature, type, quality or quantity of any goods, materials or workmanship specified in the GMP Works Contract. A change to any work including advance preparation and procurement works which has been commenced or completed at the time the variation is issued. A change to any specified sequence, timing (including acceleration measures) or method of construction. Every case excludes Design Development.” ???
  11. What is design development?
    • Development of the brief or design intent into working details for construction.
    • “Any development or progress of the design of the Works from the state of the design set out in the Contract towards finalization in a form suitable for construction and includes the clarification, elaboration, supplementing and/or augmenting of any method statement, drawing, specification or any other document or thing pertaining to such design.” ???
  12. What is design development instruction?
    • “Any Instruction issued by the Management Contractor to the GMP Works Contractor in relation to Design Development including the provision of drawings, details, or information necessary for the GMP Works Contractor to carry out and complete the Works which instruction shall not initiate an adjustment to the GMP and shall not constitute a Variation.” ???
    • “The Design Development process shall not include the introduction of Variations as defined, such Variations shall only be ordered by GMP Instructions.” ???
  13. How should the Contractor tender and price for guaranteed maximum price contracts?
    • Make sure that there is room for cost saving from the tendered design.
  14. How can the Contractor survive after tender award?
    • Make sure that there is room for cost saving from the tendered design.
  15. Why is design development important to the Contractor?
    • Put the design under the Contractor’s control to ensure that the final design, materials, workmanship and method would not exceed the guaranteed maximum price.
  16. Should the Contractor want the design details to be provided by the Architect?
    • No, the chances are the Architect will want to perfect and upgrade the design such that the costs will become higher.
  17. How should the difference between a prime cost sum and its initial awarded sum or its final expenditure be treated?
  18. How should the guaranteed maximum price be adjusted for direct loss and/or expense, liquidated damages, acceleration, costs of defects rectification, and the Contractor’s alternative design proposals, provisional quantities, p.c. rates?

End of Page

Demarcation between Costs and Fee

Demarcation between Costs and Fee KCTang

Go to End

Note

21/3/2024: NEC Schedules moved to here.

4/3/2024: NEC Schedules changed to table form.

29/1/2024: Updated to include NEC Schedules of Cost Components.

12/1/2018: Created.

Views written on 22 Aug 2005

For cost plus contracts, arguments can easily arise as to whether an expenditure should be treated as part of the reimbursable costs or part of the fees. Essentially those items which can be carried out by the head office of the Contractor rather than on site may be regarded as part of the office overheads and therefore as part of the fee rather than costs. Contractors would try to argue in reverse. Items which need careful descriptions in the cost plus contracts to avoid arguments include:

  1. Types and extent of design responsibilities.
  2. Types and number of head office supervisory, technical and clerical staff to be employed and deemed to be part of the fee.
  3. Types and number of supervisory, technical and clerical staff to be specifically provided for the Contract and chargeable as costs.
  4. Expenses in connection with sub-letting which can be done by the tendering and purchasing department of the Contractor at the head office or alternatively by a dedicated team, such as sourcing tenderers, preparing tender documents, inviting tenders, analysing tenders, preparing contracts.
  5. Types and extent of attendance of head office administrative nature rather than physical work upon sub-contractors and suppliers.
  6. Effects of fluctuations in the costs of labour, materials or plant, exchange rates of currencies, or Government taxes, fees and charges.
  7. Interests on money, finance charges, patent right and royalty.
  8. Entertainment expenses for customers and visitors, customary mid-year and year end gift expenses, expenses in connection with ceremonies at commencement of works, completion of works or part thereof, celebration and obituary offering expenses.
  9. Types and extent of taxes, fees or charges.
  10. Costs in connection with the obtaining of permits, approvals, consents from Government, local authorities and statutory undertakers.
  11. Import duties, custom clearance, administrative handling charges.
  12. Types and extent of usual preliminaries to be deemed to be part of the fee.
  13. Extent of Contractor's site office expenses including costs of stationery, paper, accounts, printing, fuels, office equipment.
  14. Site transportation vehicles including fuel charges, insurances and license fees.
  15. Extent of Contractor's communication expenses such as postal charges, telex, telegram, long distance calls, etc.
  16. Contra-charges imposed by the Builder for loading and unloading of materials, use of lifts and hoists, removal of rubbish, use of water and electricity, damage by one trade upon the other
  17. Acceleration and overtime to catch up programmes.
  18. Preparation of periodic reports and programmes.
  19. Taking of progress photographs.
  20. Provision of portable safety measures, first-aid kits.
  21. Accidental damage to utilities, roads and footpaths.
  22. Types and extent of protection, cleaning, rubbish removal and maintenance work during construction.
  23. Watchmen.
  24. Setting out team and responsibility.
  25. Types and extent of insurances. Deductibles under insurance policies.
  26. Types and extent of common plant, tools, etc.
  27. Extent of scaffolding, working platform at high levels, temporary supports, etc.
  28. Extent of hoardings, screens, protective covering to be provided.
  29. Establishment, operation and removal of storage sheds, workshops, offices, latrines.
  30. Off-site storage.
  31. Use of telephone, water and electricity. Provision of temporary plumbing, electrical installation, etc.

End of Page

Law of Contract

Law of Contract KCTang

Go to End

Note

Unfinished - Work in progress.

17/2/2024: Created.

Intro

This gives some simple statements of principles of the law of contract. References have been made to "The Law of Contract, Fourth Edition 1974" written by W.T. Major in order to compile these statements.

Contract

  1. A bilateral contract is created upon unqualified acceptance of an offer.
  2. A unilateral contract is created upon the offeree's performance according to an offer.
  3. An agreement "subject to contract" is not binding.
  4. There must be an intention to create binding legal relations.
  5. An agreement cannot oust the jurisdiction of the courts.

Offer

  1. An offer must be clear, complete, and final.
  2. An invitation to treat is not an offer.
  3. A mere statement of price is not an offer.
  4. An offer must be communicated to the offeree.
  5. An offer may be communicated orally or in writing or be implied from conduct.
  6. An offer to a particular person or group of persons can only be accepted by those persons.
  7. An offer to the world at large can be accepted by any person having the notice of the offer and fulfilling the terms of the offer.
  8. An offer can be withdrawn (revoked) at any time before valid acceptance.
  9. An undertaking to keep the offer open for a specified time is not binding unless the offeree gave consideration in return for it to make it a binding contract (known as an option).
  10. Revocation is effective if and when it is actually (including by post or indirectly) communicated to the offeree.
  11. An offer may lapse by passage of time (acceptance not made within the specified time or, if not specified, within a reasonable time). 

Tender

  1. An invitation to tender is an invitation to treat.
  2. A tender in response to an invitation to tender is an offer.
  3. A tender can be a definite offer or a standing offer.
  4. A definite offer becomes a binding contract if accepted without change.
  5. A standing offer is open for acceptance more than once, and each such acceptance will make a distinct contract.
  6. A standing offer may be revoked at any time unless if it is given under seal or consideration is given for it to be held open for a specified time.

Acceptance

  1. An acceptance of an offer must be communicated to the offeror in the case of bilateral contract.
  2. If acceptance by post is permitted by the offer, acceptance is communicated at the time the letter of acceptance is properly posted.
  3. An acceptance of an offer must be unqualified and must correspond exactly with the terms of the offer.
  4. An acceptance which changes the terms of the offer becomes a counter-offer and the offer is deemed to have lapsed.
  5. An acceptance "subject to contract" is not binding.
  6. Where the parties are in different countries, the place sending the acceptance by letter or cable will be the place of the contract unless otherwise specified in the offer.
  7. Where the parties are in different countries, the place receiving the acceptance by telex will be the place of the contract unless otherwise specified in the offer.
  8. The mode of acceptance must comply with the terms of the offer.

Rejection of Offer

  1. An offer rejected expressly or impliedly cannot subsequently be accepted by one who rejected it.
  2. An express rejection is effective when notice of it has reached the offeror if no acceptance by the same person has reached the offeror earlier.

Consideration

  1. A simple contract must have valuable consideration exchanged.
  2. A valuable consideration "may consist either in some right, interest, profit, or benefit accruing to the one party, or some forbearance, detriment, loss or responsibility given, suffered, or undertaken by the other". (Currie v. Misa 1875)
  3. A consideration may be executory (to be done in return for a promise already made) or executed (done in return for a promise already made).
  4. Consideration must be real (or sufficient).
  5. Consideration need not be adequate.
  6. Consideration must move from the promisee.
  7. Consideration must not be past (done before the other party's promise is made).
  8. Consideration must not be illegal.
  9. Consideration must not be vague.
  10. Consideration must be possible of performance.
  11. Waiver of a contractual right without consideration exchanged is not binding.
  12. Consideration makes a waiver binding.
  13. Payment of a lesser sum without consideration exchanged does not discharge an existing obligation to pay a greater sum.
  14. Payment of a lesser sum by a third party in agreement with the creditor discharges the debtor's obligation to pay a greater sum.

Terms of a Contract

  1. The terms of a contract can be expressed or implied.
  2. Express terms are express statements made by the parties and intended to bind the parties.
  3. Implied terms can be implied according to statutory obligations or to give effect to the presumed intentions of the parties.
  4. Mere statements made during the making of a contract without intention to be binding are not valid terms.
  5. Construction of a contract means how the contract terms should be construed (explained).
  6. Words are presumed to have their ordinary literal meaning.
  7. Legal terms are presumed to have their special meaning.
  8. Where words have both legal and ordinary meaning, the legal meaning will be preferred.
  9. Where the meaning of words is not clear, or where two terms cannot be reconciled, the intention of the parties will prevail.
  10. Specially prepared document takes precedence over standard printed form.
  11. The contract will be construed most strongly against the party who drew it up. (contra proferentum rule).

 End of Page 

Forms of Contract

Forms of Contract KCTang

Go to End

Note

  • 29/1/2024: Updated to include NEC and HKHA contracts.
  • 19/2/2023: Revised. SFBC clause headings added.
  • 18/3/2020: Revised.
  • 20/12/2014: Moved from wiki.

Standard Forms of Contract for use in Hong Kong 香港的標準合約

Old Private Forms of Building Contract

  • Drawn up by the Hong Kong Institute of Architects, the Royal Institution of Chartered Surveyors (Hong Kong Branch) and the Society of Builders, Hong Kong:
    • Agreement & Schedule of Conditions of Building Contract for use in the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region, First RICS (HK Branch) Edition 1986 (with quantities) incorporating up to Second amendments published in July, 1999 (SFBCwQ.1986(2ndAmend.July1999))
    • Agreement & Schedule of Conditions of Building Contract for use in the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region, First RICS (HK Branch) Edition 1986 (without quantities) incorporating up to Second amendments published in July, 1999 (SFBCnQ.1986(2ndAmend.July1999))
    • Sub-Contract for use where the Sub-Contractor is nominated under the Standard Form of Building Contract for Hong Kong, First RICS (HK Branch) Edition 1986 incorporating up to Second amendments published in February, 2000.

New Private Forms of Building Contract

  • Published by the Hong Kong Institute of Architects, the Hong Kong Institute of Construction Managers and the Hong Kong Institute of Surveyors:
    • Agreement & Schedule of Conditions of Building Contract for use in the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region, Private Edition – With Quantities, 2005 Edition (SFBCwQ.2005)
    • Agreement & Schedule of Conditions of Building Contract for use in the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region, Private Edition – Without Quantities, 2006 Edition (SFBCnQ.2006)
    • Agreement & Schedule of Conditions of Nominated Sub-Contract for use in the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region, 2005 Edition
  • The private forms may be purchased from the Hong Kong Institute of Surveyors, 111 Connaught Road Central, Sheung Wan, Hong Kong.

Government Forms of Contract

(revised, 19/2/2023)

 

NEC4 - New Engineering Contract

  • Published by Thomas Telford Ltd, which is a wholly owned subsidiary of the Institution of Civil Engineers (ICE), the owner and developer of the NEC. 
    • Option A: Priced contract with activity schedule 
    • Option B:  Priced contract with bill of quantities 
    • Option C: Target contract with activity schedule 
    • Option D: Target contract with bill of quantities 
    • Option E: Cost reimbursable contract 
    • Option F: Management contract.

Housing Authority General Conditions of Contract for Capital Works

(added, 29/1/2024)

MTR Corporation Ltd.'s Own Standard Forms before moving to use NEC

  • Conditions of Contract for Civil Engineering and Building Works Construction.
  • Conditions of Contract for Design and Build.
  • Conditions of Contract for E&M.
  • Conditions of Contract for Major Works.
  • Conditions of Contract for Minor Works.
  • Conditions of Contract for Entrustment Works.

Clause headings of SFBCwQ.2005

Contents

Articles of Agreement

Attestation

The General Conditions

1        Interpretation and definitions

2        Contractor's obligations

3        Master programme

4        Architect's instructions

5        Documents forming the Contract and other documents

6        Statutory obligations

7        Setting out the Works

8        Materials, goods, workmanship and work

9        Intellectual property rights

10        Contractor's site management team

11        Access for the Architect to the Works

12        Architect's representative

13        Variations, Provisional Quantities, Provisional Items and Provisional Sums

14        Contract Bills

15        Contract Sum

16        Materials and goods on or off-site

17        Substantial Completion and defects liability

18        Partial possession by Employer

19        Assignment and sub-letting

20        Injury to persons and property and indemnity to Employer

21        Insurance against injury to persons or property

22        Insurance of the Works

22A      Insurance of the Works by the Contractor

22B      Insurance of the Works by the Employer

22C      Insurance of existing building and insurance of the Works by the Employer

23        Possession, commencement and completion

24        Damages for non-completion

25        Extension of time

26        Delay recovery measures

27        Direct loss and/or expense

28        Notice of claims for additional payment

29        Nominated Sub-Contractors and Nominated Suppliers

30        Persons engaged by Employer

31        Facilities for statutory undertakers and utility companies

32        Certificates and payments

33        Surety bond

34        Antiquities

35        Determination by Employer

36        Determination by Contractor

37        Determination by Employer or Contractor

38        Fluctuations

39        Notices, certificates and other communications

40        Recovery of money due to the Employer

41        Settlement of disputes

Appendix

Schedule 1 - Form of Surety Bond to be given by the Contractor to the Employer

Schedule 2 - Form of Warranty to be given by the Nominated Sub-Contractor to the Employer in consideration of Nomination

Schedule 3 - Form of Warranty to be given by the Nominated Supplier to the Employer in consideration of Nomination

Index to the General Conditions

(added, 19/2/2023)

 

End of Page

Standard Form of Building Contract 2005/2006 (removed)

Standard Form of Building Contract 2005/2006 (removed) KCTang

Go to End

Agreement & Schedule of Conditions of Building Contract for use in the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region (Standard Form of Building Contract)

8/7/2021: Full version with commentary removed because of copyright issue.

End of Page

Standard Form of Nominated Sub-Contract 2005 Edition (removed)

Standard Form of Nominated Sub-Contract 2005 Edition (removed) KCTang

Go to End

Agreement & Schedule of Conditions of Nominated Sub-Contract for use in the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region, 2005 Edition

8/7/2021: Full version with commentary removed because of copyright issue.

End of Page

Draft Standard Form of Domestic Sub-Contract 標準自選分包合同草擬

Draft Standard Form of Domestic Sub-Contract 標準自選分包合同草擬 KCTang

Go to End

Note

26/12/2014: Moved form wiki.

Draft Standard Form of Domestic Sub-Contract
標準自選分包合同草擬

CIC Taskforce Meetings and Snapshots of Draft
建造業議會專責小組會議及討論稿存照

基本工種標準自選分包合約指引 http://www.hkcic.org/files/eng/documents/publications/Guideline-SF-w.pdf

 

15/12/2014 Full draft of English version with language style only changed 英文版全稿(只改文句款式) Standard Form of Domestic Sub-Contract - English (20141215a).pdf
20/10/2014 Full draft of English version
and Changes to draft dated 26/9/2014
英文版全稿
及對26/9/2014稿的修改
Standard Form of Domestic Sub-Contract - English (20141020a).pdf
Standard Form of Domestic Sub-Contract - English (changes from 20140926 to 20141020).pdf
14/10/2014 32nd Meeting 第卅二次會議  
26/9/2014 Full draft of English version with changes to draft dated 14/1/2014 與14/1/2014稿對照的英文版全稿 Standard Form of Domestic Sub-Contract - English (Draft with changes 20140926a).pdf
14/1/2014 Full clean drafts of English version and Chinese version 英文版及中文版全淨稿 Standard Form of Domestic Sub-Contract - English (Clean Draft 20140114a).pdf
Standard Form of Domestic Sub-Contract - Chinese (Clean Draft 20140114a).pdf
14/1/2014 Full drafts of English version and Chinese version with changes to draft dated 24/1/2013 與24/1/2013稿對照的英文版及中文版全稿 Standard Form of Domestic Sub-Contract - English (Draft with changes 20140114a).pdf
Standard Form of Domestic Sub-Contract - Chinese (Draft with changes 20140114a).pdf
13/1/2014 31st Meeting 第卅一次會議  
11/1/2014 Full drafts of English version and Chinese version with changes to draft dated 24/1/2013 與24/1/2013稿對照的英文版及中文版全稿 Standard Form of Domestic Sub-Contract (Draft 20140111e).pdf
Standard Form of Domestic Sub-Contract (Draft 20140111c).pdf
3/1/2014 Full draft of English version with changes to draft dated 24/1/2013 與24/1/2013稿對照的英文版全稿 Standard Form of Domestic Sub-Contract (Draft 20140103e).pdf
16/12/2013 30th Meeting 第卅次會議  
11/11/2013 29th Meeting 第廿九次會議  
28/10/2013 28th Meeting 第廿八次會議  
3/10/2013 27th Meeting 第廿七次會議  
10/9/2013 26th Meeting 第廿六次會議  
27/8/2013 25th Meeting 第廿五次會議  
16/8/2013 24th Meeting 第廿四次會議  
23/7/2013 23rd Meeting 第廿三次會議  
21/6/2013 Comments on draft dated 24/1/2013 up to 21/6/2013 21/6/2013為止收集到的對24/1/2013稿的意見 Standard Form of Domestic Sub-Contract (Draft 20130621).pdf
24/1/2013 Full draft after break 休會後全稿 Standard Form of Domestic Sub-Contract (Draft 20130124).pdf
12/3/2012 22nd Meeting 第廿二次會議  
17/2/2012 21st Meeting 第廿一次會議  
9/1/2012 20th Meeting 第廿次會議  
19/12/2011 19th Meeting 第十九次會議  
25/11/2011 18th Meeting 第十八次會議  
14/11/2011 Draft of Section 11 第十一條稿 Domestic Sub-Contract Section 11 at 2011114.pdf
7/11/2011 17th Meeting 第十七次會議  
2/11/2011 Draft of Section 11 第十一條稿 Domestic Sub-Contract Section 11 at 2011102.pdf
  Previous draft of Section 11 之前的第十一條稿 Domestic Sub-Contract Section 11 before 2011102.pdf
17/10/2011 16th Meeting 第十六次會議  
26/9/2011 15th Meeting 第十五次會議  
9/8/2011 Draft of Section 10 第十條稿 Domestic Sub-Contract Section 10 at 20110909.pdf
11/8/2011 14th Meeting 第十四次會議  
5/8/2011 Draft of Section 10 第十條稿 Domestic Sub-Contract Section 10 at 20110805.pdf
  Previous draft of Section 10 之前的第十條稿 Domestic Sub-Contract Section 10 before 20110805.pdf
7/7/2011 13th Meeting 第十三次會議  
9/6/2011 12th Meeting 第十二次會議  
3/6/2011 Drafts of Sections 8 and 9 第八及九條稿 Domestic Sub-Contract Section 9 at 20110603.pdf
Domestic Sub-Contract Section 8 at 20110603.pdf
  Previous drafts of Sections 8 and 9 之前的第八及九條稿 Domestic Sub-Contract Section 9 before 20110603.pdf
Domestic Sub-Contract Section 8 before 20110603.pdf
16/5/2011 11th Meeting 第十一次會議  
4/5/2011 Drafts of Section 7 第七稿 Domestic Sub-Contract Section 7 at 20110504.pdf
15/4/2011 10th Meeting 第十次會議  
1/4/2011 9th Meeting 第九次會議  
28/2/2011 8th Meeting 第八次會議  
21/2/2011 Partial draft 部分稿 Domestic Sub-Contract snapshot at 20110221.pdf
20/1/2011 7th Meeting 第七次會議  
18/1/2011 Partial draft 部分稿 Domestic Sub-Contract snapshot at 20110118.pdf
6/12/2010 6th Meeting 第六次會議  
6/12/2010 Partial draft 部分稿 Domestic Sub-Contract snapshot at 20101206.pdf
1/11/2010 5th Meeting 第五次會議  
1/11/2010 Partial draft 部分稿 Domestic Sub-Contract snapshot at 20101101.pdf
5/10/2010 4th Meeting 第四次會議  
6/9/2010 3rd Meeting 第三次會議  
2/8/2010 2nd Meeting 第二次會議  
28/6/2010 1st Meeting 第一次會議  

 

End of Page

Special Features in the Standard Form of Contract for Maintenance and Renovation Works for Use in Hong Kong, First Edition 2013

Special Features in the Standard Form of Contract for Maintenance and Renovation Works for Use in Hong Kong, First Edition 2013 KCTang

Go to End

Note

27/4/2020: Chinese terms added. Clause 12.4.3 specially amended to opt for Schedule 2 to the Arbitration Ordinance.

24/2/2015: Created.

FOREWORD

The Hong Kong Institute of Surveyors has published a Standard Form of Contract for Maintenance and Renovation Works (維修及裝修工程標準合同) for use in Hong Kong, First Edition 2013 (First Amendments in December 2014) to cater to the need of major maintenance and renovation works, instead of using the current Standard Form of Building Contract which is mainly for new construction.

This article presents the key features introduced in the new form of contract to suit the special nature of major maintenance and renovation works.

PREVAILING SITUATION

Hong Kong is densely populated with blocks of high rise residential buildings.

They are under multiple ownerships.

After decades of development, a lot of these buildings require major repair and maintenance works such as repair of spalling concrete, re-surfacing of external facades, replacement of plumbing and drainage systems, refurbishment of lobbies and staircases, etc. which are the common properties of the multiple ownership.

The market of the major repair and maintenance works is huge.

Generally, the Standard Form of Building Contract, which is basically for new construction, is used and adapted for these maintenance works in the private sector.

Special conditions of contracts are introduced:

  • Some of them are poorly drafted causing argument over interpretation.
  • Some of them are very harsh.
  • Some of the harsh terms are for the building professionals’ convenience.
  • Some are driven by the building owners who are mostly laymen pressing for commercial terms unusual to the construction industries.

Preliminaries clauses are also usually adapted from those used for new construction:

  • They have become extensive because they have been added on top of those used for new construction and have accumulated from project after project.
  • To play safe, irrelevant clauses are not readily deleted.
  • This makes the Preliminaries rather complicated and cumbersome.
  • Some of them are repetitive but inconsistent amongst themselves and with the Form of Contract.

The overall tender and contract documents are not easily understood by building owners.

This also applies to the junior building professionals managing the contracts.

INITIATION FOR CHANGE

New versions of the Standard Form of Building Contract (“SFBC”) were published in 2005 (with quantities version) and in 2006 (without quantities version) to reflect the latest legal development and the more complicated modern day construction practice.

The documents have become thicker with more clauses.

It was considered to be too complicated for repair and maintenance works.

The building professionals would likely stay with the old versions when handling repair and maintenance works.

On the initiation of the Building Surveying Division of the Hong Kong Institute of Surveyors, and with the co-operation of the Quantity Surveying Division, a Standard Form of Contract for Maintenance and Renovation Works was drafted and published in 2013 (“Standard Form”).

The First Amendments were published in December 2014 mainly for the correction of typographical errors.

INTENDED PURPOSES

The intended purposes of the Standard Form are as follows:

  • Project types:
    • tailor-made for major maintenance and renovation works:
      • whether residential buildings or not
      • not involving nominated sub-contracts (which is the usual case)
    • also useful for fitting out works which do not involve nominated sub-contracts
    • to be managed by building professionals:
      • who can be architects, engineers or surveyors, instead of traditionally “the Architect”
  • Provisions:
    • comparatively simple to read
    • simple yet comprehensive enough to cover all the basics
    • reduce the need for special contract conditions
    • reduce cumbersome preliminaries clauses
    • more structured for inserting and supplementing with project specific information
    • contain good and equitable practice
    • standard provisions will offer better persuasion to building owners to use more equitable terms
  • Building owners:
    • can understand their contractual rights and obligations more easily
  • Building professionals:
    • tasks to draft special contract conditions and preliminaries reduced
    • volume of paper reduced
    • easier to administer the contracts
  • Contractors
    • less exposed to ambiguous harsh terms
    • able to offer better prices and end products.

CONTENTS

The Standard Form is made up of the following sections:

  • Contract Agreement (合同協議) (7 pages)
    • 4 Recitals (序文)
    • 4 Articles (約章)
      • Object of this Contract (合同標的)
      • Contract Price (合同總價)
      • Contract Periods (合同工期)
      • Contract Documents (合同文件)
    • Signing section (簽署部分)
      • Options to sign as a deed (契約) or as a simple contract (簡單合同)
  • Particulars of Agreement (合同細節) (5 pages)
  • Contract Conditions (合同條款) (37 pages)
  • Appendix A – Surety Bond (Pro-forma) (履約保證書(樣本) )(4 pages)

The traditional terms of “Articles of Agreement’, “Conditions of Contract” and “Special Conditions of Contract” have been simplified to “Contract Agreement”, “Contract Conditions” and “Special Contract Conditions”.

The traditional “Appendix to the Conditions of Contract” has been replaced with “Particulars of Agreement”.

To reflect the actual practice, the following documentary flow is specifically envisaged by the Recitals and Articles:

  • Tender Documents (including Conditions of Tendering, Form of Tender, Special Contract Conditions, Specification, Schedule of Works and Drawings) ==> Tender Addenda ==> Tender ==> Tender Correspondence (including Letter of Award) ==> Contract Documents.

These documents together with the Standard Form of Contract make up the Contract Documents.

The pre-2005/2006 SFBC do not envisage Special Conditions of Contract, Tender Addenda and Tender Correspondence. SFBC 2005/2006 envisage Special Conditions of Contract and Tender Correspondence.

PARTICULARS OF AGREEMENT (合同細節)

The Particulars of Agreement are a part of the Contract Agreement which shall be read in conjunction with the Particulars of Agreement.

Other than the signing section, the Contract Agreement does not require any filling in of information. Project specific particulars are to be inserted in the Particulars of Agreement which are in a table form.

The Particulars of Agreement serve the purposes of the traditional Appendix to the Conditions of Contract but have been expanded to cover all the essential project specific particulars which may vary between projects.

There are 32 Items for entry of project specific particulars:

  • Contract Signing and Award Dates (合同簽訂日及定標日)
  • Project Title and Address (項目名稱及地址)
  • Contract Title, Works Description and Site Locations (合同名稱、本工程簡要說明及工地位置) (Site locations may be specific locations at the Project Address)
  • Contract Parties (合同雙方)
    • Employer (發包方)– name and address
    • Contractor (承包商) – name and address
  • Consultants (合同顧問)
    • Contract Administrator (合同監理) – name and address
    • Quantity Surveyor (工料測量師) – name and address
  • Contract Type and Price (合同類型及價款) (to select one)
    • Lump Sum Contract (總價承包合同)
    • Remeasurement Contract (重新計量合同)
    • Rates Only Contract (純單價承包合同)
  • Time (時間) (see PHASING below)
    • Site Access Dates (進入工地日期)
    • Works Sections (工程分部)
    • Contract Periods (工期)
    • Rate of Liquidated Damages for Delayed Completion (誤期竣工的算定賠償率)
    • Defects Liability Period (保修期)
  • Documents (文件)
    • Tender Documents (招標文件)
    • Tender Correspondence (投標來往函件)
  • Payment Terms (付款條款)
    • Amount of advance payment (預付款的金額)
    • Method of recovery of advance payment (扣回預付款的辦法)
    • Retention Percentage (保修金的百份率)
    • Maximum Retention (保修金上限)
    • Period for Honouring Payment (付款寬限期)
  • Insurances and Bond (保險及履約保證)
    • Contractors’ All Risks and Third Party Liability Insurance (工程一切險及第三者責任險)
      • Party responsible for taking out the insurance (負責投保的一方) - The Employer / the Contractor
      • Percentage of professional fees in case of reinstatement (重置時顧問費的百份率)
      • Amount for the removal of debris (殘礫清理保額)
      • Percentage for escalation clause (工程費上漲百份率)
      • Material Damage insurance excesses in respect of each and every occurrence of loss or damage (物質損壞保險就每次損失或破壞 事故的免賠額)
      • Limit of indemnity for third party liability (第三者責任險的賠償限額)
      • Third party liability insurance excess in respect of each and every occurrence of loss or damage (第三者責任保險的每次損失或破壞事故的免賠額)
    • Amount of Surety Bond (履約保證書的金額()
    • (No particulars needed for Employees’ Compensation Insurance here – covered by the Conditions)
  • Other Terms and Conditions (其他條款) (for entry of non-standard terms)

A set of partially completed Particulars of Agreement should be included in the Tender Documents for tendering.

The fully completed and updated set should be used for signing the Contract.

SIMPLIFICATION

Terms have been simplified:

  • “Contract Agreement” (合同協議) used for “Articles of Agreement’
  • “Contract Conditions” (合同條款) used for “Conditions of Contract”
  • “Special Contract Conditions” (特殊合同條款) used for “Special Conditions of Contract”
  • “Materials” (物料) defined to mean materials and goods, and include equipment or machinery for incorporation into the Works, eliminating the need to write “materials and goods” or “materials, goods and equipment” all the time
  • “Plant” (施工機械) defined to mean construction plant, equipment or machinery used for carrying out the Works

Instead of trimming down based on SFBC 2005/2006, the clauses have been completely re-written with a view of making them as simple as possible but keeping the principle of SFBC 2005/2006.

The Standard Form consists of 48 pages vs 98 pages for SFBC 2005/2006. In particular, the clauses on insurances have been very much simplified.

Provisions for Nominated Sub-Contracts and Nominated Supply Contracts have been omitted because they are not usually required for maintenance and renovation works.

PHASING 分期

The pre-2005/2006 SFBC do not envisage phased possession of the Site nor phased completion of the Works (though there is an optional Sectional Completion clause).

SFBC 2005/2006 do envisage phasing and use such expressions as “the whole or parts of the Site” and “the Works or a Section”.

To simplify, the Standard Form assumes phasing by default, simply uses the expressions "Portion of the Site" and “Works Section”, and requires the following entries in the Particulars of Agreement:

  Time (時間)    
18 Date for Access to the Site (進入工地日期) Portions of the Site (工地的部分) Date (日期)
Portion / Area / Zone X or 1 <>
Portion / Area / Zone Y or 2 <>
19 Names of Works Sections (工程分部的名稱) Phase / Section / Stage (期/分部/階段) Description (說明)
Phase A or 1 <>
Phase B or 2 <>
20 Contract Periods (工期) Works Sections (工程分部) Commencement Date (or a mechanism to determine the Commencement Date) (開工日(或定開工日的機制)) Completion Date (or a mechanism to determine the Completion Date) (應竣工日(或定應竣工日的機制)) Durations in calendar days (公曆天計的工期)
Phase A or 1 <> <> <>
Phase B or 2 <> <> <>
21 Rate of Liquidated Damages for Delayed Completion (If none or “N/A” stated, general damages apply) (誤期竣工的算定賠償率(如沒說明或注明“不適用”,則採用非算定賠償額)) Works Sections (工程分部) Rate HK$/calendar day (每一公曆天HK$)
Phase A or 1 <>
Phase B or 2 <>
22 Defects Liability Period (保修期) Works Sections (工程分部) Durations in calendar months after Completion Date of each Works Section (每工程分部竣工日後起以公曆月計的期限)
Phase A or 1 <>
Phase B or 2 <>

If there is no phasing, “the Whole” can be used for the Portions and Works Sections.

Each Works Section is to have its own Substantial Completion Certificate and Defects Rectification Certificate.

MORE ENCOMPASSING TERMS

More encompassing terms have been used:

  • “Contract Administrator” (合同監理) introduced to replace the usually used term “Architect” to provide more flexibility. He can be an architect, engineer or surveyor.
  • “Schedule of Works” (工程項目清單) introduced to replace Bills of Quantities, Schedule of Rates, Schedules of Quantities and Rates, and Summary of Tender. It can be with quantities or without quantities. Unlike Schedule of Rates whose descriptions are to define the coverage of the rates only, its descriptions can define the scope and quality of the work items and the Works as a whole. This can reduce the need to duplicate the detailed descriptions of the scope of the Works in the Specification.

MORE STRUCTURED

Contract Conditions – The order of the clauses in SFBC 2005/2006 or their predecessors does not follow any logical order probably because of the result of various additions to their predecessors over more than a hundred years. Unlike their rather random order, the Contract Conditions are structured into 12 sections, with the intention of making them easier and more logical to read, and making it easier for preliminaries clauses to be arranged in similar fashion to supplement with project specific details:

  1. Interpretations (釋義)
  2. Site (工地)
  3. Works (工程)
  4. Time (工期)
  5. Contract Basis (合同基礎)
  6. Prices (價款)
  7. Quality (質量)
  8. Contractor’s Documents (承包商的文件)
  9. General Obligations (一般責任)
  10. Insurances and Bond (保險及履約保證)
  11. Determination (終止)
  12. Dispute Resolution (爭議解決)

Comprehensive checklists - To eliminate the task of searching over the entire Contract Conditions for relevant clauses, and facilitate easier administration, comprehensive checklists have been given for:

  • computation of the net interim amount payable; and
  • computation of the final Contract Price (see below).

Excusable Events and Compensable Events (可延期事件及可賠償事件) - Events eligible for extension of time and monetary compensation are now called “Excusable Events” and “Compensable Events” respectively, instead of “listed events” and “qualifying events” in SFBC 2005/2006, to facilitate easier understanding. They have been presented in a tabular format for easier reading (see below).

UPDATING

To keep in line with modern day legal development since the pre-2005/2006 SFBC:

  • “Excepted Risks” has been adapted from that used in SFBC 2005/2006, but “a cause due to any neglect or default of the Architect, the Employer or any person for whom the Architect or the Employer is responsible” in SFBC 2005/2006 has been removed from the definition because it is considered to be too wide in scope.
  • “Excusable Events” and “Compensable Events” have been respectively adapted (with suitable adjustments) from the “listed events” and “qualifying events” used in SFBC 2005/2006. Like SFBC 2005/2016:
    • When an Excusable Event occurs in the period of delay after the (extended) Completion Date but before the substantial completion of a Works Section, extension of time shall still be granted but only for the net duration of the delay rather than granting the gross period until the end of the delay.
    • While the Contractor shall continuously use his best endeavours to prevent or mitigate delay or disruption to the progress of the Works however caused, and to prevent the completion of the Works from being delayed or further delayed, the use of best endeavours by the Contractor shall not require the Contractor to accelerate the carrying out of the Works to recover delay caused by an Excusable Event.
  • “Separate Contractor” has been defined, like SFBC 2005/2006, to exclude any statutory undertaker or utility company carrying out work in pursuance of its statutory obligations and not having a contractual relationship with the Employer, the Contractor or any person for whom the Employer or the Contractor is responsible. Pre-2005/2006 SFBC do not have such distinction.
  • “Variations” (工程變更) has been expanded, like SFBC 2005/2006, to include, apart from physical changes, a change to the time or manner for carrying out the Works.
  • Like SFBC 2005/2016, the dispute resolution procedures have been expanded from arbitration only to:
    • Reference to Designated Representatives (提交指派的代表解決);
    • Reference to Mediation (提交調解解決); and
    • Reference to Arbitration (提交仲裁解決).

Users who would like to stay with the pre-2005/2006 SFBC should be aware of the legal development.

To keep in pace with the new terms used in SFBC 2005/2006:

  • “Substantial Completion Certificate” (充份竣工證書) used to replace “Practical Completion Certificate” in pre-2005/2006 SFBC; and
  • “Defects Rectification Certificate” (保修完成證書) used to replace “Certificate of Completion of Making Good Defects” in pre-2005/2006 SFBC.

TAILOR-MADE ENHANCEMENTS

There are enhancements to suit the need of maintenance and renovation works. They are generally not available in the pre-2005/2006 SFBC. This made the Standard Form to have 48 pages vs 32 pages for the pre-2005/2006 SFBC.

1. Interpretations

Definitions - They have been introduced to simplify subsequent wording.

Building Manager (物業管理人) - The likely presence of a Building Manager, being the person providing estate, property or facility management services to the premises where the Site is (the Site can be within a part of existing premises), is recognized.

Counting days - The method of counting days has been clarified. A day means a calendar day unless otherwise stated. When counting days, 1 day means 24 hours. Within 1 day means within 24 hours, not within the same day. “Commencing or starting from a certain day” means that certain day is day 1 for counting. “Commencing or starting after a certain day” means the day following that certain day is day 1 for counting.

Defects Rectification Certificate (保修完成證書) - This term has been used, like SFBC 2005/2006, to replace “Certificate of Completion of Making Good Defects” in pre-2005/2006 SFBC, but with no intentional change of meaning.

Excepted Risks (免責風險) - Their definition has been introduced. They are:

(a) any consequence of war (whether war be declared or not) in which Hong Kong is actively engaged, the invasion of Hong Kong, acts of terrorists in Hong Kong, civil war, rebellion, revolution or military or usurped power in Hong Kong, riot, commotion or disorder in Hong Kong other than amongst the employees of the Contractor or any person for whom the Contractor is responsible;

(b) any direct consequence of the faulty design provided by the Contract Administrator or other designers engaged by the Employer or the Contract Administrator;

(c) ionising radiation or contamination by radioactivity from any nuclear fuel or from any nuclear waste from the combustion of nuclear fuel, radioactive toxic explosive or other hazardous properties of any explosive nuclear assembly or nuclear component thereof; and

(d) pressure waves caused by aircraft or other aerial devices travelling at sonic or supersonic speeds.

(a), (c) and (d) are the same as those newly introduced in SFBC 2005/2006. (b) has been intended to improve “the Architect’s design of the Works insofar as damage, loss or injury is the direct consequence of the design” as used in SFBC 2005/2006. “a cause due to any neglect or default of the Architect, the Employer or any person for whom the Architect or the Employer is responsible” in SFBC 2005/2006 has been removed from the definition because it is considered to be too wide in scope.

Excusable Events and Compensable Events (可延期事件及可賠償事件) - “Excusable Events” (with extension of time) and “Compensable Events” (with monetary compensation) have been introduced and adapted from the “listed events” and “qualifying events” in SFBC 2005/2006 to keep in line with modern day legal development since the pre-2005/2006 SFBC. They have been presented in a tabular format for easier reading:

Event Code (事件編碼) Delays or disruptions by reason of (由於下列原因引致有延誤或干擾) Excusable Events (可延期事件) Compensable Events (可賠償事件)
A Force majeure (不可抗力) Yes No
B Inclement weather conditions, being rainfall in excess of twenty millimetres in a twenty-four hour period (midnight to midnight) as recorded by the Hong Kong Observatory station nearest to the Site, and/or their consequences adversely affecting the progress of the Works (惡劣天氣情況,即香港天文臺最接近工地的監測站在24小時(零時到零時)內錄得超過20mm的降雨量,及/或它們的後果(對本工程的進度有不利影響的)) Yes No
C The hoisting of tropical cyclone warning signal No. 8 or above or the announcement of a Black Rainstorm Warning, and/or its consequences adversely affecting the progress of the Works (8號或以上的熱帶氣旋警告信號或黑色暴雨警告信號的發出,及/或它的後果(對本工程進度有不利影響的)) Yes No
D An Excepted Risk (免責風險) Yes Yes
E Fire, lightning, explosion, flood, bursting or overflowing of water tanks, apparatus or pipes, earthquake, aircraft and other aerial devices or articles dropped from them, not caused by the Contractor or any person for whom the Contractor is responsible (非由承包商或他應負責的任何人士造成的火災、閃電、爆炸、洪水、水箱或儀器或水管爆破或溢出、地震、飛機及其他飛行物體或從它們墜下的物件) Yes No
F Late provision of Contract Administrator’s instructions expressly required by this Contract to be provided by a specific time or before implementation of the matter being affected (合同監理未能及時於本合同明確要求的時間前或在實施受影響的事宜前提供所需的指示) Yes Yes
G Late provision by the Contract Administrator of instructions or information (including clarification of any ambiguity, discrepancy in or divergence between documents provided by the Employer or the Contract Administrator, and including outstanding or new information) required for the progressing of the Works, after taking into account any mitigating effect which could have been afforded if the Contractor had requested for such instructions or information reasonably in advance of the occurrence of the delays or disruptions (合同監理未能及時提供本工程持續進行所需 的指示或資料(包括對發包方或合同監理所提供的文件之內或之間的任何含糊、差異或分岐的地方作出澄清,及包括尚欠或新增的資料),但可計入如果承包商合理地提早要求該指示或資料時對延誤或干擾所造成的減輕效果) Yes Yes
H The opening up for inspection of work covered up or the testing of materials or work and the consequential making good which are additional to the Contract requirements and instructed by the Contract Administrator, provided that such materials and work are in accordance with this Contract (本合同原要求以外的、並經合同監理指示的、並證明到物料或工作乃符合本合同的,對已掩蔽的工作進行打開檢查或對物料或工作進行測試及其後的修復) Yes Yes
I The carrying out of a Variation or the happening of an event deemed to be a Variation (工程變更的進行或視為工程變更的事件的發生) Yes Yes
J Increase in the work to be carried out pursuant to provisional items in this Contract of sufficient magnitude that the increase was not apparent from the Contract Documents (按本合同內暫定款進行的工作大幅度增加,而該增幅不能從合同文件顯而易見的) Yes Yes
K A postponement of the Date for Access to any portion of the Site unless this Contract has provided for such occurrence (進入工地的任何部分的日期有延遲,除非本合同對該延遲已有規定) Yes Yes
L A postponement of the Commencement Date of a Works Section unless this Contract has provided for such occurrence (任何工程分部的開工日有延遲,除非本合同對該延遲已有規定) Yes Yes
M A suspension of the provision of the whole or a portion of the Site as instructed by the Contract Administrator beyond any provided for in this Contract and not being due to a breach of contract or other default by the Contractor or any person for whom the Contractor is responsible (按合同監理的要求,超過本合同規定的程度,暫時中止提供工地的全部或部分,而不是因承包商或承包商應負責的任何人士的違約行為或其他過失造成的) Yes Yes
N A suspension of the progress of the whole or a part of a Works Section as instructed by the Contract Administrator beyond any provided for in this Contract and not being due to a breach of contract or other default by the Contractor or any person for whom the Contractor is responsible (按合同監理的要求,超過本合同規定的程度,暫時中止進行任何工程分部的全部或部分,而不是因承包商或承包商應負責的任何人士的違約行為或其他過失造成的) Yes Yes
O A delay or disruption caused by a Separate Contractor (其他承包商造成的延誤或干擾) Yes Yes
P A delay caused by a statutory undertaker or utility company carrying out work in pursuance of its statutory obligations, not having a contractual relationship with the Employer, the Contractor or any person for whom the Employer or the Contractor is responsible, and failing to commence or to carry out its work in due time provided that the Contractor has taken all practicable measures to cause it to commence, carry out and complete its work on time (法定承辦機構或公用事業公司與發包方、承包商或他們所應負責的任何人士沒有合同關係的情況下履行其法定工作,但未能按時開工或進行它的工作,而承包商已採取使它能按時開始、進行及完成它的工作的一切可行的措施) Yes No
Q A failure of the Employer to supply or supply on time materials that he agreed to provide for the Works (發包方未能供應或未能按時供應他同意供應給本工程用的物料) Yes Yes
R A delay by a Government department in giving an approval or a consent which is not the Contractor’s responsibility to obtain (政府部門延誤發出不屬於承包商應負責取得的批准或許可) Yes Yes
S An unreasonable delay by a Government department in giving an approval or a consent which is the Contractor’s responsibility to obtain, provided that any disallowance of approval or consent attributable to the Contractor’s lack of adequate submission shall not be considered as unreasonable (政府部門不合理地延誤發出屬於承包商應負責取得的批准或許可,但如果拒絕發出該批准或許可乃由於承包商未有提交足夠的資料則不能視為不合理) Yes No
T A special circumstance considered by the Contract Administrator as sufficient grounds to fairly entitle the Contractor to an extension of time (合同監理認為有充份的理由合理地給予承包商延長工期的特殊情況) Yes No
U An act of prevention, a breach of contract or other default by the Employer or any person for whom the Employer is responsible (發包方或發包方應負責的任何人士造成的妨礙行為、違約行為或其他過失) Yes Yes

Separate Contractor (其他承包商) - This term has been defined, like SFBC 2005/2006, to exclude any statutory undertaker or utility company carrying out work in pursuance of its statutory obligations and not having a contractual relationship with the Employer, the Contractor or any person for whom the Employer or the Contractor is responsible. Pre-2005/2006 SFBC do not have such distinction.

Substantial Completion Certificate (充份竣工證書) - This term has been used, like SFBC 2005/2006, to replace “Practical Completion Certificate” in pre-2005/2006 SFBC, but with no intentional change of meaning. Each Works Section is to have its own Substantial Completion Certificate and Defects Rectification Certificate.

2. Site (工地)

Provision of Site (工地的提供) - This is by way of granting access to the site rather than giving exclusive possession to reflect the usual nature of carrying out the works while the buildings are continued to be occupied and used by owners and tenants. This can be in phases as stipulated in the Particulars of Agreement.

Site access (進入工地) - The Employer is only responsible for providing access to the Site through land or premises which are under his control. Where the Employer is the landlord or the incorporated owners or the Building Manager of the premises in which the Site is situated, any individual units of the premises which are separately owned or rented (such as residential flats, car parking spaces, offices, shops, workshops, stores, and the like) shall be deemed to be under the control of the Employer.

House rules (管理守則) - The Contractor shall comply with the house rules of the Building Manager and pay any deposit temporarily required as security for loss or damage, but any restrictions on access or working hours more stringent than those announced by the Building Manager prior to the award of the Contract and affecting the Works shall be deemed to be a Variation.

Site investigation or condition survey reports (工地勘察及現況勘察報告) - As usual, any site investigation or condition survey reports or other information which may be made available to the Contractor prior to the award of this Contract are given without any warranty on the part of the Employer as to their accuracy or completeness, and they shall be deemed to be supplied for the Contractor's information only. However, it has been clarified that they must be the whole record of such investigation or survey as has been carried out.

3. Works (工程)

Works - As a catch-all definition to avoid the fine argument that the Works are for "build only" not including design, service and maintenance, “the Works” has been defined to include:

  • permanent work (永久工程) required to be carried out and completed by the Contractor under the Contract;
  • temporary work (臨時工程) required for the carrying out and completion of the permanent work;
  • services (服務) required to be carried out and completed by the Contractor under the Contract;
  • materials (物料) supplied by the Employer for incorporation by the Contractor into the Works after they are handed over to the Contractor;
  • design (設計) of any part of the permanent work if this is specified to be part of the Works;
  • service and maintenance (服務及保養) required to be carried out after substantial completion of the Works; and
  • provision of warranties and guarantees (保證及擔保).

The Works exclude:

  • materials supplied by the Employer for incorporation by the Contractor into the Works but only until such time when they are handed over to the Contractor;
  • materials (物料) or workmanship (工藝) or method (方法) or work (工作) which is not in accordance with the Contract; and
  • work or services carried out by the Contractor without authority under the Contract.

Design responsibility – The following have been clarified:

  • design of permanent work – the Employer shall engage the Contract Administrator or other designers to carry out the design work;
  • development of “design intent drawings” (設計意念圖) (declared as such) into detailed design of the components making up the complete system, installation or fitting, basically by way of shop drawings (製配圖) - the Contractor shall be responsible;
  • development of design of schematic and layout drawings (示意及佈置設計圖) of building services installations 機電工程 into shop or installation drawings – the Contractor shall be responsible;
  • design of temporary work – the Contractor shall be responsible; and
  • Contractor’s design to be approved and be fit for the intended purpose (適合意圖達到的目的).

Testing and commissioning (測試及調試) - Before they may be certified as substantially completed, all mechanically, hydraulically, electrically or electronically operated parts (機械、水壓、電力或電子操作的部分) of the Works and any parts of the Works connected by and including pipes, ducts, conduits, trunking, wiring or cables shall be tested and commissioned in accordance with the requirements of this Contract.

Equal and approved (獲准相等) - For a material where the Contractor is permitted to propose “equal and approved” or “approved equal” brands or models, the Contractor may propose a brand or model of the same kind of material equal in performance and quality to that originally specified or proposed in the Contract. Traditionally, such proposal should have no cost effect. However, there have been cases where the standard of performance and quality is not precise enough and the prices of the alternatives apparently meeting the standard are too cheap. On the other hand, it would not be reasonable to accept only more expensive alternatives. It is therefore clarified that no cost reduction shall be required if the alternative brand or model is not cheaper than the cheapest of those originally specified or proposed in this Contract by more than 10%, otherwise a share of the cost saving shall be proposed.

Contractors’ alternative proposals (承包商的另選建議) - For other cases, as usual, the Contractor’s alternative proposals shall not be adopted without the prior written approval by the Contract Administrator. The approval shall have no effect on the Contract Price or the Completion Date unless the effect is specifically stated in the written approval, in which case, the approval shall be deemed to be a Variation instruction. Under no circumstances shall the approval relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under this Contract.

4. Time

Extension of time (工期延長) - Early and progressive submission of extension of time and delay and disruption monetary claims has been encouraged with time frames specified (as good practice rather than as time limits).

It was noted when drafting the Standard Form that in spite of the usual contract practice of specifying a short period of time after the commencement of a delay or disruption event as the time limit for submitting notices and claims, Contractors are still late in submitting their notices and claims, and Contract Administrators are late in ascertaining the claims pending the Employers’ blessing. It was considered that for maintenance and renovation works, Contractors are less sophisticated, laymen building owners as Employers would want to be consulted before granting time and monetary compensation, and Contract Administrators would want to play safe. Therefore, short time bars were considered to be not practicable nor desirable, a more practical approach has been adopted:

  • A more relaxed time bar with longer time has been specified for the Contractor to submit extension of time and delay and disruption monetary claims:
    • Extension of time claims to be submitted regularly but not later than the Completion Date of the relevant Works Section or its extended completion date previously claimed by the Contractor; and
    • Delay and disruption monetary claims to be submitted regularly but not later than 3 months after the direct loss and/or expense having been incurred, progressive submissions permitted for continuing events.
  • On the other hand, with the relaxed time limit, the Contractor shall bear the consequence of his own non-submission, late submission or insufficient submission of notices or information. The Contract Administrator and the Quantity Surveyor are only obliged to act based on information received without an obligation to demand for further information from the Contractor.

It has been clarified that the Contractor shall continuously use his best endeavours to prevent or mitigate delay or disruption to the progress of the Works however caused, and to prevent the completion of the Works from being delayed or further delayed, but the use of best endeavours by the Contractor shall not require the Contractor to accelerate the carrying out of the Works to recover delay caused by an Excusable Event.

An extension of time is to compensate the working time lost. This means that working days should be suitably converted to calendar days.

When an Excusable Event occurs in the period of delay after the Completion Date but before the substantial completion of a Works Section, extension of time shall still be granted but only for the net duration of the delay rather than granting the gross period until the end of the delay.

Extension of time granted shall not be reduced unless it has been based upon incorrect information provided by the Contractor.

Determining time and cost effects (工期及造價影響的確定) - To remedy the situation of some contracts of specifying a time limit for the Contractor to submit notices and claims without at the same time specifying a time limit for the Contractor Administrator and the Quantity Surveyor to respond, the Standard Form requires the Contract Administrator and the Quantity Surveyor respectively to respond within 14 days after the receipt of an extension of time notice or monetary claim, while subsequent review is permitted in light of further evidence at any time before issuing the Final Certificate.

Handover after completion (竣工後交付) - 14 days have been specified for the Contractor to hand over a Works Section after substantial completion and 7 days for demobilizing from the residual retained areas.

5. Contract Basis (合同基礎)

Interpretation of Contract Documents (合同文件的釋義) - The order of precedence of the Contract Documents has been clarified, with wider coverage, as:

  • Contract Agreement (合同協議);
  • Tender Correspondence (投標來往函件);
  • Form of Tender or the Tender (投標表格或投標書);
  • Special Contract Conditions (特殊合同條款);
  • Schedule of Works (工程項目清單);
  • the Preliminaries section of the Contract Specification (合同規範內的開辦經營要求部分);
  • Contract Conditions (合同條款);
  • Contract Drawings (合同圖紙); and
  • Sections of the Contract Specification other than the Preliminaries section (合同規範內的開辦經營要求部分之外的其他部分) (i.e. Technical Specification).

Documents issued later in time shall take precedence, particular specification shall take precedence over general specification, detailed drawings shall take precedence over general drawings, specification and drawings specially prepared for the Works shall take precedence over standard specification and drawings.

6. Prices (價款)

Types of contract (合同類型) - To offer greater flexibility and reduce the need to amend a standard form suiting one type to suit another type, optional clauses have been included to deal with the three different common types of contract, which may be selected in the Particulars of Agreement:

  • Lump Sum Contract (總價承包合同)
    • basically quantities are to be estimated by the Tenderers at their own risks;
    • there is also a clause dealing with cases where the quantities are at the Employer’s risks; however, if full scale Bills of Quantities are to be used, this clause may need special conditions to make it more comprehensive;
  • Remeasurement Contract (重新計量合同); and
  • Rates Only Contract (純單價承包合同).

Measurement and pricing clauses - Clauses have also been introduced to deal with:

  • Arithmetical errors (算術錯誤);
  • Provisional quantities (暫定數量);
  • Method of measurement (工程量計算規則);
  • Provisional sums (暫定款); and
  • Prime cost rates (暫定成本單價).

It may be argued that these clauses should, as usual practice, be included in the Conditions of Tendering, Preliminaries or Preambles. Because of their common nature, these matters are usually encountered, but there are no standard Conditions of Tendering, Preliminaries or Preambles amongst building professionals. This makes the wording of the clauses and therefore interpretations vary amongst building professionals. It was therefore considered more appropriate to deal with these common matters in the Standard Form.

Valuation (計價)- The valuation rules for valuation of Variations and of work carried out by the Contractor covered by a provisional sum are basically the same as those used in the traditional forms of contracts, being Contract Rates ==> pro-rata rates ==> star rates ==> daywork rates, but with the following enhancements:

  • The terms “pro-rata rates” (換算單價) and “star rates” (打星單價) have been formally used. (While they have been used in everyday work, they have not been formally used in the traditional forms of contracts.)
  • It has been clarified that a pro-rata rate shall use the Contract Rates for comparable items as the base with adjustment for the net difference in costs due to the difference in character or conditions plus the same percentage for profits and overheads as used in the relevant Contract Rates.
  • It has also been clarified that a star rate shall be derived from market rates including rates used on other comparable projects fairly adjusted to take into consideration the nature and conditions under which the work is carried out under this Contract or from first principle based on actual costs plus the percentage for profits and overheads generally used in the Contract Rates.
  • If there is any disagreement as to the percentage for profits and overheads generally used in the Contract Rates, 15% shall be used for mark-up on the costs of direct labour, materials and plant. If the work is sub-contracted, then 10% shall be used for mark-up on the subcontract prices. For the SFBC 2005/2006 or before, 15% is usually taken as a convenient but not mandatory norm for all cases.

Contractor’s claims for extras (承包商索賠) - The usual practice that any changes made to the Contractor’s submissions such as drawings, samples or catalogues in consequence of any comments made by the Contract Administrator shall not be a Variation has been retained, but it has been clarified that if the Contractor disagrees, he shall immediately upon the receipt of the relevant comment or instruction write to the Contract Administrator to seek clarification.

Payment (付款) - The usual payment practice of: Contractor’s payment application ==> Quantity Surveyor’s valuation ==> Contractor Administrator’s certification ==> Contractor’s invoice ==> Employer’s payment, has been retained, with the following specific details:

  • Payment applications are to be submitted at monthly intervals before substantial completion, and at bimonthly intervals thereafter.
  • A Payment Certificate is to be issued within 14 days of receipt of the Contractor’s application.
  • A comprehensive checklist of how to compute the net amount payable has been given.
  • There is a reminder that any advance payment shall be made only after the provision by the Contractor of a surety bond in a form acceptable to the Contract Administrator and of a value not less than the amount of the advance payment.
  • Unlike the SFBC 2005/2006 or before, it is permissible to deduct liquidated damages from the net amount payable.

Final Account (結算) - A comprehensive checklist of how to compute the final Contract Price has been given. The Contractor’s proposed Final Account shall be submitted within 3 months from the completion of the whole of the Works. The whole Final Account shall be agreed as soon as possible not later than 1 month after the issue of the Defects Rectification Certificate. If the Quantity Surveyor considers that he has taken into account all the representation of the Contractor but still fails to obtain the Contractor’s agreement, he may issue a unilateral Final Account to the Contractor and declare it as such.

Final Certificate (最終證書) - The Contract Administrator shall issue the Final Certificate within 14 days after the issue of the Defects Rectification Certificate of the last Works Section or within 14 days after the agreement of the Final Account or after 1 month has lapsed after the issue of the unilateral Final Account, whichever is the later. The Final Certificate is not final in respect of liabilities for any latent defects not discovered at the time of the Final Account, or matters affected by any bribery offence, fraud, dishonesty or fraudulent concealment.

7. Quality (質量)

This Section covers the usual matters like: Quality liability; Materials, workmanship and method to comply with Contract; Approval; Samples; Testing and inspection; Defects liability; and Warranties and guarantees.

Excepted Risks (免責風險) - The Contractor is exempted from loss or damage arising from the Excepted Risks.

Warranties and guarantees (保證及擔保) - Apart from warranties and guarantees specifically required by the Contract, it may be possible that the Contractor’s suppliers and sub-contractors provide standard warranties or guarantees. The Contractor shall assign the benefits of all such warranties or guarantees to the Employer (so far as he is lawfully able to do so). To prevent undue delay in the submission of warranties and guarantees, it has been specified that the submission of all warranties and guarantees satisfactorily in full compliance with the Contract shall be a pre-requisite to the release of one half of the retention fund upon substantial completion of the relevant Works Section.

8. Contractor’s Documents (承包商的文件)

This Section covers the usual matters like: Shop drawings (製配圖), Construction method statement and programme (施工方案及進度計劃), Progress reports (進度報告), and As-built records (竣工記錄).

9. General Obligations (一般責任)

This Section covers the usual matters like: Statutory obligations (法定責任); Intellectual property (知識產權); Assignment (轉讓); Care of the Works (工程的保護); Injury to persons and property and indemnity to Employer (人身及財產的損傷及對發包方的保障); Provision of all things necessary (提供一切必需的); Labour and site management team (人力及現場管理班子); Temporary site facilities (現場臨時設施); Setting out (開線定位); Cleanliness and tidiness (清潔及整齊); Protection (保護); and Visitors (訪客).

It may be argued that some of the clauses under “7. Quality”, “8. Contractor’s Documents”, and “9. General Obligations” should, as usual practice, be included in the Preliminaries. They have been included in the Contract Conditions to reduce the need to draft Preliminaries clauses to cover these usually encountered matters.

Administrative charge (行政費)- A special provision has been introduced to impose a 10% administrative charge on payment of statutory charges on behalf of the defaulting party.

Prevention of bribery offences (防止賄賂罪行) - Clauses on Prevention of Bribery Offences with consequence of determination of the employment of the Contractor have been introduced to stress the importance:

9.13 Prevention of bribery offences

The Contractor shall not offer, give or agree to give to any person any bribe, commission, gift, loan or advantage of any kind as defined in the Prevention of Bribery Ordinance, Cap 201 as an inducement or reward for doing or forbearing to do or for having done or forborne to do any action in relation to the execution of this Contract or any other contract with the Employer, or for showing or forbearing to show favour or disfavour to any person in relation to this Contract or other contract with the Employer. Any commitment of the aforesaid offences by any person with the Contractor’s prior authorization or subsequent acquiescence shall be deemed to be the Contractor’s fault. The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to ensure that his employees, agents, sub-contractors, suppliers, or other persons for whom the Contractor is responsible comply with the foregoing provisions.

11.1 Determination by Employer

11.1.1 The Employer may but not unreasonably or vexatiously by notice by registered post or recorded delivery to the Contractor forthwith determine the employment of the Contractor under this Contract in any one or more of the following events: … (f) the Contractor (or any person for whom the Contractor is responsible with or without the knowledge of the Contractor) is convicted of a bribery offence described in Clause 9.13. …

10. Insurances and Bond (保險及履約保證)

This Section covers Employees’ Compensation Insurance; Contractors' All Risks and Third party liability Insurance; and Surety Bond or cash security.

As compared with SFBC 2005/2006, these clauses have been very much simplified.

Employees’ Compensation Insurance (僱員補償保險) - It is the Contractor’s responsibility to take out Employees’ Compensation Insurance, to follow the statutory requirements.

Contractors’ All Risks and Third Party Liability Insurance (工程一切險及第三者責任險) - Either the Employer or the Contractor may be specified in the Particulars of Agreement to take out the Contractors’ All Risks and Third Party Liability Insurance.

The Building Manager has been specified as one of the “the principals” (委託人).

Use of a company master policy or annual policy is permissible.

Administrative charge - A 15% administrative charge is to be imposed on insurance premium paid on behalf of the defaulting party who fails to insure.

Bond and cash security (履約保證書或押金) - A cash security equal to the amount of the Surety Bond may be withheld temporarily from the Payment Certificate if the Contractor so elects or if the Contractor fails to submit an approved Bond.

Upon the issue of a Defects Rectification Certificate of a Works Section and the settlement of all claims (if any), the amount of the Bond or cash security shall be reduced pro-rata to ratio of the value of that Works Section to the final Contract Price currently estimated. Upon the issue of the Defects Rectification Certificate of the last Works Section and the settlement of all claims (if any), the Bond or the balance of the cash security shall be released to the Contractor without interests.

Pre-2005/2016 SFBC stipulate the release of the Surety Bond upon Practical Completion. SFBC 2005/2006 offer a choice between Substantial Completion and Defects Rectification Certificate.

11. Determination (終止)

This Section covers the determination by the Employer or by the Contractor himself of the Contractor’s employment (僱用).

Apart from the usual grounds for determination, the following grounds for determination by the Employer of the employment of the Contractor have been introduced:

  • the Contractor without reasonable cause fails persistently to rectify defects after substantial completion of the whole of the Works and the Employer pursuant to another clause employs others to rectify the defects for 5 times or more and the total cost of rectifying defects exceeds $100,000;
  • the Contractor without reasonable cause fails to submit evidence of the Employees’ Compensation Insurance and the Contractors’ All Risks and Third Party Liability Insurance in the specified manner within 1 month after the Contract Award Date; and
  • the Contractor (or any person for whom the Contractor is responsible with or without the knowledge of the Contractor) is convicted of a bribery offence.

12. Dispute Resolution (爭議解決)

Like SFBC 2005/2016, the dispute resolution procedures are:

  • Reference to Designated Representatives (提交指派的代表解決);
  • Reference to Mediation (提交調解解決); and
  • Reference to Arbitration (提交仲裁解決).

Pre-2005/2016 SFBC 2005/2016 only provides for arbitration.

13. Amendments

The following amendments in {} are recommended:

4.5 Notices and claims

4.5.4 In any case, the notice under Clause 4.5.1 and the updated notices under Clause 4.5.2 shall not be submitted later than the Completion Date of the relevant Works Section or its extended completion date previously claimed by the Contractor, {whichever is the later,} and the Contractor’s monetary claim under Clause 4.5.3 shall not be submitted later than 3 months after the direct loss and/or expense having been incurred, progressive submission permitted.

在任何情況下,第4.5.1條要求的通知及第4.5.2條要求的更新通知不能遲於有關的工程分部的應竣工日或承包商之前申請延展的竣工日提交,{以較遲者為準,}而承包商按第4.5.3條提交的經濟索賠不能遲於直接損失及/或支出發生後3個月提交,漸進式提交是容許的。

7.7 Warranties and guarantees

7.7.2 If the Contractor has any suppliers’ and sub-contractors’ warranties or guarantees for materials or work required by this Contract, he shall assign the benefits of all such warranties or guarantees to the Employer (so far as he is lawfully able to do so){ the benefits of all such warranties or guarantees}.

如果承包商得到供應商及分包商對本合同所需的物料或工作提供保證或擔保,在法律容許的範圍內,他須向發包方轉讓所有該等保證或擔保的權益。

11.2 Determination by Contractor

11.2.1(b) the Employer interferes with or obstructs the issue of any certificate due under this Contract;
發包方干擾或{}礙按本合同應發證書的發出;

12.4 Reference to arbitration

12.4.3 The arbitration shall be a domestic arbitration conducted in accordance with the Arbitration Ordinance (Chapter 609, Laws of Hong Kong) {with all the provisions in Schedule 2 thereto applicable} and, unless otherwise agreed by the Contract Parties, with the Domestic Arbitration Rules of the Hong Kong International Arbitration Centre except those provisions in the Rules relating to the appointment of the arbitrator.

仲裁須為本地仲裁,按香港法例第609章《仲裁條例》{(其附表2的所有條文適用)}及,除非合同雙方另有協議,香港國際仲裁中心的本地仲裁規則進行,其中關於委任仲裁員的條款除外。

APPENDIX A - SURETY BOND

For the third signing option:

代表{擔保人承包商}在見證下簽署、蓋章及送達

 

End of Page

Standard Form of Contract For Maintenance and Renovation Works (removed)

Standard Form of Contract For Maintenance and Renovation Works (removed) KCTang

Go to End

Standard Form of Contract For Maintenance and Renovation Works - For use in the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region 維修及裝修工程 標準合同 - 用於香港特別行政區

8/7/2021: Full version with commentary removed because of copyright issue.

End of Page

NEC 4 ECC Identified Terms and Defined Terms

NEC 4 ECC Identified Terms and Defined Terms KCTang

Go to End

Note

20/1/2023: Various forms of Senior Representative added.

8/8/2022: General updating.

18/7/2022: Created.

Identified Terms (terms identified in the Contract Data and shown in italics)

  • access date
  • access dates
  • activity schedule
  • additional conditions of contract
  • Adjudicator
  • Adjudicator nominating body
  • Adjudicator’s
  • arbitration procedure
  • assessment interval
  • beneficiaries
  • beneficiary
  • bill of quantities
  • boundary of the site
  • Client
  • Client’s
  • completion date
  • completion dates
  • condition
  • conditions of contract
  • Contractor
  • Contractor’s
  • Contractor’s share percentages
  • Cost Manager
  • Cost Manager’s
  • currency of the contract
  • defect correction period
  • defects date
  • defects dates
  • delay damages
  • Dispute Avoidance Board nominating body
  • exchange rates
  • fee percentage
  • fee percentages
  • incentive schedule
  • information execution plan
  • interest rate
  • key date
  • key dates
  • key person
  • key persons
  • language of the contract
  • law of the contract
  • method of measurement
  • named supplier
  • named suppliers
  • people rates
  • period for reply
  • project bank
  • Project Manager
  • Project Manager’s
  • Promoter
  • Promoter’s objective
  • retention free
  • retention percentage
  • section 
  • section’s
  • sections
  • sections’
  • Senior Representative
  • Senior Representative's
  • Senior Representatives
  • Senior Representatives’
  • share ranges
  • starting date
  • Subcontractor undertaking to Others
  • Subcontractor undertaking to the Client
  • Supervisor
  • Supervisor’s
  • tribunal
  • undertaking to Others
  • value engineering percentage
  • weather data
  • weather measurements
  • working areas
  • works

(various forms of Senior Representative added, 21/1/2023)

Defined Terms (have capital initials)

  • Accepted Programme
  • Activity Schedule
  • Authorisation
  • Base Date Index
  • Bill of Quantities
  • Budget
  • Completion
  • Completion Date
  • Contract Data
  • Contract Date
  • Core Group
  • Core Group Members
  • Corrupt Act
  • Defect
  • Defects
  • Defects Certificate
  • Defined Cost
  • Disallowed Cost
  • Dispute Avoidance Board
  • Early Warning Register
  • Equipment
  • Fee
  • Insurance Table
  • Joining Deed
  • Key Date
  • Key Performance Indicator
  • Latest Index
  • Materials
  • Named Suppliers
  • Others
  • Own Contract
  • Parties
  • Partnering Information
  • Partners
  • People Rates
  • Plant
  • Price Adjustment Factor
  • Price for Work Done to Date
  • Prices
  • Pricing Information
  • Project Cost
  • Provide the Works
  • Schedule of Partners
  • Scope
  • Short Schedule of Cost Components
  • Site
  • Site Information
  • Specialist Subcontractor
  • Stage One
  • Stage Two
  • Subcontractor
  • Supplier
  • Total of the Prices
  • Trust Deed
  • Working Areas

Terms to be converted from GCC or SMM4 to NEC4

GCC or SMM4 NEC4
Architect (as Supervising Officer) Project Manager
Bill of Quantities bill of quantities
Bills of Quantities bill of quantities
claim for additional payment notification of compensation event
claim for extension of time notification of compensation event
claim for extension of time and/or additional payment notification of compensation event
Conditions of Contract conditions of contract
condition (working condition) condition
Cost (in GCC) Defined Cost (many different names)
date for commencement of the Contract Contract Date
date for commencement of the Works starting date
date for possession of the Site access date
date of acceptance of the Tender Contract Date
date of the award of the Contract Contract Date
date of the letter of acceptance Contract Date
Defects Liability Period The period between Completion and the defects date
Employer Client (Employer in NEC3)
equipment (for incorporation into the Works) Plant
expiry of the Maintenance Period defects date
extension of time change to the Completion Date
Final Contract Sum final total of the Prices
GCC Clause 16 Programme Accepted Programme
Period of Maintenance The period between Completion and the defects date
plant (construction plant) Equipment
Price Fluctuation Factor Price Adjustment Factor
Schedule of Rates bill of quantities
Supervising Officer Project Manager
Supervising Officer's Representative Supervisor
Surveyor (Quantity Surveyor) Cost Manager
the Contractor the Contractor
the date for completion of the Works completion date
the extended date for completion of the Works Completion Date
the Main Contract the contract
the Works the works

 

(conversions from Architect, Employer, Supervising Officer, Supervising Officer's Representative, Surveyor and Contractor added, 8/8/2022)

 

A global search and replace action may cause errors with these terms

Terms which are used both as identified terms and defined terms

  • activity schedule vs Activity Schedule
  • bill of quantities vs Bill of Quantities
  • completion date vs Completion Date
  • key date vs Key Date
  • named suppliers vs Named Suppliers
  • Dispute Avoidance Board Nominating Body vs Dispute Avoidance Board
  • people rates vs People Rates
  • working areas vs Working Areas

Previous terms which may mix up with or form part of other expressions

  • Architect as in Architectural Services Department
  • Contractor as in Sub-contractor
  • condition
  • cost
  • section
  • Surveyor
  • tribunal
  • works
  • (Adding "the " before the word or a space at the end may help in some cases.)

(added, 8/8/2022)

Identified terms which may mix up with or form part of other expressions

  • (when changing to italics)
  • contract
  • Contractor
  • condition
  • section 
  • tribunal
  • works

(note in brackets and Contractor added, 8/8/2022)

Defined terms which may mix up with or form part of other expressions

  • (when capitalising the first letter)
  • Authorisation
  • Budget
  • Completion
  • Defect
  • Defects
  • Equipment
  • Fee
  • Materials
  • Others
  • Parties
  • Plant
  • Prices
  • Scope
  • Site
  • Supplier

(note in brackets added, 8/8/2022)

End of Page

NEC 4 ECC Hong Kong Edition July 2023 - Main Option Clauses

NEC 4 ECC Hong Kong Edition July 2023 - Main Option Clauses KCTang

Go to End

Note

Created: 18/3/2024

Intro

NEC 4 ECC means NEC 4 Engineering and Construction Contract published by Thomas Telford Ltd who owns the copyright.

Retabulated to enable easier comparison

OPTION A: PRICED CONTRACT WITH ACTIVITY SCHEDULE
OPTION B: PRICED CONTRACT WITH BILL OF QUANTITIES
OPTION C: TARGET CONTRACT WITH ACTIVITY SCHEDULE
OPTION D: TARGET CONTRACT WITH BILL OF QUANTITIES
OPTION E: COST REIMBURSABLE CONTRACT
OPTION F: MANAGEMENT CONTRACT

Bullet "o" below is "-" in NEC. 

Option Clause Text
            11 Identified and defined terms
A   C       11.2 (21) [HK Edition: (25)] The Activity Schedule is the activity schedule unless later changed in accordance with these conditions of contract.
  B   D     11.2 (22) [HK Edition: (26)] The Bill of Quantities is the bill of quantities unless later changed in accordance with these conditions of contract.
               
A B         11.2 (23) [HK Edition: (27)] Defined Cost is the cost of the components in the Short Schedule of Cost Components.
    C D E   11.2 (24) [HK Edition: (28)] Defined Costis the cost of the components in the Schedule of Cost Components less Disallowed Cost.
          F 11.2

(25) [HK Edition: (29)] Defined Costis

  • the amount of payments due to Subcontractors for work which is subcontracted without taking account of amounts paid to or retained from the Subcontractor by the Contractor which would result in the Client paying or retaining the amount twice and
  • the prices for work done by the Contractor

less Disallowed Cost.

               
    C D E   11.2

(26) [HK Edition: (30)] Disallowed Cost is cost which

  • is not justified by the Contractor's accounts and records,
  • should not have been paid to a Subcontractor or supplier in accordance with its contract,
  • was incurred only because the Contractor did not
    • follow an acceptance or procurement procedure stated in the Scope [HK Edition: contract],
    • give an early warning which the contract required it to give or
    • give notification to the Project Manager of the preparation for and conduct of an adjudication or proceedings of a tribunal [HK Edition: an arbitration or other tribunal] between the Contractor and a Subcontractor or supplier

and the cost of

  • correcting Defects after Completion,
  • correcting Defects caused by the Contractor not complying with a constraint on how it is to Provide the Works stated in the Scope,
  • Plant and Materials not used to Provide the Works (after allowing for reasonable wastage) unless resulting from a change to the Scope,
  • resources not used to Provide the Works (after allowing for reasonable availability and utilisation) or not taken away from the Working Areas when the Project Manager requested and    
  • preparation for and conduct of an adjudication or proceedings of a tribunal [HK Edition: an arbitration or other tribunal] between the Parties.
          F 11.2

(27) [HK Edition: (31)] Disallowed Cost is cost which

  • is not justified by the Contractor's accounts and records,
  • should not have been paid to a Subcontractor or supplier in accordance with its contract,
  • is a payment to a Subcontractor for
  • work which the Contract Data states that the Contractor will do itself or
  • the Contractor's management,
  • was incurred only because the Contractor did not
  • follow an acceptance or procurement procedure stated in the contract,
  • give an early warning which the contract required it to give or
  • give notification to the Project Manager of the preparation for and conduct of an adjudication or proceedings of an arbitration or other tribunal between the Contractor and a Subcontractor or supplier

and the cost of preparation for and conduct of an adjudication or proceedings of an arbitration or other tribunal between the Parties.

               
A           11.2 (28) [HK Edition: Not used] The People Rates are the people rates unless later changed in accordance with the contract.
               
A           11.2

(29) [HK Edition: (32)] The Price for Work Done to Date is the total of the Prices for

  • each group of completed activities and
  • each completed activity which is not in a group.

A completed activity is one without notified Defects the correction of which will delay following work.

  B         11.2

(30) [HK Edition: (33)] The Price for Work Done to Date is the total of

  • the quantity of the work which the Contractor has completed for each item in the Bill of Quantities multiplied by the rate and
  • a proportion of each lump sum which is the proportion of the work covered by the item which the Contractor has completed.

Completed work is work which is without notified Defects the correction of which will delay following work.

    C D E F 11.2 (31) [HK Edition: (34)] The Price for Work Done to Date is the total Defined Cost which the Project Manager forecasts will have been paid by the Contractor before [HK Edition: one week after] the next assessment date plus the Fee.
               
A   C       11.2 (32) [HK Edition: (35)] The Prices are the lump sum Prices for each of the activities on the Activity Schedule unless later changed in accordance with the contract.
  B   D     11.2 (33) [HK Edition: (36)] The Prices are the lump sums and the amounts obtained by multiplying the rates by the quantities for the items in the Bill of Quantities.
        E F 11.2 (34) [HK Edition: (37)] The Prices are the forecast of the total Defined Cost for the whole of the works plus the Fee.
               
      D     11.2

(35) [HK Edition: (38)] The Total of the Prices is the total of

  • the quantity of the work which the Contractor has completed for each item in the Bill of Quantities multiplied by the rate and
  • a proportion of each lump sum which is the proportion of the work covered by the item which the Contractor has completed.

Completed work is work which is without notified Defects the correction of which will delay following work.

               
            20 Providing the works
          F 20.2 The Contractor manages the Contractor's design, the provision of Site services and the construction and installation of the works. The Contractor subcontracts the Contractor’s design, the provision of Site services and the construction and installation of the works except work which the Contract Data states that it will do.
    C D E F 20.3 The Contractor advises the Project Manager on the practical implications of the design of the works and on subcontracting arrangements.
    C D E F 20.4 The Contractor prepares forecasts of the total Defined Cost for the whole of the works in consultation with the Project Manager and submits them to the Project Manager. Forecasts are prepared at the intervals stated in the Contract Data from the starting date until Completion of the whole of the works. An explanation of the changes made since the previous forecast is submitted with each forecast.
               
            26 Subcontracting
    C D E F 26.4 The Contractor submits the pricing information in the proposed subcontract documents for each subcontract to the Project Manager unless the Project Manager has agreed that no submission is required.
               
            31 The programme 
A           31.4 The Contractor provides information which shows how each activity on the Activity Schedule relates to the operations on each programme submitted for acceptance.
               
            41 Tests and inspections
    C D E   41.7 When the Project Manager assesses the cost incurred by the Client in repeating a test or inspection after a Defect is found, the Project Manager does not include the Contractor's cost of carrying out the repeat test or inspection.
               
            50 Assessing the amount due
    C D     50.7 Payments of Defined Cost made by the Contractor in a currency other than the currency of the contract are included in the amount due as payments to be made to it in the same currency. Such payments are converted to the currency of the contract in order to calculate the Fee and any Contractor's share using the exchange rates.
        E F 50.8 Payments of Defined Cost made by the Contractor in a currency other than the currency of the contract are included in the amount due as payments to be made to it in the same currency. Such payments are converted to the currency of the contract in order to calculate the Fee using the exchange rates.
    C D E F 50.9

The Contractor notifies the Project Manager when the Defined Cost for a part of the works has been finalised, and makes available for inspection the records necessary to demonstrate that it has been correctly assessed. The Project Manager reviews the records made available, and no later than thirteen weeks after the Contractor's notification

  • accepts that part of Defined Cost as correct,
  • notifies the Contractor that further records are needed or
  • notifies the Contractor of errors in its assessment.

The Contractor provides any further records requested or advises the correction of the errors in its assessment within four weeks of the Project Manager’s notification. The Project Manager reviews the records provided, and within four weeks

  • accepts that part of Defined Cost as correct or
  • notifies the Contractor of the correct assessment of that part of Defined Cost.

If the Project Manager does not notify a decision on that part of Defined Cost within the time stated, the Contractor’s assessment is treated as correct.

               
            52 Defined Cost
    C D E   52.2

The Contractor keeps these records

  • accounts of payments of Defined Cost,
  • proof that the payments have been made,
  • communications about and assessments of compensation events for  Subcontractors and
  • other records as stated in the Scope.
          F 52.3

The Contractor keeps these records

  • accounts of payments made to Subcontractors,
  • proof that the payments have been made,
  • communications about and assessments of compensation events for  Subcontractors and
  • other records as stated in the Scope.
    C D E F 52.4 The Contractor allows the Project Manager to inspect at any time within working hours the accounts and records which it is required to keep.
               
            54 The Contractor’s share
      C     54.1 The Project Manager assesses the Contractor's share of the difference between the total of the Prices and the Price for Work Done to Date. The difference is divided into increments falling within each of the share ranges. The limits of a share range are the Price for Work Done to Date divided by the total of the Prices, expressed as a percentage. The Contractor's share equals the sum of the products of the increment within each share range and the corresponding Contractor’s share percentage.
    C       54.2 If the Price for Work Done to Date is less than the total of the Prices, the Contractor is paid its share of the saving. If the Price for Work Done to Date is greater than the total of the Prices, the Contractor pays its share of the excess.
    C       54.3 The Project Manager makes a preliminary assessment of the Contractor's share at Completion of the whole of the works using forecasts of the final Price for Work Done to Date and the final total of the Prices. This share is included in the amount due following Completion of the whole of the works.
    C       54.4 The Project Manager makes a final assessment of the Contractor's share using the final Price for Work Done to Date and the final total of the Prices. This share is included in the final amount due.
      D     54.5 The Project Manager assesses the Contractor's share of the difference between the Total of the Prices and the Price for Work Done to Date. The difference is divided into increments falling within each of the share ranges. The limits of a share range are the Price for Work Done to Date divided by the Total of the Prices, expressed as a percentage. The Contractor's share equals the sum of the products of the increment within each share range and the corresponding Contractor’s share percentage.
      D     54.6 If the Price for Work Done to Date is less than the Total of the Prices, the Contractor is paid its share of the saving. If the Price for Work Done to Date is greater than the Total of the Prices, the Contractor pays its share of the excess.
      D     54.7 The Project Manager makes a preliminary assessment of the Contractor's share at Completion of the whole of the works using forecasts of the final Price for Work Done to Date and the final Total of the Prices. This share is included in the amount due following Completion of the whole of the works.
      D     54.8 The Project Manager makes a final assessment of the Contractor's share using the final Price for Work Done to Date and the final Total of the Prices. This share is included in the final amount due.
               
            55 The Activity Schedule
A           55.1 Information in the Activity Schedule is not Scope or Site Information. If the activities on the Activity Schedule do not relate to the Scope, the Contractor corrects the Activity Schedule.
    C       55.2 Information in the Activity Schedule is not Scope or Site Information.
A           55.3

If the Contractor

  • changes a planned method of working at its discretion so that the activities on the Activity Schedule do not relate to the operations on the Accepted Programme or
  • corrects the Activity Schedule so that the activities on the Activity Schedule relate to the Scope

the Contractor submits a revision of the Activity Schedule to the Project Manager for acceptance.

A           55.4

A reason for not accepting a revision of the Activity Schedule is that

  • it does not relate to the operations on the Accepted Programme,
  • any changed Prices are not reasonably distributed between the activities which are not completed or
  • the total of the Prices is changed.
               
            56 The Bill of Quantities
    B   D   56.1 Information in the Bill of Quantities is not Scope or Site Information.
               
            60 Compensation events
  B   D     60.4

A difference between the final total quantity of work done and the quantity stated for an item in the Bill of Quantities is a compensation event if

  • the difference does not result from a change to the Scope,
  • the difference causes the Defined Cost per unit of quantity to change and
  • the rate in the Bill of Quantities for the item multiplied by the final total quantity of work done is more than [HK Edition: the greater of]
    • 0.5% of the total of the Prices at the Contract Date [HK Edition: or
    • the compensation amount]

If the Defined Cost per unit of quantity is reduced, the affected rate is reduced.

  B   D     60.5 A difference between the final total quantity of work done and the quantity for an item stated in the Bill of Quantities which delays Completion or the meeting of the Condition stated for a Key Date is a compensation event.
  B   D     60.6

The Project Manager gives an instruction to correct a mistake in the Bill of Quantities which is

  • a departure from the rules for item descriptions or division of the work into items in the method of measurement or
  • due to an ambiguity or inconsistency.

Each such correction is a compensation event which may lead to reduced Prices.

  B   D     60.7 In assessing a compensation event which results from a correction of an inconsistency between the Bill of Quantities and another document, the Contractor is assumed to have taken the Bill of Quantities as correct.
               
            63 Assessing compensation events
A B         63.12 If the effect of a compensation event is to reduce the total Defined Cost and the event is a change to the Scope provided by the Client, which the Contractor proposed and the Project Manager accepted, the Prices are reduced by an amount calculated by multiplying the assessed effect of the compensation event by the value engineering percentage.
    C D     63.13 If the effect of a compensation event is to reduce the total Defined Cost and the event is a change to the Scope provided by the Client, which the Contractor proposed and the Project Manager accepted, the Prices are not reduced.
A   C       63.14 Assessments for changed Prices for compensation events are in the form of changes to the Activity Schedule.
  B   D     63.15

Assessments for changed Prices for compensation events are in the form of changes to the Bill of Quantities.

For the whole or a part of a compensation event for work not yet done and for which there is an item in the Bill of Quantities, the changes are

  • a changed rate,
  • a changed quantity or
  • a changed lump sum.

For the whole or a part of a compensation event for work not yet done and for which there is no item in the Bill of Quantities, the change is a new priced item which, unless the Project Manager and the Contractor agree otherwise, is compiled in accordance with the method of measurement.

For the whole or a part of a compensation event for work already done, the change is a new lump sum item.

A B         63.16 [HK Edition: Not used] If, when assessing a compensation event the People Rates do not include a rate for a category of person required, the Project Manager and Contractor may agree a new rate. If they do not agree the Project Manager assesses the rate based on the People Rates. The agreed or assessed rate becomes the People Rate for that category of person.
          F 63.17 [HK Edition: 63.16] If work which the Contractor is to do is affected by a compensation event, the Project Manager and the Contractor agree the change to the price for the work and any change to the Completion Date and Key Dates. If they do not agree, the Project Manager decides the change.
               
            93 Payment on termination
A           93.3 The amount due on termination is assessed without taking grouping of activities into account.
      C     93.4

If there is a termination, the Project Manager assesses the Contractor's share after certifying termination. The assessment uses as the Price for Work Done to Date the total of the Defined Cost which the Contractor has paid and which it is committed to pay for work done before termination, and uses as the total of the Prices

  • the lump sum price for each activity which has been completed and
  • a proportion of the lump sum price for each incomplete activity which is the proportion of the work in the activity which has been completed.
      D     93.5 If there is a termination, the Project Manager assesses the Contractor's share after certifying termination. The assessment uses, as the  Price for Work Done to Date, the total of the Defined Cost which the Contractor has paid and which it is committed to pay for work done before termination.
    C D     93.6 The Project Manager’s assessment of the Contractor's share is added to the amount due to the Contractor on termination if there has been a saving or deducted if there has been an excess.

 

End of Page

NEC4 ECC (Short) Schedule of Cost Components

NEC4 ECC (Short) Schedule of Cost Components KCTang

Go to End

Note

21/3/2024: Moved out from Demarcation between Costs and Fee.

4/3/2024: NEC Schedules changed to table form.

29/1/2024: Created under "Demarcation between Costs and Fee".

Tabulated

Schedule of Cost Components

This schedule is part of these conditions of contract only when Option C, D or E is used. An amount is included

•       only in one cost component and

•       only if it is incurred in order to Provide the Works.

Short Schedule of Cost Components

This schedule is part of these conditions of contract only when Option A or B is used. An amount is included

•     only in one cost component and

•     only if it is incurred in order to Provide the Works.

People

1     The following components of the cost of

•     people who are employed by the Contractor and whose normal place of working is within the Working Areas,

•     people who are employed by the Contractor and whose normal place of working is not within the Working Areas but who are working in the Working Areas, proportionate to the time they spend working in the Working Areas and

•     the people listed in Contract Data who are employed by the Contractor, whose normal place of working is not within the Working Areas and who are working outside of the Working Areas other than on manufacture and fabrication and design.

If the Project Manager agrees, additional people may be assessed as if they were listed in the Contract Data.

People

1     The following components of the cost of

•     people who are directly employed by the Contractor and whose normal place of working is within the Working Areas,

•     people who are directly employed by the Contractor and whose normal place of working is not within the Working Areas but who are working in the Working Areas, proportionate to the time they spend working in the Working Areas and

•     people who are not directly employed by the Contractor but are paid for by it according to the time worked while they are within the Working Areas.

11     For people who are directly employed by the Contractor, wages, salaries and amounts paid by the Contractor for people paid according to the time worked on the contract.

11     Amounts paid by the Contractor including those for meeting the requirements of the law but excluding the Contractor’s mandatory contribution

•     under the Mandatory Provident Fund Schemes Ordinance (Cap. 485) and 

•     under the Occupational Retirement Schemes Ordinance (Cap. 426). 

12     For people who are directly employed by the Contractor, payments related to work on the contract and made to people for

(a)     bonuses and incentives

(b)     overtime

(c)     working in special circumstances

(d)     special allowances

(e)     absence due to sickness and holidays

(f)     severance.

 

13     For people who are directly employed by the Contractor, payments made in relation to people in accordance with their employment contract for

(a)     travel

(b)     subsistence and lodging

(c)     relocation

(d)     medical examinations

(e)     passports and visas

(f)     travel insurance

(g)     items (a) to (f) for dependants

(h)     protective clothing

(i)     contributions, levies or taxes imposed by law but excluding the Contractor's mandatory contribution under the Mandatory Provident Fund Schemes Ordinance (Cap. 485) and contribution under the Occupational Retirement Schemes Ordinance (Cap. 426)

(j)     life assurance

(k)     death benefit

(l)     occupational accident benefits

(m)     medical aid and health insurance

(n)     a vehicle

(o)     safety training.

 

14     For people who are not directly employed by the Contractor but are paid for by the Contractor according to the time they work, the amounts paid by the Contractor.

 

Equipment

2     The following components of the cost of Equipment which is used within the Working Areas.

Equipment

2     The following components of the cost of Equipment which is used within the Working Areas.

21     Payments for the hire or rent of Equipment not owned by

•     the Contractor,

•     the Contractor's ultimate holding company or

•     a company with the same ultimate holding company

at the hire or rental rate multiplied by the time for which the Equipment is required.

21     Amounts for Equipment at competitively tendered or open market rates, multiplied by the time for which the Equipment is required. 

 

 

 

22     Payments for Equipment which is not listed in the Contract Data but is

•     owned by the Contractor,

•     purchased by the Contractor under a hire purchase or lease agreement or

•     hired by the Contractor from the Contractor's ultimate holding company or from a company with the same ultimate holding company

at open market rates, multiplied by the time for which the Equipment is required.

 

23     Payments for Equipment purchased for work included in the contract listed with a time-related on cost charge, in the Contract Data, of

•     the change in value over the period for which the Equipment is required and

•     the time-related on cost charge stated in the Contract Data for the period for which the Equipment is required.

The change in value is the difference between the purchase price and either the sale price or the open market sale price at the end of the period for which the Equipment is required. Interim payments of the change in value are made at each assessment date. A final payment is made in the next assessment after the change in value has been determined.

If the Project Manager agrees, an additional item of Equipment may be assessed as if it had been listed in the Contract Data.

 

24     Payments for the purchase price of Equipment which is consumed.

 

25     Unless included in the hire or rental rates, payments for

•     transporting Equipment to and from the Working Areas other than for repair and maintenance,

•     erecting and dismantling Equipment and

•     constructing, fabricating or modifying Equipment.

22     Unless included in the competitively tendered or open market rates under item 21, payments for

•     transporting Equipment to and from the Working Areas other than for repair and maintenance,

•     erecting and dismantling Equipment,

•     constructing, fabricating or modifying Equipment, 

•     the purchase price of Equipment which is consumed. 

26     Payments for purchase of materials used to construct or fabricate Equipment.

 

27     Unless included in the hire rates, the cost of operatives is included in the cost of people.

23     Unless included in the competitively tendered or open market rates under item 21, the cost of operatives is included in the cost of people.

Plant and Materials

3     The following components of the cost of Plant and Materials.`

Plant and Materials

3     The following components of the cost of Plant and Materials.

31     Payments for

•     purchasing Plant and Materials,

•     delivery to and removal from the Working Areas,

•     providing and removing packaging and

•     samples and tests.

31     Payments for

•     purchasing Plant and Materials,

•     delivery to and removal from the Working Areas,

•     providing and removing packaging and

•     samples and tests.

32     Cost is credited with payments received for disposal of Plant and Materials unless the cost is disallowed.

32     Cost is credited with payments received for disposal of Plant and Materials unless the cost is disallowed.

Subcontractors

4     The following components of the cost of Subcontractors.

Subcontractors

4     The following components of the cost of Subcontractors.

41     Payments to Subcontractors for work which is subcontracted without taking into account any amounts paid to or retained from the Subcontractor by the Contractor, which would result in the Client paying or retaining the amount twice.

41     Payments to Subcontractors for work which is subcontracted.

Charges

5     The following components of the cost of

•     charges paid or received by the Contractor and

•     providing accommodation and transport for the Project Manager and Supervisor

Charges

5     The following components of the cost of

•     charges paid or received by the Contractor and 

•     providing accommodation and transport for the Project Manager and Supervisor

51     Payments for the provision and use in the Working Areas of

•     water,

•     gas,

•     electricity,

•     telephone and

•     internet.

51     Payments for the provision and use in the Working Areas of

•     water,

•     gas,

•     electricity,

•     telephone and

•     internet.

52     Payments to public authorities and other properly constituted authorities of charges which they are authorised to make in respect of the works, but excluding the Contractor's payment of levies to 

•     the Pneumoconiosis Compensation Fund Board under the Pneumoconiosis and Mesothelioma (Compensation) Ordinance (Cap. 360) and

•     the Construction Industry Council under the Construction Workers Registration Ordinance (Cap. 583) and Construction Industry Council Ordinance (Cap. 587). 

52     Payments to public authorities and other properly constituted authorities of charges which they are authorised to make in respect of the works, but excluding the Contractor’s payment of levies to 

•     the Pneumoconiosis Compensation Fund Board under the Pneumoconiosis and Mesothelioma (Compensation) Ordinance (Cap. 360) and 

•     the Construction Industry Council under the Construction Workers Registration Ordinance (Cap. 583) and Construction Industry Council Ordinance (Cap. 587).

53     Payments for

(a)     cancellation charges arising from a compensation event

(b)     buying or leasing land or buildings within the Working Areas

(c)     compensation for loss of crops or buildings

(d)     royalties

(e)     inspection certificates

(f)     charges for access to the Working Areas

(g)     facilities for visits to the Working Areas by Others

(h)     consumables and equipment provided by the Contractor for the Project Manager’s and Supervisor’s offices

53     Payments for

(a)     cancellation charges arising from a compensation event

(b)     buying or leasing land or buildings within the Working Areas

(c)     compensation for loss of crops or buildings

(d)     royalties

(e)     inspection certificates

(f)     charges for access to the Working Areas

(g)     facilities for visits to the Working Areas by Others

(h)     consumables and equipment provided by the Contractor for the Project Manager’s and Supervisors offices

54     Payments made and received by the Contractor for the removal from Site and disposal or sale of materials from excavation and demolition.

54     Payments made and received by the Contractor for the removal from Site and disposal or sale of materials from excavation and demolition.

55     Amounts paid by the Contractor in providing accommodation and transport for the Project Manager and the Supervisor.

55     Amounts paid by the Contractor in providing accommodation and transport for the Project Manager and the Supervisor.

Manufacture and fabrication

6     The following components of the cost of manufacture and fabrication of Plant and Materials by the Contractor which are

•     wholly or partly designed specifically for the works and

•     manufactured or fabricated outside the Working Areas.

Manufacture and fabrication

6     The following components of the cost of manufacture and fabrication of Plant and Materials by the Contractor which are

•     wholly or partly designed specifically for the works and

•     manufactured or fabricated outside the Working Areas.

61     Amounts paid by the Contractor for the manufacture and fabrication of Plant and Materials outside the Working Areas.

61     Amounts paid by the Contractor for the manufacture and fabrication of Plant and Materials outside the Working Areas.

Design

7     The following components of the cost of design of the works and Equipment done outside the Working Areas.

Design

7     The following components of the cost of design of the works and Equipment done outside the Working Areas.

71     Amounts paid by the Contractor for design of the works and Equipment outside the Working Areas.

71     Amounts paid by the Contractor for design of the works and Equipment outside the Working Areas.

72     The cost of travel to and from the Working Areas for the categories of design people listed in the Contract Data.

72     The cost of travel to and from the Working Areas for the categories of design people listed in the Contract Data.

Insurance

8     The following are deducted from cost

•     the cost of events for which the contract requires the Contractor to insure and

•     other costs paid to the Contractor by insurers.

Insurance

8     The following are deducted from cost

•     the cost of events for which the contract requires the Contractor to insure and

•     other costs paid to the Contractor by insurers.

Insurance premium

9      The following components of the cost of insurance.

Insurance premium

9     The following components of the cost of insurance. 

91      The amounts paid for each insurance stated in the insurance table.

91     The amount paid for each insurance stated in the insurance table.

End of Page

Tender Documentation 編寫招標文件

Tender Documentation 編寫招標文件 KCTang

Overview 概論

Overview 概論 KCTang

Go to End

Note

  • 9/1/2022: Revised. Punctuation style changed.
  • 16/3/2020: Revised.
  • 20/12/2014: Moved from wiki.

Intro

  • Quantity Surveyors play key roles in tender documentation.

Terminology

  1. “the Works” (with capitalized “W” and “s”) – the whole of all work items under a construction contract.
  2. work” – an item of work or service under a construction contract.
  3. “the Drawings” and “the Specification” (without “s”) are used in the usual Standard Forms of Contract.
  4. "Bills of Quantities" and "Schedule of Quantities and Rates" (previously "Schedule of Rates") are used in the Private Standard Forms of Contract.
  5. Ensure that the terms used must be consistent with those used in the chosen Form of Contract.
  6. See https://kctang.com.hk/web/common-errors-use-english for common errors in use of English.

(4 to 6 added, 9 Jan 2023)

Purpose of tender documentation

  1. Convey clearly to the tenderers what are to be required to be done during tendering and after the award of the contract such that the awarded contract sum is sufficient for the Contractor to finish the job as expected without unexpected claims:
    • complete
    • free of ambiguity
    • free of discrepancy
    • full disclosure and warning of matters which may affect the prices and time.
  2. Provide for a full set of terms and conditions ready for turning into a contract without loose ends.
  3. Afford provisions to deal with changes.

Tender Documents 招標文件

  1. Broader meaning:
    廣義:
    • The complete set of documents issued for tendering, including Tender Drawings.
      用來招標的全套文件,包括招標圖紙.
  2. Narrower meaning:
    狹義:
    • Documents issued for tendering, other than Tender Drawings.
      用來招標的,招標圖紙以外的文件

Generic composition of Tender Documents 招標文件的基本組成部分

  1. Conditions of Tendering / Conditions of Tender / Instructions to Tenderers:
    投標條件 / 投標條件 / 投標須知:
    • Describe rules and procedures to be followed during tendering
      用來說明投標時的規則及程式
    • Not supposed to govern the post contract matters
    • All procedures should have been completed by the time of counter-signing the letter of award
    • Not declared as part of the contract by the Private Standard Forms of Contract
    • Though usually bound into the Contract Documents as evidence of being part of the Tender Documents
    • Therefore, they should not contain clauses or have attachments which have post contract implications
    • Otherwise, the Conditions should be declared as forming part of the contract.
  2. Form of Tender:
    ​回標書:
    • For the Tenderer to state his offer 給投標者填寫他的建議
    • Offer price based on specified completion times
    • Offer price based on offered completion times
  3. Form of Contract:
    合同書及條款:
    • Describe terms and conditions to be followed when performing the Contract
    • May refer to some Standard Forms of Contract, and not actually include a copy in the Tender Documents
    • Where a Standard Form of Contract is used, the Tender Documents should include any amendments or special conditions to the standard.
  4. Tender Drawings:
    招標圖紙:
    • Show the location, disposition, design (shape, form, sizes, configuration, fixing) of the work and choice of materials and workmanship.
  5. Specification or Employer's Requirements or Brief:
    料規範或發包方要求:
    • Specify the work, materials, method, workmanship, submission, testing and inspection standards required for the work
    • May include a section on Preliminaries or General Requirements, and other sections on materials and workmanship, those other sections are collectively called "Technical Specification" "技術要求"
    • May refer to some Standard Specification, and have Particular Specifications to describe deviations from or supplements to the standard
    • May use a General Specification, and have Particular Specifications to describe deviations from or supplements to the general.
  6. Pricing Schedules:
    計價單:
    • For the Tenderer to give a detailed build-up of his tender sum in any of the following forms:
      • Bills of Quantities
        工程量清單
      • Summary of Tender
      • Schedule of Rates or Schedule of Quantities and Rates
      • Schedule of Works
      • Quotation.

(revised, 9 Jan 2023)

Tender Booklet

  1. It is better to call those parts of the Tender Documents excluding Tender Drawings as "Tender Booklet" because these documents are usually bound into a booklet.
  2. Tender Documents = Tender Booklet + Tender Drawings.

Typical contents of Tender Booklet

  1. Conditions of Tendering / Conditions of Tender / Instructions to Tenderers.
  2. Form of Tender with various kinds of appendices.
  3. Appendices to the Form of Tender (if not included in or appended to the Specification or Preliminaries):
    • Pro-forma Surety Bond
    • Form of Warranty (for Sub-Contracts)
    • Statement of all convictions or no convictions under the Immigration Ordinance (Cap. 115) for last <> years
    • Statement of all convictions or no convictions under the Factories and Industrial Undertakings Ordinance (Cap. 59) for last <> years
    • Statement of all convictions or no convictions under the Employment Ordinance (Cap. 57) for last <> years
    • Statement of involvement in arbitration or litigation in the last <> years or foreseeable in the next <> months
    • Declaration of no conflict of interests
    • Declaration of no collusion.
  4. Amendments to the Standard Form of Main Contract / Special Conditions of Contract.
  5. Amendments to the Standard Form of Sub-Contract / Special Conditions of Sub-Contract.
  6. Specification:
    工料規範:
    • Preliminaries (if not included as Bill No. 1 in full)
    • Technical Specification:
      技術要求:
      • General Specification
      • Particular Specifications
    • Technical Schedules.
  7. Preambles to Bills of Quantities (if not included as Bill No. 2).
  8. Bills of Quantities:
    • Bill No. 1 – Preliminaries (full descriptions or headings only)
    • Bill No. 2 – Preambles
    • Bill No. 3 onwards - Measured Works Sections
    • Prime Cost and Provisional Sums
    • Dayworks Schedule or Daywork Rates Schedule
    • General Summary.
  9. Schedule of Rates or Schedule of Quantities and Rates (if without Bills of Quantities).
  10. Summary of Tender (a term used by the Private Standard Form of Contract without Quantities before 2005).
  11. Schedule of Drawings.
  12. Appendices (references to these Appendices should be given in the appropriate parts of the Tender Documents):
    • Insurance policies taken out by the Employer
    • Property Management’s house-rules (if not already described in the Specification and Preliminaries)
    • Main Contractor’s house-rules (for Sub-Contract tendering).

(10 revised, 9 Jan 2023)

Contract specific contractual provisions (other than the usual standard provisions)

  1. Names of the Employer and Consultants.
  2. Site locations, site restrictions, permissible working hours.
  3. Works outside site boundaries.
  4. Liability for ground conditions and underground obstructions.
  5. Scope of the Works, nominated sub-contracts and supply contracts, specialist domestic sub-contracts, previous contracts, concurrent contracts, works by public authorities, demarcation, relationship, co-ordination and attendance ("named sub-contracts" is a term used by a few developers' standard forms of contracts and therefore has no commonly adopted definition. It is intended to put more liability upon the Contractors but retain the right to choose the sub-contractors and fix their prices before naming to the Contractors.)
  6. Scope of contractors’ design, statutory submissions, maintenance and warranties.
  7. Time for possession, entry, commencement, completion; allowances for anticipated delays; criteria for certifying completion.
  8. Damages for delay; qualifications by sub-contractors on the level of damages.
  9. Defects liability period (Private Standard Forms of Contract); maintenance period (Government General Conditions of Contract).
  10. Form of Main Contract and Sub-Contracts to be used; special conditions.
  11. Excusable events (with extension of time) and compensable events (with financial compensation).
  12. Payment terms, advance payment, deposit payment, period of interim certificates, grace period for honouring payments, retention percentages, maximum retention, time to release retention.
  13. Drawings and Specification to be used.
  14. Pricing basis, with or without bills of quantities, lump sum or remeasurement.
  15. Any adjustments for cost fluctuations.
  16. Liability for insurance of the Works, third party, employees, construction plant and temporary buildings; limits of indemnity; levels of excesses / deductibles.
  17. Amount of surety bond.
  18. Phasing requirements and consequential effects on completion certificate, damages for delay, retention, defects liability, maintenance obligations, insurances, bond, etc.
  19. Specific requirements on hoardings, Employer’s site office.
  20. Responsibilities for source and consumption of temporary water, lighting and power.

(3 added, 5, 9 & 11 revised, 9 Jan 2023)

Reading Drawings and Specification

  1. For tender pricing, both the Drawings and the Specification must be read together in order to measure the quantities and estimate the unit rates.
  2. For work on existing buildings, the Drawings may not be able to represent fully and accurately the dimensions on site and the Tender Documents usually require the Tenderers to price taking into account the site conditions.
  3. The existing site (and building) conditions may also cause difficulties and inconvenience to the carrying out of the Works requiring extra costs to overcome.
  4.  Therefore, the Drawings and the Specification must also be read in conjunction with the existing conditions on site to make allowance in the quantities and/or unit rates.
  5. Drawings usually contain a lot of specification notes. For submissions to the Building Authority, the Specification is not required, all the requirements will be written as notes on the BD Submission Drawings, which may be used as the Tender Drawings. Therefore, the specification notes are important and must be reflected fully and consistently when drafting the Preliminaries and measuring the Bills of Quantities or Schedule of Quantities and Rates.
  6. It is usually specified in the Tender Documents that the Drawings and the Specification are complementary to which other and shall be read as a whole. However, there can still be cases where there are irreconcilable discrepancies (i.e. contradictions) between them that their order of precedence (i.e. which overrides which, which takes precedence over which) would need to be known.
  7. In the Standard Form of Building Contract Private Edition Without Quantities before 2015, the Specification takes precedence over the Drawings (the With Quantities version does not mention the Specification, but some Consultants may add provision to mention it with similar precedence). However, the precedence has been reversed in the 2005 and 2006 Editions. Some Consultants reverse it back. Therefore, the order of precedence is not an industry standard and has to be determined according to the individual contract.
  8. Some people view that the Specification is usually a company standard that has been carefully written as such, while the specification notes and annotations on the Tender Drawings are rather casually written, therefore, the Specification should override the Tender Drawings.
  9. Some people view that the specification notes and annotations should reflect the latest minds and wishes of the Architects and Engineers in spite of the Specification which may not be updated (with or without Particular Specifications) readily, therefore, the Tender Drawings should override the Specification. Yet, it is also possible that the Specification is finalised only towards the completion of the Tender Drawings.
  10. In theory, the Architect and the Engineers should be asked about the precedence between the Tender Drawings and Specification prepared by them, but it may be possible that they may have different choices. Adoption of the order of precedence of the Standard Forms may be the default solution.
  11. Note however that if the detailed Preliminaries clauses are included as part of the Specification instead of part of the Bills of Quantities, declaring the Tender Drawings to override the Specification may have the unexpected effect of altering the meaning of the seriously drafted Preliminaries by the loosely written specification notes and annotations. Therefore, if the Tender Drawings should override the Specification, the precedence should be preferably stated as: Preliminaries --> Tender Drawings --> Particular Specifications --> General Specification. By this, the order of precedence used in the Private Standard Form of Contract without quantities is maintained but keeping the Preliminaries as the higher authority.

(5 and 7 revised, 8 to 11 added, 9 Jan 2023)

Considerations when dealing with Drawings

  1. How detailed should the Tender Drawings be when the design is to be further developed by the Contractor? The significance of being too detailed or too vague.
  2. Distinguish between:
    • Drawings actually issued to tenderers
    • Drawings available for inspection
    • Standard Drawings
    • BQ (Taking-off) Drawings
    • Tender Drawings
    • Preliminary design drawings to be submitted by the tenderers
    • Contract Drawings
    • Shop Drawings
    • Installation Drawings
    • Field Drawings
    • Working Drawings / Construction Drawings
    • AI Drawings
    • As-built Drawings / Record Drawings.
  3. How to manage these drawings to avoid discrepancies.

Usual deficiencies in tender documentation

  1. Incomplete design.
  2. Inconsistent terminology.
  3. Discrepancies.
  4. Conflicts.
  5. Imprecise descriptions.
  6. Errors and omissions.
  7. Too complicated specifications.
  8. Not procurable.
  9. Outdated provisions.
  10. Insufficient ground investigation.
  11. Government approval and consent not in time.

Usual deficiencies in Tender Drawings generally

  1. Insufficient drawings.
  2. Insufficient details.
  3. Insufficient dimensions.
  4. Terms used on drawings not matching specifications.
  5. Specifying proprietary brand names and model numbers without the client's consent.

Usual deficiencies in Tender Drawings for alteration and addition works

  1. Consultants focusing on beautiful perspective only to obtain client's consent.
  2. Existing site and building's BD drawings not retrieved for use.
  3. Existing site and building's BD drawings issued for use not of the original scale (usually reduced).
  4. Existing site and building's BD drawings in imperial units.
  5. Existing site and building's BD drawings blurred because of scanning.
  6. Actual site construction deviating from the approved BD drawings.
  7. Extent and boundary of work items not sufficiently marked on drawings.
  8. No plumbing and drainage drawings prepared, only relying on marking on site photos or retrieved BD submission drawings.
  9. No design details.
  10. Details without dimensions.
  11. Terms used on drawings not matching specifications.

Usual deficiencies in Specification

  1. Terms used not consistent with those used in the Conditions of Contract, e.g. Architect vs Supervising Officer vs Contract Administrator, Main Contractor vs Contractor vs Sub-Contractor, Practical Completion vs Substantial Completion, Certificate of Completion of Making Good Defects vs Defects Rectification Certificate.
  2. Job and contract title not matching the rest of the Tender Documents.
  3. Page header and footing not coordinated with the rest of the Tender Documents. 
  4. Provisions in the Particular Specification not coordinated with the provisions in the General Specification
  5. Repeating but inconsistent provisions in different parts of the specifications.
  6. Insufficient provisions or overly huge specifications.
  7. Provisions not tailored to suit the project.
  8. Provided very late.

End of Page

Conditions of Tendering

Conditions of Tendering KCTang

Go to End

Note

  • 19/2/2023: Revised. ArchSD clause headings added.
  • 10/1/2023: "Sample clauses" added in place of "Special contents".
  • 20/12/2014: Moved from wiki.

Alternative names

  1. Conditions of Tendering.
  2. Conditions of Tender (not recommended to be used since the conditions are not those coming in with the Tender).
  3. Instructions to Tenderers.
  4. Notes to Tenderers.

(revised, 19/2/2023)

Purpose

  • To describe rules and procedures to be followed during tendering, not intended to govern the post contract rules and procedures.

(revised, 19/2/2023)

Usual contents

  1. Tender Documents issued.
  2. Obligations to check sufficiency of pages.
  3. Obligations to raise queries before tender return.
  4. Tender submissions required.
  5. Mode of submission of tenders, sealed envelope, labels, marked confidential.
  6. Return of Tender Drawings.
  7. Treatment of unauthorized alteration or erasure to the text of the Tender Documents.
  8. Treatment of qualifications.
  9. Treatment of alternative tenders.
  10. Unpriced items deemed included.
  11. Currency to be used.
  12. Statutory qualifications to contract.
  13. Treatment of errors.
  14. Not bound to accept the lowest or any tender.

Sample clauses

1.       Tender Documents issued

1.1     The Tender Documents issued consist of:

(a)      A Tender Booklet containing:

(1)     Conditions of Tendering;

(2)     Form of Tender;

(3)     Special Conditions of Contract;

(4)     Special Conditions of Nominated Sub-Contract;

(5)     Specification;

(6)     Preambles to Bills of Quantities;

(7)     Bills of Quantities; and

(8)     <Alternative to (6) and (7): Schedule of Quantities and Rates; and>

(9)     <Optional: Schedule of Rates for Plumbing and Drainage; and>

(10)     Schedule of Drawings.

<Note: The list should match the Contents page but to avoid inconsistency should be a condensed list showing the various types only while the contents should give the various parts making up each type.>

(b)      One set of drawings as listed or referred to in the Schedule of Drawings. 

<Note: Such drawings are the Tender Drawings and will become the Contract Drawings. "referred to" means that some of the drawings may not actually be issued to the tenderers." 

(c)      <Optional: One duplicate copy of the booklet as (a) above for retention by the Tenderer.>

<Note: In the old days when photocopying was not popular, a total of two copies were issued to the tenderers.>

1.2     <Optional: The Tender Documents (including Tender Drawings) are issued in PDF file format. The Tenderer shall print the Tender Documents for his own retention.>

<Note: It has become popular that softcopy is issued instead.>

1.3     The Tenderer shall check the number of the pages of the booklet referred to in Clause<s> 1.1(a) <and (c)> above against the page numbers given in the Contents page, and the number of drawings against the Schedule of Drawings, and should he find any missing, in duplicate, or indistinct, he must inform the Architect at once and have the same rectified.

1.4     Should the Tenderer for any reason whatsoever be in doubt as to the precise meaning of any description, he must inform the Architect in order that the correct meaning may be decided before the date for submission of tenders.

<Note: Some organisations may specify earlier deadline for raising queries.>

1.5     No liability will be admitted, nor claim allowed, in respect of errors in the Contractor's tender due to mistakes which should have been rectified in the manner described above.

2.       Tender

2.1     The Tender shall consist of:

<Alternative: The Tender shall consist of THREE hard copies and THREE CD Roms each containing electronic files of the following:>

(a)      The bound booklet referred to in Clause 1.1(a) above with:

(1)       The Form of Tender completed, signed, witnessed and dated.

(2)      The Bills of Quantities priced, extended, cast and totalled. The sum shown on the Form of Tender must agree with the total of the General Summary.

(3)      <Alternative: The Schedule of Quantities and Rates priced, extended, cast and totalled. The sum showing on the Form of Tender must agree with the total of the Schedule of Quantities and Rates.>

(4)     <Optional: The Schedule of Rates for Plumbing and Drainage priced, extended, cast and totalled with the total carried forward to Bill No. <> of the Bills of Quantities.>

(5)     Technical Schedule for <Plumbing and Drainage> completed.

<Note: If both hard and soft copies are to be submitted, which one shall prevail in case of discrepancies should be stated.>

(b)     Three copies of a list of the names of the specialist domestic sub-contractors that the Tenderer intends to choose for sub-letting part of the Works.

(c)     Three sets of preliminary design drawings and specification for <>.

(d)     Three sets of proposed method statement and programme of the Works.

(e)     Three copies of site layout plan showing the locations of plant, scaffolding, catch fans, stores, site office and access routes.

(f)     Three copies of organisation chart with the names and qualification of key management and site personnel for the Works.

(g)     <Optional: Four copies of statement of qualifications to and deviations from the Tender Documents.>

(h)     <Optional: Four copies of job reference of projects of similar nature completed within the last five years.>

(i)     Three copies of the following general company information, if not already fully submitted when expressing interests to tender:

(1)     Company organisation.

(2)     List of past job reference of similar nature to the Works.

(2)     <Alternative: Descriptions on past and current experience in the supply and installation of <>, together with a job reference list.>

(3)     Current and anticipated work load for the coming 12 months.

(4)     <Optional: Experience in working on the airport restricted areas.>

(5)     Photocopy of business registration certificate.

(6)     Photocopy of certificate of incorporation, if a company.

(7)     Photocopy of contractor’s registration certificates.

(8)     Audited accounts for the last three years (strict confidence will be observed by the Employer and the Consultants).

(9)     Statement of all convictions or no convictions under the Immigration Ordinance (Cap. 115) in the last twelve months.

(10)     Statement of all convictions or no convictions under the Factories and Industrial Undertakings Ordinance (Cap. 59) in the last twelve months.

(11)     Statement of all convictions or no convictions under the Employment Ordinance (Cap. 57) in the last twelve months.

(12)     Statement of involvement in arbitration or litigation in the last three years or foreseeable in the next 12 months.

<Note: Requesting three copies is to reduce the task of making photocopies and further distribution.
The list has become longer and longer these days as demanded by the Clients and Project Managers. Are all these essential or necessary?>

2.2     The Tender shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope which is to be labelled in the manner and deposited at the time and place set out in the invitation to tender.

<Note: Though not expressly stated here to give flexibility, tenders not submitted accordingly should be disqualified.>

2.3     All drawings issued for tendering purposes are to be returned to the Architect on or before the time set for receipt of tenders.

<Note: This is a practice left from the old days when the drawings were large and making prints was expensive. The returned drawings could be used for binding as Contract Drawings. The tenderers should actually need the drawings for answering queries after tender return. The actual return of the drawings has diminished particularly when softcopies are disseminated.>

2.4     No unauthorised alteration or erasure to the text of the Tender Documents will be permitted. Any tender containing such alteration or erasure may not be considered.

<Note: "may" only to give flexibility.>

2.5     The Tenderer shall submit a conforming tender strictly based on the requirements of the Tender Documents. Any qualification of the Tender Documents may cause the Tender to be disqualified. Alternative proposals may be submitted separately in addition to the conforming tender with the details and effects on the Contract Period and Tender Sum stated.

<Note: It is the usual practice to reject all qualifications. To ensure competition on the same basis without giving room to manipulate the tender after submission when being enquired about the qualifications, Government projects may disqualify a tender submitted with qualifications. However, the qualifications may not necessarily be unacceptable. They may be genuine attempts to clarify or modify some unsuitable terms and conditions in the Tender Documents. Therefore, the qualifications should be individually considered on their own merits. To ensure competition on the same basis, other tenderers should also be given a chance to advise on the implications of those acceptable qualifications. In that case, the tender sums may need to be permitted to be adjusted.> 

2.6     The Tenderer shall be deemed to have made allowance in his prices generally to cover items of Preliminaries and any other items if these have not been priced against the respective items.

2.7     In the absence of specific prices for any items required for the execution of the Contract, the relevant costs shall be deemed to have been included in the rates and prices for other specifically priced items.

<Note: It is usual that not all Preliminaries items will have prices entered against them. It may also be possible that a few measured items have no prices entered against them intentionally or accidentally. The two above deeming clauses are to avoid the need to ask the Tenderer to confirm inclusion.>

3.       Currency

All tenders shall be in Hong Kong Dollars and no adjustment will be made for fluctuations in exchange rates of currencies.

4.       Contracting qualification

The Tenderer shall possess a valid business registration certificate and be registered with the relevant authorities authorising him to carry out construction works of the category of the Works.

5.       Correction of errors

5.1     In the event of the Tenderer discovering a genuine error in his Tender after it has been deposited, attention in writing may be drawn to the error and an amendment submitted which, provided that the amendment shall have been deposited on or before the time fixed for receipt of tenders, may be accepted.

5.2     The Tender Sum will be regarded as a lump sum and will not be amended for errors found in the examination of tenders.

<Note:

(a)     Alternative clause will be needed for remeasurement contract.

(b)     Traditionally, the tendered total of the remeasurement contract can be altered when arithmetical errors are found and the arithmetically corrected total will be treated as the tendered total for acceptance.

(c)     The rationale is that since the quantities are subject to remeasurement, if the final remeasurement does not change the quantities, the quantities multiplied by the unit rates will give the same arithmetically corrected total, and therefore the arithmetically corrected total should be accepted as the corrected tendered total.

(d)     When the tendered total is permitted to be altered, the unit rates must not be altered at the same time, otherwise, it would mean a change to the total price level defeating the tender competition on the unit rates (quantities are not for competition).

(e)     The clause may become: The Tender Sum will be recalculated to correct any arithmetical errors found but the unit rates shall not be altered.

(f)     However, it may still be permissible to treat the tendered total as fixed for the purposes of correction of errors as if it is a lump sum. This has the benefits of keeping the tendered total unchanged and offering chances to amend any anomalous unit rates.

(g)     The clause may become: The Tender Sum will not be amended for errors found in the examination of tenders.> 

5.3     If there is any discrepancy between the amounts in “words” and in “figures” for the Tender Sum stated in the Form of Tender, the one that agrees with the figure stated in the General Summary of the <Bills of Quantities / Schedule of Quantities and Rates> shall be taken as the Tender Sum, otherwise, the amount in “figures” shall be taken as the Tender Sum. Where either of the amounts is left blank or illegible, the remaining one shall be taken as the Tender Sum. If the amounts are both left blank or illegible, the Tender will be taken as invalid.

5.4     The following errors should they occur in the tendered priced <Bills of Quantities / Schedule of Quantities and Rates> will be rectified and altered in red ink:

(a)      Discrepancies between the product of quantity and rate and the extension (The rate will be amended to agree with the quantity and the extension in the cash column or the extension to agree with the quantity and the rate, as appropriate.);

<Note: The rate will not be amended, and only the extension in the cash column will be amended to agree with the product of quantity and rate, in the case of remeasurement contract with the tendered total recalculable.> 

(b)      Insertion of a lump sum price for a measured item without a unit rate (The unit rate will be deemed to be equal to the lump sum price divided by the quantity of the item.);

(c)      Errors in including the prime cost and provisional sums as specified;

(d)      Errors in casting of cash columns;

(e)      Errors in carrying forward totals to collections or summaries; and

(f)       Omission of some priced pages (The priced pages shall be submitted with each page total matching that in the collection of summary and the rates matching those in other submitted pages.).

5.5     The total error will be calculated as a plus or minus percentage of the corrected tender sum minus the correct totals of preliminaries items, provisional sums, Prime Cost Sums (if any) (but not profit and attendance thereon) and dayworks, and will be applied to the tendered rates other than preliminaries prices and daywork rates for the purposes of pricing variations and remeasured quantities. If the percentage error is less than 0.50%, no adjustment will be made.

5.6     Should examination of a tender reveal errors of such magnitude as in the opinion of the Architect would involve the Contractor in serious loss then the nature and amount of such errors will be communicated to the Tenderer and he will be asked to confirm in writing that he is prepared to abide by his Tender.

6.       Percentage adjustments

6.1     The calculation of any percentage adjustments to the rates and prices shall be based on the all-in rates without subtracting any prime cost rates which may be included therein. The prime cost rates included in the all-in rates subject to percentage adjustments shall remain unchanged.

<Note:

(a)     The percentage adjustments may be for correcting arithmetical errors or for reflecting discount offered. Where a tender involves both, it would be preferred to combine the two adjustments into one single percentage adjustment.

(b)     The first statement above means that the adjusted all-in rate is equivalent to (prime cost + other costs) x (1 + profit and overheads) x % adjustment. The second statement is to clarify that the prime cost shall not be adjusted. The % adjustment is to be understood as an adjustment to the profit and overheads. If the % adjustment is a downward adjustment, it may be possible that the adjusted all-in rate becomes smaller than the prime cost rate. Though appearing odd, this does not affect the validity of the adjusted all-in rate and the integrity of the prime cost rate. If the % adjustment is applied to a group of items at the end of variation calculations, the odd impression will not be apparent.

(c)     Some consultants deduct the value of the prime cost rates when calculating the percentage adjustment because they consider that the prime cost rates should not be subject to the percentage adjustment. The adjusted all-in rate is then equivalent to prime cost + other costs, profit and overheads x % adjustment. This has the benefit of avoiding the possibility of the adjusted all-in rate being smaller than the prime cost rate, but this would require a detailed calculation of the value of the prime cost rates. When applying the % adjustment, it should be applied to the (all-in rate - prime cost rate every time). This method is cumbersome and will increase the chances of making errors. This method is not really necessary.

(d)     It should be noted that the % adjustments calculated using the two different methods are different. Whatever base is used to calculate the % adjustment, the % adjustment shall be applied the same base to ensure correctness. e.g. if D% = A / B x 100%, then B can multiply D% to give A. If D% = A / (B - C) x 100%, then D% must multiply (B - C) to give A.>

6.2     All Prime Cost Sums (if any) and Provisional Sums shall be excluded from any corresponding percentage adjustment calculations as a result of any overall adjustment to the Tender Sum.

<Note: Similar to the prime cost rates, Prime Cost Sums and Provisional Sums shall not be adjusted for any percentage adjustments to the Tender Sums.>

7.       Rationalization of unreasonable rates and prices

The Tenderer may be required to rationalize unreasonable rates and prices by replacing them with more reasonable rates and prices for all purposes of the Contract (including pricing payments, variations and provisional quantities). The amounts of the affected items shall be re-calculated. The Tender Sum shall remain unchanged. The difference between the corrected total and the original Tender Sum shall be treated as an arithmetical error as Clause 5 hereof, unless it is specifically agreed that this shall be treated as a lump sum adjustment without affecting the unit rates.

<Note:

(a)      This is not a common clause for tenders based on Bills of Quantities because usually the tendered unit rates should not be changed. This is specially drafted by our company for reasons explained below.

(b)      In case of the presence of unreasonably high or low rates in a contract, the following will happen:

 

Employer

Contractor

Unreasonably high rates

 

 

Variation addition

Unreasonable cost increase

Very good profit (favourable)

Variation omission

Higher cost reduction (favourable)

Unreasonable income reduction

Unreasonably low rates

 

 

Variation addition

Lower cost increase (favourable)

Unreasonable loss

Variation omission

Unreasonable cost reduction

Lower cost reduction (favourable)

(c)      The usual practice is to identify unreasonable rates and prices and agree more reasonable rates and prices to be used for pricing variation additions and omissions, and the Tender Sum should remain unchanged. 

(d)      The rationale is that, in spite of any over or under pricing in the Tender Sum, when more reasonable rates are used for valuing changes whether it be an addition or an omission, the above unreasonable situations would not arise.

(e)      However, this practice has the following issues

(1)      Some people may argue that the original rates and prices should be used for omissions, while the more reasonable rates and prices should be used for the additions only. Tenderers would argue for this when the original rates and prices were unreasonably low. Employers would argue for this when the original rates and prices were unreasonably high.

(2)      When the unreasonably priced item is a provisional quantity item, care should be exercised to describe whether the more reasonable rate is to be used for the increase to or decrease from the provisional quantities (i.e. price the original provisional quantity at the original rate first) or is to be used for the complete remeasurement.

(3)      For interim payment valuation, the original rates and amounts are still used, giving an impression of either over or under payment.

(f)       By replacing the unreasonable rates and prices with more reasonable rates and prices for all purposes of the Contract, the rationale of the usual practice is maintained, but people no longer need to refer to the unreasonable rates and prices any more, and the issues mentioned above would not persist.

(g)      For tenders not based on Bills of Quantities, the quantities do not form part of the Contract, and the unit rates are more important. It should be permissible to require the adjustment of both the quantities and the unit rates before awarding the Contract to rationalise the unit rates for post contract use. This special clause is very relevant.

8.        Short-listing

The Employer reserves the right to short-list tenders for further tender clarifications, interviews and negotiation without the obligation to invite all tenderers to do so.

<Note: This is to avoid the challenge by tenderers not on the short-list as to why they are not similarly invited.>

9.        Acceptance of tender

The Employer is not bound to accept the lowest or any tender he may receive.

<Note: This is to avoid the challenge by tenderers that they should be paid the tendering costs if no tender is accepted.>

(added, 10/1/2023)

(revised, 19/2/2023)

Clause headings of Architectural Services Department's Notes to Tenderers

Notes to Tenderers (not to be bound into the Contract Documents):

[A: Matters related to tendering (subtitle for internal reference only)]

NTT A1

Location of tender box

NTT A2

Procedures for opening tenders

NTT A3

Pre-tender meetingo

NTT A4

Clarifications from *Surveyor / Maintenance Surveyor designate

NTT A5

Check list for tenders deposited in tender box

NTT A6

Electronic submission

NTT A7

Changes in status of qualifications

NTT A8

Regulating actions on inappropriate conducts

NTT A9

Regulating action (serious incident or conviction for site safety or environmental offences)

NTT A10

Anti-collusion

NTT A11*

Formula Approach

NTT A12*

Marking Scheme Approach

NTT A13

Evaluation method for use intenders which EMSTF may be a potential bidder

NTT A14

Assessment of EMSTF offer

NTT A15

Net present value analysis

NTT A16

Destruction of documents

NTT A17

Bid challenge (WTO GPA)

NTT A18

JV Proforma

NTT A19

(Not Used)

NTT A20

Eligibility to Tender and for the Award of Contracts Applicable to Confirmed Group *A/B Contractors

NTT A21

(Not Used)

NTT A22

Additional copies of tender drawings in electronic format

NTT A23

Green Procurement for Tender Documents

NTT A24

Green Dissemination of Drawings to Tenderers

NTT A25

Plumbing Installation

NTT A26

Specialist Sub-contractors

NTT A27

Reference Design of Piling Works Provided by Supervising Officer

NTT A28

(Not Used)

[B: Matters related to the conditions of contract (subtitle for internal reference only)]

NTT B1

(Not Used)

NTT B2

Constraints on Supervising Officer’s power

NTT B3

(Not Used)

NTT B4

(Not Used)

NTT B5

Assessment of Section Subject to Excision

NTT B6

Employer’s Power to Reduce Contingency Sum

NTT B7

Lump sum contract

NTT B8

Advance Payment under *Capital Works Contracts / Term Contracts

NTT B9

Contract price fluctuations

NTT B10

Payment for Testing and Commissioning for Air Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation Installation (“ACMV Installation”)

[C: Matters related to the duties of the Contractor (subtitle for internal reference only)]

NTT C1

Engagement of Sub-contractors who are Registered under the Respective Trades and Group available in the Registered Specialist Trade Contractors Scheme (RSTCS)

NTT C2

Payment for Sub-contractor Management Plan

NTT C3

Details of Sub-contractor Management Plan

NTT C4

Non-contractual partnering

NTT C5

(Not Used)

NTT C6

Dispute Resolution Advisor System

NTT C7

Systematic Risk Management

NTT C8

Professional Indemnity Insurance

NTT C9

MTRC indemnity

NTT C10

Proof of plant ownership

NTT C11

Employing Site Workers for the Contract and Payment of Site Workers’ Wages

NTT C12

Reimbursement of actual payment made by the Contractor to Assistant Clerical Officer (Labour Relations)

NTT C13

Site Cleanliness and Tidiness - Daily Cleaning and Weekly Tidying

NTT C14

Site Uniform

NTT C15

Mandatory Construction Industry Collaborative Training Scheme (CICTS)

NTT C16

Employment of Graduates of the Enhanced Construction Manpower Training Scheme (ECMTS)

NTT C17

Pay for Safety Performance Merit Scheme (PFSPMS)

NTT C18

Tree preservation

NTT C19

Tree pruning works

NTT C20

Environmental management

NTT C21

Use of non-road mobile machinery approved under the Air Pollution Control (Non-road Mobile Machinery) (Emission) Regulation

NTT C22

Provision of Temporary Electricity and Water Supply to the Site

NTT C23

Limiting tiers of Sub-contracting

NTT C24

Certificate of Contractor’s Warranty (Artificial Turf System)

Appendices

 

NTT.A

Check list for tenders deposited in the *Government Secretariat Tender Box / Public Works Tender Box

NTT.B*

Formula approach in tender evaluation

NTT.B*

Marking scheme in tender evaluation

NTT.C

Programme for net present value analysis

NTT.D

Risk Treatment Plans

* alternatives

 

(added, 19/2/2023)

Clause headings of Architectural Services Department's Conditions of Tender

General Conditions of Tender (dated 23/11/2022):

GCT 1

Definitions

GCT 2

Documents issued

GCT 3

Relevant documents not issued

GCT 4*

Submission of tender (Formula Approach)

GCT 4*

Submission of tender (Marking Scheme)

GCT 5

Financial information

GCT 6

Unauthorised alterations

GCT 7

Discrepancies in the documents

GCT 8

Clarification of documents

GCT 9

Qualification of tender

GCT 10

Errors in tender submission

GCT 11

Correction rules for tender errors

GCT 12

Tenders in HK dollars

GCT 13

Tender negotiation

GCT 14

Erratic pricing

GCT 15

Tender addenda

GCT 16

Tender clarifications

GCT 17

Unreasonably low bids

GCT 18

Ground investigation information

GCT 19

Copyright

GCT 20

Management of sub-contractors

GCT 21

Essential submission

GCT 22

Contractors under suspension

GCT 23

Alternative tenders or designs uninvited

GCT 24

Offering gratuities

GCT 25

Submission of further information

GCT 26

Anti-collusion

GCT 27

Statement of convictions under the Immigration Ordinance (Cap. 115)

GCT 28

Statement of convictions under the Employment Ordinance (Cap. 57)

GCT 29

One tender only for holding companies, subsidiaries or related parties

GCT 30

Admission, Promotion and Confirmation to the List of Approved Contractors for Public Works / the List of Approved Suppliers of Materials and Specialist Contractors for Public Works

GCT 31

Eligibility of probationary contractors to tender and for the award of Contracts

GCT 31A

Eligibility to Tender and for the Award of Contracts Applicable to Confirmed Group *A/ B Contractors

GCT 32

Ethical commitment

GCT 33

Tender cost

GCT 34

Tenderer's consent and authorization on conviction records

GCT 35

National Security and Public Interest

* alternatives

 

Appendix GCT.B

(Not used)

Appendix GCT.C

Requirements for Tender Submission in Electronic Format

Appendix GCT.D

Financial Information Required to be Submitted for Financial Assessment

Appendix GCT.E

Letter of Indemnity (for execution by the tenderer)

Appendix GCT.F

Letter of Indemnity (for execution by all the shareholders of the tenderer if the tenderer is an incorporated joint venture)

Appendix GCT.G

Letter of Anti-collusion Undertaking

Appendix GCT.H

Statement of Convictions (Immigration Ordinance) (Cap. 115)

Appendix GCT.I

Statement of Convictions (Employment Ordinance) (Cap. 57)

Appendix GCT.J

Letter of Consent and Authorization on Conviction Records

Appendix GCT.K

Letter of Declaration on Compliance with One Tender Requirement for Holding Companies, Subsidiaries or Related Parties

Appendix GCT.L

Correction Rules for Tender Errors

Appendix GCT.M

Letter of Declaration on Compliance with Requirements of National Security and Public Interest

Special Conditions of Tender (dated 17/11/2022):

SCT 1

Programme of Works

SCT 2A

Alternative design invited for part of the Works covered by the Supervising Officer’s design

SCT 2B

Design required for part of the Works not covered by the Supervising Officer’s design

SCT 3

Submission of Temporary Works design

SCT 4

Contractors’ Joint Venture

SCT 5

Outline quality system for production and supply of structural concrete

SCT 6

ISO 9000

SCT 7

Outline Environmental Management Plan

SCT 8

Disclosure of information (bid challenges)

SCT 9

Funding approval

SCT 10

Drawings

SCT 11

Statement of convictions under

the Factories and Industrial Undertakings Ordinance (Cap. 59),
the Occupational Safety and Health Ordinance (Cap. 509),
the Shipping and Port Control Ordinance (Cap. 313),

the Merchant Shipping (Local Vessels) Ordinance (Cap. 548),
the Air Pollution Control Ordinance (Cap. 311),
the Noise Control Ordinance (Cap. 400),
the Waste Disposal Ordinance (Cap. 354),
the Water Pollution Control Ordinance (Cap. 358),
the Dumping at Sea Ordinance (Cap. 466),
the Ozone Layer Protection Ordinance (Cap. 403),
the Environmental Impact Assessment Ordinance (Cap. 499),

the Hazardous Chemicals Control Ordinance (Cap. 595) and

#the Land (Miscellaneous Provisions) Ordinance (Cap. 28)

SCT 12

Statement of convictions under section 27 of the Public Health and Municipal Services Ordinance (Cap. 132)

SCT 13

*Outline Safety Plan / *Outline Health and Safety Plan

SCT 14

Specialist Sub-contractors

SCT 15

Sub-contractor’s warranty

SCT 16

Schedule of Rates

SCT 17

Milestone Payment

SCT 18

Alternative products or materials

SCT 19

Tender Equipment Schedule

SCT 20

Statement of no material change in qualifications

SCT 21

Adjustment Item

SCT 22

Outline Quality Plan

SCT 23

Registration under the Registered Specialist Trade Contractors Scheme

SCT 24

(Not Used)

SCT 25

Liquidated damages for the Main Contract

SCT 26

Reduction of Contingency Sum

SCT 27

Tenderer carrying out ground investigation at the Site prior to submitting tender

SCT 28

Award to Trading Fund

SCT 29

Tenderer’s design information for piling works (Proposed Piling System and Total Net Safe Loading Capacity)

SCT 30

Information for *tender marking/ Stage 1 Screening

SCT 31

Reference Design of Piling Works Provided by Supervising Officer

Appendix SCT.A1

Letter of undertaking for unincorporated joint ventures

Appendix SCT.A2

Letter of undertaking for incorporated joint ventures

Appendix SCT.B

JV Proforma for Proposed Value of Works Undertaken by Each Participant/ Shareholder in the Joint Venture (JV)

Appendix SCT.C

Statement of convictions under

the Factories and Industrial Undertakings Ordinance (Cap. 59),

the Occupational Safety and Health Ordinance (Cap. 509),

the Shipping and Port Control Ordinance (Cap. 313),

the Merchant Shipping (Local Vessels) Ordinance (Cap. 548),

the Air Pollution Control Ordinance (Cap. 311),

the Noise Control Ordinance (Cap. 400),

the Waste Disposal Ordinance (Cap. 354),

the Water Pollution Control Ordinance (Cap. 358),

the Dumping at Sea Ordinance (Cap. 466),

the Ozone Layer Protection Ordinance (Cap. 403),

the Environmental Impact Assessment Ordinance (Cap. 499),

the Hazardous Chemicals Control Ordinance (Cap. 595) and

#the Land (Miscellaneous Provisions) Ordinance (Cap. 28)

Appendix SCT.D

Statement of convictions (Public Health and Municipal Services Ordinance, Section 27 (Cap. 132))

Appendix SCT.E

List of Selected Specialist Sub-contractors

Appendix SCT.F

Sample Confirmation Letter from Selected Specialist Sub-contractor

Appendix SCT.G

Tender Equipment Schedule

Appendix SCT.H

Special Conditions of Tender for Specialist Sub-contract

Appendix SCT.I

Special Conditions of Sub-contract for Specialist Sub-contract

Appendix SCT.J

Confirmation of awareness of alternative products or materials

Appendix SCT.K

Statement of no material change in qualifications

Appendix SCT.L

Checklist of items to be included in Outline Quality Plan and Quality Plan for the Works

Appendix SCT.M

Undertaking for Registration under the Subcontractor Registration Scheme [for NSC tender documents only]

Appendix SCT.N

List of conditions for tenderer carrying out ground investigation at the Site prior to submitting tender

Appendix SCT.O

Pre-tender Health and Safety Plan

Appendix SCT.P

Proposed Piling System and Total Net Safe Loading Capacity

Appendix SCT.Q

Submission of Information for *tender marking/ Stage 1 Screening

(added, 19/2/2023)

Clause headings of Housing Authority's Notes to Tenderers, February 2013 Edition

  1. Opening of Tenders.
  2. Tender Evaluation Criteria.
  3. Acceptance of Tender.
  4. Sureties or Security.
  5. Review Body on Bid Challenges.
  6. Other Matters.

Clause headings of Housing Authority's Special Conditions of Tender, February 2013 Edition

  1. Type of Tender.
  2. Tender documents issued.
  3. Documents available to tenderers.
  4. Tenderers alterations, qualifications and modifications.
  5. Schedules to the Form of Tender.
  6. Submissions required with tender.
  7. Other submissions required with tender.
  8. Inspection of documents etc.
  9. Inspection of Site.
  10. Joint Venture Guarantees.
  11. Special terms of payments for precast concrete façade construction.
  12. Unreasonable low bids.
  13. Erratic Pricing.
  14. Sub-contractor Registration Scheme.
  15. Dispute Resolution Advisor (DRAd) System.
  16. Housing Construction Management Enterprise System (HOMES).
  17. Wall Tiling Works.
  18. Trip Ticket System.
  19. Construction Waste Disposal Charging Scheme.
  20. Statutory Minimum Wage.
  21. Disclosure of Information (Bid Challenges).
  22. Conflict of Interest (Housing Authority member).
  23. Warranty Against Collusion.
  24. Evaluation of Tender.
  25. Incorporation of Technical Proposals into the Contract.
  26. Other matters.

End of Page

Form of Tender

Form of Tender KCTang

Go to End

Note

  • 19/2/2023: Punctuation style changed.
  • 10/1/2023: Sample clauses added in place of Special notes.
  • 20/12/2014: Moved from wiki.

Purpose

  • For the Tenderer to state his offer.

Usual contents

  1. Tender Sum.
  2. Alternative tenders or options.
  3. Discrepancies between words and figures.
  4. Completion times.
  5. Confirmation of acceptance of amendments to the Standard Form of Main Contract and Sub-Contract / Special Conditions of Contract and Sub-Contract.
  6. Confirmation of incorporation of tender addenda.
  7. Confirmation of compliance with pro-forma surety bond.
  8. Tender validity period. 投標有效期
  9. Implications of withdrawal before expiry of the tender validity period (Complication of counter-offers during negotiation vs terms demanding irrevocable offer).
  10. Acknowledgement of acceptance constituting a binding contract.
  11. Acknowledgement of temporary acceptance in the case of Nominated Sub-Contracts.
  12. Acknowledgement of no obligation to award to the lowest or any.
  13. Registered address (may be different from letter head).
  14. Signature of Form of Tender (name and position of signatory).

Sample clauses

 

FORM OF TENDER

for

THE CONSTRUCTION

of

THE PROPOSED <BUILDING>

at

<ADDRESS>

for

<EMPLOYER>

To:         <Employer>

 

1.       Tender Sum

Having inspected the Site, and examined the Articles of Agreement, Conditions of Contract, Drawings, Specification and <Bills of Quantities> <Schedule of Quantities and Rates> for the execution of the above named Works, I/we offer to execute, complete and maintain the whole of the said Works in conformity with the said Articles of Agreement, Conditions of Contract, Drawings, Specification and <Bills of Quantities> <Schedule of Quantities and Rates> for the sum of Hong Kong Dollars                                                                                                                               (HK$                           ) or such sum as may be ascertained in accordance with the Contract.

<Note: For stating the offered tender sum.>

<Alternative for alternative tenders:>

<Having inspected the Site, and examined the Articles of Agreement, Conditions of Contract, Drawings, Specification and <Bills of Quantities> <Schedule of Quantities and Rates> for the execution of the above named Works, I/we offer to execute, complete and maintain the whole of the said Works in conformity with the said Articles of Agreement, Conditions of Contract, Drawings, Specification and <Bills of Quantities> <Schedule of Quantities and Rates> for the following sum or such sum as may be ascertained in accordance with the Contract:

(a)   Basic Tender A - <Short description> : Hong Kong Dollars                                                                                                                                                                                                                          (HK$                           ), or

(b)   Alternative Tender B - <Short description> :Hong Kong Dollars                                                                                                                                                                                                                          (HK$                           ), or

(c)   Alternative Tender C - <Short description> :Hong Kong Dollars                                                                                                                                                                                                                          (HK$                           ).>

2.       Contract Period

2.1     I/We undertake if my/our tender is accepted to complete the Works comprised in this Contract within <> calendar days (including Sundays and holidays and days of inclement weather) commencing on the Date for Possession of the Site <Date for Entering the Site> or within such extended time as may be authorised under the Contract.

<Note: State the number of calendar days here instead of in the Preliminaries for easy reference. Information should not be duplicated to avoid discrepancies. Delete "days of inclement weather if extension of time grantable for inclement weather.>

2.2     I/We would also like to propose that if the time required to complete the Works as stated in Clause 2.1 above is revised to “ …. within       calendar days …. ”, the Tender Sum stated in Clause 1 above shall be INCREASED/DECREASED (delete as appropriate) by HK$                                .

<Note: Give an option for the Tenderer to state the cost implication of an alternative number of calendar days proposed by him. This would enable the tenders to be compared first on the same basis of the pre-stated calendar days.>

<2.1   I/We undertake if my/our tender is accepted to complete the Works comprised in this Contract within the times stated below or within such extended times as may be authorised under the Contract:

(a)      Basic Tender A - <Short description>: within <> calendar days (including Sundays and holidays and days of inclement weather) commencing on the Date for Possession of the Site <Date for Entering the Site>; or

(b)      Alternative Tender B - <Short description>: within <> calendar days (including Sundays and holidays and days of inclement weather) commencing on the Date for Possession of the Site <Date for Entering the Site>; or

(c)      Alternative Tender C - <Short description>: within <> calendar days (including Sundays and holidays and days of inclement weather) commencing on the Date for Possession of the Site <Date for Entering the Site>.>

<Note: This is to be used in case of prescribed alternative tenders.>

3.       Optional items

Further to Clauses 1, 2.1 and 2.2 above, the cost and time implications of the following optional items are:

 

Description

Addition to the Tender Sum

(HK$)

Addition to the Contract Period

(calendar days)

(a)

 

 

 

(b)

 

 

No change to the Contract Period

4.       Special Conditions of Contract and Special Conditions of Nominated Sub-Contract

I/We are aware of and accept the amendments to the Form of Contract as described in the “Special Conditions of Contract” Section and the amendments to the Standard Conditions of Nominated Sub-Contract as described in the “Special Conditions of Nominated Sub-Contract” Section issued with the Tender Documents.

5.       Tender addenda

 I/We confirm that my/our tender has taken into consideration all tender addenda issued to us prior to the date hereof.

6.       Surety bond

 I/We agree to provide a Bond in the amount specified in the Appendix to the General Conditions of Contract for the due performance of the Contract in the form as shown in Schedule 1 of the General Conditions of Contract (as amended by the Special Conditions of Contract).

<Note: The above three declarations are to avoid the Tenderer from declaring ignorance of the requirements.>

7.       Tender validity period

 I/We agree to abide by this tender for a period of two months from the date fixed for receiving the same and it shall remain binding upon me/us and may be accepted at any time before the expiration of that period.

8.       Tender award

8.1     Unless and until a formal agreement is prepared and executed, this tender, together with the written acceptance thereof by the Employer or the Architect on his behalf subject to the provisions of Clause 7 hereof, shall constitute a binding Contract.

8.2     I/We understand that the Employer is not bound to accept the lowest or any tender which he may receive.

Signature                                                                                                                                       

Name                                                                                                                                               

in the capacity of                                                                                                                                   

duly authorised to sign tenders for and on behalf of *                                                                    

                                                                                                                                                       

Registration number as BD Registered <General Building> Contractor                                         valid till                               

Business registration certificate number                                             valid till                               

Registered address of company                                                                                                    

                                                                                                                                                       

Tel                                                                   Fax                                                                         

Date                                                                                                                                               

Witness                                                                                                                                          

Witness Address                                                                                                                            

If a tender is being made by a partnership or an unincorporated body, the names and residential addresses of all partners shall be given in the spaces provided below.

Names of Partners

Residential Addresses of Partners

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

* In the case of a limited Company, insert the name of the Company.

(added, 10/1/2023)

 

End of Page

Insurances, Bonds and Warranties

Insurances, Bonds and Warranties KCTang

Go to End

Note

  • 3/2/2023: Revised.
  • 5/4/2022: Punctuation style changed.
  • 2/2/2021: Typo correction.
  • 24/12/2014: Moved from wiki.

Common terms

  1. Insurer - The party providing the insurance.
  2. Agent - The party representing the insurance company.
  3. Broker - The party representing the insurance buyer.
  4. Insured - The party buying (taking out / maintaining) the insurance.
  5. Joint names - more than one party insured.
  6. Third parties - other than the insured and the insurer.
  7. Cross liability - If one of the insureds causes personal injury or death or property loss or damage to another of the insureds, since both of them are jointly insured, the other one would not be treated as a third party, and the one liable would not be covered by the insurance. To remedy this situation, a cross liability clause is required to deem that a separate insurance is issued to every one of the insureds, and all other insureds are treated as third party for that purpose.
  8. Waiver of subrogation - By subrogation, the insurer can stand in the shoes of the insured and enforce the insured's rights against the third party tortfeasor who is responsible for the loss. A waiver of subrogation is therefore required if the tortfeasor is one of the insureds.
  9. Excess / deductible - The amount to be borne by the insureds before they are compensated.
  10. Surety / bondsman - The party providing the surety / performance bond. It can be an insurance company or a bank.
  11. Guarantor - The party guaranteeing the performance of another party.
  12. Beneficiary - The party to whom the benefits of the guarantee is given.

(revised, 3/2/2023)

Insurances

  1. Contractors' all risks and third party liability insurances:
    • Discretionary unless mandated by the works contracts.
    • Covering:
      • Materials damage - covering the period until the issue of the Practical Completion / Substantial Completion Certificate for the relevant section of the Works plus a short period for transition during handover (14 days under the private Standard Form of Contract)
      • Third party liability - covering the period until the issue of the Certificate of Completion of Making Good Defects / Defects Rectification Certificate / Maintenance Certificate (different terms used by different contracts) for the relevant section of the Works.
  2. Insurances of construction plant, temporary buildings and vehicles:
    • Discretionary for construction plant and temporary buildings.
    • Vehicles mandated by law.
  3. Insurances prior to delivery to site:
    • Discretionary.
  4. Employees' compensation insurances:
    • Mandated by the Employees' Compensation Ordinance.
  5. Exclusion of self-employed persons and sole proprietors:
    • Insurance cover not required by the Employees' Compensation Ordinance.
    • Not automatically covered by the Contractors' all risks and third party liability insurances.
    • These persons will not lose their rights to compensation but will have to pursue as third parties.
    • Their employers do not have insurance covers if they are liable.
    • Can be covered by "Contractors' Insurance Policy".
    • Can be covered by special endorsement to the Contractors' all risks and third party liability insurances.
  6. Professional liability insurances:
    • Discretionary unless mandated by the consultancy appointments or works contracts.

Contractor Controlled Insurance Programme (CCIP)

  1. Insurance procured by the Contractor.
  2. This is the usual approach.
  3. Contractor taking up the administrative role of procuring the insurance.
  4. Contractor may have an established department or experienced staff to do it.
  5. Contractor may have long established insurance agents or brokers to do it.
  6. Contractor in the best position to manage his own site safety / risks.
  7. Contractor's good track records may lead to lower insurance premium.
  8. The lower insurance premium would be reflected in the Contractor's tender price.
  9. A desire to keep the premium low for the future would encourage keeping good track records for now.

Owner Controlled Insurance Programme (OCIP)

  1. Insurance procured by the Owner (Employer).
  2. Mainly for mega projects involving a number of contracts interfacing with one another.
  3. Best to avoid overlaps and gaps, split of responsibilities and mutual claims within the same mega project.
  4. Also suitable when the Employer will have a number of projects coming up over the years.
  5. Employer in better control in areas such as premium, insurance security and insurance coverage.
  6. The limit and scope of indemnity may be higher and bigger than those could be procured by smaller contracts.
  7. Excesses may be too high for smaller contractors within the same mega project.
  8. Employer taking up the administrative role of procuring the insurance.
  9. Employer may not have an established department or experienced staff to do it.
  10. Employer may need to employ insurance consultants to give advice and do it.
  11. It may require a long lead time from deciding to employ the insurance consultant to procurement of insurance.

Bonds

  1. Surety bonds / Performance bonds:
    • Conditional - compensation made only if faults are proved.
    • On-demand - can be called to pay without the need to prove faults, but must avoid conditional wording leading to the requirement to prove faults.
    • Validity period:
      • Until the issue of the Practical / Substantial Completion of the whole of the Works or until the issue of the Certificate of Completion of Making Good Defects / Defects Rectification Certificate / Maintenance Certificate (different terms used by different contracts) of the whole of the Works.
      • Should be a floating date related to the actual date of the above certificate because the actual date may vary from the original programmed dates.
      • Fixed calendar date as the expiry date should be avoided, but may be tolerated in special circumstances provided it is sufficiently later than the originally expected expiry date to cover possible delays, e.g. 1 year longer.
      • Different ways to specify the expiry date lead to different premia but the floating date method is still procurable.
      • Unless otherwise stated, the bond amount will not be reduced in case of sectional completion.
    • Bond amount:
      • Normally 5% for main contract for private projects.
      • Should consider 10% for demolition contracts, piling contracts and sub-contracts because their risk implications may not be correspondingly low inspite of their lower contract sums.
      • Government projects may not require a bond and do specify much lower percentages.
  2. Tender / bid bonds:
    • Guaranteeing that the tender / bid will be submitted and abided by without withdrawal.
    • Seldom used in Hong Kong.
  3. Advance payment bonds:
    • Guaranteeing that the advance payments will be refunded.
    • Seldom used in Hong Kong.
  4. Retention bonds:
    • Provided in lieu of actual retention money being withheld.
    • Seldom used in Hong Kong.
  5. Payment guarantee bonds:
    • Guaranteeing payment by the paying party.
    • Seldom used in Hong Kong.

(revised, 3/2/2023)

Guarantees

  1. Joint venture guarantees.
  2. Parent company guarantees.

Warranties

  1. Form of Warranty / Collateral Agreement by Nominated Sub-Contractor / Supplier.
  2. Quality warranties:
    • Waterproofing
    • Glass breakage.

(Typo in item 1 corrected, 2/2/2021)

 

See also Vetting Insurances, Bonds and Warranties.

End of Page

Tender Drawings 招标图纸

Tender Drawings 招标图纸 KCTang

Go to End

Note

  • 26/3/2023: Revised.
  • 19/2/2023: Punctuation style changed.
  • 16/3/2020: Revised.
  • 24/12/2014: Moved from wiki.

Types of drawings according to their stages of development​​​​​​​

  1. Sketch design drawings or outline design drawings.
  2. Preliminary design drawings.
  3. BD (Buildings Department) submission drawings.
  4. Tender Drawings.
  5. Contract Drawings.
  6. Construction drawings or working drawings or variation drawings issued under post contract instructions.
  7. Shop drawings, fabrication drawings or installation drawings prepared by Contractors.
  8. As-built drawings by Contractors.

Types of drawings according to their contents 按內容分的图纸类型

  1. Site location plan.
    工地位置图
  2. Site survey plans.
    现场勘测图
  3. Architectural plans.
    建筑平面图
  4. Architectural elevations and sections.
    建筑立面剖面图
  5. Architectural detailed drawings.
    建筑大样图
  6. Structural plans.
    结构平面图
  7. Structural detailed drawings.
    结构大样图
  8. M&E plans.
    机电平面图
  9. M&E schematic drawings.
    机电系统图
  10. M&E detailed drawings.
    机电大样图
  11. etc.

Manage Tender Drawings 招标图纸的管理

  1. Characteristics of issuing drawings:
    出图特性:
    • Drawings are usually not issued in one batch
      未必一次出齐
    • Revised drawings are usually issued during the course of taking-off
      可能出了又改
    • Revised drawings are usually not given a revision number during the pre-contract stage
      修订编号不变
    • Therefore, a system should be implemented for identification of drawings.
      ​所以需要一个分辨图纸的制度
  2. Upon receipt of drawings: 
    收到图纸:
    • Check whether they are complete according to the covering letter
      应检查是否按函件收齐
    • Chase for omitted drawings
      追补缺漏
    • Stamp drawings received with a date-received chop
      必须盖日期章以资识别
    • Register the drawings to facilitate following-up
      并予以登记,方便追踪
    • Dispatch to the relevant team members after registration.
      登记后发给有关的组员

Check sufficiency of drawings 图纸的齐全性

  • Upon receipt, drawings should be checked to see whether they are sufficient for the purposes. If there are insufficient drawings or details, the Architects and Engineers shall be liaised with to pursue the outstanding drawings.
    组员收到图纸,检查内容是否基本齐全,有何变化,追补缺漏

Use Drawing Register 图纸登记录

  1. A Drawing Register should be set up to record the drawings received.
    应用图纸登记录来登记收到的图纸
  2. The format of the Drawing Register can be as follows: 
    图纸登记录的格式可以如下:
  3. During the course of taking-off, Surveyors should check that they are using the latest versions of drawings.
    编标时,应常常检查是否使用最新的图纸
  4. The Drawing Register is useful for tracking revised drawings for use. If drawings are provided late, measures should be taken to resolve the issue.
    图纸登记录有理于追踪使用新修订图纸。若修订图纸过迟,要提出处理办法解决问题
  5. The Drawing Register may be adapted as the Schedule of drawings to be included in the Tender Documents.
    图纸登记录将来可套用为招标文件中的图纸目录
  6. The Drawing Register may also be used for the management of drawings in the construction stage.
    图纸登记录亦可用于施工阶段的图纸管理

Use dimensions shown on drawings 使用图示尺寸

  1. Use marked dimensions in preference to scaling from the drawings.
    ​​​​​​​应使用图示尺寸计量,而不是用比例尺
  2. With drawings drawn by hand without using CAD, it may be possible that the draftsman makes the last minute change to the dimensions without changing the drawn sizes.
    不用CAD的手工绘图,绘图员可能在最后一刻随便改了标示尺寸,而不改图像
  3. Verify the correctness of the dimensions shown before using them: 
    应复核图示尺寸是否有矛盾
    • The total of running dimensions should match the overall dimension
    • The actual scale (printed drawings or on screen) should match the stated scale without enlargement or reduction
    • The scale in one direction should match the scale in the perpendicular direction without distortion
    • The same object should not have different dimensions on different drawings.
  4. Use scale rule to help the above verification.

Use correct scale rule 比例尺的使用

  1. Scale rule may be used when: 
    可用比例尺的时候:
    • Counter-checking the dimensions
      核对图示尺寸
    • Dimensions are insufficient
      尺寸标示不足
    • The shape is complex without adequate dimensions
      图形复杂,没有图示尺寸
    • The unit rate for a work item is low with minor cost implication in case of some tolerance in measurement
      有关项目的单价很低,计量误差影响不大
    • Bulking checking.
      框算复核
  2. The drawings will usually state the scale (1:10, 1:20, 1:100, etc.) of the drawings. Older drawings may draw a scale rule on the drawings.
  3. When using scale rule: 
    使用比例尺时:
    • Check the overall or critical dimensions on the drawings to ensure that there is no enlargement, reduction or distortion in either direction to the scale stated on the drawings or on screen
      要与图示的总尺寸或关键尺寸复核,看看有没有与标示尺寸不符的放大、缩少、扭曲(传真收到的图纸特别要留意)
    • ​​​​​​​Use the correct scale on the scale rule matching the true scale of the drawings, e.g. use 1:100 scale rule for 1:100 scale drawings, and do not use 1:50 scale rule
      用相等于图纸标示比例的比例尺直取尺寸, 例如用1:100的尺量1:100的图,不要用1:50的尺
    • Avoid conversion of scales, e.g. converting from 1:10 to 1:30
    • Use simple scales like 1:1, 1:10 or 1:100 instead of 1:20, 1:25, 1:30 if conversion cannot be avoided.
  4. In special circumstances where the matching scale rule is not available, conversion from the dimensions measured to the actual dimensions represented must be done very carefully with the conversion factors double checked before use.
    真的因没有适当的比例尺或因图纸变形而需换算的,要把量出来的换算到真的尺寸,要小心复核换算率才使用
  5. Note that on a scale of 1:100:
    • A length measured 1 unit would mean 100 units
    • A square measured 1 x 1 unit would represent 100 x 100 square units
    • A cube measured 1 x 1 x 1 unit would represent 100 x 100 x 100 cubic units.
  6. Therefore, on a scale of 1:X:
    • The linear conversion = 1: X
    • The area conversion = 1: square X.
    • The volume conversion = 1: cubic X.
  7. Failure to recognize this exponential effect will lead to serious errors.
  8. For example, when using 1:100 scale rule to measure 1:200 drawings:
    • All readings on the scale rule should be multiplied by 2 to obtain the actual linear measurement
      1:100比例尺量1:200 图纸时,读数要x2
    • It should also be noted seriously that the multiplying factor to obtain the area is 2 x 2 = 4
      计面积时,若按1:100读数先计面积才转换,要小心换算率乃2 x 2 = 4
  9. The conversion factor for scaled area measurement is the square of the conversion factor for scaled linear measurement.
    平面换算率是直尺换算率的2次方
  10. The conversion factor for scaled volume measurement is the cube of the conversion factor for scaled linear measurement.
    立方换算率是直尺换算率的3次方

Use accurately calibrated measurement instruments 使用调较准的计算仪器

  1. Other measurement instruments may also be used: 
    除比例尺外,计算仪器还有:
    • Curvimeter: a mechanical or digital instrument with a wheel for measuring lengths (some stationery stores may still have this on sale)
      曲线计:用滚轮在图上走动便可量出延长尺寸
    • Planimeter: an instrument with a number of arms for measuring areas (it may be difficult to find it now on sale)
      求积仪:用机械支架承托的针,在图上走动一圈便可量出面积
    • Digitiser: an electronic tablet with a pen for measuring lengths and areas (this is available from some computer hardware stores); a PC computer equipped with digitising software is required for use
      数位板:绘图用的电子板,附有笔,驳上电算机及软件,在图上走动便可量出延长尺寸或面积
    • CAD software: for measuring the numbers, girths and areas directly from the CAD drawings.
      绘图软件:直接从图纸电子版读出个数、周长及面积
    • BIM software: for generating quantities, but it should be noted that they may not be consistent with the rules of the Standard Method of Measurement.
    • (last item added, 26/3/2023)

  2. Every time before using these electronic or mechanical instruments: 
    机械或电子仪器每次使用前:
    • The scale should be set to the same scale as the drawing
      要调较至图纸的比例
    • The accuracy should be verified
      要复核精确度
    • When conversion is unavoidable, calculate the conversion factor carefully.
      读数需要换算时,小心测算换算率

Colour drawings 图纸涂颜色

  1. To signify that things on drawings have been measured:
    为表示图示物体已计算了:
    • Parts of the drawings should be coloured as and when those parts have been measured;for example, when a beam on a structural framing plan has been measured, the beam is coloured; when the finishes inside a room have been measured, the area inside the room is coloured
      计算了图示物体后随即在物体的图像上着色;例如:结构平面图上的樑量了,樑就着色;房间内的饰面量了,房间内的面积就着色
    • Either the area or the perimeter may be coloured
      可填满空间或着边框
    • The same colour should be consistently used for the same kind of materials or construction; for example, red colour is used to colour brick walls and green colour is used to colour concrete walls
      不同物体有系统地用不同颜色;例如:砖墙用红色,混凝土墙用绿色
    • Shades or crosses can be used in case the number of colours available is not sufficient.
      颜色不够用可用斜纹格线等帮助
  2. Colouring helps: 
    着了色的图纸:
    • Tracing and distinguishing those measured from those not yet measured
      帮助追踪及分别已计算及未计算的
    • Checking visually that the extent measured is correct
      帮助检视计算的范围有没有错
    • Creating a little bit of fun when measuring
      对苦闷的计量工作增加一点情趣
    • If this practice is maintained, then if a certain part of a drawing has not been coloured, it would readily mean that it has not yet been measured.
      若按此习惯,未着色的地方即未量度
  3. Therefore, it is important that the drawings should not be coloured before measurement, since one may easily forget that he has not yet measured the coloured parts. 
    因此,应避免计量前便着了色,因为这样很容易忘记了实在没量已着色的部份
  4. If a drawing is full of texts, lines and figures and is too condensed that some advance colouring is desirable to help reading the drawings, then partial colouring or colouring the boundary only should be adopted before measurement. After measurement, the full colouring is put in to signify completion of measurement.
    若图纸满是文字、线条及图样并且太密集,的确需要预先着色方便看图,则可用局部着色或边框着色的方法预先着色,在量完以后才全部着色
  5. When a thing shown on the drawings is to be measured several times for different things, e.g. measuring concrete and formwork first and then reinforcement later, then use partial colouring to indicate different phases of measurement.
    若图示物体需按不同的东西量几次,例如,先量混凝土及模板再量钢筋,可用局部着色的方法表示量到不同阶段
  6. Example 图例:

Line through notes on drawings 图纸说明上画线

  1. Notes and annotations on drawings should be taken into consideration in the measurement or writing BQ descriptions.
    图纸上的文字说明及标签应反映在工程量的计算或分项说明内
  2. As soon as this is done, a note or an annotation should be lined through.
    有关资料已获反映,随即在上面画线以表示
  3. Example of lining through:
    画线的图例:
  4. Lining through should be done by lining along the notes and annotations using coloured pencils in bright colours, e.g. yellow or orange. Dark colours which may cover up the notes or annotations should not be used.
    应随句子长度画线,使用鲜明的木颜色笔,例如黄色或橙色。不要用遮盖了文字的深颜色
  5. Fountain pens, ball pens or felt pens, which use permanent ink, should not be used since they appear to be crossing out the Annotations and figures in a permanent manner.
    不应使用钢笔、圓珠筆、氈筆等使用永久墨水的笔,因为它们给人永久删掉有关资料的感觉
  6. Coloured pencils should be used because any wrong marking can be erased, but marking of useful information should not use easily erasable coloured pencils.
    应使用木颜色笔,因涂错了仍可擦掉,但不要用太容易擦掉的木颜色笔在图上标示有用的资料
  7. Fountain pens, ball pens or felt pens should be reserved for making permanent changes on drawings. Red ink should be used.
    钢笔、圓珠筆、氈筆等应保留给表示永久修改之用。应使用红色墨水
  8. Upon completion of taking-off, the presence of any note or annotation on drawings but not yet lined through may mean that they have not yet been taken into account.
    量度完成时,仍有文字说明或标签未画线的,表示还未反映在工程量的计算或分项说明内
  9. Some objects on drawings may have repeating annotations on the same drawings, e.g. a reinforcement bar may be annotated more than once. When the object has been measured, the first annotation is to be lined through. When the next repeating annotation is encountered, instead of lining through, a loop may be drawn over it to signify that the object has already been measured once and this annotation is not measured again. Such practice will help ensure that the same object will not be measured more than twice.
    有些图象可能重复出现标签,例如,钢筋可能多次标签。就同一个图象重复出现的标签,第一个可画线,其他则打圈,以避免及表示没有重复计算
  10. Example of looping:
    打圈的图例:

Superseded drawings 取代了的图纸

  • Drawings superseded should be marked with the words "SUPERSEDED" at conspicuous location on the drawings, usually against the drawing number.
    取代了的图纸: 在明显的地方盖章或手写"取代了"或在图号上打交叉
  • Superseded drawings which have not been used should be thrown away.
    未用过的图纸,没有保留价值的可丢掉
  • For superseded drawings which have been used and have information marked on, the information should be transferred to the updated drawings before throwing away the superseded drawings.
    已用过的图纸,与新版核对时,把着色的资料转移到新图上,才丢掉
  • If there are a lot of information marked on the superseded drawings, the superseded drawings should be kept and stapled at the back of the updated drawings.
    若旧图已着色的资料太多,而新图的修改只是很少,则把新旧图钉在一起使用

BQ Drawings "计量图纸"或"工程量清单图纸"

  1. The drawings actually used for taking-off are called "Taking-off drawings" or "BQ drawings".
    即真正是用了来计量的图纸
  2. The BQ drawings should become the Tender Drawings.
    ​应采纳为"招标图纸"

Tender Drawings and Contract Drawings 招标图纸及合同图纸

  1. Upon completion of taking-off, the Drawing Register should be checked against the drawings actually used for taking-off and the Register can be transformed to a Schedule of Tender Drawings showing a consolidated list of the drawing numbers, titles and the last dates of receipt. Such Schedule of Tender Drawings will be included in the Tender Documents for the reference of the Tenderers and the drawings so listed will become the Contract Drawings.
    招标时,"工程量清单图纸"应成为"招标图纸"
    可真正发给投标者
    或不发出,但可在指定地点供投标者检阅
    招标文件应有图纸目录列明,作为投标及订合同的依据
    招标图纸在投标后订合同时应成为合同图纸
  2. Theoretically, the contents of Tender Drawings actually issued to Tenderers for tendering or made available for Tenderers to inspect should be the same as those used for taking-off and listed in the Schedule of Tender Drawings, and the contents of Contract Drawings actually bound should be the same as the Tender Drawings. However, because the Architects and Engineers may still be making changes during the course of taking-off through the construction stage, it is very usual that the contents of Contract Drawings are more up-to-date than Tender Drawings which are more up-to-date than those used for taking-off.
    招标图纸理应等如工程量清单图纸
    合同图纸理应等如招标图纸
    但有时在发图给计量到发图给招标到订合同这段时间,设计方往往继续改图,但又没有留底。使到合同图不等如招标图不等如工程量清单图纸
  3. Theoretically, the Architects and Engineers should make sufficient copies of the drawings issued to the Quantity Surveyors as reserve for use as Tender Drawings and sufficient copies of Tender Drawings for use as Contract Drawings. However, this is often forgotten. In practice, the BQ drawings instead of the Tender Drawings or Contract Drawings are used for measuring omissions for variations.
    结算时,应以工程量清单图纸为准
  4. With the popular use of CAD software, the discrepancy could be eliminated by making backup copies of the CAD files. Of course, co-ordination by the Quantity Surveyors with the Architects and Engineers and co-operation from them are required.

End of Page

Specification 工料规范

Specification 工料规范 KCTang

Go to End

Note

  • 16 Mar 2020: Revised.
  • 21 Dec 2014: Moved from wiki.

Different parts of Specification 工料规范

  1. Specification Preliminaries.
  2. Technical Specification 技术要求:
    • General Specification or Standard Specification.
    • Particular Specification.
  3. Technical Schedules.

Specification Preliminaries

  1. Called as such if not included as Bill No. 1 - Preliminaries in full.
  2. To specify the contractual requirements, financial requirements and site constraints specific to the project and common to all work sections in addition to those contained the Conditions of Contract.

Technical Specification 工料规范之技术要求

  1. To specify the technical aspects of the work
  2. To specify the materials, workmanship and acceptance standard.
    说明用料、工艺及验收标准.
  3. May contain some general requirements which would not be repeated on the Tender Drawings. 
    会有一些图纸不再表达的一般性规定.
  4. May also contain some special requirements which could not be shown on the Tender Drawings. 
    亦会有一些图纸表达不了的特殊规定.

Technical Schedules

  1. To supplement the Technical Specification in table format.
  2. May contain spaces for tenderers to fill in information about their proposals.

Method of specifying

  1. Prescriptive specification.
  2. Performance specification.
  3. By specific brands or models.
  4. By prime cost rates.

Usual contents of a section in the Technical Specification 工料规范之技术要求每章通常应有的内容

  1. Scope
    范围.
  2. Contractor's design requirements
    承包方承担的设计要求.
  3. Performance requirements
    功能要求.
  4. Warranty requirements
    质保要求.
  5. Contractor's submissions and approval procedures
    承包方要提交的东西及审批程序:
    • Samples
      样品;
    • Manufacturers' certificates
      生产厂证书;
    • Independent laboratories' test reports
      独立实验室測试报告;
    • Shop drawings
      制配图;
    • Field installation drawings
      现场安装图;
    • Ancillary builder's work drawings
      土建配合图.
  6. Materials
    用料.
  7. Workmanship
    工艺.
  8. Testing
    测试.
  9. Commissioning
    调试.
  10. Acceptance inspection
    验收.

Provision of Specification

  1. Specification should be obtained from the Architects and Engineers upon commencement of taking-off. 
    在开始计量时由设计方提供.
  2. Occasionally, the Architects and Engineers may ask the Quantity Surveyors to provide Specification. Strictly speaking, provision of Specification is not part of the Quantity Surveyors’ usual services and is excluded from the fees.
  3. Some QS firms have their standard specification. Provision of such standard specification for the Architects’ and Engineers’ reference should be qualified as to the liability for errors.
  4. Making general references to local government or national or industry standard specifications may lack precision because of the presence of different levels of optional requirements in the standard specifications. 
    若纯叁阅政府或国家或行业标准,因有不同程度的选择性规定,会太笼统.
  5. The Technical Specification should be drafted to suit the need for the Works. 
    工料规范之技术要求应就本工程的需要编写.

BQ descriptions to reflect the Specification 工程量清单分项说明要反映规范

  1. The Specification may contain additional information on materials and workmanship which are not shown on the Drawings. There may be different grades for the same class of materials. There may be different components making up a complete work which require separate measurement. Therefore, care should be exercised to ensure that the BQ items represent and correspond to the materials, workmanship, kind, type, grade, etc. given in the Specification.
  2. The Specification is usually very lengthy, it would be impracticable for the BQ descriptions to repeat the Specification clauses. The Specification should be read together with the BQ descriptions. Instead of repeating the Specification clauses in detail, the BQ descriptions should be adequate to define the scope of component materials and work required so that there would be no ambiguity as to what are required to be included in the BQ rates.
  3. 编标者要:
    • 阅读工料规范;
    • 并在工程量清单分项说明反映;
    • 小心同类物料工艺有不同规格及等级。
  4. 要综合反映图纸上或工料规范中影响造价的内容,以便投标者充分地计价。
  5. 若工料规范的有关规定太长,不能在清单分项说明内重复的:
    • 可在分项说明内指明工料规范的有关条款;
    • 但分项说明仍要简单地列明辅项范围;
    • 若条款有不同规格供选择的,应予以说明。

Specification notes on Drawings 图纸上的规范说明

  1. The specification notes on Drawings should be scrutinized as well. The specification notes generally reflect the particulars of a particular project more than the Specification which can be very standard for all projects.
  2. Any discrepancies between the clauses in the Specification and the specification notes should be clarified with the Architects or Engineers.
  3. The terminology of specification notes on Drawings and annotations on Drawings can be loosely used, and inconsistency with the terminology used in the Specification is not uncommon. The terminology used in the Specification should be followed in the BQ descriptions.
  4. 编标者要:
    • 阅读图纸上的规范说明;
    • 并在工程量清单分项说明反映。
  5. 图纸上的规范说明:
    • 视乎设计方的习惯,可能简单可能长篇;
    • 可能是设计方很标准的写法;
    • 亦可能是特别写给本工程的;
    • 太标准的写法很容易不适用于个别工程;
    • 如与工料规范的要求有矛盾,应与设计方澄清;
    • 小心图纸上的用词未及工料规范的严谨,应使用工料规范的用词。

Lining through Specification 规范上画线

  1. Similar to the practice of lining through notes and annotations on Drawings, the clauses in the Specification should also be lined through each by each as and when the contents have been taken into consideration in the measurement or writing BQ descriptions. 
    如在图纸上的文字说明及数字画线一样,工料规范的条款在计算工程量或写分项说明时已予以反映的,该条款便应画线以资识别。逐段画线的图例:
  2. Since the Specification clauses may involve work measured by more than one Taker-off, the Specification clauses should be lined through by all Takers-off involved. Different colour pencils may be used by different Takers-off and the bottom of the line or pages should be initialled. 
    涉及的计量员都应以不同的木颜色笔画线,并在每页的线底端签名,以资负责.
  3. Handwritten draft changes to the Specification should be marked by fountain pens, ball pens or felt pens using red ink. 
    发觉工料规范有需要修改的地方,应以不褪色的笔标记,留待最后时打印修订.
  4. Upon completion of taking-off, the presence of any Specification clauses not lined through may mean that they have not yet been taken into account. 
    计量完毕时,任何未画线的条款表示未在工程量清单内应用及反映.

End of Page

Bills of Quantities vs Schedule of Quantities and Rates

Bills of Quantities vs Schedule of Quantities and Rates KCTang

Go to End

19/8/2019: Created.

 

Item

Description

Bills of Quantities

Schedule of Quantities and Rates

1.

Provided by

Employer or his consultants usually the QS

Tenderers

2.

Production time implication

  • Done before issuing tender documents
  • Long time before issue
  • Done during tendering
  • Longer time for tendering

3.

Cost of tendering

  • Low to tenderers
  • Employer bears cost of production of one set only
  • High to tenderers
  • All tenderers bear their own costs of production with no guarantee of winning the contract
  • May pass on to subcontract tenderers to measure

4.

Quality check

  • Production overlapping design time
  • Relatively longer time available
  • Greater chance to do quality check
  • Greater chance to improve drawings and specifications when problems are discovered during BQ production
  • Relatively shorter time available
  • Approximation or short-cuts have to be adopted
  • Less chance to do quality check
  • Less chance to improve drawings and specifications when problems are discovered during tendering

5.

Measurement rules

According to the Standard Method of Measurement

  • Not necessarily according to the Standard Method of Measurement
  • Based on common or self-explanatory practice
  • Possible to simplify measurement
  • More flexible to suit sub-contractors’ pricing methods

6.

Risks of errors in the quantities and descriptions

  • Employer’s risks
  • Contract Sum to be adjusted for errors
  • Deduct over-measurement
  • Add back under-measurement
  • All the above unless the BQ are declared to be for reference only at the risks of the Contractor
  • Contractor’s risks
  • Contract Sum not to be adjusted for errors
  • Enjoy over-measurement
  • Suffer under-measurement
  • May try to recover the loss through variations and claims

7.

Risks of errors in the rates

  • Contractor’s risks
  • Contract Sum not to be adjusted
  • Same

8.

Competition

  • Compete prices based on the same set of quantities
  • Compete prices based on own set of quantities which may be different from other tenders

9.

Comparison of tender prices

  • Easier
  • Comparing unit rates only
  • More difficult
  • Comparing unit rates and differing quantities described or grouped differently

10.

Manipulation of price distribution

  • More difficult
  • Easier due to the possibility of manipulating the quantities

11.

Payment basis

  • Easy to use
  • Same

12.

Rates for valuation of variations

  • Available
  • Item coverage certain because of compliance with the Standard Method of Measurement
  • Available but lack of compliance with the Standard Method of Measurement may cause argument as to item coverage

13.

Cost analysis for future use

  • More reliable and balanced
  • May not be so reliable if the grouping or quantities of items are incorrect



End of Page

Concepts of Bills of Quantities 工程量清单的概念

Concepts of Bills of Quantities 工程量清单的概念 KCTang

Go to End

Note

19/2/2023: Revised.

21/12/2014: Moved from wiki.

Intro

Production of Bills of Quantities is the core tasks of Quantity Surveyors. Stringent quality control has to be exercised throughout the processes.

(added, 19/2/2023)

What are Bills of Quantities?

  1. A Bill of Quantities is a list of quantified items of work or services required for the completion of construction works with the quantities of the work or services stated in appropriate units of measurement and with materials, workmanship, quality and standard required for the work or services fully described.
  2. "Bills of Quantities" are usually given in plural since usually there are more than one bill in a set of Bills of Quantities and more than one item in a Bill of Quantities.
  3. Bills of Quantities are usually prepared by Quantity Surveyors, a member of the Consultant teams to the Developers of construction projects.

工程量清单是甚幺?

  1. 列项
    • 把完成某工程所需的实物或服务分项列出
  2. 量化
    • 以恰当的计量单位予以量化
  3. 说明
    • 对所需的材料、工艺、质量及标准充份说明

Functions of Bills of Quantities

  1. The primary function of Bills of Quantities is for inclusion in Tender Documents issued to Tenderers for pricing such that all tenders are priced based on the same set of items and quantities and the returned priced Bills of Quantities will be useful for tender analysis.
  2. The secondary functions, not necessarily less important functions, of Bills of Quantities are:
    • The rates in the priced Bills of Quantities, when accepted, will become the contract rates for the purposes of pricing payments, variations and valuations.
    • The priced Bills of Quantities can be used for valuing work in progress.
    • The priced Bills of Quantities can be analysed to produce cost analysis of the building or construction.

工程量清单的功能

  1. 招标
    • 传达工程内容
    • 较准确的投标 – 编标者在编清单过程与建筑师及工程师保持密切的沟通,编出的工程量清单会比较由承包方自己编的更有代表性
    • 较少的合同后争议 – 编得好的工程量清单可减少项目涵盖范图不清楚所带来的争议及减少索赔
  2. 投标
    • 为计价依据
    • 投标乃按同样的基础计价
    • 减低投标者的投标费用,投标者不需要花金钱及资源去计算工程量
  3. 评标
    • 便于比较
    • 评标的比较分析可集中于单价方面
    • 灭少数量差对中标资格的影响
  4. 定标
    • 成为合同文件的一部份
    • 工程量清单所填写的单价获接纳后成为合同单价,用作付款估值、变更计价
  5. 施工
    • 为施工及验收标准
    • 比图纸或规范有更明确说明
  6. 付款
    • 方便计算进度款
  7. 结算
    • 有约束力的单价
    • 较易计算减帐 – 在计算工程变更的减帐时,可以查阅原来的计算来扣减,而不必再计
  8. 造价分析
    • 可予以分析得出建筑物或建设工程的造价指标和工程含量

Types of Bills of Quantities

  1. Based on the nature of the quantities, Bills of Quantities can either be:
    • Firm Bills of Quantities; or
    • Provisional Bills of Quantities (sometimes called Approximate Bills of Quantities).
  2. For Firm Bills of Quantities, all quantities are meant to have been accurately measured based on the Tender Drawings and Specification and therefore do not require remeasurement in the settlement of the Final Accounts. If it is found after contract award that the quantities are wrong, the Contract Sum will be adjusted for the rectification of the errors. The risks of the errors in the Bills of Quantities therefore rest with the Employer.
  3. For Provisional Bills of Quantities, all quantities are meant to have been approximately measured from the Tender Drawings and Specification or estimated based on predictions. The quantities will require remeasurement in the settlement of the Final Accounts. Any errors or imprecision in estimating the quantities or describing the work will be rectified once and for all in the Remeasurement Bills. However, if the final as constructed items and quantities differ from the original provisional items and quantities substantially, the Contractor may argue for an adjustment of the unit rates. If the total value of the Remeasurement Bills varies substantially from the value of the original Provisional Bills of Quantities, the Client may also query.

Contractors’ Bills of Quantities / Schedule of Quantities and Rates

  1. If Bills of Quantities are not provided to Tenderers for tendering, the Tenderers will be required to measure their own quantities and submit their own itemized quantities and rates build-up or breakdown of the tender sums. To distinguish such kind of build-up or breakdown from Bills of Quantities provided to Tenderers, they are called "Schedule of Quantities and Rates" or simply "Schedule of Rates".
  2. The quantities of Schedule of Quantities and Rates do not form part of the Contract. This means that any errors or omissions or excess in the quantities or items in the Schedule of Quantities and Rates will be regarded as the risks of the Tenderers and the Contract Sum will not be rectified for the errors.
  3. In theory, the quantities of a defined scope of works should be the same. However, the format, classification, sequence, items and descriptions of Schedules of Quantities and Rates prepared by different Tenderers will be different. This would make tender analysis and comparison very difficult and less precise.
  4. Each Tenderer would have to spend money and resources to prepare the Schedule of Quantities and Rates. However, only one out of several Tenderers will be successful in obtaining the contract for each tendering, and there is no guarantee that the value of work secured will be equally spread amongst Tenderers. Tenderers would have to make short-cuts or approximations when preparing the Schedule of Quantities and Rates in order to reduce the cost of tendering.
  5. With the common practice of awarding the contract to the lowest Tenderer, it is sometimes said that the lowest Tenderer is the lowest because he has made serious errors by under-measurement or under-pricing.
  6. Contractors who have under-priced will be more likely to explore avenues for claims in order to recover the loss. This would make post contract management difficult.
  7. Since the quantities in the Schedule of Quantities and Rates do not form part of the Contract, for each variation, the quantities of work omitted should be measured rather than relying upon the quantities stated in the Schedule of Quantities of Rates. For example, if the Schedule of Quantities and Rates included a separate item for 100 m2 of false ceilings in the lift lobbies and there is a variation requiring omission of all false ceilings in the lift lobbies, the quantity to be omitted cannot simply be 100 m2 but shall be accurately measured which may turn out to be more or less.
  8. Descriptions in the Schedule of Quantities and Rates are generally simplified or imprecise or incomplete. This will create difficulties in interpreting what are actually covered by and allowed for by an item, and will lead to argument when such items are used for pricing of additions or omissions.
  9. Taking aside the commercial consideration of minimizing the costs, the principle and technique described in this Knowledge Base for the production of Bills of Quantities should also be applicable to the production of Schedule of Quantities and Rates.

Advantages of Bills of Quantities

  • Having discussed the characteristics of Schedule of Quantities and Rates, it is apparent that the advantages of providing Bills of Quantities to Tenderers for pricing are:
    • Comparison of tenders on common basis - Tenders are priced on a common basis. Analysis and comparison of tenders would be on the rates and prices only.
    • Saving Tenderers’ costs of tendering - Tenderers would not need to spend money and resources to measure the Bills of Quantities.
    • More accurate tenders - The quality of Bills of Quantities produced by Quantity Surveyors having dialogue with the Architects and Engineers over a longer period of time should be better than the Schedule of Quantities and Rates produced by Tenderers within shorter period of time with less budget.
    • Easier to calculate omissions - For omission of quantities due to variations in the post contract stage, instead of remeasuring the quantities to be omitted, the original measurements can be referred to for the quantities to be omitted.
    • Less post contract problems - Well prepared Bills of Quantities will reduce the uncertainty as to the coverage of items and reduce claims.

Difficulties for Bills of Quantities

  1. Production of good Bills of Quantities do require substantial number of man-hours which span over a significant period of time. This means fees and time on programme.
  2. Some Developers because of tight development budgets or small development size would not want to spend money in producing Bills of Quantities.
  3. Some Developers would not want to spend some extra few weeks on programme to produce Bills of Quantities.
  4. Some Developers may go to the extreme to say that the quality of Bills of Quantities produced by the Quantity Surveyors is no better than the Schedule of Quantities and Rates produced by Tenderers.
  5. Without the need to produce Bills of Quantities, the Quantity Surveyors’ fees will be reduced, it is therefore of paramount importance that Quantity Surveyors should take the best measures and make the best effort to produce quality Bills of Quantities within the shortest possible time.
  6. It should also be borne in mind that without Bills of Quantities, the time required to deal with tender analysis and post contract management will be increased.

工程量清单的困难

  1. 编制好的工程量清单
    • 需要很多任务时及工日
    • 发包方未必愿意花钱或花时间
    • 亦有些发包方让承包方自己计算承担错误的风险
  2. 要持续地取得任务的关键是
    • 省时地编到好的工程量清单

Verification of Bills of Quantities

  1. Because of the fear that the Bills of Quantities measured by the Quantity Surveyors are not accurate enough that there will be post contract claim for increase in the Contract Sum for rectification of errors of omissions, there is a tendency that some major Developers require the Tenderers to verify the accuracy of the Bills of Quantities during the tendering period. Tenderers are required to correct the errors and submit Tender Sums inclusive of rectification of errors. The risks of the errors in the Bills of Quantities are therefore transferred to the Contractors.
  2. Such practice indicates a mistrust of Quantity Surveyors and defeats the original ideas of saving Tenderers’ costs of tendering.
  3. Some Developers argue that, without discrediting Quantity Surveyors, they would rather play safe. They would rather let the Tenderers price high to cover the errors than to let the errors coming up unexpectedly during the post contract thus upsetting the budget plan.
  4. In reality, the tendering period would not be sufficient for the Tenderers to carry out thorough detailed check of the Bills of Quantities. They can only carry out bulk-checking. Competitive market pressure of tendering will deter Tenderers from allowing buffers for errors.
  5. Some Tender Documents will declare that the Bills of Quantities after verification will be deemed to be the Contractor’s Bills of Quantities or Schedule of Quantities and Rates and that the quantities do not form part of the Contract. The Tender Drawings and Specification become the sole basis of the Contract with the Bills of Quantities excluded. A benefit of Bills of Quantities whereby inadequacy in Tender Drawings and Specification can be made up by properly described or measured items in the Bills of Quantities will be lost since the correct measurement is not evidenced from the Tender Drawings and Specification.
  6. The adoption of the practice to require the Tenderers to verify the Bills of Quantities therefore should not be encouraged. A better alternative is to require the successful Contractor to verify the Bills of Quantities within a defined period after award of the Contract. This would save the Tenderers’ costs of tendering and risks of uncertainty, yet give the Clients earlier warning of errors.
  7. Quantity Surveyors should produce Bills of Quantities as accurate as possible for the benefit of every party involved in the project.
  8. However, it should be cautioned that "accuracy" does not mean measuring quantities in unduly fine and tedious details without regard to the time required and the significance of the costs of the items involved. Accuracy must be judged against the costs of the items involved. Priority and emphasis should be given to cost significant items.

End of Page

Formats of Bills of Quantities 工程量清单的格式

Formats of Bills of Quantities 工程量清单的格式 KCTang

Go to End

Note

21/12/2014: Moved form wiki.

Sections of Bills of Quantities
工程量清单分部

  1. Traditionally and typically, Bills of Quantities are divided into the following Bills:
    传统及典型的工程量清单分为下列的清单:
    • Bill No. 1 – Preliminaries 
      ​一号清单: 开办经营费用
    • Bill No. 2 - Preambles
      二号清单: 清单说明
    • Bill No. 3 - Substructure
      三号清单: 基础工程
    • Bill No. 4 - Superstructure
      四号清单:上盖工程
    • Bill No. 5 - Drainage
      五号清单: 地下排水工程
    • Bill No. 6 - External Works 
      六号清单: 外围工程
    • Bill No. 7 - Prime Cost and Provisional Sums 
      七号清单: 指定项目暂定价及暂定款
    • Bill No. 8 - Daywork Schedule
      八号清单: 点工费用
    • General Summary. 
      投标价汇总。
  2. The substructure and superstructure may be further varied as follows: 
    基础工程及上盖工程可变化如下:
    • Bill No. 1 - Preliminaries
      一号清单: 开办经营费用
    • Bill No. 2 - Preambles
      二号清单: 清单说明
    • Bill No. 3 - Basement
      三号清单: 地下室
    • Bill No. 4 - Podium
      四号清单: 裙房
    • Bill No. 5 - Tower 
      五号清单: 塔楼
    • Bill No. 6 - Drainage 
      六号清单: 地下排水
    • Bill No. 7 - External Works
      七号清单: 外围
    • Bill No. 8 - Prime Cost and Provisional Sums
      八号清单: 指定项目暂定价及暂定款
    • Bill No. 9 - Daywork Schedule
      九号清单: 点工费用
    • General Summary. 
      投标价汇总。

Measured Works Bills

  1. Bills No. 3 to 6 in the first example and Bills No. 3 to 7 in the second example are Measured Works Bills because the physical work are measured and presented in these Bills.
  2. Measured Works Bills are usually further divided into Trade Sections arranged according to the trade sequence in Standard Method of Measurement III or the work sections sequence in Standard Method of Measurement IV, e.g.:
    • Excavator or Excavation
    • Concretor or Concrete Work
    • Bricklayer or Brickwork
    • etc.
  3. External Works Bill contains items involving all trades. Therefore, it is usual to arrange items in the External Works Bill according to the type of construction, e.g.:
    • Site formation
    • Fence walls
    • Roads and paving
    • Planters
    • Guard house
    • etc.

Page layout of BQ pages

  1. Sample page layout of Measured Works Bill:
  2. Sample layout of Collection page:
  3. Sample layout of Summary page:
  4. Sample layout of General Summary page:

Page header and footer

  1. The positions of the project and contract titles and the company name or logo may be interchanged.
  2. With the popularity of computer use, it is preferred to have the filename shown to help identifying the computer file. The filename should be systematic and self-explanatory.

BQ columns

  1. Pages for Measured Works Bills have ruled columns like the following examples:
  2. Pages for Preliminaries, Collection and Summary pages do not have columns for quantity, unit and rate. The columns are as follows:
  3. The Qty, Unit, Rate and Amount columns should be wide enough to accommodate the texts and figures when typed in. The width of the Description column is more flexible.
  4. Bill No. 2 - Preambles do not have ruled columns because the items there are not supposed to be individually priced.
  5. Recent trend is to change the Preambles Bill to a Preambles Section without Bill No. Care however should be made to declare that the Preambles Section still form part of the Bills of Quantities. Alternatively, the Section should be called "Preambles to Bills of Quantities" to evident its status.
  6. Some of the Preliminaries clauses are lengthy and do not directly attract a price. Therefore, prices entered in the Preliminaries Bills are scattered through the pages.
  7. Recent trend is to move the Preliminaries clauses to the Specification and call it "Specification - Preliminaries". Bill No. 1 - Preliminaries then only contains the clause heading of the Specification - Preliminaries. The Specification - Preliminaries without column for pricing can use wider page width and this reduces the number of pages. Bill No. 1 - Preliminaries presents the prices in a more compact manner, and would be convenient and concise if the same Bill is used for subsequent payment valuation since the lengthy descriptions are left out.

Alphabetical item reference

  1. Traditionally, item references are given as A, B, C, D, E, etc. for items with units. The item references start from A again on every page unless the item continues from the last page.
  2. Headings are not referenced.
  3. When item A on page 3/1 is referred to, it is referred to as BQ item 3/1/A.
  4. Alphabetical reference system using A, B, C is easier to use since every page starts with a new sequence. When an item reference is incorrectly assigned, simply correct it and the subsequent item references on the same page. Subsequent pages would not be affected.
  5. However, if, after assigning the item references, items are inserted or deleted involving shifting of items over pages, alphabetical item references on more than one page would need to be re-assigned.
  6. This works fine before BQ are actually issued for tendering since the item references can be corrected at will. However, if, after issuing the BQ for tendering, insertion of items is required as tender amendments, then it would be undesirable to shift the positions of all subsequent items over the subsequent pages.
  7. If the BQ are typed by typewriters or by word processors, like in the old days, the effect might be reduced if some spaces have been reserved at the bottom of pages or if the font size and spacing are reduced to suit.
  8. However, with the popular use of spreadsheet, database, or BQ production software where the items are automatically tightly printed one after the other and the font sizes are standardized, insertion of items without disturbance to the positions or item references of subsequent items is impossible.
  9. Some people use a new page with the page number designated something like 3.2/1+1 or 3.2/1A to denote an additional page. By this method, the items on the subsequent pages can remain intact. The method requires the software used to produce BQ to be intelligent enough to deal with the additional page number, otherwise the page number will have to be assigned manually.

Numeric item reference

  1. An alternative to alphabetical reference is to use numeric reference in the form of 1, 1.1, 1.1.1 continuously through the same Trade Section. "3.2/" in the following sample is used to represent the Bill No. Headings are also referenced. When the first item is referred to, it is referred to as BQ item 3.2/1.1.1.
  2. Numeric reference system requires items over all pages to be consecutively referenced. Therefore greater care is required to ensure correctness. If a reference is incorrectly assigned, all subsequent references of the same level will need to be assigned again.
  3. If, after assigning the item references, items are inserted or deleted involving shifting of items over pages, the references of subsequent items of the same level would need to be assigned. For example, if item 3.2/1.3.3 is a newly inserted item, then only the original items from 3.2/1.3.3 onward would need to be re-assigned a reference. Of course, if Heading 3.2/1.3 is a newly inserted item, then all the original headings and items from 3.2/1.3 onward would need to be re-assigned a reference.
  4. The problem of shifting of items over pages or the need for additional pages as described for alphabetical reference system cannot be eliminated with numeric reference system. However, since numeric reference system does not use the page number as part of the complete reference. The page on which a particular item appears is less significant. This would be useful when exchanging BQ on computer files. The item references remain unchanged irrespective of the page width or depth. Numeric item references would also be convenient for data processing.

Item references according to the Standard Method of Measurement

  • Civil Engineering Standard Method of Measurement of the United Kingdom requires the item references to follow the references used in the SMM.

Descriptions

  1. There are two styles of writing descriptions. The traditional way is to write it in the natural style of the language, e.g. Concrete Grade 10/20 in 75 mm blinding layer. Such style can be extremely flexible.
  2. The other way is to build up the descriptions from small tokens, e.g. Concrete ; Grade 10/20 ; blinding layer ; 75 mm. Such tokenised description style is the result of the adoption of standard phraseology for BQ production by computer. Takers-off are presented with choices of tokens on the menus on computer screens to select for building up the complete description. Tokenised descriptions help enhance the uniformity of descriptions and help data-processing because the descriptions are structured. However, they are not natural to read and may sometimes be cumbersome for simple items. " ; " with a space before and after is usually used to separate tokens. This would have significance when sorting the descriptions by computer. " ; " beginning with a space will be sorted before "; " without a space.

Extra over or extra for

  1. Extra over items are measured when additional work is required on part of a principal item and it would be tedious or artificial to split the principal items into two: one with the additional work and one without the additional work.
  2. The volume, area, length or number of these extra over items are included in the measurements of the quantities of the principal items in which they occur and the prices for these items are to be extra only over the prices of the items in which they occur. In other words, the quantities of the principal items would not be reduced by reason of the measurement of the extra over items.
  3. Examples of extra over items are:
    • Extra over excavation and disposal (measured Cube) for breaking up and removing paving, surface concrete and the like (measured Super or as an Item);
    • Extra over concrete in beams and slabs (measured Cube without deduction of the volume of the haunching) for a stronger grade of concrete in haunching at abutment with columns or walls (also measured Cube)
    • Extra over common brickwork (measured Super without deduction of the area with facings) for facings (also measured Super)
    • Extra over stone walling (measured Cube or Super without deduction of the volume or area with facings) for facings (measured Super)
    • Extra over roof tiling (measured Super without deduction of the area of the double courses) for double courses (measured Run)
    • Extra over wood block flooring (measured Super without deduction of the area of the border) for border (measured Run)
    • Extra over timber doors (measured Super without deduction of the area of louvred openings or enumerated) for forming louvred openings (enumerated)
    • Extra over tiling (measured Super without deduction of the area of special tiles) for tiles rounded on one or two edges or special tiles at angles or corners (measured Run or enumerated)
    • Extra over plumbing and drainage pipework (measured Run without deduction of the length occupied by fittings) for fittings like bend, tees, junctions, etc. (enumerated).
  4. The general pattern to write extra over items is: "Extra over principal item for additional work". However, if it is clear as to which are the principal items, the expression may be simplified to "Extra for additional work". Generally items using this simplified expression follow closely behind the principal items. The principal items may not necessarily be a single item but may be a group of items where the extra over work is the same. For example:
  5. Expressions like "Extra only over principal item for additional work" and "Extra over the last item for additional work" can also be used.
  6. Expressions like "Extra over for additional work" are not preferred.

Range

  • Where items are to be described in ranges, a short form is used, for example:
    • "0 - 0.10 m2 opening" means opening not exceeding 0.10 m2 in size
    • "1.50 - 3.00 m deep" means exceeding 1.50 m but not exceeding 3.00 m deep
    • "75 - 150 mm girth" means exceeding 75 mm but not exceeding 150 mm girth
    • "exceeding" means greater than
    • "not exceeding" means less than and equal to.

Ancillary items

  • The descriptions should be adequate to cover ancillary work or service which are not deemed to be included for in the unit rates by the Preambles.

Headings

  1. Headings are used for grouping of items of similar elements or constructions to simplify the length of descriptions. As a rule, if there are two or more consecutive items of very similar descriptions, they should be put under a heading. The heading should cover the repeating portions of the descriptions. Compare the following first four items written with or without headings:
  2. Notice that a short line precedes the last item above to signify that the heading to the preceding items no longer apply to this item.
  3. If there may be confusion as to the end of the application of headings, words like "(End of ALL PROVISIONAL) " may be used.
  4. It should be noted that the heading and the description can be read together as if they are one complete description. The word "to" is essential for this continuous reading.
  5. Some people omitted the word "to", the meaning would remain unchanged, but the continuous reading is interrupted.
  6. In cases where the heading and description cannot be read continuously, it is preferred to repeat the subject matter in the description. Compare the following examples:
  7. The first level of headings may be called Main Headings and the lower levels of headings may be called Sub-headings.
  8. Headings where applicable are repeated on the beginning of each page and finished with the word "(Cont’d) ".

Singular and plural

  • It is usual to write headings in plurals and write the principal subject of the descriptions in singular sense and the ancillary items in plurals. In the above examples, "Screeds" in the headings is a plural while "Screed" in the descriptions is singular. "Beam" in "sides and soffit of beam" is singular, while "sides" is a plural and "soffit" is singular to signify that for a typical beam, there are two sides and one soffit.

Punctuations

  1. Descriptions of measured items usually do not end with a full stop. Descriptions of Preliminaries, Preambles and note items are given full punctuation.
  2. Headings which are supposed to read continuously with the descriptions are traditionally ended with ": " or ":- ". However, recent trend omits to use them.

Secondary quantities

  1. The Standard Method of Measurement may require that further information as to quantities be given in the descriptions. Such information may be given in the following manners:

  2. Some people call the secondary quantities in brackets a "trigger".

Sequence

  • Items in Bills of Quantities within the same Bill or Trade are to be sequenced according to the following rules:
    • According to sequence required by the Standard Method of Measurement such as the Civil Engineering Standard Method of Measurement of UK
    • In case of no specific requirements in the SMM, headings are given according to the sequence of construction
    • Items under the same headings are sequenced according to the units in the order of: Item, kg, m3, m2, m, No.
    • For the same units, items are sequenced from the cheapest to the most expensive.

Units

  1. The usual units of billing are:
    • kg - for items given by weight
    • m3 - for items given by volume
    • m2 - for items given by area
    • m - for items given by length
    • No. - for items given by number
    • Item - for items not given by quantities but to be priced as a lump sum price.
  2. An alternative way to say some of the above is:
    • m3 - for items given Cube
    • m2 - for items given Super
    • m - for items given Run or for linear items
    • No. - for enumerated items.
  3. Cube, Super, Run, No. were used with the imperial system of units. However, some people still use them for metric system since they are less prone to typing errors than m3, m2 and m.
  4. The following should be noted:
    • "kg" begins with "k" not "K"
    • "Item" is capitalized
    • "Super" can be abbreviated to "Sup. "
    • "Nr" or "Nr. " can be used instead of "No. "
    • "Pair" and "Set" may sometimes be used
    • "Manday" or "Hour" may be used for Dayworks items
    • "t" or "MT" may be used for metric tonne
    • "Note" may be used for note items.

Quantities

  1. Quantities should be given to the nearest whole units. In case a quantity is too small to be a whole unit, it should be given as one. Better still, the unit of measurement should be reviewed to see whether an alternative unit is more appropriate to reflect the smallness of the item, e.g. enumerated instead of given Cube.
  2. Extreme care should be exercised during tender analysis to ensure that an item of very small quantity would not be priced at excessively high rates in expectation for major increase in the quantities through variations.

Rate only items

  • If an item is to be a rate only item for obtaining rate only without quantity, the word "Rate Only" should be inserted in the quantity column against the item.

Rates and amounts

  • The column width of the Rate and Amount columns should be wide enough to allow for the figures to be given to two decimal places.

Extending the total

  • The Amount column is also called the "Extension" column. Multiplying the quantity and rate to give the amount and entering the amount is called extending the total.

Casting down the total

  • Totalling the extensions to arrive at the page total is called casting down the total.

Carried forward / brought forward

  1. Carrying the running total from one page over to the next page is usually signified by the words "Carried forward" at the bottom of the first page and the words "Brought forward" at the top of the second page against the left hand side of the figure carried, as follows:
  2. The words may be simplified to "C/F" and "B/F" without the figures as follows:

Carrying the total

  • Carrying the page total to the Collection page and to the Summary page is called carrying the total.

Style and consistency

  • There can be equally workable but different styles to present the format of and descriptions in Bills of Quantities. However, it is very important that within the same set of Bills of Quantities, the style and descriptions used must be consistent throughout. If the same kind of work appearing in different sections of the Bills of Quantities is given different descriptions, it may lead to claims. Consistent style will ease the reading and understanding of the Bills of Quantities and improve the quality of the Bills of Quantities.

Model bills and past BQ

  • Office Model or Standard Bills or BQ of past similar projects should be referred to for descriptions. They can also serve as useful check-list for any missing items.

The following are discussions regarding BQ format in Mainland China

项目名称

  1. 试看看下列例子的项目名称,是否很容易判断出它们的分别:
  2. 又试看看下列的例子,是否很容易判断出它们的分别:
  3. 后一个例子应该较易分辨不同项目的差别,而且较省纸张。
  4. 香港及外地的工程量清单习惯把工程项目名称分层表示,每一标题代表一个层次,整个项目名称乃综合几个标题及本项说明一并阅读理解。层次的多少视乎同类项目的多少及变化而定,通常为两至三个层次,若太多亦不太好。用英文时,通常第一层标题全部用大写,有底线;第二层标题就不用大写,用粗体,有底线;第三层有底线及会缩排。诸如此类的变化以分辨。中文字就没有大写,但可用字形、粗斜体、底线、缩排来分辨。例如:
  5. 如果同类的只有一个项目,旧式的方法是在项目之前加一条短线以表示这项目不是属于前一项目的标题所管辖。例如:
  6. 为了维持一致性,建议就算单一项目都有标题,例如:
  7. 上述例子还可以有变化,若柱高或梁高有较多的变化,可能需要将柱高梁高写在本项说明内。

文字的表示

  1. 文字说明,除分部名称外,应靠左,分部名称可置中。
  2. 下列的例子两个写法,意义都一样,左边的较口语化,右边的适用于电子计算软件自动排列顺序:

数字的表示

  1. 试看看下列的例子,那一个编排方法较易判断出个别数字的分别:
  2. 数量、单价及金额等涉及数字的栏目,应靠右,不要靠左或置中,并应有千位符号。
  3. 工程数量不表示小数,较为实际好用。

清单编号

  1. 单项、单位、分部工程量清单可使用相关的编号,例如1.2.3代表第1 单项、第2单位、第3分部。
  2. 香港通常用把每分部工程量清单编一个码。

序号

  1. 序号作为项目在清单的顺序可有不同的编排方法:
    • 整份清单一组序号,只适用于有较少项目的清单;
    • 每页內的項目独立序号,例如:A, B, C;
    • 分部或分组工程量清单独立序号,例如:
  2. 请注意上表加了清单编号及小计。

编页、分册及目录

  1. 清单编号及页码要有系统地编列。
  2. 过厚的文件应适当地分册。
  3. 应维持有内文页码的目录。

End of Page

Preparation upon Commencement of BQ Production 编写工程量清单前的准备

Preparation upon Commencement of BQ Production 编写工程量清单前的准备 KCTang

Go to End

Note

28/3/2020: Punctuation standardised.

23/12/2014: Moved from wiki.

Forming a team 组建小组

  1. Each project should have a Project-in-charge.
    每一個项目都应有一個项目负责人
  2. The Project-in-charge should be, depending on the level of delegation of authority, a Director, Associate Director, Assistant Director, Partner or Associate of the QS firm.
    视乎获授权的程度,项目负责人应为工料測量师事务所的董事、副董事、助理董事、合伙人或副合伙人
  3. The Project-in-charge should: 
    项目负责人应:
    • estimate the human resources and time required
      估计所需人手及时间
    • appoint team members
      指派人选
    • appoint a team leader.
      选定组长
  4. The team leader should: 
    组长应:
    • be an experienced surveyor
      为一个有经验的測量师
    • liaise with the Client and the Designers
      与发包方及设计方保持联系
    • understand the requirements of the Works
      了解工程要求
    • understand the time arrangement
      了解时间安排
    • obtain the drawings.
      取得图纸
  5. The other team members should be surveyors or assistant surveyors of suitable grades.
    组员应为适当级别的測量师或測量技术员

Briefing meeting 交底会

  1. A briefing meeting should be held when the major drawings are sufficient enough to enable production work to commence.
    主要图纸齐备,可以开工,便要举行交底会
  2. The meeting should be chaired by the Project-in-charge.
    应由项目负责人主持交底会
  3. The appointed team members should attend.
    选定的编标小组成员应叁加
  4. To discuss and clarify the following matters:
    讨论及明确下列事情:
    • Scope of measurement
      计算的范围
    • Method of measurement and Preambles
      工程量计算规则及清单说明
    • Bills and trades classification
      分部清单的划分
    • Drawings and Specification
      图纸及规范
    • Staff allocation
      人手分配
    • BQ production programme.
      编标计划进度表
  5. People who join the team later may be briefed by the team leader.
    较后加入的组员,可由组长指导

Scope of measurement 计算的范围

  1. The scope of measurement required for the Bills of Quantities should be clarified: 
    应明确工程量清单所需计算的范围:
    • Extent of previous contracts, such as piling contract, site formation contract
      已完成工程的范围,例如打桩、场地平整等
    • Items to be covered by prime cost rates
      采用暂定单价的项目
    • Items to be covered by prime cost sums to be supplied by Nominated Suppliers or carried out by Nominated Sub-Contractors
      由指定供货商供应的物料及指定分包方负责执行的工程
    • Goods to be supplied by the Employer
      由发包方供应的物料
    • Items to be carried out by others, such as landlords, tenants, Government Authorities, Public Utility Companies, etc.
      由其他人负责执行的工程,例如大业主、租户、政府机关、市政单位、等
    • Items to be measured provisional because of insufficient drawings, e.g. reinforcement.
      因图纸不全要以暂定工程量代表的项目,例如钢筋

Method of measurement and Preambles 工程量计算规则及清单说明

  1. Identify which version to be used of: 
    确定采用那套:
    • Standard Method of Measurement
      标准的工程量计算规则
    • Standard Office Preambles.
      公司的标准清单说明
  2. Discuss and identify any deviations from the SMM to suit the special nature of the project.
    讨论及确定为适应本项目特性而要与标准的工程量计算规则的偏离
  3. The deviations may be standard within the office or may be specially devised for the project.
    偏离可能是公司的标准或是为本项目特定的
  4. The Standard Office Preambles should be referred to for the standard deviations.
    公司的标准偏离可参考公司的标准清单说明
  5. Special deviations should be written into the Standard Office Preambles to form the Project Preambles.
    为本项目特定的偏离应写进公司的标准清单说明内,变为本项目的清单说明
  6. Special deviations may also be found necessary during the course of BQ production.
    偏标过程中也可能发觉需要特殊的变离

Bills and trades classification 分部清单的划分

  1. How the Works to be measured are to be divided into Bills and Trades should be discussed and clarified, e.g.:
    确定如何划分,例如:
    • by buildings and parts of a building, e.g. Substructure or Basement, Podium, Tower 1, Tower 2, Drainage, External Works
      按楼房及其分部,例如基础或地下室、群楼、1号塔楼、2号塔楼、地下排水、外围
    • then by work sections, e.g. piling, excavation, concrete work, blockwork, finishes, plumbing.
      按工程分部,例如打桩、混凝土、砌体、装饰、地上给排水
  2. For projects where various cost centres are used, the Bills may be divided accordingly for cost control purposes.
    需要划分不同的成本核算中心的项目,清单可能亦需要相应划分,以便成本控制
  3. For projects which break down the Works into activities for programme and cost control purposes, the Bills may be divided into activities.
    需要把工程按工序划分以便控制进度和成本的项目,清单可能需要按工序划分
  4. The divisions should facilitate: 
    应利于:
    • bulk-checking
      复核
    • payment valuations using simple percentages based on visual progress
      按形象进度打简单比例计算进度款
    • cost monitoring and control, such as by cost centres
      造价跟踪及控制,例如成本核算中心
    • cost analysis.
      造价指标含量分析
  5. If all quantities of the Works are lumped together without suitable divisions: 
    若没有适当的划分:
    • the use of Bills of Quantities will be greatly diminished.
      工程量清单的用处大大减少

Nomenclature 用词

  1. "Substructure" generally includes all work up to the structural top levels of the lowest floor slabs, but excludes floor finishes thereon.
    "基础" 一般包含最底层地板结构面标高以下的所有工作,但不包括该地板面饰面
  2. "Superstructure" generally includes all works above the structural top levels of the lowest floor slabs, and includes floor finishes thereon.
    "上盖结构" 一般包含最底层地板结构面标高以上的所有工作,包括该地板面饰面
  3. "Lowest floor slabs" means the lowest floor slab at a particular location: 
    "最底层地板" 意指在某位置的最底层地板:
    • Ground floor slabs will generally be the lowest floor slabs in the absence of a basement
      一般来说,若没有地下室,首层地板便是最底层地板
    • The bottom slab of basement will be the lowest floor slab
      地下室的底板便是最底层地板
    • The lowest floor slabs may not necessarily be of the same level; they may have different levels
      最底层地板的标高不一定是完全一样,它们可能有不同的标高
    • Walls and columns between two adjacent lowest floor slabs at different levels should be regarded as part of the Substructure while the walls and columns above the higher of the two lowest floor slabs should be regarded as part of the Superstructure.
      相连但标高不同的两块最底层地板之间的墙及柱应归入基础,而高于该两块底层地板的墙及柱应归入上盖结构
  4. "Basement" generally includes all works above the Substructure up to the structural top levels of basement top slabs, and includes all architectural works inside the basement. 
    "地下室" 一般包含基础之上到地下室顶板面标高的所有工作,包括地下室内的建筑工作
  5. "Podium" generally includes all works above the Substructure or Basement up to the structural top level of the podium roof, and includes all architectural works inside the podium and all external wall finishes, roofing, landscaping, parapets and minor structures on the podium roof, but excludes the floor finishes within the footprint of the tower blocks.
    "群房" 一般包含基础或地下室之上到群房顶板结构面标高的所有工作,包括群房内的建筑工作、外墙饰面、屋面层、屋面的绿化、女儿墙及小型构筑物
  6. "Tower" generally includes all works of the tower blocks above the Podium and includes the floor finishes within the footprint of the tower blocks.
    "塔楼" 一般包含群楼之上塔楼的所有工作,包括塔楼脚印以内的楼面饰面
  7. Reinforcement starter bars are generally included in the sections from which they project.
    钢筋的插筋一般归入它们预埋的部位
  8. According to the Standard Method of Measurement of Building Works, the "Plumber" or "Plumbing" trade includes all water supply, rainwater, soil and waste disposal work above ground, while the "Drainlayer" or "Drainage" trade includes all surface water drainage, stormwater and soil and waste drainage underground. Engineers usually call rainwater, soil and waste disposal works above ground as "drainage" as well. To distinguish, the terms "Above-ground drainage" and "Underground drainage" are used. In Bills of Quantities, the Plumber trade is usually given separately under the Basement, Podium and Tower Bills. Since the Drainlayer trade is common to the buildings, it is usual to put it as a separate bill as the Drainage Bill for the underground drainage. Independent surface water channels are usually billed under the Drainage Bill. Surface water channels formed in concrete slabs or roads and paving are usually billed with the concrete slabs or roads and paving as extra over items.
    跟据标准的工程量计算规则, "水管工程"这工种在英语包含地上的给水、排雨水、排污水、排废水的工作,而"渠务工程" 这工种包含地面排水、地下的排雨水、排污水、排废水的工作。工程师通常把地上的排雨水、排污水、排废水的工作亦称为地下的排雨水、排污水、排废水的工作
  9. "Plumbing" according to the Standard Method of Measurement of Building Works includes all water supply, rainwater, soil and waste disposal works above ground.
  10. "External Works" include all works outside the buildings, and may include works outside the site. If the footprint of the basement is larger than the podium, the additional covering on top of the basement top slabs will usually be grouped under the External Works.

Drawings and Specification 图纸及规范

  1. The Drawings and Specification from which the Bills of Quantities are to be measured should be obtained. It is very usual that they are not always provided in full upon commencement of taking-off.
  2. 检查图纸及规范的质量
  3. 商议未齐备图纸的提供时间

Staff allocation 人手分配

  1. The overall time allowed for the production of the BQ should be clarified. The time when the Drawings and Specification will be provided by the Architects and Engineers should be noted.
    明确出标日期
    讨论交接安排
    讨论要多少人
    讨论预定工时
  2. Within the allowable time frame, the number of working days or hours to complete the BQ production should be estimated so that the size of the team can be established.
  3. The Works are generally divided into the following groups for measurement by separate people: 
    讨论如何分工:
    • Excavation and structure including reinforcement
      土方及结构
    • Internal, external and roof finishes
      内外装饰
    • Non-structural walls and partitions
      隔断
    • Fittings and sundries
      家具装置
    • Plumbing and drainage
      给排水
    • Fire services
      消防
    • Electrical installation
      电气
    • Air-conditioning installation
      空调
    • External Works.
      室外总体
  4. The first two items above will be the most time consuming, and should be started as early as possible. For bigger projects, each of these items may be shared by more than one Surveyor.
  5. Non-structural walls and partitions should preferably be measured by the same Surveyor measuring finishes because of his familiarity with the layout and dimensions.
  6. More experienced Surveyors should handle fittings and external works.
  7. A team of 4 Surveyors should be the normal team size for a multi-storey single block of building.
  8. Housing estates with huge podium and extensive external works may need 8 to 10 Surveyors.

BQ production programme 编标计划进度表

  1. Having established the team size, a BQ production programme should be drawn up either in bar chart or in a table form to show the allocation of work amongst the team members and the time frame allowed.
    按交底会讨论画出
  2. The programme should indicate the times allowed for taking-off and other activities after taking-off such as editing, bulk-checking, correction and printing.
    表示个人计量时间外
    还要预留编辑、复核、更正、打印、复印的时间
  3. Critical dates for receipt of outstanding information should also be shown.
    表示关键的取图纸、出标日期
  4. The programme should be reviewed regularly against the actual progress to identify any slippage and remedial actions taken to cope.
    定期检讨进度,追索资料,调动人手
  5. Sample Format 格式例:

End of Page

Preliminaries

Preliminaries KCTang

Go to End

Note

20/2/2023: Created.

Intro

  1. The preliminaries items in the Preliminaries Bill or Specification Preliminaries describe the common information or requirements for the Works as a whole.
  2. A sample list of the headings of the preliminaries items is given below.
  3. Some of the items are for information only and should not be priced against.
  4. The Form of Contract used in the sample is the “Agreement & Schedule of Conditions of Building Contract for use in the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region, Private Edition” – With Quantities, 2005 Edition or Without Quantities, 2006 Edition published by the Hong Kong Institute of Architects, The Hong Kong Institute of Construction Managers and the Hong Kong Institute of Surveyors.

Headings of preliminaries items

  1. GENERALLY
    • Generally
  2. DEFINITIONS
    • Employer
    • Architect
    • Structural Engineer
    • Quantity Surveyor
    • Contractor / Main Contractor
    • Nominated Sub-Contractor
    • Nominated Supplier
    • Clerk of Works / Resident Engineer
    • Hong Kong
    • Approval
  3. SITE
    • Location
    • Site visit
    • Access and restrictions
    • Sub-soil conditions and investigation reports
    • Removal of underground obstructions
  4. WORKS
    • Generally
    • Scope of the Works
    • Works to be carried out by specialist domestic sub-contractors
    • Works to be carried out by Nominated Sub-Contractors
    • Goods to be supplied by Nominated Suppliers
    • Relationship with Nominated Sub-Contractors and Suppliers
    • Works carried out under previous contracts
    • Works carried out under Specialist Contracts (See also Conditions of Contract clause 30)
    • Works by Public Authorities (See also Conditions of Contract clause 6.4)
    • Relationship with Specialist Contractors and Public Authorities
    • Description of the Works
  5. TIME
    • Possession of the Site | Entry to the Site
    • Completion
    • Overtime
    • Extra costs arising from phasing of the Works
    • Ordering
    • Delivery and storage
    • Substantial Completion
    • Programme (See also Conditions of Contract clause 3.1)
    • Weekly reports
    • Daily reports
    • Progress photographs
  6. CONTRACT
    • Form of Contract (giving a list of the clause headings of the General Conditions of Contract as amended by the Special Conditions of Contract):
    •      Clause No:
    •      1          Interpretation and definitions
    •      2          Contractor's obligations
    •      3          Master programme
    •      4          Architect's instructions
    •      5          Documents forming the Contract and other documents
    •      6          Statutory obligations
    •      7          Setting out the Works
    •      8          Materials, goods, workmanship and work
    •      9          Intellectual property rights
    •      10        Contractor's site management team
    •      11        Access for the Architect to the Works
    •      12        Architect's representative
    •      13        Variations, Provisional Quantities, Provisional Items and Provisional Sums
    •      14        Contract Bills | [Not used if Without Quantities version]
    •      15        Contract Sum
    •      16        Materials and goods on or off-site
    •      17        Substantial Completion and defects liability
    •      18        Partial possession by Employer
    •      19        Assignment and sub-letting
    •      20        Injury to persons and property and indemnity to Employer
    •      21        Insurance against injury to persons or property
    •      22        Insurance of the Works
    •      22A      Insurance of the Works by the Contractor
    •      22B      Insurance of the Works by the Employer
    •      22C     Insurance of existing building and insurance of the Works by the Employer
    •      23        Possession, commencement and completion
    •      24        Damages for non-completion
    •      25        Extension of time
    •      26        Delay recovery measures
    •      27        Direct loss and/or expense
    •      28        Notice of claims for additional payment
    •      29        Nominated Sub-Contractors and Nominated Suppliers
    •      30        Persons engaged by Employer
    •      31        Facilities for statutory undertakers and utility companies
    •      32        Certificates and payments
    •      33        Surety bond
    •      34        Antiquities
    •      35        Determination by Employer
    •      36        Determination by Contractor
    •      37        Determination by Employer or Contractor
    •      38        Fluctuations
    •      39        Notices, certificates and other communications
    •      40        Recovery of money due to the Employer
    •      41        Settlement of disputes
    • Appendix to the General Conditions of Contract
    • Form of Nominated Sub-Contract
  7. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATION
    • Tender Drawings
    • Specification
    • Shop drawings, combined services drawings and builder's work drawings
    • Drawings etc. at Site
    • Dimensions
  8. PRICES
    • Tender | Tender (without Bills of Quantities)
    • No adjustment for rises or falls in cost of labour and materials
    • Bills of Quantities / Bills of Provisional Quantities | Schedule of Quantities and Rates and General Summary
    • Provisional Quantities
    • Lump sum prices for sections of the Works
    • Adjustment of P.C. and provisional sums
    • Invoices, receipts, etc.
    • Expenses in connection with variations and settlement of accounts
    • Supportive documentation for a fair valuation
  9. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
    • Proprietary brand names
    • Alternative materials and goods
    • Samples
    • Period of approval
    • Ordering materials and goods
    • Packing and protection
    • Loading and unloading of materials and goods
    • Safe custody of materials and goods
    • Testing of materials and goods
    • Testing on completed piles
    • Defects after completion (See also Conditions of Contract clause 17)
    • Life time warranty
  10. STATUTORY OBLIGATIONS
    • Notices, Fees and Charges (See also Conditions of Contract clauses 6.1 and 6.3)
    • Buildings Ordinance
    • Working hours, rates of wages etc.
    • Safety precautions
    • Construction Industry, Pneumoconiosis and Mesothelioma Levies
    • Noise control
    • Illegal immigrants
    • Buildings Energy Efficiency Ordinance (BEEO) submission
  11. PROTECTION OF PUBLIC
    • Protection of public
    • Protection of public property
    • Protection of adjoining property
    • Protection and maintenance of existing slopes
    • Maintenance of existing roads, footpaths, steps, etc.
    • Maintenance of existing trees and shrubs
    • Maintenance of existing services
    • Construction of foundations close to buildings, roads and other structures
    • Dust suppression measures
  12. INSURANCE AND SURETY
    • Employees’ Compensation Insurance (See also Conditions of Contract clause 21)
    • Contractors’ All Risks and Third Party Liability Insurance (See also Conditions of Contract clauses 22, 22A, 22B and 22C)
    • Insurances of materials and goods prior to delivery
    • Insurances of construction plant and temporary buildings
    • Surety bond (See also Conditions of Contract clause 33)
  13. MANAGEMENT
    • Site management team
    • Qualified Site Supervision
    • Labour
    • No workmen living on site
    • Setting out (See also Conditions of Contract clause 7)
    • Site instructions
    • Stop Works Instructions
    • Watching
    • Visitors
    • Fire protection
    • Removal of rubbish
    • Removal of water
    • Protection and cleaning upon completion
    • Treasure trove, coins etc.
    • Blasting
    • Transport for Architect, Consultants, Resident Engineer and Clerk of Works
  14. TEMPORARY WORKS
    • Plant, tools, etc.
    • Scaffolding
    • Hoardings, screens, etc.
    • Contractor's workshops, offices and storage sheds
    • Office for Employer’s site staff
    • Sanitary conveniences
    • Positions of all site offices, temporary latrines, sheds, hoists and the like
    • Temporary supports
    • Telephones
    • Temporary water
    • Temporary lighting and power
    • Restriction of advertising
    • Name board
    • Other temporary works
  15. CO-ORDINATION AND ATTENDANCE
    • Co-ordination
    • Attendance on Nominated Sub-Contractors and Specialist Contractors
    • Attendance on Public Authorities
    • Artists or Tradesmen not Sub-Contractors

End of Page

Preambles 清单说明

Preambles 清单说明 KCTang

Go to End

Note

23/12/2014

Functions of Preambles

  1. The Preambles Bill or Section describes general information and rules which are common to and applicable to the Measured Work Bills
  2. The Preambles Bill or Section generally describes:
    • Definitions and terminology
    • Special method of measurement deviating from the Standard Method of Measurement
    • Rates to include items which describe work or costs to be included in the unit rates
  3. Additional Preambles clauses to give further information as required by the Standard Method of Measurement or as required for the Works are usually given in the Measured Work Bills preceding the relevant measured items

Special method of measurement

  1. In principle, the rules of the Standard Method of Measurement should be strictly followed. However, in case special deviations or clarifications are required, Preambles clauses should be included to state the special method of measurement
  2. When writing the special method of measurement, it is preferred that the clauses of the Standard Method of Measurement from which deviations are to be made should be specifically stated in this manner: "Notwithstanding clause xxx of Section YYY of the Standard Method of Measurement, ZZZ has been measured ….. "

Rates to include items

  1. The Standard Method of Measurement requires that certain clauses be given in the Preambles to describe the scope of work or costs to be included in the unit rates
  2. Apart from these mandatory Preambles clauses, there may be special Preambles clauses which are necessary to amplify the descriptions in the Measured Work Bills
  3. All these Preambles clauses defining the scope of unit rates are called "Rates to include items" or the scope is called "Item coverage"
  4. The Preambles clauses are usually written in the style of: "The rates for <work> shall include for <item coverage>"
  5. The following are alternatives to "shall include for":
    • shall be deemed to include for
    • shall be held to include for
    • are deemed to include for
    • are held to include for.

Using Preambles

  1. The Standard Office Preambles should be used as the base for drafting the Preambles for a particular project.
  2. Preambles for other projects may be referred to for any special clauses. However, it would be dangerous to use another Project Preambles as the base for drafting for a new project since the deletions from or additions to the Standard Office Preambles specific for the old project may not be applicable to the new project and fine changes may easily miss the reader’s attention.
  3. Amendments to Office Standard Preambles for a particular project must be subject to strict control. Any special Preambles clauses considered necessary during the course of BQ production should be discussed and clarified with the Supervisor-in-charge, above the level of team leader.
  4. Similar to the Specification, the Preambles should be lined through.

形式

  1. 清单说明或称"清单序言"
  2. 以2号清单或独立文件列出
  3. 本身不套单价

清单说明的功能

  1. 为计量分部清单的常用词定义
  2. 说明适用于计量分部清单的规定
    • 特殊的,与某计量分部清单较密切的,可在该分部清单开始处说明
  3. 说明与标准工程量计算规则有偏离的地方
    • 标准工程量计算规则有些地方或不太适用于本工程的情况,应适当地偏离
  4. 说明单价包含的内容
    • 按标准工程量计算规则的规定要予以特别说明的单价包含内容

编写清单说明

  1. 应使用公司的标准作为修改的蓝本
  2. 再比对其他同类工程看看有没有适用的特殊修订
  3. 跟清单说明一样,要画线清理

End of Page

Measurement and Billing

Measurement and Billing KCTang

Go to End

Note

26/2/2023: Some taking-off fundamentals added.

20/2/2023: Revised.

23/3/2020: Page on query list merged into here.

27/7/2019: Partly split to different pages.

23/12/2014: Moved from wiki.

Processes 程序

  1. The traditional manual processes of measurement and billing are:

    • Take-off (measure dimensions)
    • Square (calculate products and sums)
    • Transfer (carry forward quantities)
    • Abstract (summarize)
    • Bill (describe and list)
    • Transfer (bring forward quantities).
  2. Concurrent with the measurement and billing, query lists should be issued.
  3. After the transferring process, there are the following processes:
    • Edit (the written draft BQ)
    • Type
    • Read over
    • Clear Drawings, Specification and Preambles
    • Bulk check
    • Adjust
    • Edit finally
    • Correct finally
    • Read quantities
    • Photocopy
    • Check pages
    • Bind
    • Pre-tender Estimate
    • Issue Tender Addendum.
  4. With the use of BQ production software, squaring, transferring, abstracting and billing can be combined by linking the dimensions with the final BQ items.
  5. The dimension by dimension taking off may be replaced with CAD or BIM measurement.
  6. However, the processes still exist implicitly though taking a different form.

Taking-off 度數/計量

  1. The process of measuring the quantities of items of work is called "taking-off" or "quantity-take-off" or "QTO" whereby the dimensions of the items of work are (traditionally) written down on a dimension sheet.

  2. Person(s) taking-off are called "Taker(s)-off".

Some taking-off fundamentals

(section added, 26/3/2023)

  1. Clarify which Method of Measurement:
    • The Method of Measurement (more properly “rules”) to be used or which has been used should be clarified during the briefing session upon commencement of taking-off
    • For pre-contract cost estimates, the Method of Measurement will be determined by the Consultants, and the quantities are usually approximate and relative items are grouped together to save time
    • For Pricing Schedules with quantities provided by the Consultants, the Method of Measurement should be stated
    • For new works, the Method of Measurement will be prescribed as to follow the Hong Kong Standard Method of Measurement of Building Works – Fourth Edition 2005 (“HKSMM4”) or Fourth Edition Revised 2018 ("HKSMM4R") published by The Hong Kong Institute of Surveyors
    • For Government term maintenance contracts, they use Architectural Services Department Schedule of Rates for Term Contracts for Building Works 2019 Edition: (https://www.archsd.gov.hk/media/publications-publicity/schedule-of-rates/sor2019_vol_1_bw_2.pdf and https://www.archsd.gov.hk/media/publications-publicity/schedule-of-rates/sor2019_vol_2_bs_2.pdf), which prescribe the Method of Measurement
    • The standard methods of measurement describe what should be measured and what can be deemed to be included in the rates and prices and need not be measured
    • For Pricing Schedules with quantities to be inserted by the Tenderers, the Method of Measurement may be prescribed by the Consultants but usually it is left to the Tenderers
    • The Tenderers may follow the standard Method of Measurement or may simplify or deviate
    • In any case, the method used by the Tenderers in the Pricing Schedule should be used for pricing variations and remeasured provisional quantities.
  2.  Read Method of Measurement:
    • Inexperienced Takers-off should read the relevant sections of the prescribed Method of Measurement before taking-off
    • Experienced Takers-off should review the relevant sections of the prescribed Method of Measurement from time to time during the course of taking-off
    • Upon completion of taking-off, all Takers-off should take a final review of the prescribed Method of Measurement to ensure that there are no missing items to be measured.
  3. Pay extra attention to how to treat:
    • Wastage (not measured)
    • Gross or net measurement
    • Deductions for openings (small voids or openings not deducted, such as those not exceeding 0.50 m2 or 1.00 m2 or 0.50 m3 depending on the type of work)
    • Laps and intersections
    • Working space for excavation (0.25 m or 0.60 m depending on the height of formwork below ground)
    • Slopes of excavated spaces (designed or restricted excavation profiles)
    • Staging or ranging where items can be measured together or separately (excavation depth below ground in successive stages of 1.50 m, soffit formwork and ceiling finishes heights above floor not exceeding 3.50 m high, then in 1.50 m stages, etc.)
    • Sloping work (from horizontal) / slanting work (from vertical)
    • Circular work (usually measured separately)
    • Extra over items (principal items overlapping with the extra over items not deducted in the quantities, but to be considered in the unit rates, e.g., pipe bends, tees, etc.)
    • Tenderers not strictly following any standard Method of Measurement may follow the above treatment as common practice.
  4. Measure net quantities:
    • Measure all work net as fixed in position, unless otherwise stated
    • This is a very important principle
    • If there is no prescribed Method of Measurement, at least state that “all work is to be measured its net quantity as fixed in position with no allowance for wastage and, in case of work measured superficially, for laps, unless otherwise stated”
    • Work which are “superficial” (as compared to “linear” or “cubic”) and have laps not to be measured are wire mesh, waterproof layers, pitched roof tiling, etc.
    • Work which are linear and have laps to be measured are reinforcement bars, door frames, skirtings, etc.
  5. Deduct voids:
    • Voids (openings and wants) smaller than the sizes specified in the SMM are not to be deducted
    • However, this refers to voids detached from the boundaries of the space measured
    • Voids caused by projections from the boundary of the space measured are always deducted:
  6. Costs held to be included in items (HKSMM4 and 4R):
    • Labour and all costs in connection therewith
    • Materials, goods and all costs in connection therewith (e.g., conveyance, delivery, unloading, storing, returning packings, handling, hoisting and lowering)
    • Fitting and fixing materials and goods in positions
    • Use of plant
    • All cutting and waste
    • Establishment charges, overhead charges and profit.
  7. Units of measurement (HKSMM4 and 4R):
    • Items given by weight - kilograms
    • Items given cube - cubic metres
    • Items given super - square metres
    • Items given run - linear metres
    • Items enumerated - number of sets, as applicable
    • Items given by time - Days or Hours, with definitions stated
    • Dimensions used in calculations - rounded off to the nearest 10 mm.
  8. Units of billing (HKSMM4 and 4R):
    • Billing BQ:
      • Rounded to the nearest whole unit
      • Subject to a minimum of 1 if more than 0
    • Billing variations and remeasurement:
      • Rounded to the nearest 0.1 for m, m2, m3
      • Rounded to the nearest 1 for kg
      • Applicable to omissions or additions
      • Quantity less than 1 but billed as 1 in the original contract to be omitted as 1 if the quantity is not done
    • Order of dimensions in BQ or dimension sheets:
      • Generally, in the sequence of length, width and height.
  9. Ranges:
    • When a range of widths, heights, depths, etc. is given in the item description in a Pricing Schedule, “A – B” usually means “exceeding A but not exceeding B”.
    • A - B = exceeding A but not exceeding B = "> A but <= B".
  10. Pipe and tubing (HKSMM4 and HKSMM4R):
    • Pipe size: to be described by nominal sizes
    • HKSMM4 pipe size groups for the purposes of painting (all measured run):
      • pipes <= 50 mm diameters
      • pipes 50 - 100 mm diameters
      • pipes > 110 mm diameters, pipe size stated
    • HKSMM4R pipe size groups for the purposes of painting:
      • pipes <= 300 mm girth (measured run)
      • pipes > 300 mm girth (measured super).
  11. Circular work (HKSMM4 and HKSMM4R):
    • No grouping by radius.
  12. Prime cost rates (P.C. Rates):
    • Where a prime cost rate (P.C. rate) is included for a component in the description of an item in the Bills of Quantities, the prime cost rate is either (a) for the material cost of that component delivered to site only and the Contractor shall allow in addition for all waste, fixing, all ancillary materials required for fixing such as mortar for bedding and jointing and all other similar items of a like nature, and for profits and overheads, or (b) for the cost of supply and installation or application of the component (such as specialist suspended ceilings or finishes) as charged by a domestic sub-contractor, and the Contractor shall allow for his own profits and overheads.
    • In the settlement of the Final Account, the rate for the item will be adjusted by the net difference between the prime cost rate and the actual unit cost and will be applied to the nett quantity of the component measured as fixed, installed or applied in position, exclusive of wastage.
  13. Provisional Sum:
    • A sum provided for work or for costs which cannot be entirely foreseen, defined or detailed at the time the tendering documents are issued.
    • In the settlement of the Final Account, the provisional sum will be omitted from, and the actual expenditure added to the Contract Sum.
  14. Prime Cost Sum:
    • A sum provided for work or for services to be executed by a Nominated Sub-Contractor or for materials or goods to be obtained from a Nominated Supplier. Such sum shall be deemed to be exclusive of any profit or attendance required by the Contractor and provision shall be made for the addition thereof.
    • In the settlement of the Final Account, the Prime Cost Sum will be omitted from, and the actual expenditure added to the Contract Sum.
    • The Contractor’s profit is to be allowed as a percentage of the Prime Cost Sum. The same percentage will be applied to the final expenditure of the Prime Cost Sum in the settlement of the Final Account.
    • The Contractor’s attendance is to be allowed as a lump sum not to be adjusted in the settlement of the Final Account, but if the Prime Cost Sum is not expended at all, then the lump sum will be omitted.
  15. Work to be specifically described as such:
    • Work under reservoir, river or sea water
    • Work in compressed air
    • Work outside the curtilage of the Site
    • Work in existing building
    • Temporary works. 

Long hand manual dimension sheets (school arithmetic) 長式手工計算紙

  1. Calculations may be set out in the usual arithmetical form:
    計算可如一般的算式列出:
  2. This uses less paper, but is difficult to trace, compare and inspect for errors.
    這樣非常省紙,但難於對比和檢查錯誤。

Traditional manual dimension sheets

  1. Traditional dimension sheets used to take-off quantities take the following form (as seen in textbooks):
  2. Dimensions are set in vertical stack, in the order of length, width and breadth.
  3. A line is used to separate each set of dimensions.
  4. Timesings are written on the left column.
  5. In this column, "/" means multiply, not divide.
  6. ". " means add, an action called "dotted on".
  7. The products are given in the right column.
  8. The descriptions are very much abbreviated to reduce writing.
  9. The calculation in the description column is the build-up of one of the dimensions.
  10. It is called a "waste calculation" or "side-cast".
  11. The annotations "bm B1", "bm B2" in the description column are to identify the locations of sets of dimensions.
  12. This action is called "sign-posting".

Another kind of manual dimension sheets

  1. Another kind of dimension sheets is to lay out the dimensions horizontally as follows:
  2. The products of dimensions are not written one by one.
  3. Only the total of the products is entered at the bottom.
  4. This is made feasible with the popular use of electronic calculators with memory function.
  5. It would be faster to calculate once more than write down all the products before summing up.
  6. Laying out the dimensions horizontally actually improve the presentation and make comparison of dimensions easier.
  7. Deductions are indicated by putting brackets to enclose the set of dimensions, and write them in red:
  8. The right hand columns can be utilized as rate and extension columns for final account purposes.

Manual taking-off schedules 計算表

  1. Dimension sheets require descriptions against group of dimensions.
  2. To reduce writing descriptions, dimensions of all quantities of the same item should be measured in one go and this requires greater experience.
  3. For measurement of group of items which have a lot of inter-related dimensions, use of dimension sheets would be cumbersome.
  4. A taking-off schedule would be preferred.
  5. The schedule sets out inter-related dimensions and items in a systematic manner.
  6. This reduces the need to repeat descriptions.
  7. This enables measurement of more than one items at the same time.
  8. This makes comparison and identification of errors easier.
  9. The following schedule for the same dimensions above measures concrete and formwork at the same time sharing the same set of dimensions:
    下列的計算表,把共用原始尺寸的項目並列一起計算,較容易看到互相的關係:
  10. ​The following schedule puts all finishes items sharing the same primary dimensions together and enables easier understanding of their inter-relationship:
    • "/" = Times.
    • () = Deduct.
      扣減
  11. Deductions are written in red or, if black and white photocopying is anticipated, marked with a minus sign or with brackets.
  12. The number of columns for each set of dimensions is flexible.
  13. For items measured Cube, four columns are allocated.
    欄數可加減,立方項用4欄。
  14. Since the width of a sheet of paper is limited, a column needs to be shared by more than one item, e.g. two types of floor finishes, and colouring of the boxes is used to distinguish dimensions of different items.
    因紙寬有限,可用顏色在同一組欄下表示不同的專案,加總時按顏色分開加。

Squaring 運算

  1. The process of calculating the products of dimensions and totals on dimension sheets and taking-off schedules is called squaring.
  2. The person is called a "Squarer" or "Comptometer".
  3. To ensure correctness, each calculated total entered by a Squarer must be counter-checked and initialled by another Squarer.
  4. Squaring is a tedious process even with the help of electronic calculators before the use of computer spreadsheets or BQ production software.
  5. 計算紙或計算表列式後要運算。
  6. 用普通計算器及人手計算的要另外有人覆核並簽署。
  7. 用電子計算器及軟體計算的,要建立覆核公式覆核。

Abstracting 匯總

  1. Dimension sheets or taking-off schedules measure more than one item on the same sheet or schedule.
  2. The same BQ item may appear on more than one sheet or schedule.
  3. Therefore, it is necessary to collate the individual quantities of the same BQ item appearing on more than one sheet or schedule together to arrive at the grand total of the item.
  4. A summary schedule is used to bring together the individual quantities to add up the grand total.
  5. The process of transferring the individual quantities from dimension sheets or taking-off schedules to the summary schedule is called "abstracting".
  6. 計算紙或計算表運算後要匯總。
  7. 工程量清單某分項數量可能要由幾張計算紙或計算表得出,所以要匯總。

Billing 列單

  1. The items in the summary schedule are then transferred to the draft BQ pages in the correct sequence with the descriptions expanded in full without abbreviations.
  2. This process is called "billing" and requires experienced Surveyors to do.
  3. The whole process from squaring to billing is called "working up".

Transferring 轉移

  1. Information is transferred from the dimension sheets or taking-off schedules to the summary schedule to the draft BQ.
  2. Every transfer of descriptions, units and quantities has to be counter-checked by another Surveyor.
  3. The actions are called "transferring" and "transfer-checking" or "to check transfer".
  4. 從計算紙或計算表轉移到匯總卡後要他人覆核簽署。
  5. 從那裡來往、往那裡去,都要寫。

Cut and shuffle 洗牌式

  1. Abstracting and working up are tedious processes involving a lot of transferring and transfer checking.
  2. More movements of information from one to another will increase the chances of making errors.
  3. A method has been devised whereby:
    • each dimension sheet only contains one item
    • when the taking-off is finished, dimension sheets of the same BQ item are collated and stapled together
    • if taking-off schedules are used, the totals are transferred to the respective dimension sheets
    • squaring is done to obtain the grand total which is written on the front dimension sheet
    • short descriptions are expanded to full descriptions on the front dimension sheets
    • the dimension sheets are then shuffled according to the intended BQ sequence
    • headings are added as appropriate
    • BQ is directly typed from the dimension sheets which have headings, descriptions, unit and total quantities.
  4. The number of processes is greatly reduced.
  5. A drawback of this system is that when the dimension sheets are shuffled, the original sequence and logic of measurement are lost.
  6. Therefore, when the system was originally invented, the dimension sheets came together in 4 on one sheet of paper and were backed with a self impressed carbon copy.
  7. After taking-off in a logical sequence, the front sheet (A4 size) was taken out and cut into 4 vertical pieces or 2 horizontal pieces which were shuffled and sorted with other sheets.
  8. The carbon copy was kept in the original sequence to facilitate future reference.
  9. 每一個工程量清單分項都有一張卡,可以A4紙分為二或四。
  10. 每卡都寫上工程量清單分項的工程合同名稱、卡號、清單號、分項說明、單位、計算紙或計算表編號、搬來數量、匯總數量。
  11. 格式例:
  12. 匯總卡可按清單分項次序自由排序。
  13. 排序後要運算每卡總數,寫在上部。
  14. 總數由他人覆核。

Using Excel

  1. Electronic spreadsheet software like Excel can be used as dimension sheets or taking-off schedules.
  2. However, using electronic spreadsheets to imitate dimension sheets would require the defining of many calculation formulae.
  3. If the formulae cannot be consistently defined to enable copy-and-paste repeatedly, the defining process will be tedious and prone to errors.
  4. Using electronic spreadsheets to imitate taking-off schedules is more suitable.
  5. However, taking-off schedules when put into an Excel worksheet will become too wide to view on screen.
  6. It is suggested to set out the dimensions using less columns in the following manner:|
  7. Instead of adding columns for different items of work, codes are used to represent items row by row.
  8. Note that Columns B and I and Rows 4, 16, 18, 24 and 26 have been reduced to narrow widths and heights respectively.
  9. They will be used as the boundaries of ranges of columns or rows used in formulae such that any insertion of columns or rows within the boundaries would not go outside the defined ranges unexpectedly.
  10. The PRODUCT(range) function has been used in the following tables to calculate the Qty:
  11. Note that the range is from the narrow Column B to Column I.
  12. Within the defined range, empty cells are regarded as having value 1.
  13. “$” is used to anchor the columns in case the Qty column is copied to some other places without the intention to change the referred columns.
  14. The SUM(range) function has been used in the following table to calculate the total:
  15. Note that the range is from the narrow Row 4 to Row 16.
  16. The SUMIF(range to check, criteria, range to sum if criteria matched) function has been used in the following table to calculate the total qty per code:
  17. In the above table, if a cell value in the range to check is equal to the criteria, e.g. a cell value in the range to check “J$4:J$16” matches the value of cell J20, then the cell value on the same row in “K$4:K$16” will be added to the sum.
  18. “$” has been used to anchor the rows such that when the formula is copied down to other rows, the defined range will not change as shown in the following table:
  19. Column J may need to be anchored as well if the same formula is copied sideway to other columns.
  20. To ensure that the sum of all sub-totals equal to the grand total, another check total should be calculated.
  21. Note that in the following table, the upper boundary of the range to sum is Row 19 the heading row instead of Row 18 the narrow row:
  22. This serves the same purposes of bounding the ranges.
  23. An advantage is that Rows 19 to 25 can be moved to elsewhere independent of Row 18.
  24. It is important that insertion must be by rows or columns not by cells, and copying and pasting of cell values to other places are preferred to cutting and pasting, to avoid corrupting the formulae.
  25. Formulae must be refreshed by copying the correct ones to the other corresponding cells.
  26. There must always be a double-check of the totals using alternative method or formula to ensure no omission or duplication.

(positions of images relative to items adjusted, 20/2/2023)

Paper based table

  1. When doing quick measurement without using Excel, users may use coloured rows to highlight rows to be added using manual calculator to obtain the total:
  2. Individual qty per row may be skipped to save time.
  3. It is important to calculate the totals twice to ensure no error.

(position of image relative to item adjusted, 20/2/2023)

Direct billing

  1. With substantial portion of taking-off information given in taking-off schedules in tabulated and inter-related manner, the portion of taking-off directly on dimension sheets is greatly reduced.
  2. The need for carbon copy to keep the original taking-off sequence and logic is also reduced.
  3. "Cut" is also no longer required, one independent sheet can be used for one BQ item, leaving the "shuffle" behind.
  4. Taking-off directly onto these dimension sheets which can be shuffled immediately for billing is called "direct billing".

Query list 编标问卷

  1. During the course of BQ production, there is bound to be uncertainty of information either in respect of the project particulars or in respect of the Drawings and Specification.
    编制工程量清单时,常会碰到工程细节、图纸或工料规范有不清楚的地方
  2. Clarify with the Architects or Engineers using telephone conversation or email.
    先以电话或电邮询问设计单位
  3. Write down the answers obtained on a query list.
    用编标问卷书面记录答案
  4. Make reasonable and confident assumptions on the query list prior to receipt of answers.
    未有答案前,可把有信心的合理假设写在问卷上
  5. Refer to the following sample form: 
    参考以下格式例:
  6. To avoid grammatical mistakes and to reduce the subsequent time to make corrections, write the queries in note form which is still understandable, particularly when assumptions or answers have been made such that a query and assumption or answer can be read together to make sensible and complete meaning.
  7. Dispatch the query list from time to time to the Architects or Engineers for answering outstanding queries or confirming answered queries and for record.
    定期发出问卷以便取得未有的答案或确定已有的答案及做为记录
  8. Chase for the return of the query list with answers within a reasonable time.
    跟进在合理时间之内有回复
  9. Reflect the final answers in the Bills of Quantities.
    把最后的答案在工程量清单反映

End of Page

Taking-off Techniques

Taking-off Techniques KCTang

Go to End

Note

18/2/2023: Revised.

23/3/2020: Numeric numbering system adopted. Punctuation standardised.

27/7/2019: Created.

Taking-off

  • The process of measuring the quantities is called "taking-off" or “quantity-take-off” (QTO). Person(s) taking-off are called "Taker(s)-off".

(added, 18/2/2023)

Mode of taking-off 計量的手法

  1. Measure in a logical manner, for example, follow the construction sequence or alternative logical sequence.
    應按有系統的次序計算,例如按施工順序或主客關係
  2. Measure consistently from one direction to the other direction.
    一致從一方算至另一方
  3. Set out dimensions in a consistent manner of length, width and height.
    將尺寸按長闊高的須序輸入
  4. Avoid breaking down irregular shapes into small pieces and then adding up.
    避免把不規則的形狀分拆得太細來計算然後加總
  5. Measure overall first and making adjustments.
    應計最大框,然後扣減調整
  6. Measure related items in composite manner, e.g. tile and screed, plaster and paint, all layers of roof covering.
    以組合式的方法把關連項一起計,編清單時才分項,例如塊料面層和找平、屋面層

Measure perimeters

  1. When measuring the perimeter of the shape bounded below:

  2. Instead of measuring as:
    • 8 + 6 + 4 + 9 + 6 + 3 + 2 + 12
                      = 50
  3. Measure as:
    • (12 + 3 + 8 + 2) x 2
                      = 50
  4. That is, measure the overall dimensions:
    • (15 + 10) x 2
                      = 50
  5. It can be observed that the perimeters of the following shapes are all the same as:
    • (15 + 10) x 2
                      = 50
                      

  6. No adjustment is required for rebates.
  7. Only when there are recesses that adjustments are required, such as:
    • (15 + 10) x 2 + 2 x A + 2 x B
                      = 50
                      

Adjust from outer to inner perimeter

  1. For the following diagram:

  2. External perimeter:
    • = (L + W) x 2
  3. Internal perimeter:
    • = (L + W) x 2 – T x 8
                      i.e. 2 T per external corner
  4. Center line perimeter:
    • = (L + W) x 2 – T x 4
                      i.e. 1 T per external corner
  5. The outer, inner and centre line perimeters are of the same lengths below. An external corner offsets an internal corner:

  6. For the following diagram, offsetting each pair of external corner and internal corner will result in leaving only 4 external corners for adjustment:

Measure areas

  1. When measuring the area bounded below:

  2. Instead of measuring as: 
    • 6 x 10 + 9 x 6
                      = 60 + 54
                      = 114
  3. Measure as: 
    • 15 x 10 - 9 x 4
                      = 150 - 36
                      = 114
  4. When measuring the area bounded below:

  5. Instead of measuring as:
    • (10 – 2) x 6 + (9 – 6) x (10 - 2 – 4) + (15 – 9) x 6
                      = 48 + 12 + 36
                      = 96
                      
  6. Measure as:
    • 15 x 10 - 9 x 2 - 9 x 4
                      = 150 - 18 - 36
                      = 96
                      
  7. Instead of cutting an irregular area into pieces to measure, it is better to measure the overall area first and make deductions, because:
    • Cutting into too many pieces may make finding the dimensions of each piece difficult, like the case of (9 – 6) x (10 - 2 – 4)
    • It may be easy to miss one or two pieces
    • Measuring the overall area first will ensure that the areas will not be under-measured.

Measure overall

  1. From the above, it can be seen that using the overall dimensions to measure the overall area and overall perimeter first and then make adjustments for rebates and recesses will be more convenient:

  2. Area:

    • = 15 x 10 – 12 x 2 – 9 x 4 – 3 x 2 – 3 x 2
                      = 78 
  3. Perimeter:

    • = (15 + 10) x 2 + 2 x 2 + 2 x 2
                      = 58

Measure rooms - Imagine a cube with 6 faces

  1. For a room of the following plan shape:

  2. The room has 6 faces: floor, ceiling, and 4 walls.
  3. Floor area = ceiling area:
    • = plan area
                      = L x W
  4. 4 wall areas:
    • = perimeter x (room height – skirting height)
                      = (L + W) x 2 x (H – s)
                      
  5. Skirting length:
    • = perimeter
                      = (L + W) x 2
  6. When adding objects to a room, always imagine it as a cube with 6 faces, and check the effect of its 6 faces on the room finishes.

Adjust for columns

  1. For a room of the following plan layout:

  2. A is a column with same finishes as wall:
    • Top and base: deduct floor finishes: deduct ceiling finishes = same area
    • 2 exposed sides: offsetting 2 hidden sides = no effect on wall finishes area or skirting length.
  3. B is a column with same finishes as wall:
    • Top and base: deduct floor finishes: deduct ceiling finishes = same area
    • Front and back: offsetting = no effect on wall finishes area or skirting length
    • 2 sides: add wall finishes area and skirting length.
  4. C is a column with same finishes as wall:
    • Top and base: deduct floor finishes: deduct ceiling finishes = same area
    • 4 sides: add wall finishes area and skirting length.

Adjust for beams

  1. For a room with the following ceiling section:

  2. A is a beam with same finishes as ceiling:
    • Top and soffit: offsetting = no effect on ceiling finishes
    • Front and back: deduct wall finishes : add ceiling finishes = same area
    • 2 ends: deduct wall finishes.
  3. B is a beam with same finishes as wall:
    • Top and soffit: deduct ceiling finishes: add wall finishes = same area
    • Front and back: offsetting = no effect on wall finishes
    • 2 ends: deduct wall finishes.
  4. C is a beam with same finishes as ceiling:
    • Top and soffit: offsetting = no effect on ceiling finishes
    • 2 sides: add ceiling finishes
    • 2 ends: deduct wall finishes.

Adjust for windows and doors

  1. The idea of checking the 6 faces of an object when inserting into a room can also be applied to windows and doors.
  2. Windows:
    • Deduct window opening
    • Add head, cill, and 2 reveals.
  3. Doors:
    • Deduct door opening
    • Add head, floor, and 2 jambs.

Measure room finishes on a schedule

  1. Measure surfaces of a room (same concept of measuring overall first then making adjustments can be applied to external elevations and roof finishes):

  2. Adjust for recesses:

  3. Adjust for columns:

  4. Adjust for beams:

  5. For a room with false ceiling, the wall finishes will stop at about 50 mm to 100 mm above the edge of false ceiling, depending on the design.
  6. The ceiling voids are usually not finished except for open grid false ceiling.
  7. Adjust for windows with fins:

  8. Adjust for bay windows:

  9. Adjust for doors:

Measure staircase well and staircases

  1. Names:

  2. For a staircase of the following plan and section:

  3. It is better to measure the stairwell first and then adjust for the landings and stairs.
  4. Cut a segment of constant plan size with two horizontal planes in case of varying stairwell plan sizes.

  5. Extra for items described above means that the items have been measured without deducting the background / principal items in which they occur.
  6. "Extra for skirting" should mean "Extra over wall finishes for skirting".
  7. When billing the quantities in the Pricing Schedules, the wall finishes displaced by the skirting should be deducted.
  8. Getting the total extra over quantity first and then make deductions later will be quicker than doing the deduction whenever the extra over item is measured.
  9. For example, total wall finishes to be deducted = total skirting length x skirting height.
  10. It may also be possible in some cases to bill simply as an extra over item without making deduction of background quantities.
  11. The deduction is to be considered in the unit rate.
  12. The full phrase of extra over items should be in the form of “Extra over X for Y”.
  13. “Extra for Y” should only be used if X is understood from the context.
  14. Usually item Y will follow item X immediately in the Pricing Schedule.
  15. “Extra over for Y” is not a good phrase.

Measure carpark ceilings

  1. When measuring carpark ceiling and beam finishes without exact beam dimensions, the areas may be estimated by measuring the ceiling and beam surface areas within a representative zone of ceiling to obtain the (area of finishes) : (area on plan) ratio, and use the ratio to multiply the carpark ceiling plan area.

    Carpark Ceilings

Measure external elevations

  1. There can be three approaches to measuring the area of the external wall finishes:

    • (Overall external perimeter of building using the method as described in “Measuring perimeters”) x (height of elevation from base to top of roof parapet or curb), if all floors are of the same plan shape
    • Sum of (overall external perimeter of a floor x floor height x relevant number of floors) of all floors, and similar for roof parapets and curbs
    • Sum of (length of a particular elevation x height of that elevation) going around the building a clockwise or anti-clockwise direction, if the building elevations are rather complicated and require different finishes.
  2. For the top and inner face of roof parapets and curbs, measure the centre line perimeter and the inner perimeter using the method as described in “Adjusting from outer to inner perimeter”.
  3. Adjust for windows, balconies, doors, fins, window surrounds, canopies, openings, etc. paying attention to turn-ins at openings.
  4. Measure horizontal and vertical movement joints at specified locations.

Measure scaffolding

  1. While scaffolding is usually priced as a lump sum in the Preliminaries, the lump sum is still estimated based on the area of the scaffolding.
  2. The area of scaffolding is calculated based on the (perimeter of the outer face of scaffolding grid) x (height of scaffolding grid from base support of scaffolding to top of scaffolding grid) ignoring projection of individual scaffold members beyond the grid.
  3. For double-row scaffolding, the outer face is about 600 mm from the building face.
  4. Its perimeter will be bigger than the building’s external perimeter, except at lightwells:

  5. The top of scaffolding should be about 1.1 to 1.5 m above top of roof parapet for safety purposes.
  6. Catch fans, support brackets at base of scaffolding, temporary rain shelters on top of scaffolding, safety screens, etc. may be measured as extras.

Measure roofing

  1. Roofing comprises a number of layers (levelling layer, waterproofing layer, insulation layer, finishing layer).
  2. Their areas may not entirely be the same.
  3. However, it is advisable to measure one area for them first and make adjustments for surface channels, skirtings and lining to curbs.
  4. Levelling layers will have varying thickness to provide falls.
  5. Areas of different thickness should be measured separately.
  6. However, it is not advisable to group the thicknesses in stages of 25 mm to simplify the measurement and number of items.

Measure pipework, conduits and wiring, duct work for major building repair works

  1. For major building repair works, plumbing, drainage and M&E work are usually priced as lump sums.
  2. It is advisable to have some breakdown though not necessarily to every detail according to HKSMM4.
  3. It is advisable to require that the above-ground drainage system is priced:
    • by the number of vertical and common stacks
    • by the number of branches (e.g. flats, kitchens, bathrooms, balconies, etc.)
    • to enable better evaluation and comparison of costs per different buildings
    • to ease the valuation of variations involving a change to the number of stacks or branches.
  4. Fresh water supply pipes may branch out from individual meters to individual flats on different floors and can only be measured by lengths rather than by stacks or branches.
  5. Pipework after private meters is usually regarded as a private item.
  6. Flushing water supply pipework can be priced by the number of stacks and branches because it usually uses one common meter.
  7. Conduits and wiring in the final circuits are usually not separately measured but allowed for in the unit rates for lighting points, power points, socket points, etc.
  8. Rising mains and busbars are measured.
  9. Extensive fire services sprinkler system and air conditioning duct work are usually measured in detail.
  10. When detailed measurement is done, the measurement should follow the main route first and then the branches in a systematic manner.
  11. While pumps, sanitary fittings, fire service inlets, hose reels, sprinklers, fuse switch boards, lighting points, power points, socket points, detectors, some pipe ancillaries (valves, meters, etc.) may be counted once on plan or based on the schematic diagrams, it may be better to pick up the in-line fittings (bends, tees, branches, junctions, reducers, end caps, pipe sleeves) while measuring the routes because the necessity of these in-line fittings are not entirely shown on the drawings and will depend on the taker-off’s imagination of how the routes go up, down and turn.
  12. It is useful to draw isometric diagrams to illustrate and understand the routing, ups, downs and turns.
  13. For pipework, in-line fittings not exceeding 54 mm diameter are not measured according to HKSMM4.

CAD, BIM and QTO software

  1. CAD drawings themselves also contain name, dimension and quantity information of the objects on the drawings such that the information can be exported as a database or to spreadsheets for use.
  2. Objects like doors can be represented by door marks. Summing up the number of door marks can give the number of doors.
  3. For objects like beams, the beam marks are not sufficient for the measurement of the length, concrete volume and formwork area. Specific measurements are required.
  4. Furthermore, things which appear to have been properly drawn as seen on plan may be the superimposition of discreet lines which lengths do not serve to provide the quantity of the things as seen.
  5. Therefore, commercial QTO software has been available to take-off quantities from CAD drawings, basically, by picking the points or tracing the lines or polygons of the objects on the CAD to obtain their numbers, lengths or areas, and further calculate the volumes. This can still be a tedious process when one has to take-off object by object on screen instead of manually enter the dimensions on a spreadsheet.
  6. Some better QTO software can automate the extraction of some meaningful quantities from the CAD drawings. Some can further link the quantities to the cost estimates or bills of quantities.
  7. BIM models all objects as self-complete entities in 3D. The information attached to an object can give the name, dimensions, component quantities, etc. of that object. The information is readily available for use, and the quantities can be very accurate geometrically.
  8. However, the classification of the objects and the demarcation between different objects may not be exactly suitable for generating quantities for costing. Adjustments would need to be made.
  9. Some QTO software still uses the method of picking and tracing to get the quantities from the models. Some are more advanced to extract the quantities directly from the models.
  10. The models may have erroneous overlaps or gaps or omissions which would still need the taker-off to adjust the quantities to correct the erroneous effect.
  11. The QS still has to use skill and knowledge to properly describe the objects in the bills of quantities and ensure that the quantities are correct for costing and pricing.

(added, 18/2/2023)

End of Page

HKSMM4 2005 to HKSMM4 Revised 2018 Conversion Guide (incomplete)

HKSMM4 2005 to HKSMM4 Revised 2018 Conversion Guide (incomplete) KCTang

Go to End

Note

Draft in progress.

29/11/2019: Updated.

19/11/2019: Updated.

3/8/2019: Created.

Intro

"HKSMM4" means Hong Kong Standard Method of Measurement of Building Works - Fourth Edition, 2005.

"HKSMM4R" means Hong Kong Standard Method of Measurement of Building Works - Fourth Edition Revised 2018.

"SMM" means HKSMM4 or HKSMM4R as the case may be.

Summary of Changes

  • Generally
    • Some inconsistent words corrected.
  • Preliminaries
    • Some terms in the Preliminaries updated to match those now used in the industry.
  • Piling and caissons
    • Various types of hole or test boring and drilling for piles added.
    • Rock-socketed steel H-piles, mini-piles and pressure grouting added.
  • Excavation
    • Reduce level excavation all measured cube instead of super for thinner layer.
    • Minimum excavation measurement sizes for surface trenches, column or stanchion bases, isolated piers, manholes and the like removed.
    • Backfilling to excavation all measured cube instead of super for thinner layer.
  • Concrete works
    • Coverage rules for concrete expanded.
    • Holes not exceeding 150 mm diameter and openings not exceeding 0.50 m2 sectional area deemed included.
    • Cement grouting under steel column bases or under steel grillages deemed included.
    • Transfer plates added. Same rules as slabs.
    • Shoulders of different mixes in slabs deemed included.
    • Transfer beams added. Same rules as beams.
    • Formwork to beam of depth below slab soffit > 1.00 m instead of 0.75 m measured separately.
    • Formwork to tops, edges, breaks, risers and open strings not exceeding 300 mm wide grouped together instead of in stages of 100 mm.
    • Formwork to edges and soffits of copings, cills, strings, cornices, eaves overhangs and the like not exceeding 500 mm wide grouped by girth of 0 – 300 mm and 300 - 500 mm instead of in stages of 100 mm.
    • Forming holes for pipes, cables and the like > 150 mm diameter given as an item.
    • Boxing for openings less than 0.50 m2 instead of 0.025 m2 deemed included.
    • Reinforcement in precast concrete work deemed included.
  • Drainage
    • Drainage trench excavation classified by average depth only instead of total depth and average depth.
    • Manholes, inspection chambers, soakaways and back inlet gully traps classified by total depth of first 1.00 m then in stages of 0.50 m.
    • Drainage chamber-like items measured by number all inclusive.
    • Step irons and covers deemed included.
  • Wood works
    • Supports for suspended ceilings classified by suspension depth in stages of 1.50 m instead of 0 - 150 mm, 150 - 500 mm and in further 1.50 m stages.
    • Wooden doors measured as one set inclusive of frames or linings, openings and louvred openings.
    • Features in handrails and balustrades deemed included.
  • Ironmongery
    • Coverage rules for ironmongery expanded.
    • Door frame holdfasts, anchor bolts and rag bolts deleted but not deemed included in doors.
  • Steel and metal works
    • Coverage rules for structural steel expanded.
    • Tactile studs and tactile strips added.
    • Suspended ceilings deemed to include edge and angle trims and forming openings and holes.
    • Suspended ceilings classified by suspension depth in stages of 1.50 m instead of 0 - 150 mm, 150 - 500 mm and in further 1.50 m stages.
    • Suspended ceiling upstands and bulkheads classified by depth of first 600 mm instead of 300 mm then in stages of 300 mm.
  • Plastering and paving
    • Fire rated enclosure added.
    • Rounded angles and coves to in-situ finishes deemed included.
    • Angel fillets to in-situ finishes added.
    • Tactile tiles added.
  • Glazing
    • Glazing measured as part of windows and glazed doors.
    • Infill panels in curtain walling not separately measured.
    • Glazing classified by pane areas ≤ 0.15 m2, > 0.15 and ≤ 4.00 m2, and > 4.00 m2.
  • Painting
    • Painting on pipes and conduits classified by girth > 300 mm, girth ≤ 300 mm, and area ≤ 0.50 m2 irrespective of girth, instead of by diameter of ≤ 50 mm, 50 – 100 mm, > 100 mm.
  • Landscaping
    • Green planting systems, and statues, sculptures and stone features added.

 

Track-changes

{deleted text in HKSMM4 added text in HKSMM4R} unchanged text in HKSMM4

 

Ref

Rules

 

GENERALLY

 

the {Main} Contractor

 

{Artists or Tradesmen Specialist Contractors}

III

PRELIMINARIES

8.

Plant{s}, Tools, Sheds, etc.

8.1

Plant, tools, scaffolding and staging{, special scaffolds if required for Nominated Sub-Contractors’ work}

9.

{Notices and Fees Statutory Obligations}

9.1

Compliance with and giving notices required by any Ordinance {of Government,} Regulations and Bye-Laws of {any} Government {Department, Local Authority and any Public Service Company or Authority, and any statutory undertakers and utility companies} …

10.

{Safety Supervision Plan and} Safety Precautions

10.1

{Compliance with the current Labour Department’s Construction Sites (Safety) Regulations. Preparation of safety supervision plan and compliance with the approved plan and all applicable safety ordinances and regulations.}

11.

{Industrial Training Construction Industry} Levy

11.1

Payment of the levy legally demandable under the {Industrial Training (Construction Industry) Construction Industry Council} Ordinance

12.1

… Pneumoconiosis {and Mesothelioma} (Compensation) (Assessment of Levy) Regulations …

14.

{Foreman Contractor’s Site Management Team}

14.1

{General foreman and his attendance on the Works Construction manager and his site management and supervisory team’s attendance on the Works}

15.

Protection of Public (Property etc. and Adjacent Property)

15.1

Maintenance and protection of public property {and property, adjacent properties, existing slopes, roads, footpaths, trees, shrubs and services} of the Public Utility Companies …

17.

{Artists or Tradesmen not Sub-Contractors Persons or Specialist Contractors engaged by the Employer}

17.1

Permission for execution of work by {Artists and Tradesmen who are not Nominated Sub-Contractors and persons or Specialist Contractors} who may be engaged by the Employer.

19.

Insurances{, etc.}

19.1

{Insurances against or allowances to be made in respect of the following:

(a) Fire and extraneous perils

(b) Injury to persons and property

(c) Workmen’s compensation

Requirements in respect of the following insurances:

(a) Contractors’ all risks insurance of the Works

(b) Third party liability insurance

(c) Employees’ compensation insurance}

25.

{Treasure, Trove, Coins, etc. Antiquities}

29.

Removal of Water

Unit: Prov’l sum {/ Prov’l number of pumping hours}

30.1

Water for the Works, including that for Nominated Sub-Contractors{, Specialist Contractors employed by the Employer, statutory undertakers and utility companies} and any necessary temporary plumbing and storage

31.1

Lighting and power for the Works, including that for Nominated Sub-Contractors{, Specialist Contractors employed by the Employer, statutory undertakers and utility companies} and any necessary temporary wiring and meters

34.1

Works to be carried out by Government Departments{, or Public Utility Companies which are dealt with by means of Provisional Sums statutory undertakers and utility companies}, e.g.:

(a) Taking up and replaying the paving of public roads and footpaths

(b) Forming permanent crossing

(c) Connections to fresh and flush water, gas, electric mains, telephone, drainage and the like

Unit: Item

40.

{Building Information Modelling}

40.1

{Requirements in respect of building information modelling for design, construction or facility management purposes

Unit: Item}

IV

DEMOLITIONS AND ALTERATIONS

(a)

Demolitions

2.

3.

4.

Demolishing individual structure

Demolishing parts of structures

Clearing the site of all structures

{6. Toxic/hazardous material, type stated}

(b)

Alterations

4.

Pulling down walls, partitions, suspended ceilings, floors, roofs, staircases and other parts of old structures

{4. Toxic/hazardous material, type stated}

V

PILING AND CAISSONS

(a)

Piling General

1.

Generally

The following general information, where available, shall be given:

(a) Ground level in relation to high and low water tables and {Ordinance} Principal Datum

(c) The various levels from which {piling frames will operate the measurements have been taken are stated, irregular ground levels are so described}

<Comment: drafting style inconsistent with the remaining items.>

(b)

Steel Sheet Piling

10.

{Pre-boring the pile holes

1. Size of the cross-section of each pile stated

1. Depth of individual bores ≤ 10.00 m

2. Depth of individual bores > 10.00 m in stages of 5.00 m

Unit: m (nr stated)

M.8 Pre-boring is only measured where it is specifically required.

M.9 Measured from point of entry into ground to bottom of bore.

C.4 This work is deemed to include:

(a) Movement of boring rigs into position and about the site, any necessary excavation or filling required to place the rigs, raising or lowering the rigs and any staging, barges or the like required to support the rigs

(b) Drilling to required depths

(c) Filling voids between sides of piles and bores with approved materials}

<Comment:

The cross-section of the bored hole instead of the pile should be stated.

The "depth" should be described as "total depth" to avoid the meaning of successive depths. 

The pre-bored holes may be contiguous (adjacent to each other) or secant (overlapping each other). It may be more convenient to measure the elevation area of the trench wall formed by the pre-bored holes from the point of entry into ground to the bottom of the trench wall with the cross-sections and spacing of the pre-bored holes stated.> 

(e)

Bored Piles

2.

Boring the pile holes

1. Size of bore cross-section stated

{1. Total length of shaft ≤ 10.00 m

2. Total length of shaft in further stages of 5.00 m

1. Depth of individual bores ≤ 10.00 m

2. Depth of individual bores > 10.00 m in stages of 5.00 m}

Unit: m (nr stated)

C1 This work is deemed to include:

{(c) Provision of temporary casings to shaft bores including sinking and withdrawal operations

(d) Additional excavation required to accommodate temporary casings and permanent linings (if specified) and the consequent disposal of additional excavated material}

<Comment: The "depth" should be described as "total depth" to avoid the meaning of successive depths.> 

11.

{Sonic test

1. Sonic tube

1. Size, thickness and material stated

Unit: m

2. Sonic test

Unit: nr}

11a.

{Koden test

1. Verticality and bell-out

Unit: nr}

12.

Concrete coring test

1. Diameter of core {and grouting requirements} stated

1. Starting level of drilling below commencement level {stated in stages of 15.00 m}

Unit: m (nr stated)

<Comment: It is still preferred to state the starting level in stages. Otherwise, there would be too many items due to different starting levels.>

14.

{Pre-drilling

1. Diameter of borehole stated

1. Drilling depth measured in stage of 15.00 m

Unit: m (nr stated)}

<Comment: It would be better to call it "drill hole".>

15.

{Post construction proof drilling}

(f)

Steel Piles

9.

{Pre-boring Boring the pile holes}

1. Size of pile stated

1. {Total length of shaft Depth of individual bores} ≤ 10.00 m

2. {Total length of shaft in further Depth of individual bores > 10.00 m in} stages of 5.00 m

Unit: m (nr stated)

<Comment: The "depth" should be described as "total depth" to avoid the meaning of successive depths.>

12.

13.

{Pre-drilling

Post construction proof drilling

1. Diameter of boreholes stated

1. Drilling depth measured in stages of 15.00 m

Unit: m (nr stated)}

<Comment: It would be better to call it "drill hole".>

 

Rock-socketed steel H-piles

Mini-piles

Pressure grouting

 

<Sections added>

VI

EXCAVATION

(a)

Excavation

3.

Excavating

3.2

Excavation to reduce levels over site{, > 0.20 m in average depth average depth stated if ≤ 0.20 m}

Unit: m3

3.5

Surface trenches

Unit: m3

{M.6 Where trenches exceed 1.00 m in depth a minimum width of 0.75 m is measured}

3.7

Excavation for column or stanchion bases, isolated piers, manholes and the like, each given separately

Unit: m3

{M.7 Where these excavations exceed 1.50 m in depth a minimum measurement on plan of 1.25 m x 1.25 m is taken for excavation.}

7.

Backfilling to excavation

{1. ≤ 0.30 m in depth, average depth stated

Unit: m2

2. > 0.30 m in depth (where part exceeds 0.30 m in depth, the whole is given cube)}

Unit: m3

VII

CONCRETE WORKS

(a)

Concrete

1.

Generally

C.1 Each item of concrete work is deemed to include {for:

(a) Mixing, conveying, hoisting or lowering, placing in position, vibrating, curing, protection and complying with temperature control requirements

forming grooves (other than in fair faced concrete to form ornamental features), chases, mortices,

(b) Forming grooves (other than in fair faced concrete to form ornamental features), chases, mortices

grouting in balusters, bolts, dowels and the like with cement,

(c) Grouting in balusters, bolts, dowels and the like with cement mortar

holes for pipes, openings ≤ 0.025 m2 sectional area, and the required steel trimming bars to these holes and openings and making good and other sundry items of a like nature

(d) Forming holes for pipes, cables and the like etc. ≤ 150 mm diameter, and openings ≤ 0.50 m2 sectional area, and the required steel trimming bars to these holes and openings and making good

(e) Forming of all construction joints including the provision of approved waterstops or other similar material (except those joints designed by the Engineer)

(f) Casting kickers monolithically with base slab where these are required at base of walls and columns

(g) Forming angles, ends, intersections and similar labours to curbs, copings, channels and other items measured run

(h) Provision and submission of concrete test cubes for testing and provision of test certificates.}

12.

{Cement grouting under steel column bases or under steel grillages

12.1 Mix and thickness stated

Unit: m2}

18.

19.

19a.

Suspended slabs

Coffered and troughed slabs

1. Horizontal

2. Sloping ≤ 15 degrees

3. Sloping > 15 degrees

{Transfer plates

1. Thickness stated}

Unit: m3

C.9 {Shoulders of different (or stronger) mix are deemed to include for any additional formwork or permanent mesh separation barriers required to form the shoulders. This work is deemed to include shoulders or haunchings of richer (or stronger) mix including any additional formwork or permanent mesh separation barriers required to form the shoulders and haunchings.}

21a.

Transfer beams

Unit: m3

(d)

Formwork

2.

3.

3a.

3b.

Soffits of slabs

Soffits of landings

{Soffits of stairs

Soffits of transfer plates}

7.

7a.

Sides of soffits of beams

{Sides and soffits of transfer beams}

1. Depth of beams ≤ {0.75 1.00} m (below soffit of slab)

2. Depth of beams > {0.75 1.00} m (below soffit of slab)

8.

9.

Top formwork

Edges and breaks in slabs and walls, including soffits of openings in walls and sides of curbs

1. Straight

2. Curved

1. Width > 300 mm

Unit: m2

{2. Width ≤ 100 mm

3. Width > 100 mm and ≤ 200 mm

4. Width > 200 mm and ≤ 300 mm

2. Width ≤ 300 mm}

Unit: m

10.

Risers and open strings of stairs

1. Straight

2. Curved

{1. Width ≤ 100 mm

2. Thereafter in stages of 100 mm

Unit: m}

1. Width > 300 mm

Unit: m2

2. Width ≤ 300 mm

Unit: m

11.

Edges and soffits of copings, cills, strings, cornices, eaves overhangs and the like {≤ 0.50m wide}, grouped together

1. Straight

2. Curved

{1. Girth ≤ 0.30 m stated in stages of 100 mm

Unit: m

1. Girth > 0.50 m

Unit: m2

2. Girth ≤ 0.30 m

3. Girth > 0.30 m and ≤ 0.50 m

Unit: m}

 

15.

Forming holes for pipes, cables and the like, > 150 mm diameter

{1. Thickness of concrete and size of pipe or cable etc. stated

Unit: nr

Unit: item}

<Comment: This virtually means that an item must be given for every job involving concrete works.>

16.

Boxings for openings > {0.025 0.50} m2 and ≤ 1.00 m2 sectional area

1. Thickness of concrete and size in stages of 0.10 m2

Unit: nr

(e)

Precast Concrete Work

1.

Generally

C.1 {All moulds are deemed to be included in the item. All reinforcement and moulds with specified finished surfaces are deemed to be included.}

2.

Bench slabs, seat slabs, façade panels, partition slabs, bollards, posts, planters etc.

1. Dimensioned description

1. {Reinforcement details stated

2.} Cast-in accessories, details stated

Unit: nr

 

<Comment: It should not mean that no reinforcement details are to be provided on the Tender Drawings made available for the Tenderers, otherwise it would lead to argument as to the extent of reinforcement required. Even if the detailed drawings are made available, it would require the Tenderers to inspect the drawings. For less complicated reinforcement details, it is still preferred to state the details in the BQ descriptions. If the details are left to the Contractor to design, it should be so stated.>

VIII

BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK

(a)

Brickwork and Blockwork

1.

Generally

C.1 Each item of Brickwork and Block Wall is deemed to include:

(a) All rough and fair cuttings

(b) Wedging and pinning

(c) Raking out joints to form key

(d) Raking out joints for and pointing flashings

(e) Labour eaves filling

(f) Plumbing angles and forming square and rebated reveals

(g) {Notches, forming or leaving or cutting chases Forming or leaving or cutting chases, grooves, notches, holes, mortices and similar including nay pinning, grouting and making good}

(h) {Holes and mortices and cutting and pinning and making good Cutting squints, birdmouths, splays, chamfers and similar labour items}

(i) Centering

{(j) Bedding and pointing frames, bedding plates and similar items

(k) Leaving pockets in the work to receive built-in items including subsequently blocking up}

{(j)(l)} And any other sundry items of a like nature

<Comment: New rule (j) also appears in the coverage rules of many other wood works and metal works items. The introduction of this new rule may cause uncertainty as to whether the costs are deemed included in brickwork and blockwork or in other wood works and metal works items.>

23.

{Sundry items built in or attached to brickwork or blockwork, type or name stated

1. Building in sundry items, described

2. Plugging and screwing sundry items to brickwork or blockwork described

3. Shot firing sundry items to brickwork or blockwork, described

1 Thickness of wall stated, description includes formation of opening and lintol

Unit: nr}

<Comment: It does not mean that all sundry items are deemed included and not to be measured.>

IX

DRAINAGE (including Underground Pipe Ducts)

2.

3.

Excavating trenches for drain pipes

Excavating trenches for pipe ducts

{1. Total depth stated in stages of 1.50 m, (i.e. ≤ 1.50 m total depth, > 1.50 m and  ≤ 3.00 m total depth, etc.)

average depth stated in multiples of 0.25 m, and commencing level stated

1. Average trench depth stated in multiples of 0.25 m, and commencing level stated}

Unit: m

13.

14.

15.

16.

Manholes

Inspection chambers

Soakaways

{Others Back inlet gully traps

1. Dimensioned description given for each type of design

1. Total depth between the cover level and invert level ≤ 1.00 m deep

2. Thereafter in stages of 0.50 m deep}

Unit: nr

M.2 {Where of a standard design these items enumerated and fully described, description includes covers, step irons and intercepting traps. These items enumerated and fully described, description includes excavation, concrete, formwork, reinforcement, steel joists, brickwork, benchings, rendered coatings, painting, covers, step irons, intercepting traps and other works.}

M.3 {Alternatively, where not of standard design they are measured in the same way as items 17 to 22 hereof. Alternatively, they are measured in detail in accordance with the rules in the appropriate Sections.}

<Comment: For each type of manhole, the covers may vary depending on the locations of the manholes. It would be better to measure the covers separately to reduce the number of combinations of manholes and different covers. The type of covers is also more subject to change. Separating the measurement would obtain rates for variation valuation.>

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

Cesspools

Septic Tanks

Grease traps

{Petrol Interceptors}

Others

{1. Excavation

2. Concrete

3. Formwork

4. Reinforcement

5. Brickwork

6. Rendered coatings

7. Painting}

1. Dimensioned description given for each type of design

Unit: nr

{8. Benchings, including channels

1. Average thickness stated

Unit: m2}

20.

{Step irons}

21.

{Covers}

25.

Connections with public sewers

{1. Where relevant details are available, these works are given separately in accordance with the appropriate measurement rules

2. Where no detail is available, a provisional sum is given}

Unit: Prov’l Sum

XIII

WOOD WORKS

(b) General Clauses Applicable to the Following Sections (c) through (m)
1.

Generally

{C.1 All wood works are deemed to include screws, bolts, dowels, holdfasts, ragbolts, patent connectors, cleats, brackets, plates and similar fixings including drilling and mortices in structure and grouting the same.}

(d)

Raised Access Floors

1.

Floors

1. {Thickness of panels stated Type, modular size and surface finish of panels stated}

1. Height of cavity stated

Unit: m2

2.

Ramps

3.

Items measured extra over the floors in which they occur

1. {Electrical and data panels, air grilles, diffusers, perforated panels and other special Special} panels

1. Dimensioned description

Unit: nr

1.

2.

3.

Floors

Ramps

Items measured extra over the floors in which they occur

C.1 Raised access floors are deemed to include:

(a) {Panels Floor panels}, supporting structures, adhesives, bearing pads{, gaskets, sealants, seals, edge mouldings} and the like

(b) Cutting and notching and extra supports

{(c) Forming openings for building service penetrations, electrical floor boxes, air diffusers and similar outlets}

(e)

Sheet Linings/Claddings, Timber Suspended Ceilings, Unframed Trims, Insulation, Proofing Works and Fire Stops

<Comment: “Cladding” is an uncountable noun without “s”.>

6.

Supports for suspended ceilings

1. Skeleton grounds, described

2. Framework, described

3. Framework for shaped ceiling, described

1. Fixed to soffit, background and method of fixing described

2. Suspended from soffit, hangers and spacing described with depth of suspension ≤ {150 mm 1.50 m}

{3. Ditto with depth of suspension 150 mm – 500 mm

4.3.} Ditto with depth of suspension stated thereafter in 1.50 m stages

Unit: m2

(i)

Doors, Hatches, Ventilators and the like and Frames and Linings

1.

Flush doors {and frames}

1. (Size, thickness and construction stated and facings and applied mouldings etc. described Dimensioned description of doors, frames or linings, stating the door size, thickness, construction, facings and applied mouldings etc. and size, number and type of glass panels and louvres)

            1. Single leaf doors

2. Folding doors

3. Swinging doors

4. Sliding doors

5. Sliding and folding doors

Unit: {nr or} Sets

<Comment: The doors may be separated from the frames and linings this can reduce the number of combinations of doors and framing or linings. This would also obtain rates for doors and frames or linings separately for variation valuation.>

2.

{Items measured extra over flush doors

1. Openings for glass

2. Louvred openings

1. Size and edge treatment stated

Unit: nr}

<Comment: The above comment also applies here.>

3.

Framed and paneled doors {and frames}

1. {Sectional sizes of stiles, rails, transoms, muntins, panels and the like given and size and number of panels and glazed or louvred panels stated Dimensioned description of doors, frames or linings, stating the sectional sizes of stiles, rails, transoms, muntins, panels and the like and size and number of panels and glazed or louvred panels

            1. Single leaf doors

2. Folding doors

3. Swinging doors

4. Sliding doors

5. Sliding and folding doors}

Unit: nr or Sets

<Comment: The above comment also applies here.>

4.

Fire rated doors and frames

1. Dimensioned description of doors, frames {and/}or linings

            {1. Ironmongery described}

Unit: Sets

<Comment: Ironmongery should be described.>

8.

9.

{Door frames

Door linings

1. Overall sizes of doors or door sets given, and cross section of members stated

1. Solid and built-up frames or linings are given separately, grounds or backings are described and included in the item­

Unit: nr}

<Comment: There are still merits to measure them separately.>

(j)

Stairs, Handrails and Balustrades

3.

Handrails

1. Dimensioned description with method of jointing {and mounting} handrail stated. If hollowed for and screwed to metal core this is stated

Unit: m

4.

{Items measured extra over handrails

1. Ramps

2. Wreaths

3. Bends

4 Ornamental ends

Unit: nr}

<Comment: It is advisable to describe them in the handrail descriptions, and to measure expensive features separately as extra over items.>

5.

Balustrades

1. Dimensioned description with spacing of balusters{, opening portions and method of jointing and mounting} stated

Unit: m

6.

{Items measured extra over balustrades

1. Ramps

2. Wreaths

3. Bends

4 Ornamental ends

5. Opening portions, details stated

6. Method of jointing handrail stated

Unit: nr}

<Comment: It is advisable to describe them in the balustrade descriptions, and to measure expensive features separately as extra over items.>

XIV

IRONMONGERY

1.

Generally

C.1 Ironmongery and fixing only of ironmongery supplied under a separate Prime Cost Item are deemed to include:

{(a) Fixing to any type of timber or building board unless some other surface is stated

(a) Fitting, cutting, sinking, boring and morticing

(b) Fitting, cutting, housing, sinking, boring, morticing, drilling and similar labours to the material to which the article is being fixed

(b) Supplying and screwing with screws to match

(c) Provision of all necessary screws to match the ironmongery, and any bolts, nuts, washers, nails, pins, lugs, adhesive or similar items required

(c) Drilling for and provision of plugs where required

(d) Drilling and plugging of concrete, brick, stone or other materials where required

(e) Oiling, easing and adjusting ironmongery and leaving in working order}

7.

Dowels

1. Size and length stated

Unit: nr

{M.5 Individual dowels, where not forming part of doors, are measured here.}

<Comment: The coverage rules for doors and frames do not include dowels. A preamble is required to deem door frames and linings to include for dowels.>

8.

{Holdfasts

1. Dimensioned description

Unit: nr}

<Comment: The coverage rules for doors and frames do not include this item. A preamble is required to deem door frames and linings to include for this item.>

9.

{Anchor bolts and rag bolts

Unit: r}

<Comment: The coverage rules for doors and frames do not include this item. A preamble is required to deem door frames and linings to include for this item.>

XV

STEEL AND METAL WORKS

(a)

Structural Steel

2. – 16.

C.1 Items for fabrication and erection are deemed to include {for}:

{(a) Cutting, notching and drilling

(a) Shop and site rivets and black bolts, nuts and washers

(b) Shop and site rivets

(c) Bolts including black bolts and high strength friction grip bolts complete with nuts and washers

(b) Welding, welding tests and X-rays

(d) Welding materials and welding tests including X-rays and other non-destructive tests as specified

(e) Galvanising to structural steelwork if specified}

{(c)(f)} Performance tests

{(d)(g)} Packings where required for connections, caps and bases

{(e) (h)} Wedging and grouting under bases

17.

18.

{Surface preparation}

Surface treatment

{1. Described

1. Sprayed metal coating

2. Protective painting

3. Other treatment type stated

1. Surface preparation described

2. Number of coats stated

3. Thickness of coat(s) stated

4. Fire rating stated

5. Finish stated}

Unit: m2

C.2 {The areas are deemed to include for works to additional surface areas of cleats and brackets etc. in connections. Additional surface areas of cleats and brackets etc. in connection are deemed to be included.

C.3 All surface preparation is deemed to be included.}

<Comment: “are/is deemed to be included” is superfluous when given under the Coverage Rules column.>

(e) Framed Work, Stairs, Handrails and Balustrades
2. - 6.

{C.2 (f) Core-rails and handrails are deemed to include for angles, ramps, wreathes and the like.

C.3 Core-rails, handrails and tubular handrails are deemed to include joints in the running lengths, bends, angles, ramps, wreathes, junctions, capped ends, flange plates, brackets and the like.}

5.

Mat frames

1. {Fully described Dimensioned description}

Unit: nr

6.

Core rails{, and} handrails {and tubular handrails}

1. Dimensioned description

Unit: m

7.

{Brackets to core rails and handrails

Unit: nr}

<Comment: To include in descriptions.>

8.

{Tubular handrails

Unit: m}

<Comment: Grouped in item 6.>

9.

{Items measured extra over tubular handrails and balustrades

1. Ramps

2. Wreathes

3. Bends

4. Junctions, described

5. Capped ends

6. Flange plates

Unit: nr}

10.

{Brackets to tubular handrails

1. Dimensioned description

Unit: nr}

<Comment: To include in descriptions.>

12.

{Gratings to floor channels and the like

1. Dimensioned description

2. General length of sections stated

Unit: m}

<Comment: Measure as (h) Sundries.>

13.

{Frames to gratings to floor channels and the like

1. Dimensioned description

Unit: m}

<Comment: Measure as (h) Sundries.>

14.

{Gratings to openings, ventilators and the like

1. Dimensioned description

Unit: nr}

<Comment: Measure as (h) Sundries.>

(h)

Sundries

11.

12.

{Tactile studs

Tactile strips

1. Warning/stop tactiles

2. Direction/go tactiles

3. Turning/positional tactiles

1. Dimensioned description, method of fixing and background for fixing stated

Unit: m2 or m (width stated)}

(m)

Suspended Ceilings

1.

Generally

C.1 Ceilings are deemed to include:

(a) Rails, hangers, spacers{, suspension and framed members} and the like

{(f) Edge and angle trims

(g) Forming openings and holes}

2.

3.

Tiled or panelled ceilings

Metal strip ceilings

1. Depth of suspension ≤ {150 mm 1.50 m}

{2. Depth of suspension 150 – 500 mm

3. Thereafter in 500 mm stages

2. Thereafter in 1.50 m stages}

Unit: m2

5.

Upstands {and bulkheads}

1. Height ≤ {300 mm 600 mm}

2. Thereafter in 300 mm stages

Unit: m

7.

{Edge trims

1. Plain

2. Floating

1. Dimensioned description

Unit: m}

8.

{Angle trims

Unit: m}

(n)

Windows and Glazed Doors

2.

3.

4.

5.

Windows

Glazed doors

Composite metal windows

Composite metal window and doors

1. Dimensioned description, overall size and drawing reference stated

1. Glazing {beads} described

2. Ironmongery described

Unit: nr

C.1 Windows and doors are deemed to include:

(a) Fixing including all screws and bolts, shot fired fixings and lugs

(b) Morticing ends of transoms and mullions and/or strengtheners to same

(c) Ironmongery and fittings

{(d) Glazing and glazing beads and compounds}

 

<Comment: Not measuring glazing separately will not obtain rates for variation valuation when the glazing is changed, which is rather usual.>

(p)

Curtain Walling

2.

Curtain walling

1. Dimensioned description

Unit: m2

<Comment: It would be preferable to measure vision and spandrel areas separately, and measure special corners, coping, soffit strips, feature strips, which are not proportional to the areas.>

3.

Items extra over curtain walling in which they occur

{1. Infill panels

1. Type and thickness stated

Unit: m2}

{2. 1.} Opening lights

{3. 2.} Doors

1. Dimensioned description

Unit: nr

2.

3.

Curtain walling

Items extra over curtain walling in which they occur

C.3 Items include:

(a) {doors, where supplied with the unit} Finishes as specified

(b) Architraves, trims and the like {where part of the component}

(c) Ironmongery {where supplied with the component associated with windows and doors}

(d) Glazing and infill panels

(e) Mechanical operation and automatic operating equipment where supplied with the component

(f) Sealing all joints and bedding and pointing frames

(g) Sealant or separation material to surfaces of aluminium in contact with concrete, plaster or brickwork

(h) Fixings and fastenings

(i) Stripping protective coverings or coatings

XVI

PLASTERING AND PAVING

(b)

Lathing and Plasterboard

1.

2.

3.

Metal lathing

1. Mesh stated

2. Laps stated

Plasterboard

1. Thickness stated

{Fire rated enclosure

1. Material, thickness and fire resisting period stated}

{8. To top, sides and soffits for enclosing individual pipe and duct, or group of pipes and ducts and the like}

Unit: m2

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Metal lathing

Plasterboard

{Fire rated enclosure}

Stop beads

Angle beads

C.2 The work is deemed to include the provision of approved timber or steel framing to support plasterboard or fire rated board as required.

<Comment: Whether it is timber or steel framing should be stated.>

(d)

In-situ Surface Finishes and Screeds or Backings

1. - 23.

{C.1 Work is deemed to include:

(a) Cleaning off and wetting surfaces of concrete slabs, and washing with cement grout if the concrete has hardened

(a)(b) Internal angles, arrises, throats, drips and the like

(b)(c) Coves, grooves and rounded external angles  ≤ 25 mm radius

(c)(d) Angles, stops, intersections, fair ends, junctions, wreathed corners and the like on coves, skirtings, channels, strings, curbs and the like}

13.

14.

{Rounded angles > 25 mm radius

Coves > 25 mm radius

Unit: m}

<Comment: A preamble is required to include these items.>

20a.

{Angle fillets

1. Width and depth stated

Unit: m}

(e)

Tile and Slab Finishes

24.

{Tactile tiles

1. Warning/stop tactiles

2. Direction/go tactiles

3. Turning/positional tactiles

1. Dimensioned description, method of fixing and background or fixing stated

Unit: m2 or m (width stated)}

XX

GLAZING

(a)

General Glazing (including Acrylic and Polycarbonate Sheets)

1.

Generally

M.1 Glass measured in this Sub-section is for general glazing {to windows, doors, etc.}.

M.2 Glass in the following positions are measured in the appropriate Sub-sections of Section XIII Wood Works and XV Steel and Metal Works:

(a) Fixed and demountable partitions

(b) Office partitions

(c) Shop fronts

(d) Curtain walling

(e) Furniture and fittings etc.

{(f) Windows and glazing doors}

2.

3.

{Glazing

<>

1. Panes area ≤ 0.15 m2

2. Panes, area > 0.15 and ≤ 4.00 m2

3. Panes > 4.00 m2

1. Type, quality and thickness of glass stated

Unit: m2}

XXI

PAINTING

2.

3.

Painting on pipes and conduits

{1. Bore > 100 mm, diameter stated

2. Bore > 50 mm and ≤ 100 mm diameter

3. Bore ≤ 50 mm, diameter}

Painting on eaves gutters

{1. Size stated

Unit: m

1. Surfaces, girth > 300 mm

Unit: m2

2. Surfaces, girth ≤ 300 mm

Unit: m

3. Isolated surfaces ≤ 0.50 m2, irrespective of girth

Unit: nr

XXII

LANDSCAPING

(f)

Green Planting Systems

1.

2.

{Vertical green wall systems

Horizontal green roof systems

1. For proprietary systems, catalogue reference, components of the system and background for fixing stated

Unit: m2 or Set

2. For other systems, each component of the system is measured in accordance with the measurement rule in the appropriate Section.

M.1 Plants are measured separately.

M.2 Measured the area covered by the green planting system.}

(g)

Statues, Sculptures and Stone Features

1.

2.

3.

4.

{Statues

Sculptures

Stone features

Others

1. Catalogue reference or dimensioned description and method of fixing

Unit: nr or Set

C.1 This work is deemed to include the provision of any additional framing support required for securely fixing into position.}

<Comment: The framing support should be described.>

                     

 

End of Page

Measurement Checklists

Measurement Checklists KCTang

Go to End

Note

23/3/2020: Numeric numbering system adopted. Punctuation standardised.

13/3/2020: Contents expanded.

3/8/2019: HKSMM4 Revised 2018 incorporated.

27/7/2019: Split to its own page and revised.

23/12/2014: Moved from wiki.

Clarify which Method of Measurement

  1. The Method of Measurement (more properly “rules”) to be used or which has been used should be clarified during the briefing session upon commencement of taking-off. 
    採用的標準工程量計算規則在開始計量的交底會確定。
  2. For pre-contract cost estimates, the Method of Measurement will be determined by the Consultants, and the quantities are usually approximate and relative items are grouped together to save time.
  3. For Pricing Schedules with quantities provided by the Consultants, the Method of Measurement should be stated.
  4. For new works, the Method of Measurement will be prescribed as to follow the Hong Kong Standard Method of Measurement of Building Works – Fourth Edition 2005 (“HKSMM4”) or Fourth Edition Revised 2018 ("HKSMM4R") published by The Hong Kong Institute of Surveyors.
  5. For Government term maintenance contracts, they use the Schedule of Rates for Term Contracts for Building Works (ttp://www.archsd.gov.hk/en/publications-publicity/bill-of-quantities,-method-…), which prescribe the Method of Measurement.
  6. The standard methods of measurement describe what should be measured and what can be deemed to be included in the rates and prices and need not be measured.
  7. For Pricing Schedules with quantities to be inserted by the Tenderers, the Method of Measurement may be prescribed by the Consultants but usually it is left to the Tenderers.
  8. The Tenderers may follow the standard Method of Measurement or may simplify or deviate.
  9. In any case, the method used by the Tenderers in the Pricing Schedule should be used for pricing variations and remeasured provisional quantities.

Read Method of Measurement 閱讀標準工程量計算規則

  1. Inexperienced Takers-off should read the relevant sections of the prescribed Method of Measurement before taking-off.
    生手計量員應在計量前閱讀瞭解計算規則。
  2. Experienced Takers-off should review the relevant sections of the prescribed Method of Measurement from time to time during the course of taking-off.
    熟手計量員應不時重溫計算規則。
  3. Upon completion of taking-off, all Takers-off should take a final review of the prescribed Method of Measurement to ensure that there are no missing items to be measured.
    計量完畢,全部計量員應翻閱計算規則,確保沒有錯漏。

Pay extra attention to how to treat 特別要注意如何處理的

  1. Wastage (not measured).
    損耗
  2. Gross or net measurement.
    毛或淨量
  3. Deductions for openings (small voids or openings not deducted, such as those not exceeding 0.50 m2 or 1.00 m2 or 0.50 m3 depending on the type of work).
    扣除孔洞
  4. Laps and intersections.
    搭接、交叉
  5. Working space for excavation (0.25 m or 0.60 m depending on the height of formwork below ground).
    工作面
  6. Slopes of excavated spaces (designed or restricted excavation profiles).
    放坡
  7. Staging or ranging where items can be measured together or separately (excavation depth below ground in successive stages of 1.50 m, soffit formwork and ceiling finishes heights above floor not exceeding 3.50 m high, then in 1.50 m stages, etc.).
    步距
  8. Sloping work (from horizontal) / slanting work (from vertical).
    斜坡、傾斜
  9. Circular work (usually measured separately).
    弧形
  10. Extra over items (principal items overlapping with the extra over items not deducted in the quantities, but to be considered in the unit rates, e.g. pipe bends, tees, etc.).
    補差計量
  11. Tenderers not strictly following any standard Method of Measurement may follow the above treatment as common practice.

Measure net quantities

  1. Measure all work net as fixed in position, unless otherwise stated.
  2. This is a very important principle.
  3. If there is no prescribed Method of Measurement, at least state that “all work is to be measured its net quantity as fixed in position with no allowance for wastage and, in case of work measured superficially, for laps, unless otherwise stated”.
  4. Work which are “superficial” (as compared to “linear” or “cubic”) and have laps not to be measured are wire mesh, waterproof layers, pitched roof tiling, etc.
  5. Work which are linear and have laps to be measured are reinforcement bars, door frames, skirtings, etc.

Deduct voids

  1. Voids (openings and wants) smaller than the sizes specified in the SMM are not to be deducted.
  2. However, this refers to voids detached from the boundaries of the space measured.
  3. Voids caused by projections from the boundary of the space measured are always deducted:

Costs held to be included in items (HKSMM4 and HKSMM4R)

  1. Labour and all costs in connection therewith
  2. Materials, goods and all costs in connection therewith (e.g. conveyance, delivery, unloading, storing, returning packings, handling, hoisting and lowering)
  3. Fitting and fixing materials and goods in positions
  4. Use of plant
  5. All cutting and waste
  6. Establishment charges, overhead charges and profit.

Units of measurement (HKSMM4 and HKSMM4R)

  1. Items given by weight - kilograms
  2. Items given cube - cubic metres
  3. Items given super - square metres
  4. Items given run - linear metres
  5. Items enumerated - number of sets, as applicable
  6. Items given by time - Days or Hours, with definitions stated
  7. Dimensions used in calculations - rounded off to the nearest 10 mm.

Units of billing (HKSMM4 and HKSMM4R)

  1. Billing BQ:
    • Rounded to the nearest whole unit
    • Subject to a minimum of 1 if more than 0
  2. Billing variations and remeasurement:
    • Rounded to the nearest 0.1 for m, m2, m3
    • Rounded to the nearest 1 for kg
    • Applicable to omissions or additions
    • Quantity less than 1 but billed as 1 in the original contract to be omitted as 1 if the quantity is not done.

Order of dimensions in BQ or dimension sheets

  • Generally in the sequence of length, width and height.

Ranges

  1. When a range of widths, heights, depths, etc. is given in the item description in a Pricing Schedule, “A – B” usually means “exceeding A but not exceeding B”.
  2. A - B = exceeding A but not exceeding B = "> A but <= B".

Pipe and tubing

  1. Pipe size: to be described by nominal sizes (HKSMM4 and HKSMM4R) vs by internal diameter (HKSMM3).
  2. HKSMM3 pipe size groups for the purposes of painting (all measured run):
    • Small pipes = pipes <= 55 mm diameters
    • Large pipes = pipes 55 - 110 mm diameters
    • Pipe size stated = pipes > 110 mm diameters.
  3. HKSMM4 pipe size groups for the purposes of painting (all measured run):
    • pipes <= 50 mm diameters
    • pipes 50 - 100 mm diameters
    • pipes > 110 mm diameters, pipe size stated.
  4. HKSMM4R pipe size groups for the purposes of painting:
    • pipes <= 300 mm girth (measured run)
    • pipes > 300 mm girth (measured super).

Circular work

  1. HKSMM3 only:
    • Small radius = 0 - 300 mm radius
    • Medium radius = 300 mm - 1.50 m radius
    • Large radius = radius > 1.50 m.
  2. HKSMM4 and HKSMM4R:
    • No grouping by radius.

Prime Cost Rates (P.C. Rates)

  1. Where a prime cost rate (P.C. rate) is included for a component in the description of an item in the Bills of Quantities, the prime cost rate is either (a) for the material cost of that component delivered to site only and the Contractor shall allow in addition for all waste, fixing, all ancillary materials required for fixing such as mortar for bedding and jointing and all other similar items of a like nature, and for profits and overheads, or (b) for the cost of supply and installation or application of the component (such as specialist suspended ceilings or finishes) as charged by a domestic sub-contractor, and the Contractor shall allow for his own profits and overheads.
  2. In the settlement of the Final Account, the rate for the item will be adjusted by the net difference between the prime cost rate and the actual unit cost and will be applied to the nett quantity of the component measured as fixed, installed or applied in position, exclusive of wastage.

Provisional Sum

  1. A sum provided for work or for costs which cannot be entirely foreseen, defined or detailed at the time the tendering documents are issued (HKSMM4 and HKSMM4R).
  2. In the settlement of the Final Account, the provisional sum will be omitted from, and the actual expenditure added to the Contract Sum.

Prime Cost Sum

  1. A sum provided for work or for services to be executed by a Nominated Sub-Contractor or for materials or goods to be obtained from a Nominated Supplier. Such sum shall be deemed to be exclusive of any profit or attendance required by the Contractor and provision shall be made for the addition thereof (HKSMM4 and HKSMM4R).
  2. In the settlement of the Final Account, the Prime Cost Sum will be omitted from, and the actual expenditure added to the Contract Sum.
  3. The Contractor’s profit is to be allowed as a percentage of the Prime Cost Sum. The same percentage will be applied to the final expenditure of the Prime Cost Sum in the settlement of the Final Account.
  4. The Contractor’s attendance is to be allowed as a lump sum not to be adjusted in the settlement of the Final Account, but if the Prime Cost Sum is not expended at all, then the lump sum will be omitted.

Work to be specifically described as such (HKSMM4 and HKSMM4R)

  1. Work under reservoir, river or sea water
  2. Work in compressed air
  3. Work outside the curtilage of the Site
  4. Work in existing building
  5. Temporary works.

Preliminaries

  1. Items should be included in the Preliminaries Bill to inform the tenderers and to specify requirements to enable them to price for the costs.
  2. HKSMM4R:
    • Preliminary Particulars
      • Employer and consultants
      • Description of the Works
      • Site and inspection
      • Division of the Works into sections
    • Conditions of Contract
      • Forms of Contract and Sub-Contract
      • Particulars to be inserted in Appendix to Schedule of Conditions
    • General matters
      • Working hours, rates of wages, etc.
      • Plant, tools, scaffolding, site offices, sheds, etc.
      • Statutory obligations
      • Safety supervision plan and safety precautions
      • Construction Levy
      • Pneumoconiosis and Mesothelioma Levies
      • Setting out
      • Contractor's site management team
      • Protection of public and adjacent property
      • Sub-letting
      • Persons or specialist contractors engaged by the Employer
      • Injury to persons and damage to property
      • Insurances (Contractors' all risks, third party liability, employees' compensation, construction plant, materials off site)
      • Provisional and Prime Cost Sums
      • Conditions of payment
      • Surety or bond
      • Watching
      • Protection
      • Antiquities, etc.
      • Variations and method of measuring and valuing
      • Samples
      • Testing of materials
      • Removal of water
      • Temporary water
      • Temporary lighting and power
      • Attendance
      • Hoardings, etc.
      • Works by public authorities
      • Temporary roads
      • Drying the building
      • Removal of rubbish
      • Defects after completion
      • Co-ordination of services
      • Building information modelling.

Piling

  1. Commencement level / commencing level:
    • Identify the commencement level of piling - existing ground level, level after general site levelling or bulk site formation, or bottom level of footing or basement excavation.
    • State the commencement level in the BQ - the commencement level may not always be the formation level as stipulated by the SMM.
  2. Usual items:
    • Mobilization and demobilization.
    • Trial piles.
    • Preformed portion (whole piles, linings only, driven or placed):
      • Supplying
      • Reinforcing if not described to be included in the supply
      • Driving
      • Dollying
      • Cutting
      • Withdrawal.
    • Cast in-situ portion (whole piles, fillings only, pre-boring):
      • Boring
      • Reinforcing
      • Casting
      • Cutting.
    • Heads, shoes.
    • Testing:
      • Before piling
      • During piling
      • After piling.
  3. Usual units:
    • Area for steel sheet piles or contiguous piles - Measure the area in plane (not developed) elevation along the centre line of steel sheet piles
    • Length for piles in isolated pieces
    • Length or number for extra over items or isolated items.
  4. Supplying preformed portion (including handling, transporting and pitching) :
    • Describe clearly the method of measurement of the area or length or number of supply
    • HKSMM4 or HKSMM4R does not specifically state how the length is to be measured to give the supply quantity of steel sheet piling or precast concrete piles
    • It only requires the "design length" to be stated, but does not say that this is the length to be measured for supply quantity
    • "design length" is defined by HKSMM4 or HKSMM4R as the length specifically required by the designer. However, the designer often does not specifically specify the design length. He usually only specifies the length below cut-off. It is therefore essential to define design length or describe the supply length measured, e.g. as driven length or length below cut-off, with or without allowance for extra length above the top
    • The supply length can in some cases be shorter than the driven length if the top is required to be driven below ground (dollying).
  5. Driving piles:
    • Measure from commencement level of driving to bottom level of driven pile.
  6. Corner piles, junction piles and other special piles to steel sheet piles:
    • Measure as extra over the supplying and driving items "respectively" of the steel steel piling into which they occur
    • Since the supply area may not be the same as the driven area, therefore, "respectively" should mean "separately" for supply items and driving items, or the description of the extra over items should be clear enough.

Excavation

  1. Commencement level / commencing level:
    • Identify and state the commencement level of excavation
    • Usually, the commencement level would be the existing ground level or the formation level whichever is the lower at a particular point.
    • Usually, "formation level" means the underside of the hardcore bed or blinding level of the lowest floor slab or external paving
    • Usually for a site to be "cut", i.e. formation level lower than existing ground level, the site would be formed to the formation level first, and foundations excavation would commence from the formation level
    • Usually for a site to be "filled", i.e. formation level higher than existing ground level, foundations excavation would commence from the existing ground level, backfilled and filled up to the formation level
    • "Usually" means that the definitions for specific projects should be defined and described in the BQ.
  2. Working space:
    • 0.25 m from the face of concrete requiring formwork where the formwork does not exceed 0.60 m in height
    • 0.60 m from the concrete requiring formwork where the formwork exceeds 0.60 m in height AND the bottom of the formwork exceeds 0.60 m below the commencement level of excavation
    • 0.60 m from the finished face of work below ground level where externally applied dampproof coverings or protection walls are required or where the method of construction requires workmen to operate from the outside (NOTE, "ground level" should mean that when the workmen go down to do the coverings or protection walls but this should be clarified in the BQ).
  3. Usual units:
    • Number for post holes not exceeding 0.30 m3
    • Length for trench excavation
    • Area for surface excavation not exceeding 0.20 m in average depth (HKSMM4 only. Volume measured as HKSMM4R)
    • Area for backfilling or filling not exceeding 0.30 m in total depth (HKSMM4 only. Volume measured as HKSMM4R)
    • Volume for other excavations, filling and disposal.
  4. Balancing:
    • Excavation = surplus disposal + backfilling
    • Import fill = filling to make up level - surplus disposal from excavation.

Concrete works

Drainage

  1. HKSMM4 only - When classifying drainage trench excavations by the total depth in stages of 1.50 m, with the average depth stated in multiples of 0.25 m, instead of taking the maximum total depth at the one end of the trench and measuring the whole length into that deepest stage, the length of the trench should be divided into different sections according to the total depth stages and the average depth taken for the different sections
  2. HKSMM4R only - Drainage trench excavations are classified by average depth only of each trench in stages of 0.25 m. Total depths no longer required.

Finishes and roofing

  1. Related items should be measured as a composite items before billing to ensure consistency in quantities. e.g. plaster and paint; tiling and screed; roofing tile, waterproof layer, insulation layer, screed, etc.
  2. Adjustments to be made for differences, e.g. bands, borders, channels, curbs, etc.

Swimming pool measurement checklist

  1. Excavation:
    • Excavation to reduce levels
    • Excavation for swimming pool
    • Backfilling
    • Disposal.
  2. Concrete:
    • Concrete blinding layer
    • Waterproof reinforced concrete in sides and bottom
    • Waterproof reinforced concrete angle fillet including formwork
    • Housing for scum channel.
  3. Formwork:
    • Formwork to sides of swimming pool
    • Formwork to soffit of suspended swimming pool
    • Opening for view panel.
  4. Reinforcement:
    • Steel bar reinforcement, stirrups, binders, etc.
  5. Waterproofing:
    • Waterproof membrane on sides and bottom of swimming pool.
  6. Finishes:
    • Waterproof cement and sand rendering on sides and bottom of swimming pool and behind scum channel
    • Tiling and waterproof screed on sides and bottom of swimming pool
    • Scum channel in tile
    • Steps in tile.
  7. Steel and metal works:
    • Cat ladder or step iron.
  8. Pipework:
    • Puddle flange connector
    • Water supply pipes
    • Water supply outlets
    • Drain pipes
    • Drain outlets.
  9. E&M works:
    • Filtration system and boiler.

Water tank measurement checklist

  1. Concrete:
    • Waterproof reinforced concrete
    • Waterproof reinforced concrete angle fillet including formwork
    • Reinforced concrete plinth.
  2. Formwork:
    • Formwork to sides and internal soffit of water tank
    • Left-in formwork to external soffit of water tank
    • Left-in formwork to form gap between walls
    • Formwork to concrete plinth
    • Boxing to form openings.
  3. Reinforcement:
    • Steel bar reinforcement, stirrups, binders, etc.
  4. Waterproofing:
    • Waterproof membrane/coating on top
    • Waterproof membrane/coating on internal sides and bottom.
  5. Finishes:
    • Waterproof cement and sand rendering to internal sides and bottom of non-potable water tank
    • Tiling and waterproof screed on internal sides and bottom of potable water tank
    • Finishes to top and external sides.
  6. Steel and metal works:
    • Cat ladder or step iron (inside & outside)
    • Trap door or cover.
  7. Pipework:
    • Puddle flange connector
    • Water supply pipe
    • Drain pipe
    • Overflow pipe
    • Air vent
    • Ball float valve.

Door measurement checklist

  1. Doors and frames:
    • Door leaf
    • Vision panel
    • Louvred panel
    • Door frame including bedding and pointing frames
    • Intumescent strip around fire rated doors
    • Architrave
    • Ground behind door frame.
  2. Ironmongery.
  3. Sundry metalwork:
    • Holdfast to door frame in brick and block wall
    • Anchor bolt to door frame in concrete wall
    • Floor dowels.
  4. Painting:
    • Painting to door leaf, door frame, architrave and ground.
  5. Sundry concrete:
    • Lintol
    • Wire mesh for lintol.

End of Page

Usual items in comprehensive building repair and maintenance works

Usual items in comprehensive building repair and maintenance works KCTang

Go to End

Note

23/3/2020: Numeric numbering system adopted. Punctuation standardised.

16/3/2020: Created.

Preliminaries

  1. Site management.
  2. General labour.
  3. Statutory submissions (A&A, Minor Works, Registered Structural Engineers).
  4. Levies.
  5. Insurances (Contractors’ All Risks and Third Party, Employees’ Compensation).
  6. Bonds.
  7. Samples, documentary submissions and testing.
  8. Safety protection.
  9. Temporary facilities (hoardings, covered walkways, fencing, site offices, stores on or off site, plant, water, power and lighting, waste disposal).

Scaffolding

(all temporary, usually priced as part of the Preliminaries, but better separated because of its significant costs)

  1. Single layer scaffolding to wall.
  2. Double layer scaffolding to wall.
  3. Dust screen and tarpaulin sheets.
  4. Catch fan.
  5. Support brackets.
  6. Temporary rain shelters on top of scaffolding.
  7. Weatherproof spotlighting.
  8. Working platform for high level work.
  9. Safety signage.

Security

(all temporary, usually priced as part of the Preliminaries)

  1. Infrared detection.
  2. Motion sensor detection.
  3. CCTV system.
  4. Security guards and patrol.
  5. Dogs.
  6. Alarm system.
  7. Bells.
  8. Lighting, spot lighting, flood lighting.
  9. Hoardings.
  10. Barbed wire.
  11. Access control, smart card.
  12. Workers’ registration.
  13. Notifying police upon commencement of works.

Hoardings, covered walkways and fencing

(all temporary, usually priced as part of the Preliminaries)

Removal of existing

(in common areas)

  1. Unauthorized building structures.
  2. Asbestos containing objects.

Taking down and re-installing / reinstating as appropriate

  1. Drying racks.
  2. Air-conditioners and racks (window type, split type).
  3. Planter soil and plant.
  4. Temporary storage before re-installation.
  5. Pipe brackets.
  6. Signage (probably not heavy advertising frames).
  7. Banners.

Building façade

(external face of external walls, island and re-entraint lightwells, both sides of parapet walls, surfaces of bay windows, planter boxes, A/C hoods, fins, canopies, fence walls, etc.)

  1. Protection of windows, openings, air-conditioners not removed.
  2. Patch repair:
    • Hammer tapping test
    • Removal of debonding finishes
    • Repair of spalling concrete
    • Patch painting or complete painting
    • Patch tile repair or complete tile filler.
  3. Complete re-surfacing:
    • Hacking off of existing finishes
    • Temporary waterproof coating
    • Removal of abandoned nails and metal work and sealing up voids
    • Hammer tapping test or visual inspection
    • Repair of spalling concrete
    • Wire mesh over joints between concrete and brick and cracks
    • External plastering / waterproof rendering and painting (spatterdash coating, pre-packed bond coating, waterproof rendering)
    • Tiling and waterproof screeding (spatterdash coating, pre-packed bond coating, screeding, tile adhesive coating, tile joint grouting).
  4. Grouting and external sealant to windows.
  5. Movement joints in finishes (filler, backer rod, sealant).
  6. Pull-off test on plastering / rendering / tiling.
  7. Water spraying tests.
  8. Infra-red survey on completion (infra-red survey before the works should be part of the pre-tender activities.
  9. Warranties.

Finishes to roofs

(podium roof, top roof, top of watertanks and staircase heads, canopies, covered walkways)

  1. Patch repair (unlikely).
  2. Complete re-roofing:
    • Hacking off of existing finishes
    • Repair of spalling concrete
    • Roofing (levelling layer, waterproofing layer, insulation layer, finishing layer)
    • Skirtings and linings to channels and curbs (waterproofing layer, wire mesh reinforcing layer, finishing layer).
  3. Channel covers.
  4. Movement joints in finishes.
  5. Water ponding tests.
  6. Warranties.

Finishes to floors, ceilings and internal walls

(entrance lobbies, public corridors, typical lobbies, staircases, service rooms, plant rooms, lift machine rooms, lift pits, external covered spaces, carparks)

  1. Removal of existing:
    • Finishes
    • Abandoned features, conduits, wiring.
  2. Patch repair or complete re-surfacing similar to the Building Façade but not requiring waterproofing:
    • Floors
    • Staircase treads, risers, nosings, wall strings, raking skirtings, stepped skirtings, curb strings
    • Walls
    • Ceilings (in-situ finishes, false ceilings)
    • Planter boxes (waterproofed).

Windows

(to common areas)

  1. Samples, test certificates and shop drawings.
  2. Removal of existing.
  3. Windows (window frames, window sashes or casements, glazing and sealant, ironmongery (hinges, locks, stays), safety barrier rails, fire-rating, waterproof grouting and caulking).
  4. Window guards.
  5. Water spraying tests.
  6. Warranties.

Doors

(to common areas)

  1. Samples, test certificates and shop drawings.
  2. Removal of existing.
  3. Doors.
  4. Hose reel panels.
  5. Pipe door doors.
  6. Door frames.
  7. Ironmongery (hinges, locks, latches, bolts, panic bolts, door closers, floor springs, door stops, door catches, clothes hook, kick plates, push plates, pull handles).
  8. Metal work (holdfasts, floor dowels). 
  9. Fire-rating.

Water tanks

(potable water, flushing water, fire services water)

  1. Samples, test certificates and shop drawings.
  2. Temporary water tanks.
  3. Removal of existing.
  4. Waterproof finishes (internal bottoms, sides and soffits).
  5. Tank connectors, cat ladders, step irons, covers and frames.
  6. Water test.
  7. Warranties.

Other constructions and fittings

(to common areas)

  1. Movement joints in structure.
  2. Common entrance gates, roller shutters, fire shutters.
  3. Fencing,
  4. Balustrades, railings and handrails.
  5. Tactile paths.
  6. Cat ladders, step irons.
  7. Signage.
  8. Counters.
  9. Benches.
  10. Notice boards.
  11. Letter boxes.
  12. Exit signs.
  13. Fireproof enclosure to M&E services.

Water supplies

(before individual meters or to outside of flats if no meters)

  1. Samples, test certificates and installation drawings.
  2. Booster pump sets and electrical control.
  3. Water tank fittings (ball valves, drain pipes and valves, overflow drains, vent pipes).
  4. Upfeed and downfeed pipes (potable water, flushing water, fire services).
  5. Vent pipes.
  6. Pipe in-line fittings (bends, tees, pipe sleeves).
  7. Pipe brackets and base supports.
  8. Pipe ancillaries (gate valves, globe valves, non-return valves, air-release valves).
  9. Pipe sleeves and fire-caulking of openings.
  10. Meters.
  11. Painting and labelling.
  12. Testing and commissioning.
  13. As-built drawings.

Above-ground drainage

(commonly shared whether inside or outside flats)

  1. Samples, test certificates and installation drawings.
  2. Drain pipes (soil water, waste water, rainwater, A/C condensate, planter water).
  3. Vent pipes.
  4. Pipe in-line fittings (bends, junctions, rest bends, cleaning eyes).
  5. Pipe brackets and base supports.
  6. Pipe ancillaries (floor drains, rainwater outlets, gratings, P-traps, S-traps, fresh air inlets).
  7. Pipe sleeves and fire-caulking of openings.
  8. Painting and labelling.
  9. Testing and commissioning.
  10. As-built drawings.

Surface and underground drainage

(commonly shared)

  1. CCTV survey of underground drainage.
  2. Samples, test certificates and installation drawings.
  3. Surface water channels, outlets and covers.
  4. Manholes, petrol interceptors, grease interceptors.
  5. Pipe internal lining repair.
  6. Replacement:
    • Pipe trenches, beds and surrounds
    • Drain pipes (soil water, waste water, stormwater)
    • Vent pipes and fresh air inlets
    • Pipe fittings (bends, junctions, cleaning eyes).
  7. Painting and labelling.
  8. Testing and commissioning.
  9. As-built drawings.

Electrical services

(before individual flat meters)

  1. Final circuits (lighting points, power socket points, switch points).
  2. Lighting fittings.
  3. Emergency lighting fittings.
  4. Communal aerial broadcast system.
  5. Entrance access control.
  6. Carpark access control.

Fire services

(to common areas)

  1. Fire hose reels.
  2. Wet risers.
  3. Sprinklers.
  4. Fire hydrants.
  5. Fire detection and alarm system.
  6. Emergency exit signs (under other constructions and fittings).
  7. Emergency lighting (under electrical services).

Mechanical ventilation and air-conditioning services (MVAC)

(to common areas)

  1. Air-conditioners.
  2. Air curtains.
  3. Fans.
  4. Ventilation system.

Private items

(commissioned and paid by individual owners)

  1. Windows.
  2. Flat entrance doors.
  3. Flat entrance gates.
  4. Balcony railings and handrails.
  5. Water supply after meters.
  6. Internal drainage.
  7. Use of scaffolding and insurances.

End of Page

Measurement of Concrete Works

Measurement of Concrete Works KCTang

Go to End

NOTE

3 Aug 2019: Renamed "Measurement of Concrete Works" and incorporated HKSMM4 Revised 2018.

25 Dec 2014: Created under the name of "Standard Method of Quantifiable Modelling" intended to deal with BIM.

INTRO

  1. "HKSMM4" means Hong Kong Standard Method of Measurement of Building Works - Fourth Edition, 2005.

  2. "HKSMM4R" means Hong Kong Standard Method of Measurement of Building Works - Fourth Edition Revised 2018.
  3. "SMM" means HKSMM4 or HKSMM4R as the case may be.
  4. Item descriptions are listed here in elemental order showing levelled classification and required properties, preceded by some definitions and measurement rules, and followed by some supplementary rules in brackets.
  5. Sub-levels are indented, and are subject to higher level descriptions above them.
  6. Elements are shown in bold capitals. Work items are shown in bold.
  7. ";" is used to separate different properties which should be stated for a work item.
  8. Descriptions separated by “|” within a property are alternatives, with the default given first and deemed to apply if not otherwise stated, but properties specified as “stated” are mandatory. “|” if given in a new line is for clearer presentation only.
  9. "#" denotes deviations from SMM.
  10. "Cube", "Sup", "Run" and "Nr" respectively mean m3, m2, m and number.

GENERALLY

  • Rules
    1. Unless otherwise stated, measure all work net as fixed in its place.
    2. Deduct concrete from void > 0.05 m3 or opening > 0.10 m2.
    3. Deduct formwork from opening > 1.00 m2.
    4. Do not deduct formwork to structural walls, columns and beams intersected by end of abutting beams.
    5. HKSMM4 - Measure Super for formwork > 300 mm wide, otherwise measure Run (unless narrow width caused by openings), in width stages of 100 mm, i.e. 0 – 100 mm | 100 – 200 mm | 200 – 300 mm.
    6. HKSMM4R - Measure Super for formwork > 300 mm wide, otherwise measure Run.
  • Measurement Approach
    1. Measure all concrete and formwork floor by floor between consecutive floor levels. 
    2. Group vertical rreinforcement bars passing through different floors into the main floor passed.
    3. Measure overall first and make adjustments later.
    4. Deal with the effects on various elements at the same time when adjusting for the junctions of walls, columns, beams and slabs because the dimensions at the junctions are common and can be shared.
    5. Measure as one composite item, sum up the total quantity, then generate component items and quantities from the total quantity, e.g. length first, generating secondary quantities of area and volume.
  • Coding
    1. Code to give suffiicient and self-explanatory information to represent different properties (parameters) of a composite item so that related secondary quantities can be generated from it.
    2. Use code segments to represent different properties and values.
    3. Code segments can be skipped for default properties.

MEASUREMENT OF CONCRETE WALLS

  • Legend

  • SMM Rules
    1. HKSMM4 and HKSMM4R Section VII (a) M.16 says, "Concrete walls are measured between columns or projections and up to the soffits of beams and slabs."
    2. HKSMM4 and HKSMM4R Section VII (a) M.12 says, "The measurement of suspended slabs is taken across columns and beams, except where the columns or beams are of a different mix." It does not mention walls.
    3. HKSMM4 and HKSMM4R Section VII (d) M.1 says, "Except where otherwise stated, formwork is measured to concrete surfaces of the finished structure which require support during casting."
    4. Wall concrete and formwork should therefore be measured as shown in Fig 1 to Fig 5 below.
    5. Formwork at junctions of walls with columns, beams and slabs (A below) is DEDUCTED because there is no formwork there.
    6. Wall concrete and formwork at junctions with beams crossing over the walls (B below) are DEDUCTED because there is no exemption rule.

  • Customary Deviations from SMM Rules for structural walls
  • Reasons for deviations
    1. In the case of structural walls, the beam in Fig 2 becomes a lintol beam, the beam in Fig 4 abuts the wall instead of crossing over the wall, and the columns become attached columns.
    2. Concrete in structural walls, attached columns and lintol beams are usually cast at the same time after the erection of the formwork as a whole.
    3. The problem with the above measurement is that the formwork at C above is measured as column or beam or slab formwork though it is on the same plane as the wall formwork and more like a wall formwork.
    4. Only the formwork at D above is more like a column formwork than a wall formwork.
    5. The combinations of the formwork at C and D to the four columns in Fig 1 are different.
    6. The rates for formwork for these different combinations should in theory not be the same.
    7. It should be more reasonable to design the formwork to the structural walls and attached columns if formed and cast at the same time as a complete system and estimate the cost and rate for the system as a whole.
    8. Post contract changes to the proportions of structural walls and attached columns are less frequent.
  • Deviations
    1. Wall concrete and formwork are therefore measured as shown in Fig 6 to Fig 10 below.
    2. Attached column and lintol beam concrete is grouped into structural wall concrete because they are of the same concrete grade cast at the same time.
    3. Structural wall concrete of a higher grade than slab concrete is measured through slab, otherwise to soffit of slab, following the principle of column and slab junctions.
    4. Formwork at junctions of walls with columns, beams and slabs (A below) is DEDUCTED because there is no formwork there.
    5. The abutting beam concrete (B below) stops at the near face of the structural wall. Following the principle of no deduction of column formwork at junctions with beams, wall formwork at this junction is NOT deducted.
    6. Formwork to attached columns (C and D) is measured as wall formwork.
    7. Formwork to sides of lintol beams and edges of slabs on the same plane as wall formwork (C below) is measured as wall formwork to the extent of the width of wall formwork.
    8. Formwork to sides and sofifits of projecting portions of lintol beams is measured separately and so described.
    9. When billing by elements instead of by materials, reinforcement in structural walls, attached columns and lintol beams is grouped together because they are often integrated making it difficult to separate them under the headings of "structural walls", "columns" and "beams".

  • Customary Deviations from SMM Rules for non-structural walls
  • Reasons for deviations
    1. Non-structural concrete walls can be cast when casting the columns, beams and slabs or cast afterwards.
    2. Measuring non-structural concrete walls as an integral part of the structure like measuring structural concrete walls with due deductions of formwork areas and grouping of formwork on the same plane would be a very time consuming exercise.
    3. The designed positions and choices of non-structural concrete walls can easily be changed, causing a repeat of the time consuming exercise.
  • Deviations
    1. For measurement purposes, non-structural concrete walls are deemed to be cast after casting the columns, beams and slabs.
    2. Formwork to columns, beams and slabs at junctions with walls (A below) is NOT deducted.
    3. Wall concrete and formwork at junctions with beams crossing over (B below) are DEDUCTED.
    4. Formwork to columns, beams and slabs on the same plane as wall formwork (C above) is NOT measured as the wall formwork.

STRUCTURAL WALLS

  • Rules
    1. Refer to those shown on structural framing plans.
    2. Include attached columns and lintol beams whose cross-sections project from structural walls. (#) 
    3. Include kickers.
    4. Include columns whose width > 4 x thickness.
    5. Measure the height of concrete and formwork from the base level of a wall to:
      1. top of slab above (i.e. wall measured through slab); or
      2. soffit of transfer structure (slab or beam) above; or
      3. open top of wall.
    6. Exclude concrete at junctions with slabs of same concrete grade (i.e. slab measured across wall).
    7. Exclude formwork intersected by slabs.
    8. Do not exclude formwork intersected by beam ends.
  • Measurement Approach
    1. Measure wall by overall area along the centre line first
    2. Multiply the area by thickness to get concrete volume.
    3. Multiply the area by 2 to get formwork area.
    4. Deduct formwork intersected by slabs.
    5. Adjust for other items.
  • Coding example: WA-40/20-250-S2-F2 = A m2
    1. meaning structural wall : Grade 40/20 : 250 mm thick : sloping on two faces : F2 formwork = A m2.
    2. generating:
      • Reinforced concrete Grade 40/20 in: wall; 250 mm thick = A x 0.25 m3.
      • F2 formwork to: side of wall; sloping = A x 2 m2.
    3. "40/20W" can be used to mean watertight
    4. "S2-F2" can be omitted for default cases
    5. "S1" can be used to mean sloping on one face only.

Concrete;

  • normal | watertight | watertight with additive stated;
  • plain | plain vibrated | reinforced (deemed vibrated);
  • grade stated;

in:

  • Wall | Hangar wall:
    • normal | casing to structural steel work;
    • thickness stated
      • Cube

Formwork;

  • normal | to produce a formed finish, finish stated;
  • normal | left-in | permanent, kind and quality of materials and propping requirements stated;

to:

  • Side of wall (include side of attached column):
    • vertical | sloping | curved | curved in more than 1 direction, details stated;
    • normal | on one face of wall only, wall thickness and background to other face stated
      • Sup
  • Side and soffit of lintol beam projection:
    • beam itself horizontal | sloping (i.e. on any face) | curved (i.e. on any face) | curved and sloping;
    • normal | on one face of wall only, wall thickness and background to other face stated
      • Sup
  • End of wall and end of lintol beam:
    • vertical | sloping | curved | curved in more than 1 direction, details stated
      • Sup
  • Sloping top of wall exceeding 15° (if no adjoining slab) | Jambs and soffit of wall opening > 1.00 m2:
    • straight | curved | curved in more than 1 direction, details stated
      • Sup
  • Boxing for wall opening size 0.025 - 0.10 m2 | 0.10 - 1.00 m2 in stages of 0.10 m2 (HKSMM4) :
  • Boxing for wall opening size 0.50 - 1.00 m2 in stages of 0.10 m2 (HKSMM4R) :
    • wall thickness (stated)
      • Nr

COLUMNS

  • Rules
    1. Refer to isolated columns not attached to structural walls.
    2. Include kickers.
    3. Exclude columns whose width > 4 x thickness.
    4. Measure the height of concrete and formwork from the base level of a column to:
      1. top of slab above (i.e. column measured through slab); or
      2. soffit of transfer structure (slab or beam) above; or
      3. open top of column.
    5. Exclude concrete at junctions with slabs of same concrete grade (i.e. slab measured across column).
    6. Exclude formwork intersected by slabs
    7. Do not exclude formwork intersected by beam ends.
  • Measurement Approach
    1. Measure overall column length of each type first.
    2. Multiply the length by the cross-sectional size to get the concrete volume
    3. Multiply the length by the girth to get the formwork area.
    4. Deduct concrete at junctions with slabs of same concrete grade (i.e. slab measured across column).
    5. Deduct formwork intersected by slabs.
    6. Adjust for other items.
  • Coding example: e.g. CL-40/20-400x600-F2 = L m2
    1. meaning column : RC Grade 40/20 : 400 x 600 mm : F2 formwork = L m2
    2. generating:
      • Reinforced concrete Grade 40/20 in: column = L x 0.40 x 0.60 m3.
      • F2 formwork to: side of column = L x (0.40 + 0.60) x 2 m2.
    3. "F2" can be omitted for default cases

Concrete;

  • normal | watertight | watertight with additive stated;
  • plain | plain vibrated | reinforced (deemed vibrated);
  • grade (stated);

in:

  • Column:
    • normal | casing to structural steel work (# special rules to be stated for voids of large hollow sections)
      • Cube

Formwork;

  • normal | to produce a formed finish, finish stated;
  • normal | left-in | permanent, kind and quality of materials and propping requirements stated;

to:

  • Side of column:
    • vertical | sloping | curved, radius stated | curved in more than 1 direction, details stated
      • Sup
  • Sloping top of column exceeding 15° (if no adjoining slab or beam):
    • straight | curved | curved in more than 1 direction, details stated
      • Sup

BEAMS

  • Rules
    1. Refer to those suspended.
    2. Exclude lintol beams to structural walls.
    3. Measure lengths of beam concrete or formwork up to near faces of supporting structural concrete members or cantilevered ends.
    4. Measure depths of upstand beam concrete or formwork below the soffits of slabs.
    5. Measure heights of upstand beam concrete or formwork above the tops of slabs.
    6. Measure full depths for beam concrete only if beam concrete is of higher concrete grade than slab concrete.
    7. Do not deduct formwork intersected by secondary beam ends.
  • Measurement Approach
    1. Measure overall beam length of each type first.
    2. Multiply length by cross-sectional size to get concrete volume.
    3. Multiply length by girth of two sides and soffit to get formwork area.
    4. Deduct slab soffit formwork intersected by beam.
    5. Adjust for other items.
  • Coding example: BM-30/20-300x600-120-S-F2 = L m
    1. meaning Beam - RC Grade 30/20 - 300 x 600 mm designed size - 120 mm slab - sloping - F2 formwork = L m.
    2. generating:
      • Reinforced concrete Grade 30/20 in: beam; sloping = L x 0.30 x (0.60 – 0.12) m3.
      • F2 formwork to: sides and soffit of beam; sloping = L x (0.30 + (0.60 – 0.12) x 2) m2.
      • Beam soffit area for deduction from slab soffit, provided soffit height within the same stage = L x 0.30 m2.
    3. “-S-F2" can be omitted for default cases.
    4. "UB-30/20-300x600-120/200-S" can be used to mean upstand beam in 120 mm slab with 200 mm upstand.

Concrete;

  • normal | watertight | watertight with additive stated;
  • plain | plain vibrated | reinforced (deemed vibrated);
  • grade stated;

in:

  • Beam (i.e. downstand or upstand portion)|Isolated beam (i.e. without slab):
    • normal | casing to structural steel work (# special rules to be stated for voids of large hollow sections);
    • horizontal | top sloping ≤ 15° | top sloping > 15°
      • Cube
  • Extra for shoulder of higher grade (stated) at junction with walls and columns (HKSMM4 only. Not measured if HKSMM4R.)
    • Cube

Formwork;

  • normal | to produce a formed finish, finish stated;
  • normal | left-in | permanent, kind and quality of materials and propping requirements stated;

to:

  • Sides and soffit of beam (i.e. downstand portion, include slab edge or step in slab soffit flush with beam side) | Sides and soffit of isolated beam:
    • beam itself horizontal | sloping (i.e. on any face) | curved (i.e. on any face) | curved and sloping;
    • beam depth 0 – 750 mm below soffit of slab | > 750 mm below soffit of slab (HKSMM4 only);
    • beam depth 0 – 1.00 m below soffit of slab | > 1.00 m below soffit of slab (HKSMM4R);
    • soffit height 0 – 3.50 m above support below | > 3.50 m above support below, in stages of 1.50 m | special, e.g. above lift shaft, details stated
      • Sup
  • Sides of upstand beam (include slab edge or step in slab top flush with beam without downstand portion):
    • beam itself horizontal | sloping (i.e. on any face) | curved (i.e. on any face) | curved and sloping
      • Sup
  • End of beam (include slab edge) |Sloping top of beam exceeding 15° (if no adjoining slab):
    • straight | curved | curved in more than 1 direction, details stated
      • Sup

SLABS

  • Rules
    1. Refer to those suspended.
    2. Include landings at floor levels.
    3. Measure slab concrete across structural walls, columns and beams of lower or same concrete grade, otherwise measure between structural walls, columns and beams.
    4. Deduct formwork intersected by structural walls, columns and beams.
  • Measurement Approach
    1. Measure each type of slab areas across structural walls, columns and beams first.
    2. Covert to concrete volume by multiplying the areas by respective slab thicknesses.
    3. Adopt the slab areas as the soffit formwork areas.
    4. Deduct concrete at junctions with structural walls or columns of higher concrete grade (preferably when measuring structural walls, columns and beams).
    5. Deduct formwork intersected by structural walls, columns and beams (preferably when measuring structural walls, columns and beams).
    6. Adjust for other items.
  • Coding example: SL-30/20-120-S-F2-H5.0 = A m2
    1. meaning Slab - R C Grade 30/20 - 120 mm thick - top sloping - F2 formwork - soffit height 3.50 - 5.00 m = A m2.
    2. generating:
      • Reinforced concrete Grade 30/20 in: slab; 120 mm thick; top sloping > 15° = A x 0.12 m3.
      • F2 formwork to: soffit of slab; 0 - 200 mm thick; sloping; soffit height 3.50 - 5.00 m = A x 2 m2.

Concrete;

  • normal | watertight | watertight with additive stated;
  • plain | plain vibrated | reinforced (deemed vibrated);
  • grade (stated);

in:

  • Slab | coffered and troughed slab (exclude volume occupied by moulds, measure margin >= 500 mm wide as slab):
    • thickness of slab stated | overall thickness of coffer and trough slab stated;
    • horizontal | top sloping ≤ 15° | top sloping > 15°
      • Cube
  • Extra for shoulder of higher grade (stated) at junction with walls and columns
    • Cube

Formwork;

  • normal | to produce a formed finish, finish stated | metal deck;
  • normal | left-in | permanent, kind and quality of materials and propping requirements stated;

to:

  • Soffit of slab:
    • slab thickness 0 – 200 mm | > 200 mm in stages of 100 mm;
    • horizontal | sloping | curved | curved in more than 1 direction, details stated;
    • soffit height 0 – 3.50 m above support below | > 3.50 m above support below, in stages of 1.50 m | special, e.g. above lift shaft, details stated
      • Sup
  • Soffit of coffered and troughed slab (plane area measured):
    • overall thickness of coffer and trough slab stated, sizes of moulds and profile, centres of moulds stated;
    • horizontal | sloping | curved | curved in more than 1 direction, details stated;
    • soffit height 0 – 3.50 m above support below | > 3.50 m above support below, in stages of 1.50 m | special, e.g. above lift shaft, details stated
      • Sup
  • Sloping top of slab exceeding 15°:
    • straight | curved | curved in more than 1 direction, details stated
      • Sup
  • Edge of slab | Step in top of slab | Step in soffit of slab (i.e. those not flush with side of beam):
    • straight | curved | curved in more than 1 direction, details stated
      • Sup
  • Boxing for slab opening size 0.025 - 0.10 m2 | 0.10 - 1.00 m2 in stages of 0.10 m2 (HKSMM4) :
  • Boxing for slab opening size 0.50 - 1.00 m2 in stages of 0.10 m2 (HKSMM4R) :
    • slab thickness (stated)
      • Nr

NON-STRUCTURAL WALLS (EXTERNAL WALLS AND INTERNAL WALLS KEPT SEPARATE)

  • Rules
    1. Refer to those shown on architectural plans but not on structural framing plans.
    2. Include kickers.
    3. Measure non-structural walls and features as if structural walls, columns and beams have been cast.
    4. Measure the concrete volume or formwork area bounded by slabs, beams, structural walls and columns.
    5. Exclude concrete volume or formwork area intersected by beams.
    6. Do not deduct formwork to slabs, beams, structural walls and columns intersected by non-structural walls as if the structural members are cast before casting the non-structural members. (#)
    7. Exclude formwork intersected by non-structural walls.
  • Measurement Approach
    1. Measure wall area along the centre line of each type first.
    2. Deduct from area junctions with beams.
    3. Multiply the area by thickness to get concrete volume.
    4. Multiply the area by 2 to get formwork area.
    5. Deduct formwork at T-junctions of non-structural walls.
    6. Adjust for other items.
  • Coding example: EW-20/20-120-S2-F2 = A m2
    1. meaning External wall - RC Grade 20/20 - 120 mm thick - sloping - F2 formwork = A m2.
    2. generating:
      • Reinforced concrete Grade 20/20 in: wall; 120 mm thick = A x 0.12 m3.
      • F2 formwork to: side of wall; sloping = A x 2 m2.
    3. Use "IW" for internal walls. 
    4. "20/20W" can be used to mean watertight.
    5. "-S2-F2" can be omitted for default cases.
    6. "-S1" can be used to mean sloping on one face only.

Concrete;

  • normal | watertight | watertight with additive stated;
  • plain | plain vibrated | reinforced (deemed vibrated);
  • grade stated;

in:

  • Wall | Hangar wall:
    • normal;
    • thickness stated
      • Cube

Formwork;

  • normal | to produce a formed finish, finish stated;
  • normal | left-in | permanent, kind and quality of materials and propping requirements stated;

to:

  • Side of wall:
    • vertical | sloping | curved | curved in more than 1 direction, details stated;
    • normal | on one face of wall only, wall thickness and background to other face stated
      • Sup
  • End of wall:
    • vertical | sloping | curved | curved in more than 1 direction, details stated
      • Sup
  • Sloping top of wall exceeding 15° (if no adjoining slab) | Jambs and soffit of wall opening > 1.00 m2:
    • straight | curved | curved in more than 1 direction, details stated
      • Sup
  • Boxing for wall opening size 0.025 - 0.10 m2 | 0.10 - 1.00 m2 in stages of 0.10 m2 (HKSMM4) :
  • Boxing for wall opening size 0.50 - 1.00 m2 in stages of 0.10 m2 (HKSMM4R) :
    • wall thickness (stated)
      • Nr

End of Page

After Billing

After Billing KCTang

Go to End

Note

24/3/2020: Separate pages on Editing, Finalising, Pre-tender Estimate and Tender Addendum merged into here. Clearing Drawings, Specification and Preambles, and Bulk checking added.

26/12/2014: Moved from wiki.

Editing by senior 编辑

  1. After a draft BQ has been prepared by the taking-off team, the draft BQ should be edited by the senior and experienced Surveyor who may be the team leader or a more senior Surveyor.
    排序计算好的汇总卡交由组长或项目主管编辑修改
  2. The editing is to ensure sufficiency of descriptions, consistency in style and reasonableness in classification, logic in sequence, and appropriateness in itemization and units.

Ensuring appropriate P.C. rates

  • The team leader or the editor should verify that the P.C. rates used are appropriate.

Corrections

  • After editing, corrections of the draft BQ should be made, and the corrected draft re-submitted for editing until satisfaction.

Typing 打印

  1. Traditionally, the draft BQ described up to this point is in written draft form, the draft BQ should then be sent to the typists for typing. However, with the use of Excel or quantity take-off software, the draft BQ nowadays are usually typed by the taker-off when they take-off.
    编辑齐理好的汇总卡交往打印
  2. The type setting must follow a specified format.
    打印应按一定的格式排版

BQ production software

  • Apart from spreadsheet software, there is a number of BQ production software based on manual or CAD or BIM entry which can integrate the measurement and billing processes. However, the processes described for editing and thereafter are still indispensable.

Reading over 校对

  1. Typed BQ or corrected BQ should be proof-read against the written draft or previously marked typed draft.
    打字完毕要校对
  2. The old drafts should be lined through to indicate that they have been corrected and proof-read.
    汇总卡在校对时每卡垂直画线以资确认已打印

Clearing Drawings, Specification and Preambles

  1. All the team members should sit together to check the Drawings, Specification and Preambles to see whether there are overlaps or omissions.
  2. General discussions should be conducted to verify the mutual scope of measurement.
  3. Drawings, Specification and Preambles should be checked for complete colouring, lining through and looping to ensure no missing items.
  4. The set of BQ Drawings should be identified. Members should initial on the set of BQ Drawings to signify that they have measured what they should have measured.
  5. A list should be kept of errors found and follow-up actions should be done to rectify.
  6. The list of BQ Drawings so identified should be used to compile the Schedule of Tender Drawings.

Bulk-checking

  1. The quantities measured should be checked for serious errors. However, it would be impracticable to double check every measurement dimension. Furthermore, errors can arise in an unexpected manner in any stages of BQ production, e.g.:
    • During taking-off
    • During squaring
    • During transferring
    • During typing.
  2. Instead of checking the dimension sheets or taking-off schedules, it is better to check the quantities as stated in the typed draft BQ using independent but approximate methods.
  3. Quantities measured by a team member should be bulk-checked by another team member.
  4. A photocopy of the typed draft BQ should be used for bulk-checking.
  5. There are two modes of bulk-checking:
    • Carrying out relative check by ratios between related items
    • Carrying out absolute check by approximate measurement.
  6. If an item is correct by absolute check, then other related items which pass relative check based on the absolutely checked item can reasonably be believed to be correct.
  7. In case of discrepancies between the draft BQ quantities and the bulk-check quantities, the first step is for the bulk-checker and the Taker-off to sit together to discuss their mutual scope of measurement and check, their approaches and assumptions to find out reasons for the discrepancies.
  8. If the explanation is not satisfactory, further check into the quantities will be required. The draft BQ quantities and the bulk-check quantities can be broken down into smaller portions, e.g. floor by floor, for identification of the possible location and source of discrepancies. If, say, a particular floor is found to create the discrepancies, only that floor will be checked further.
  9. Apart from checking the quantities, the bulk-checkers should also check to ensure the proper descriptions and appropriate units are being used.

Timesing

  1. The first and the easiest and yet the most important check is to check the timesing.
  2. Timesing of a typical floor into the required number of floors and other similar timesing which have major multiplying effects should be carefully checked. The dimension sheets and taking-off schedules may be inspected for the timesing.
  3. Such check can usually avoid very serious errors.

Bulk-check formulae for concrete works, plastering, painting and roofing

  1. To carry out relative check, the relationship between different parts of the Works should be thought out and used for counter-check.
  2. The following are some formulae or equations for checking:
    • Total covered floor area
      > total concrete slab area
      > total floor finishes etc.
    • Total covered floor area
      ≈ Total concrete slab area + voids + lift shafts + staircases
    • Base area of non-structural concrete walls and brickwalls
      ≈ (Concrete cube + brick area x thickness + window area x thickness of wall) ¸ general storey height
    • Total concrete slab area
      ≈ Total floor finishes area + base area of non-structural concrete walls and brickwalls
    • Total beam and slab formwork area > total ceiling finishes
    • Total ground area = total roofing area + base area of parapets
    • Total formwork area + 2 x brickwork (except those without finishes)
      ≈ total ceiling finishes + total wall finishes + total skirting area + internal sides of lift shafts + wall and beam sides above false ceilings
    • Formwork to sloping soffit of staircase = finishes to sloping ceiling
    • Length of nosing = length of risers (measure length of nosing on plan if nosing is not provided to all staircases)
    • Formwork to riser = finishes to riser
    • Plan area of treads = finishes to tread + nosing area
    • Tile = screed area
    • Plaster = paint area
    • Etc.
  3. Apart from its basic purpose, bulk-checking is also a useful process for training Surveyors to appreciate the relationship between different parts of the Works. Such appreciation would be useful for cost estimating.

Floor by floor analysis

  • It would be useful to breakdown the quantities floor by floor so see whether there is relative consistency between the floor by floor quantities.

Bulk-checking concrete works

  1. A master schedule should be prepared to show the quantities of concrete, formwork and reinforcement broken down into elements of columns, walls, beams, slabs, etc. on a floor by floor basis.
  2. Ratios in the following forms should be calculated:
    • concrete cube per floor area
    • formwork area per floor area
    • reinforcement weight per floor area
    • formwork area per concrete cube
    • reinforcement weight per concrete cube
    • etc.
  3. The ratios should be checked for consistency and reasonableness of variances between different elements and floors.
  4. It would not be practicable to check all reinforcement measurement in detail. Reinforcement is usually checked by:
    • taking-off samples of concrete elements to obtain steel ratios to check against the steel ratios in the master schedule
    • comparing with past similar projects to check the reasonableness of the steel ratios.

Comparing with estimate

  • The bulk quantities in the draft BQ can be compared with the quantities in Preliminary Cost Estimate to see whether there are major deviations.

Adjustments

  1. Adjustments should also be made to complete measurement of missing items found when clearing Drawings, Specification and Preambles.
  2. Corrections should be made to rectify errors found in bulk-checking.
  3. Any changes to the draft BQ should be made using different coloured pencils so that the changes can be apparent.
  4. If changes are made directly on computer, either the results of the changes should be marked on the typed draft BQ used for bulk-checking or identifications should be made on the re-printed draft BQ.
  5. Any changes to the draft BQ should be seen by the bulk-checkers.
  6. If the bulk-checkers are satisfied with the accuracy of the BQ descriptions, units and quantities, they should initial against the quantities to signify acceptance.
  7. When all items have been initialled by the bulk-checkers, the bulk-checking process is finished.

Final editing

  1. After making corrections and having them bulk-checked as well, the marked typed draft or re-printed draft with changes highlighted should be submitted to the editor again for final editing.
  2. If further changes are required, the preceding changes should be repeated.

Final typing corrections

  • Finally edited and corrected written drafts can be submitted to typing corrections and reading over

Reading quantities

  1. For manual measurement requiring transfer of quantities from bundles of dimension sheets to the written draft BQ, the quantities as typed on the final typed BQ should be compared with the quantities on the dimension sheets to ensure that all measured quantities are actually reflected in the final typed BQ. There may be chances that additional measurements have been made after the original written draft BQ, but they are forgotten to be reflected in the final draft and they have escaped the attention of bulk-checkers.
  2. To avoid fatigue, usually two persons are involved in reading quantities, with one reading out the quantities on one document and the other verifying the quantities on the other document.
  3. The units should also be read out as well to ensure that the correct units are typed.
  4. This process can be skipped if QTO software is used.

Contents sheet and thickness of documents

  1. Systematic page numbering should be adopted. Page numbers of various sections of the Tender Documents should be prefixed for easy identification purposes, for example, "PL" for Specification Preliminaries and "TS" for Technical Specification.
  2. The contents page should be compiled. Too thick a document may require to be split into two or more volumes and the covers should have volume number.

Photocopying 复印

  • After final correction, the typed BQ can be submitted to photocopying.
    最后修改完成唱读无误后,可复印工程量清单

Page checking 检查页数

  1. Checking should be done after photocopying to ensure no duplicate, missing, indistinct or defaced pages before binding.
    ​复印后要检查复印有没有问题才可以钉装:多、漏、不清、弄坏
  2. Random check can be done for highest quality service, otherwise full check should be done.
    高质数的复印可抽样检查,否则应全检
  3. Out-sourced printing companies may not check every page.
  4. In any case, the team leader should carry out random check on at least one sample.

Binding 钉装

  • After page checking, the Tender Documents can be bound and dispatched to the Architects who would issue invitation letters to Tenderers to collect the Tender Documents for tendering.

Pre-tender Estimate

  1. As soon as the final BQ is ready and even before its dispatch to Tenderers, it would be a good practice and it may be a condition of service as well that the final BQ is priced to arrive at the expected tender price. The in-house priced BQ is called "Pre-tender Estimate" which is useful for:

    • early identification of any major deviation from the previous Preliminary Cost Estimate
    • comparison with prices returned by Tenderers.
  2. If major deviation between the Pre-tender Estimate and the previous Preliminary Cost Estimate is found, the reason should be identified. Care should be exercised to see whether it is due to errors in the BQ or errors in the previous Preliminary Cost Estimate, or due to design changes introduced after the previous Preliminary Cost Estimate. Errors in the BQ should be immediately corrected. Early notice to the Client should be made for major and true deviations between the Preliminary Cost Estimate and the Pre-tender Estimate.

Tender Addendum 修改通知

  1. It is very usual that tender addenda are required after dispatch of Tender Documents for tendering because of the need:
    • to rectify errors found
    • to complete outstanding measurement because of previous lack of information
    • to update for lately revised Drawings or Specification.
  2. All the processes for producing the original BQ should be followed for making tender addenda.
  3. Amended or additional pages should have identifications such as:
    • Using an asterisk "*" against the right hand side of the page number
    • Using two or more asterisks or alternative symbols to signify the second or subsequent addenda
    • Using the words "Tender Addendum No. X" at the top or bottom of the pages
    • Using symbol against the left or right hand side or using other forms of highlighting to indicate amended or added BQ items.
  4. Some people use page number designated something like 3.2/1+1 or 3.2/1A to denote an additional page.

 

End of Page

Tendering 招投標

Tendering 招投標 KCTang

Tender Invitation 招标

Tender Invitation 招标 KCTang

Go to End

Note

20/2/2023: Revised.

25/3/2020: Collecting Tender Documents, tender deposit and tender bond updated.

24/12/2014: Moved from wiki.

Intro

Quantity Surveyors play a leading role in moving forward the tender invitation, tender analysis and contract award stages to ensure fair competition on a common basis.

(added, 20/2/2023)

Selection of tenderers 投标者的选择

  1. Open tendering:
    公开招标
    • Invitation through newspaper advertising
    • Invitation through gazette notice with restrictions to approved list of tenderers
    • Invitation through web portal
    • Expression of interest and pre-qualification of tenderers required if tenderers are not invited from an approved list.
  2. Selective tendering:
    选择性邀请:
    • From an approved list
    • Suggested by the Project Team
    • Pre-qualification of tenderers required if tenderers are not familiar to the Project Team or the nature of the Works is special to the criteria for the approved list
    • Expression of interest required to see whether the tenderers are willing and able to tender
    • Invitation by letter.
  3. Negotiation with a single tenderer:
    单一议标:
    • Based on past project relationship and prices.
  4. Avoidance of collusion.
  5. Balance between transparency and confidentiality.

Expression of interest and pre-qualification of tenderers 投标意向及资格预审

  1. Purposes:
    • Permit only those qualified to tender
    • Avoid incompetent tenderers submitting lowest tenders.
  2. Possible contents of a letter requesting for expression of interest:
    • Information to prospective tenderers:
      • Scope of the Project
      • Scope of the Works to be tendered for
      • Particulars of the Client and Employer for the project
      • Particulars of Architect, Engineers, AP, RSE, Quantity Surveyor
      • Type of contract:
        • Lump sum or remeasurement
        • With or without Bills of Quantities, or with standard schedule of rates
        • With or without fluctuation clause
      • Payment terms
      • Expected date for issuance of tender documents
      • Tendering period
      • Construction programme
    • General company information required to be submitted:
      • Descriptions on past and current experience in similar works, together with a job reference list
      • Current and anticipated work load for the coming 12 months
      • Experience in working on restricted areas similar to the proposed site
      • Business registration certificate
      • Certificate of incorporation, if a company
      • Contractor’s registration certificates
      • Audited accounts for the last <> years (strict confidence to be observed by the Client and the Consultants)
      • Statement of all convictions or no convictions under the Immigration Ordinance (Cap. 115) for last <> years
      • Statement of all convictions or no convictions under the Factories and Industrial Undertakings Ordinance (Cap. 59) for last <> years
      • Statement of all convictions or no convictions under the Employment Ordinance (Cap. 57) for last <> years
      • Statement of involvement in arbitration or litigation in the last <> years or foreseeable in the next <> months.
  3. Project specific information required to be submitted:
    • CV of key professional or technical staff which are capable of undertaking the Works and may be assigned to the Works
    • Details of the fabrication yards which may be used for the Works
    • Financial capability to adopt the payment terms mentioned above
    • Estimation of the delivery and installation periods required for the Works
    • If an alternative tender based on Contractor’s design is considered:
      • Descriptions of past experience and capability in undertaking the design work
      • Names of the prospective designers
      • Preferred tendering period
    • Time and mode of submission
    • Client is not bound to invite any contractors who have expressed interest to tender
    • Contact person in case of queries.

Selection criteria 预审准则

  1. Technical and financial capability of the company.
    公司的实力及财政状况
  2. Technical capability of the proposed project staff.
    拟用项目人员的实力
  3. Past experience.
    工程履历
  4. Track records.
    往绩
  5. Safety records.
    安全纪录
  6. Non-compliance records.
    违规纪录
  7. Current workload.
    现时工作量
  8. Claims history (not apparent from the pre-qualification submissions).
    索赔纪录
  9. Off-site manufacture (e.g., MiC):
    • Similar criteria for manufacturers and their designers
    • Factory quality inspection, testing and certificates
    • Delivery and transportation schedule and logistics.
  10. Scoring by:
    • Qualitative judgment
    • Marking scheme.
  11. Scoring scheme disclosed or not disclosed to tenderers.

(revised, 20/2/2023)

Invitation letter 邀请函

  1. Confidential list of tenderers.
  2. Invitation letter to be marked "CONFIDENTIAL"
  3. Description of the Works.
  4. Documents and drawings issued.
  5. Place and time for collection of documents and drawings.
  6. Arrangement for tender deposit and tender bond.
  7. Arrangement for tender briefing and site walk.
  8. Time and mode of submission.
  9. Tender submissions to be in sealed envelope marked "CONFIDENTIAL".
  10. Specified tender label or envelope for submission.
  11. Contact person in case of queries.
  12. (Terms and conditions intended to form part of the Contract should be given in the Tender Documents rather than in the Invitation Letter.)

Tender Documents issued

  1. Tender Booklet.
  2. One set of drawings as listed or referred to in the Schedule of Drawings.
  3. One duplicate copy of the Tender Booklet for retention by the Tenderer (really essential?).
  4. One duplicate copy of the Form of Tender (really essential?).
  5. Electronic documents (precedence against hardcopies).

Drawings

  1. Tender Drawings comprising:
    • Drawings actually issued to tenderers
    • Drawings available for inspection
    • Standard Drawings referred to in the Specification or other Tender Drawings.
  2. Theoretically, BQ (Taking-off) Drawings = Tender Drawings = Contract Drawings.
  3. How to manage these drawings to avoid discrepancies.
  4. Generally, preliminary design drawings submitted by the tenderers to be for reference only.

Collecting Tender Documents 领取招标文件

  • If a tender invitation is issued on Friday, whether the office will be open on Saturday should be stated to avoid encountering office closure.

Tender deposit 投标工本押金

  1. Usually required by incorporated owners for renovation of buildings to compensate the printing costs of Tender Documents (including Drawings) collected by tenderers invited through open tendering with a slight effect of deterring tenderers not genuine to tender.
  2. Payable upon collection of Tender Documents.
  3. Usually refunded to unsuccessful tenderers who have submitted tenderers.
  4. Only the successful tenderer's tender deposit will not be refunded.

Tender bond 投标担保书

  1. Intended to be submitted with the tender to guarantee that the tenderer will abide by the tender without withdrawal, otherwise the tender bond will be forfeited.
  2. Not usually required in Hong Kong.

Inspection of Tender Documents 检查招标文件

  1. It may be possible (like in the old days) not to issue the full set of Tender Drawings to the tenderers. They would be required to come to the Architect's or the Quantity Surveyor's office to inspect the Tender Drawings by prior appointment.
  2. Tender Drawings nowadays are usually in electronic form and can therefore be given to the tenderers in full.

Inspection of ground investigation reports

  1. It is also possible and more likely that ground investigation reports are not given to the tenderers. They would be required to come to the Architect's or the Quantity Surveyor's office to inspect the reports by prior appointment.
  2. Although ground investigation reports are usually made available to the tenderers for reference only with no admission of applicability, such reports are important references to the tenderers. It is available to give to the tenderers especially when the tenderers are required to provide foundation design proposals.

Tender briefing and site walk 交底会及现场踏察

  1. Joint meeting or separate meeting to be decided.
  2. Confidentiality, convenience and trust to be ensured.
  3. Introduction to tenderers.
  4. Tenderers to raise queries and problems.

Answering tender queries 提问答疑处理

  1. When answering individual tenderer's tender queries, re-phrase into common answers to all tenderers so that all are tendering on the same basis.
  2. Some tender queries may not be well written. Re-phrasing would be preferred.
  3. Issue as Tender Clarification Letters or Tender Addenda.

Issuing Tender Addenda 修改通知

  1. Revisions may be required after issuing the Tender Documents because:
    出标后可能需要修改:
    • The Tender Drawings or Specification has been changed
      图纸或规范改动了
    • The Bills of Quantities have not really been completed yet
      清单尚未计完
    • Errors have been discovered.
      发现有错
  2. Latest time for issuing Tender Addenda.
  3. Revised or additional pages to be marked and labelled as follows: 
    修改或增加页应予以标示:
    • Marking with "*" against the page number to indicate first revision, with "**" to indicate second revision
      页码旁加"*"表示第一次,"**"表示第二次
    • Labelling at the page header or footer with "Tender Addendum No. 1".
      ​在页首或页尾加 "投标修改通知1" 的字样
  4. Highlighting of changes.
  5. Different dates and filenames on different pages to be avoided for documents.
  6. Date stamping required for Tender Drawings which do not usually have a corresponding revision version number.
  7. Covering letter:
    • Letter to be marked "CONFIDENTIAL"
    • Amended or additional documents and drawings issued
    • Description of the changes and instructions to make the changes (either in the letter or in an appendix)
      • Pages or sheets to be replaced, added or deleted
      • Clarification statements
    • Place and time for collection of documents and drawings
    • Any change to the tender return deadline
    • Other terms and conditions remain unchanged
    • Contact person in case of queries
    • Acknowledgement of receipt by couriers
    • Confirmation of incorporation of tender addenda by tenderers.

End of Page

Tender Pricing 投标计价

Tender Pricing 投标计价 KCTang

Go to End

Note

20/2/2023: Expanded.

Rates and prices

See "Rates and Prices" for basic understanding.

Reading materials

  1. Read the chapter on Pricing and Tendering of “Quantity Surveyor’s Pocket Book Second Edition” authored by Duncan Cartlidge, which gives examples of how to build up preliminaries prices and unit rates for measured works for tendering.
  2. Preview the “Code of Estimating Practice Seventh Edition” published by the Chartered Institute of Building at  https://books.google.com.hk/books?id=gBJDjH5S61wC&printsec=frontcover&source=gbs_ge_summary_r&cad=0#v=onepage&q&f=false. This book explains what a tenderer should consider at the time of tendering. Site inspection during tendering to understand all conditions on or around the site which may affect the carrying out of the Works should be carefully and thoroughly done, and the implications allowed for in the tender prices and completion times.

General principles

  1. Both describe the practice in the UK contexts. The wage rates, working rules, tax system, materials and productivity mentioned there may not applicable to Hong Kong, but the methodology and principles can be shared.
  2. Learn the following concepts:
    • Use all-in hourly rates
    • Include on-costs (not directly paid to the workers, plant hirers, suppliers and sub-contractors) on the direct costs
    • Use labour gang rates
    • Include costs of non-productive time (labour and plant) while payment is still needed
    • Distinguish between quantities measurable for payments from those quantities consumed (waste, breakage, theft, loss, shrinkage, bulking, unmeasured laps, minor items, etc.) but not measurable for payments and include the costs of those not measurable in the rates for the quantities measurable
    • Use representative sample size to calculate the total cost before averaging it to unit cost per quantity so that costs not directly proportional to the quantity can be shared by the unit rates.
  3. The volume of ground materials becomes bulkier after excavation and this will require bigger transportation means.
  4. Conversely, bigger volume is required to fill up a space because of compaction and packing.
  5. Concrete and cement mortar shrink after mixing.
  6. The cost impact should be taken into consideration.

Estimating from the first principle

  1. Estimating or building up the unit rates from their constituent costs is called “estimating from the first principle”. This is unlike using a unit rate from other projects.
  2. Such estimate would need a knowledge of the required constituent quantities of the materials, labour and plant in constructing a work item.

Approximate materials, labour and plant constants (based on Quantity Surveyor’s Pocket Book”)

  1. Labour constants are not really constants and do vary depending on the site and weather conditions and work complexity. “Labour contents” is more appropriate.
  2. More decimal places have been given below for the sake of consistency only. It does not mean that the figures are as accurate as to the decimal places given.

Item

Description

Qty

Unit

1

Generally

 

 

1.1

Labour unloading materials

1.0

Hours/tonne

2

Excavation and filling

 

 

 

Bulking

 

 

2.1

Sand/gravel

10%

 

2.2

Clay

25%

 

2.3

Chalk

33%

 

2.4

Rock

50%

 

 

Hand excavation under normal conditions and in medium clay or heavy soil

 

 

2.5

Bulk excavation commencing at reduced levels not exceeding 2m deep [“reduced levels” means the levels after oversite excavation to the undersides of hardcore beds of on-grade concrete slabs]

2.4

Hours/m3

2.6

Ditto over 2m not exceeding 4m deep

2.7

Hours/m3

2.7

Foundation excavation commencing at reduced levels not exceeding 2m deep

4.0

Hours/m3

2.8

Bulk excavation in trenches, commencing at reduced levels not exceeding 2m deep

3.3

Hours/m3

2.9

Filling obtained from excavated materials final thickness exceeding 500mm deep

1.0

Hours/m3

2.10

Retaining excavated material on site in temporary spoil heaps distance not exceeding 50 meters

1.0

Hours/m3

 

Multipliers to the above for excavations other than in medium clay

 

 

2.11

Loose sand

x 0.75

 

2.12

Stiff clay or rock

x 1.50

 

2.13

Soft rock

x 3.00

 

 

Plant productivity

 

 

2.14

0.25m3 bucket excavator

0.2

Hours/m3

3

Hardcore filling

 

 

 

Addition to volume to cover compaction and packing

 

 

3.1

Hardcore using brick, stone, etc.

20%

 

 

Alternatively, weight to buy to give compacted volume

 

 

3.2

Brick ballast

1,800

kg/m3

3.3

Stone ballast (kg to buy to give compacted volume)

2,400

kg/m3

 

Labour

 

 

3.4

Imported filling as bed over 50mm but not exceeding 500mm deep, 350mm finished thickness

1.5

Hours/m3

3.5

Ditto exceeding 500mm deep

1.0

Hours/m3

3.6

Surface treatments compacting filling (SMM7 only)

0.2

Hours/m2

3.7

Surface treatments compacting sloping surfaces (SMM7 only)

0.4

Hours/m2

3.8

Blinding bed, not exceeding 50mm thick, level to falls, cross falls or cambers, 40mm finished thickness

0.5

Hours/m3

 

Plant productivity

 

 

3.9

Medium-sized mechanical shovel spreading and levelling hardcore

15

m3/hour

3.10

Roller consolidating hardcore in 150mm layers

15

m3/hour

4

Concrete

 

 

 

Weight to buy to give volume before shrinkage

 

 

4.1

Cement in bag

1.28

tonnes/m3

4.2

Cement in bulk

1.28-1.44

tonnes/m3

4.3

Sharp sand (fine aggregate)

1.60

tonnes/m3

4.4

Gravel (coarse aggregate)

1.40

tonnes/m3

 

Addition to volume to cover shrinkage

 

 

4.5

Concrete

40%

 

 

Waste

 

 

4.6

Concrete placing

5%

 

 

Labour

 

 

4.7

Labourer hand mixing concrete

4.0

Hours/m3

 

Mechanical mixing, transporting up to 25 meters, placing and compacting, plain in situ concrete

 

 

4.8

Concrete in trench filling

2.0

Hours/m3

4.9

Horizontal work exceeding 300mm thick in structures

1.5

Hours/m3

4.10

Sloping work not exceeding 15 degrees and exceeding 350mm thick in structures

3.0

Hours/m3

 

Mechanical mixing, transporting up to 25 meters, placing and compacting, reinforced in situ concrete, packing around reinforcement and into formwork

 

 

4.11

Concrete in trench filling

4.0

Hours/m3

4.12

Sloping work not exceeding 15 degrees and exceeding 350mm thick in structures

4.5

Hours/m3

4.13

Vertical work exceeding 300mm thick in structures (walls)

6.0

Hours/m3

4.14

Vertical work exceeding 300mm thick in structures (columns)

8.0

Hours/m3

 

Hand loaded concrete mixers, concrete output

 

 

4.15

100 litre mixer

1.2

m3/hour

4.16

150 litre mixer

1.8

m3/hour

4.17

175 litre mixer

2.1

m3/hour

4.18

200 litre mixer

2.4

m3/hour

 

Mechanical feed concrete mixers, concrete output

 

 

4.19

250 litre mixer

4.0

m3/hour

4.20

300 litre mixer

7.2

m3/hour

4.21

400 litre mixer

9.6

m3/hour

4.22

500 litre mixer

12.0

m3/hour

5

Reinforcement

 

 

 

Waste

 

 

5.1

Bar reinforcement – for binding wire and rolling margins

5%

 

5.2

Fabric reinforcement – for waste and laps

12.5-15%

 

 

---

 

 

5.3

Labour unloading reinforcement

4.0

Hours/tonne

 

Labour cutting, bending and fixing reinforcement

 

 

5.4

10mm diameter bars

4.0

Hours/50kg

5.5

10-16mm bars

3.0

Hours/50kg

5.6

over 16mm bars

2.75

Hours/50kg

5.7

Fabric reinforcement

30

m2/hour

6

Formwork

 

 

 

Skilled labour fixing metal formwork

 

 

6.1

Soffits of horizontal work not exceeding 300mm thick, propping not exceeding 3m high

1.8

Hours/m2

6.2

Soffits of sloping work, sloping one way

2.5

Hours/m2

6.3

Vertical surfaces of walls

2.0

Hours/m2

6.4

Edges of horizontal work not exceeding 500mm

0.2

Hours/m

 

Skilled labour fixing stripping formwork

 

 

6.5

Soffits of horizontal work not exceeding 300mm thick, propping not exceeding 3m high

1.0

Hours/m2

6.6

Soffits of sloping work, sloping one way

1.2

Hours/m2

6.7

Vertical surfaces of walls

1.0

Hours/m2

6.8

Edges of horizontal work not exceeding 500mm

0.1

Hours/m

7

Precast concrete units

 

 

 

Waste

 

 

7.1

Lintels, sills, copings and plank floors – for damaged or broken units

2.5%

 

 

1 Bricklayer + 1 labourer

 

 

7.2

Hoisting and fixing a 225 x 150mm lintel up to 3 metres above ground

0.3

Hours/m

8

Cement mortar

 

 

 

Weight to buy to give volume before shrinkage

 

 

8.1

Cement

1.40

tonnes/m3

8.2

Sand

1.60

tonnes/m3

8.3

Hydrated lime

0.60

tonnes/m3

 

Addition to volume to cover shrinkage

 

 

8.4

Cement mortar

25%

 

 

Waste

 

 

8.5

Cement mortar

5%

 

 

Labour

 

 

8.6

Labourer mixing mortar

4.0

Hours/m3

 

Mortar mixers, mortar output

 

 

8.7

100 litre mixer

0.25

Hours/m3

9

Brickwork

 

 

 

Number of 215 x 102.5 x 65 mm bricks with 10 mm mortar joints per m2 wall one brick thick

 

 

9.1

Stretcher bond

60

No./m2

9.2

Header bond

120

No./m2

9.3

English bond

90

No./m2

9.4

Flemish bond

80

No./m2

 

Volume of mortar

 

 

9.5

Half-brick walls

0.03

m3/m2

 

Waste

 

 

9.6

Bricks – cutting and waste

7.5-12.5%

 

9.7

Damp-proof courses not exceeding 300mm wide – waste and laps

5%

 

 

1 Bricklayer + 0.5 labourer

 

 

9.8

Laying bricks

60

No./hour

9.9

Forming cavity 50mm wide including building in wall ties at 5/m2

0.10

Hours/m2

9.10

Laying 1 layer pitch polymer damp-proof course not exceeding 300mm wide

0.10

Hours/m

9.11

Extra over walls for closing cavities with brickwork at opening perimeters

0.35

Hours/m

9.12

Bonding half-brick walls to existing

1.10

Hours/m

9.13

Bedding and pointing frames

0.05

Hours/m

9.14

Holes for pipes 50mm diameter in existing half-brick wall

0.25

Hours/No.

9.15

Ditto over 110mm diameter in existing half-brick wall

0.30

Hours/No.

9.16

Ditto over 150mm diameter in existing half-brick wall

0.55

Hours/No.

10

Blockwork

 

 

 

Waste

 

 

10.1

440 x 215 x 100 mm concrete blocks – cutting and waste

5-10%

 

 

Labour

 

 

10.2

Gang laying lightweight concrete blockwalls

0.50

Hours/m2

11

Asphalt work

 

 

 

25 kg/block asphalt roofing covering capacity

 

 

11.1

First 12mm thickness

35

m2/1000kg

11.2

Additional 3mm thickness

150

m2/1000kg

 

Waste

 

 

11.3

Asphalt roofing

2.5%

 

 

1 Craftsman + 1 labourer laying

 

 

11.4

19mm two-coat asphalt roofing

0.15

Hours/m2

11.5

Skirtings, fascias and aprons 150-225mm girth (including internal angle fillet and labours

0.60

Hours/m2

12

Felt roofing

 

 

 

Waste

 

 

12.1

Felt roofing – waste and laps

15%

 

13

Tile roofing

 

 

 

Waste

 

 

13.1

Nails

5%

 

13.2

Tile roofing

10%

 

 

1 Tiler + 1 labourer laying tile roofing

 

 

13.3

60mm lap, 63No., 0.09kg tile nails, 10.08m battens, 0.11kg batten nails

0.67

Hours/m2

13.4

75mm lap, 68No., 0.10kg tile nails, 10.88m battens, 0.12kg batten nails

0.73

Hours/m2

13.5

90mm lap, 74No., 0.11kg tile nails, 11.84m battens, 0.13kg batten nails

0.79

Hours/m2

13.6

100mm lap, 78No., 0.12kg tile nails, 12.48m battens, 0.14kg batten nails

0.83

Hours/m2

 

1 Tiler + 0.5 labourer

 

 

13.7

Fixing tile battens, including unloading

2.50

Hours/100m

14

Carpentry/carcassing

 

 

 

Waste

 

 

14.1

Carpentry/carcassing

7%

 

 

Carpenter/joiner fixing

 

 

14.2

Plates, sleepers

0.10

Hours/m

14.3

Partitions

0.15

Hours/m

14.4

Floor joists

0.18

Hours/m

14.5

Upper floor joists

0.20

Hours/m

14.6

Strutting between 200mm joists

0.35

Hours/m

15

General joinery: first fixing

 

 

 

Waste

 

 

15.1

General joinery: first fixing

7%

 

15.2

Chipboard flooring

10%

 

 

Carpenter fixing

 

 

15.3

Gutter boarding

1.0

Hours/m

15.4

19mm fascias

1.0

Hours/m

15.5

Barge boards

0.4

Hours/m

15.6

Chipboard flooring

0.5

Hours/m2

16

Unframed joinery: second fixing

 

 

 

Waste

 

 

16.1

Unframed joinery: second fixings

7%

 

 

Joiner fixing

 

 

16.2

Architraves (19 x 50mm)

0.10

Hours/m

16.3

Skirtings (19 x 75mm)

0.15

Hours/m

16.4

Window boards

0.30

Hours/m

16.5

Allow 0.05kg nails per m

 

 

17

Doors, shutters and hatches and associated ironmongery

 

 

 

Joiner fixing and hanging on standard hinges

 

 

17.1

Standard doors

1.4

Hours/No.

17.2

Solid core doors

2.0

Hours/No.

17.3

Door lining sets 1050 x 1200mm

3.0

Hours/No.

17.4

Standard casements

1.1

Hours/No.

17.5

Staircases – straight flight

5.0

Hours/No.

18

Finishes

 

 

 

Covering capacity

 

 

18.1

11mm browning plaster (undercoat)

135-155

m2/tonne

18.2

11mm tough coat plaster (undercoat)

135-150

m2/tonne

18.3

11mm hardwall plaster (undercoat)

115-130

m2/tonne

18.4

2mm board finishing plaster

410-430

m2/tonne

18.5

2mm finishing plaster

410-430

m2/tonne

18.6

13mm universal one coat plaster

85-95

m2/tonne

 

Consumption

 

 

18.7

1mm thick tile adhesive including grout

2

litre/m2

 

Waste

 

 

18.8

Plaster

10%

 

18.9

Tiles

10%

 

18.10

Tile adhesive and grout

5%

 

 

1 Plasterer + 1 labourer

 

 

18.11

1 base coat

0.20

Hours/m2

18.12

1 finishing coat

0.25

Hours/m2

18.13

Ceilings – add

25%

 

18.14

Floor screeds

0.30

Hours/m2

18.15

Wall tiles

0.60

Hours/m2

19

Glazing

 

 

 

Consumption

 

 

19.1

Glazing compound per metre of bedding

0.2

kg/m

 

Waste

 

 

19.2

Glass cutting

10%

 

19.3

Glass fixing

10%

 

19.4

Glazing compound and glazing beads

5%

 

 

Labour

 

 

19.5

Glazing

15

m2/hour

20

Plumbing

 

 

 

Craftsman installing rainwater installations

 

 

20.1

110mm plastic rainwater pipes

0.50

Hours/3m

20.2

65mm plastic rainwater pipes

0.50

Hours/3m

20.3

Fittings

0.10

Hours each

 

Craftsman installing waster installations

 

 

20.4

32mm plastic wastes

0.30

Hours/3m

20.5

110mm plastic soil pipes

0.35

Hours/3m

20.6

Fittings

0.15

Hours each

 

Craftsman installing hot and cold water installations

 

 

20.7

15mm light gauge copper tube with capillary joints fixed with pipe clips @ 1m centres

0.20

Hours/m

20.8

28mm ditto

0.25

Hours/m

20.9

Fittings

0.40

Hours each

20.10

Pipe ancillaries

0.80

Hours each

 

Craftsman installing sanitary fittings

 

 

20.11

Lavatory basins including wastes and pair taps

2.50

Hours/unit

20.12

Baths including wastes and pair taps

2.80

Hours/unit

20.13

Close-coupled WCs

2.25

Hours/unit

20.14

Show trays with wastes, traps, mixers and shower fittings

6.00

Hours/unit

21

Painting

 

 

 

Coverage

 

 

21.1

1st coat emulsion paint

15

m2/litre

21.2

2nd coat emulsion paint

8

m2/litre

 

Skilled labour

 

 

21.3

Knotting and stopping

4.5

Hours/100m2

21.4

Priming

11.0

Hours/100m2

21.5

Painting undercoat

14.0

Hours/100m2

21.6

Painting gloss coat

18.0

Hours/100m2

21.7

Painting emulsion paint

8.0

Hours/100m2

21.8

Preparation of surfaces (rubbing down between coats, etc.)

4.0

Hours/100m2

22

Wallpaper

 

 

 

Skilled labour

 

 

22.1

Stripping off old paper to walls

1.0

Hours/10m2

22.2

Applying size on walls

0.5

Hours/10m2

22.3

Hanging lightweight paper on walls

2.0

Hours/10m2

22.4

Hanging heavyweight paper on walls

2.5

Hours/10m2

22.5

Hanging on ceiling – add

50%

 

23

Manholes and inspection chambers

 

 

 

Labour

 

 

23.1

Based on other trades – add for working in confined spaces

25%

 

Mainland, China

  1. National standard price books:
    • China has published national standard price books giving unit rates for all common items for all kinds of construction works.
    • It has also published materials, labour and plant contents (“quotas”) for building up the unit rates.
    • As they are national standards, provinces and cities use them as the base to publish local price books and quotas to cater for local conditions.
    • The unit rates are direct costs.
    • Further additions are required to cover indirect costs, overheads, profits, taxes and charges, which usually use part or whole of the direct costs as the base for percentage mark-ups.
  2. Old practice:
    • In the old days, the price books and quotas were rigidly applied.
    • The mark-up factors were regulated by the central or local governments.
    • As the unit costs of materials, labour and plant might vary, local supervisory authorities published as and when necessary cost adjustment factors to be applied on the relevant general materials, labour and plant costs.
    • Uncommon materials’ costs might be adjusted individually.
    • The central or local governments or local supervisory authorities also adjusted the mark-up factors as and when necessary.
    • Instead of adjusting the unit rates individually, the relevant costs were extracted and summed up to serve as the bases for adjustments.
    • This was a tedious process if done manually when software was not available.
    • The same system and method were applied to tender pricing.
    • This means that the unit rates were not all-in rates. In order to calculate the cost effect of changing 1 unit quantity of work item, one would need to make many adjustments to the unit rate to get the total cost.
    • Using the same fixed sets of unit rates, quotas, mark-up factors and adjustment factors mean that all tenderers’ unit rates should be the same, and this would mean no competition.
    • The unit rates would not truly reflect the productivity of individual contractor.
    • This was more like an accounting system when the contractors were all state-owned and appointed by the local supervisory authorities to individual projects without the need for competitive tendering.
  3. Later practice:
    • Later, China promoted competition, and allowed the tenderers to compete the price levels, but still required them to follow the quotas per unit quantity, i.e., separating the constituent quantities and costs making up the unit rates.
    • However, if a tenderer genuinely estimates the unit cost but is bound to use the same constituent quantities, he has to adjust the constituted unit costs to compensate.
    • This would mean both the constituent quantities and unit costs would not be genuine.
    • Nowadays, to ensure competition based on the tenderers’ own productivity, China has given greater flexibility for the tenderers to estimate their unit rates without strictly following the price books and quotas.
    • However, the standard price books, quotas and pricing system still have great influence and guiding effects.

Example constants for building up unit rates in mainland, China

Source: National Standard Basic Constants (Quotas) for Builder’s Works (GJD-101-95).

 

Hong Kong

  1. Hong Kong does not have a publicly published set of materials, labour and plant contents, while contractors may have their in-house data.
  2. However, whether most of them have such data is doubtful, because contractors would usually rely on and require their sub-contractors to quote unit rates per work or supply quantity, even for labour-only sub-contracting.
  3. Only the lowest tier of sub-contractors (usually labour-only sub-contractors) may need to estimate the labour contents.
  4. They may as well quote based on past project unit rates with adjustments.
  5. In case of labour-only sub-contracting, the contractors would need to estimate the materials and plant contents.
  6. In this connection, correct estimate of the materials’ waste factors is very important, and should not rely simply on the published waste factors applicable outside Hong Kong.
  7. When preparing the final accounts, it may be required to find out the labour contents allowed for in the unit rates.
  8. The way to do it is to subtract the more certain material costs from the all-in unit rates first and dividing the remainder by the daily wage rate to obtain the mandays required.
  9. The mark-ups for profit and overheads and the plant costs should also be dealt with in the calculation.

Direct costs

  1. The costs of materials, labour and plant directly incurred due to the carrying out of a specific work item is called “direct costs”.
  2. Direct” means that if the quantity of the work item is changed, the costs will also change sensitively.

Indirect or overhead costs

  1. There are indirect costs which are costs of supporting work or services which are not directly related to or do not sensitively change relative to the quantities of a specific type of work items but are commonly required and shared by more than one type of work items. They are called “overheads”.
  2. There are two kinds of overheads. One is called “head office overheads”. The other is called “site overheads” or "project overheads”.

Head office overheads and profit

  1. Head office overheads are the costs of running the contractor’s company whether a particular project is undertaken or not.
  2. However, all projects on hand must contribute to support the head office overheads. Since head office overheads are continually incurred, timely contribution is important. If the contribution from a particular project has become low or slow, the company will suffer. If the cause of the loss is something for which the Employer is responsible under the construction contract, this will be a matter for claims.
  3. A contractor’s annual profit and loss account statement may show the following:
    • Turnover (prices received from projects)
    • Less Cost of sales
    • Gross profit
    • Add Other income
    • Less Administrative expenses
    • Profit before tax
    • Less Profits tax
    • Profit after tax.
  4. The administrative expenses may include:
  5. Head office staff salary
    • Director's remuneration
    • Mandatory Provident Fund
    • Audit fee
    • Bad debt
    • Bank charges
    • Cleaning
    • Computers, accessories and software
    • Currency revaluation difference
    • Depreciation
    • Entertainment
    • Insurances
    • Loss on disposal of fixed assets
    • Postage and courier
    • Printing and stationery
    • Professional fees and charges
    • Rents and rates
    • Repair & maintenance
    • Staff welfare
    • Sundry expenses
    • Telephone and fax
    • Travelling expenses
    • Water and electricity.
  6. The profit is whatever left over after subtracting the costs and expenses from the prices.
  7. The profit and overheads allowed for in tenders are usually calculated as percentage mark-ups on the direct costs (i.e., cost of sales).
  8. If the account is healthy, to maintain the same level of contribution to profit and overheads:
    • The percentage mark-up for gross profit (i.e., including overheads) would be
      • = Gross profit / Cost of Sales
    • The percentage mark-up for head office overheads would be
      • = Administrative expenses / Cost of sales x 100%
    • The percentage mark-up for net profit (i.e., excluding overheads) would be
      • = Gross profit percentage – head office overheads percentage.

Site or project overheads

  1. Site overheads or project overheads are the costs which are incurred on top of the regularly incurred head office overheads when a project is undertaken, and are those costs of commonly shared work or services not priced as part of the direct costs of the permanent work items.
  2. Project staff do not necessarily station on the site all the time.
  3. Site/project overheads may be priced as a percentage mark-up on the direct costs, but major costs would usually be priced in the Preliminaries Bill or Specification Preliminaries Section.
  4. See headings of preliminaries items.
  5. Preliminaries items should also be priced based on direct costs plus profit and head office overheads.

工程承包造价的组成

  1. 按资源划分:
    • 人工费
    • + 材料费
    • + 机械使用费
    • = 直接费
    • + 管理费
    • = 成本
    • + 利润
    • = 税前造价
    • + 按造价计取的税金
    • = 税后造价(综合单价)
  2. 按计价文件划分:
    • 开办经营费(措施费)
    • + 工程量x综合单价
    • + 指定项目(分包及供货)暂定价
    • + 分包管理配合费
    • + 暂定款
    • + 施工不可预见费
    • + 点工单价表
    • = 承包总价

管理费分为

  1. 企业(公司)管理费:
    • 香港一般是按其他的工程成本计取费率,并摊在所有单价内
  2. 项目管理费:
    • 可以专项的计在开办经营费内,或按其他工程的成本计取费率摊在单价内

利润

  • 香港一般是按其他的工程成本计取费率,并摊在所有单价内

税金

  • 香港工程未有营业税、销售税等增值税种,只有利得税

分判制度

询价

暂定供应单价

管理费及利润的取费方法

开办经营要求 / 措施费的估算

暂定款及指定项目暂定价

End of Page

Cost Saving Measures during Tendering 投标阶段的节流的措施

Cost Saving Measures during Tendering 投标阶段的节流的措施 KCTang

Go to End

主要措施

  1. 减少投标价过低不足成本的可能
  2. 了解工程及合同的要求
  3. 分析影响价格的因素及风险
  4. 转移风险是节流的一个重大措施
  5. 分包是转移风险的体现

要充分了解合同及工程的要求

  1. 了解招标文件
  2. 检查招标文件有没有遗留
  3. 检查招标文件的规定有没有矛盾不清不实际的地方
  4. 叁加交底会
  5. 书面提出疑问
  6. 了解相关的法例规定
  7. 现场踏察
  8. 寻找现场及邻近的地质、市政及建筑物的资料

分析影响价格的因素

  1. 设计
  2. 选址
  3. 施工
  4. 合同要求
  5. 经济环境
  6. 发包方及其顾问

设计因素

  1. 功能
  2. 用料
  3. 档次
  4. 设计深化及施工图制配图的责任

选址因素

  1. 交通
  2. 进出囗
  3. 限制(环保、噪音、工时)

施工因素

  1. 工程大小
  2. 机械化
  3. 标准程度
  4. 重复程度
  5. 预制程度
  6. 采购量
  7. 工艺
  8. 天气

合同要求因素

  1. 土质的风险承担程度
  2. 地下障碍物的风险承担程度
  3. 市政接驳的风险承担程度
  4. 物价波动的风险承担程度
  5. 工期
  6. 分阶段交付工地及竣工
  7. 误期赔偿金额
  8. 工期延长的许可原因
  9. 索赔的许可原因
  10. 保险及履约担保
  11. 保修期
  12. 付款办法、支付期限
  13. 管理班子的大小及资历
  14. 安保要求

经济环境因素

  1. 市场竞争程度
  2. 汇率

发包方及其顾问因素

  1. 发包方的财政状况、实力、付款能力
  2. 发包方及顾问的主观要求程度
  3. 发包方及顾问的负责任程度

自我评估

  1. 财政状况、垫支能力
  2. 实力
  3. 往绩
  4. 现时工作量
  5. 安全纪录
  6. 违规纪录
  7. 索赔纪录

询价原因

  1. 市场价格波动
  2. 设计及用料变化多
  3. 不能套用以往的工程成本或造价
  4. 每次都要通过询价手段来估计自己的成本
  5. 然后定自己的造价
  6. 以往价格资讯作为控制性的叁考
  7. 分包是转移风险的体现

询价手法

  1. 要决定那些是自己工、包清工、连工包料
  2. 要考虑分包单位的信守承诺的能力
  3. 要说明供料责任
  4. 提供材料给分包的要规定损耗率
  5. 把收到的招标文件分拆
  6. 再加上自己的条件
  7. 发给被询价单位

自己的报价

  1. 收到分包的报价后,加以分析组合
  2. 择优作为自己成本的依据
  3. 加上适当的风险预留
  4. 及管理费、利润、税金后
  5. 作为自己的报价

管理费及利润的取费方法

 

开办经营/措施费的估算

 

递交标书的准备

  1. 齐备所要求的文件
  2. 确定已考虑了招标文件的修改通知
  3. 复核所有数字
  4. 签齐所要求的地方
  5. 按要求密封标签
  6. 按时递交至指定的地点

End of Page

Submitting Tenders 回标

Submitting Tenders 回标 KCTang

Go to End

Note

26/3/2023: Rules for submission deleted. Already given in Evaluating Tenders.

23/3/2020: Minor adjustment made. Punctuation standardised.

24/12/2014: Moved from wiki.

Tender
回标文件的组成

  1. The bound Tender Booklet with: 
    填妥的招标文件:
    • The Form of Tender completed, signed, witnessed and dated
    • Selected appendices to the Form of Tender completed, signed, witnessed and dated (some to be completed after contract award)
    • The Bills of Quantities priced, extended and totalled (the sum shown on the Form of Tender must agree with the total of the Summary)
    • In case of no Bills of Quantities and pre-2005 Standard Form of Building Contract: The Summary of Tender priced and totalled (the sum shown on the Form of Tender must agree with the total of the Summary)
    • In case of no Bills of Quantities: Schedule of Quantities and Rates showing the build-up of the respective items in the Summary of Tender
      • Schedule of Quantities and Rates all prepared by the tenderers
      • Pro-forma Schedule of Quantities and Rates without quantities provided to tenderers
      • Schedule of Quantities and Rates with quantities pre-inserted for the tenderers’ reference and verification (implication of discrepancies with Tender Drawings and Specification)
    • Technical and Delivery Schedule completed.
  2. List of the names of the specialist contractors that the Tenderer intends to choose for sub-letting part of the Works.
  3. Preliminary design drawings and specification for tenderers’ specialist design.
  4. Material catalogues and sample boards.
  5. Proposed method statement.
    施工组织设计
  6. Proposed programme of the Works.
    施工进度初步计划表
  7. Site layout plan showing the proposed locations of plant, scaffolding, catch fans, stores, site office and access routes.
  8. Project organization chart with the names and qualification of key management and site personnel for the Works .
    工地人员组织表
  9. Maintenance contract proposal (for M&E works).
  10. General company information (if not already fully submitted when expressing interests to tender).
  11. For Mainland China projects:
    • 企业法人营业执照
    • 建筑业企业资质证书
    • 当地施工资质证明文件
    • 已建或在建工程的履历
  12. Number of copies of submissions required.
  13. Duplicate copy of the Form of Tender (required for Government Contract, not really necessary for private projects).

End of Page

Evaluating Tenders 评标

Evaluating Tenders 评标 KCTang

Go to End

Note

26/3/2023: Tender scoring expanded. Others generally revised.

20/2/2023: Opening tenders and rules for submission added.

20/3/2020: Punctuation standardised.

3/10/2018: Added more details about arithmetical check and corrections.  Added error or discount calculations.

24/12/2014: Moved from wiki.

Opening tenders

  1. Opening of tenders is to be attended and witnessed by representatives of the Client and the Consultant Team.
  2. Tenders must be checked to have been properly sealed and returned before the deadline.
  3. Non-conformity should lead to rejection of the tenders.
  4. A tender opening form should be prepared to record:
    • Names of the project and contract
    • Date and time for tender return
    • Date, time and place of tender opening
    • Pre-tender estimate and/or Prime Cost Sum allowed (as appropriate)
    • Names of tenderers, their tender sums, completion times, and priority based on tender sums
    • Names of attendees, their organisations, positions and signatures.
  5. The Client’s representative(s) may sign on the Form of Tender for the record of genuine original submissions.
  6. The duplicate copies of the Form of Tender (if used) are to be kept by the Employer.
  7. Other duplicate copies of the submitted documents may be distributed to the parties required to analyse the tenders at the meeting, or the full sets of submitted documents will be taken away by the Quantity Surveyor for re-production as necessary and re-distribution of the relevant parts to other relevant parties for use.

(section added, 20/2/2023)

Rules for submission

  1. Conditions of Tendering to be observed.
  2. Sealed envelope to be labelled in the manner and deposited at the time and place set out in the invitation to tender.
  3. Tender Drawings to be returned (to be used for Contract binding in the old days, not usually required now when the Tender Drawings are issued in soft copies).
  4. Unauthorised alteration or erasure to the text of the Tender Documents not accepted.
  5. Alternative tenders rather than non-conforming tenders to be distinguished.
  6. Unpriced items deemed included in case lump sum tenders expected.

(section moved from Submitting Tenders, 20/2/2023)

Tender analysis

  1. Check the completeness of tender submissions.
  2. Request for immediate submission of outstanding information (except when the outstanding information leads to disqualification).
  3. Check the correctness in completing the Form of Tender.
  4. Check the completeness of pages.
  5. Check the inclusion of amended pages and exclusion of deleted pages.
  6. Check no unauthorised alteration or erasure to the text of the Tender Documents.
  7. Check arithmetic: (revised 3 Oct 2018)
    • Evidence by ticking or correction in red
    • Tag any doubtful errors and verify with the senior before making any correction
    • Cross out the wrong text with the aid of a ruler, and write the corrected text in the space above so far as possible
    • Check corrections, evidenced by ticking in green
    • Tag doubtful corrections and verify with the first checker
    • Cross out incorrect corrections and correct tidily by the first checker in red, and tick by the second checker in green
    • Do not use correction ink or eraser.
  8. Consider when deciding whether to correct the rate or the extension in case of mismatch:
    • Rate derived by dividing quantities into extension reasonable as a round figure or as compared to similar rates?
    • Total of extension matching page total?
  9. Rates in Remeasurement Contract not to be changed and Tender Sum can be adjusted (some Conditions of Tendering specify as such).
  10. Check the reasonableness of quantities and sufficiency of items in the Schedule of Quantities and Rates prepared by tenderers.
  11. Treat omission of prime cost and provisional sums as an error to be absorbed by the Tenderer or to be corrected and added back (depending on the provisions of the Conditions of Tendering).
  12. Compile multiple rate bills (for easy comparison of rates and to serve as future data bank).
  13. Check rates:
    • Consistencies of rates for similar items (with differences for different locations and times of construction)
    • Reasonable differences and pattern for dissimilar items
    • High and low rates:
      • Comparison amongst tenders and pre-tender estimate
      • Comparison with known supply costs
      • Picking out those unreasonably high or low or incorrect rates for adjustments
    • Reasonable on-costs above prime cost rates
    • Inappropriate pricing of preliminaries items which should not normally be priced
    • Unreasonable dayworks rates and mark-ups.
  14. Check for front loading.
  15. Carry out discounted cash flow analysis for projects of long duration based on tenderers’ programme.
  16. Equate tenders with different completion times (normally using the rate of liquidated damages).
  17. Check qualifications.
  18. Check whether overall time of preliminary programme matches the committed completion times.
  19. Check obvious errors and omissions on the programme (though the detailed checking should be the duty of the Architect and Engineers).
  20. Check the materials and equipment proposal in so far as the make and type may affect the comments on the reasonableness of the prices (the technical suitability should be left to the Architect and Engineers).

Calculate error or discount percentage

(added 3 Oct 2018)

Errors

  1. Meaning:
    • Error = Priced figure less Corrected figure, not the other way around
      Error = Tender Sum less Corrected Total
  2. Error can be positive (+ve) or negative (-ve): 
    • Corrected Total plus (+ve/-ve) Error = Tender Sum
  3. In case of negative error:
    • Read as: Correct Total plus (-ve) Error = Tender Sum
    • Do not read as: Corrected Total minus Error = Tender Sum, which would cause confusion.
  4. Error% should be the one which when applied to the Corrected Total gives the Tender Sum, i.e.:
    • Corrected Total + Corrected Total x Error% = Tender Sum
  5. Always use the above to test the correctness of Error%.
  6. Therefore:
    • Error%
      = (Tender Sum - Corrected Total) / Corrected Total
      = Error / Corrected Total x 100%
  7. Example:
    • Priced figure = 100
      Corrected figure = 120
      Error = 100 - 120 = (-)20
      Error% = -20/120 x 100% = (-)16.66%
      Verification: 120 + 120 x (-)16.66% = 120 - 19.99 = 100.01, rounding error accepted
  8. Non-adjustable parts:
    • Prime Cost and Provisional Sums (including those for dayworks) are not to be adjusted by the error%
    • Depending on specific provisions in the Conditions of Tendering, the Preliminaries prices may or may not be adjusted by the error%
    • For unit rates containing Prime Cost Rates, the Prime Cost Rates are to remain unchanged, but either the unit rates or the portion of the unit rates excluding the Prime Cost Rates can be adjusted, depending on specific provisions in the Conditions of Tendering. In the latter case, the value of the Prime Cost Rates become a non-adjustable part
  9. Therefore, the error should be applied to (or spread over) the (Corrected Total – non-adjustable parts), and the Error% formula should be revised to:
    • = Error / (Corrected Total – non-adjustable parts) x 100%
      = (Tender Sum - Corrected Total) / (Corrected Total – non-adjustable parts)
  10. The Error% should be applied to all rates and prices making up (Corrected Total – non-adjustable parts)
  11. Verification:
    • Let:
      • CT = Corrected Total
        NA = non-adjustable parts
        TS = Tender Sum
    • In principle:
      • (CT - NA) x (1 + Error%) + NA = TS
    • Therefore:
      • CT - NA + (CT - NA) x Error% + NA = TS
        CT + (CT - NA) x Error% = TS
        Error% = (TS - CT) / (CT - NA)
        = (Tender Sum - Corrected Total) / (Corrected Total – non-adjustable parts)
        = Error / (Corrected Total – non-adjustable parts) x 100%
    • Easier to remember: the error should be spread over the (Corrected Total – non-adjustable parts) as a percentage.

(items 8 to 11 added, 26/3/2023)

Adjustments

  1. A final adjustment may be made by the Tenderer in the General Summary or Summary of Tender or at the end of any priced bill or schedule
  2. The adjustment may be entered / treated as a lump sum or as a percentage adjustment to the relevant rates and prices, depending on mutual agreement to be clarified
  3. "Error" above can be read as "Adjustment", where:
    • Adjustment = Final figure less Original figure, and the above calculations would apply
  4. Adjustment can be positive (+ve) or negative (-ve) :
    • Original figure plus (+ve/-ve) Adjustment = Final figure
      Adjustment% = Adjustment / Original figure x 100%
  5. If part of the Original figure is not subject to adjustment, then the Adjustment% would be:
    • Adjustment% = Adjustment / (Original figure - non-adjustable parts) x 100%
  6. Verification:
    • Original figure + (Original figure - non-adjustable parts) x Adjustment%
      = Original figure + (Original figure - non-adjustable parts) x Adjustment / (Original figure - non-adjustable parts) x 100%
      = Original figure + Adjustment x 100%
      = Final figure 

(items 1 and 2 added, 26/3/2023)

Discounts

  1. Discounts may be offered during tender negotiation
  2. The discounts may be offered / treated as a lump sum or as a percentage adjustment to the relevant rates and prices, depending on mutual agreement to be clarified
  3. The following are common understanding:
    • Discount = Discounted Price less Original Price (Discount is actually a negative number but read as "less ...")
      Original Price less Discount = Discounted Price ("less" is a short form for "plus (-ve)")
      Discount% = Discount / Original Price x 100%
      Or
      Discount% = Discount / (Original Price – non-adjustable parts) x 100%
  4. Discount is actually an example of (-ve) adjustment, but usually read as a positive number to be subtracted.
  5. Example:
    • Original Price = 120
      Discounted Price = 100
      Discount = 100 - 120 = (-)20, usually read as "less 20"
      Discount% = (-)20/120 x 100% = (-)16.66%, usually read as "16.66% discount"
      Verification = 120 + 120 x (-)16.66% = 120 - 19.99 = 100.01, rounding error accepted

(items 1 and 2 added, 3 revised, 26/3/2023)

Issuing Tender Questionnaires
询标问卷

  1. Request for outstanding submissions.
  2. Confirm correction of major arithmetic errors.
  3. Request for agreeing more reasonable rates for variations, with details as to how they will be applied – omissions and additions or additions only? implication on provisional quantities?
  4. Request for rationalization of both the quantities and rates in Schedule of Quantities and Rates prepared by the tenderers.
  5. Clarify uncertain terms.
  6. Request for withdrawal of unacceptable qualifications.
  7. Do not change Tender Sums if the tendering basis has not been changed, otherwise disqualify.
  8. Mark confidential queries and replies.

Issuing Post Tender Addenda

  1. Issue if changes to the original tendering basis are required. Accept changes to the Tender Sums.
  2. Consider and stipulate the mode of submission and opening of the revised Tender Sums, if changes expected.
  3. Observe and respect individual tenderers’ competitive ideas.
  4. Keep confidential.

Caution against changes to scanned images

  1. There is software which can recognise the text on a scanned image of a document.
  2. Tenderers may use this kind of software and convert Tender Questionnaires or Post Tender Addenda to editable text files and input their answers.
  3. The format of the document may be changed making it difficult to trace whether the original text has been changed.
  4. To avoid this practice, the following statement should be inserted in Tender Questionnaires or Post Tender Addenda:
    • You may use an image copy of the questionnaire and superimpose your answers on it, but should not change the text or format of the questionnaire.by converting the image into editable file or by other means.

Typical contents of Tender Report
评标分析报告主要内容

  1. Date tenders received.
  2. Tenders received:
    回标价一览:
    • Tenderers’ names
    • Tender Sums
    • Ratios
    • Completion Times
    • Alternative Tenders
  3. Scope of tenders:
    投标范围、分包、另包情况:
    • Works tendered for
    • Provisional sums
    • Prime cost sums
    • Provisional quantities and dayworks schedule
    • Works by others
  4. Type of tenders
  5. Tender addenda
  6. Post tender addenda and revised tenders
  7. Tender submissions
  8. Time for completion
    工期要求
  9. Arithmetic errors
    算术复核结果
  10. Comparison of tenders in the form of appendices:
    分析附表:
    • By Trades and by Sections
      各清单总价比较表
    • List of major rates
      主要单价比较表
    • Multiple Rate Bills of Quantities (bound separately)
    • Technical particulars (delivery periods, origins, makes, types, models, etc. in so far as they are required for the appreciation of the reasonableness of the prices)
      支持分析意见的比较表
  11. Examination of tenders with comments on individual tenders:
    分析意见:
    • Tender Sum
    • Priority
    • Contract periods
      工期
    • Arithmetic error
    • Technical submissions
    • Qualifications
      投标单位的反建议
    • Alternative proposal
      投标单位的另选建议
    • General price levels
      价格
    • Items with unreasonably low rates
      单价过低的处理
    • Items with unreasonably high rates
      单价过高的处理
    • Items incorrectly priced
    • Unpriced items or items without specific prices quoted
    • Technical merits
      技术
    • Capabilities
      实力
    • Past performance
      往绩
    • Items requiring further clarification
      还需澄清的问题
    • Conclusion.
  12. Reconciliation with Estimate.
    与项目概算有关部份或标底的比较
  13. Conclusion and recommendation.
    结论
  14. Total building or project cost based on the recommended tender.
    项目概算按意向选定标价调整后的项目总费
  15. Tender validity period.
    定标限期

Tender interviews
询标会议

  1. Better conducted after submission of the tender report when all the questions have been identified.
  2. Strategy in priority of interview.
  3. Questions and answers.
  4. Subsequent confirmation of questions by issuing Tender Queries.
  5. After receipt of the replies, a final recommendation can be made as to the selection of the successful tenderer. A supplementary or a final tender report should be issued.

(item 1 revised, 26/3/2023)

Tender scoring
评分

  1. Tender selection may be based on prices alone (if all tenderers are considered equally acceptable before being invited to tender) or based on a combination of price and technical scores.
  2. Example of technical scoring sheet for a building renovation project when the assessors’ averaged and weighted scores are entered against tenderers A, B, C and D:
    技術分评分表的例子:
  3. The technical scoring criteria are:
    • Company capability (size, finance, qualifications)
    • Competence of the project management team (qualifications, experience, organisation)
    • Adequacy of the understanding of this project (scope, characteristics)
    • Reasonableness of the working sequence and overall period
    • Suitability of the method statement
    • Suitability of the manpower and sub-contractors (current workload, uniforms, access control, name-borrowing contracting, assignment of actual performance, illegal immigrants, daily management)
    • Suitability of site facilities (site layout plan, site storage plan, vertical transportation, transportation of materials and rubbish on or off site)
    • Suitability of on-site management:
      • safety, protection, security (workers, occupiers, third parties, Employer’s properties)
      • sanitation and cleanliness (wastes, mosquitos, dusts, noises)
      • suspension of water and electricity supplies
      • liaison and complaint management with neighbours and occupiers
    • Suitability of quality management:
      • samples and shop drawing submission procedures
      • quality warranties
      • quality inspections during the course and upon completion (spalling concrete, pull out tests, waterproofing layers).
  4. The scoring procedures are as follows:
    • Devise the criteria
    • Assign maximum score or different weighting for each criterion
    • Score all selected tenderers by all assessors independently
    • Add to get the total score of each criterion obtained by each tenderer, average it and apply the weighting (if applicable) to give the score of each criterion
    • Add the scores of all criterion to give the total score.
  5. Scoring table for each tender without weighting:

Item

Criterion

Max score

Assessor P’s score

Assessor Q’s score

Assessor R’s score

Assessor S’s score

Average score

 

 

10

5

6

5

8

6

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Scoring table for each tender with weighting (scoring by Assessors P, Q, R and S based on a 10-point scale, and weighting based on 5%):                       

Item

Criterion

Weighting

Assessor P’s score

Assessor Q’s score

Assessor R’s score

Assessor S’s score

Average score

Weighted score

 

 

5%

5

6

5

8

6

3%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Example of calculating the combined tender scores based on 30% price and 70% technical:
    計算综合评分的例子:
  2. Formulae used:
  3. In short:
    • The lowest tender sum will be treated as having the max 100 price score
    • Other higher tender sums will get proportionally lower scores by means of: 
      • converted price score = lowest tender sum / tender price
    • The highest technical score will be treated as having the max 100 technical score
    • Other lower technical scores will get proportionally lower scores by means of:
      • converted technical score = technical score / highest technical score
    • The combined % score will be equal to:
      • converted price score x 30% + converted technical score x 70%.

(expanded, 26/3/2023)

Tender Evaluation Criteria of Housing Authority

  1. The Housing Authority may take into account the following when evaluating tenders (Notes to Tenderers, February 2013 Edition):
    • tenderer's qualification
    • compliance with tender restrictions
    • suspension from tendering
    • workload capping limits and restrictions
    • contract award restrictions
    • technical, commercial and financial capability
    • past performance
    • compliance with tender conditions, specifications and other requirements as set out in the Tender Documents
    • designs/methods/materials proposed in compliance with the terms of the Conditions of Tender
    • tender price and/or rates
    • effect of exceptionally high or low priced items
    • effect of incident of payments by discounting future payments to obtain the present values if the tendered prices are very close
    • bankruptcy
    • false declaration
    • lack of integrity
    • acts of dishonesty
    • the latest available information and reports relating to serious misconduct or criminal offences
    • wages in arrears
    • serious quality, safety or environmental incidents
    • HA's quarantine system under the tender evaluation mechanism for occurrence of serious incidents during tender assessment for capital works contracts.
  2. Calculation of combined score by the Housing Authority for complex contracts evaluated using 2-envelope tendering arrangement with marking scheme (Special Conditions of Tender, February 2013 Edition):
    • Summation of:
      • 8% max. x Corporate score
      • 17% max. x PASS score
      • 10% x Technical Score of the tender (before normalization) / highest Technical Score among considered tenders
      • 65% x lowest tendered sum among considered tenders / tendered sum of the tender​
    • where "considered tenders" being those tenders with Technical Scores (before normalization) above the threshold Technical Score.

End of Page

Awarding Contract 定标

Awarding Contract 定标 KCTang

Go to End

Note

  • 5 Apr 2022: Contract documentation moved to Post Contract.
  • 22 Mar 2022: Amending Form of Contract revised.
  • 20 Mar 2020: Punctuation standardised.
  • 7 Apr 2019: "Originals of Tender Correspondence" added. 

Awarding the Contract 定標

  1. Letter of Acceptance / Letter of Award.
    中標通知書
  2. Letter of Intent (to nominate) followed by Letter of Acceptance by the Main Contractor.
    意向書
  3. Is letter of intent binding? If binding, how?

Contents of the Letter 函件內容

  1. Issuing on behalf of the Client.
  2. Brief description of the Works.
  3. The Contract Sum.
  4. Build-up of the Contract Sum from the original Tender Sum, if different.
  5. Discounts (lump sum, percentage, how to apply, how are prime cost rate items treated).
  6. The Contract Periods.
  7. Pricing clarifications.
  8. Technical clarifications.
  9. Defining Contract Documents and order of precedence (Tender Documents, tender, tender correspondence).
  10. Any programme, method statement, site layout plan, and organization chart for reference only and to be formally proposed after contract award but subsequent deviations to be properly justified (information contained in these reference documents but intended to form part of the contract should be specifically stated).
  11. Counter-signing and returning the letter.
  12. Binding contract upon counter-signing.
  13. Immediate formal submissions:
    • Surety Bond
    • Employees’ Compensation Insurance Policy
    • Contractors’ All Risks and Third Party Liability Insurance Policy
    • Method statement of the Works
    • Programme of the Works
    • Site layout plan
    • Organization chart with the names and qualification of key management and site personnel for the Works.

End of Page

Competition Ordinance (Chapter: 619) 競爭條例 (619章)

Competition Ordinance (Chapter: 619) 競爭條例 (619章) KCTang

Go to End

Note

15/5/2015: Created.

Long title
詳題

  • An Ordinance to prohibit conduct that prevents, restricts or distorts competition in Hong Kong; to prohibit mergers that substantially lessen competition in Hong Kong; to establish a Competition Commission and a Competition Tribunal; and to provide for incidental and connected matters
    本條例旨在禁止妨礙、限制或扭曲在香港的競爭的行為;禁止大幅減弱在香港的競爭的合併;設立競爭事務委員會及競爭事務審裁處;以及就附帶和相關的事宜訂定條文

competition rule
競爭守則

  • means 指
    • the first conduct rule 第一行為守則 (Not in operation yet. Intention: An undertaking must not make use of agreement, concerted practice, or decision with the object or effect to prevent, restrict or distort competition in Hong Kong. The rule will particularly apply to horizontal agreement among competitors rather than vertical agreement with suppliers.)
    • the second conduct rule; or 第二行為守則;或 (Not in operation yet. Intention: An undertaking with substantial degree of market power in a market must not abuse its power by engaging in conduct to prevent, restrict or distort competition in Hong Kong. Factors including market share, market entry barrier and the ability of its potential competitors to enter the market shall be considered in assessment of market power.)
    • the merger rule 合併守則 (Not in operation yet. Intention: Regulating mergers or acquisitions of carrier licensees under the Telecommunications Ordinance only.)

serious anti-competitive conduct
嚴重反競爭行為

  • means any conduct that consists of any of the following or any combination of the following:
    • fixing, maintaining, increasing or controlling the price for the supply of goods or services
    • allocating sales, territories, customers or markets for the production or supply of goods or services
    • fixing, maintaining, controlling, preventing, limiting or eliminating the production or supply of goods or services
    • bid-rigging

bid-rigging
圍標

  • means:
    • an agreement—
      • that is made between or among 2 or more undertakings whereby one or more of those undertakings
        • agrees or undertakes not to submit a bid or tender in response to a call or request for bids or tenders, or
        • agrees or undertakes to withdraw a bid or tender submitted in response to such a call or request; and
      • that is not made known to the person calling for or requesting bids or tenders at or before the time when a bid or tender is submitted or withdrawn by a party to the agreement or by an entity controlled by any one or more of the parties to the agreement; or
    • a submission, in response to a call or request for bids or tenders, of bids or tenders that are arrived at by an agreement—
      • that is made between or among 2 or more undertakings; and
      • that is not made known to the person calling for or requesting bids or tenders at or before the time when a bid or tender is submitted or withdrawn by a party to the agreement or by an entity controlled by any one or more of the parties to the agreement.
  • examples:
    • cover pricing - one or more bidders in a tender process submit artificially high prices, purporting to be genuine bids, which are not intended to win the contract
    • bid rotation - bidders agree to submit the lowest bid on a rotating basis
    • bid suppression - bidders agree to either refrain from bidding or withdraw their bids
    • market/customer division - bidders agree not to compete in a designated geographic region or for a specific contract

The Four Don'ts for SME as advised by the Competition Commission

  • Dont' fix prices 不要合謀定價:
    • including an agreement on a formula to calculate prices or elements of prices such as discounts, rebates, promotions or credit terms
    • verbally or in writing including 'a wink and a nod'; or at an association's meeting
  • Don't restrict output 不要限制產量:
    • including restricting the volume or type of particular goods or services
  • Don't share (divide) market 不要瓜分市場:
    • including allocating customers by geographic area, agreeing not to compete for each other's customers and agreeing not to enter or expand into a competitor's market
  • Don't rig bids 不要圍標:
    • agreeing who should 'win' a bid
    • supporting the designated winner by refraining from bidding, withdrawing bids or submitting bids with higher prices / unacceptable terms
  • Compete. Don't cheat

End of Page

50 Nota Benes in Tender and Contract Documentation

50 Nota Benes in Tender and Contract Documentation KCTang

Go to End

Note

20/3/2022: Punctuation style revised. Numbering corrected. Items 5 and 6 revised.

21/1/2020: Expanded for HKIS QSD PQSL event on the same day.

25/12/2014: Posted on this website.

3/3/2012: Presented by Mr. K C Tang at One Day Seminar on Contract Management 2012.

General

1. Identify the ultimate purposes of preparing tender documents and serve the purposes:

  • Get a good contractor
  • Get a good price
  • Get the desired quality
  • Permit sufficiency of time and price
  • Reduce ambiguity, arguments and disputes
  • Reduce unexpected cost and time overrun
  • Reduce unexpected claims
  • Allow for changes
  • Allow easy calculation of costs of changes
  • Share risks clearly
  • Start work as soon as possible irrespective of degree of completion of design
  • etc, etc.

2. Comply with client’s procedures:

  • Government departments
  • Professional developers
  • Contractors (when sub-letting).

3. Determine appropriate tender packages and tendering programme:

  • Site survey, ground investigation and demolition usually under separate advance contracts
  • Split between site formation, piled foundations, substructure, basement and superstructure
  • Split between main contract, nominated sub-contracts and supply contracts
  • Split into domestic sub-contracts and supply contracts
  • Design development in stages with separate tenders in stages
  • Full design development for single contract package for all.

4. Choose appropriate contractual arrangement and understand their different implications:

  • Design-bid-build vs design and build (plus operate)
  • Nominated vs domestic
  • Supply only (sales contract) vs supply and install (works contract)
  • Collaborative, partnering
  • Lump sum, remeasurement, rates only, cost plus.

5. Observe confidentiality and avoid collusion:

6. Avoid and declare conflict of interest.

7. Ensure fair competition:

  • Waste of tendering time and resources
  • Loss of trust
  • Loss of tenderers.

8. Do not trust computer and people:

  • Garbage in garbage out
  • Reliability of Client's staff
  • Change of Client's staff and challenge of past decisions
  • Decisions must be within reasons and rationale be properly documented.

Documentation generally

9. Identify which standard documents and templates to use:

  • In-house
  • Client's
  • Lead consultant's
  • Changing standard
  • Lag time in releasing changes
  • Past projects
  • Most up to date standards preferred to past projects'.

10. Ensure adequate representation:

  • Ensure sufficiency of price and time
  • Give all information to ascertain entire quality and quantities of the work and services required for the completion of the Contract
  • Give full knowledge of site conditions and problems which may affect price and time
  • Give fewer items to reduce chances of adding prices vs give more items to ensure no shortfall.

11. Avoid ambiguities, discrepancies, inconsistent terminology, etc.:

  • Client, Employer
  • Architect, Engineer, Lead Consultant, Project Manager, Contract Administrator, Supervising Officer
  • Sub-Contractor vs Contractor vs Builder in Technical Specification
  • Works, works, work
  • Rate for
  • Quantity of
  • Tender Documents, Tender Document
  • General Specification, Particular Specification, Technical Specification
  • Schedule of Rates and Summary of Tender in pre 2005/2006 Standard Forms of Building Contract
  • Schedule of Quantities and Rates in 2005/2006 Standard Forms of Building Contract
  • Damages, damage
  • Shall, will, should, would
  • Precedence of documents
  • Precedence of contents.

12. Avoid repetition of same provisions at different parts of documents:

13. Check correct page headers, footers, covers, contents, page numbers, item references, etc., correct use of units, correct cross referencing of document, page and clause numbers:

  • Who does what for Technical Specification.

Tender documentation

14. State deviations from standard form of contract, standard specification, standard method of measurement, etc.:

  • Special Conditions of Contract
  • Particular Specification
  • Preambles
  • Standard Preambles and Special Preambles
  • Preamble notes in the Bills of Quantities, Schedule of Rates, Schedule of Quantities and Rates.

15. Notify Client of important features and seek approvals:

  • Particulars to be specified in the Form of Tender: alternative tenders, times for completion, tender validity period
  • Particulars to be stated in the Appendices to the Conditions of Contract
  • Really special Special Conditions of Contract.

16. Allocate risks appropriately:

  • Best one to manage?
  • Best one to bear?

17. Watch out that harsh terms may not be workable:

  • Harsh terms enforceable if clear beyond doubt and agreed by the contract parties voluntarily
  • Except when forbidden by law
  • Except when not clear enough to override common interpretation
  • Harsh terms would diminish the authority of the Contract Administrator who is bound by the loss of authority
  • "Impose harsh terms in contract and relax when the need arises" may turn out to be a deadlock.

18. Check that specified brands and models are still in production:

  • Government contract would not specify brands and models without prior approval.

19. Be specific as to which one to choose out of the different choices available from the standard.

20. Define possession, commencement and completion times and phases properly:

  • Date for possession
  • Date for commencement
  • Date for completion
  • Site phasing vs works phasing
  • Zones/ phases / sections / stages
  • "for" vs "of".

21. Estimate genuinely the rates of liquidated damages for delay:

  • "of" not "for"
  • Avoid double penalty
  • Suppose the rate of LD for Section 2 is the same as that for the earlier Section 1
  • If the rate is equally applicable for a delay occurring before or after the completion of Section 1, this is very likely to be a double penalty because the loss and expense before or after the completion of Section 1 should be different.

22. Specify procurable types of bonds and set affordable level of bond amounts:

  • Conditional bond (on-default) bond
  • On-demand bond.

23. Set procurable levels of insurance excesses:

24. Check that descriptions of Bills of Quantities or Schedule of Rates or Schedule of Quantities and Rates or Schedule of Works sufficiently cover and match with requirements on Specification and Drawings.

25. Divide into smaller items for pricing if a bigger item is likely to be partially varied.

26. Avoid small provisional quantities.

27. Ensure that prime cost rates are set at appropriate levels:

  • Implication of excessive deviations of rates on wastage and profit and overheads.

28. Ensure that the correct Prime Cost and Provisional Sums are carried forward to the Summary.

29. Specify as optional if firm quantity items are likely to be omitted or added:

  • "optional" <> "provisional".

Tendering

30. Choose suitable tenderers:

  • Experience
  • Specialty
  • Technical capability
  • Financial capability
  • Safety, claims and disputes track records
  • Innovation
  • Pre-qualifications
  • Newspaper advertisement
  • Open tendering
  • Selective tendering.

31. Give sufficient time for tendering:

  • Watch out long holidays
  • Give sufficient time after tender addendum
  • Extend tender return date.

32. Permit site visits individually:

  • Site visits in groups only if essential.

33. Arrange for tender briefing only if really necessary and in groups.

34. Give common answers to queries raised by one to all tenderers.

35. Disregard late tenders.

Tender analysis

36. Check tenders returned:

  • Sufficiency of tender submissions
  • Correctness of arithmetic
  • Compatibility of submitted programmes with specified requirements
  • Suitability of specifically stated delivery and installation periods
  • Qualifications and deviations
  • Missing or duplicated items or unreasonable quantities in case of Schedule of Rates and Schedule of Quantities and Rates prepared by the Tenderers
  • General price levels
  • Front loading
  • Rates for items with small quantities
  • Rates for dayworks and mark-ups
  • Incorrectly priced high or low rates.

37. Consider reasonable qualifications.

38. Rationalize incorrectly high or low rates.

39. Issue post clarifications to clarify or rectify with no change to the tender sums.

40. Conduct tender interviews with no indication of tender priority.

41. Do not accept uninvited changes to tender sums or rates and prices, and post tender exclusions.

42. Handle post tender changes and best offer invitation with care and fairness:

  • Revised offer and best offer in sealed envelopes
  • Treatment of discounts.

Contract award

43. Award to tenders financially and technically capable.

44. Award within the tender validity period:

  • Extend tender validity period.

45. Choose properly between letter of intent and letter of acceptance.

46. Ask for signed Form of Warranty before accepting a sub-contract tender.

47. Specify how discounts should be applied, and ensure discounted all-in rates not lower than prime cost rates.

48. List out documents to form the Contract Documents.

49. Ask for counter-signature of letter of intent and letter of acceptance since they may be regarded as counter-offers requiring acceptance.

50. Sign formal contract documents before things go sour.

Note that there are actually more than 50 Nota Benes.

End of Page

Post Contract 定施工合同後

Post Contract 定施工合同後 KCTang

Go to End

Note 註

  • 21/2/2023: Revised to active verb style.
  • 5/4/2022: "Main objectives" added. Sections after "Additional scope of services" separated. 
    增加了“主要目標”。“附加服務範圍”之後的部分分開。
  • 3/4/2020: Created.
    創建。

Generally 概論

  • Consultant Quantity Surveyors provide cost management and contract advice services during the post contract stage until the settlement of the Final Account.
    顧問工料測量師在合同後階段提供成本管理和合同諮詢服務,直至結算完成。

Main objectives of QS consultancy services 工料測量顧問服務的主要目標

(Added 添加, 5/4/2022)

  1. Help Client control costs:
    幫助客戶控制造價:
    • Advise on costs in advance
      預早報告造價
    • Update cost effects of changes promptly
      及時更新變更的造價影響
    • Suggest cost mitigation proposals
      提出降低造價的建議
    • Safeguard Client’s interests
      維護客戶利益
    • Avoid disputes.
      避免糾紛。
  2. Be fair and reasonable to Contractor:
    對承包商公平合理:
    • Issue payment valuations promptly
      及時出具付款估值
    • Agree contract price adjustments regularly during construction
      施工期間定期協議合同價格的調整
    • Interpret contract terms impartially.
      公正地解釋合同條款。
  3. Save own costs:
    節省自己的成本:
    • Do it right the first time
      第一次就做對
    • Use right tools
      使用正確的工具
    • Use better skills
      使用更好的技能
    • Establish proper filing system (hardcopy, softcopy and emails)
      建立適當的歸檔系統(硬拷貝、軟拷貝和電子郵件)
    • Establish a proper financial reporting and final accounting system.
      建立適當的財務報告和結算制度。

Scope of post contract services of consultant QS firms 工料測量顧問公司的定施工合同後服務範圍

  1. Attend meetings.
    出席會議。
  2. Prepare contract documents.
    準備合同文件。
  3. Vet insurances, bonds and warranties.
    審查保險、擔保和質保。
  4. Advise on estimated costs of potential changes to the Contract Sum.
    就合同價的潛在變更的估計造價提供意見。
  5. Prepare Financial Reports at regular intervals.
    定期準備財務報告。
  6. Prepare cash flow tables.
    準備現金流量表。
  7. Advise on contract interpretations.
    就合同解釋提供意見。
  8. Value payments.
    付款估值。
  9. Prepare Final Accounts and negotiate with the contractors to agree the Final Accounts.
    準備結算並與承包商協商以達成一致。

(revised, 21/2/2023)

Additional scope of services 附加服務範圍

  1. Handle termination of construction contracts or determination of contractors’ employment.
    處理終止施工合同或終止承包商的僱用。
  2. Prepare for and attend mediation, arbitration or court proceedings.
    準備並參加調解、仲裁或法庭訴訟。

End of Page

Post Contract Meetings

Post Contract Meetings KCTang

Go to End

Note

  • 21/2/2023: Revised.
  • 5/4/2022: Split from Post Contract.
  • 3/4/2020: Created.

Attend meetings

  1. Principle:
    • Be proactive at meetings
    • Participate in discussions
    • Contribute to the meetings.
    • (added, 21/2/2023)

  2. Project co-ordination meetings (usually monthly):
    • attended by Employer and Consultants without Contractor
    • QS usually attends
    • for discussing outstanding design, statutory submission status, selection of Nominated Sub-Contractors and Suppliers.
  3. Design co-ordination meetings (as required):
    • attended by Consultants
    • QS usually does not attend
    • for more detailed co-ordination of drawings prepared by different Consultants.
  4. Site meetings (usually monthly, more frequently initially):
    • attended by Consultants, Contractor and Sub-Contractors
    • QS usually attends the relevant part
    • for discussing site programme, progress, document issuance and submission status, problems, etc.
  5. Sub-Contractors’ co-ordination meetings (usually weekly):
    • attended by Contractor and Sub-Contractors
    • QS does not attend
    • for detailed co-ordination of shop drawings, installation drawings, programme, progress, problems, etc.
  6. Final Account meetings (as required):
    • attended by QS and Contractor / Sub-Contractors
    • for discussing and agreeing Final Account
    • during the course of construction and not necessarily deferred until after completion of the Works.

First progress meeting
首次進度會議

  1. Meetings:
    • Agree subsequent meeting schedule.
      以後會議的時間表。
  2. Communication:
    溝通:
    • Introduce various parties and their representatives
      介紹有關方及其代表
    • Establish communication channels.
      溝通渠道。
  3. Site:
    工地:
    • Discuss problems upon site takeover
      接收工地的問題
    • Present and review site layout
      現場佈置
    • Present and review security system
      安保制度
    • Present and review construction method statement.
      施工組織設計。
  4. Time:
    工期:
    • Fix official Commencement Date and specified Completion Date
      正式開工及規定竣工日
    • Establish programme submission system
      進度計畫送審制度
    • Establish progress report submission system
      進度報告送審制度
    • Establish Sub-Contract tendering programme.
      分包定標進度計畫。
  5. Design and Contractors’ submissions:
    規劃及設計:
    • Report on status of Government approvals
      政府批文進度
    • Establish shop drawings submission system
      制配圖紙送審制度
    • Establish samples submission system
    • Establish records submission system (labour attendance, safety, MPF, etc.).
  6. Instruction system:
    指令制度
    • Establish instructions and variation quotations system
    • Establish authority to instruct and receive instructions.
  7. Payments:
    付款制度
    • Establish payment application and certification timeframes and workflow.
  8. Before or after meeting:
    • Agree payment application format
    • Agree preliminaries’ payment schedule.

(moved from other page, 21/2/2023)

 

End of Page

Contract Documentation

Contract Documentation KCTang

Go to End

Note

  • 27/3/2023: Generally revised.
  • 20/2/2023: Revised.
  • 20/3/2022: Revised.
  • 5/4/2022: Split from "Award contract".
  • 20/3/2020: Punctuation standardised.
  • 7/4/2019: "Originals of Tender Correspondence" added.

Generally

  1. The contract comes into existence after the mutual agreement of the letter of award or the letter of intent (if having temporary binding effect).
  2. The post contract stage therefore should start from that time.
  3. The preparation of the Contract Documents should be done as soon as possible after the mutual agreement of the letter of award, but is often regarded as not of the first priority because the absence of the formal Contract Documents would not affect the contract being in existence.

Prepare formal Contract Documents
製訂合同文件

  1. Get the counter-signed copy of the letter of award or letter of intent.
  2. Originals of Tender Correspondence:
    • Obtain the originals of the tender correspondence from the recipients and bind them into the original set of the Contract Documents:
      • This  is a customary practice to bind in the originals. However, sometimes it takes too long to obtain the originals from the recipients because this is not their first priority to attend to this matter, or the recipients would want to retain the originals as original evidence
    • Use fair photocopies of the originals for binding into the original set of the Contract Documents:
      • Signing of the Contract Documents with such photocopies bound in should be sufficient to signify that the signing parties recognize the fair photocopies represent the true contents of the originals
    • Notify the contract parties such intention to use fair photocopies in case they may disagree:
      • Some organizations tend to be dogmatic to follow the customary practice.
  3. Ask the Architect to prepare and bind the Contract Drawings for signing as well.
  4. Ascertain the number of original and certified true copies required.
  5. Check for the updated registered addresses.
  6. Amendments and Special Conditions to the Form of Contract:
    • Physically amend the Form by including and initialling overriding clauses to incorporate the amendments and special conditions (seldom adopted)
    • Stamp a reminding note against the amended clause to indicate that the clause has been amended elsewhere (quite frequently adopted)
    • Do not make any physical amendments or marks at all because the rest of the Contract Documents should have made it clear that there are amendments or special conditions elsewhere in the Contract Documents (quite frequently used).
  7. Calculate the Date for Completion from the overall duration (Date for Possession or Date for Commencement counted as day 1 - be careful when using words like “after”, “from”, “commencing from”, “commencing on”. NEC does not count the starting date as day 1.).
  8. Calculate the limit of retention (based on a percentage of the Contract Sum exclusive of prime cost sums for Nominated Sub-Contracts; rounded off; plus the retention funds held in respect of Nominated Sub-Contractors).
  9. Calculate the amount of surety bond (based a percentage of the Contract Sum; rounded off).
  10. Check the Tender Documents to see whether to execute as a simple contract or contract under seal and type the signing page accordingly.
  11. Consider significance of the date of signing (usually not significant because the contract is already in force).

(generally revised, 27/3/2023)

Sign as simple contract
签署合同

  • Example of the signing page of the Standard Form of Building Contract 2005/2006 Edition:

End of Page

Vetting Insurances, Bonds and Warranties

Vetting Insurances, Bonds and Warranties KCTang

Go to End

Note

  • 5/4/2022: Split from Post Contract.
  • 3/4/2020: Created.

Generally

  1. See Insurances, Bonds and Warranties.

Vet insurances, bonds and warranties

  1. QS vets draft insurances and bonds submitted by the Contractors and Nominated Sub-Contractors and Suppliers to ensure that the terms and conditions are in compliance with the contract requirements.
  2. Usual types:
    • Contractors' all risks and third party liability insurances – required to be submitted before any work on site
    • Employees’ Compensation Insurance – required to be submitted before any work on site
    • Surety bond – usually required before the first payment otherwise cash security of equal amount will be retained
    • Materials and workmanship warranty (roofing, kitchen and bathroom waterproofing layers, windows, curtain wall) – usually towards Substantial / Practical Completion.
  3. Form of Warranty related to Nominated Sub-Contractors and Suppliers should have been dealt with not later than the award of the contracts.
  4. Usual problems encountered:
    • Drafts not exactly following the pro-forma given in the Tender Documents (pro-forma usually given for bonds and warranties)
    • Drafts not complying with contract requirements
    • Incorrect date of the letter of acceptance or letter of intent inserted (used when Contract Documents may not have been signed at that time)
    • Incorrect names and addresses of Project, Employer and Contractor inserted
    • Incorrect descriptions of parties to be included as the joint-insured
    • Incorrect descriptions to cover all tiers of sub-contractors
    • Amounts of excesses too high
    • Period of insurance (construction and defects liability / maintenance) not sufficient
    • Fixed expiry date in the form of calendar date instead of a floating expiry date pegged to the Substantial Completion Date or Date of Defects Rectification Certificate / Certificate of Completion of Making Good Defects.
    • Late submission of drafts with protracted rounds of comments and re-submissions
    • Late submission of formally executed documents.

End of Page

Cost Monitoring and Management

Cost Monitoring and Management KCTang

Go to End

Note

  • 5/4/2022: Split from Post Contract.
  • 3/4/2020: Created.

Advise on estimated costs of potential changes to the Contract Sum

  1. Design changes may be proposed during the course of construction.
  2. The Employer may like to know the estimated costs before approving to make the design changes.
  3. QS estimates the costs based on the Architect’s or Engineer’s design.
  4. The design may not be complete for estimating at the earliest time for quick decision making.
  5. Whether the design is complete or not, approximate estimating using approximate quantities and composite rates should be adopted to shorten the time to do the estimate.
  6. It is possible that the design may eventually not be adopted or may be further modified.
  7. It will be a waste of time if the estimate is prepared in great details like valuing a variation formally but is not really so accurate that at the end of day the estimate cannot be used as the formal valuation.
  8. Buffer for agreement with the Contractor should be allowed.
  9. AI pre-approval forms may need to be signed before an Architect’s instruction is authorized to be issued for the proposed changes.
  10. The Contractor may also raise claims, which require QS to report to the Employer the probable costs of those claims.

Prepare Financial Reports at regular intervals

  1. QS needs to prepare Financial Reports at regular intervals (usually monthly) to report on the latest situation of all the possible adjustments to the Contract Sum.
  2. The reports serve as a register of instructions issued, potential variations, claims received, etc.
  3. The reports should have columns to show the latest of each of the following:
    • amounts estimated by QS – with buffer for budgetary purposes; not known to the Contractor; can be viewed as the maximum payable
    • changes since the last report
    • amounts claimed by the Contractor
    • amounts assessed by QS – formal amount notified to the Contractor; can be viewed as the minimum payable
    • difference from amounts claimed
    • e.g.:
  4. The reports should also show the status of the items, such as:
    • tentative based on claim
    • estimated (some measurement)
    • no cost effects
    • assessed (detailed)
    • agreed
    • original
    • e.g:

Prepare cash flow tables

  1. QS may be required to prepare cash flow tables regularly or ad-hoc to indicate the likely amounts of payments required to be made by the Employer so that he may prepare for funding.
  2. Care should be made to adjust for the difference between the time of progress and the time of actual payment.
  3. A comparison between the cash flow graph prepared based on the baseline master programme and the latest actual flow graph can be a good visual indication of whether the progress is ahead or behind the programme (measured by the value of the Works).

End of Page

Contract Advice

Contract Advice KCTang

Go to End

Note

  • 21/2/2023: Created.

Advise on contract interpretations

 

  1. As QS is the party responsible for preparing the contractual and financial parts of the Tender Documents, QS is very often requested by the Employer and other Consultants to advise on the contractual validity of claims raised by the Contractor.
  2. The next and probably the most important question is on the cost implications.
  3. While the Special Conditions of Contract and Preliminaries may be prepared using the QS’s company standard with some modifications with little thoughts on the interpretations, post contract advice would demand a good understanding of the meaning of the clauses in the Form of Contract, Special Conditions of Contract and Preliminaries.
  4. On top of a thorough understanding of the standard forms of contract, the common law rights and remedies are also very important matters to be understood.
  5. A QS may be handling different types of contracts at the same time, therefore, his/her knowledge should be broad enough to cover all types encountered.
  6. In the worst case where determination of the employment of the Contractor or termination of contract is to be considered, proper procedures must be implemented to ensure that a proper determination or termination would not end up into a breach of contract. QS advice on the detailed procedures would be important.
  7. In case dispute resolution procedures like mediation, arbitration or court proceedings are involved, the case will then usually be passed to the lawyers to handle with QS to assist on the technical and financial aspects only.

 

End of Page

Contractors' Cost Monitoring and Management 承包方造價的跟蹤管理

Contractors' Cost Monitoring and Management 承包方造價的跟蹤管理 KCTang

Go to End

Note

21/2/2023: Sections from "Site takeover" merged into here.

30/3/2020: Revised. English version added.

24/12/2014: Moved from wiki.

Main principles
主要原則

(not in any particular order, but probably: more important and easier to do given first)

  1. Reduce waste:
    減少損耗:
    • At source

      在源頭

    • Recycle.
      循環再用。
  2. Reduce rubbish:
    減少垃圾:
    • At source

      在源頭

    • Recycle.
      循環再用。
  3. Reduce abortive work:
    減少返工:
    • Confirm material and workmanship samples and acceptance standards
      確定材料及工藝的樣板及驗收標準
    • Do it right at the first time
      第一次就做對
    • Reduce defects
      減少缺陷
    • Chase acceptance inspections and approvals.
      追驗收檢查。
  4. Reduce wasted time:
    減少浪費時間:
    • Reduce idling time
      減少窩工
    • Prepare, follow, monitor and update programmes
      編訂、依從、監控和更新進度計劃表
    • Track and record progress and reasons for deviations
      跟踪記錄進度及偏離的理由
    • Increase advance planning and co-ordination
      多加事前協調
    • Chase comments and approvals.
      追審核意見和批准。
  5. Reduce exposure to delay damages:
    減少誤期賠償的可能性:
    • Prevent delay
      避免誤期
    • Notify delay
      通知誤期
    • Claim extension of time.
      要求延長時間。
  6. Reduce accidents.
    減少意外。
  7. Reduce complaints.
    減少投訴。
  8. Ensure subcontractors and suppliers perform as committed.
    確保分包商和供應商履行承諾。
  9. Increase productivity.
    增加生產力。
  10. Get what should be entitled.
    爭取應得的。
  11. Reduce what should not be lost.
    減少不應失的。
  12. Get incentives and bonus:
    獲得獎勵和獎金:
    • Perform better than contract requirements
      表現優於合同規定
    • Innovate.
      創新。
  13. Establish a proper financial accounting and costing system:
    建立完善的財務會計預算制度:
    • Know clearly the profit and loss situation of individual projects
      要清楚知道個別工程的損益情況
    • Keep clear records of actual expenditures and incomes
      要有清楚的實際支出及收入記錄
    • Establish a proper budgetary and final accounting system
      建立完善的預決算制度
    • Forecast the final expenditures and incomes of the whole project, and monitor and control the development.
      要對整個工程的最終支出及收入作出預測,及進行跟蹤管理。
  14. Pay attention to causes which may increase costs, and take proper records.
    對任何會使工程成本會增加的原因多加留意,並作出適當的記錄。
  15. Pay attention to opportunities which may increase incomes, take proper records, and raise requests for compensation at appropriate times. 
    對任何會使工程收入增加的機會多加留意,並作出適當的記錄,及適時提出爭取要求。
  16. Be mindful of oral communications without record:
    小心口講無憑:
    • During construction, it is common for Contractors to follow Employers' or Architects' oral instructions and carry out work at additional cost, but they can at the end lose the chances to get paid because of insufficient records
      施工過程中,承包方往往依照發包方或建築師的口頭指令,而多做了增加成本的工作,但到頭來因記錄不全而喪失了獲得補償的機會
    • Similarly, Contractors lose chances to get paid for work which should have entitled them to payment because they have not kept proper records
      同樣地承包方往往就可以使工程收入增加的事件,未有進行適當的記錄而喪失了獲得補償的機會
    • Therefore, record keeping is of paramount importance
      因此,記錄很重要
    • Employing a dedicated person to keep records is worthwhile.
      花錢請專人進行記錄是值得的。
  17. Pay attention to time limits:
    注意期限:
    • In Hong Kong and overseas contracts, it is usual to set time bars to claims for extension of time or financial compensation. Missing the time limits will lose the right to claim. Therefore, do not overlook.
      香港及國外的合同,往往就工期延長的申請及費用索償,設定了期限。過期提交會喪失了獲考慮的機會,因此不要掉以輕心。

Site takeover
工地接收

  1. Mainly avoid existing but not obvious on-site problems that will have a bad impact in the future.
    主要避免有現存但不明顯的現場問題將來會產生壞影響。
  2. Note and record the conditions of the existing buildings on site.
    注意及記錄現場建築物的現狀。
  3. Note and record the conditions of neighbouring buildings.
    注意及記錄鄰近建築物的現狀。
  4. Record the handover of setting out benchmarks and site boundary lines.
    記錄測量基準點、紅線的交收。
  5. Carry out site level and topographical survey.
    進行地平測量。
  6. Implement settlement monitoring.
    實施沉降監測。

Fixing of Sub-Contractors and Suppliers
確定分包商及供應商

  1. Clarify the scope of the Sub-Contracts and Supply Contracts.
    明確分包及供應內容。
  2. Agree the prices.
    商定價格。

Management of Drawings
圖紙管理

  1. Aim at reducing abortive work and strengthening the basis for additional payments.
    目標為減少返工、加強追加工程款的依據。
  2. Distinguish between:
    區分:
    • Tender Drawings
      招標圖
    • Contract Drawings
      合同圖
    • Variation drawings (issued under instructions)
      變更圖(按指令發出)
    • Statutory submission drawings
      政府送審圖
    • Shop drawings
      制配圖
    • Fabrication drawings
      預製圖
    • Working drawings / construction drawings
      施工圖
    • Installation drawings
      安裝圖
    • Builder’s work drawings
      土建圖
    • Combined services drawings
      機電綜合圖
    • Record drawings of idling and abortive work
      窩工返工記錄圖
    • As-built drawings.
      竣工圖。
  3. Submit or request as appropriate.
    按責任發出或要求。
  4. Record issuance and receipt of new and revised drawings.
    記錄發出和接收的新的和修訂的圖紙。
  5. Always use the latest drawings.
    永遠要使用新版的圖紙。
  6. Do not throw away superseded drawings.
    用過的舊版圖紙不能拋掉。

Design briefing/co-ordination meetings
設計交底會/協調會

  1. Between Employer and Consultants.
    發包方及顧問之間。
  2. Between Consultants, Contractors and Sub-Contractors.
    顧問、總包及分包之間。
  3. Between Main Contractor and Sub-Contractors.
    總包及分包之間。
  4. Explaining, co-ordinating, commenting and approving drawings.
    解釋、協調、評論和批准圖紙。

​​​​​​​Site management
現場管理

  1. Site:
    工地:
    • Site security
      現場安保
    • Accident records
      事故記錄
    • Effecting insurances.
      保險的落實。
  2. Planning and design:
    規劃及設計:
    • Design co-ordination meetings
      設計交底會
    • Progress of submission of shop drawings
      制配圖紙送審進度
    • Progress of statutory approvals
      政府批文進度
    • Progress of selection of sub-contractors
      分包定標進度
    • Report on variation instructions.
      變更指令報告。
  3. Materials:
    材料:
    • Monitoring of material ordering progress
      監控訂料進度
    • Recording of incoming and outgoing of materials
      記錄進料領料情況
    • Control of wastes
      控制損耗
    • Regular removal of rubbish
      定期清理垃圾
    • Checking for unnecessary waste
      檢查有沒有不必要之浪費
    • Monitoring of residual value.
      監控殘料餘值。
  4. Construction:
    施工:
    • Coordination of working sequence
      協調工序先後
    • Coordination of the use of temporary facilities
      協調臨時設施的使用
    • Assurance to use latest drawings
      確定用新版的圖紙
    • Assurance to use materials and workmanship according to approved samples
      確定用批核樣板的材料及工藝
    • Quality issues
      品質問題
    • Quality inspection records and status
      質檢記錄及情況
    • Record of abortive and idling work
      返工窩工記錄
    • Handling of inclement weather.
      惡劣天氣的處理。
  5. Progress:
    進度:
    • Regular progress meetings
      定期的進度會議
    • Weekly reports
      每週報告
    • Daily reports
      每日報告
    • Progress photos
      進度照片
    • Manpower status and records
      人手情況及報告
    • Progress reports
      施工進度
    • Delay records.
      工期延誤報告。

不外乎

  1. 开源
  2. 节流(转移风险)

开源

  1. 多拿工程亦算是公司开源的主要内容
  2. 但拿到工程后,开源的方法则有限而艰巨
  3. 不外乎靠变更及索赔来增加收入
  4. 亦可以征费的方式对分包方收取各种费用,例如:
    • 清理垃圾费
    • 垂直运输使用费
    • 分包管理费
  5. 对分包方征费未必完全按照合同的规定,有些近乎买怕费

节流

  1. 重点应是节流
  2. 更重要的是不要亏本拿工程
  3. 亏本拿工程之后能翻身的主要靠幸运之神眷顾
  4. 节流的措施可从投标阶段做起,直至保修完成

End of Page

Payment Valuations

Payment Valuations KCTang

Go to End

​​​​​​​​​​​​​​Note

21/2/2023: Revised. Section sequence re-ordered.

11/1/2021: Typo corrected.

3/4/2020: Revised.

24/12/2014: Moved from wiki.

Intro

  • Quantity Surveyors value the amounts of payments to Contractors periodically. Payments are to facilitate Contractors’ cash flow. Payment valuations can only be an approximation and should not take unduly long time to do just to improve the accuracy of minor significance to the effect of unduly deferring the payments to Contractors.

​Terms of payment

  1. There can be broadly two types of payment terms:
    • Progress payments which are made at regular intervals, usually monthly, based on valuation of value of actual work done and materials delivered, with provisions for retention
    • Stage payments which are made not at regular intervals, but are made when certain stage of construction has been achieved, e.g. upon concreting of the floor at mid-height of the building, upon concreting of the roof, upon submission for Occupation Permit, etc.
  2. The progress payment method is the usual method used and will be described in detail first. Discussion of stage payments will be given at the end.
  3. The terms “milestone payments”, “regular milestone payments” and “time-related milestone payments” are also used. It should be noted that these terms are not terms with established definitions in the industry but are used here for identification purposes only.
  4. The terms of payment and payment processes must follow the specific terms and conditions of the Contract.
  5. This paper is based on the Standard Forms of Building Contract 2005/2006 versions. Some terms used in the pre-2005 versions have also been mentioned.
  6. Government General Conditions of Contract follow similar principle, though the retention percentages and limits of retention are smaller than those adopted by the private sector. The form signed by the Quantity Surveyor is called a payment certificate rather than a payment valuation.

Advance payments and deposit payments

Meaning

  1. Advance payment or deposit payment is a portion of the Contract Sum to be paid upon the award of the Contract as a security for the Contract and to facilitate the Contractor to procure materials and to cover his early expenses.

  2. Both terms usually mean the same thing for everyday use. However, there can be some important difference between deposit payments and advance payments in some contracts. For some sales contracts, deposit is a consideration for securing the formal execution or further performance of the contract. If the buyer fails to proceed, the deposit he paid would be forfeited. If the seller fails to proceed, he has to refund the deposit in double. Advance payments do not have such implied meaning. However, the actual meaning of the two terms would depend on the terms of the individual agreements or contracts.
  3. Advance payments in the following discussions include deposit payments.

Advance payments not preferred by Employers

  1. Normal progress payments do not provide for advance payments.
  2. Advance payment is an over-payment from the point of view of the Employer, and the over-payment would possibly exist until the end of the Contract, depending on the terms of recovering the advance payments in subsequent payments.

Situation where advance payments are adopted

  1. Advance payments are usually required by suppliers or contractors for sales contracts, lift and escalator contracts, fitting out contracts, minor contracts of short duration, contracts in Mainland China.
  2. Advance payments are also appropriate for contracts which involve substantial up-front expenditure before materials are delivered to site.

​Terms of payment with advance payment

  1. Terms of payment in the form of “10% advance payment upon commencement, 85% progress payment, 2.5% retention to be released upon Substantial / Practical Completion and 2.5% retention to be released at the end of the Defects Liability Period” is quite common for less formal contracts. This means that after payment of the 10% advance payment, 85% of the value of work done and materials delivered is to be paid during the course of the Works.
  2. If the Contract Sum changes, the above terms are not clear whether the already paid amounts will need to be adjusted.
  3. Expressing in cumulative percentages such as 10%, 95%, 97.5% and 100% may resolve the problem.

Recovery of advance payments relative to progress payments

  1. If the advance payment is in the form of a lump sum, how and when the advance payment is to be recovered should be stated.
  2. Advance payment is not expected to be subject to retention. The normal way to calculate retention should be adjusted.
  3. A way to present the payment valuation is as follos:
  4. Advance payments made up-front are recovered from subsequent payments. Recovery of the advance payments in subsequent payments is pro-rata to the progress value of work done and materials delivered.
  5. In this example, the recovery is based on:
    • (Original advance payment / Original Contract Sum) x gross amount of progress payment = 10% x gross amount of progress payment.
  6. If the Contract Sum is increased during the course of the Works, the recovery of deposit will be quicker. However, if the Contract Sum is reduced during the course of the Works, the recovery will be slower and it will leave a portion unrecovered upon Substantial / Practical Completion. It is advisable that the formula should be revised to relate to the Estimated Final Contract Sum instead of the Original Contract Sum as follows:
    • Original advance payment x (Gross amount of progress payment / Estimated Final Contract Sum) = Original advance payment x percentage of work done and materials on site.
  7. No matter which of the above calculations are used, only until the contract works are fully completed will the advance payment be fully recovered. That is why advance payment creates over-payment until Substantial / Practical Completion or beyond.

Faster recovery of advance payments

  1. To avoid leaving the advance payments there for too long, other methods to ensure quicker recovery of advance payments can be used, subject to agreement by both contract parties.
  2. A method which would not be welcome by contractors would be full recovery in the second Interim Certificate.
  3. Other more moderate methods are:
    • Rate of recovery of advance payments being faster than the progress of work – for example advance payment made equal to 10% of the Contract Sum to be recovered at 20% of the gross amount of progress payment
    • Recovery by instalments at specified number of Interim Certificates, e.g. at the 3rd, 5th and 7th payments
    • Recovery by instalments at Interim Certificates issued after specified days, e.g. x, y, z months after commencement of the Works.
  4. The last two methods described above are not dependent on the progress of work, it has the advantage of forcing the Contractor not to be late in progress, otherwise he may receive less cash inflow due.

Bonds

  • Advance payments or deposits are a kind of over-payment before they are fully recovered. If the Contractor or Supplier disappears or repudiates the Contract after receipt of advance payments or deposits, the Employer will have no redress unless measures like the following are implemented:
    • The amount of surety bond to be increased to cover the advance payments or deposit payments and the surety bond to be obtained before payment
    • Advance payment bond to be provided by the Contractor or Supplier as security.

Stage payments

Meaning

  1. Under a “stage payment” method, the Works are broken down into a number of stages of completion each with a value which will be paid on completion of the relevant stage of the Works. Unlike the normal progress payment method where work done and materials on site are valued and paid for at regular intervals, stage payments are not made at regular intervals but are made only when a certain stage of the Works is completed.
  2. For some contracts when the various stages of completion of the Works are defined by means of milestones, the stage payment method is called “milestone payment” method.
  3. An example of stage or milestone payment would be:
  4. The value assigned to each stage or milestone should preferably be equal to the value of the work required to achieve the stage or milestone, but they can also be made different purposely.

Use of stage or milestone payments

  1. Stage payment method is usually for sales contracts, lift and escalator contracts, fitting out contracts, contracts for single block speculative residential building, minor contracts, civil engineering contracts.
  2. Stage payment method would be appropriate for contracts which can have easily defined stages of completion of the Works, for contracts which are of simple nature, for contracts which the Architect would not like to spend time to value the quantities of work and materials delivered on regular basis.
  3. Stage or milestone payments are simple to operate if not subjected to Employers’ changes or Contractors’ abuse.
  4. Stage or milestone payments are not suitable for complex projects which are prone to design and programme changes.
  5. Substantial design and programme changes may render the original terms of payments not workable and require revisions which may be too frequent and laborious that the original intent to save work in carrying out normal valuation based on work done and materials delivery is no longer realized.

Problems with stage or milestone payments

  1. The definitions of stages (or milestones) should be broad and simple enough to enable easy judgment as to their achievement by visual inspection without requiring detailed valuation.
  2. If the definitions of the stages are too rigid, literal interpretation of the definitions may result in non-achievement of the stages and hence non-payment. A definition of “100% completion”, if interpreted literally, would always lead to argument.
  3. If the definitions of the stages are too complex thus requiring detailed calculations, the original intent to have a simple payment valuation method is defeated.
  4. On the other hand, if the definitions are too loose, the Contractor may take advantage to do work just enough to match the definitions while the value assigned for the stage may in fact have already allowed for a greater extent of work.

Regular milestone payments

  1. A variance of the stage payment or milestone payment method is to break down the Works into greater number of more detailed stages or milestones and to value the Works at regular intervals. By the regular valuation date, the various stages or milestones are checked to see if they are achieved. The corresponding amounts of those stages or milestones achieved will be included in the current payment certificate. No payment will be made in respect of those not achieved. An example of such milestone payment calculation is as follows:
  2. The time factor is made a factor in making payments.

Use of regular milestone payments

  • The advantage of the regular milestone payment method is that valuation is made at regular intervals, such that the Contractor can receive money regularly though smaller in amount as compared to non-regular stage payment method.

Problems with regular milestone payments

  1. To enable regular milestone payments to work, the Works have to be broken done into greater number of milestones. Some degree of concurrency would be created. A case may be encountered where the Contractor may be so unlucky that substantial number of milestones are only 95% achieved and therefore he cannot be entitled to payment though the Works if viewed as a whole may be 40% complete.
  2. Furthermore, the milestones are usually defined with reference to a programme planned before tendering. The programmed activities planned before tendering without the Contractor’s input may not be realistic when compared to the Contractor’s intended sequence of work after contract award. If there is any further critical variation to the Works or serious disruption to the original programme and logic such that the definitions of the activities can no longer be achievable or can only be achieved until the very late stage of the Works, payments will be seriously deferred. The milestone payment schedule needs to be revised to be realistic or workable. The task of making such revision may be similar to that required to do a normal progress valuation. If the milestone payment schedule needs to be constantly revised to be realistic, it may be better to use normal progress method.

Time-related milestone payments

  1. A more stringent form of time-related milestone payments is to relate the milestone to a specific calendar day or a specific period after commencement. Failure to achieve the milestone by the prescribed date or within the prescribed period will lead to no payment and payment will have to wait till a subsequent qualifying milestone. An example would be like this:​
  2. If Milestone B cannot be achieved by 1/6/2002, no payment will be made. If Milestone C is achieved by 1/9/2002, payment will be made for Milestones B and C, otherwise, depending on the detailed terms of the milestone payment method, no payment will be made for both or payment will be made for Milestone B only.

Use of time-related milestone payments

  1. Time-related milestone payments put strong emphasis on achievement in relation to time and greater commitment from contractors towards time.
  2. Time-related milestone payment method is suitable for time critical projects.

Possible solutions to alleviate problems

  • To alleviate some of the problems with stage or milestone payments mentioned above, the following measures may be adopted:
    • Use realistic definitions for stages or milestones with margin for interpretation
    • Minimize concurrent activities when devising the stages or milestones
    • Minimize post contract changes
    • Include a condition to the effect that in case the cumulative total of stage payments deviates from the value based on work done and materials delivery by a certain percentage then payments will be based on the latter. (Valuation needs not be done every time but would be done only when it is suspected that the deviation is great.)
    • Re-agree the terms when it is considered necessary to better represent the latest situation.

Payment processes

  1. The usual processes for payment are:
    • Contractor’s Payment Application → QS’s Valuation → Architect’s Certification → Contractor’s Presentation → Employer’s Honouring.
  2. A more detailed description is as follows:
    • the Contractor, Nominated Sub-Contractors and Nominated Suppliers supply materials and, where applicable, carry out work
    • the Contractor, Nominated Sub-Contractors and Nominated Suppliers calculate the values of materials supplied and work done by them
    • the Nominated Sub-Contractors and Nominated Suppliers submit their payment applications to the Contractor, with copies to the Architect, the Quantity Surveyor, the M&E Consultant (where applicable), and the Employer (usually)
    • the Contractor submits his payment application (incorporating applications from the Nominated Sub-Contractors and Nominated Suppliers) to the Architect, with copies to the Employer, the Quantity Surveyor, the M&E Consultant (where applicable)
    • the Quantity Surveyor visits the Site, inspects and records the extent of unfixed materials and work done on site, in the presence of the Contractor’s representative (usually site quantity surveyor) and, if considered necessary, representatives from the Nominated Sub-Contractors and Nominated Suppliers
    • the Quantity Surveyor calculates the values of unfixed materials and work done on site
    • the M&E Consultant similarly visits the Site, values M&E works, and issues his payment valuation to the Quantity Surveyor
    • the Quantity Surveyor issues his draft payment valuation incorporating the M&E Consultant’s valuations) to the Contractor to seek his agreement, with copies to the Employer, the Architect and the M&E Consultant for their information and, if they so desire, comments
    • the Quantity Surveyor issues his formal payment valuation (incorporating the M&E Consultant’s valuation) to the Architect, with copies to the Employer, M&E Consultant, and the Contractor
    • the Quantity Surveyor issues advice individually to Nominated Sub-Contractors and Suppliers to inform them the amounts of payment included in the main payment valuation
    • the Architect issues his payment certificates certifying the amounts payable to the Contractor, Nominated Sub-Contractors and Nominated Suppliers
    • the Contractor presents the payment certificate to the Employer for payment
    • the Employer pays the Contractor.

Time

Dates

  1. Date of Application” means the date of the Contractor’s payment application.
  2. Date on Site” means the date when the QS visits the Site to carry out valuation.
  3. Date of Valuation” means the cut-off date to calculate work done and materials on site. This is usually the same as the Date on site.
  4. "Date of Issuing Valuation" / "Date of Recommendation":
    • Traditionally, the QS’s valuation is called a payment recommendation.
    • “Date of Issuing Valuation” or “Date of Recommendation” means the date of the QS’s letter issuing the valuation for payment. This can only be later than the Date of Valuation.
  5. Date of Certificate” means the date of the Architect’s Interim Certificate.

Frequency of Interim Certificates

  1. The Contract should state the time interval between successive payment certificates. This is usually one month.
  2. Period of Interim Certificates” is used to mean such time interval.
  3. The 2005/2006 versions of the Standard Forms of Building Contract specify that the first Interim Certificate should not be issued later than 42 days after the Commencement Date of the Contract.
  4. The 2005/2006 versions also specify that the payment application should be submitted not later than 14 days before the due date for Interim Certificate, and the payment valuation should be submitted not later than 7 days before the due date for Interim Certificate. The exact date of the valuation has not been expressly stated. It should be a day between the 14 days and the 7 days.

Period for payment of certificates / Period for Honouring Certificates

  1. The Contract should state the grace period to pay after the issue of a payment certificate.
  2. This period is called “period for payment certificate” in the 2005/2006 versions of the Standard Forms of Building Contract. The default period is 14 calendar days from the date of the certificate.
  3. This period is called “Period for Honouring Certificates” in the pre-2005 Standard Forms of Building Contract. The default is 14 calendar days after the presentation by the Contractor of the certificate to the Employer. This is longer.
  4. The Contractor usually would issue an invoice for the same amount when requesting payment or presenting the Certificate.
  5. Some developers would require a period long than 14 days.

Payment to Nominated Sub-Contractors and Suppliers

  1. The Contract should state the period to pay the Nominated Sub-Contractors and Suppliers.
  2. The Standard Forms of Building Contract require this to be within 14 days of receipt by the Contractor of the relevant payment from the Employer.

Pay-when-paid

  1. Payment to Nominated Sub-Contractors and Suppliers is a “pay-when-paid” arrangement. The Contractor would not pay if he has not received the same money from the Employer.
  2. Argument would arise if due to deductions as a result of certain defaults of the Contractor, the total amount certified as due to the Contractor is less than that certified as due to Nominated Sub-Contractors and Suppliers, but the Contractor denies that the defaults are his, then the Contractor would declare that he has not received sufficient payment in respect of the Nominated Sub-Contracts and Supply Contracts and therefore he would not pay in full. The situation would become messier if the defaults in question relate to delays and disruptions where the Nominated Sub-Contractors and Suppliers are implicated as well.
  3. The 2005/2006 versions of the Standard Forms of Building Contract intend to remedy the problem by using the expression “within 14 days of the Contractor receiving payment or the accounting of payment from the Employer, as the case may be” meaning that once the relevant payment has been accounted for, this should be paid, notwithstanding that this has been set-off by other deductions from the payment to the Contractor.
  4. Some countries forbid pay-when-paid arrangement, meaning that the Contractor has to pay irrespective of his receipt of payment.

Valuation

Valuation format

  1. The simplest form of a payment valuation can be as follows:​
  2. This shows that each BQ item is valued against the quantity of work done.
  3. In actual practice, to calculate the quantity of each item at each payment application and valuation will take a lot of time and is an impracticable task. People actually estimate the percentage done first by quick alternative approximations and apply the percentage to the original quantity to get the quantity done.
  4. The number of items is also too many to handle. The same percentage done may be applied to different items which in fact should have slight variances.
  5. Therefore, instead of calculating each quantity done individually, it is more practicable to value based on a group of related items or items under the same heading, and estimate the percentage done based on the whole group.
  6. A valuation detail with items grouped may look like this:
  7. A valuation summary may look like this:
    • ​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​
  8. ​​​​​​​​​​​​​​A valuation statement may look like this:
    • ​​​​​​​

First payment format and procedure

  1. Set up payment valuation pro-forma.
  2. Pro-forma to be converted from BQ.
  3. Change the BQ file into a file format capable of doing calculations, such as EXCEL, if not already in such file format.
  4. If QS software is used for BQ and payment valuation, facilitate the Contractor to use the same software.
  5. Group BQ items into suitable groups (e.g. under sub-headings) to reduce the items to be valued.
  6. Valuation to be based on percentages rather than based on absolute quantities.
  7. Valuation to be based on gross value to-date rather than nett value since last payment.
  8. Discuss with the Contractor to agree format and procedure.
  9. Agree with the Contractor the principle and calculation methods for paying preliminaries.
  10. Running totals to be kept for material delivery.
  11. A.I. as authority for paying variations.

Payment for preliminaries

  1. Preliminaries prices should be broken down into initial costs, time related running costs, work related running costs and removal costs for payment purposes. The breakdown is usually not done when pricing the BQ but is agreed before the payment application.
  2. A valuation for the preliminaries (for another project) may look like this:
    • ​​​​​​​
  3. Time-related items may be paid as work-related items if clauses similar to the following are included in the Contract:
    • In the event of the amount inserted in respect of an item in this Preliminaries Section for which whole payment or substantially whole payment would normally be made at the outset of the Contract (e.g. insurances) being higher than the amount which the Contractor can substantiate, payment for the excess amount will be effected over the period of the Contract or such prolonged period caused by the Contractor
    • Payments for amounts inserted against time related items in this Preliminaries Section such as overtime, plant, foreman, watching etc. will be effected over the period of the Contract or such prolonged period caused by the Contractor in the same proportion as the value of Contractor's work carried out is to the total value of Contractor's work (excluding Preliminaries)
    • In the event of no amounts being inserted by the Contractor in respect of this Section, no relative payment whatsoever will be included in interim payments.

(Mistake in swapped use of "time-related" and "work-related" in the first sentence corrected, 11/1/2021)​​​​​​​

Arrive at the value

  1. Proven with photos and records.
  2. Systematic.
  3. Clear.
  4. Reasonable factors.
  5. Arithmetically correct calculations.
  6. As soon as possible.

Amounts

Gross valuation

  1. Gross valuation” of payment is the estimated value of:
    • the work properly executed and of
    • the materials and goods delivered to or adjacent to the Works for use thereon.
  2. Any adjustments to the Contract Sum should also be reflected in the gross valuation.
  3. This includes variations, remeasurement, loss and expense compensation, etc. based on their currently assessed values, but excludes liquidated damages which are to be handled not as part of the payment valuation or payment certificate but as a separate deduction or set-off procedure against the payment due.

Retention

  • Retention” is a portion of the Gross Valuation retained from payment and is to be released until after Substantial Completion / Practical Completion.

Nett valuation

  • Nett valuation” of payment is gross valuation less retention.

Nett amount due

  • Nett amount due” is the nett valuation less previous payments. The relationship of the various terms can be illustrated by the following example:

Gross valuation

Work properly executed

  1. The value of work done should include all those items of work partially or wholly done on site but shall exclude those non-conforming or defective work.
  2. If an item of work is specifically rejected by the Architect, its value should not be included the Gross Valuation.
  3. If defects are found in an item of work which has partially been done but the defects are not serious enough for rejection of the whole of the work, then when calculating the proportion of the value of the work to be included in the Gross Valuation, some reductions should be made to account for the defects.
  4. Difficulties would arise upon Substantial Completion / Practical Completion when substantially all items of work are done but there are still defects to be made good. Contractors would obviously not like to see that all items in questions are subject to a reduction. They would argue that there is still retention to be retained. Whether reduction on top of retention should be made would depend on the seriousness of the defects. In theory, defective work should be rejected and therefore not paid. However, if the work is basically all right but with some minor imperfections which require making good but not complete replacement of the work, and if the cost of making good such minor imperfections can be covered by the retention money, then the full value of the work should be included in the Gross Valuation.
  5. To avoid doubt, it is advisable for the Architect to formally reject the whole of those items of work which have serious defects.

Unfixed materials on site

  1. A simplified term for “materials and goods delivered to or adjacent to the Works for use thereon” would be “unfixed materials on site”. If the materials and goods have been fixed, their value would be included in the value of work done. If materials are not on or adjacent to the Site, they would not normally be included in the Gross Valuation.
  2. Materials and goods can be easily taken out of the Site or may be stolen. Unfixed materials and goods are more vulnerable to loss and damage whether due to natural or human causes. Some materials such as cement and lime may easily deteriorate if they are not stored with proper protection. Therefore, to qualify for inclusion in the Gross Valuation, materials and goods must have been:
    • reasonably, properly and not prematurely brought to or placed adjacent to the Works
    • adequately protected against weather or other casualties.
  3. Most materials and goods should be delivered not more than one month in advance of the time required for use. Quantities delivered more than one month in advance should be queried.
  4. Possibly acceptable reasons are:
    • The total quantity involved is so small that it is not economical to divide into more than one delivery
    • The quantity must be delivered in one batch to ensure consistency in colour, e.g. stone.
  5. The following reasons which are for the contractor’s own benefit and convenience would not be acceptable:
    • Larger quantities are delivered to secure earlier payment
    • Larger quantities are delivered to secure the cheaper supply price
    • Larger quantities are delivered to reduce off-site storage costs.
  6. Prompt delivery in accordance with the original programme without regard to the actual progress may still be a premature delivery.
  7. Quantities delivered more than two months in advance can be reviewed as premature.

Wastage

  1. Wastage is to be allowed for when considering supply quantities for materials on site.
  2. Wastage factors are to be used for different items of work, depending on the difficulty of work.
  3. However, a flat wastage factor may be acceptable as a quick method in case of small differences in the total quantities.

Quantities unfixed

  1. Can be based on counting or measurement of materials stored on site.
  2. Can also be done based on:
    • Quantities delivered to site evidenced by delivery notes – quantities valued as done x (1 + wastage factor)
    • But a check with the materials found on site should still be done to ensure no significant discrepancy.

Acceptability of Contractor’s suppliers’ quotations

  1. Suppliers’ invoices and receipts should be submitted to support the prices paid or payable by the Contractor.
  2. Note that quotations are not necessarily contracts.
  3. Beware of false quotations and contracts.
  4. Counter-check against BQ rates is required.

Effect of BQ rates on value payable for materials on site

  1. The materials on site should be paid their costs delivered to site with an allowance for the Contractor’s profit.
  2. However, in case of underpriced all-in rates, the material costs should not be paid in full but should only be a reasonable proportion of the all-in rates.

Materials off-site

  1. Payment is not normally made for materials not yet delivered to site.
  2. If payments for materials off-site are to be permitted, the following conditions should be made and observed:
    • The materials or goods are intended for inclusion in the Works
    • The materials or goods are in accordance with the Contract
    • The Contractor furnishes to the Architect reasonable proof that the premises where the materials or goods have been assembled or stored are owned or leased by the Contractor
    • The materials or goods have been and are set apart at the premises where they have been assembled or stored, and have been clearly and visibly marked, individually or in sets, so as to identify
      • the person to whose order they are held
      • their destination as being the Works
      • (i.e. distinguishable from other materials and goods in the same storage place)
    • The Contractor furnishes to the Architect evidence that such materials or goods are insured against the perils similar to those set out in the insurance clause of the Contract (i.e. insurance cover against loss or damage after payment and prior to delivery)
    • The Contractor furnishes to the Architect reasonable proof that the property in such materials or goods is in the Contractor.
  3. The last requirement is very important. If the Contractor does not validly possess the property in the materials or goods, the property cannot validly pass to the Employer even if the Employer has paid for it. This is particularly so if the materials and goods are store off-site and mixed with other materials and goods not for the Works.

Total value to-date instead of value since last

  1. One very important rule in making payment valuation is: always value the total value to-date since the beginning instead of value the value since the last payment. This rule is implied by the Standard Forms of Building Contract and is a golden rule to follow.
  2. Valuation every month cannot be exact. There could be errors in previous valuations. Work or materials included in previous valuation could subsequent be found to be defective. Therefore, by valuing the total value to-date since the beginning and subtracting from it whatever was previously valued, whether the previously valued was correct or incorrect, previous errors would not perpetuate unnoticed.

Retention

Use of retention

  1. The primary intention to have retention is to reserve some money in case the contractors fail to make good defects and the Employer has to employ others to do so.
  2. However, the Employer is entitled to make other deductions from the retention so long as he is entitled to make deductions from the Contract.

No interest paid for retention

  1. Retention is held by the Employer.
  2. The Standard Forms of Building Contract state the Employer has no obligation to invest. No interest will be paid for retention upon release.

Retention percentage / percentage of Certified Value retained

  1. The percentage of the Gross Valuation that the Employer may retain is called “Retention Percentage” (2005/2006 versions) or “Percentage of Certified Value Retained” (pre-2005 versions) where “Certified Value” means the Gross Valuation.
  2. The percentage is usually 10%.
  3. The Standard Forms of Building Contract state that the following are not subject to retention:
    • Direct loss and/or expense due to delay and disruption
    • Value of work carried out by Nominated Sub-Contractors
    • Value of materials or goods supplied by Nominated Suppliers
    • Value of any adjustment for fluctuations in the costs of labour or materials.
  4. Retention in respect of Nominated Sub-Contractors shall be dealt with in accordance with the Nominated Sub-Contracts. The provisions and percentages would usually be similar to the Main Contract.
  5. Nominated Supply Contracts usually do not have retention.
  6. Nominated Sub-Contractors’ retention is also held by the Employer.

Limit of Retention

  1. When the amount of retention reaches certain limit, the retention would not be increased further. That limit is called “Limit of Retention” or “Limit of Retention Fund”.
  2. The Limit of Retention is usually 5% of the Contract Sum.
  3. If the Contract Sum includes Prime Cost Sums for Nominated Sub-Contracts, the Limit of Retention would be stated as “5% of the Contract Sum excluding prime cost sums for Nominated Sub-Contractors’ works (to the nearest one thousand dollars) plus the Retention Funds held in respect of Nominated Sub-Contractors”. This means that the limit in respect of the Contractor’s own work is calculated separately from the Nominated Sub-Contractors’ works. The Contractor’s own Limit of Retention is calculated based on “the Contract Sum excluding prime cost sums for Nominated Sub-Contracts”. Therefore, this is less than that based on the Contract Sum. However, it should be noted that prime cost sums for Nominated Supply Contracts are not subtracted. This means that the Contractor has to share a burden of retention in respect of the value of Nominated Supply Contracts which usually do not have retention.

Release of one moiety of retention upon Substantial / Practical Completion

  1. One moiety” means “half”. One moiety of the retention is to be released upon the issue of the Certificate of Substantial / Practical Completion and the other moiety is to be released upon the issue of the Defects Rectification Certificate / Certificate of Completion of Making Good Defects.
  2. It the time is not too distant or the Contractor does not have serious objection, the release of the first moiety of retention can be included in the next Interim Certificate following Substantial / Practical Completion, otherwise, a special Interim Certificate should be issued to release the retention.

Release of balance of retention

  1. The balance of the retention is to be released on the expiration of the Defects Liability Period or on the issue of the Defects Rectification Certificate / Certificate of Completion of Making Good Defects, whichever is the later.
  2. It is rare that the Defects Rectification Certificate / Certificate of Completion of Making Good Defects would be issued before the expiration of the Defects Liability Period. The Defects Rectification Certificate / Certificate of Completion of Making Good Defects would usually be issued after the expiration of the Defects Liability Period and the completion of the making good of defects discovered prior to the expiration of the Defects Liability Period.
  3. A payment certificate is to be issued to release the balance of the retention.

Other things to check before release of balance of retention

  1. The release of the balance of the retention does not have to wait till the settlement of the Final Account. However, the Final Contract Sum assessed at that moment should be checked to see if there has been over-payment. If there has been over-payment, part of the balance of the retention may need to be used to off-set the over-payment.
  2. The Contract may also specify in the Special Conditions, the Bills of Quantities or the Specification that the release of retention is subject to submission of all guarantees, warranties, bonds, maintenance manuals, operating instructions, as-built drawings, etc. The contract provisions should be checked to ensure compliance before release of the balance of the retention.

Final Certificate and Payment

Final Certificate

  1. Payment of the balance of the Final Account to the Contractor is certified by means of the Final Certificate.
  2. The 2005/2006 versions of the Standard Forms of Building Contract states that the Final Certificate is to be issued as soon as practicable after the issue of the Defects Rectification Certificate for the whole of the Works and 28 days after the issuance of the signed Final Account.
  3. The Final Certificate shall state the balance of money payable to the Contractor or the money owed by the Contractor to the Employer.
  4. The Contractor may in the end owe money to the Employer due to, without limitation:
    • Over-payment of variations and provisional items
    • Retention being inadequate to cover the Employer’s cost of making good defects not made good by the Contractor
    • Deduction for loss and expense arising from defaults of the Contractor
    • Deduction for liquidated damages
    • The Employer’s general rights of set off at law.
  5. Subject to any deductions authorized under the Contract, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive the amount certified 28 days after the issue of the Final Certificate.
  6. Usually the Final Account shall cover all deductions authorized under the Contract. However, if the Final Account is agreed much earlier than the issue of the Final Certificate, the Final Certificate should take into account of all authorized deductions arising after the agreement of the Final Account. Further deduction from the amount stated as due in the Final Certificate should be a very rare occurrence.

Final payment prerequisites

  • Before the Final Certificate is issued, the following should have been done:
    • Issue of Defects Rectification Certificate / Certificate of Completion of Making Good Defects
    • Settlement of Final Account
    • Settlement of extension of time and liquidated damages
    • Submission of proof of previous payments to Nominated Sub-Contractors and Suppliers
    • Submission of warranties and guarantees
    • Submission of as-built records
    • Handover of specified spares, and handover of surplus materials supplied by the Employer and specified to be returned.

Final Certificate as conclusive evidence

  1. Final Certificate is not only a certificate of payment but is also a certificate of satisfaction of the work done by the Contractor.
  2. The 2005/2006 versions of the Standard Forms of Building Contract state that the Final Certificate shall be conclusive evidence in any proceedings arising out of the Contract whether by arbitration or otherwise that the Works have been properly carried out and completed in accordance with the terms of the Contract and that any necessary effect has been given to all the terms of the Contract which require an adjustment to the Contract Sum:
    • except where any defect in or omission from the Works was not reasonably discoverable at the time of the issue of the Defects Rectification Certificate
    • except to the extent the Final Certificate has been rendered erroneous by reason of fraud, dishonesty or fraudulent concealment
    • unless contested by the dispute resolution proceedings within the specified time and only to the extent contested.

 

End of Page

Final Accounts 结算

Final Accounts 结算 KCTang

Go to End

Note

3/4/2020: Rewritten in English.

24/12/2014: Moved from wiki.

Generally

  1. The principle and practice described below is based on the Standard Forms of Building Contracts Private Editions. The Government General Conditions of Contract are similar. The contract prices are generally fixed as lump sums or unit rates as tendered for at the risks of the Contractor, and will not be changed except for specified circumstances.
  2. However, the principle and practice used in the family of New Engineering Contract are very different. The core concept is to remove the risk of the Contractor in pricing. The costs are generally reimbursed based on the final quantities carried out and the actual costs paid by the Contractor, with a percentage addition for the Contractor's fees which should cover his profit and overheads not within the definition of "costs".

Preparing Final Accounts and negotiating with the contractors to agree the Final Accounts

  1. The Final Account process should start as and when a variation instruction is issued and should not be deferred until after Substantial / Practical Completion.
  2. Any update should be reflected in the Financial Reports.
  3. The Financial Reports with the column for the amounts estimated by the QS can be issued to the Contractor so as to present a full picture of his claims and QS’s assessment, and more importantly the areas of major differences for priority treatment.
  4. Upon the agreement of the Final Contract Sum, the Financial Reports can be converted to formal Final Account format for signing.
  5. The key difference is that the Final Account only needs to show the amounts agreed and usually the gross omissions and gross additions are shown in two columns, while the Financial Reports show more columns as mentioned above, and due to limitation of page width, only a single column for the nett amounts is shown.

Descriptions​

  1. The description of the items in the Financial Reports (to be converted to Final Account) should concisely but properly represent the design change or the scope of the costs.
  2. Do not copy directly from the description in the Architect’s instruction.
  3. Traditionally, the descriptions are written in instructive sense meaning the Contractor has to do it, such as:
    • Add a concrete plinth at plant room A.
  4. However, if the Architect’s instruction says “BD general plan amendment submissions are hereby issued for your reference”, then a Financial Report description like the following would not be appropriate:
    • Issue BD general plan amendment submissions for reference.
  5. A more proper description would be:
    • Receive BD general plan amendment submissions for reference.
  6. Therefore, instead of writing in instructive sense, the following neutral style would be more appropriate:
    • Addition of a concrete plinth at plant room A.
    • Issuance of BD general plan amendment submissions for reference.

Main items adjusting Contract Sums

  1. Variations.
  2. Adjustment of prime cost rates.
  3. Adjustment of provisional quantities.
  4. Adjustment of daywork allowances.
  5. Adjustment of Provisional Sums (including Contingency Sum).
  6. Adjustment of Prime Cost Sums and related profits.
  7. Loss and expense due to disruptions and delays.
  8. Adjustment for cost fluctuations.
  9. Others adjustments such as:
    • deduction in lieu of correction of errors in setting out the Works
    • deduction in lieu of replacement or reconstruction of materials, goods or work that are not conforming
    • deduction in lieu of rectifying defects
    • addition of statutory fees and charges which are additional to the Contractor's responsibilities
    • opening up and testing materials, goods or work which are additional to the Contractors' responsibilities and complying with the Contract
    • effecting and maintaining insurances resulting from the Employer’s failure to insure.

Authority

  1. Except for loss and expense claims and adjustments for cost fluctuations, Architect’s Instructions are required to authorize the work carried out under other items causing cost additions.
  2. Loss and expense claims do not necessarily arise due to Architect’s Instructions.
  3. The rules for adjustments for cost fluctuations must have been detailed in the Contract and would not need Architect’s Instructions.
  4. Provisional quantities by default must be adjusted for the final quantities done with authorization. The authorization may be in the form of the work being shown on drawings issued for general construction. Therefore, arguably, specific Architect’s Instructions may not be required.
  5. Excessive work done not as instructed will not be entitled to payment even though it may be tolerated without removal.

Abortive work and daywork records

  1. Abortive work and daywork must be properly recorded by the Contractor with photos, dimensioned measurement details, quantities of labour employed, materials used, plant used, etc.
  2. Endorsement by the Clerk of Works or the Architect’s / Engineer’s site representatives is required.
  3. In case no endorsement is available, the Architect’s opinion should be sought.
  4. Payments made by the Contractor must be supported by invoices and receipts issued by the sub-contractors or suppliers.

Work not done

  1. Work not done but not yet omitted by an Architect’s Instruction should not be included in interim payment.
  2. Its omission value should be noted in the Financial Reports to ensure that this would not be missed in the Final Account.
  3. If eventually the work is not done, the value should be omitted from the Final Account for agreement without necessarily requiring an Architect’s Instruction.

Filing

  1. The documents relating to the above different items should be filed under different files.
  2. Architect’s instructions should each be filed under a different file section such that the instruction is put at the front of its section while other documents from estimates before AI, AI pre-approval form, Contractor’s submissions, QS assessment, etc. are filed in chronological order with the latest put on top. This would serve to tell the full history of development.

Drawing register

  1. For big projects, the Drawing Register used in the Pre-contract stage can continue to be updated, but with the Architect’s Instruction Numbers added at the column headers.
  2. The Drawing Register can reveal whether a drawing has been revised several times under different Architect’s Instructions.
  3. It is more efficient to measure the final change against the original instead of measuring changes after changes.

Rates to be used

  1. Rates used to value variation additions, remeasured provisional quantities and expenditure of provisional sums:
    • Contract rates - for work of similar character carried out under similar conditions
    • Pro-rata rates - based on contract rates for similar work but adjusted for the differences in character or conditions of work
    • Fair market rates - used if it is unreasonable to apply contract rates or pro-rata rates, e.g. work is entirely different 
      • with reference to similar work in other projects and adjusting for the differences between the two projects
      • build-up from first principle
    • Daywork rates - to be used when it is unreasonable to measure and value the work based on the quantity of the work, e.g. in case of demolition, piecemeal breaking up of openings.
  2. Rates used to value variation omissions and omission of original provisional quantities
    • Contract rates - for omission of quantities of original work
    • Pro-rata rates - if the reduction in the quantities is significant and renders the contract rates for the remaining quantities unreasonable to apply, then the rates for the remaining quantities can be adjusted for the cost differences caused by that reduction. An example is a change in the economy of scale. The contract rates have to share some fixed costs based on the original quantities. If the quantities are reduced significantly, the fixed costs contributed by the remaining quantity will not be sufficient. An adjustment should be made to the contract rate to compensate the contribution so lost.

High or low contract rates

  • Contract rates are to be applied no matter whether they are high or low. The same principle applies to adjusting contract rates for pro-rata rates. The adjustment should be for the cost difference between the differences in character or conditions or economy of scale.

Omission and addition

  1. Generally, when a drawing is revised, the quantities of the items changed are measured as omissions, and the quantities of the items after change are measured as additions.
  2. However, if only the component design is changed but the quantity remains the same, then it should be more expedient just to apply the rate difference to the quantity to give the net adjustment.

Variations

  1. The 2005/2006 versions of the Standard Forms of Building Contract define variations as:

Variation: a change instructed by the Architect to the design, quality or quantity of the Works including:

(i)         an alteration to the type, standard or quality of any of the materials or goods comprising the Works;

(ii)        the addition, substitution or omission of work; and

(iii)      the removal from the Site of materials or goods and the demolition and removal of work except where provided for in the Contract or where the materials, goods or work are not in accordance with the contract clause regarding types, standards and quality;

or the imposition of an obligation or restriction instructed by the Architect regarding:

(iv)      access to the Site or use of any parts of the Site;

(v)      limitation of working space;

(vi)      limitation of working hours; or

(vii)     the sequence of carrying out or completing work;

or the addition or alteration to or omission of such obligations or restrictions imposed by the Contract.

  1. The Government General Conditions of Contract are very similar.
  2. The pre-2005/2006 versions of the Standard Forms of Building Contract do not have scope similar to (iv) to (vii).
  3. The Architect Instruction number must be stated to indicate the authority.

Errors

  1. Errors in Tender Documents forming part of the Contract Documents are to be corrected for carrying out the work and the cost effects are to be treated as variations.
  2. Architect’s Instructions would usually be issued to make the corrections of errors in the Drawings and Specification without being explicit of being an error correction.
  3. No Architect’s Instruction is required for correction of BQ errors, and the correction is deemed to be a variation. However, the presence of BQ errors would not give a good image of the QS to the Client. If it so happens that the BQ items with errors are also subject to design change, then it is not uncommon that the correction of BQ errors will be made when valuing the design change.
  4. Errors in the Contractor's pricing of the Tender Documents are not to affect the Contract Sum.

Adjustment of prime cost rates

  1. The Final Account adjustment items would be like:
    • Omission of original quantity x prime cost rate = gross omission
    • Addition of original quantity x actual unit cost = gross addition
  2. Alternatively
    • Original quantity x (actual unit cost - prime cost rate) = net adjustment
  3. The BQ reference should be stated.
  4. Where available, state also the Architect Instruction number.
  5. Usually, the Contract specifies that no adjustment will be made for wastage or profit and overheads.
  6. However, if the actual unit cost is excessively more than the prime cost rate, the Contractor will suffer in the wastage cost with insufficient profit and overheads. A reasonable compensation of the excessive effects of the wastage and profit and overheads should be made.
  7. On the other hand, there can be savings in other items where the actual unit costs are less than their prime cost rates.
  8. Therefore, the reasonable compensation should then take a global view considering all prime cost rate adjustments.
  9. The all-in rate after adjusting the prime cost rate for the actual unit cost is as follows:
    • Original all-in rate – prime cost rate + actual unit cost = adjusted all-in rate
  10. The adjusted all-in rates should be applied to changes to the original quantity due to variations whether it be omission or addition.
  11. If the original all-in rates are consistently used for valuing variations, then the adjustment of prime cost rates should be based on the final quantities inclusive of all variations.
  12. The materials or work covered by the prime cost rates require specific selection and approval by the Architect, therefore, the actual unit cost should be part of his consideration and the Architect’s Instruction confirming the selection should state the actual unit cost approved.
  13. However, there may be cases that this process is overlooked or the selection is just left to the Contractor who submit the actual unit cost information after carrying out the work.
  14. In this case, the actual receipt of money paid must be submitted. Quotations and invoices can all be subject to changes. Receipts may also be forged, but this is a criminal offence.

Adjustment of provisional quantities

  1. The Final Account adjustment is in the form of remeasurement with items like:
    • Omission of original quantity x original rate = gross omission
    • Addition of final quantity x original rate = gross addition
  2. The BQ reference should be stated.
  3. Where available, state also the Architect Instruction numbers.
  4. The final quantities should be measured based on the final set of drawings issued under Architect’s Instructions for construction.
  5. It is not necessary that the Architect’s Instruction specifically states that the drawings are for the purpose of remeasurement.
  6. While it is time saving to measure based on the final set of drawings, it may mean to happen at a very late stage of construction leaving no realistic amounts for payment valuation and financial reporting.
  7. Therefore, it is also possible to measure based on a comprehensive set of drawings in the early stage and treat all subject changes as variations.
  8. It is possible than the design of the original provisional quantities has been changed but the nature remains the same, for example, provisional quantities have been included in the Contract for the components making up composite items, but the component sizes have been changed. Therefore, pro-rata rates have to be valued for the varied component. It should be acceptable to include the varied components at pro-rata rates in the adjustment of provisional quantities rather than treating them artificially as variation items.

Adjustment of daywork allowances

  1. A daywork schedule included in the BQ usually contains the following:
    • Daily or hourly labour rates inclusive of profit and overheads
    • Daily or hourly plant rates inclusive of profit and overheads
    • Provisional Sums for materials with priced % mark-up for profit
  2. If the BQ includes a daywork schedule, the Final Account adjustment items will be like:
    • Omission of total of daywork schedule
  3. The BQ number should be stated.
  4. The additions for expenditure based on daywork rates should be reflected in the relevant variations instead of being shown here.
  5. The quantities of labour, materials and plant used must be endorsed by the Clerk of Works or the Architect’s or Engineer’s site representative, failing which, the Architect.
  6. Difficulties can arise as to how to count the lunch hours and recess minutes.
  7. The quantities of materials can include wastage.
  8. The priced labour rates and plant rates are to be used
  9. The material costs must be evidenced by receipts issued by the suppliers, with an addition for profit based on the priced % mark-up.

Adjustment of Provisional Sums (including Contingency Sum)

  1. The Final Account adjustment items will be like:
    • Omission of provisional sum for some work
    • Addition of work at room A
    • Addition of work at room B
  2. The BQ reference should be stated for the omission.
  3. The Architect’s Instruction numbers should be stated for the additions.
  4. The backup calculations for the addition should be in the form of quantities x rates.
  5. It is usual to omit the Contingency Sum first in the Final Statement, and show the adjustment of other Provisional Sums separately in a later section.

Adjustment of Prime Cost Sums and related profits

  1. The Final Account adjustment items will be like:
    • Omission of prime cost sum for Lift Nominated Sub-Contract Works
    • Omission of profit at %
    • Omission of attendance
    • Addition of Final Sub-Contract Sum for Lift Nominated Sub-Contract Works
    • Addition of profit at %
    • Addition of attendance
  2. The BQ reference should be stated for the omission.
  3. The Architect’s Instruction numbers nominating the Sub-Contractor should be stated for the additions.
  4. The price for attendance should be treated as lump sums and not to be adjusted.
  5. However, if because of a significant change of the scope of the Sub-Contract Works resulting in different scope of attendance, then adjustment of the attendance would need to be made.

Adjustment of Nominated Sub-Contract or Supply Contract Sums

  1. The original Nominated Sub-Contract or Supply Contract Sums are also subject to adjustments for variations, provisional quantities, etc. as described above. A separate Final Account should be prepared for each of them.
  2. The Final Sub-Contract Sum or Supply Contract Sums are then brought forward to the adjustment of Prime Cost Sums.

Loss and expense due to disruptions and delays

  1. Loss and expense claims arise when the normal valuation cannot cover the Contractor’s costs.
  2. Loss and expense due to variations (e.g. late additional order due to late instructions, reduced quantity after ordering, late instruction after the bulk of work has been completed) should be dealt with under the variations as much as possible, except when they involve compensation related to disruption to the regular progress of the relevant work (with or without variation change in quantities) or prolongation of the Contract Period.
  3. Loss and expense due to disruptions and delays are permissible if the event causing the disruptions and delays are compensable events under the Contract.
  4. The 2005/2006 versions of the Standard Forms of Building Contract allow compensation of loss and expense due to the following events (“qualifying events”):
    • an Architect's instruction to resolve an ambiguity, discrepancy in or divergence between the documents listed in that clause
    • an Architect's instruction requiring the opening up for inspection of work covered up or the testing of materials, goods or work and the consequential making good where the cost of such opening up, testing and making good is required by that clause to be added to the Contract Sum
    • an Architect's instruction requiring a Variation
    • an Architect’s instruction resulting in an increase in the work to be carried out of sufficient magnitude to cause delay or disruption, provided that the variance was not apparent from the Contract Drawings
    • an Architect's instruction regarding:
      • the postponement of the Date for Possession of the Site or a part of the Site
      • the postponement of the Commencement Date of the whole or a part of the Works; or
      • the postponement or suspension of the whole or a part of the Works, unless:
        • notice of the postponement or suspension is given in the Contract; or
        • the postponement or suspension was caused by a breach of contract or other default by the Contractor or any person for whom the Contractor is responsible
    • compliance with contract clause regarding preservation of an object of antiquity or with an Architect’s instruction requiring the Contractor to permit the examination, excavation or removal by a third party of an object of antiquity found on the Site
    • late instructions from the Architect, including those to expend a Prime Cost Sum or a Provisional Sum, or the late issue of the drawings, details, descriptive schedules or other similar documents, except to the extent that the Contractor failed to inform the Architect sufficiently in advance of the time that he requires the supplementary information
    • delay or disruption caused by a sub-contractor or supplier nominated by the Architect despite the Contractor’s valid objection to the extent that the delay or disruption was attributable to the grounds for objection raised by the Contractor to the nomination of the sub-contractor or supplier
    • delay or disruption caused by a Specialist Contractor
    • the failure of the Employer to supply or supply on time materials, goods, plant or equipment that he agreed to provide for the Works
    • the failure of the Employer to give possession of the Site or a part of the Site on the agreed Date for Possession of the Site or the part of the Site, or subsequently the Employer depriving the Contractor of the whole or a part of the Site
    • any other delay or disruption for which the Employer is responsible including an act of prevention or a breach of contract.
  5. It should be noted that neutral events (i.e. events neither caused by the Employer nor the Contractor nor persons for whom they are responsible) do not have financial compensation. Only a restricted number of neutral events has extension of time.
  6. The usual heads of claims are:
    • Loss of productivity
    • Inflationary increase
    • Running site overheads (longer time to employ, engage, hire, maintain, repair)
      • Site management team (site based on head office based)
      • Site levellers
      • General support labour
      • Security guards
      • Site construction plant like tower cranes, hoists, lifts
      • Temporary site facilities like site offices, workshops, stores, water, electricity
      • Extension of insurances and bond
    • Running head office overheads
      • Head office rental, management fees, rates, air-conditioning charges, office appliances, water, electricity, telephone, internet, stationery, sundry expenses
      • Head office management and support staff
    • Finance charge on additional costs
    • Loss of profit otherwise recoverable had there been no delay
  7. Compensation of loss and expense is based on the difference between the costs incurred after the qualifying event as compared to those which would have been incurred without the event causing the event.
  8. Site overheads are mostly priced in the preliminaries, but the preliminaries prices can be higher or lower than the costs which would have been incurred without the event. Therefore, the preliminaries prices would not be used to calculate the loss and expense. However, for quick estimate, people do use the running part of the preliminaries price per day to estimate the loss and expense per day for budgetary purposes. If the preliminaries price is not out of order, people may as well settle the site overheads compensation based on the running part of the preliminaries price per day x the number of days prolonged.
  9. When the Contractor price for the head office overheads, he would estimate a lump sum or a percentage mark-up on the costs to cover his head office overheads. That percentage mark-up may be based on his company’s annual head office overheads / annual site cost. If the Contract is prolonged, the same head office overheads have to be recovered over a longer period of time, and the percentage mark-up has become less, and the Contractor will suffer loss unless he can earn more head office overheads from other projects. However, as far as this project is concerned, because the project team is engaged for a longer time to deprive the Contractor to use the same team to earn head office overheads from other projects, compensation for the under-recovery of head office overheads should be given.

Final Account format

  1. A summary of the Final Account may look like this:

  2. Most Consultant QS firms use two columns only like this:

  3. A Summary of Variations may look like this:

  4. A Summary of Adjustment of Provisional Quantities may look like this:

End of Page

Job Clearance Schedule 项目收尾检查表

Job Clearance Schedule 项目收尾检查表 KCTang

Dispute Resolution 争议的解决

Dispute Resolution 争议的解决 KCTang

Go to End

Note

25 Dec 2014: Moved from wiki.

Methods 方法

  1. Dispute resolution advisor 争议解决顾问协调
  2. Negotiation between superior management 高层领导协商
  3. Mediation 调解
  4. Arbitration 仲裁
  5. Litigation 法院裁决

Notes for Mediation

OVERALL

  1. Seating arrangement
  2. Prepare
  3. Introduce
  4. Understand
  5. Acknowledge
  6. Negotiate
  7. Agree
  8. Do not be dominating
  9. Be facilitative not inquisitorial
  10. Encourage joint discussion
  11. Do not give advice
  12. Indentify needs, interests, goals, objectives and any underlying issues
  13. Identify and discuss the issues, for example by listing an agenda
  14. Do not breach confidentiality
  15. Interests not position
  16. Needs not rights

Issues

Needs

Goals

Objectives

Common Grounds

Options

PHASES

  1. Preparatory Stage
  2. Introductory Phase
  3. Understanding Phase
  4. Negotiation Phase
  5. Agreement Phase

OPENING STATEMENT

  1. Greetings
  2. Purpose of this Meeting
  3. Introduction of Parties
  4. Self Introduction
  5. Disclosure of Interests
  6. Checking of Authorities
  7. Confirmation of Appointment
  8. Explanation of the Mediation Process
  9. Agenda of this Meeting
    • Joint Session
    • Opening Position Statement by Each
    • Identify an initial list of Common Grounds
    • Listing Issues and Agenda
    • Exchanging Views of Agenda Items to find Common Grounds
    • Separate Session
    • Joint Session
      • Acknowledging Differences
      • Needs / Goals / Objectives / Options
    • Separate Session as required
    • Joint Session to agree
  10. My role: Non-judgmental / non-directive / neutral
  11. Role of all: Finding common interests and goals / Speak freely
  12. Equal time
  13. Confidentiality
  14. Privileged / Without prejudice so far as legal
  15. Legal
  16. Voluntary
  17. Chance of Success
  18. Ground Rules / Courtesy Protocol
  19. Any questions?

OPENING POSITION STATEMENT BY EACH

  1. Listening and attending
  2. Eye contact
  3. Note taking
    • Facts and figures
    • Hints
    • Things in disputes
  4. Acknowledgement of concerns/needs/interests
  5. Use of clarifying questions
  6. Summary of parties’ opening statements
  7. Have I missed anything?

JOINT SESSION

  1. Listing Issues
    • Neutral words
    • Contract interpretation
    • Materials
    • Workmanship
    • Maintenance
    • Communication
    • Authority
    • Records
    • Programme / Progress / Time to Complete
    • Value
    • Budget
    • Quantum
    • Policy
    • Commitment
    • Business Objectives
    • Share of Workload
  2. Listing Common Grounds
    • Avoid further conflicts
    • Reduce further time and resources
    • Maintain good relationship
    • Keep reputation
  3. Listing Agenda
  4. Agree order to discuss
  5. Discuss

SEPARATE SESSIONS

  1. Greetings
  2. Procedure and confidentiality explained
  3. Probing
    • Past relationship
    • Reason for bad relationship
    • Reputation
    • Sentiment
    • Personal feeling
    • Personal involvement
    • Interests
    • Needs
    • Future relationship
    • Future expectation
    • Future business plans
    • Future personal plans
    • Costs, time and burden of alternatives
    • Mutual value
    • Retention
    • Lien
    • Budget limit
    • Objectives
    • Hidden agenda
    • Emphatic
  4. Doubt casting
    • Feasibility
    • Contractual validity
    • Accuracy of quantities
    • Reasonableness of rates
    • Third party inspection and opinion
    • Release from performance
    • Apology
    • Acknowledgement
  5. Acknowledgement
  6. Summary
    • Any missing point
  7. Suggestions

OPTIONS GENERATION

  1. Expand common grounds
    • Avoid further conflicts
    • Reduce further time and resources
    • Maintain good relationship
    • Keep reputation
  2. Identify interests and needs
  3. Options on whiteboard
    • Money
    • Timely payment
    • Alternative contracts
    • Alternative accommodation
    • Alternative measures
    • Reputation
    • Publicity
    • Future jobs
    • Future co-operation
  4. Reality testing
  5. Confidentiality stressed

AGREEMENT

  1. Terms agreed
  2. Money and Other considerations
  3. Time to implement
  4. Reality testing
  5. All issues covered
  6. Confidentiality clause
  7. Mutual release clause
  8. Scope of release
  9. Liability retained
  10. Follow up action
  11. Review of agreement implementation
  12. Non-performance of agreement
  13. Contingency arrangements
  14. Commendation of parties

End of Page

Value Management 價值管理

Value Management 價值管理 KCTang

Go to End

Note

  • 17 May 2023: Updated.
  • 28 Feb 2019: Process and Criteria added.
  • 31 Jan 2018: Created.

Different Terms 不同的名稱

  • Value analysis 價值分析 - Original name used to refer to the methodology used to analyse the values of the various components of a product.
  • Value engineering 價值工程 - A later name used when the methodology has been more well established as a system. It is said to be more focused on the technical aspects of the value study.
  • Value management 價值管理 - An even later name used when the methodology has been adopted for services and processes. It is said to be more focused on the strategic or policy aspects of the study.
  • Value methodology 價值方法 - A name referring to the methodology used in the value study.
  • They should now be regarded as synonymous without being too academic to distinguish between them.

Value 價值

  • Standard equation: Value ≈ Functions / Costs.
    標準方程式: 價值 ≈ 功能 / 成本。
  • Modified equation: Value ≈ Functions / Resources.
    修訂方程式: 價值 ≈ 功能 / 資源。
  • “Functions” can include prices, benefits, uses, worth, relationship, etc. of ALL parties.
    “功能”可包含各方的價格、好處、用處、代替成本、關係、等等。
  • "Resources” can include costs, time, labour, materials, plant, effort, waste, etc. of ALL parties.
    “資源”可包含各方的成本、時間、人工、材料、機械、努力、損耗、等等。

Worth 代替成本

  • "Worth" has a special meaning in VE/VM. It means the cost of achieving the same function using alternative means. If the worth is less than the cost of the present means, the present means has poor value.
    英文的"worth"一般亦解作價值或值得否,但在價值工程,它有特別的含意,乃指達到同樣功能的其他辦法的成本。若此"代替成本"比現行方法的成本低,則意味現行方法的價值低。

Value Index 價值指數(性價比)

  • Value index = worth / cost of a function = function worth / function cost . If worth < cost, i.e. value index < 1, then the function has poor value.
  • Somebody uses value index = cost / worth. If cost > worth, i.e., value index > 1, then the function has poor value. It is more suitably called “value opportunity index”.
  • It is suggested to use the former formula, because it is more consistent with the Value ≈ Functions / Resources formula and the intuition that higher value ratio is better.

("value opportunity index" added, 17 May 2023)

Purposes of VM 價值管理的目的

  1. Not necessarily cost reduction.
    不一定是減錢。
  2. “Cost” can be non-financial.
    ”成本” 可以不是金錢上的。
  3. Enhancing Value by:
    提升價值,可:
    • Reducing resources;
      減低資源;
    • Keeping resources unchanged;
      維持資源不變;
    • Increasing resources to a lesser extent;
      增加資源但幅度較細;
    • Increasing the extent of existing functions;
      增加現有的功能的程度;
    • Expanding the scope of functions.
      擴大功能的範圍。

Value Study 價值研究

  • A specific study on a particular product, service, process or entire project using VA / VE / VM to improve value.
  • Usually done by conducting a workshop attended by many stakeholders representing different expertise, needs and interests.
  • A value study should have the following three-stage process:
    • Pre-workshop preparation;
    • Value workshop;
    • Post-workshop documentation and implementation.

Six-Phase Value Workshop 六階段價值工作坊

  • Introduction Phase (preceding the 6 phases)
    介紹階段 (六階段前)
  • Information Phase
    資訊明暸階段
  • Function Analysis Phase
    功能分析階段
  • Creative Phase / Creativity Phase
    方案創造階段
  • Evaluation Phase
    方案評估階段
  • Development Phase
    擇優深化階段
  • Presentation Phase
    總結報告階段

Various Management Models

Integrated Workshops

  • The Housing Department in Hong Kong requires its projects to conduct partnering workshops while the Architectural Services Department and other government works department in Hong Kong require their projects to conduct VM workshops or integrated workshops covering VM, partnering, quality, risks, and integrity managements.
  • Partnering, quality and risks managements all adopt a cyclical series of processes for continual improvement.
  • The processes are very similar to that adopted by VM.
  • The systematic value methodology can be effectively applied to conduct the integrated workshops.
  • The following touches integrated workshops, not just value management workshops.

(Sub-section added, 17 May 2023)

Similarity of the Processes of Various Management Models

(Diagram added, 17 May 2023)

  • They all use similar sequential processes – analyse and improve.
  • They all call for cyclical and continual review and improvements.
  • A VM workshop is only a start at the “plan” stage and that continual review and improvements would be required throughout the course of project delivery.

(Revised, 17 May 2023)

Integration of Various Management Models for Project Delivery

  • Integrity management is the backbone throughout, and can be considered as part of the risk management.
  • Quality, health and safety should be the basic minima that a project should achieve. They are only a sub-set of all the risks which may be encountered.
  • Risk management is about preventing or mitigating risks in order to make a project successful.
  • Value management is about adding value to the project on top of mere success.
  • Non-contractual partnering helps people work easier and smoothly.

Whole Scheme of Workshop

  • Pre-workshop meeting to understand the project.
  • Pre-workshop survey of initial expectations, major objectives and issues.
  • Workshop (one day for integrated or half day for partnering):
    • Introduction Phase
    • Information Phase
    • Analysis Phase
    • <If partnering included: Drafting partnering charter (partnering attitudes, goals, objectives)>
    • Creative Phase / Creativity Phase
    • Evaluation Phase
    • Development Phase.
  • Post workshop report (Presentation Phase).
  • Regular reviews.

(Section added, 17 May 2023)

Introduction Phase

(Section added, 17 May 2023)

Rundown

  • Welcome and introduction by facilitator.
  • Presenting workshop objectives by facilitator.
  • Stating ground rules by facilitator.
  • Opening speeches by senior management stating project objects and expectations.
  • Self-introduction of participants.
  • House-warming games (if partnering included).
  • Group photos.

Some Workshop Objectives

  • Understand project objectives better.
  • Incorporate core values and corporate social responsibilities in project implementation.
  • Promote awareness of the importance and good practice of planning and design for safety in project construction.
  • Focus on creative co-operation and avoid adversarial confrontation.
  • Build working relationships based on mutual respect, trust and integrity.
  • Establish a more dynamic project organizational structure and clear line of communication.
  • Develop a formal problem-solving action plan and dispute avoidance mechanism.
  • Develop a mechanism for conducting the partnering review regularly.

Ground Rules of Workshop

  • Mutual trust and respect.
  • Equal right and opportunity.
  • Equal votes.
  • No pre-judgement.
  • Non-adversarial.
  • Better value creation.

Focus to Enhance Values

Some Project Objectives

  • Achieve better project value through mutual recognition and development of improvement opportunities.
  • Enhance effectiveness by preventing unnecessary cost and time escalations, delays, or unresolved issues.
  • Reduce the project time and improve quality and buildability.
  • Clarify common objectives.
  • Clarify project requirements.
  • Identify opportunities for simplifying procedures and potential savings in time or costs.

Cultural Shift Required

Information Phase

(Section added, 17 May 2023)

Rundown

  • Presentation by Consultants:
    • Project background
    • Major design features
    • Expectations.
  • Presentation by Contractor (if Contractor involved):
    • Site set-up
    • Programme
    • Special measures
    • Expectations.

Analysis Phase

Rundown

  • Surveying partnering attitudes (if partnering included).
  • Identifying goals and objectives (Why).
  • Identifying issues, concerns and risks (What / negating Why).
  • Both through:
    • Group discussions:
      • Each group for different aspects
      • Identify as much items as possible
      • Each member writes down a few before group sharing
      • Register all items on a chart before discussion
      • Discuss to expand registered items
      • Do not jump to solutions
    • Presentation by group representatives
    • Voting for the most important items.

(Sub-section added, 17 May 2023)

Function analysis

  • Analysing the functions of the project, process or product to be value-studied and its components is the most important task in value management.
  • Read the recommended reading materials on the building-up of FAST diagram (Function Analysis System Technique).

(Sub-section added, 17 May 2023)

Bear in Mind Why-How Diagram

  • For layman participants in a VM workshop, it may be easier to ask them to think along the following diagram:

  • This is similar to the How-Why logic used in FAST diagram.
  • Useful questions:
    • Why do this?
    • What obstructions?
    • Why not that?
    • What can be done?
    • What else can be done?

(Sub-section added, 17 May 2023)

Persistent Critical Questions

  • First ask "Do What" to identify the functions of the particular product, service, process or entire project being studied.
    • e.g. [Do A], [Do B], [Do C].
    • Phrase "Do What" in the form of a verb followed by a measurable noun to represent a simple and single function.
    • The verb is to represent the action achieving the function.
    • The measurable noun should represent the object to be acted upon to achieve the function.
    • The objects should not use the names of the actual components making up the product, service, process or project so as to free up the choice of the components.
  • Then ask "<-- Why" and "How -->" to link up the relationship of the functions.
    • Why? [Do A] <-- in order to <-- [Do B] <-- in order to <-- [Do C].
    • How? [Do A] -- by --> [Do B] -- by --> [Do C].
    • Linked path: [Do A] -- [Do B] -- [Do C].
    • Asking ”Why“ can help align objectives and ultimate goals on the far left.
    • There can be functions not linked up in the horizontal manner but branched off at the same time, e,g. when [Do B], [Do C] also happens at the same time.
    • There can also be parallel paths, or functions which happen at one time or all the time.
  • Then ask "Why not" and "What else" to challenge the existing and generate new ideas.

Some Tips on Goals and Objectives

Project

Process

Attitude

  • Of good quality
  • On time
  • Within respective budgets
  • By minimum resources
  • Without fatal accidents
  • With few public complaints
  • Better than expected
  • With added value
  • Plan ahead
  • Identify problems in advance
  • Exchange knowledge
  • Warn proactively
  • Adopt best practice
  • Adopt proven practice
  • Reduce wastes
  • Simplify tasks
  • Cut red-tape
  • Improve buildability
  • Find better alternatives
  • Resolve quickly
  • Rectify immediately
  • Co-operative

  • Honest

  • Frank

  • Trusting

  • Trustworthy

  • Teamwork

  • Empathic

  • Sharing

  • No blame

  • No cheating

  • Fair

  • Wins for all

  • Goals and objectives are not exactly functions. However, using these terms may be easier for layman participants.

(Sub-section added, 17 May 2023)

Scoring of Goals and Objectives

(Sub-section added, 17 May 2023)

Scoring of Issues, Concerns and Risks

  • Issues, concerns and risks are factors which hinder the achievement of goals and objectives. Resolution of them will come closer to the goals and objectives.

(Sub-section added, 17 May 2023)

Function Analysis by Components

  • The function and current cost of each component are analysed in a table. The worth means the cost of an alternative design achieving the same function. If there is an alternative costing less, there will be opportunity to improve value.

Item

Description

Basic Function

Cost

Worth

Comments

Verb

Noun

1

Component A

 

 

 

 

 

2

Component B

 

 

 

 

 

  • The function is more specific to the component than to the overall project.
  • When generating ideas in the next Creative Phase, it will be asked what alternatives can be proposed to serve the same function of each component.

(Sub-section added, 17 May 2023)

Creative Phase / Creativity Phase

Rundown

  • Creatively proposing actions for priority issues, corporate social responsibilities, safety pledge to achieve the same functions, with action plan (How, By Whom and When).
  • Through:
    • Group discussions
    • Presentation by group representatives.

(Sub-section added, 17 May 2023)

Brainstorming Rules

  • Open up mindset.
  • State ideas quickly.
  • Quantity more important.
  • “Free-wheeling” welcome.
  • OK to state the obvious, to repeat, to think out of the box.
  • OK to add upon, combine, improve on others’.
  • OK to twist or turn around others’.
  • No explanation required.
  • No criticism, doubting, judgement.

(Revised, 17 May 2023)

Evaluation Phase

Evaluation as a Phase or a Technique

  • The Evaluation Phase follows after the Creative Phase where creative ideas are evaluated to judge their values.
  • During the Information Phase and Function Analysis Phase, some prioritization, shortlisting and selection may be conducted.
  • Each of these actions would involve some kind of evaluation techniques and judgement.
  • Therefore, evaluation occurs across the whole process of value study.

(Sub-section added, 17 May 2023)

Comparison of Advantages vs Disadvantages

  • To evaluate, the simplest way is to prepare tables to show the advantages vs the disadvantages of each idea generated.

Ideas

Advantages

Disadvantages

Component A – Function X

 

 

<>

  • <>
  • <>
  • <>
  • <>

<>

  • <>
  • <>
  • <>
  • <>

Component B – Function Y

 

 

<>

  • <>
  • <>
  • <>
  • <>

<>

  • <>
  • <>
  • <>
  • <>
  • However, it lacks an evaluation of the degrees of the merits by means of ranking or scoring relative to desired criteria.
  • The table can be expanded to show the criteria and the ranking or scoring.

Ideas

Advantages

Disadvantages

Criteria

 

Ranks or Scores

A

B

C

D

E

Component A – Function X

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

<>

  • <>
  • <>
  • <>
  • <>

 

 

 

 

 

 

<>

  • <>
  • <>
  • <>
  • <>

 

 

 

 

 

 

Component B – Function Y

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

<>

  • <>
  • <>
  • <>
  • <>

 

 

 

 

 

 

<>

  • <>
  • <>
  • <>
  • <>

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • The process of developing the criteria and giving ranks or scores are described below. Some of which do not have the advantages and disadvantages specifically stated but are based on the perceptions of the individual participants.
  • In any case, the advantages and disadvantages will be useful when writing the workshop report to support the recommendations.

(Sub-section added, 17 May 2023)

Process

  • Why?
    • Select the most significant and promising ideas for adoption
  • How?
    • Consolidate ideas
      • Group similar ideas (no screening!)
      • Review ideas critically
      • Advocate or doubt-cast (but no scoring yet!)
      • Adjust and expand ideas
    • Determine criteria
      • Observe overall objectives
      • Observe individual functions
      • Suggest criteria (no judging yet!)
      • Group similar criteria (no screening yet!)
      • Review criteria
      • Adjust and expand criteria
      • Weigh criteria (5 to 10)
    • Score ideas
    • Recommend ideas
  • Note: Some people consider that the criteria and weightings should be determined first so as not to be affected by the ideas generated.

(Sub-section added, 8 Feb 2019)

Criteria / Performance Attributes

 

  • Using a noun, e.g. time, as a criteria is not sufficient. Do you want shorter time (fast project) or longer time (long lasting battery)? A criteria should have some qualitative or quantitative qualifiers.
  • Some qualitative qualifiers:
    • Lower, higher
    • Shorter, faster, longer, just in time
    • Excellent, better, just OK
    • Easier
  • Some quantitative qualifiers preceded by "more than / less than / equal to" and the like:
    • Monetary
    • Temperature
    • Quality grade
    • Environmental assessment grade
    • Life span
  • Aspects to study:
    • Quality
    • Price
    • Life cycle cost
    • Time
    • Life span
    • Maintenance
    • Operational use
    • Risks
    • Safety
  • Combine a qualifier and an aspect to form a qualitative criteria, e.g.:
    • Shorter time
    • Good safety
  • Qualitative criteria may be more specific and may become screening criteria, e.g:
    • Less than one month
    • Zero accident
    • Not more than ... accident rate

(Sub-section added, 8 Feb 2019)

Units of Measurement

  • When all the functions and resources can be converted into monetary units, the evaluation of the values will be much easier.
  • However, not all can be converted into monetary units, then some other common units of measurement should be devised, e.g. some scientific units, mass, energy, speed, time.
  • Yet, in many cases, there are no suitable monetary units or scientific units, human subjective views are to be adopted.
  • When human subjective views are to be adopted as units of measurement, they have to be quantified, even for qualitative views, after thorough discussions.

Voting

  • One can make and record one's own choices in whatever manner, but voting is the best way to express collective views in a quantitative manner.
  • VM is about collective wisdom and collective decision.
  • Dominance by the bosses or vocal people should be avoided.
  • During group discussions, vocal people would involuntarily speak more to express their views or influence other people.
  • Voting giving better chances for everybody to express free will and choices should be preferred.
  • Voting can be by:
    • Ballot paper - confidential, but needs time to count.
    • Show of hands - quick, but may be dominated by bosses or vocal people.
    • Show of figures (0 for no support, 1 for least support, 5 for strongest support) - expressing different degrees of support.
    • Marking or sticking voting points on a displayed list of choices - quick and not dominated by others.
  • When selecting top few choices out of many choices, give sufficient number of votes to each participant:
    • e.g. for 30 participants each suggesting 3 choices, there will be 90 choices.
    • When the participants are asked to vote for the top 10 choices, and each participant is allowed 10 votes, then the total number of votes will be 300 votes.
    • Which number when divided by 90 choices will mean 5 votes per choice on the average.
    • If the participants' choices are very diversified, each of the top 10 choices may only have a small number of choices of 10 to 20.
    • Therefore, it would be better to give more than 10 votes to each participant.
  • If desired to amplify the preferences between each participant's own choices:
    • Request the participant to indicate on each vote a weighting on a scale of 5 or 3.

Tabular Comparison

  • Workshop participants may be asked to give scores on a scale of 10 for expectation and achievement to identify the gap between the two.
  • An example is as follows:

  • The aspects help people focus on the areas for present consideration and further study.
  • Each aspect may be guided with evaluation criteria (e.g. on time, within budget, least environmental harm, good health, good quality, good safety, or further breakdown) for scoring.
  • The scoring direction must be clarified, e.g. time or cost may be scored as 0 for very poor time or cost control or as least time or cost overrun, of totally reversed meanings.
  • In this example, 5 is treated as the passing score for on time and within budget, and 10 as the excellent performance.
  • The scoring scale may be a 5-point scale such as:
    • 5 for excellent;
    • 4 for good;
    • 3 for fair;
    • 2 for marginal;
    • 1 for worth something;
    • 0 for not supported.

Column Chart

  • The results may be presented as a column chart for visualisation:

Bar Chart

  • Or as a bar chart:

Collective Scoring

  • It may not be possible to agree the scores between a group of participants quickly without being dominated.
  • Voting may need to be conducted.
  • Each participant will give his/her score for each Aspect.
  • The scores are then totalled and averaged per Aspect as follows:

  • A show of figures based on a 5-point score will be quicker than a 10-point score.

Radar Chart

  • For an even quicker gathering and presentation of the scores at the workshop, a radar chart would be very useful.
  • Here, there are three participants each having been requested to indicate their expectation and achievement scores for each aspect by putting a dot on a 10-point scale axis.
  • After that, the approximate centres of gravity of the dots of different aspects are connected together.
  • The distance between the two connecting loops will be the gap.

  • For a workshop where the number of aspects or criteria to be scored is unknown in advance, a hand drawn circular radar chart with the number of axes flexibly added may be adopted:

Pareto Principle

  • Also known as the 80/20 rule, or the law of the vital few.
  • Roughly 80% of the effects come from 20% of the causes.
  • Applying the principle generally:
    • Focus on the significant 20% causes to generate 80% effects.
  • When applied to construction costing:
    • 20% of the items in the pricing documents represent 80% of the costs.

Most Cost Significant Items

  • The most cost significant items should be selected for value study because they have the greatest potential for and impact of cost savings.
  • Components listed in the regular cost reports:

  • Sorted in the descending order of their costs:

  • Visualisation:

Priority Rating of Intangible Items

  • For intangible aspects of products, services, processes or projects, they can be rated by a single set or two sets of scores as follows, where the product score = importance score x probability score:

  • Similar scoring concept has been used in risk management.
  • The same can also be applied to the selection of value options.
  • For physical components of products and projects, only one final value option would be chosen for a component.
  • However, for intangible aspects of products, services, processes and projects, more than one value option may be adopted for achieving the same objective..
  • But, because of limited resources, not all can be adopted.
  • The above multiple scoring method may be used to select the top priority value options.

Comparison of Two Options

  • Like school examinations, the simplest way to calculate scores to compare between two options (projects below) would be as follows:

  • This is useful when every score counts for precision (passing marks in examination) and the scores at columns B and C can be countable.
  • Collective scoring as described above may be conducted when precision is not that critical.

Multiple Criteria Comparison

  • If the aspects or criteria should not carry equal weight, then weighting of the aspects or criteria would be required:

  • The following shows the results if the same group of participants scored on a 10-point scale at the same time:

  • The following shows the results if the same group of participants scored on a 5-point scale at the same time:

  • The above 3 sets of results show that the absolute degree of accuracies may vary but the relative merits are not affected very much.

Pairwise Comparisons

  • A more detailed method to determine the relative ranking of different aspects or criteria is by pairwise comparison.
  • A pairwise comparison is done by asking: between the pair of aspects or criteria at the left and at the top, which one is preferred, then write down the preferred one in the intersecting box.
  • The total occurrence is then counted and the proportion calculated.
  • The following is based on the ranking shown above.
  • Note that if the comparison is done independently, the results may be very different because participants may say safety is of paramount importance.

  • The above shows that Environment having the lowest ranking will score zero.
  • This would not be used when the proportion is used as weightings.
  • The following gives at least one vote for one aspect to avoid zero proportion, the ranking remains the same.

  • Weighting may be added when doing the pairwise comparison by giving, for example, 3 for strongly preferred, 2 for moderately preferred, 1 for preferred.

  • There are many formats and ways of pairwise comparison tables.

Remarks

  • People generally understand that “Cost” means lower cost and “Time” means shorter time in project delivery, but “Time” may also mean longer time span. Therefore, more precise words should be used as appropriate.
  • “Cost” has been given as one of the criteria for evaluation in the above examples because this is probably the most important criteria for most people.
  • However, when one considers the formula, Value = Functions / Resources (or Costs), one will find that costs should be expressed as the denominator, while the other evaluation criteria described above are in fact to evaluate the functions not the costs. The income should in fact be one of the functions to be used as the numerator. Therefore, if a value calculation is to be done in the Development Phase, the cost should be omitted from the above criteria.
  • For some integrated workshops where the project budget is not a problem, cost may not be the most important issue, and the cost information may not be available for evaluation. Non-monetary criteria should then be adopted.
  • Pair-wise comparison is the usually suggested selection method suggested by VM books, but it would be time consuming to go through each pair of criteria to score.
  • Scoring of marking scheme by groups may be denominated by vocal group members
  • Open floor voting is the most expedient method.
  • Through:
    • Vote by sticking adhesive dots on displayed charts
    • Each member has more than one vote to build up enough votes for priority items
    • Each voting dot may score from 1 to 5
    • Vote in one colour for the most important/serious items
    • Vote in another colour for the most feasible/probable items
    • Seriousness x probability score = usual risk scoring method
    • Importance x feasibility scores = also a good indicator

(Sub-section added, 17 May 2023)

Development Phase

Rundown

  • Reviewing results of evaluation.
  • Adopting action plan.
  • Presenting results of survey of partnering attitudes (if partnering adopted).
  • Agreeing issue resolution matrix (if partnering adopted).
  • Agreeing champion team (if partnering adopted).
  • Agreeing regular review meetings (structures, representatives, frequency) (if partnering adopted).
  • Closing address by senior management.
  • Closing by facilitator.
  • Exchanging signed partnering charter (if partnering adopted).
  • Photo taking.

(Sub-section added, 17 May 2023)

Action Plan of Applying VM on Intangible Aspects

  • The above are simple action plans in lieu of full blown VM reports. Full blown VM reports will give more supporting information as to the advantages, disadvantages, life cycle costs, ancillary measures to achieve, etc.

(Second table and notes added, 17 May 2023)

Life Cycle Costs

  • When comparing different options having different patterns of initial costs and long term running costs, their life cycle costs should be worked out and compared.
  • See Life Cycle Costing.

Calculation Template

(Sub-section added, 17 May 2023)

Value = Functions / Costs

  • If the previous evaluation table is expanded to give the value indices of all the evaluated ideas (options) using Value = Functions / Costs, it may be able to discover that in some instances some cheaper ideas may be of higher values.

Ideas

Advantages

Disadvantages

Criteria

 

Scores (representing functions)

Cost

Value = Score / Cost

A

B

C

D

E

Component A – Function X

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

<>

  • <>
  • <>
  • <>
  • <>

 

 

 

 

 

50

100

0.5

<>

  • <>
  • <>
  • <>
  • <>

 

 

 

 

 

70

50

1.4

Component B – Function Y

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

<>

  • <>
  • <>
  • <>
  • <>

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

<>

  • <>
  • <>
  • <>
  • <>

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(Sub-section added, 17 May 2023)

Presentation Phase

  • The workshop report (value study report) will be prepared to record the processes, results and recommendations (change proposals) of the workshop for the management’s consideration and decision. The report will be presented in a full-blown 5-day workshop but will only be prepared in Hong Kong after the half day or one day workshop.

(Section added, 17 May 2023)

Reading materials

(Section added, 17 May 2023)

End of Page

Life Cycle Costing 生命周期成本計算

Life Cycle Costing 生命周期成本計算 KCTang

Go to End

Note

22/3/2023: Revised.

6/2/2021: Table of Formulae last two columns merged.

11/3/2020: Interest rate "may be" changed to "must be" when converting to monthly interest rate.

10/3/2020: Conversion from annual interest rate to monthly interest rate added.

28/1/2019: Revised to re-arrange the order and give a simpler summary of the formulae.

7/2/2018: Created.

Time Value of Money

Generally

  • $1 in possession now can earn interest by saving in a bank.
  • $1 borrowed now will incur interest until the $1 is repaid.
  • $1 can buy more things now than in the future because the commodity prices generally increase over time due to inflation.
  • Therefore, $1 received in the future will be of less value than $1 received now.
  • Similarly, $1 paid in the future will be less expensive than $1 paid now.
  • When comparing amounts paid over different times, they should be converted to their equivalent values at the same time for comparison on the same basis.
  • They may be converted to the present value (present time) or future value (future time) or annuity (annually).

(added, 22/3/2023)

Interest on Loan

  • Simple interest = Interest calculated only on the original amount (principal) loaned.
  • Compound interest = Interest calculated on the original amount and accumulated interests.
  • Total amount to be repaid for $100 principal at interest rate (R%) of 10% per annum:

Loan $100 Now

Repay by End of 1 Year

Repay by End of 2 Years

Repay by End of 3 Years

Repay by End of N Years

Simple interest

100 + 10

= 110

100 + 10 x 2

= 120

100 + 10 x 3

= 130

Loan x (1 + R% x N)

Compound interest

100 x (1 + 10%)

= 110

110 x (1 + 10%)

= 121

121 x (1 + 10%)

= 133

Loan x (1 + R%)N

  • Money borrowed now will need repayment in a bigger amount in the future. A longer loan will cost more.

Same Money Paid Later Costs Less Now

  • On the other hand, if the same amount of loan can be paid later, the cost of the loan will be less.
  • If a buyer needs to borrow money to pay to buy something, and if he can borrow and pay the same price later, the cost of the loan will be less, and therefore later payment will cost less.
  • If a buyer does not need to borrow money to pay, and if he can pay the same price later, he can use the spare money now to invest elsewhere to earn money, and therefore later payment will cost less.

(revised, 22/3/2023)

Compounding (PV --> FV)

  • Converting the present value to the future value is called compounding, because compound interest rates are usually used.

(revised, 22/3/2023)

Discounting (PV <-- FV)

  • Converting the future value to the present value is called discounting, because the present value is less than the future value of the same amount of money to be paid.

(revised, 22/3/2023)

Factors

  • Factors are used to simplify all discounting and compounding calculations whereby:
    • Result $ = Base $ x Factor per $1
    • Future value = Present value x Compounding factor
    • Present value = Future value x Discounting factor.

(revised, 22/3/2023)

Definitions

  • PV = Present value | present worth | principal amount invested now.
  • FV = Future value | future worth | terminal value | terminal worth.
  • A = Annuity, a periodic payment.
  • N = Number of period (year, quarter, month, week or day).
  • R% = % rate of interest | rate of return | discount rate applicable at the end of a period.
  • C = 1 + R%.
  • Due means payable at the beginning of a period.

(revised, 22/3/2023)

Table of Formulae (compound interest)

Factor Description

Formula

  • FV of 1 after N
  • FV of 1 paid now after N periods (1 payment)
  • Amount of $1 after N periods

CN

  • PV of 1 after N
  • PV of 1 paid after N periods (1 payment)

1 / (FV of 1)

= 1 / CN

  • FVA of 1 after N
  • FV of Annuity of 1 paid at the end of each period after N periods (N payments)
  • FV of 1 per annum after N years

(CN - 1) / R%

  • A of FV of 1 after N
  • Annuity paid at the end of each period after N periods to give FV of 1 (N payments)

1 / (FVA of 1 after N)

= R% / (CN - 1)

  • FVA Due of 1 after N
  • FV of Annuity Due of 1 paid at the beginning of each period after N periods (N payments)

(CN - 1) * C / R%

  • A Due of FV of 1 after N
  • Annuity Due paid at the beginning of each period after N periods to give FV of $1 (N payments)

1 / (FVA Due of 1 after N)

= R% / C / (CN - 1)

  • PVA of 1 after N
  • PV of an Annuity of $1 paid at the end of each period after N periods (N payments)
  • PV of $1 per annum after N years
  • PVA of $1 after N years
  • Years Purchase if the period is a year

(1 - 1 / CN) / R%

  • A of PV of 1 after N
  • Annuity paid at the end of each period after N periods to equal PV of $1 (N payments)

1 / (PVA of 1 after N)

= R% / (1 - 1 / CN)

  • PVA Due of 1 after N
  • PV of Annuity Due of $1 paid at the beginning of each period after N payments (N -1 periods)

(CN - 1) / CN - 1 / R%

  • A Due of PV of 1 after N
  • Annuity Due paid at the beginning of each period after N payments to equal PV of $1 (N - 1 periods)

1 / (PV of A Due of 1 after N)

= R% * CN - 1 / (CN - 1)

  • Converting nominal annual compound interest rate R% to compound interest rate X% for M times regular payments in a year for N times

(Verification, after 12 times per year for a year, N = M = 12, (1 + R%) N/M becomes (1 + R%), the FV of $1 after 1 year.)

Used by banks:

Interest rate, X% = R%/M.

Compounding factor,

FV of $1 after N times

= (1 + X%) N

= (1 + R%/M) N

Discounting factor,

PV of $1 after N times

= 1 / (1 + X%) N

= 1 / (1 + R%/M) N

Accurate:

Interest rate, X%

= (1 + R%)1/M – 1.

Compounding factor,

FV of $1 after N times

= (1 + X%) N

= (1 + R%)N/M

Discounting factor,

PV of $1 after N times

= 1 / (1 + X%) N

= 1 / (1 + R%) N/M

Note: X / Y / Z = X / (Y * Z), e.g., 8/4/2 = 1; 8 / (4 * 2) = 1; but the former is easier for manual calculation or setting formulae in Excel, therefore, the former format is used above.

(revised, 22/3/2023)

Examples

  • Note: The above shows that if the interest rate is higher, the future value will be bigger but the present value is smaller.
  • Diagrammatically:
    • PV --> FV = add 10% to compound PV to FV
    • PV <-- FV = divide by 1.1 to discount FV to PV
    • [1] = add payment of 1 monetary value.
  • FV of [1]:
[1] --> 1.1 1.1 --> 1.21 1.21 --> 1.331
  • PV of [1]:
0.751 <-- 0.826 0.826 <-- 0.909 0.909 <-- [1]
  • FV of A of [1]:
0 --- [1] 1 --> 1.1 + [1] = 2.1 2.1--> 2.31 + [1] = 3.31
  • A of FV of 1 = 1 / (FV of A of 1):
1 / 1 = 1 1 / 2.1 = 0.476 1 / 3.31 = 0.302
  • FV of A Due of [1]:
[1] --> 1.1 1.1 + [1] = 2.1 --> 2.31 2.31 + [1] = 3.31 --> 3.641
  • A Due of FV of 1 = 1 / (FV of A Due of 1):
1 / 1.1 = 0.909 1 / 2.31 = 0.433 1 / 3.641 = 0.275
  • PV of A of [1] = FV of A of [1], all discounted back to now by dividing by 1.10 for each period:
0.909 <-- 1 1.736 <-- 1.909 <-- 2.1 2.487 <-- 2.736 <-- 3.009 <-- 3.31
  • A of PV of 1 = 1 / (PV of A of 1):
1 / 0.909 = 1.1 1 / 1.736 = 0.576 1 / 2.487 = 0.402
  • PV of A Due of [1] = FV of A Due of [1], all discounted back to now by dividing by 1.10 for each period:
1 <-- 1.1 1.909 <-- 2.10 <-- 2.31 2.736 <-- 3.009 <-- 3.31 <-- 3.641
  • A Due of PV of 1 = 1 / (PV of A Due of 1):
1 / 1 = 1 1 / 1.909 = 0.524 1 / 2.736 = 0.365

(revised, 22/3/2023)

​​​​FV of $1 paid now at simple interest (1 payment)

  • Also called "Future Value Factor" or "Amount of $1"
  • A principal of $1 invested now earning R% interest per number of period
  • After 1 period, FV of 1 = 1 + 1 * R% = 1 + R%
  • Interest earned taken away leaving the principal there for the next period
  • Base to earn interest for the 2nd period, still = 1
  • After 2 periods, FV of 1 = 1 + R% + R% = 1 + 2 * R%
  • After N periods, FV of 1 = 1 + N * R%
  • FV of $1 after N periods
= 1 + N * R% (at simple interest) 

FV of $1 paid now at compound interest (1 payment)

  • Also called "Future Value Factor" or "Amount of $1"
  • A principal of $1 invested now earning R% interest per number of period
  • After 1 period, FV of 1 = 1 + 1 * R% = 1 + R%
  • Interest earned kept with the principal there for the next period
  • New base to earn interest for the 2nd period = 1 + R%
  • After 2 periods, FV of 1 = (1 + R%) * (1 + R%)
  • After N periods, FV of 1 = (1 + R%)N
  • FV of $1 after N periods
= (1 + R%)N (at compound interest)
= CN

PV of $1 paid after N periods at compound interest (1 payment)

  • Also called "Present Value Factor"
  • PV * (FV of 1) = FV
  • PV = FV / (FV of 1)
  • PV of 1 in the future = 1 / (FV of 1)
  • Since FV of 1 = CN
  • PV of $1 after N periods
= 1 / CN

FV of an Annuity of $1 paid at the end of each period after N periods at compound interest (N payments)

  • Also called: "Future Value of $1 per annum" if the period is a year
  • $1 invested at the END of each of N periods earning R% interest per number of period
  • One way to calculate the future sum:
    • FV of 1 = CN
    • FV of 1 invested 1 period later for N-1 periods = CN-1
    • FV of 1 invested 2 periods later for N-2 periods = CN-2
    • FV of 1 invested N-1 periods later for 1 period = C
    • FV of 1 invested N periods later for 0 period = 1 (no interest)
    • Sum = CN-1 + CN-2 + .... + C2 + C + 1
  • Another way to calculate the future sum:
    • Sum after 1 period with 1 invested at the end = 1
    • with sum earning interest next period and another 1 invested at the end of next period
    • Sum after 2 periods = C + 1
    • Sum after 3 periods = C2 + C + 1
    • Sum after N-1 periods = CN-2 + ... + C2 + C + 1
    • Sum after N periods = CN-1 + CN-2 + ... + C2 + C + 1
  • Sum = CN-1 + CN-2 + .... + C2 + C + 1
  • Mutiply all on both sides by C
  • Sum * C = CN + CN-1 + CN-2 + .... + C2 + C
  • Subtract between the two equations
  • Sum * R% = CN - 1
  • Sum = (CN - 1) / R%
  • Therefore
  • FV of A of $1 after N periods
= (CN - 1) / R%

Annuity (e.g. sinking fund) paid at the end of each of N periods to give FV of $1 at compound interest (N payments)

  • Find A where (FV of A after N) = 1
  • FV of A after N = A * (FV of A of 1 after N) = 1
  • A after N periods to give FV of $1
= 1 / (FV of A of 1 after N)
= R% / (CN - 1)

FV of an Annuity Due of $1 paid at the beginning of each period after N periods at compound interest (N payments)

  • $1 invested at the BEGINNING of each of N periods earning R% interest per number of period.
  • This is equivalent to keeping the total money at the end and investing it for 1 more period to earn interest without adding 1 at the end of the 1 more period:
  • FV of A Due of $1 after N periods
= (FV of A of 1 after N) * C
= (CN - 1) * C / R%
  • Compare with (FV of A of 1 after N+1) - 1
= (CN+1 - 1) / R% - 1
= (CN+1 - 1 - R%) / R%
= [CN+1 - (1 + R%)] / R%
= (CN+1 - C) / R%
= (CN - 1) * C / R%
  • Therefore, FV of A Due of 1 after N

also = (FV of A of 1 after N+1) - 1

diagrammatically:

0-----1 = payment of 1 at the end of a period

-->-- = a period with interest

0-----1-->--1-->--1 = FV of A of 1 after N payments, compounding for N-1 periods

0-----1-->--1-->--1-->--1 = FV of A of 1 after N+1 payments, compounding for N periods

1-->--1-->--1-->--0 = Subtract 1 at the end = FV of A Due of 1 after N payments, compounding for N periods​​​​

Annuity Due (e.g. sinking fund) paid at the beginning of each period after N periods to give FV of $1 at compound interest (N payments)

  • Find A where (FV of A Due after N) = 1
  • FV of A Due after N = A * (FV of A Due of 1 after N) = 1
  • A Due after N periods to give FV of $1
= 1 / (FV of A Due of 1 after N)
= R% / [(CN - 1) * C]
= R% / (CN - 1) / C

PV of an Annuity of $1 paid at the end of each period after N periods at compound interest (N payments)

  • Also called: "Present Value of $1 per annum" or "Years Purchase" if the period is a year
  • $1 paid at the END of each of N periods to be discounted back to the present value at R% interest per number of period passed
  • Instead of discounting the individual payments back for different periods, the total future value of all payments after N is discounted back once
  • PV of A of $1 after N periods
= (FV of A of 1 after N) * (PV of 1 after N)
= [(CN - 1) / R%] * (1 / CN)
= (CN - 1) / CN / R%
= (1 - 1 / CN) / R%
= (1 / CN - 1) / R% * (-1), for easier manual calculation
= [1 - (PV of 1 after N)] / R%

Annuity paid at the end of each period after N periods to equal $1 now at compound interest

  • Find A where (PV of A after N) = 1
  • PV of A after N = A * (PV of A of 1 after N) = 1
  • A after N periods to equal $1 now
= 1 / (PV of A of 1 after N)
= R% * CN / (CN - 1)
= R% * [1 + (CN - 1)] / (CN - 1)
= [R% + R% * (CN - 1)] / (CN - 1)
= R% / (CN - 1) + R%
= (A after N to give FV of 1) + R%

which can be considered as of two portions

= Sinking fund at end of each period to repay the loan at the end + interim loan interest R%, where the R% for the sinking fund may be different from the R% for loan interest.

PV of an Annuity Due of $1 paid at the beginning of each period after N payments at compound interest (N - 1 periods)

  • $1 paid at the BEGINNING of each of N periods to be discounted back to the present value at R% interest per number of period passed
  • Instead of discounting the individual payments back for different periods, the total future value of all payments after N is discounted back once
  • PV of A Due of $1 after N periodic payments
= (FV of A Due of 1 after N) * PV of 1 after N periodic payments
= [(CN - 1) * C / R%] * (1 / CN)
= (CN - 1) * C / CN / R%
= C * (CN - 1) / CN / R%
= C * (PV of A of 1 after N periodic payments)
= (CN - 1) / CN-1 / R%
  • This is equivalent to discounting by 1 less period as compared with paying the annuity at the end of each period.
  • The discounting factor for 1 more period = * 1 / C
  • The discounting factor for 1 less period = * C
  • Compare with (PV of A of 1 after N-1) + 1, which is
= (CN-1 - 1) / (R% * CN-1) + 1
= (CN-1 - 1 + R% * CN-1) / (R% * CN-1)
= (CN-1 * (1 + R%) - 1 ) / (R% * CN-1)
= (CN-1 * C- 1 ) / (R% * CN-1)
= (CN - 1 ) / (R% * CN-1)
= C * (CN - 1) / (R% * CN)

Therefore, PV of A Due of 1 after N

also = (PV of A of 1 after N-1) + 1

diagrammatically:

--<-- = Discounting with interest

0--<--1--<--1--<--1--<--1 = PV of A of 1 after N payments, discounting for N periods

0--<--1--<--1--<--1 = PV of A of 1 after N-1 payments, discounting for N-1 periods

1--<--1--<--1--<--1 = Add 1 to the beginning = PV of A Due of 1 after N payments, discounting for N-1 periods

Annuity Due paid at the beginning of each period after N payments to equal $1 now at compound interest (N - 1 periods)

  • Find A Due where (PV of A Due after N) = 1
  • PV of A Due after N = A * (PV of A Due 1 after N) = 1
  • A Due after N payments to give $1 now
= 1 / (PV of A Due of 1 after N)
= 1 / [(CN - 1) / CN-1 / R%]
= R% * CN-1 / (CN - 1)

 

Converting Nominal Annual Compound Interest Rate to Compound Interest Rate for M Times Regular Payments in a Year for N Times

  • From the above, FV of 1 after N @ R% interest rate each time = (1 + R%)N.
    • When N = years, R% = annual interest rate.
    • When N = times, R% = interest rate each time. Let’s call it X%.
  • When there are M times regular payments in a year, the usual method used by banks to calculate the interest rate X% each time is:
    • X% = R% / M
  • Accurate method:
  • Compounding at X% interest rate each time after M times a year for 1 year should be equal to (1 + R%)
    • (1 + X%)M = (1 + R%)
    • (1 + X%) = (1 + R%) 1/M
    • X% = (1 + R%) 1/M – 1
  • Test based on R = 10%, M = 12 for 1 year:
    • Banks’ method: 
      • monthly rate = 10%/12 = 0.000833
      • compounded total after 1 year = (1 + 10%/12)12 = 1.1047
    • Accurate method:
      • monthly rate = (1 + 10%)1/12 – 1 = 0.007974
      • compounded total = (1 + 0.007974)12 = 1.10
    • Compare with annual compounding only:
      • (1 + 10%) = 1.10
  • FV of 1 after compounding at M times a year for N times at X% discount rate each time
    • = (1 + X%) N
    • = [1 + (1 + R%) 1/M – 1] N
    • = [(1 + R%) 1/M] N
    • = (1 + R%) N/M
  • An easier way to remember:
    • Let F be the compounding factor each time
    • F compounded for M times a year should be equal to (1 + R% annual interest rate)
    • F M = (1 + R%)
    • F = (1 + R%) 1/M
    • F compounded for N times should become:
    • F N = (1 + R%) N/M
  • PV of 1 after compounding at M times a year for N times at X% discount rate each time
    • = 1 / FV
    • = 1 / (1 + X%) N
    • = 1 / (1 + R%) N/M

(revised, 22/3/2023)

Inflation, Deflation and Escalation

  • Inflation is a general increase in the prices of goods and services in an economy over a period of time.
  • Deflation is a general decrease in the prices of goods and services in an economy over a period of time.
  • Escalation is a general increase in the prices of specific group of goods and services over a period of time.
  • For simplicity, an inflation rate or escalation rate may be positive or negative.
  • When the inflation rate or escalation rate (E%) is said to be 10% per annum year on year. It means that the price in a year is 10% high than the price a year ago, e.g.:

Now

End of 1 Year

End of 2 Years

End of 3 Years

Present price = 100

100 x 1.1 = 110

100 x 1.1 x 1.1 = 121

100 x 1.1 x 1.1 x 1.1 = 133

  • The purchasing power of the same amount of money decreases with inflation. Alternatively, it is said to have a devaluation of the money.
  • One has to cumulate more money to buy the same quantity of goods and services (assuming same quality and still available) in the future.
  • The future cost to buy = current cost x (1 + E%)N.
  • In principle, discounting to the present value should be based on:
    • discounted cost = future cost x discounting factor.
  • The future cost should be the cost taking into account the impact of inflation and escalation, and is called “nominal cost”.
  • The future cost can only be estimated based on:
    • future cost = current cost x escalation factor, where the escalation (specific) is inclusive of inflation (general).
  • Therefore, discounted cost = current cost x escalation factor x discounting factor.
  • General inflation is difficult to predict. Since it lowers purchasing power, the discount rate used to calculate the discounting factor has to compensate the decrease in purchasing power. The discount rate is called “nominal discount rate”. Since both the inflation factor and the adjustment to the discount rate apply to all goods and services being considered for comparison, it is considered in order to ignore the general inflation and the corresponding adjustment to the discount rates.
  • The cost exclusive of the impact of general inflation is called “real cost”. The corresponding discount rate excluding the impact of general inflation is called “real discount rate”.
  • However, for a specific group of goods and services, their escalation rates can be different from the general inflation rates, it is suggested by some people that their future costs should be based on the differential escalation rates beyond the general inflation rates, while the real discount rates are still used.
  • Therefore, the above equation can be re-written as:
    • discounted cost = nominal cost x nominal discounting factor
    • discounted cost = real cost x escalation factor x nominal discounting factor
    • discounted cost = real cost x real discounting factor
    • discounted cost = current cost x differential escalation factor beyond general inflation factor x real discounting factor
    • discounted cost = current cost x (1 + E%)N / (1 + R%)N,
      • where E% is the full or differential escalation rate
      • R% is the nominal discount rate or real discount rate respectively.
  • The above shows that:
    • escalation factor x nominal discounting factor = real discounting factor
    • (1 + E%)N / (1 + nominal R%)N = 1 / (1 + real R%)N
    • (1 + E%) / (1 + nominal R%) = 1 / (1 + real R%)
    • (1 + nominal R%) = (1 + E%) * (1 + real R%)
    • nominal R% = (1 + E%) * (1 + real R%) - 1
    • nominal R% = E% + real R% + E% * real R%, the last product is very small and can be ignored
    • i.e., nominal discount rate = escalation rate + real discount rate
    • or, real discount rate = nominal discount rate – escalation rate
  • ISO 15686-5 suggests to use real costs and real discount rates, and assume no differential escalation rates first, but then adjust the discount rates while doing sensitivity analysis to test the impact of the possible differential escalation rates.

(added, 22/3/2023)

Guidance on Discount Rates given by ISO 15686-5 (cited in italics)

  • The type of discount rate, either real or nominal, shall be clearly distinguished.
  • NOTE 1 The real discount rate applied to costs (and benefits) that are also measured in real terms assumes that inflation/deflation applies equally to all.
  • Occasionally, escalation rates may be used as a form of sensitivity analysis where there are grounds to anticipate that the standard rate of inflation does not apply in the case of a specific scenario. Typically, real rates should be used; these exclude the impact of future inflation. Nominal rates may be used by agreement, if that is what is required by the client or justified by the situation.
  • The discount rate in the private sector should represent the opportunity cost of investing the capital, which can be:
    • a) the interest cost of a loan for the investment;
    • b) the interest lost on reduction of cash on deposit;
    • c) the returns lost on investment elsewhere (e.g. in bonds or equities);
    • d) the actual return achieved on capital investment in the business;
    • e) the required rate of return of an investor in a new business.
  • Within the public sector, a discount rate can be determined by the central government (sometimes termed the social discount rate) as a test requirement for their investments, based on an assessment of the long-term opportunity cost to the public sector of selecting one investment rather than another.
  • NOTE 2 Historically, the real discount rate has reflected the general productivity rate of the producer, sector or field. Generally, productivity has been within 0 % and 2 % over the long term. However, rates as low as these are not universal. Discount rates of between 0 % and 4 % are typically used. A higher rate discourages long-term investments, while a lower rate encourages them.
  • NOTE 3 Where the discount rate is not a requirement fixed by the client (public or private), it is normal to undertake sensitivity analysis using a range of rates to test the validity of the conclusions if the input conditions change.

(added, 22/3/2023)

Tax

  • If the discount rates are based on investment interest rates which are subject to tax, the discount rates should subtract the tax charged, e.g., interest rate x (1 – % tax on interest rate).

(added, 22/3/2023)

Sensitivity Analysis

  • In life cycle costing, since the discount rates are estimates only, it is suggested that discount rates should be adjusted up or down within the possible range to test whether the relative order of the costs of the options would be changed or not. If not, the choice will be more certain. If changed, more careful review should be taken.
  • The same apply to other data which may likely be varied.

(added, 22/3/2023)

Life Cycle Costing 生命周期成本計算

  1. Mainly for comparing between different options with different expenditure patterns over a long period of years of use.
    主要用來比較在很長的使用年期有不同的支出幅度的不同方案。
  2. Considering the whole life cost of a project (or product, service) from birth to death (or before recycling).
    考慮某項目(或產品、服務)由生到滅(或再生前)的全部成本。
  3. Using discounted cash flow techniques to convert monies spent over different times to the same base.
    用貼現金流的方式把不同時間支出的金錢轉換到同一基準上。
  4. Impacts on the use of natural resources are now also under the scope of consideration.
    對自然資源使用的影響現在亦納入考慮範圍。

Life Cycle Costs 生命周期成本

  • Scope:
    • Initial | Capital Costs
      初始 | 資本費用
    • Costs-in-use:
      使用費用
      • Routine Operation, Maintenance and Repair Costs
        日常的使同、保養及維修費用
      • Renewal | Replacement Costs
        更新 | 更換費用
    • End of Life Costs (Removal and Disposal Costs less Residual | Resale | Salvage Values)
      終結費用(清拆及處置費用減剩餘價值(轉售價值或廢品價值))
    • Non-Monetary Benefits or Costs.
      非金錢的益處或成本
  • The total of the above is also called “Total Cost of Ownership”.
  • “|” = separator between alternative terms.

(revised, 22/3/2023)

Present Values of Life Cycle Costs

  • Being sum of:
    • Initial | Capital Costs
      • (spend now) * 1
    • Costs-in-use
      • Routine Operating, Maintenance, and Repair Costs
        • (average amounts spent every year) * (Present value of annual payment of $1 after N years)
      • Replacement or Renewal Costs
        • (specific amounts spent after M years) * (Present value of $1 after M years)
    • End of Life Costs (Removal and Disposal Costs less Residual | Resale | Salvage Values)
      • (specific amounts spent or received after N years) * (Present value of $1 after N years)

(added, 22/3/2023)

Relationship between ICMS 3, Life Cycle Costs and Whole Life Costs

  • The following diagram shows the relationship between the various costs in the International Cost Management Standards 3rd Edition (ICMS 3), Life Cycle Costs and Whole Life Costs:

[first figure]

  • ‘Occupancy Costs’ are considered part of the ‘Non-Construction Costs’.
  • The relationship between Life Cycle Costs and Whole Life Costs as defined by ISO 15686-5:2017 Buildings and constructed assets – Service life planning – Part 5: Life-cycle costing is: as follows:

(added, 22/3/2023)

ICMS 3 Definitions in Relation to Life Cycle Costs

  • ICMS 3 deals with Life Cycle Costs only, and have defined the following terms (definitions in italics):
    • Generally:
      • Constructed Asset (or Asset): The output from any building or civil engineering project.
    • Life Cycle Costs (LCC):
      • Life Cycle Cost: Cost of a Constructed Asset or its parts throughout its life cycle from construction through use, operation, maintenance and renewal till the end of life or a shorter Period of Analysis, while fulfilling the performance requirements (see the [first figure] above). 
      • Acquisition Costs: All payments or considerations required to acquire / lease / purchase the land, property or existing Constructed Asset, and all other expenses associated with the acquisition, excluding physical construction. [This is not a LCC as defined by ISO 19686 but has been included as a Category by ICMS 3.]
      • Construction Costs: Expenditures incurred as a direct result of construction including labour, materials, plant, equipment, site and head office overheads and profits as well as taxes and levies. They are the total price payable for all permanent and temporary works normally included in construction contracts, including goods or materials supplied by the Client for the Constructor to install.
      • Renewal Costs: The costs of replacing a Constructed Asset and/or major components once they reach the end of their life, and which the Client decides are to be included in the capital rather than the revenue budget.
      • Operation Costs: Costs incurred in running and managing a Constructed Asset during occupation, including administrative support services, rent, insurances, energy and other environmental/regulatory inspection costs, taxes and charges.
      • Maintenance Cost: The total cost of labour, material and other related costs to retain a Constructed Asset or its parts so that it can perform its required functions (ISO 15686-5). Maintenance includes conducting corrective, responsive and preventative maintenance on a Constructed Asset or its parts and all associated management, cleaning, services, repainting, repairing or replacing of parts as needed for the Constructed Asset to be used for its intended purpose. It does not include Renewal Costs.
      • End of Life Costs: The net costs or fees for disposing of an asset at the end of its service life after deducting the salvage value and other income due to disposal, including costs resulting from disposal inspection, decommissioning and decontamination, demolition and reclamation, reinstatement, asset transfer obligations, recycling, recovery, disposal of components and materials, and transport and regulatory costs.
    • Whole Life Costs but not Life Cycle Costs:
      • Non-Construction Costs: Includes finance costs, service charges, parking charges and charges for associated facilities.
      • Occupancy Costs: Costs that arise exclusively as a result of the occupation of a Constructed Asset, including reception, library services and porterage. Occupancy Costs are part of the Non-Construction Costs.
      • Income: Money received from sales and other activities during the life of an Asset. [Not exactly a cost.]
      • External Costs: Costs associated with an asset that are not reflected in the transaction costs between provider and consumer, collectively referred to as Externalities. These costs may include business staffing, productivity, social impact costs and user costs and can be considered in a Life Cycle Cost analysis when explicitly identified (ISO 15686-5).
      • Externalities: Quantifiable cost or benefit that occurs when the actions of organisations and individuals have an effect on people other than themselves, e.g., non-construction costs, income and wider social and business costs (ISO 15686-5).
    • ICMS 3 has defined the following terms (definitions in italics) to deal with time value of money:
      • Dates and Periods:
        • Reporting Date: The date at which the report describing construction or Life Cycle Costs is compiled.
        • Common Date: The date to be used in conjunction with Life Cycle Costing, being a date not earlier than the completion of construction. All future cash flows occurring at different times are discounted or compounded as if the costs are incurred at that date. [Unlike ISO 15686-5 which uses “Base Date”, ICMS 3 uses “Common Date” because “Base Date” is generally used in construction contracts as the base date for contract price fluctuations adjustment.]
        • Base Date: The date at which the individual Construction Costs in ICMS cost reports apply exclusive of Price Level Adjustments after that date. However, there can be a separate allowance for Price Level Adjustments under the Risk Allowances Group. A different date (the Common Date) applies to Life Cycle Costs.
        • Period of Analysis: Period of time over which Life Cycle Costs are analysed as determined by the Client. It may cover the entire life (physical, technical, economic, functional, social, or legal life) or a selected stage or stages or periods of interest as required by the Client.
      • Costs and values:
        • Present Day Value: Monies accruing in the future which have been discounted to account for the fact that they are worth less at the time of calculation (ISO 15686-5).
        • Net Present Value or Cost: The sum of the discounted future cash flows (ISO 15686-5).
        • Nominal Cost: The expected price that will be paid when a cost is due to be paid, including estimated changes in price due to, for example, forecast change in efficiency, inflation or deflation and technology (ISO 15686-5).
        • Real Cost: The cost expressed as a value at the Common Date, including estimated changes in price due to forecast changes in efficiency and technology, but excluding general price inflation or deflation (ISO 15686-5).
        • Inflation/Deflation: Sustained increase/decrease in the general price level of resources (ISO 15686-5).
        • Escalation: A positive or negative factor or rate reflecting an estimate of differential increase/decrease in the general price level for a particular commodity, or group of commodities, or resources (ISO 15686-5).
        • Discounted Cost: The resulting cost when the real cost is discounted by the real discount rate or when the nominal cost is discounted by the nominal discount rate (ISO 15686-5).
      • Rates:
        • Discount Rate: Factor or rate reflecting the time value of money that is used to convert cash flows occurring at different times (ISO 15686-5).
        • Nominal Discount Rate: The factor or rate used to relate present and future money values in comparable terms, taking into account the general inflation/deflation rate.
        • Real Discount Rate: The factor or rate used to relate present and future money values in comparable terms, not taking account of general or specific inflation in the cost of a particular asset (ISO 15686-5).

(added, 22/3/2023)

Life Cycle Cost Considerations Given by ICMS 3 (cited in italics)

  • Setting the scope of the Life Cycle Costs:
    • Life Cycle Costing (LCC) is an economic evaluation method that takes account of all relevant costs over a time horizon (Period of Analysis). Presentation of life cycle costs should make clear the scope of those costs included or excluded (as defined in the Categories and Group tables) and the relevant level of costs for the LCC purpose, as well as dealing with the time value of money.
    • LCC may be reported at a lesser level of detail than the underlying analysis. For example, the detailed cost analysis may be at Level 4 Sub-Groups, whereas reporting may be at Level 1 Project or Sub-Project or Level 2 Categories or Level 3 Groups.
    • LCC may be part of a wider economic project evaluation that considers the Whole Life Costs (including non-construction costs such as finance, business income from sales and disposals, occupancy costs and externalities).
  • Expected asset life:
    • The design life of the Constructed Asset is a key performance requirement and should be defined in the project brief. The estimated expected service life of the Constructed Asset should be at least as long as the design life.
    • Renewals of Constructed Assets during the expected service life should be included in the life cycle cost’s Period of Analysis, as well as any associated end of life or hand-back obligations.
  • Time value of money:
    • The initial Construction Costs reported should be the forecast or actual final costs to complete the construction of the Project. Forecast costs should include an adjustment for price level fluctuations until the completion of the Project using published market indices and an agreed Base Date.
    • The rest of the LCC should be the forecast costs after the completion of construction until the end of life or a shorter Period of Analysis (e.g. one to ten years). This should be defined in the project scope, discounted to a Common Date not earlier than the completion of construction, using Discount Rates mandated by government authorities for public projects or published Discount Rates for the market where the Project is located for private projects or other rates such as those designated by the Client.
    • These interrelated terms of LCC are illustrated in Figure 6:
    • ICMS can be used to report and compare actual costs which have been collected, recorded and analysed. Actual costs should be recorded in the amounts paid. When historic actual costs are used for forecasting future costs, Price Level Adjustments should be made to bring the historic costs to the desired date of payment. LCC has certain cost variables. It is therefore important to record the purpose, scope, form and method of the economic appraisal as well as the Common Date and the underlying assumptions, risks and uncertainty, information and data sources.
  • Net Present Value Calculations
    • For option appraisal based on LCC the Net Present Values (NPV) of different options should be compared. The NPV of an option should be a single figure that sums up the present values of all relevant future LCC occurring during the Period of Analysis. NPV is the normal measure for discounted LCC.
    • To convert a future cost to the present value (cost) at the Common Date, the following formulae, using $ as an example currency, can be used:
      • Present value = future cost × discounting factor
      • R% = Discount Rate per annum

(added, 22/3/2023)

End of Page

Partnering 夥伴關係

Partnering 夥伴關係 KCTang

Go to End

夥伴關係的加減乘除

  1. 加强合作
  2. 減低分歧
  3. 倍增功效
  4. 分享成果

Flow

  1. Desire to implement partnering
  2. Start-up workshop
  3. Implementing partnering charter and action plan
  4. Close-out workshop

Start-up workshop

  1. Appointment of facilitator
  2. Pre-workshop survey form - sent to the key project representatives to gather their preliminary ideas of project and partnering goals and objectives, key project issues / concerns / risks, and expectation on the Workshop
  3. Pre-workshop meeting - conducted with the key project representatives to:
    • understand the project background
    • further understand the preliminary ideas of project and partnering objectives, key project issues / concerns / risks, and expectations gathered from the pre-workshop survey form
    • discuss the logistics, agenda and ground rules of the Workshop
  4. Start-up workshop:
    • Workshop introduction and ground rules
    • Opening speeches by senior management
    • Project information
    • Participants' profile
    • Identifying goals and objectives (Why)
    • Identifying issues, concerns, risks, treats and challenges which may affect the most important objectives (What)
    • Formulating partnering attitudes (mentality, culture and behaviours)
    • Creatively proposing actions to resolve issues and concerns and to avoid or mitigate risks to achieve the goals and objectives, with action plan (How, By Whom and When)
    • Validating and adjusting the action plan
    • Drafting Partnering Charter (project goals and objectives, partnering attitudes)
    • Formulating partnering implementation, risk monitoring and evaluation process:
      • Issue resolution matrix and procedure
      • Champion team (roles and responsibilities)
      • Regular review meetings (structures, representatives, frequency)
      • Critical partnering factors and evaluation mechanism
      • Partnering rating form
    • Signing the Partnering Charter
    • Exchanging signed Partnering Charter
    • Closing address by senior management
    • Ending the workshop
    • Completing workshop evaluation form
  5. Workshop report

Implementing partnering charter and action plan

  1. Regular review meeting and rating by Champion team
  2. Escalating issues where required

Close-out workshop

  1. Appointment of facilitator
  2. Pre-workshop survey form - sent to the key project representatives to gather their preliminary ideas of key successes and failures, and expectation on the Workshop
  3. Pre-workshop meeting - conducted with the key project representatives to:
    • understand the project background
    • further understand the preliminary ideas of key successes and failures, and expectations gathered from the pre-workshop survey form
    • discuss the logistics, agenda and ground rules of the Workshop
  4. Start-up workshop:
    • Workshop introduction and ground rules
    • Opening speeches by senior management
    • Project information
    • Participants' profile
    • Reviewing results of rating forms
    • Sharing successes stories
    • Sharing failure stories
    • Creatively proposing improvements for future projects and partnering
    • Validating and adjusting the suggestions
    • Closing address by senior management
    • Ending the workshop
    • Completing workshop evaluation form
  5. Workshop report

Possible Partnering Objectives 可能夥伴合作目標

  1. For the Project (end product / ends)
    按項目(成品 / 結果)
    • Of good quality
      優質
    • On time
      準時
    • Within respective budgets
      各不超支
    • By minimum resources
      用最少資源
    • Without fatal accidents
      無致命意外
    • With few public complaints
      少公眾投訴
    • Better than expected
      好過預期
    • With added value
      有所增值
  2. For the Process (means)
    按過程(手法)
    • Plan ahead
      預先計劃
    • Identify problems in advance
      早找問題
    • Exchange knowledge
      交換知識
    • Warn proactively
      主動預警
    • Adopt best practice
      採用最佳做法
    • Adopt proven practice
      採用成熟做法
    • Reduce wastes
      滅少浪費
    • Simplify tasks
      簡化任務
    • Cut red-tape
      刪除繁文縟節
    • Improve buildability
      改善可建造性
    • Find better alternatives
      找更好的替代
    • Resolve quickly
      快速解決
    • Rectify immediately
      即時修正
  3. For the Attitude (means)
    按態度(結果)
    • Co-operative
      合作
    • Honest
      誠實
    • Frank
      坦率
    • Trusting
      信任
    • Trustworthy
      可信賴
    • Teamwork
      群體合作
    • Empathic
      設身處地
    • Sharing
      分享
    • No blame
      不指責
    • No cheating
      不欺騙
    • Fair
      公平
    • Wins for all
      全體共贏

End of Page

Computer Application 電腦應用

Computer Application 電腦應用 KCTang

Commonly used Ubuntu Linux commands 常用的Ubuntu Linux指令

Commonly used Ubuntu Linux commands 常用的Ubuntu Linux指令 KCTang

Go to End

Note

29/7/2022: Setting up SSH keys added.

18/4/2022: cp -Rav added.

14/4/2022: Command to delete multiple empty sub-directories added.

18/12/2021: Updated.

6/10/2018: Updated.

27/9/2018: Updated.

21/3/2018: Updated.

27/8/2017: Created.

Intro

$ = the terminal command prompt against which commands are entered.

sudo = superuser.

<text> = information to be entered, angle brackets themselves are not to be entered.

[abc] = options a, b and c, brackets are not necessary.

Capitals and small letters behave differently.

View system information

Show who am I:

$ whoami

Show current date and time:

$ date

Show this month's calendar:

$ cal

List open ports and their processes id:

$ sudo lsof -i

or

$ sudo netstat -lptu

or

$ sudo netstat -lptun

Display disk space:

$ df

Display disk space in a more readable format:

$ df -h

Display file contents:

$ cat <directory>/<sub-directory>/<filename>

Use path and file names

<directory path> = <directory>/<sub-directory> referring from the current directory, without filename stated.

<filename path> = <directory>/<sub-directory>/<filename> referring from the current directory.

Precede with "/" if referring the path from the root directory. Deleting files under a sub-directory but incorrectly referring to the root directory is dangerous. Better avoid referring from the root directory.

Use "*" as a wildcard to represent texts before or after directory or file name, e.g. "*name", "name*" or "*" for any name.

Use "." alone to represent the current directory.

Use "../" to represent the directory immediately above the current directory.

Use "/." at the end to represent all under the stated <directory path>, e.g. "<sub-directory>/."

Search things

Find files with filenames containing <filename> in <directory path>:

$ find <directory path> -name "<filename>"

Use "-iname" to ignore upper or lower case differences.

Find the files and open for editing:

$ find <directory path> -iname "<filename>" -exec nano '{}' \;

Find text in files:

$ grep -[options] <text> <filename path>

where option:

  • -i = ignore upper or lower case differences
  • -r = search sub-directories recursively
  • -h = hide names of files preceding lines of output
  • -w = search for exact text
  • -c = count the number of matches
  • -n = precede lines of output with the numbers of lines containing the text
  • -v = show only lines not containing the text
  • -l = list filenames only
  • --colour = display the output in colour

Adjust disk space

Find duplicate files across several directories and replace duplicate files with hard links to save space:

$ sudo rdfind -makehardlinks true <directory path 1> <directory path 2>

note: rdfind downloadable at http://rdfind.pauldreik.se/rdfind.1.html#lbAG.

Recover such harddisk space of deleted files not reported by "$ df":

$ cd /<directory name of the harddisk> 
​​$ sudo dd if=/dev/zero of=tempfile 
$ sudo rm tempfile

Edit files

$ sudo nano <filename path>

or

$ gksudo gedit <filename path>

Note that the following can work sometimes but may have problem under some desktop environment:

$ sudo gedit <filename path>

Shutdown and start up

Shutdown the system:

$ sudo shutdown

Shutdown and reboot the system:

$ sudo reboot

Start a service:

$ sudo systemctl start <service name>

or older method:

$ sudo service <service name> start

or even older method:

$ sudo /etc/init.d/<service name> start

Restart a service:

$ sudo systemctl restart <service name>

or older method:

$ sudo service <service name> restart

or even older method:

$ sudo /etc/init.d/<service name> restart

Stop a service:

$ sudo systemctl stop <service name>

or older method:

$ sudo service <service name> stop

or even older method:

$ sudo /etc/init.d/<service name> stop

Mount devices

Mount a single device "/media/newbackupdrive":

$ sudo mount /media/newbackupdrive

Remounting required after reboot.

Umount single device "/media/newbackupdrive":

$ sudo umount /media/newbackupdrive

Check devices defined in the filesystem table file "fstab" to be mounted upon booting:

$ cat /etc/fstab

Check devices actually mounted (this would show more than those defined in "fstab"):

$ sudo mount -l

Set up SSH keys to access remote computer

Generate public/private rsa key pair:

$ ssh-keygen -t rsa

Enter file in which to save the key (/home/<your user name>/.ssh/id_rsa): <accept or change>

Skip entering passphrase if do not want to use it upon logging in with ssh.

Using $ sudo ssh-keygen -t rsa will prompt to save the key at /root/.ssh/id_rsa.

If the file already exists, answer overwrite or not.

Copy the public key to the remote computer:

$ ssh-copy-id -p <port number> <login name>@<remote computer address>

Enter password to the remote login name.

It will check whether the key has already existed.

Use this if desired to force copy:

$ ssh-copy-id -f -p <port number> <login name>@<remote computer address>

Verify by logging in after successful copying:

ssh -p <port number> <login name>@<remote computer address>

If login successful, you are at the command prompt of the remote computer and can execute commands there.

Exit after use.

(added, 29/7/2022)

Add or delete groups and users

Create new group:

$ sudo addgroup <new group name>

Create new user, with a group and a home directory of the same name created if not already existing:

$ sudo adduser <new user name>

To verify:

$ ls -lh /home

shows that the new directory has "drwxr-xr-x" permissions, i.e. "d" for directory with "rwx" owner permissions but "r-x" group and others' permissions.

Add a user to a group:

$ sudo adduser <user name> <group name>

Delete user, and group of the same name, keeping the home directory:

$ sudo deluser <user name>

Delete group:

$ sudo delgroup <group name>

Change ownership

Change file or directory ownership:

$ chown -R <owner name>:<group name> <filename path>

where:

  • -R = recursively from and below if <filename> is a sub-directory

Change permissions

Change file or directory permissions:

$ chmod -R [ugoa][-+=][rwxXst] <filename path>

where:

  • -R = recursively from and below if <filename> is a <sub-directory>
  • u=owner, g=group, o=others, a=all
  • -+= mean minus, add or equal permissions
  • r=read, w=write and delete, x=execute file or change directory into; Xst=for more special choices
  • e.g. "u+rw" = add read and write permission to owner

An alternative form is:

$ chmod -R <ugo> <filename path>

where:

  • <ugo> is a 3 digit number where u=owner, g=group, o=others
  • each digit can be:
    • 0 for nothing
    • 1 for execute "x"
    • 2 for write "w"
    • 3 = 1 + 2 = "wx"
    • 4 for read "r"
    • 5 = 4 + 1 = "rx"
    • 6 = 4 + 2 = "rw"
    • 7 = 4 + 2 + 1 = "rwx"

therefore:

  • 666 = read and write permissions to all
  • 777 = read, write and execute permissions to all

Change password

Change own password:

$ passwd

Change other user 's password:

$ sudo passwd <other user's name>

Create directories

Make new directory:

$ mkdir <directory>

Make new directory and sub-directory in one go, "-p" means making parent directory also:

$ mkdir -p <directory>/<sub-directory>

Remove files and directories

Remove empty sub-directory:
$ rmdir <directory path>

Remove one empty sub-directory and its parent directory in one go:

$ rmdir /<parent directory>/<sub-directory>

Remove all empty sub-directories and their parent directories in one go:

$ cd <directory>
$ find . -type d -empty -print -delete

If directory is empty, print name then delete.

(added, 14/4/2022)

Remove file:

$ rm <filename path>

Remove files and directories starting from and below sub-directory, even for empty sub-directory:

$ rm -r <directory path>

List and change directories

List names of current directory contents, hiding entries starting with ".":

$ ls

List current directory contents, with more detailed information:

$ ls -[options]

where options

  • l = list also permissions, owners, date and size
  • a = list also entries starting with "."
  • h = to be used in conjunction with "l", show file sizes in "K" or "M"

List other directory contents:

$ ls -[options] <directory path>

Change working directory:

$ cd <directory path>

Copy files and directories

Copy a file within the same directory:

$ cp <source filename> <new filename>

Copy a file across different directories, keeping the same filename:

$ cp <source directory>/<sub-directory>/<filename> <target directory>/<sub-directory>/.​

to give:

<target directory>/<sub-directory>/<filename>

​Copy a file across different directories, to a new filename:

$ cp <source directory>/<sub-directory>/<filename> <target directory>/<sub-directory>/<new filename>

to give:

<target directory>/<sub-directory>/<new filename>

Omit:

<source directory>/<sub-directory>/

if copying files in the current directory.

Copy directories recursively, keeping the directory name:

$ cp -R <source directory>/<sub-directory A> <target directory>/.

to give:

<target directory>/<sub-directory A>

Copy directories recursively:

$ cp -R <source directory>/<sub-directory A> <target directory>/<sub-directory B>

If sub-directory B exists, all files and directories under sub-directory A will be copied under sub-directory B.

If sub-directory B does not exist, it will be created, and all files and directories under sub-directory A will be copied under it.

Copy directories recursively (-R) keeping original attributes (-a) and showing verbose progress (-v):

$ cp -Rav <source directory>/<sub-directory A> <target directory>/<sub-directory B>

(added, 18/4/2022)

Move files and directories

Use "mv" instead of "cp" for the above copy commands. No need to use "-R". Recursive move is the default.

Backup a directory of files

Archive (-a) all files under a sub-directory (A) and all sub-sub-directories underneath to the same sub-directory name under another sub-directory (B) keeping all the file attributes, symbolic links and time-stamps unchanged, preserving hard-links (-H) and displaying the progress verbosely (-v) and the numbers in human-readable format (-h):

$ sudo rsync -aHvh <source directory>/<sub-directory A> <target directory>/<sub-directory B>/​

to give:

<target directory>/<sub-directory B>/<sub-directory A>

The command can be used repeatedly to update the files in sub-directory A in the new location. If the source files have not been changed, no over-writing copying will be done. This would save time and is better than the cp command.

End of Page

Set Up Ubuntu Server 架設Ubuntu伺服器

Set Up Ubuntu Server 架設Ubuntu伺服器 KCTang

Go to End

Note

28 May 2019: Notes regarding unsuccessful installation added. Showing boot messages added.

7 May 2019: Contents added.

25 Dec 2014: First created as a flysheet without its own contents.

Intro

Ubuntu is a linux server software.

It has a desktop version and a server version, amongst other products.

The kernels of the desktop version and the server version are the same. The installation procedures are slightly different.

The desktop version provides a graphical user interface and the server version has a text based user interface, though a graphical user interface can subsequently be installed on the server version. Once installed with the graphical user interface, the two versions would not look much different to the users.

For small system, the desktop version should be easier to use.

Download

Download free of charge here

Install

Read installation guides:

Read fuller user guide here.

Set up storage drives

When allocating drive spaces, choose "Something else" with the desktop version and "manual" with the server version if one does not want to adopt the default settings, e.g. if one wants to have more options, such as setting one drive for "/boot" partition and one for "/" root system partition.

Set the computer bios to boot from the selected boot up disk. Remember to save the setting.

It is said that the boot partition needs only be about 300 Mb big. However, experience tells that it gets full easily because of frequent updating of the kernels and retainage of the last few kernels in the boot partition.

To remove kernels no longer needed to be retained, execute:

$ sudo apt autoremove

However, sometimes, the 300Mb boot partition has gone up to 100% full and insufficient to contain the required last few kernels such that there are no unused kernels to be removed to free up space.

Therefore, it is recommended to set up a boot partition of 1Gb.

Our company set-up:

  • boot partition on the smaller SSD disk sold with the computer
  • root system partition on the bigger hard disk relocated from old computer
  • additional hard disks mounted on the system for storage of data

To see disks mounted, execute:

$ df -h

The mounting configuration file is contained in /etc/fstab.

To mount disk using graphical user interface permanently, click "Activities" , enter "disk" and select the "Disks":

Mounting using "Disks" would change /etc/fstab permanently, without the need to change the /etc/fstab file manually.

Install application software packages

Update the software repository:

$ sudo apt update

Install software package:

$ sudo apt install <name of software>

Uninstall software package, keeping its configuration files:

$ sudo apt remove <name of software>

Uninstall software package and its configuration files:

$ sudo apt purge <name of software>

Alternatively, to bring up the graphical software package installation manager, execute:

$ sudo synaptic

or, on the graphical desktop, click "Activities" , enter "synaptic".

Upgrade Ubuntu release

Upgrade Ubuntu release:

$ sudo do-release-upgrade

Re-install

If it is necessary to re-install Ubuntu, back up everything first. 

Ubuntu usually can recognize the existing boot and root systems and data disks when Ubuntu is re-installed.

Try to keep the new co-existing with the old and change later after the system is running.

Keep the existing configurations and re-use the existing configuration files as much as possible.

Most of the configuration files are stored in the /etc directory.

If Ubuntu is freshly installed, copy back the files and directories of the application software to the new system before re-installing the application software, e.g. the following files or directories:

  • /etc/aliases
  • /etc/aliases.db
  • /etc/anacrontab
  • /etc/apache2
  • /etc/ca-certificates
  • /etc/ca-certificates.conf
  • /etc/dovecot
  • /etc/hostname
  • /etc/hosts
  • /etc/openvpn
  • /etc/phpmyadmin
  • /etc/postfix
  • /etc/samba
  • /etc/vsftpd.conf
  • /etc/vsftpd.chroot_list

Do not copy back the /etc/fstab file because the file system configuration there is no longer applicable to the new system and copying back will cause the new system not re-bootable.

If copied back, use "Disk" software mentioned above to make some changes so that the /etc/fstab file reflects the latest configuration, before re-booting.

The information of the previous user names, groups and passwords are contained in the following files:

  • /etc/passwd
  • /etc/group
  • /etc/gshadow
  • /etc/shadow

Use text editor and spreadsheet software to pick out old information in the old files and not superseded by the new information and copy it cover to the new files to enable the users to access their previous data directories, otherwise, re-redefine all the user names and passwords one by one.

Re-install the additional application software after coping back as described above.

The software might have updated the default configuration files over time but usually would tolerate using the old configuration files. Therefore, it is preferred to keep using the old configuration files to ensure that the software is successfully re-installed before making changes. There may be very slight changes to new configuration files. The installation process will usually prompt to ask which file to keep and give an opportunity to see a comparison. It may be better to record the changes first and change later. Using the new configuration files in conjunction with the old physical configurations may cause the software not workable. Carefully check for any slight changes to the new configuration files if using the new configuration files to add the old configuration settings.

If re-installation is not successful after :

$ sudo apt install <name of software>

try:

$ sudo apt remove <name of software>

or even:

$ sudo apt purge <name of software>

or even remove the software directory before:

$ sudo apt install <name of software>

Usually, it is the configuration which is causing problems.

(The following added, 28 May 2019)

The "remove" option will leave behind the user modified configuration files.

Rename them.

Re-install the application software.

Use the new configuration file if see if the application software can run successfully.

If yes, copy the user modifications in the old configuration file to the new so far as compatible, and see whether the software application can run successfully.

The "purge" option will remove all configuration files and other related software. Care should be exercised to review that the related software would not be required by other software.

Removing the software directory is the extreme option with little additional effect.

Show messages when booting

(section added, 28 May 2019)

Execute:

$ sudo gedit /etc/default/grub

Specify:

#GRUB_CMDLINE_LINUX_DEFAULT="quiet splash"    (uncomment the default)
GRUB_CMDLINE_LINUX_DEFAULT=""                 (add)

Execute:

$ sudo update-grub

 

End of Page

Install backintime

Install backintime KCTang

Go to End

Note

31 Jan 2023: Updated.

12 May 2020: Updated.

30 May 2019: Created.

Intro

backintime enables incremental backup of files.

Listing it as the first application software to be installed after installing Ubuntu is an indication of the importance of backing up files.

Install

Execute:

$ sudo apt install backintime*
$ sudo apt install backintime-qt

(updated 12 May 2020)

Bring up

Select Activities.

Type "ba" to bring up some application icons:

Select Back in Time (root) to show the front page:

Alternatively, execute

$ sudo i backintime
or
$ pkexec backintime

However, the terminal commands are not reliable to bring up backintime. Using the graphical desktop is more reliable.

(updated 12 May 2020)

Config

Select the setting button:

Select the General page:

Specify:

  • where to save snapshots
  • host computer name, user name "root" to have widest permission, profile starting with 1
  • scheduled intervals and hours to save snapshots

Select the Include page > Add folder to select the folders to include in backup :

Add file can only include files not a whole folder.

Select Exclude page.

Generally accept the default exclusions.

Select Add folder to select sub-folders to be excluded from the backup when their parent folders have been included:

Select Auto-remove to set time criteria to automatically remove old spanshots:

Select Options page.

Generally accept the default settings.

Select Expert Options page.

Generally accept the default settings.

Select OK to save.

Exit the software. It will run at the specified times.

Take snapshot any time

Bring up the front page:

Select the take snapshot button: 

It would take some time to take a snapshot depending on the extent of file changes since the last snapshot.

Restore

Restore backup files when the present files have been lost or corrupted.

Bring up the front page:

 

Select:

  • the desired snapshot in the left window
  • the desired backup folder in the middle window
  • one or more folders or files in the right window

Select the restore button:

Select whether to backup local files with a trailing suffix before restoring the old files:

Select Yes to proceed if for sure.

Folders and files will be restored.

It would take some time depending on the size to be restored.

Let the process finish with the use permissions set back to the original state.

If only the folders in the middle window is selected before the restore button is selected, this message will appear to indicate that the "/" root folder will be restored:

It is important not to just select the folders in the middle window and select the restore button to proceed, because it will easily restore files to the "/" root directory and overwrite the still valid system and programme files in the root directory to cause problems.

Repair

Sometimes, backintime cannot be brought up to run, even after a removal and re-installation.

This can be caused by the removal of some other programmes which backintime depends on but which have been removed when some other application software is removed. Re-installation of backintime may not bring them back.

The following shows the programmes which backintime depends on:

Try to re-install the missing programmes:

$ sudo apt install <name of programme>

rsync, python3, openssh-client are likely missing programmes.

 

In case of the following error:

Traceback (most recent call last):
  File "/usr/share/backintime/common/backintime.py", line 28, in <module>
    import config
  File "/usr/share/backintime/common/config.py", line 45, in <module>
    import tools
  File "/usr/share/backintime/common/tools.py", line 37, in <module>
    from packaging.version import Version
ModuleNotFoundError: No module named 'packaging'

 

Execute:

$ sudo apt install python3-packaging

(last 2 paragraphs added, 31 Jan 2023)

 

End of Page

 

Install Samba file server for Windows

Install Samba file server for Windows KCTang

Go to End

Note

26/2/2023: Trash folder added.

28/7/2022: Correct the positions of two statements. "gedit" changed to "nano" in case non gui interface is used.

7/5/2019: Slight adjustments. "gksudo gedit" changed to "sudo gedit" as Ubuntu 18.04 dropped "gksudo".

25/12/2014: First created.

Intro

Samba file server enables specified directories to be accessible by Windows computers on the same network.

Install

Install the package​s:​

$ sudo apt update 
$ sudo apt install samba
$ sudo apt install samba-vfs-modules

samba-vfs-modules is used to enable Trash folder.

(vsf-modules added, 26/2/2023)

Define a workgroup

Edit the config file:

$ sudo nano /etc/samba/smb.conf

​​​​​Define workgroup name as "kctcl" in the "[global]" section:

workgroup = kctcl

Uncomment to restrict access to server users only:

security = user

Add the following if OpenVPN used:

hosts allow = 192.168.0. 10.8.0. 127.0.0.

(added. 7/5/2019):

Put the last two statements under the "[global]" section after "Networking" instead of at the end, otherwise "security = user" will apply to the last shared directory causing it to be non-assessible. 

(added, 28/7/2022)

Define directories to be shared

Add a section at the end to share directories:

[<sub-directory name or other short name>] 
pth = /<directory name>/<sub-directory name> 
browseable = yes 
guest ok = yes 
read only = no 
create mask = 0775
directory mask = 0775 
# do not include the next two lines if access is restricted to the owning user (added 7 May 2019)
force user = nobody 
force group = nogroup
# Enable Trash folder, KCTang 18/1/2023
vfs object = recycle
# Specify a folder relative to the path above
# Do not specify absolute path unless the path is outside the path above
# The folder will be created automatically upon first deletion
# Hidden folder (prefixed with '.') not used
# Use %U if want to record the user name, not used KCTang 26/2/2023
#recycle:repository = Trash/%U
recycle:repository = Trash
# Mode permits all users to delete
recycle:directory_mode = 0775
# Change last accessed time when moved to the Trash folder
recycle:touch = yes
# Keep modified time
recycle:touch_mtime = no
# Keep folder tree
recycle:keeptree = yes
# Files of the same name deleted will be kept with newer deleted file named as "Copy # of ..."
recycle:versions = yes
# Exclusions
recycle.exclude = *.tmp, ~*, thumb.db

(Trash folder added, 26/2/2023)

Create the directory to be shared, if not already existing:

$ sudo mkdir -p /<directory name>/<sub-directory name>

Change ownership of the directory:

$ sudo chown nobody:nogroup /<directory name>/<sub-directory name>

Start service

Start or restart Samba service whenever the config file is changed:

$ sudo systemctl restart smbd nmbd

or, if ".service" is not automatically appended when executing the above command:

$ sudo systemctl restart smbd.service nmbd.service

Define Crontab

Define crontab to delete Samba Trash files older than 30 days:

$ crontab -e

Edit to include:

#Delete Samba Trash files folder than 30 days
0 0 * * * /usr/bin/find /kctcl/Trash -type f -atime +30 -delete

(added, 26/2/2023)

 

End of Page

Install Postfix + Dovecot e-mail server

Install Postfix + Dovecot e-mail server KCTang

Go to End

Note

  • 13 Feb 2023: Use Letsencrypt ssl. Change gedit to micro as non-graphical editor.
  • 11 Feb 2023: Add full config files. Correct opendkim socket.
  • 1 Feb 2023: Correct typos.
  • 10 Oct 2022: Add DKIM setting.
  • 18 Jun 2021: Adjust TLS setting.
  • 5 Jan 2021: Increase imap-login process limit. List Dovecot full custom settings.
  • 9 Dec 2020: Define cron job to delete filtered mails.
  • 20 Sep 2020: Stop using mail-stack-delivery.
  • 8 May 2020: Correct typo errors.
  • 30 May 2019: Add anti-virus and spam mail filtering.
  • 17 May 2019: Add copying emails to external accounts.
  • 7 May 2019: Change "gksudo gedit" to "sudo gedit" as Ubuntu 18.04 dropped "gksudo". Add header_checks. Add auto creation of Trash folders. Add webmaster.
  • 29 Sep 2018: Add "body_checks" for spam control.
  • 20 Sep 2018: Increase message_size_limit to 20 times the default.
  • 5 Apr 2018: Increase message_size_limit to 10 times the default.
  • 25 Dec 2018: Publish on web.
  • 12 Apr 2014: Specify maximal_queue_lifetime to notify unsuccessful delivery immediately.
  • 2 Apr 2014: Specify fully qualified domain name.

Intro

Postfix is a mail transfer agent (MTA) responsible for sending out and receiving emails between servers.

Dovecot is a mail delivery agent (MDA) responsible for sending out and receiving emails between a server and its users.

Mail-stack-delivery was a combined package containing both Postfix and Dovecot. It is now no longer supported.

Re-direct to server ports​

Set the internet router to re-direct the following connections to server ports:

  • SMTP = port 25 (for receiving or sending emails)
  • secure SMTP = port 465 (for receiving or sending emails securely)
  • IMAP = port 143 (for retrieving emails)
  • secure IMAP = port 993 (for retrieving emails securely)
  • POP3 = port 110 (for retrieving emails)

Install both Postfix and Dovecot​

Ubuntu 20.04 does not support the combined package "mail-stack-delivery" anymore.

Install Dovecot and Postfix individually:

$ sudo apt install dovecot-imapd dovecot-pop3d
$ sudo apt install postfix

However, the previous config file "/etc/dovecot/conf.d/99-mail-stack-delivery.conf" is still retained for use, because "99" represents the last and overriding config file. This eliminates the need to change the individual config files.

(revised to install individually, 20/9/2020)

Reconfigure Postfix

Reconfig:

$ sudo dpkg-reconfigure postfix

Use Tab key to change selection.

Select "Internet Site".

Enter the following information:

System mail name: <fully qualified domain name, such as "kctang.com.hk">
Root and postmaster mail recipient: <such as "kctang">
Other destinations to accept mail: <fully qualified domain name, such as "kctang.com.hk">, <server name such as "server">, localhost.localdomain, localhost
Force synchronous updates on mail queue: No
Local networks: <leave it blank to accept the default>
Use procmail for local delivery: No
Mailbox size limit (bytes): 0
Local address extension character: +
Internet protocols to use: all

Edit "main.cf" settings:

$ sudo micro /etc/postfix/main.cf

Specify in full:

# See /usr/share/postfix/main.cf.dist for a commented, more complete version
# Debian specific:  Specifying a file name will cause the first
# line of that file to be used as the name.  The Debian default
# is /etc/mailname.
#myorigin = /etc/mailname
smtpd_banner = $myhostname ESMTP $mail_name (Ubuntu)
biff = no
# appending .domain is the MUA's job.
append_dot_mydomain = no
# Uncomment the next line to generate "delayed mail" warnings
#delay_warning_time = 4h
readme_directory = no
# See http://www.postfix.org/COMPATIBILITY_README.html -- default to 2 on
# fresh installs.
compatibility_level = 2
# the following automatically set by dpkg-reconfigure postfix
myhostname = kctang.com.hk
# fully qualified domain name instead of server name used,
# otherwise some servers would not accept e-mails sent without fully qualified domain name, 2/4/2014
alias_maps = hash:/etc/aliases
alias_database = hash:/etc/aliases
myorigin = /etc/mailname
mydestination = kctang.com.hk, server3, localhost.localdomain, localhost
relayhost = 
mynetworks = 127.0.0.1/32 10.8.0.1/32 [::1]/128
# something similar to the above line
mailbox_size_limit = 0
recipient_delimiter = +
inet_interfaces = all
# ALL the following added to default
inet_protocols = all
home_mailbox = Maildir/
mailbox_command = /usr/lib/dovecot/deliver -c /etc/dovecot/dovecot.conf -m "${EXTENSION}"
message_size_limit = 204800000
# last line added to increase the default to 10 times, KCTang 5/4/2014
# increased to 20 times, KCTang 20/9/2018
maximal_queue_lifetime = 0
# last line added to report unsuccessful delivery immediately instead of after the default of 5 days, KCTang 12/4/2014
bounce_queue_lifetime = 0
# last line added, this should not be bigger than maximal_queue_lifetime, KCTang 20/5/2019
# smtpd setting
#smtpd_proxy_timeout = 240s
smtpd_sasl_type = dovecot
smtpd_sasl_path = private/dovecot-auth
smtpd_sasl_local_domain = $myhostname
smtpd_sasl_security_options = noanonymous,noplaintext
# noplaintext in last line added to prevent unencrypted credentials, KCTang 13/2/2023
smtpd_sasl_tls_security_options = noanonymous
# last line added, KCTang 13/2/2023
broken_sasl_auth_clients = yes
smtpd_sasl_auth_enable = yes
smtpd_sasl_authenticated_header = yes
smtpd_recipient_restrictions = 
    reject_unknown_sender_domain
    reject_unknown_recipient_domain 
    reject_unauth_pipelining
    permit_mynetworks
    permit_sasl_authenticated 
    reject_unauth_destination
    check_policy_service unix:private/policyd-spf
# last line added to enable spf, KCTang 19/2/2022
smtpd_relay_restrictions = 
    permit_mynetworks
    permit_sasl_authenticated
    defer_unauth_destination
smtpd_sender_restrictions = reject_unknown_sender_domain
# TLS parameters
smtp_use_tls = yes
smtp_tls_security_level=may
smtpd_tls_security_level=may
smtp_tls_note_starttls_offer=yes
smtpd_tls_loglevel = 1
smtpd_tls_received_header = yes
# use the following two as provided as default
#smtpd_tls_cert_file=/etc/ssl/certs/ssl-cert-snakeoil.pem
#smtpd_tls_key_file=/etc/ssl/private/ssl-cert-snakeoil.key
# use the following two if self define key and certificate
#smtpd_tls_key_file=/etc/ssl/private/server.key
#smtpd_tls_cert_file=/etc/ssl/certs/server.crt
# use the following two if using letsencrypt, KCTang 13/2/2023
smtpd_tls_cert_file=/etc/letsencrypt/live/kctang.com.hk/fullchain.pem
smtpd_tls_key_file=/etc/letsencrypt/live/kctang.com.hk/privkey.pem
# use the following if using self certification authority
#smtp_tls_CApath=/etc/ssl/certs/
smtp_tls_session_cache_database = btree:${data_directory}/smtp_scache
smtpd_tls_session_cache_database = btree:${data_directory}/smtpd_scache
smtpd_tls_auth_only = yes
smtpd_tls_mandatory_ciphers = medium
# smtpd_tls_mandatory_protocols = SSLv3, TLSv1 # commented, replaced below, KCTang 18/6/2021
# next 2 lines added to enhance security, KCTang 1/7/2021
smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols = !SSLv2, !SSLv3, !TLSv1, !TLSv1.1
smtpd_tls_mandatory_protocols = !SSLv2, !SSLv3, !TLSv1, !TLSv1.1
tls_random_source = dev:/dev/urandom
#header_checks = regexp:/etc/postfix/header_checks
# last line added to check headers, KCTang 30/9/2018, disabled after using amavis 1/6/2019
#body_checks = regexp:/etc/postfix/body_checks
# last line added to refer to another file to check contents of email bodies, KCTang 29/9/2018, disabled after using amavis 1/6/2019
# virtual_alias_domains = kctang.com.hk
# last line added on 17/5/2019, but disabled since same domain name already defined as destination above, KCTang 20/5/2019
virtual_alias_maps = hash:/etc/postfix/virtual
# last line added to forward emails to another server, KCTang 17/5/2019
content_filter = smtp-amavis:[127.0.0.1]:10024
# last line added for amavis, KCTang 1/6/2019
# the following line added to enable spf, KCTang 19/2/2022
policyd-spf_time_limit = 3600
# Milter configuration, added but disabled, KCTang 2/6/2019, enabled again, KCTang 19/2/2022
milter_default_action = accept
milter_protocol = 6
smtpd_milters = local:opendkim/opendkim.sock
non_smtpd_milters = $smtpd_milters

(full file given, 11/2/2023)

(updated, 13/2/2023)

Edit "master.cf" settings:

$ sudo micro /etc/postfix/master.cf

Specify​ in full:

#
# Postfix master process configuration file.  For details on the format
# of the file, see the master(5) manual page (command: "man 5 master" or
# on-line: http://www.postfix.org/master.5.html).
#
# Do not forget to execute "postfix reload" after editing this file.
#
# ==========================================================================
# service type  private unpriv  chroot  wakeup  maxproc command + args
#               (yes)   (yes)   (no)    (never) (100)
# ==========================================================================
smtp      inet  n       -       y       -       -       smtpd
#smtp      inet  n       -       y       -       1       postscreen
#smtpd     pass  -       -       y       -       -       smtpd
#dnsblog   unix  -       -       y       -       0       dnsblog
#tlsproxy  unix  -       -       y       -       0       tlsproxy
#submission inet n       -       y       -       -       smtpd
#  -o syslog_name=postfix/submission
#  -o smtpd_tls_security_level=encrypt
#  -o smtpd_sasl_auth_enable=yes
#  -o smtpd_tls_auth_only=yes
#  -o smtpd_reject_unlisted_recipient=no
#  -o smtpd_client_restrictions=$mua_client_restrictions
#  -o smtpd_helo_restrictions=$mua_helo_restrictions
#  -o smtpd_sender_restrictions=$mua_sender_restrictions
#  -o smtpd_recipient_restrictions=
#  -o smtpd_relay_restrictions=permit_sasl_authenticated,reject
#  -o milter_macro_daemon_name=ORIGINATING
smtps     inet  n       -       y       -       -       smtpd
# last line uncommented, KCTang 2/4/2014
#  -o syslog_name=postfix/smtps
  -o smtpd_tls_wrappermode=yes
# last line added to force use of TLS, KCTang 2/4/2014
  -o smtpd_sasl_auth_enable=yes
# last line uncommented to enable STARTTLS authentication, KCTang 2/4/2014
#  -o smtpd_reject_unlisted_recipient=no
#  -o smtpd_client_restrictions=$mua_client_restrictions
#  -o smtpd_helo_restrictions=$mua_helo_restrictions
#  -o smtpd_sender_restrictions=$mua_sender_restrictions
#  -o smtpd_recipient_restrictions=
  -o smtpd_relay_restrictions=permit_sasl_authenticated,reject
# last line uncommented to reject if not authenticated, KCTang 2/4/2014
  -o milter_macro_daemon_name=ORIGINATING
# last line uncommented, KCTang 2/4/2014
#628       inet  n       -       y       -       -       qmqpd
pickup    unix  n       -       y       60      1       pickup
  -o content_filter=
  -o receive_override_options=no_header_body_checks
# last two lines added for anti-spam, KCTang 29/5/2019
cleanup   unix  n       -       y       -       0       cleanup
qmgr      unix  n       -       n       300     1       qmgr
#qmgr     unix  n       -       n       300     1       oqmgr
tlsmgr    unix  -       -       y       1000?   1       tlsmgr
rewrite   unix  -       -       y       -       -       trivial-rewrite
bounce    unix  -       -       y       -       0       bounce
defer     unix  -       -       y       -       0       bounce
trace     unix  -       -       y       -       0       bounce
verify    unix  -       -       y       -       1       verify
flush     unix  n       -       y       1000?   0       flush
proxymap  unix  -       -       n       -       -       proxymap
proxywrite unix -       -       n       -       1       proxymap
smtp      unix  -       -       y       -       -       smtp
relay     unix  -       -       y       -       -       smtp
        -o syslog_name=postfix/$service_name
#       -o smtp_helo_timeout=5 -o smtp_connect_timeout=5
     -o smtp_connect_timeout=60s
# last line added, KCTang 10/3/2021
showq     unix  n       -       y       -       -       showq
error     unix  -       -       y       -       -       error
retry     unix  -       -       y       -       -       error
discard   unix  -       -       y       -       -       discard
local     unix  -       n       n       -       -       local
virtual   unix  -       n       n       -       -       virtual
lmtp      unix  -       -       y       -       -       lmtp
anvil     unix  -       -       y       -       1       anvil
scache    unix  -       -       y       -       1       scache
postlog   unix-dgram n  -       n       -       1       postlogd
#
# ====================================================================
# Interfaces to non-Postfix software. Be sure to examine the manual
# pages of the non-Postfix software to find out what options it wants.
#
# Many of the following services use the Postfix pipe(8) delivery
# agent.  See the pipe(8) man page for information about ${recipient}
# and other message envelope options.
# ====================================================================
#
# maildrop. See the Postfix MAILDROP_README file for details.
# Also specify in main.cf: maildrop_destination_recipient_limit=1
#
maildrop  unix  -       n       n       -       -       pipe
  flags=DRhu user=vmail argv=/usr/bin/maildrop -d ${recipient}
#
# ====================================================================
#
# Recent Cyrus versions can use the existing "lmtp" master.cf entry.
#
# Specify in cyrus.conf:
#   lmtp    cmd="lmtpd -a" listen="localhost:lmtp" proto=tcp4
#
# Specify in main.cf one or more of the following:
#  mailbox_transport = lmtp:inet:localhost
#  virtual_transport = lmtp:inet:localhost
#
# ====================================================================
#
# Cyrus 2.1.5 (Amos Gouaux)
# Also specify in main.cf: cyrus_destination_recipient_limit=1
#
#cyrus     unix  -       n       n       -       -       pipe
#  user=cyrus argv=/cyrus/bin/deliver -e -r ${sender} -m ${extension} ${user}
#
# ====================================================================
# Old example of delivery via Cyrus.
#
#old-cyrus unix  -       n       n       -       -       pipe
#  flags=R user=cyrus argv=/cyrus/bin/deliver -e -m ${extension} ${user}
#
# ====================================================================
#
# See the Postfix UUCP_README file for configuration details.
#
uucp      unix  -       n       n       -       -       pipe
  flags=Fqhu user=uucp argv=uux -r -n -z -a$sender - $nexthop!rmail ($recipient)
#
# Other external delivery methods.
#
ifmail    unix  -       n       n       -       -       pipe
  flags=F user=ftn argv=/usr/lib/ifmail/ifmail -r $nexthop ($recipient)
bsmtp     unix  -       n       n       -       -       pipe
  flags=Fq. user=bsmtp argv=/usr/lib/bsmtp/bsmtp -t$nexthop -f$sender $recipient
scalemail-backend unix    -    n    n    -    2    pipe
  flags=R user=scalemail argv=/usr/lib/scalemail/bin/scalemail-store ${nexthop} ${user} ${extension}
mailman   unix  -       n       n       -       -       pipe
  flags=FR user=list argv=/usr/lib/mailman/bin/postfix-to-mailman.py
  ${nexthop} ${user}
# the following added, KCTang 29/5/2019
smtp-amavis     unix    -       -       -       -       2       smtp
    -o smtp_data_done_timeout=1200
    -o smtp_send_xforward_command=yes
    -o disable_dns_lookups=yes
    -o max_use=20
127.0.0.1:10025 inet    n       -       -       -       -       smtpd
    -o content_filter=
    -o local_recipient_maps=
    -o relay_recipient_maps=
    -o smtpd_restriction_classes=
    -o smtpd_delay_reject=no
    -o smtpd_client_restrictions=permit_mynetworks,reject
    -o smtpd_helo_restrictions=
    -o smtpd_sender_restrictions=
    -o smtpd_recipient_restrictions=permit_mynetworks,reject
    -o smtpd_data_restrictions=reject_unauth_pipelining
    -o smtpd_end_of_data_restrictions=
    -o mynetworks=127.0.0.0/8
    -o smtpd_error_sleep_time=0
    -o smtpd_soft_error_limit=1001
    -o smtpd_hard_error_limit=1000
    -o smtpd_client_connection_count_limit=0
    -o smtpd_client_connection_rate_limit=0
    -o receive_override_options=no_header_body_checks,no_unknown_recipient_checks,no_milters
    
# the following added for spf, KCTang 1/6/2019, 
# then disabled as considered not necessary
# then re-enabled 19/2/2022 to overcome rejection by gmail
policyd-spf   unix  -       n       n       -       0       spawn
    user=policyd-spf argv=/usr/bin/policyd-spf

(full file given, 11/2/2023)

Create "body_checks" file, if required:

$ sudo micro /etc/postfix/body_checks

Specify​ one or more lines of texts within //:

/unique text contained in email you do not want to receive/ DISCARD

"DISCARD" means delete from the server.

Create "header_checks" file, if required:

$ sudo micro /etc/postfix/header_checks

Specify similarly.

(header checks added, 7/5/2019)

Change Dovecot settings

Edit config file:

$ sudo micro /etc/dovecot/conf.d/99-mail-stack-delivery.conf

Note that a number of default config files are contained in sub-directory "conf.d". To override them, create a config file beginning with "99" so that it is read the latest to override the others. The name is based on the previous "mail-stack-delivery" config file, but can be any.

Specify in full:

# Some general options
# Installed protocols are now auto-included by /etc/dovecot/dovecot.conf
# Since mail-stack-delivery depends on them it is more flexible to not
# explicitly list them here, but achieves the same.
# protocols = imap pop3 sieve
disable_plaintext_auth = yes
# Since 18.04 basic SSL enablement is set up by dovecot-core and configured
# in /etc/dovecot/conf.d/10-ssl.conf.
# So by default basic enablement is no more done here. The old section is kept
# as comment for reference to the old defaults.
#
# ssl = yes
# ssl_cert = </etc/dovecot/dovecot.pem
# ssl_key = </etc/dovecot/private/dovecot.pem
#
# If you keep a formerly used custom SSL enablement in this file it will (as
# before) continue to overwrite the new defaults in 10-ssl.conf as this file is
# sorted later being 99-*.conf
#
# If you choose to take the new defaults (no ssl config in this file) please
# make sure you have also chosen the package defaults for 10-ssl.conf (to enable
# it there) when dovecot-core configures. Also check that the links for cert/key
# set up there got created correctly (they would not be created if they conflict with your
# old keys done by mail-stack-delivery).
#
# use letsencrypt ssl, KCTang 13/2/2023 
ssl = yes
ssl_cert = </etc/letsencrypt/live/kctang.com.hk/fullchain.pem
ssl_key = </etc/letsencrypt/live/kctang.com.hk/privkey.pem
ssl_client_ca_dir =
#ssl_protocols = !SSLv2 !SSLv3
mail_location = maildir:~/Maildir:LAYOUT=fs
# LAYOUT=fs added to last line, to use "/" instead of "." to denote sub-folders, KCTang 25/5/2019
auth_username_chars = abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ01234567890.-_@
# IMAP configuration
protocol imap {
        mail_max_userip_connections = 1000
        # 10 in last line increased to 1000, KCTang 25/5/2019
        imap_client_workarounds = delay-newmail
}
# POP3 configuration
protocol pop3 {
        mail_max_userip_connections = 50
        # 10 in last line increased to 50, KCTang 25/5/2019 
        pop3_client_workarounds = outlook-no-nuls oe-ns-eoh
}
# LDA configuration
protocol lda {
        postmaster_address = postmaster
        mail_plugins = sieve
        quota_full_tempfail = yes
        deliver_log_format = msgid=%m: %$
        rejection_reason = Your message to <%t> was automatically rejected:%n%r
}
# Plugins configuration
plugin {
        sieve=~/.dovecot.sieve
        sieve_dir=~/sieve
}
# Authentication configuration
auth_mechanisms = plain login
service auth {
  # Postfix smtp-auth
  unix_listener /var/spool/postfix/private/dovecot-auth {
    mode = 0660
    user = postfix
    group = postfix
  }
}
# The following are additional to those in 15-mailboxes.conf.
# They are to auto create Trash folders.
# Trash folders would not be backed up with back-in-time,
# and therefore would need to be re-created after email recovery is done from back-in-time.
namespace inbox {
  mailbox Trash {
    auto = subscribe
  }
}
# process_limit increased, KCTang 4/1/2021
service imap-login {
  process_limit = 200
}
# The following added to resolve stats-writer failure, KCTang 3/6/2021
service stats {
  unix_listener stats-reader {
    user = root
    group = root
    mode = 0660
  }
  unix_listener stats-writer {
    user = root
    group = dovecot
    mode = 0660
  }
}

(full file given, 11/2/2023)

(updated, 13/2/2023)

Activate the changes:

$ sudo systemctl reload postfix
or
$ sudo service postfix reload
and
$ sudo systemctl restart dovecot
or
$ sudo service dovecot reload

Verify success

See whether the Postfix server is running:

$ telnet localhost 25

should display:

220 kctang.com.hk ESMTP Postfix (Ubuntu)

ehlo localhost

should display the following:

250-kctang.com.hk

250-PIPELINING

250-SIZE 102400000

250-VRFY

250-ETRN

250-STARTTLS

250-ENHANCEDSTATUSCODES

250-8BITMIME

250 DSN

Ctrl-]

to exit to "telnet >" prompt.

quit

to exit telnet.

Try also:

$ telnet localhost 993

("993", not "995", 1/2/2023)

similarly:

$ telnet localhost 465

should display either one:

Connected to localhost

Connected to kctang.com.hk

"Ctrl-]"

to exit to "telnet >" prompt.

quit

to exit telnet.

Specify internal email forwarding

Edit "aliases" file:

$ sudo micro /etc/aliases

Specify​:

postmaster: kctang
webmaster: kctang
kctcl: kctcl, kctclpop

meaning:

  • forwarding e-mails sent to postmaster@localhost and webmaster@localhost to kctang@localhost, no email will be left at postmaster or webmaster

(webmaster added, 7/5/2019)

  • forwarding e-mails sent to kctcl@localhost to kctcl@localhost (itself) and to kctclpop@localhst, i.e. making a copy

"localhost" means "kctang.com.hk" in our case. For the email user name before "@", there is no need to create a file system user account for it if all emails addressed to it are forwarded elsewhere. The name serves as an alias only of the email account forwarded to.

(added, 17/5/2019)

 

Activate setting everytime the "aliases" file has been changed:

$ sudo newaliases

 

Copy to external email accounts

(section added, 17/5/2019)

Execute:

$ sudo micro /etc/postfix/main.cf

Specify​ at the end of the file (already shown above):

virtual_alias_domains = kctang.com.hk
virtual_alias_maps = hash:/etc/postfix/virtual

Execute:

$ sudo micro /etc/postfix/virtual

Specify​ to make a copy to itself and a copy to the external email account:

# from               to one or more addresses, separated by a space 
kctang@kctang.com.hk kctang@kctang.com.hk name1@external.account.name
kctcl@kctang.com.hk kctcl@kctang.com.hk name2@external.account.name

Omit making a copy to itself if only email forwarding is required.

Save and exit.

Execute after the "virtual" file is created or changed:

$ sudo postmap /etc/postfix/virtual

Execute:

$ sudo systemctl restart postfix

Test by sending emails.

Install anti-virus Clamav-Daemon

(section added, 30/5/2019)

Install clamav-daemon:

$ sudo apt update
$ sudo apt install clamav-daemon            (clamav-freshclam also automatically installed)
$ sudo dpkg-reconfigure clamav-daemon   (must be done, generally accept all defaults, set yes to scan emails)
$ sudo systemctl start clamav-freshclam
$ sudo systemctl start clamav-daemon
$ sudo systemctl status clamav-freshclam    (check if running)
$ sudo systemctl status clamav-daemon       (check if running, OK if reported "/bin/mkdir /run/clamav (code=exited, status=1/FAILURE" because directory already created)
$ sudo tail -f /var/log/clamav/clamav.log        (see running progress, Ctrl-Z to exit)

(typo corrected, 8/5/2020)

(use sudo, 11/2/2023)

Filter spam mails

(section added, 30/5/2019)

Execute to install various software:

$ sudo apt update
$ sudo apt install amavisd-new spamassassin
$ sudo apt install postfix-policyd-spf-python                                 (optionally required for spf) 
$ sudo apt install opendkim                                                   (optionally required for opendkim)
$ sudo apt install pyzor razor                                                (optional extras)
$ sudo apt install arj cabextract cpio lhasa nomarch pax rar unrar unzip zip  ("lhasa", not "lha")

Configure ClamAV:

$ sudo adduser clamav amavis
$ sudo adduser amavis clamav

Configure SpamAssassin:

$ sudo micro /etc/default/spamassassin

Change "ENABLED=0" to:

ENABLED=1

(no longer set here, 8/5/2020)

Start the service:

$ sudo systemctl start spamassassin.service

Configure Amavisd-new:

$ sudo micro /etc/amavis/conf.d/15-content_filter_mode

Specify:

use strict;
# Uncomment the two lines below to enable antivirus checking mode
@bypass_virus_checks_maps = (
   \%bypass_virus_checks, \@bypass_virus_checks_acl, \$bypass_virus_checks_re);
# Uncomment the two lines below to enable SPAM checking mode
@bypass_spam_checks_maps = (
   \%bypass_spam_checks, \@bypass_spam_checks_acl, \$bypass_spam_checks_re);
1;  # insure a defined return

Execute:

$ sudo micro /etc/amavis/conf.d/20-debian_defaults

Change "D_PASS" to:

$final_spam_destiny = D_DISCARD

(deleted, 8/5/2020, reinstated, 26/7/2021)

Adjust the following values only if desired to flag more messages as spam:

$sa_tag_level_deflt = 2.0; # add spam info headers if at, or above that level
$sa_tag2_level_deflt = 6.31; # add 'spam detected' headers at that level
$sa_kill_level_deflt = 6.31; # triggers spam evasive actions
$sa_dsn_cutoff_level = 10; # spam level beyond which a DSN is not sent

Execute:

$ sudo micro /etc/amavis/conf.d/50-user

Specify:

$myhostname = 'kctang.com.hk';

Re-start the service:

$ sudo systemctl restart amavis.service

Edit the following file to specify domains to be whitelisted if necessary:

$ sudo micro /etc/amavis/conf.d/40-policy_banks

Test that the Amavisd-new SMTP is listening:

telnet localhost 10024
Trying 127.0.0.1...
Connected to kctang.com.hk.
Escape character is '^]'.
220 [127.0.0.1] ESMTP amavisd-new service ready

Press Ctrl-] and enter "quit" to exit.

Configure Postfix master.cf:

$ sudo micro /etc/postfix/master.cf

Add the following to the end of the file (already done above):

smtp-amavis     unix    -       -       -       -       2       smtp
    -o smtp_data_done_timeout=1200
    -o smtp_send_xforward_command=yes
    -o disable_dns_lookups=yes
    -o max_use=20
127.0.0.1:10025 inet    n       -       -       -       -       smtpd
    -o content_filter=
    -o local_recipient_maps=
    -o relay_recipient_maps=
    -o smtpd_restriction_classes=
    -o smtpd_delay_reject=no
    -o smtpd_client_restrictions=permit_mynetworks,reject
    -o smtpd_helo_restrictions=
    -o smtpd_sender_restrictions=
    -o smtpd_recipient_restrictions=permit_mynetworks,reject
    -o smtpd_data_restrictions=reject_unauth_pipelining
    -o smtpd_end_of_data_restrictions=
    -o mynetworks=127.0.0.0/8
    -o smtpd_error_sleep_time=0
    -o smtpd_soft_error_limit=1001
    -o smtpd_hard_error_limit=1000
    -o smtpd_client_connection_count_limit=0
    -o smtpd_client_connection_rate_limit=0
    -o receive_override_options=no_header_body_checks,no_unknown_recipient_checks,no_milters

Add the following immediately below the "pickup" transport service (already done above):

     -o content_filter=
     -o receive_override_options=no_header_body_checks

Configure Postfix main.cf:

$ sudo micro /etc/postfix/main.cf

Add the following to the end of the file (already done above):

content_filter = smtp-amavis:[127.0.0.1]:10024

Comment it with "#" at the start of the line if desired to stop using amavis.

Restart service:

$ sudo systemctl restart postfix

Check the hidden header of email received after the above to see the presence of one or more of the following:

X-Spam-Level: 
X-Virus-Scanned: Debian amavisd-new at kctang.com.hk
X-Spam-Status:
X-Spam-Level: 

If present, the spam filter is working.

See https://help.ubuntu.com/lts/serverguide/mail-filtering.html.en for a full explanation of the above.

Delete filtered mails

(section added, 9/12/2020)

Filtered files are stored in /var/lib/amavis/virusmails and should be deleted regularly.

Edit to define a scheduled job to delete filtered files:

$ sudo crontab -e -u amavis 

where:

-e = edit

-u amavis = user amavis

Define as follows:

0 0 * * * find /var/lib/amavis/virusmails/ -type f -mtime +15 -delete

which means at

0 = 0 minute

0 = 0 hour

* = every day of month

* = every month

* = every day of week

find /var/lib/amavis/virusmails = find in that directory

-type f = regular files

-mtime +15 = file modified more than 15 days ago

-delete = delete the file

Set up DKIM

(implemented, 19/2/2022

section added, 10/10/2022)

Set up DomainKeys Identified Mail (DKIM) to prevent email phishing by others by putting a digital key in the outgoing email headers so that the receiving email server can verify the digital key by looking up the public key in the DNS record of the sender domain.

Install OpenDKIM:

$ sudo apt install opendkim opendkim-tools

Add postfix user to opendkim group:

$ sudo gpasswd -a postfix opendkim

Configure:

$ sudo micro /etc/opendkim.conf

Specify:

# keep to log in /var/log/mail.log
Syslog             yes
SyslogSuccess      yes
# change to "yes" if desired to log more details
Logwhy             no
# keep
Canonicalization   relaxed/simple
# uncomment
Mode               sv
SubDomains         no
# keep
OversignHeaders    from
# add
AutoRestart         yes
AutoRestartRate     10/1M
Background          yes
DNSTimeout          5
SignatureAlgorithm  rsa-sha256
# keep
UserID              opendkim
UMask               007
# comment
#Socket             local:/run/opendkim/opendkim.sock
# add
Socket              local:/var/spool/postfix/opendkim/opendkim.sock
# keep
PidFile             /run/opendkim/opendkim.pid
TrustAnchorFile     /usr/share/dns/root.key
# keep
KeyTable            refile:/etc/opendkim/key.table
SigningTable        refile:/etc/opendkim/signing.table
ExternalIgnoreList  /etc/opendkim/trusted.hosts
InternalHosts       /etc/opendkim/trusted.hosts

Create a directory structure:

$ sudo mkdir /etc/opendkim
$ sudo mkdir /etc/opendkim/keys
$ sudo chown -R opendkim:opendkim /etc/opendkim
$ sudo chmod go-rw /etc/opendkim/keys

Create the signing table:

$ sudo micro /etc/opendkim/signing.table

Specify:

*@kctang.com.hk        default._domainkey.kctang.com.hk
# if sub-domain used
*@*.kctang.com.hk      default._domainkey.kctang.com.hk    

Create the key table:

$ sudo micro /etc/opendkim/key.table

Specify:

default._domainkey.kctang.com.hk     kctang.com.hk:default:/etc/opendkim/keys/kctang.com.hk/default.private

Create the trusted hosts file:

$ sudo micro /etc/opendkim/trusted.hosts

Specify to sign but not to verify emails from localhost or the following domain:

127.0.0.1
localhost
*.kctang.com.hk

("*" added, 1/2/2023)

Create separate folder for the domain and generate Private/Public Keypair:

$ sudo mkdir /etc/opendkim/keys/kctang.com.hk
$ sudo opendkim-genkey -b 1024 -d kctang.com.hk -D /etc/opendkim/keys/kctang.com.hk -s default -v

Use -b 2048 instead of -b 1024 for bits of key if the domain name server permits.
-d for domain name

-D for directory to store the keys

-s for selector

The private key will be written to default.private file and the public key will be written to default.txt file.

Change owner and permission:

$ sudo chown opendkim:opendkim /etc/opendkim/keys/kctang.com.hk/default.private
$ sudo chmod 600 /etc/opendkim/keys/kctang.com.hk/default.private

Display the public key:

$ sudo cat /etc/opendkim/keys/kctang.com.hk/default.txt

The string after the p parameter is the public key:

default._domainkey      IN      TXT     ( "v=DKIM1; h=sha256; k=rsa; "
          "p=..." )  ; ----- DKIM key default for kctang.com.hk

Define in the Domain Name Record on the domain name host:

Name = default._domainkey

Address or value = the text in ( ) above, but deleting double quotes and spaces

Type = SPF (txt)

Test DKIM Key:

$ sudo opendkim-testkey -d kctang.com.hk -s default -vvv

Successful if an opendkim-testkey output is key OK.

No problem if an opendkim-testkey output is key not secure because DNSSEC may not have been enabled on the domain name.

The DKIM record may take up to 24 hours to propagate to the Internet.

Can also go to https://www.dmarcanalyzer.com/dkim/dkim-check/, enter "kctang.com.hk" as the domain name and "default" as the selector to check DKIM record propagation.

In case of the query timed out error, comment out the following line in /etc/opendkim.conf file and restart opendkim.service.

TrustAnchorFile       /usr/share/dns/root.key

Create a directory to hold the OpenDKIM socket file, and allow only opendkim user and postfix group to access it:

$ sudo mkdir /var/spool/postfix/opendkim
$ sudo chown opendkim:postfix /var/spool/postfix/opendkim

Edit:

$ sudo micro /etc/default/opendkim 

Comment out:

# SOCKET=local:$RUNDIR/opendkim.sock

Add to suit Ubuntu:

SOCKET=local:/var/spool/postfix/opendkim/opendkim.sock

Create the file

$ sudo mkdir /var/spool/postfix/opendkim 
$ sudo chown -R opendkim:opendkim /var/spool/postfix/opendkim

(file creation added, 11/2/2023)

Edit Postfix main.cf to configure Milter as shown above.

Restart opendkim and postfix service and check status to see any errors:

$ sudo systemctl restart opendkim postfix
$ sudo systemctl status opendkim postfix

(status check added, 11/2/2023)

Set up Domain Name record

Set up the Domain Name record at the domain hosting company as follows:

v=DMARC1; p=quarantine; pct=10
v=spf1 ip4:202.69.68.114 include:_spf.google.com include:spf.protection.outlook.com ~all

The ip4 is our company's IP address. This is not a secret.

(added, 21/2/2023)

 

End of Page

Install Ftp server

Install Ftp server KCTang

Go to End

Note

26 Apr 2022: "gedit" changed to "nano". Minor error corrected.

5 Sep 2019: "0755" changed to "0775" for "Ftp" directory.

7 May 2019: "gksudo gedit" changed to "sudo gedit" as Ubuntu 18.04 dropped "gksudo".

25 Dec 2014: Created.

Intro

FTP server enables directories to be accessible for downloading or uploading by users outside the local network.

Install

Install the package:

$ sudo apt-get install vsftpd

Edit config file:

$ sudo nano /etc/vsftpd.conf

Uncomment the following line to enable uploading:

write_enable=YES

Define as the following line to change the default directory permissions to 775 (drwxrwxr-x) and default file permissions to 664 (-rw-rw-r--):

local_umask=002

Uncomment the following lines to restrict users to their home except for those listed in the file represented by "chroot_list_file":

chroot_local_user=YES
chroot_list_enable=YES
chroot_list_file=/etc/vsftpd.chroot_list

("vsftpd.choot_list" corrected as "vsftpd.chroot_list", 7 May 2019)

Save file after uncommenting.

Specify users who can go outside their home by inserting their user login names one on each line in the file represented by "chroot_list_file":

$ sudo nano /etc/vsftpd.chroot_list

("vsftpd/chroot_list" corrected as "vsftpd.chroot_list", 7 May 2019)

Restart ftp service whenever the config files are changed:

$ sudo systemctl restart vsftpd
or
$ sudo service vsftpd restart

Set the internet router to re-direct ftp connections to server port 21.

Set up a root FTP Directory to contain all FTP job folders

Change directory to the top directory assessible for use by Windows network through Samba:

$ cd /<full directory path from root>​

Make a directory specially for FTP storage, called "Ftp" in this example:

$ sudo mkdir Ftp

Change its ownership so that it can be accessed by Windows network:

$ sudo chown nobody:nogroup Ftp

Change its permissions to "read only" for other users:

$ sudo chmod 0775 Ftp

("0755" changed to "0775" because for unknown reasons sub-directory cannot be created under "Ftp", 5 Sep 2019)

Check setting:

$ ls -ls

should show "drwxrwxr-x" and "nobody nogroup" against the "Ftp" item.

(drwxr-xr-x corrected as drwxrwxr-x, 26 Apr 2022)

Create a ftp user for specific job

Create a new user with authority to download and upload the job ftp directory:

$ sudo adduser <ftp user name>

Change the new user's root directory from /home/<ftp user name> to the job ftp directory:

​$ sudo usermod -d /<full directory path from root>/Ftp/<job name> <ftp user name>
  • ​<ftp user name> and <job name> can be the same or different
  • <job name> will become ftp users' root directory, they will be restricted to see only files at or below the root directory, they will not see the name of <job name> or the directory structure outside the root directory
  • ​Instead of <job name>, a further sub-directory such as <job name>/<sub job name> may be defined as the root​ directory
  • ​The directory /<full directory path from root>/Ftp/<job name> will still exist but not be used for ftp

Set up a ftp directory for specific job for downloading

Create a job ftp directory under the Ftp directory:

  • using Windows Explorer:
​\\<server name>\<full folder path from server>\Ftp\<job name>
  • or at the server terminal:
$ cd /<full directory path from root>​/Ftp
$ sudo mkdir <job name>
$ sudo chown nobody:nogroup <job name>
$ ls -ls

should show "drwxr-xr-x" or "drwxrwxr-x" and "nobody nogroup" against the <job name> item.

Further sub-directories may be created similarly for downloading purposes.

Set up a ftp directory for specific job for uploading

Create an "upload" sub-directory under the job ftp directory:

  • using Windows Explorer:
​\\<server name>\<full folder path from server>\Ftp\<job name>\upload
  • or at the server terminal:
$ cd /<full directory path from root>​/Ftp/<job name>
$ sudo mkdir upload
$ sudo chown nobody:nogroup upload

Change its permissions on the server to enable "write" for all:

$ cd /<full directory path from root>/Ftp/<job name>
$ sudo chmod a+w upload

Check settings:

$ ls -ls

should show "drwxrwxrwx" and "nobody nogroup" against the "upload" item.

Upload or download

​Internally, use Windows file explorer to copy or move files between the Windows networked computers to the ftp directories:

  • ​​copy files to ​\\< server name>\<full folder path from server >\Ftp\<job name> for downloading
  • copy files from \\<server name>\<full folder path from server >\Ftp\<job name>\upload after uploading by others

Externally, inform external users the ftp user login name i.e. <ftp user name> and password for downloading or uploading.

End of Page

Install Apache2 web server

Install Apache2 web server KCTang

Go to End

Note

30 Jul 2020: Updated to use Python3.

6 Jan 2020: Updated.

8 May 2019: More explanation on default configuration given. "gksudo gedit" changed to "sudo gedit" as Ubuntu 18.04 dropped "gksudo".

11 Apr 2018:  "apache2" changed to "apache2.service" when used in conjunction with systemctl.

25 Dec 2014: First created.

Intro

Apache2 web server provides web page services.

Prepare

Define hosts:

$ sudo gedit /etc/hosts

Specify:

127.0.0.1 kctang.com.hk <computer name> localhost
127.0.1.1 <computer name>

Define hostname:

$ sudo gedit /etc/hostname

Specify a line to contain:

<computer name>

Install

Install:

$ sudo apt install apache2

or before Ubuntu 16.04:

$ sudo apt-get install apache2

Start service:

$ sudo systemctl start apache2.service

or:

$ sudo service apache2 start

Set the internet router to re-direct http connections to server port 80.

(The following added on 8 May 2019)

Edit the enabled configuration file:

$ sudo gedit /etc/apache2/sites-enabled/000-default.conf

("ls -ls" changed to "gedit", 6 Jan 2020)

The file is symbolic linked to the actual location at /etc/apache2/sites-available/000-default.conf.

The file includes the following:

#ServerName www.example.com
ServerAdmin webmaster@localhost
DocumentRoot /var/www/html

Leave the ServerName to the HTTPS setting below.

Change the ServerAdmin email address to the correct address, or add that address when setting up the email server.

The DocumentRoot tells that the website directories and files will be stored under /var/www/html.

Note that previously the DocumentRoot was at /var/www. The change from /var/www/html would affect the installation of Drupal as explaned on that web page.

Serf to http://www.kctang.com.hk or http://kctang.com.hk on web browser, the following page (var/www/html/index.html) will be displayed to indicate successful installation:

(end of add)

Configure to use HTTPS

This is optional. Starting to use on 6 April 2018.

When the Apache2 server is configured to use HTTPS, and when "https://" is used as the prefix to the website address URL (Uniform Resource Locator) in the web browser navigation bar, encrypted communications will be used with the Apache2 server. This will enhance security.

To do this, enable the mod_ssl module:

$ sudo a2enmod ssl

In order for Apache2 to use HTTPS service, a certificate and a key file are needed. Use EFF's Certbot to automatically deploy Let's Encrypt certificates and enable HTTPS.

Certbot is downloadable at:

https://certbot.eff.org/

No need to download from there.

(revised 8 May 2019)

Install certbot and configure Apache2:

$ sudo apt update
$ sudo apt install software-properties-common
$ sudo add-apt-repository ppa:certbot/certbot
$ sudo apt update
$ sudo apt install python3-certbot-apache
$ sudo certbot --apache
$ sudo certbot renew

(python changed to python3, 30 Jul 2020)

When answering questions

  • enter "kctang.com.hk" for name to activate HTTPS
  • decide whether to re-install certificate or renew and replace
  • select to redirect HTTP traffic to HTTPS.

(added on 8 May 2019).

The following will happen:

  • /etc/letsencrypt directory created to contain certificate obtained from Let's Encrypt.
  • A file /etc/apache2/sites-available/000-default-le-ssl.conf added and enabled.

(revised 8 May 2019)

  • The following lines inserted in /etc/apache2/sites-available/000-default.conf to enforce the use of "https://":
RewriteEngine on
RewriteCond %{SERVER_NAME} =kctang.com.hk
RewriteRule ^ https://%{SERVER_NAME}%{REQUEST_URI} [END,NE,R=permanent]
  • A cron job created to renew the certificate which lasts for 90 days before expiry.

Enable new module and disable default module if not already automatically done:

$ sudo a2ensite 000-default-le-ssl
$ sudo a2dissite default-ssl
$ sudo systemctl restart apache2.service

 

End of Page

Install MySQL server + PHP + phpMyAdmin

Install MySQL server + PHP + phpMyAdmin KCTang

Go to End

Note

  • 7 Nov 2023: Changing transaction_isolation.
  • 8 Jan 2020: Configuring MySQL-server updated. Removing completely MySQL added.
  • 6 Jan 2020: Updated.
  • 8 May 2019: References to PHP5 deleted. Secure installation added. Root user authentication added. automysqlbackup added.
  • 25 Dec 2014: First created.

Intro

MySQL is a database server.

PHP (PHP5 before Ubuntu 16.04) is a web page programming language.

phpMyAdmin is a web interface to administer the MySQL server.

Install MySQL-server

Execute:

$ sudo apt update
$ sudo apt install mysql-server
$ sudo systemctl start mysql.service
$ sudo systemctl status mysql.service

Config MySQL-server

(section added, 8 May 2019)

Execute:

$ sudo mysql_secure_installation

Enter new root password for the first time or the existing root password.

When answering the secure installation questions:

  • validate password component - yes
  • set password validation policy - 2 for MEDIUM
  • set password strength - high
  • change the password for root - yes or no as appropriate
  • set new password - as appropriate
  • re-enter new password -
  • continue with the password - yes or no as appropriate
  • remove anonymous users - yes
  • disallow root login remotely - no
  • remove test database - yes
  • reload privilege table now - yes

(steps updated, 8 Jan 2022)

(suggested answers added, 6 Jan 2020)

Adjust authentication for use with phpMyAdmin

(section added, 8 May 2019)

If not done, the phpMyAdmin menu would not provide a choice to add users.

Execute:

$ sudo mysql -u root -p

enter the root user's password when prompted.

Execute:

mysql> SELECT user,plugin FROM mysql.user;

It will show that the root user's authentication plugin is "auth_socket".

Execute:

mysql> ALTER USER 'root'@'localhost' IDENTIFIED WITH mysql_native_password BY '<root user password>';
mysql> FLUSH PRIVILEGES;
mysql> SELECT user,plugin FROM mysql.user;

(semi colon added after "PRIVILEGES", 6 Jan 2020)

It should show that the root user's authentication plugin has been changed to "mysql_nature_password".

Install PHP and related apache2 module

Execute:

$ sudo apt install php libapache2-mod-php

Install phpMyAdmin

Execute:

$ sudo apt install phpmyadmin

Set its own password.

Choose whether to keep the existing database whenever phpmyadmin is removed and re-installed.

Enable Apache2 config:

$ sudo ln -s /etc/phpmyadmin/apache.conf /etc/apache2/conf-available/phpmyadmin.conf
$ sudo a2enconf phpmyadmin.conf

Whenever Apache2 has been purged and re-installed, this enabling must be done again.

Restart Apache2 service:

Execute:

$ sudo systemctl restart apache2.service

Create a database user and a database

Execute:

 http://localhost/phpmyadmin
  or
 http://www.kctang.com.hk/phpmyadmin

Enter login name and password.

Create a user called <name, e.g. Drupal8> together with a database also called <name>:

  • click "Users" at the top menu bar
  • click "Add user" at the page middle
  • enter <name> at the User name entry
  • select "Local" at the Host entry
  • enter and re-type the password
  • click "Create database with same name and grant all privileges"
  • click "Go" at the bottom

Install automysqlbackup

(section added, 8 May 2019)

The software will backup mySQL databases daily, weekly and monthly.

Execute to install:

$ sudo apt install automysqlbackup

Edit the configuration file:

$ sudo gedit /etc/default/automysqlbackup

Specify:

BACKUPDIR="/var/lib/automysqlbackup" as the backup directory

MAILCONTENT="log" to send log email

MAILADDR="root" to send the email to root user, which has been set under Postfix Aliases to re-direct to the appropriate user.

Execute to run for the first time:

$ sudo automysqlbackup

Inspect daily backups:

$ sudo ls /var/lib/automysqlbackup/daily

Set transaction_isolation to READ COMMITTED

(section added, 6 Nov 2023)

To suit Drupal 10, change the transaction_isolation from "REPEATABLE READ" to "READ COMMITTED".

Execute:

$ sudo mysql -u root -p

enter the root user's password when prompted.

Execute:

mysql> SET GLOBAL TRANSACTION ISOLATION LEVEL READ COMMITTED;
mysql> SELECT @@GLOBAL.transaction_isolation;

The first command is to set. The second command is to verify.

Remove mySQL completely

(section added, 8 Jan 2022)

sudo systemctl stop mysql.service
sudo apt purge mysql*
sudo apt autoremove                    (optional)
sudo apt autoclean                     (optional)
sudo apt remove dbconfig-mysql
sudo rm -r /var/lib/mysql
sudo rm -r /log/mysql
sudo rm -r /etc/mysql
sudo deluser mysql

End of Page

Install Drupal 10 content management system

Install Drupal 10 content management system KCTang

Go to End

Note

  • 24/1/2024: "php/8.3" used.
  • 8/11/2023: TOP API and Convert Bundles installations added. Adding buttons to CKEditor revised.
  • 5/11/2023: Upgrading to Drupal 10 added. Drupal 9 and before deleted.
  • 21/12/2021: Bartik theme used instead of Mayo.
  • 11/11/2021: Errors in updating core manually corrected.
  • 5/1/2020: Problems when updating to Drupal 8.8 under php7.4 described. Some text updating.
  • 9/9/2019: Composer files also copied when relocating system.
  • 18/7/2019: Composer configuration actions added.
  • 7/7/2019: Original user-defined files and attributes kept when updating manually.
  • 26/5/2019: Composer and Drush installations added. Manual core installation added. Deleting configuration file added.
  • 16/5/2019: Simplified installation step added. Using new shell to restore added.
  • 8/5/2019: Page on Drupal 8 withdrawn. All "/var/www/web" changed to "/var/www/html/web" because Apache2 prefers to put website files underneath "/www/web/html", and it is easier that way. Relocating Drupal 8 added. Print page stylesheet re-written.
  • 18/1/2019: Updating Drupal 8 core using composer added.
  • 30/9/2018: Setting CKEditor to use Mayo theme stylesheet added. Setting print page to also use Mayo theme stylesheet added. Adding custom styles added.
  • 23/9/2018: "php/7.0" changed to "php/7.2".
  • 3/9/2018: First created from the page on Drupal 7 after major upgrading to Drupal 8. Resolution of CKEditor table border added.

Intro

(section revised, 5/11/2023)

Drupal is a web site content management system serving web pages to the internet.

Upgrading from Drupal 9 to 10 has been deferred because Drupal 10 has changed the default theme Bartik to Olivero front-end theme and Claro administration theme and some of the modules do not have compatible upgrades. We have been using Bartik and prefer it over those new themes.

However, Drupal 9 reached end of life on 1 Nov 2023. Our Drupal 9.5.11 was therefore upgraded to Drupal 10.1.6 on 4 November 2023. This page documents the upgrading procedures. Most of the previous text about installing Drupal 8 and upgrading to Drupal 9 has been deleted because they are not useful anymore. Some old bits and pieces have been retained in case they may be useful.

Install Drupal 10

(section added, 5/11/2023)

Go to Drupal's website https://www.drupal.org/ and go to the web page of the latest release.

The webpage for Drupal 10.1.6 is https://www.drupal.org/project/drupal/releases/10.1.6.

According to it, to start a new Drupal project:

$ cd /var/www/html/
$ composer create-project drupal/recommended-project:10.1.6 "install-dir"

Change "install-dir" to a new name such as "web".

To update an existing Drupal site and all dependencies to the latest release of Drupal:

$ cd /var/www/html/web
$ composer update "drupal/core-*" --with-all-dependencies

To update an existing Drupal site to this specific release:

$ cd /var/www/html/web
$ composer require drupal/core-recommended:10.1.6 drupal/core-composer-scaffold:10.1.6 drupal/core-project-message:10.1.6 --update-with-all-dependencies

Upgrade Drupal 9 to 10

(section added, 5 Nov 2023)

The upgrading command as given above is very simple, but the reality is not that simple because there can be many errors due to incompatible modules and themes as well as locking to some previous releases, resulting in the inability to upgrade. There are many other websites describing how to solve the upgrading problems, but the solutions mostly cannot work. After about 12 hours of trials and errors over two days, the upgrading was finally successful. The following records the procedures used (based on memory).

Go to Drupal's top folder and install drupal/upgrade_status:

$ cd /var/www/html/web
$ composer require drupal/upgrade_status

Go to Manage > Reports > Upgrade status.

Get the list of modules and themes which should be updated for Drupal 10.

Get the list of modules and themes which are incompatible with Drupal 10 or no longer used.

Go to Manage > Extend or > Appearance to update or remove modules and themes.

Alternatively, use composer to update or remove:

$ composer require <group name>/<name>
or
$ composer require <group name>/<name>:<add version number as necessary>
or
$ composer remove <group name>/<name>

Go to Manage > Configuration > Text formats and editors to change the text editor from CKEditor to CKEditor 5.

Change back to CKEditor if errors occur when saving the change. Remove those not acceptable menu icons. Change back to CKEditor 5 until the change is successfully saved.

Remove drupal/upgrade_status because the installed version is not compatible with Drupal 10.

$ composer remove drupal/upgrade_status

Update all files and settings to the current version:

$ composer update --with-all-dependencies
$ vendor/drush/drush/drush updatedb

"--with-all-dependencies" can be abbreviated as "-W".

Enable write access (not tested whether this is really necessary):

chmod 777 web/sites/default
chmod 666 web/sites/default/*settings.php
chmod 666 web/sites/default/*services.yml

Install Drupal 10 but without updating, and edit composer.json (see alternative below):

$ composer require drupal/core-recommended:10.1.6 drupal/core-composer-scaffold:10.1.6 drupal/core-project-message:10.1.6 --no-update
$ nano composer.json

Change the following line to state the new release number (it is an important step in this order, otherwise, upgrading will report incompatible new release or locked old releases):

"drupal/core": "10.1.6",

Upgrade now based on the newly specified release:

$ composer update --with-all-dependencies

Alternatively, the following command may work instead of the above command with "--no-update" option and the update command:

$ composer require "drupal/core:9.5.11 as 10.1.16" --no-update && composer update

However, the following line in composer.json still needs to be changed as such afterward.

"drupal/core": "10.1.6",

Update drush and update the database

$ composer require drush/drush
$ vendor/drush/drush/drush updatedb

The updatedb command may report post-update changes. Generally answer "Yes" to accept the changes.

The upgrading should be successful.

Restore read-only access:

chmod 755 web/sites/default
chmod 644 web/sites/default/*settings.php
chmod 644 web/sites/default/*services.yml

Install drupal/bartik as a contributed theme:

$ composer require drupal/bartik

Go to Manage > Appearance to make it the default theme.

Add back any compatible modules previously deleted due to incompatibility.

Go to Manage > Reports > Status report to see what errors arise.

It may remind to download colorbox-master. Download and extract it to a different name as /var/www/html/web/libraries/colorbox.

It may also remind to download DOMPurify-main. Download and extract it. Move its "dist" directory to become /var/www/html/web/libraries/dompurify/dist.

Some modules are related to CKEditor, they have to be removed before CKEditor can be removed. Some of them can be re-installed after the removal of CKEditor and automatically linked to CKEditor 5.

Add TOC API for table of contents

(section added, 8/11/2023)

Unlike CKEditor 4, CKEditor 5 does not have table of contents for free. The previous tables of contents have to be removed page by page.

Use TOC API instead.

Go to Drupal's top folder and install drupal/toc_api:

$ cd /var/www/html/web
$ composer require drupal/toc_api


TOP API Example will automatically be installed also. TOP API is the back end. The Example actually adds the table of contents.

Enable the two modules at Manage > Extend > List.

Go to Manage > Structure > Table of contents types to see a list of example tables.

The default is the one that will be used. The other are examples.

Table of contents types

Edit the default. Use responsive to suit mobile phones, which will show on mobile phones the title only with a drop down menu.

General settings

Change back to top maximum level to "h2". Change "Back to top" to "-> Top".

Back to top settings

No change here.

Header settings

Change numbering suffix from ") " to ". " both ending with a space.

The numbering suffice follows the numbers to the headings in the body. The numbering separator follows the numbers in the table of contents.

Numbering settings

Install Convert Bundles

(section added, 8/11/2023)

When testing various table of contents modules, it was found that some would apply to the Basic Pages but not the Book Pages. This website previously used mainly Book Pages. The drupal/convert_bundles module can be used to convert a type of contents pages to another type. Generally, follow the default settings. After many trials, TOC API has been chosen for the table of contents. By that time all the Book Pages have been changed to Basic Pages. It has not been tested whether the conversion is really required in order to use TOC API.

Prepare for a newly installed Drupal

(section revised, 5/11/2023)

Install Apache2 web server if not already installed.

Enable Apache2 rewrite module (should have been automatically installed when installing HTTPS):

$ sudo a2enmod rewrite

Configure Apache2:

$ sudo gedit /etc/apache2/apache2.conf

Specify, keeping "<" and ">":

<Directory /var/www/>
    Options Indexes FollowSymLinks
    # AllowOverride None # replaced with next line
    AllowOverride All
    Require all granted
</Directory>

Restart Apache2 service:

$ sudo systemctl restart apache2
or
$ sudo service apache2 restart

Install MySQL server + PHP + phpMyAdmin, and create a user with database both called "drupal8". (This old name has not been changed since its creation.)

Follow the instructions on Drupal webpages to set up the rest.

The following bits and pieces were done for Drupal 9. Not sure whether they are the same now since new installation has been done.

  • Change ownership:
$ sudo chown www-data:www-data sites/default/settings.php
  • Choose language: English language
  • Choose profile: Standard
  • Setup database: MySQL
  • MySQL database name, user name and password as defined above
  • Site name: www.kctang.com.hk
  • Site e-mail address: <>@kctang.com.hk
  • Site maintenance username: <name of the administrator>
  • Site maintenance user e-mail address: <>@kctang.com.hk
  • Default country: Hong Kong S.A.R., China
  • Default time zone: Asia/Hong Kong
  • Check for updates automatically
  • Receive e-mail notifications
  • Change directory permissions:
$ sudo chmod 555 sites/default
$ sudo chmod 444 sites/default/settings.php
  • Permit uploading of files:
$ sudo chown www-data:www-data -R sites/default/files
  • Increase upload file size limit (php 8.3 used now as of 22/1/2024):
$ sudo gedit /etc/php/8.3/apache2/php.ini
  • Change existing to:
post_max_size = 200M
upload_max_filesize = 50M
max_file_uploads = 100
  • Restart Apache2 service after every change:
$ sudo systemctl restart apache2
or
$ sudo service apache2 restart
  • Edit "settings.php" file:
$ sudo nano /var/www/html/web/sites/default/settings.php
  • Specify trusted hosts:
$settings['trusted_host_patterns'] = array(
   '^www\.kctang\.com\.hk$',
   '^kctang\.com\.hk$',
   '^localhost$',
);
  • Disable "update.php" file:
$ sudo mv /var/www/html/web/update.php /var/www/web/<some new name>

Re-direct http path to sub-directory "web"

The default DocumentRoot in the default enabled Apache2 configuration file /etc/apache2/sites-enabled/000-default.conf is "/var/www/html/".

Web browers can access any permissible directories or files underneath the DocumentRoot. Access outside the Document Root will not be possible.

When the Drupal root directory /web is placed underneath /var/www/html such as /var/www/html/web, then http://kctang.com.hk will access the default index.html file underneath /var/www/html, but in the case of http://kctang.com.hk/web,access to those underneath /web is possible.

To re-direct http://kctang.com.hk to access /var/www/html/web directly, create a new ".htaccess" file under "/var/www/html":

$ sudo gedit /var/www/html/.htaccess

Specify:

<IfModule mod_rewrite.c>
  RewriteEngine on
  RewriteBase /
  RewriteRule ^(.*)$ web/$1 [R]
</IfModule>

"^(.*)$" represents the full text from start to end after the domain name, e.g. "abc/def" in "kctang.com.hk/abc/def".

"web/$1" represents the substitution text where "$1" represents the text represented by "(.*)" with "web/" inserted before it, i.e. "web/abc/def" based on the above example. This would redirect the path to "web/abc/def".

"[R]" is to redirect the path and will show "web/" as part of the redirected path. When using "[R]", "RewriteBase /" is required to add "/" before "web/$1". Without this, "/var/www/html" will be added before "web/$1" and will cause unexpected results. This effect was discovered after many days of error discovery using "[L]".

Using [L] as suggested by many people may hide "web/" from the displayed path, and does not require the use of "RewriteBase", but some of the web pages will still show "web/" unavoidably. A mixed use with or without "web/" displayed will cause denial of access rights or redirection to external URL in some cases. Therefore, it is better to force to display "web/" using "[R]".

The following has the same effect:

<IfModule mod_rewrite.c>
  RewriteEngine on
  RewriteBase /web
  RewriteRule ^(.*)$ $1 [R]
</IfModule>

Remove "www." prefix from URL

This is not essential for using Drupal, but is adopted only to simplify.

Insert the following in /var/www/html/.htaccess after the RewriteBase line:

# Remove "www." prefix from URL
RewriteCond %{HTTP_HOST} ^www\.(.+)$ [NC]
RewriteRule ^ http%{ENV:protossl}://%1%{REQUEST_URI} [L,R=301]

Define Bartik theme color scheme

(section revised, 5/11/2023)

Log in as an administrator if not already in.

Choose Manage > Appearance > Settings, and define Bartik color scheme as follows:

 

Configure Bartik's css files as described below to match the preferences of this website.

Add custom styles to Bartik theme

(section added, 21/12/2021)

(section revised, 6/11/2023)

Log in the server.

Create a "misc" directory under the Drupal root directory, and edit to create 4 new files to re-define webpage styles:

$ cd /var/www/html/web
$ mkdir misc
$ cd misc
$ nano <new file name>

Create "append-to-elements.css" file to contain:

/* the following settings added, KCTang 18/12/2021 */
body {
 margin: 0;
 color: blue;
 font-family: Arial;
}
p {
 margin: 0.2em 0 0.2em;
}
pre{
 border: 1px solid green;
 font-family: monospace;
 margin: 0.15em 0.2em 0.15em;
 padding: 0.2em;
 background-color: #f8f9fa;
 white-space: pre-wrap;
}
.widget-toc{
 display: table;
 border: 1px solid green;
 background-color: #f8f9fa;
 padding: 0.5em;
 font-size: 0.9em;
}
.hangtwice {
 margin-left: 80px;
 text-indent: -80px;
}
.hang1 {
 margin-left: 40px;
 text-indent: -40px;
}
.hang2 {
 margin-left: 80px;
 text-indent: -40px;
}
.hang3 {
 margin-left: 120px;
 text-indent: -40px;
}
.hang4 {
 margin-left: 160px;
 text-indent: -40px;
}
.hang5 {
 margin-left: 200px;
 text-indent: -40px;
}
.indent1 {
 margin-left: 40px;
}
.indent2 {
 margin-left: 80px;
}
.indent3 {
 margin-left: 120px;
}
.indent4 {
 margin-left: 160px;
}
h1,
.heading-a {
 color: blue;
 margin: 0 0 0.5em;
}
h2 {
 border: 1px solid;
#  border-bottom: 1px solid;
 color: red;
 text-align: center
}
h2.hang {
 border: 1px solid;
 margin-left: 40px;
 text-indent: -40px;
 color: red;
}
h3 {
 border-bottom: 1px solid;
 font-weight: bold;
 font-weight: normal;
 color: magenta;
}
h3.hang {
 margin-left: 40px;
 text-indent: -40px;
 font-weight: normal;
 color: magenta;
}
h4.hang {
 margin-left: 40px;
 text-indent: -40px;
}
a,
a.link {
 border-bottom: none;
}
.site-branding__name {
 font-family: "Times New Roman";
}
img {
 margin: 15px;
}
/* the following settings added, KCTang 11/2/2023 */
blockquote {
 border-left: 2px solid #bbb; /* LTR */
 background: #F7F84D;
}
blockquote:before {
 margin-right: 0;
 content: "";
}
[dir="rtl"] blockquote:before {
 content: "";
}
blockquote:after {
 content: "";
}
[dir="rtl"] blockquote:after {
 content: "";
}
/* the following settings added, KCTang 22/3/2023 */
pre{
 font-family: math;

Create "append-to-layout.css" file to contain:

/* the following settings added, KCTang 18/12/2021 */
@media all and (min-width: 851px) {
 .layout-container {
   max-width: 1920px;
 }
}

Create "append-to-main-content.css" file to contain:

/* the following settings added, KCTang 18/12/2021*/
.main-content h2 {
 margin: 0.5em 0;
 font-size: 1.429em;
}

Create "append-to-text-formatted.css" file to contain:

/* the following settings added, KCTang 18/12/2021*/
.text-formatted ul,
.text-formatted ol {
 margin: 0;
 padding: 0 0 0.25em 15px; /* LTR */
}

Change to /var/www/html/web directory.

Create "append-to-bartik-css.sh" file to contain:

#!/bin/bash
cat /var/www/html/web/misc/append-to-elements.css >> /var/www/html/web/themes/contrib/bartik/css/base/elements.css
cat /var/www/html/web/misc/append-to-layout.css >> /var/www/html/web/themes/contrib/bartik/css/layout.css
cat /var/www/html/web/misc/append-to-main-content.css >> /var/www/html/web/themes/contrib/bartik/css/components/main-content.css
cat /var/www/html/web/misc/append-to-text-formatted.css >> /var/www/html/web/themes/contrib/bartik/css/components/text-formatted.css
ls -ls /var/www/html/web/themes/contrib/bartik/css

This file is to append the settings in the last 4 files to Bartik's css files to override Bartik's settings.

Execute to append whenever there is an update to Bartik:

$ cd /var/www/html/web
$ ./append-to-bartik-css.sh

Clear cache to reveal the effects of the new settings:

$ vendor/drush/drush/drush cr

Add buttons to CKEditor 5

(revised, 8/11/2023)

Log in the website as an administrator.

Choose Manage > Configuration > Text formats and editors > Configure Full HTML.

Move the required buttons down to a suitable position in the active toolbar:

Active toolbar

Include moving the Style button.

Enter a list of classes and titles as follows:

p.hangtwice|Hang Twice
p.hang1|Hang 1 
p.hang2|Hang 2
p.hang3|Hang 3
p.hang4|Hang 4
p.hang5|Hang 5
p.indent1|Indent 1
p.indent2|Indent 2
p.indent3|Indent 3
p.indent4|Indent 4
h2.hang|Head2Hang
h3.hang|Head3Hang
h4.hang|Head4Hang

"p" stands for paragraph.

".hangtwice" stands for the name of class as defined in the "css/style.css" file.

"Hang Twice" stands for the title seen when the Styles button is pressed to give a drop down menu.

Install Composer and Drush

(section added, 26/5/2019)

Drupal.org website describes various methods of installing Composer and Drush, generally referring to other websites for complicated steps which are difficult to follow.

The following simple steps do work.

Execute:

$ sudo apt install composer
$ cd /var/www/html/web
$ composer require drush/drush

Drush is installed under /var/www/html/web/vendor/drush/drush.

Update Drupal using Composer

(section added, 18/1/2019)

(simplified, 5/11/2023)

Go to the root directory of the website:

$ cd /var/www/html/web

Check for outdated modules:

$ composer show --outdated drupal/* -vvv

"-vvv" is to display what is going on.

Update all:

$ composer update drupal ---vvv

Update database:

$ vendor/drush/drush/drush updatedb -vvv

Answer "yes" when asked to run specified post-update changes.

Clear cache:

$ vendor/drush/drush/drush cr -vvv

Browse the website to see that the webpages can show up successfully.

Set to release the website from maintenance mode.

To copy sub-directories from one directory to another while keeping the original attributes:

$ sudo cp -Rav <old directory>/<name> <new directory>

Relocate or restore Drupal 8

(section added, 8/5/2019)

(revised, 16/5/2019)

Export the relevant MySQL database using phpMyAdmin as a backup.

Backup the whole Drupal directories and files. For example, if Drupal's root directory is /web in /var/www/html/web, then everything from and below /web.

Use old pair of backups if fresh pair not available.

Create a new user and blank database only if new computer or new MySQL-server is used.

Import the database backup.

Move the whole Drupal directories and files to the new directory, e.g. /var/www/new/web.

Keep "new" as the original name in case of no change, e.g. /var/www/html/web.

Keep the name "/web" unchanged since this is hard-coded in the beginning of links in the form of "/web/..." to media and files embedded in the web pages.

Execute

$ sudo gedit /var/www/new/web/sites/default/settings.php

For

$database['default']['default'] = array (
    'database' = '<text>'
    'username' = '<text>'
    'password' = '<text>'
    ....
);

change the <text> to match the new database.

Change the DocumentRoot in the new site's currently used Apache2 site configuration file, e.g. /etc/apache2/sites-enabled/000-default.conf, from "/var/www/html/" to /var/www/new, still one level above /web. Links in the form of "/web/..." to media and files will be interpreted as "/var/www/new/web/...", still accessible.

Web browsing to http://kctang.com.hk/web should be able to access Drupal at the new location.

Go to the next section in case web browsing fails to display.

If the DocumentRoot is set directly to the Drupal root directory "/var/www/new/web, web browsing of Drupal web pages is still possible, but links to media and files will be interpreted as "/var/www/new/web/web/... ", and the media and files will not be displayed.

Move the ".htaccess" file from /var/www/html to /var/www/new to re-direct web browsing to http://kctang.com.hk/web:

$ sudo mv /var/www/html/.htaccess /var/www/new

Execute as necessary:

$ vendor/drush/drush/drush updatedb -vvv
$ vendor/drush/drush/drush cr -vvv

("vendor/drush/drush/" added, 26/5/2019)

Use new shell to relocate and restore

(section added, 16/5/2019)

(revised, 26/5/2019)

If the relocation or restoration is not successful, non-display may happen because of some corruptions in the file settings.

Follow the Drupal core manual installation steps described above, but substitute "/var/www/html" described there with "/var/www/new".

Setting the website to maintenance mode would not be possible.

Before changing the settings file, move the ".htaccess" file from /var/www/html to /var/www/new:

$ sudo mv /var/www/html/.htaccess /var/www/new

Delete left-over module configuration files

(section added, 26/5/2019)

If a left-over configuration setting file is reported when a module is re-installed, execute to delete it:

$ cd /var/www/html/web
$ vendor/drush/drush/drush config:delete '<name of configuration file to delete>'

 

End of Page

Install MoinMoin wiki engine

Install MoinMoin wiki engine KCTang

Go to End

Note

MoinMoin wiki engine serves wiki web pages.

The following installation instructions are outdated. Check https://help.ubuntu.com/lts/serverguide/moinmoin.html for updated instructions.

Prepare

Install Apache2 web server if not already installed.

Download MoinMoin (filename moin-1.9.7.tar.gz) from http://moinmo.in/MoinMoinDownload, usually to own "Downloads" directory.

Use the file manager to extract the contents of the compressed file under the "Downloads" directory as "moin-1.9.7".

Install

Install MoinMoin:

$ cd /home/< own account name >/Downloads/moin-1.9.7
$ sudo python setup.py install --force --prefix /usr/local --record=install.log

Install "wsgi" module and test:

$ sudo apt-get install libapache2-mod-wsgi
$ cd /usr/local/share/moin/server 
$ sudo python test.wsgi

Point the web browser to the address shown on the terminal, such as, http://localhost:8000/.

Setup wiki sites

Setup files for a wiki called "qswiki":

$ cd /usr/local/share/moin
$ sudo mkdir qswiki
$ sudo cp -R data qswiki
$ sudo cp -R underlay qswiki
$ sudo cp server/moin.wsgi qswiki
$ sudo cp config/wikiconfig.py qswiki

Do similar for "dscwiki".

Configure Apache2 for MoinMoin site:

$ sudo gedit /etc/apache2/sites-available/moinmoin.conf

Specify, keeping "<" and ">" in the following codes:

# MoinMoin WSGI configuration
# invoke moin wiki at the root url, like http://servername/mywiki/FrontPage:
# servername can be www.kctang.com.hk or localhost
# qswiki and dscwiki use FrontScreen instead of FrontPage to avoid changes from being overridden when a new FrontPage is installed with new software
WSGIScriptAlias /qswiki   /usr/local/share/moin/qswiki/moin.wsgi
WSGIScriptAlias /dscwiki   /usr/local/share/moin/dscwiki/moin.wsgi
<Directory /usr/local/share/moin/qswiki>
    AllowOverride None
    Require all granted
</Directory>
<Directory /usr/local/share/moin/dscwiki>
     AllowOverride None
     Require all granted
</Directory>
# create some wsgi daemons - use these parameters for a simple setup
WSGIDaemonProcess moin user=www-data group=www-data processes=5 threads=10 maximum-requests=1000 umask=0007
# use the daemons we defined above to process requests!
WSGIProcessGroup moin

Enable the site:

$ sudo a2ensite moinmoin

which will create a linked file in "/etc/apache2/sites-enabled"

If required to disable:

$ sudo a2dissite moinmoin

Configure wsgi:

$ sudo gedit /usr/local/share/moin/qswiki/moin.wsgi

Add at the end of the a2) paragraph:

sys.path.insert(0, '/usr/local/share/moin/qswiki')

Do the same for "dscwiki".

Enable web access, specify access rights and restart Apache2 service:

$ cd /usr/local/share 
$ sudo chown -R www-data:www-data moin 
$ sudo chmod -R ug+rwX moin 
$ sudo chmod -R o-rwx moin
$ sudo systemctl restart apache2
or
$ sudo service apache2 restart

Configure wiki:

$ sudo gedit /usr/local/share/moin/qswiki/wikiconfig.py

Specify:

# -*- coding: utf-8 -*-
## -*- coding: iso-8859-1 -*-

#url_prefix_static = '/mywiki' + url_prefix_static
url_prefix_static = '/qswiki' + url_prefix_static

# sitename = u'Untitled Wiki'
sitename = u'QS Wiki'

#page_front_page = u"FrontPage"
page_front_page = u"FrontScreen"

# superuser = [u"YourName", ]
#    (note: remove "#" at the front, and replace "YourName" with user id within quotation marks)

#acl_rights_before = u"YourName:read,write,delete,revert,admin"
#    (note: remove "#" at the front, and replace "YourName" with user id within quotation marks)

# the following added at the end of the Security section

textchas = {
    'en': {
        u"Please enter antispam password (email to kctang@kctang.com.hk for password):": ur"[password]",
        },
    }
textchas_disabled_group = u"TrustedGroup"

#    (note: replace [password] with actual password)

# end of addition

#mail_smarthost = ""
mail_smarthost = "kctang.com.hk"

# The return address, e.g u"Jgen Wiki <noreply@mywiki.org>" [Unicode]
#mail_from = u""
mail_from = u"K C Tang <kctang@kctang.com.hk>"

# "user pwd" if you need to use SMTP AUTH
#mail_login = ""
mail_login = u"kctang [email password]"

navi_bar = [
    # If you want to show your page_front_page here:
    #u'%(page_front_page)s',
    u'RecentChanges',
    u'FindPage',
    u'HelpContents',
    u'FrontScreen',
]

# The default theme anonymous or new users get
# theme_default = 'modernized'
theme_default = 'modernized_mobile'

Note MoinMoin Config files are:

  • /etc/apache2/sites-available/moinmoin.conf
  • /etc/apache2/sites-enabled/moinmoin.conf
  • /usr/local/share/moin/qswiki/moin.wsgi
  • /usr/local/share/moin/qswiki/wikiconfig.py
  • /usr/local/share/moin/dscwiki/moin.wsgi
  • /usr/local/share/moin/dscwiki/wikiconfig.py

End of Page

Install Roundcube webmail client

Install Roundcube webmail client KCTang

Go to End

Note

23 Jan 2024: Minor changes.

26 Mar 2023: smtp setting revised.

16 Dec 2021: Updated installation command.

27 May 2019: Changed to use extracting directly to web directory. Protection measures added.

8 May 2019: All "/var/www/web" changed to "/var/www/html/web". "<version number>" used instead of a specific number. More descriptions on settings added.

25 Dec 2014: Created.

Intro

Roundcube is a webmail client.

Install Roundcube using apt

Execute:

$ sudo apt install roundcube

Install Roundcube from roundcube.net

If the apt installation does not work, execute to remove:

$ sudo apt remove roundcube

Then download roundcubemail-<version number>-complete.tar.gz by selecting "Complete: <version number>" at http://roundcube.net/download/, usually to own "Downloads" directory.

Extract the compressed file, move the extracted directory and files to underneath "/var/www/html", and rename the directory as "roundcube".

Ensure that the hidden ".htaccess" file is also moved.

A quicker way is to extract directly to "/var/www/html" and rename the directory there.

Install Roundcube under "/var/www/html":

$ cd /var/www/html
$ sudo tar -xzfv /home/<own account name>/Downloads/roundcubemail-<version number>-complete.tar.gz  (extract to current directory)
$ tar -xzf /home/<own account name>/Downloads/roundcubemail-<version number>-complete.tar.gz (extract to current directory) 
$ ls      (see the existence of the extracted directory)​
$ sudo mv roundcubemail-<version number> roundcube    (change directory name)
$ cd roundcube
$ sudo chown www-data:www-data logs
$ sudo chown www-data:www-data temp

"-xzfv" can be remembered as extract zipped file verbose. Use "-xzf" if "v" not working. 

(changed to use "-xzf", added cd roundcube, 16 Dec 2021)

(changed to use "tar" directly to web directory,  27 May 2019)

Set up Roundcube

Install MySQL database + PHP + phpMyAdmin, if not already installed.

Login phpmyadmin at web browser:

http://localhost/phpmyadmin

Create a database user "roundcube" with database "roundcube":

  • click "Users" at the top menu bar
  • click "Add user" at the page middle
  • enter "roundcube" at the User name entry
  • select "Local" at the Host entry
  • enter and re-type the password
  • click "Create database with same name and grant all privileges"
  • click "Go" at the bottom

Enter at web browser:

http://localhost/roundcube/installer

Configure Roundcube:

  • accept all of the defaults
  • enter database user "roundcube", database "roundcube" and password under Database setup
  • click: "CREATE CONFIG"
  • download the configuration file generated and save it as config.inc.php
  • move the downloaded file:
$ mv /home/<own account name>/Downloads/config.inc.php /var/www/html/roundcube/config
  • click: "CONTINUE" on the webpage
  • click: "Initialize database"
  • set to use secure SMTP port 465 (i.e. set "localhost:465" as SMTP Host)
  • (last line not working, changed to next line, 26 Mar 2023)

  • set "ssl:kctang.com.hk" as SMTP Host
  • enter username and password, and sender and recipient full email addresses to test SMTP config
  • accept "localhost" as IMAP Host
  • enter username and password to test IMAP config

If installed from roundcube.net, remove or rename installer directory, and protect logs and temp directories:

$ sudo cd /var/www/html/roundcube
$ sudo rm -R installer                   (remove)
$ sudo mv installer installer.original   (or rename)
$ sudo chown -R $USER:$USER logs
$ sudo chown -R $USER:$USER temp

(revised to add protection, 27 May 2019)

Configure PHP5 only (not necessary for PHP7 and later):

$ sudo gedit /etc/php5/apache2/php.ini
  • define:
date.timezone = Asia/Hong_Kong

otherwise the date column of the web mail would be blank. 

Restart Apache2 service:

$ sudo systemctl reload apache2
or
$ sudo service apache2 reload

Log in at web browser:

http://localhost/roundcube

or

http://www.kctang.com.hk/roundcube

Click Settings > Identity to define some settings:
 

Click Settings > Preferences > User Interface

> Time zone > Asia/Hong Kong

> Time format > 07:30

> Date format > 24/7/2023

> Save.

Click Settings > Preferences > Composing Messages

> Compose HTML messages > always

> When replying > start new message above the quote

> Force standard separator in signatures > turn off

> Save.

Click Settings > Contacts > Import to import contacts files, e.g. previously exported from Google.

(more descriptions on settings added, 8 May 2019)

(further added, 26 Mar 2023)

Upgrade if installed from roundcube.net

Download and extract the subdirectory of the new version to "Downloads" directory as "roundcubemail-<new version number>".

Upgrade existing directory using the installto.sh script:

$ cd /home/<own account name>/Downloads/roundcubemail-<new version number>/bin
$ ./installto.sh /var/www/html/roundcube

In case of big trouble

Uninstall Roundcube:

$ sudo apt-get remove roundcube

Remove "/var/www/html/roundcube":

$ cd /var/www/html
$ sudo rm -r roundcube

Delete mySQL user "roundcube" and database "roundcube" using phpMyAdmin.

Intall Roundcube as new.

End of Page

Install network file system

Install network file system KCTang

Go to End

Note

  • 22 Aug 2022: Client mount setting revised.
  • 17 Aug 2022: Client mount setting revised.

​​​​​​​Intro

NFS network file system enables sharing of directories on a Ubuntu server to another Ubuntu client computer.

Install on server computer

Install network file system:

$ sudo apt-get install nfs-kernel-server

Configure to specify the directory to be exported:

$ sudo gedit /etc/exports

Specify:

/<directory exported> <ip address of computer to export to> (rw, sync, no_root_squash)

where "rw" = read and write.

Start the server, required after any rebooting:

$ sudo systemctl start nfs-kernel-server
or
$ sudo service nfs-kernel-server start

Setup client computer

Install nfs-common on the client side:

$ sudo apt install nfs-common

Create a local directory:

$ sudo mkdir -p /media/<local directory>

Mount the remote directory temporarily:

$ sudo mount <ip address of NFS server>:/<directory exported from the NFS server> /media/<local directory>

but remounting required after every reboot.

To keep the mounting permanently unaffected by reboot, edit "fstab" file: 

$ sudo gedit /etc/fstab

Add a line:

<ip address of NFS server>:/<directory exported from the NFS server> /media/<local directory> nfs auto,vers=4.0 0 0

(revised 22 Aug 2022, "vers=4.0" added)

(revised 17 Aug 2018, "defaults" changed to "auto")

Mount again all devices as defined in the "fstab" file after changes:

$ sudo mount -a

Check devices actually mounted (this would show more than those defined in "fstab"):

$ sudo mount -l

End of Page

Install OpenVPN services

Install OpenVPN services KCTang

Go to End

Note

  • 15 Jul 2023: Windows folder to contain config files revised.
  • 26 Apr 2022: Cipher added.
  • 18 Jan 2022: Installation procedures updated.
  • 11 Apr 2018: Re-direct function added.
  • 2 Sep 2018: Revised to suit Ubuntu 18.04 which requires a change of the network card device name.

Intro

OpenVPN enables remote client computers and smartphones to access VPN server's files and structure, and optionally re-direct clients' IP traffic through the VPN server.

Install VPN server for accessing file server

Switch to root:

$ sudo -s

Install openvpn and easy-rsa:

$ apt-get install openvpn easy-rsa

Set up public key infrastructure:

$ mkdir /etc/openvpn/easy-rsa/
$ cp -r /usr/share/easy-rsa/* /etc/openvpn/easy-rsa/
$ nano /etc/openvpn/easy-rsa/vars

Define in vars:

export KEY_COUNTRY="CN"
export KEY_PROVINCE="HK"
export KEY_CITY="HongKong"
export KEY_ORG="K C Tang Consultants Ltd"
export KEY_EMAIL="kctang@kctang.com.hk"
export KEY_OU=kctclVPN
export KEY_NAME=kctclVPN
# next line added to avoid error when building the certificate and key 
export KEY_ALTNAMES=kctclVPN

Generate master Certificate Authority (CA) certificate and key:

$ cd /etc/openvpn/easy-rsa/
$ source vars
# ./easyrsa init-pki
$ ./easyrsa build-ca

Enter New CA Key Passphrase: <>

Re-enter New CA Key Passphrase: <>

Enter Common Name: kctclVPN

Generate a key pair for the server:

$ ./easyrsa gen-req kctclVPN nopass

Accept Common Name default [kctclVPN]: <enter key>

Generate Diffie Hellman parameters and generate certificate for the server

$ ./easyrsa gen-dh
$ ./easyrsa sign-req server kctclVPN

Check and confirm the Common Name: yes

Enter Passphrase as previously defined: <>

Copy certificates and keys generated in subdirectory pki/ to /etc/openvpn/:

$ cp pki/dh.pem pki/ca.crt pki/issued/kctclVPN.crt pki/private/kctclVPN.key /etc/openvpn/

Config server.conf:

$ cd /
$ cp /usr/share/doc/openvpn/examples/sample-config-files/server.conf /etc/openvpn/
$ nano /etc/openvpn/server.conf

Define as follows:

port 1194
proto udp
dev tun
# Enter the paths if files not in the same directory as the server.conf file
ca </path to file/>ca.crt
cert </path to file/>kctclVPN.crt
key </path to file/>kctclVPN.key
dh </path to file/>dh.pem # not dh2048.pem
server 10.8.0.0 255.255.255.0
ifconfig-pool-persist /var/log/openvpn/ipp.txt
keepalive 10 120
tls-auth ta.key 0
cipher AES-256-GCM
user nobody
group nogroup
# last two lines uncommented for linux system
persist-key
persist-tun
status /var/log/openvpn/openvpn-status.log
verb 3
explicit-exit-notify 1

(cipher added, 26 Apr 2022)

Generate ta.key for tls-auth:

$ cd /etc/openvpn
$ openvpn --genkey tls-auth ta.key
$ openvpn --genkey secret ta.key # not --secret

Config sysctl.conf:

$ nano /etc/sysctl.conf

Uncomment the following line to enable IP forwarding:

net.ipv4.ip_forward=1

Reload sysctl.conf:

$ sysctl -p /etc/sysctl.conf

Start the server:

$ systemctl start openvpn@server

Check if OpenVPN created a tun0 interface:

$ ifconfig tun0

Check syslog if tun0 does not appear:

$ grep -i vpn /var/log/syslog

Exit from root:

$ exit

Set the internet router to re-direct OpenVPN connections to server port 1194.

Extend to re-direct clients' IP traffic through VPN server

(section added 5 April 2018)

Define optionally in server.conf to re-direct clients' IP traffic such as web browsing and DNS lookups to go through the VPN server, i.e. the clients will appear to use the IP of the VPN server instead of the actual IP of the clients for internet traffic:

Config server.conf:

$ sudo nano /etc/openvpn/server.conf

Define by uncommenting the following line:

push "redirect-gateway def1 bypass-dhcp"

Some guide suggests to add the following, but this results in email server not working: (10 April 2018)

push "dhcp-option DNS 10.8.0.1"

Some other guides suggest to uncomment the following, this works: (10 April 2018)

push "dhcp-option DNS 208.67.222.222"
push "dhcp-option DNS 208.67.220.220"

However, it is found that it still works when the above two lines are left commented. Therefore, the only line needing change is the 'redirect-gateway' line. (2 Sep 2018)

Execute to restart the service:

$ sudo systemctl restart openvpn@server

Execute to see the network card device names:

$ ip route

Find the output line beginning with "default", e.g.:

default via 192.168.0.1 dev enp4s0 proto static metro 100

The name "enp4s0" after the word "dev" is the default network card device name. Previously, the default name is "eth0", but this has been changed after Ubuntu 16.04.

(2 Sep 2018)

Execute with the default name inserted after "-o":

$ sudo iptables -t nat -A POSTROUTING -s 10.8.0.0/24 -o enp4s0 -j MASQUERADE

Note that the iptables configuration will be lost after reboot.

Store the current iptables configurations:

$ sudo sh -c "iptables-save > /etc/iptables.up.rules"

View and remove any configurations no longer applicable:

$ sudo nano /etc/iptables.up.rules

Do the same whenever the iptables configurations have been changed.

Config file for use on reboot:

$ sudo nano /etc/network/interfaces

Define to reuse the stored configurations:

auto lo
iface lo inet loopback
post-up iptables-restore < /etc/iptables.up.rules

Generate files for each Windows client

Switch to root:

$ sudo -s

Generate a certificate and private key for each client user of <username>:

$ cd /etc/openvpn/easy-rsa/
$ ./easyrsa gen-req <username> nopass
$ ./easyrsa sign-req client <username>

Check and confirm the Common Name: yes

Enter Passphrase as previously defined: <>

Copy or move client's certificate and key to a Samba directory, which is for temporary use only: to enable emailing:

$ cd /etc/openvpn/easy-rsa/
$ cp pki/ca.crt pki/issued/<username>.crt pki/private/<username>.key /<Samba directory>/
$ cd /etc/openvpn/
$ cp ta.key /<Samba directory>/ 

Change the owners of the files:

$ cd /<Samba directory>
$ chown nobody:nogroup ca.crt ta.key <username>.crt <username>.key
$ chmod 644 ca.crt ta.key <username>.crt <username>.key

Create a <username>.txt under the Samba directory and define it to contain:

client
dev tun
proto udp
remote kctang.com.hk 1194
resolv-retry infinite
nobind
persist-key
persist-tun
mute-replay-warnings
ca ca.crt
cert <\\path\\><username>.crt
key <\\path\\><username>.key
remote-cert-tls server
tls-auth ta.key 1
cipher AES-256-GCM
auth-nocache
verb 3

(cipher added, 26 Apr 2022)

Specify path in Windows format if ca.crt, ta.key, <username>.crt, and <username>.key are to be saved in a folder different from <username>.txt.

Change filename from <username>.txt to <username>.ovpn. Creating as a txt file first permits editing by the usual text processors. Watch out that the line breaks are using Windows' linebreak code.

E-mail ca.crt, ta.key, <username>.crt, <username>.key, and <username>.ovpn files to the client computer.

Remove the files:

$ rm ca.crt ta.key <username>.crt <username>.key <username>.ovpn

Exit from root:

$ exit

Install on Windows client computer

Download and install the latest OpenVPN Windows Installer.

An OpenVPN GUI icon should appear at the bottom system tray, with no connection yet.

Save ca.crt, ta.key, <username>.crt, <username>.key, and <username>.ovpn files (emailed from the server) under:

  • C:\Program Files\OpenVPN\config-auto\ (for use as a service)

or

  • C:\Program Files\OpenVPN\config\ (for use with GUI).

(revised 15 Jul 2023)

Run on Windows client as a service

To start OpenVPN automatically as a service every time after rebooting:

  • Click Windows Start > search for Services.
  • Right-click OpenVPN Interactive Service > Properties > Start or Restart.
  • Change Startup type to Automatic.
  • Click OK.

Open file manager and enter \\10.8.0.1 to access the vpn server. All clients will use the same \\10.8.0.1 to map the actual different ip addresses assigned by the vpn server.

If connection is not successful, restart the computer.

Run on Windows client using GUI

To start OpenVPN manually every time after rebooting, or re-connect after loss of connection after sleep or hibernation::

  • Right-click OpenVPN GUI icon on Desktop.
  • Click Run this program as an administrator > Yes.

Or

  • Click the OpenVPN GUI icon on the bottom system tray to connect or right-click the icon and click Connect.

Map drive for quick access

Define a drive to be listed in the file manager directory to represent the server:
  • Open file manager and enter \\10.8.0.1 to access the vpn server.
  • Right-click the desired folder.
  • Click Map network drive.
  • Choose a drive name to represent the folder.
  • Click Finish.

End of Page

Install x11vnc

Install x11vnc KCTang

Go to End

Note

28 May 2019: Disabling Wayland added.

18 May 2019: Page added.

Intro

x11vnc enables remote access to the graphical desktop of Ubuntu server.

Set router

Set the internet router to permit access to the server through ports 5900, 5901, etc.

Disable Wayland

(section added, 28 May 2019)

Ubuntu-desktop uses gdm3 (Wayland) display manager. Wayland is not compatible with Xorg dispaly server used by x11vnc.

Execute to disable Wayland:

$ sudo gedit /etc/gdm3/custom.conf

Remove "#" to uncomment the following line:

#WaylandEnable=false

Reboot the computer.

Install

Execute:

$ sudo apt install x11vnc
$ sudo apt install xvfb

xvfb provides a virtual X window, which is required for the -create option below.

Start

Execute:

$ x11vnc                    (not requiring a password to connect to port 5900)
or
$ x11vnc -rfbport <port number>
or
$ x11vnc -usepw             (requiring a password to connect)
or
$ x11vnc -create -usepw     (create a virtual desktop)

The default port to connect from client computers is 5900.

Specify 5901 for the <port number> if connection is to be permitted at port 5901.

Connection with or without password is possible.

Execute to set up password:

$ x11vnc -storepasswd

The password will be stored in the file ~/.vnc/passwd, i.e. home/<current user>/.vnc/passwd.

Connection is possible if there is already a graphical desktop logged on at the server. The screen movement at the server and the client computer will be synchronised. This would be good for monitoring the screen movement at the server.

If there is no graphical desktop logged on at the server, then:

  • use the "-create" option
  • connect remotely which should show a terminal window at the server
  • execute at the terminal window to bring up other software, such as:
  • $ firefox
    $ nautilus
  • or the graphical session:
  • $ gnome-session
    
  • click Activities to access other software.

The remote screen movement will not be seen at the server.

Ubuntu-desktop with gdm3 is used above.

x11vnc does not work well with gdm3 (Wayland) desktop. Therefore, just use gdm3 desktop.

Gnome (Wayland) desktop also does not permit the starting of backintime

Stop

Press Ctrl-C to terminate the connection.

End of Page

Install OpenSSH services

Install OpenSSH services KCTang

Go to End

Note

26 May 2020: systemctl file command revised.

27 May 2019: Security settings added.

11 Apr 2018: Page added.

Intro

OpenSSH enables remote client computers and smartphones to access the server computer's text based terminal shell in a secured manner. "SSH" stands for secured shell.

Install OpenSSH server

Execute:

$ sudo apt install openssh-server

The software will be installed at /etc/ssh.

In case of complaint of no directory, execute  to make directory first:

$ sudo mkdir /etc/ssh

Edit config file:

$ cd /etc/ssh
$ sudo gedit sshd_config

Specify:

# Port 22                             (which is the default port)
Port 2nnn                             (change to some other 4-digit port, 2nnn)
# PermitRootLogin prohibit-password   (meaning no password required)
PermitRootLogin no                    (meaning no root login)

(security settings added, 27 May 2019)

Restart the service:

$ sudo systemctl restart sshd.service
or
$ sudo systemctl restart ssh.service

Check status:

$ sudo systemctl status sshd.service

If found disabled:

$ sudo systemctl enable ssh

(status check added, 26 May 2020)

Change the internet router to permit the use of port 2nnn.

The above is already sufficient for use. Read https://help.ubuntu.com/lts/serverguide/openssh-server.html for more configurations, if desired.

Install SSH client on Windows

Download Putty from https://www.putty.org/ and install.

Enter the Host Name, change the Port to 2nnn, highlight Default Settings and press Save:

"Only on clean exit" is the default. When the server's terminal window is exited with "exit" or "logoff", the PuTTY screen and connection would only close if other processes using the PuTTY connection have all been closed.

Press Open.

Accept the next screen to confirm the server's security key shown, if trusted. This would be necessary for the first time only.

Log in as the usual command terminal. No graphical interface is provided.

Use PuTTYgen that comes installed with PuTTY to generate key pairs, only if required. Read its Help.

Configure for VNC

If PuTTY is used for VNC connection, config the tunnel by entering the Source port and Destination as follows, then press Add to move the setting to the upper window:

With "Local" selected, the Source port means the port of the client computer. It can be "5900" or any free port. "Localhost:5900" at the Destination means the host computer, not the client computer. "5900" refers to the port number on the host computer providing VNC server service.

Go back to the first screen, highlight Default Settings and press Save again.

End of Page

Use Excel

Use Excel KCTang

Go to End

Note

11 Mar 2020: Rounding up to 2 significant digits added

17 Jan 2020: Using macros and Add-ins added.

01 Feb 2019: Bracketing negative numbers and hiding zeros added.

26 Sep 2018: Showing one-digit as two-digits added.

19 Sep 2018: First created.

Insert page number and total number of pages

Select Page Layout > Print Titles > Header/Footer > Custom Footer:

(By the way, click Scale with document and Align with page margins to enable the Header and Footer not to encroach into the margins.)

Select icon to insert Page number:

Enter " / ".

Select icon to insert Number of Pages:

Select OK.

Select Page:

Change First page number from "Auto" to "1".

If it is "Auto", the page number of all Worksheets selected to print will run consecutively.

If it is "1", each Worksheet will start at page 1.

However, the total number of pages will be the total of all Worksheets selected printed, not the total number of the respective Worksheet. This may not be desirable.

The next is a solution.

Show total number of pages of a Worksheet

Select Formulas > Name Manager > New.

Define:

  • Name: NumberOfPages
  • Refers to: GETDOCUMENT(50)

Enter in a cell a formula =NumberOfPages

The displayed value will be the total number of pages of the worksheet.

Enter in a cell a formula ="Total " & NumberOfPages & " Pages" (note spaces) will display a meaningful text.

This cannot be used in the Header or Footer.

Show single-digit whole number as two-digit whole number

Press Ctrl-1 > Number > Custom,

Enter "00" against Type. Select OK.

To make the double-digit number actually become a text for other uses, use the TEXT() formula, where "00" represents the Format Type used above, as follows:

Show negative numbers in brackets

(added 01 Feb 2019)

Use: 

#,##0.00;(#,##0.00)

The part before ";" defines the format of positive numbers.

The part after ";" defines the format of positive numbers.

Show negative numbers in brackets

Right-align positive numbers with negative numbers before the ")"

(added 01 Feb 2019)

Append "_-" to the first part:

#,##0.00_-;(#,##0.00)

 

Show negative numbers in brackets and align

Hide zeros for individual cells

(added 01 Feb 2019)

Append ";;@" to the end:

#,##0.00;(#,##0.00);;@

Hide zeros for individual cells

Hide zeros for the whole worksheet

(added 01 Feb 2019)

Select File > Options > Advanced.

De-select Show a zero in cells that have zero value.

All zeros will be hidden.

Excel-Worksheet-HideZeroForWhole

Round up numerical values to 2 significant digits

(added 11 Mar 2020)

Use formula in the cell to display:

"=IF(INT(Q)>0,ROUNDUP(Q,2-LEN(INT(Q))),ROUNDUP(Q,2))"

where Q = referenced cell address (or formula)

It can be read as: if integer of Q > 0, then round it to 2 significant digits, else round up Q to 2 decimal places.

If Q = 1831.03, then

  • INT(Q) > 0.
  • LEN(INT(Q)) = 4
  • 2 - LEN(INT(Q)) = 2 - 4 = -2 (meaning, reduce length from 4 to 2 by -2)
  • ROUNDUP(Q, -2) = 1900.

If Q = 0.1234, then

  • ROUNDUP(Q, 2) = 0.13.

Application:

  • The unit rates used in Cost Estimates are approximate rates. 
  • It would not make sense to show them in many digits and with decimal places to make them look like very accurate.
  • 2 significant digits should be sufficient.
  • Estimates should include buffers. 
  • Rounding up is appropriate.

Use macros

(added 17 Jan 2020)

Macros can be used to execute keyboard or mouse commands automatically. This will simplify the tasks if the same set of keyboard or mouse commands are repeated frequently.

Record macros: 

  • Select View > Macros > Record Macro
  • Enter <Macro Name>
  • Select OK
  • Do an example of the intended task with keyboards and mouse
  • Select View > Macros > Stop Recording

View macros: 

  • Select View > Macros > View Macros
  • Select the desired <Macro Name>
  • Select Run to run the macro to execute the recorded commands
  • Select Step into to run the macro step by step
  • Select Edit to edit the macro
  • Select Option to assign a shortkey to run the macro

Note:

  • The macro will record based on the cells used when recording the macro.
  • Editing is required when the same set of commands is to be run starting from a cell at a different location.
  • Change the relative addresses of the cells as recorded in the macro, and test run to get the expected results.
  • Once successful, the macro can be used for similar cases when the cells used are of the same relative layout.
  • More complex macro would need to be written if more varying circumstances are to be handled as well.
  • The recorded macro can serve as the base or give code segments for use.

Use macros on different files

To run macros on a different file:

  • Save the file with macros as an macro file with ".xlsm" extension to enable it to be run, otherwise the macros must be enabled each time when they are run
  • Open the macro file
  • Open the target file and display the target worksheet as the active worksheet
  • View macro as described above, and select and run the desired macro

Use Add-in to run macros (standard method)

The above process would need a number of steps before the macros can be run.

A simpler way is to add the macros as commands in the ribbon at the top.

Add macros to a ribbon

  • Save the macro file with ".xlsm" extension as an Add-in file with ".xlam" extension, which will save it by default to the following folder:
C:\Users\<Admin or user name>\AppData\Roaming\Microsoft\AddIns
  • Right-click any empty space on any of the ribbons at the top
  • Select Customize the Ribbon > Add-ins 
  • Select Go against Manage:  Excel Add-ins
  •  Select the desired ".xlas" Add-in file > OK
  • Right-click any empty space on any of the ribbons at the top
  • Select Customize the Ribbon > Customize Ribbon
  • Select Macros under Choose commands from to show the available macros
  • Select New Tab to create a New Tab with a New Group (Custom)
  •  
  • Select the desired macro > Add to add the macro under the New Group (Custom)
  • Select the existing added macro > Remove if removal is desired
  • Select OK 
  • A New Tab with menu items for the macros should be available for use
  • Close Excel without the need to save

Use Add-in to run macros (quick method)

  • Copy the required Add-in file with ".xlam" extension to the folder:
C:\Users\<Admin or user name\AppData\Roaming\Microsoft\AddIns
  • Right-click any empty space on any of the ribbons at the top
  • Select Customize the Ribbon > Developer > OK to add the Developer tab
  • Select Developer > Excel-Add-ins
  • Select the desired ".xlam" Add-in file
  • De-select the superseded Add-in file in case of updating
  • Select OK, which should add the Add-in tab
  • Select Add-ins tab to access the menu items for the macros for use.
  • Close and re-open Excel to see that the Add-in ribbon stays for use.

Note:

  • The Add-in file with ".xlam" extension is previously created by saving the macro file with ".xlsm" extension.
  • The macros in the Add-in files will not be seen in the usual View Macro menu.
  • The Add-in file can be accessed by pressing Alt-F11.
  • The VBA macro codes are contained under the Modules folder of the Add-in file directory structure.
  • Two extra macros are contained the "ThisWorkbook" item under "Microsoft Excel Objects" item of the Add-in file directory structure.
  • One of the two macros is called "Private Sub Workbook_Open()" which will remove all existing Add-in menu items and re-add new Add-in menu items when Excel is opened or when the Add-in file is added through Excel-Add-ins.
  • The other of the two macros is called "Private Sub Workbook_BeforeClose()" to remove all Add-in menu items upon closing Excel.
  • It has been suggested that the two macros should be named as "Private Sub Workbook_AddinInstall()"  and "Private Sub Workbook AddinUnintall()" to be effected upon adding or removing the Add-in file, but the AddinInstall is not very effective because the Add-in tab will disappear after closing Excel.

End of Page

Install Thunderbird

Install Thunderbird KCTang

Go to End

Note

  • 11 May 2023: More CardBook installation steps added.
  • 10 May 2023: PrintingTools NG Options revised. Use CardBook instead of TbSync. Delivery Status Notification added.
  • 2 Aug 2022: PrintingTools NG Options revised for version 2.1.4.
  • 22 Mar 2022: Print page setup revised for version 91. Printing Tools NG Options revised.
  • 9 Dec 2021: Exporting email procedures added.
  • 29 Jun 2021: Advice against upgrading to version 78 removed because more add-ons become compatible. Some notes added.
  • 16 Jan 2021: TbSync manual configuration for Google added.
  • 15 Jan 2021: Google Calendar Plugin added. PrintingTools attachments per line option added. Header fixed font size revised. CardBook add-on removed because TbSync supports Google again. Lists of add-ons updated. 
  • 19 Nov 2020: Option set to show all folders without subscribing individually. CardBook add-on added because TbSync no longer supports Google. Lists of add-ons updated. 
  • 8 Sep 2020: 'Manually sort folders' add-on added.
  • 12 Aug 2020: Revised to fix font for print headers only.
  • 11 Aug 2020: Created.

Intro

Thunderbird is an email client.

Install Thunderbird

Download the latest release from here and install:

https://www.thunderbird.net/en-US/download/

Download old releases from here and install:

https://archive.mozilla.org/pub/thunderbird/releases

Set up the first email account.

For Gmail account, enter the Gmail address and use automatic setup.

Use the following settings to manually set up email account accessing company's email server:

  • Account Name: kctcl
  • Your Name: K C Tang Consultants Ltd.
  • Email Address: kctcl@kctang.com.hk
  • Incoming Server Type: IMAP Mail Server
  • Server Name: kctang.com.hk
  • Port: 993
  • Connection security: SSL/TLS
  • Authentication method: Normal password
  • Outgoing Server Name: kctang.com.hk
  • Port: 465
  • Connection security: SSL/TLS
  • Authentication method: Normal password

Select Tools > Accounts Setting to further define or adjust the settings:

Uncheck "Show only subscribed folders" to show all folders instead of subscribing individually:

(Added, 11 Nov 2020)

The default is to keep all messages on the local computer as shown below, but it is suggested not to do so to avoid using up local computer's storage space. Subject headings will always be downloaded. The email body and attachments will be downloaded only when being read, and may take a bit longer time, but this should be tolerable.

(Note added, 29 Jun 2021)

​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​

Select Tools > Accounts Setting > Account Actions > Add Mail Account to add other accounts.

Leave the options under Tools > Options as the default except in the following case (not required now as the Postfix configuration can be raised).

When the tls security level has to be lowered if the email server is not of the level expected by Thunderbird:

Select Tools > Options > General > Config Editor > I accept the risk > Search "security.tls" > security.tls.version.min

Change the default value "3" to "1" and select OK and exit.

(Note to adjust tls security level added, 29 Jun 2021)

Set Delivery Status Notification

Select Options > Delivery Status Notification if desired to have record of delivery:

Selecting Return Receipt will require the recipient to confirm receipt. This is not quite useful.

(Session added, 10 May 2023)

Install Add-ons​​​​​​​

Select Tools > Add-ons.

Search at "Find more extensions" for the following add-ons, install them and restart Thunderbird:

  1. AttachmentExtractor Continued - to download attachments (emails must have been fully downloaded before the full attachments can be extracted)
  2. CardBook - to sync Google contacts
  3. Google Calendar Plugin - to open Google calendar
  4. ImportExport Tools NG - to import or export emails or folders, good for exporting for archive 
  5. Lightning - to use calendars (better use Google calendars directly)
  6. LookOut (fix version) - to open Outlook attachments
  7. Manually sort folders - to re-sequence order of accounts and folders
  8. PrintingTools NG - to set print page layout
  9. Provider for CalDAD & CardDAV - required for TbSync below (not used)
  10. Quick Folder Move - to move or copy emails between folders
  11. Remove Duplicate Messages - to remove duplicate emails
  12. SmartTemplate4 - to set templates for composition, reply and forwarding
  13. TbSync - to synchronize contact, task and calendar information (not used because of log in problem).

(List updated, 15 Jan 2021)

(Note against AttachmentExtractor added, 29 Jun 2021)

(List updated 10 May 2023)

Use Quick Folder Move

Select some messages.

Press the following keys to open a context menu, enter a few characters for the name of the destination folder to display possible choices, move down to select the folder, and press Enter.

Press:

Shift+M to move the currently selected messages to the destination folder.

Ctrl+Shift+M to repeat moving to the previously selected folder.

Shift+Y to copy the currently selected messages to the destination folder.

Ctrl+Shift+Y to repeat copying to the previously selected folder.

Shift+G to jump to the destination folder (without the need to pre-select come messages).

Set up Remove Duplicate Messages

Select Tools > Add-on Options > Remove Duplicate Options:

Select Move to Trash instead of Delete permanently if not sure.

Select Folder if comparison is not across different folder.

Set up Print Page (Thunderbird version 91)

Select Tools > Preferences > General > Config Editor (at bottom of page).

Search "headerleft" and press the pencil icon to edit to enter "&T" to represent email subject.

​​​​​​​

Press the refuse bin icon to remove similar but outdated setup for named printers (similarly for other settings described below.

Search "headercenter" and edit to remove the value.

Search "headeright" and edit to remove the value.

Search "footer" and edit to set "&PT" for page number for footerleft, and "&D" for date for footerright.

Press Ctrl-P to pop up the print menu to define the paper size, scale, margins, and options:

​​​​​​​

Set up Print Page (Thunderbird version 78)

Select File > Page Setup:

Set up PrintingTools NG Options

Select File > Printing Tools NG Options and set as follows:

Copy and paste this Custom date format: %a,  %e %B %Y %t %H:%M:%S [GMT %z]

Skip PDF Output. Functions to be understood.

Right-click Thunderbird toolbar to customise to add the following icon:

(Section updated, 10 May 2023)​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​​

Set up SmartTemplate4

Select Tools > Add-on Options > SmartTemplate4:

Copy and paste the following latest Code in the Quote Header of the Reply and Forward options:

<a blank line first>
Regards,
Mr. K C Tang <replace with your name>
for
K C Tang Consultants Ltd.
T:(852)2866-6451 F:(852)2865-4751 W:www.kctang.com.hk
<hr/>
<SPAN style="FONT-SIZE: 10pt">
<b>Sent: </b>%date% ​​​​​​​<Use this to show: Sent: Mon, 14 Dec 2020 10:47:45 +0800>
<b>Sent: </b>%X:=sent% %datelocal% %date_tz% ​​​​​​​<Or use this to show: Sent:  Monday, Dec 14, 2020, 10:47 +0800>
<b>From: </b>%from(name,bracketMail())%
<b>To: </b>
<SPAN style="FONT-SIZE: 8pt">
%to(name,bracketMail())%</SPAN>
[[<br><b>Cc: </b>
<SPAN style="FONT-SIZE: 8pt">
%cc(name,bracketMail())%</SPAN>]][[<br><b>Bcc: </b>
<SPAN style="FONT-SIZE: 8pt">
%bcc(name,bracketMail())%</SPAN>]]
<b>Subject: </b>%subject%
</SPAN>
<hr/>

(Note against date formats added, 29 Jun 2021)

Insert license key in the next menu.

 

Set up CardBook

Select Tools > Add-ons and Themes > Find more add-ons > Enter CardBook to find and add the App.

Select Next when the following appears:

Select Validate if remote address book found (password to be entered in the next validation screen) or select Next:

The CardBook icon will appear on the right of the Toolbar.

Right-click the Toolbar to move the icon position to the left as appropriate:​​​​​​​

Click CardBook icon or select Tools > CardBook:

The following will show up:

 

Right-click within this side window space to bring up the following and select New Address Book:

Select Remote and Next:

Select Google, enter Username and select Validate:

Enter password in the next Google screen and permit access to Google contacts.

The Google contacts will be synchronized for use.

Add additional address book as necessary.

Select Edit Address Book to further customise:

Select General to change Address Book colour:

Select Sync to set synchronization interval to 15 minutes:

Remove the original Address Book icon from the toolbar because it will not be used anymore.

CardBook has many settings and entries for the contact but just use the simplest entries.

For the name of the contact, enter in the format of "Short company name - Full personal name" as both the Display Name and Family Name. Do not split to use Given or Other Names.

Press Synchronize in the CardBook toolbar as necessary.

(Section added, 10 May 2023)

(Updated, 11 May 2023)

Set up TbSync

Select Tools > Synchronization Settings (TbSync):

Or select Tools > Add-on Options to go to the following, then select Add new account > CalDAV & CardDAV:

Select Install Provider > download link:

Add CalDAV & CardDAV:

After adding, and re-starting Thunderbird as necessary, go back and select Manual Configuration > Next:

Enter

Account name: friendly account name, e.g. kctangcl

User name: gmail.com account name

CalDAV server address: https://apidata.googleusercontent.com/caldav/v2

CardDAV server address: https://www.googleapis.com/.well-known/carddav

Select Next:

(Manual configuration added, 15 Jan 2021)

The following is an older version of TbSync which provided automatic Google support. In that case, select Google > Next:

Enter a friendly account name and select Next:

After selecting Next in the manual case or automatic case, enter Google account email address and its password (may require doing it twice):

Select Finish:

Select Enable and synchronize this account:

Available resources like Google address book and calendars will be displayed.

Select those to be synchronized > Synchronize now:

The address book and calendars will be available for use.

Change Periodic synchronization (in minutes) to 30, which is the minimum interval. 

Export emails

Use ImportExportTools NG to export emails for archive.

To ensure that all email attachments have been downloaded. The email folders should be synchronised.

Select Tools > Account Settings > Advanced:

It may not be necessary to change to "Synchronise all messages locally regardless of age". Change only if the final results show that not all messages with attachments have been synchronised. Change back after use.

Select Download against folders intended to be exported:

Wait a while for the messages to be fully downloaded before exporting.

Alternatively, select relevant folder > Properties > Download Now to download all messages:

Select Tools > ImportExportTools NG > Options or alternatively select relevant folder > ImportExportTools NG > Options to set options:

Accept default options as follows:

Change the "format for filenames", "cut complete file path length" and "Charset for filenames" as follows:

Note the Custom Date format:

Accept default options as follows:

Accept default options as follows:

Select the relevant folder name and the following options to export to HTML format (with attachment):

Select the destination folder under which the exported emails will be saved.

After exporting, the following sub-folder for the selected source folder "XYZ" with the date and time of exporting appended will be created:

The following will appear under the sub-folder. The index.html will give an index page linking to all the emails and attachments under the Messages sub-sub-folder:

The emails under the Messages sub-sub-folder are in html format. Their filenames follows the filename format defined above. Their attachments are in the Attachments folders, one for each email with attachments.

Check whether the attachment files have been fully downloaded. If the file size is only 1KB, it means not fully downloaded in most of the cases.

The html files cannot be imported back to the email server. Export again to eml format as a double measure:

The exported sub-folder will have the same pair of index.html and Messages sub-sub-folder, but the index.html cannot link to email attachments. Each email has its own embedded attachments. There will be no separate Attachments folders.

End of Page

Set Up QNAP Network Attached Storage

Set Up QNAP Network Attached Storage KCTang

Go to End

Note

  • 28 Apr 2022: OpenVPN connection added.
  • 25 Apr 2022: Created.

Intro

A network attached storage is self complete with hard disks, ram and CPUs but without monitor screen to store files. It can be networked to computers and smartphones for viewing and file management.

Connect from Windows on the same local area network

Open File Explorer on Windows computer connected to the same local area network of a properly set up NAS (setting up described later below)..

Click "Network" oOpen File Explorer on Windows con the folder tree to find that the NAS appears as a connected device.

Click its icon.

Enter the username, password and confirm remembering the credential for subsequent connections.

The shared folders should appear for use.

Map the top shared folder to a drive number for easy access.

Connect from Windows from internet using OpenVPN

Install OpenVPN services if not already installed.

Copy the OpenVPN configuration file (obtained from the NAS after setting up as described later below) to Windows' C:\Program Files\OpenVPN\config\.

Unlike others, this configuration file connection needs manual connect.

To start this manually every time after rebooting, or re-connect after loss of connection after sleep or hibernation:

  • Click "^" on the bottom task bar to pop up the small window
  • Right-click the OpenVPN GUI icon
  • Click the configuration file name, and click Connect
  • Enter user name and password for the first time.

A message will appear if connected successfully.

Open file manager and enter \\10.7.0.1 to access the files.

Map folders to drive names for easy access.

Do not manually connect for other automatically connected configuration files.

If not connected successfully due to insufficient number of TAP-Windows adapters, search Windows as follows, add a new adapter and connect again:

If connection is still not successful, try opening Windows' command prompt and execute ipconfig /release and ipconfig /renew, and connect again.

Restart Windows as the last resort.

Map drive for quick access

Define a drive to be listed in the file manager directory to represent the server:

  • Open file manager and enter \\10.8.0.1 to access the vpn server.
  • Right-click the desired folder.
  • Click Map network drive.
  • Choose a drive name to represent the folder.
  • Click Finish.

 

Map the top shared folder to a drive number for easy access.

Set up QVPN to connect from internet

On computers, download "QVPN Device Client" from https://www.qnap.com/en/utilities/networking.

Set up as follows:

Set as follows:

  • The profile name can be decided by the user.
  • The Username should be the user name registered on the NAS. He will be able to access folders and files owned by him or shared with him.
  • The Pre-Shared Key should be the same as that set on the NAS (described later below).
  • The VPN Port should be the external port of the router connecting the NAS which can be the default port of "443" but should preferably be another port.
  • Note the selections of blue bullets.

Adjust "Connection" settings as follows, and select "Save" to connect:

Open Windows' File Explorer.

Click "Network" on the folder tree.

Enter "10.6.0.1" at the top to display the shared folders (if successful):

Map the folder to a drive number:

Install new hardware

Insert hard disks in the storage case.

Connect to a computer through router.

Connect to power supply and switch on the NAS.

Download Qfinder Pro from Essentials | Utilities | QNAP on computer and install.

Use Qfinder Pro to search for the NAS on the same network.

Update the firmware

Click the row showing the existence of the NAS to bring up the following to start smart installation:



Initialise

Enter the user name and password of the first user to become the administrator to replace the default "admin":







Create storage volume

Log in as the new administrator:




Click "+" against "No Volume" to create new volume:

Select "Change Type":

Select "Static volume" to use full disk size (backups are done elsewhere not in this NAS):

Unclick "Alert threshold" (optional).

Select "Set to Max".

 

A single volume without name is created.

If create thick volume (not used)

If "Thick volume" was selected, click "+" against "Create Storage Pool":

Storage Pool 1 is created (not in the case of static volume):

Create storage pool

Do not enable "Create SSD secure storage pool" if no SSD:

Click to select both hard disks:

Select "RAID 1" meaning two hard disks contain the same data and either disk can stand alone to function if another disk is faulty:

DataVol1 being created for static volume:

DataVol1 being created for thick volume:

Datavol 1 is created for thick volume:

Final result:

Disable snapshot backup

No snapshot volume created yet:

Snapshots are used to capture the current data and their changes. Since backup of the data is done on other media, no snapshot is to be set here.

If snapshots are enabled and huge volume of data is imported to the hard disks for the first time, the snapshots taken during the long time of import will use up the snapshot space and may cause system hang and downgrading of the RAID system.

Unclick all three in green to disable "Smart Snapshot Space Management" and "Snapshot Directory" since the full disks are to be used for live data:

Select "OK":

View to ensure correct selections:

Scroll down the page to view the rest.

Select "Apply" to confirm:

Set general settings

Change the default System port of "8080" to another port to reduce the chances of unauthorised access, change the external port of the router, apply proper port forwarding from the router port to the NAS port:

Set date and time format:

Set up network

Select "Network & File Services" as shown on the left above.

Select "Win/Mac/NFS/WebDAV":

Set Microsoft Networking as follows and select "Advanced Options" for connection by Windows computer on the same local area network::

Set as follows:

Set NFS Service as follows for mounting as a drive on linux computers::

Set up shared folder

Select "File Station" on desktop:

Select "Create folder":

Select "Shared Folder":

Define folder name and access privileges:

Folder is created:

Edit shared folder permissions:

Click open "Advanced Permissions" menu:

Select "NFS host access" (select "Microsoft Networking hot access" later):

Select "Access right" and add "*" to enable all hosts and IPs:

Select "read / write", and "Apply":

Check and apply Microsoft Networking host access as follows:

Enable as follows:

Set up QVPN service

Select "QVPN Service" on NAS desktop:

Enable QBelt service as follows:

Enable OpenVPN service as follows:

  • Change the default VPN client IP pool of "10.8.x.x" to "10.7.x.x" to avoid conflict with that used by OpenVPN on the server (not NAS).
  • Change the default Sever Port of "1191" to another port to reduce the chances of unauthorised access.
  • Change the external port of the router to the same.
  • Apply proper port forwarding from the router port to the NAS port:
  • Download configuration file (from the left box) for use.

 

Set up myQNAPcloud

myQNAPcloud is another way to access the NAS from the internet whereby an QNAP ID is given to link to the NAS through the internet.

QNAP ID can be used on computers and smartphones, and can connect to home computers without fixed external IP addresses.

However, myQNAPcloud requires access by administrators, and should not be used by non-administrators.

Select "myQNAPcloud" on the NAS:

Select 'Get Started":







Download and install "Let's Encrypt":



End of Page

Building Information Modelling 建築信息模型 / 建築資訊模型

Building Information Modelling 建築信息模型 / 建築資訊模型 KCTang

Go to End

BIM = Building Information Modelling = Modelling of Information of Building = 3D graphical model + information.

CAD = Computer aided design.

Apart from the 3D graphical part implied by the term "model", the feature rich information part distinguishes BIM from CAD.

4D BIM = 3D graphical model & information + time information.

5D BIM = 4D BIM + cost information.

6D BIM = 5D BIM + facility management information.

QTO = quantity take-off = measurement of quantities.

Revit is one of BIM software.

End of Page

Development Bureau Technical Circular (Works) No. 18/2018

Development Bureau Technical Circular (Works) No. 18/2018 KCTang

Go to End

Note

3 July 2019: First created.

Title of Circular

Adoption of Building Information Modelling for Capital Works Projects in Hong Kong.

Download.

Dates

Issued: 27 December 2018.

Effective: 1 January 2019.

Superseding DEVB TC(W) No. 7/2017.

Scope

Policy and requirements on the adoption of BIM techmology  in public works projects either by government staff, consultants or contractors.

Policy

BIM to be used on capital works projects estimated to cost more than HK$30 Million.

Irrespective of the modes of delivery.

Purposes

Enhance productivity.

Reduce risks and costs.

Optimize operation and maintenance.

Investigation, Feasibility and Planning Stage

Optional, depending on the perceived benefits.

Design Stage

Mandatory for designs under:

  • Design and Construction consultancy agreements
  • Investigation, Design and Construction consultancy agreements
  • all in-house projects.

Construction Stage

Mandatory.

At least an as-built BIM model for contracts not adopting BIM in the design.

Applicable to design-bid-build, design-build, design-build-operate projects.

Asset Management

Works departments to critically review their departmental asset management strategy in order to leverage the technology to enter into the digital built environment.

Entrustment Projects, Sub-vented Projects and Private Projects to be Handed Over to Government

Entrusted projects within Government departments - same policy.

Projects entrusted to organisations outside Government (Airport Authority, MTR Corporation Limited, private developers, etc.), sub-vented projects and private projects to be handed over to the Government - align with the BIM adoption/implementation policy of the organisations, but Works Departments to encourage.

Mandatory BIM Uses

IFP = Investigation, Feasibility and Planning

D = Design

C = Construction

M = Mandatory

M = Mandatory for all T&F proposals or construction works tenders invited on or after 1 January 2019

O = Optional

Use = See the latest version of the BIM Standards of the Construction Industry Council for explanations.

 

BIM Use

IFP

D

C

1

Design authoring

O

M

M

2

Design reviews

O

M

M

3

Existing conditions modelling

O

M

M

4

Site analysis

O

M

 

5

3D coordination

 

M

M

6

Cost estimation

O

Ma

Mb

7

Engineering analysis

 

O

O

8

Facility energy analysis

 

O

O

9

Sustainability evaluation

O

O

O

10

Space programming

O

Mc

 

11

Phase planning (4D Modelling)

 

Md

M

12

Digital fabrication

 

O

Me

13

Site utilization planning

   

Mf

14

3D control and planning

   

O

15

As-built modelling

   

M

16

Project systems analysis

   

O

17

Maintenance scheduling

   

Mg

18

Space management and tracking

   

O

19

Asset management

   

O

20

Drawing generation (drawing production)

 

M

M

a.         Mandatory for project cost budgeting, project cost control and cost evaluation on design options, etc. at design stage as far as practicable.

b.         Mandatory for project cost control, cost evaluation on variation of works, cash flow/spending analysis, etc. at construction stage as far as practicable.

c.         Mandatory for checking client spatial requirements such as compliance with the approved schedule of accommodations, reference plot ratio for building projects and site coverage of greenery for building projects, or other spatial requirements relevant to building/civil projects as considered appropriate.

d.         Mandatory for the construction activities with very high to extreme risk level identified from the Systematic Risk Management (SRM) according to ETWB TC(W) No. 6/2005 or other activities as considered appropriate at design stage.

e.         Mandatory for digitalizing the construction details in the BIM model for mass customized components such as metal cladding, acoustic panels, building façade panels, ceiling panels, acoustic barriers, metal structural members, etc. which are of large quantities and variety in dimensions, shapes, geometries, etc.

f.         Mandatory for the construction activities with very high to extreme risk level identified from the SRM according to ETWB TC(W) No. 6/2005 or other activities as considered appropriate at construction stage.

g.         Mandatory for providing maintenance attributes for facility structures, fabrics and equipment in the as-built models as considered appropriate.

Exceptional Grounds for Exemption

Serious contractual implications.

Substantial impact on project delivery.

Projects of little technical content, e.g.

  • operation of public fill banks
  • paving and painting works
  • slope maintenance works
  • greening works
  • maintenance works under term contracts
  • procurement of vehicles.

Authority for Exemption

Exemption by heads of Works Department partly or wholly.

Records to be kept and the Development Bureau to be informed of the approvals for exemptions with detailed justification.

BIM Software

Specific brand names and models of BIM software not to be specified in consultancy or works tenders, notwithstanding considerations on compatibility.

Tender specifications must be performance and function based.

Production of Two-Dimensional Drawings

2D drawings to be generated from 3D BIM models.

Cease to produce 2D drawings by other platforms if those drawings can be generated from the 3D BIM models.

2D drawings generated from the 3D BIM models need not follow "CAD Standard for Works Projects (CSWP)".

Contractual Requirements

Engagement of BIM sub-consultant or sub-contractor permitted.

In-house staff training is still required.

Consultant's/Contractor's Team Structure

A BIM team to be provided:

  • appropriate for the scale and complexity of the consultancy assignment/works contract
  • including sufficient and technically competent resources to complete all BIM tasks and deliverables specified in the assignment/contract
  • comprising at least [3] personnel (BIM team leader and BIM coordinators) well trained in relevant disciplines.

BIM team leader

  • leads the BIM team
  • holds a key position in the project team structure
  • either has corporate membership of an appropriate professional institution or has a minimum of 5 years relevant post-qualification experience plus university degree or equivalent in an appropriate engineering or construction related discipline
  • has a minimum of 3 years practical experience in management of BIM projects
  • be responsible for the overall BIM managements and process controls

BIM coordinator (more than 1)

  • has a miniumum of 3 years related construction project experience
  • has a minimum of 1 year practical experience in BIM project
  • handles BIM tasks delegated by the BIM team leader such as BIM modelling
  • collaborates information exchange amongst related stakeholders
  • maintains a drawing/information register to record the information to be incorporated in the models.

Proposal highlighting key roles and responsibilities of each position to be submitted within [14] calendar days after commencement of assignment/contract.

Any proposed change of BIM team members to be notified with CV and evidence of equivalent BIM competency of the replacement to the Director/Engineer/Supervising Officer within [7] calendar days (of change?) for approval.

BIM Sub-consultant's/Sub-contractor

Engaging of BIM sub-consultant/sub-contractor permissible.

Approval to be obtained from the Director/Engineer/Supervising Officer before formal engagement.

Involvement of BIM sub-consultant/sub-contractor permissible to be clearly indicated in the project team structure.

Positions of the staff members from the BIM sub-consultant/sub-contractor to be clearly indicated in the BIM team organisation structure.

BIM Training Requirements

Consultant/Contractor to nominate his staff or (not BIM) sub-consultant's/sub-contractor's staff to attend, within [6] months from the commencement of the assignment/contract, training courses organized by the Construction Industry Council:

  • [4] staff members to attend and successfully complete the Building Information Modelling Basic Modelling Courses
  • [4] staff members to attend and successfully complete the Building Information Modelling discipline-specific Advanced Modelling Courses.

Nomination to be approved by the Director/Engineer/Supervising Officer before the commencement of the training course.

In case of failure of nominated staff members to complete the training course, Consultant/Contractor to arrange additional BIM training courses to his staff members to fulfil the contract requirements at his own cost. 

Numbers in [ ] are for reference only and to be suitably determined by the Works Department according to the nature, scale, complexity, mode of project delivery, number of consultant/contractor/sub-consultant/sub-contractor involved, etc. of the project.

 End of Page

Start Revit

Start Revit KCTang

Go to End

Start Revit: select the Revit icon on desktop:

Create new project: select New > DefaultMetric, or click the various choices available: 

Drawing Screen:

Application Menu:

End of Page

Use quick access toolbar

Use quick access toolbar KCTang

Go to End

Position

The toolbar can be above the ribbon:

or below the ribbon:

To customize

Left-click the pull down icon:

To add choices

Hoover over the desired ribbon tab > Right-click > Left-click: Add to Quick Access Toolbar:

(First posted: 31/3/2017)

End of Page

Understand some terms

Understand some terms KCTang

Go to End

Elements

Each building block or object making up a Revit model is called an element.

Each element has its own properties with values. Each of these properties is called a parameter.

Elements are grouped by Discipline > Category > Family > Type > Instance.

An instance is a single element. Each element shares the same Family Parameters which can be overridden by Type Parameters which can be overridden by Instance Parameters.

Parametric modelling

The parameters can be viewed and some may be edited through a Properties window.

Apart from drawing graphically, by changing the values of the parameters, the elements can be changed and consequently the model can be changed. Therefore, BIM is called "parametric modelling".

More parameters can be added. The values of the parameters constitute the "Information" part of Building Information Modelling.

Disciplines

Architecture

Structure

Mechanical

Electrical

Piping

Categories

Architecture:

Structure:

Mechanical:

Electrical:

Piping:

Families and Types

In the following Project Browser, "Walls" is a category under which are families of Basic Wall, Curtain Wall and Stacked Wall. Under the Basic Wall family, there are various types of walls, such as Generic, Exterior, Interior, etc.:

End of Page

Use mouse and keyboard

Use mouse and keyboard KCTang

Go to End

Mouse

Zoom in and out the model: Move the middle wheel of the mouse up or down.

Pan left, right, up or down: Press the middle wheel and move the mouse to the left, right, up or down.

Rotate (orbit) 3D model: Press keyboard Shift, and at the same time press the middle wheel and move the mouse to the left, right, up or down.

Selection

Left-click: to select an item.

Left-click and drag mouse to draw a rectangular: to select a graphical region.

Alt key: to switch between graphical items nearby.

Ctrl + Left-click: to add another item to selection.

Shift + Left-click: to unselect an item.

Keyboard shortcuts

Esc to end a continuous series of actions.

(alternatively )

Ctrl-Z = undo an action.

(alternatively and )

ZR  and use to select the region = Zoom in Region. 

ZO = Zoom Out.

ZF  = Zoom to Fit. 

ZA = Zoom All to Fit.

The tool-tip help also shows the keyboard shortcuts for some of the menu items, e.g. WA for Wall:

Wheels and Viewcubes

2D wheel:

Full netvigation wheel:

Basic view object view:

Netvigation wheel menu to choose between different types of wheels:

Netvigation bar menu:

Zoom menu:

3D View cube:

 

End of Page

Set up project units

Set up project units KCTang

Go to End

Set up the format of Area and Volume to hide their units but use 2 decimal places to represent Area and 3 decimal places to represent Volume

This change eliminates the need to remove the units when using Excel for further calculations after the area and volume are exported from the Schedules to Excel files. 

Left-clickManage Ribbon > Project Units Tab:

The Properties pallete shows up. Units shown within "[ ]" will be hidden on display:

Left-clickFormat of Area:

Left-clickRounding > 2 decimal places to change format of Area to 2 decimal places without unit: 

Left-clickUnit symbol > None > OK:

Left-clickFormat of Volume:

Left-clickRounding > 3 decimal places to change format of Volume to 3 decimal places without unit:

Left-clickUnit symbol > None > OK:

Left-clickOK to finish:

End of Page

Draw grids

Draw grids KCTang

Go to End

Draw vertical grid lines (do not care too much about the exact spacing for the time being)

Left-click: Architecture or Structure > Datum - Grid:

Left-clickDraw - Line to draw free hand straight line:

Start from right to left if grid line references are to start from the right.

Left-click drawing area > Move mouse down to draw a vertical line:

Left-click to end the line: 

Move mouse to the left > Align with the help of the blue horizontal line with the first grid line:

Move mouse down to draw a vertical line with the end to align with the end of the first grid line > Left-click to end the line:

Continue to draw other lines > press Esc to finish the current command.

Change spacing between two lines (however, better use annotated dimensions to change spacing, as described later)

Left-click: body (not end) of the line to be moved (e.g. grid l2 below) > dimension on the right (e.g. 12000.0 below) > Change the dimension (e.g. 5000.0):

Note: Since grid 2 is drawn after grid 1, its position is relative to grid 1, only "12000.0" can be selected to be changed. "9000.0" cannot be selected to be changed.

Positions after change:

Draw horizontal grid lines

Like drawing the vertical grid lines, draw lines from left to right.

Start from bottom to top if grid line references are to start from the bottom:

Change grid line reference to start from "A" instead of "5": Left-click: body of the line > reference in the bubble > Change the reference > Enter > Esc:

Alternatively, Left-click: body of line > Name property > Change the reference > Enter > Esc:

Finished result before pressing Esc:

Continue drawing other lines will have references of C, D, E, etc.:

Showing or hiding bubbles

Reference bubbles will appear at the end of the grid line being drawn:

To show the bubble at the other end: Left-click: body of the line to display a square box from the end of the line:

Left-click: the square box to display the reference in the bubble:

If desired, deselect the square box to hide the reference in the bubble.

End of Page

Use pick lines and offset

Use pick lines and offset KCTang

Go to End

Note

Revit provides a Pick Lines option for various drawing commands.

Pick Lines uses an existing line as a reference and draws an identical line offsetting a specified distance from the reference line.

The following shows the use of Pick Lines to draw grid lines. The same technique can be followed for some other drawing commands.

Duplicate lines using "Pick Lines" (a quicker method after drawing the first grid line)

Left-click: Architecture or Structure > Datum - Grid > Draw - Pick Lines:

Change Offset to specify spacing between lines:

 
When moving towards a horizontal reference grid line from the below, a blue line will appear below to indicate one possible position of the new line:
 
 
When moving towards a horizontal reference grid line from the above, a blue line will appear above to indicate another possible position of the new line:

Left-click the reference grid line to fix the new line:

Move from the above of the second horizontal grid line > Left-click it to make it the new reference grid line and to fix the new grid line:

Repeat the action. All new grid lines will be 4000 mm from their own referenced grid lines:

End of Page

Annotate with dimensions

Annotate with dimensions KCTang

Go to End

Note

Annotating with dimensions can adjust and control the sizes and positions of modelled objects.

Annotated dimensions will be displayed and printed. If desired, annotated dimensions can be removed after being used to adjust sizes and positions without affecting the sizes and positions already set.

The following shows an example of annotating horizontal grid lines. The techniques can be followed for annotating other modelled objects.

Annotate parallel grid lines with running dimensions

Left-click: Annotate > Dimension - Aligned:

Left-click the first line:

Drag down > Left-click the second line:

Drag down > Left-click the third line:

Drag down > Left-click the fourth line:

Drag down > Left-click the fifth line:

Drag left or right to move the set of running dimensions to the the left or the right (not a must) > Drag up or down the end of dimension line > Left-click any point away from the lines to be dimensioned to end the dimension line:

Left-click any point again to finish:

Draw overall dimension

Follow the technique above to draw the overall dimension:

Change position of dimensions

Left-click dimenson line:

Drag left or right to move its position:

Left-click to finish:

Change dimensions to move line position

Left-click the line to be moved (e.g. grid B as below, not the dimension line):

Left-click the dimension relative to grid A:

Change the dimension > Enter:

Left-click another line to be moved (e.g. grid E as below):

Left-click dimension:

Change dimension:

Enter > Esc to finish this series of commands:

Change all lines to equal spacings

Left-click the dimension line > Look for the "EQ" sign crossed in red:

Left-click the EQ sign:

Esc to finish this series of commands:

End of Page

Select region

Select region KCTang

Go to End

Note

Selecting a region in the drawing area from left to right or from right to left will have different effects.

Proper use would enable selection of desired elements excluding other elements.

Select region from left to right

Left-click and extend upward or downward the rectangular box from left to right.

The rectangular box is in solid line.

Only elements wholly contained in the rectangular box will be selected (highlighted). 

Select region from right to left

Left-click and extend upward or downward the rectangular box from right to left.

The rectangular box is in dotted line.

Any elements partly within the rectangular box will be selected (highlighted). 

End of Page

Move elements

Move elements KCTang

Go to End

Moving graphical elements

Left-click:  Elements to be moved > Modify - Move > Any point in the drawing area > Another point in the drawing area > Esc to finish.

The distance and direction from the first point to the second point represent the distance and direction to be moved.

The points can be outside of the elements to be moved.

However, to move a point of the elements to a precise position, select the point as the first point and select the precise position as the second point.

Alternatively, use keyboard up, down, left and right arrows to move approximately after selection.

Example of moving all grid lines

Select region:

Extend the region (note elements partly falling within the rectangle will be selected and shown as blue):

Left-click to finish selection (selected elements shown in blue, but rectangle disappeared):

Left-click Modify - Move:

Note the rectangle will appear in blue.

Left-click first point:

Left-click second point > Esc to finish:

Finished:

End of Page

Adjust grid length

Adjust grid length KCTang

Go to End

Adjust length of a group of grid lines

Left-click the body of one of the grid lines. A dotted line joining adjacent grid lines of the same lengths will appear.

Left-click the end of the selected grid line.

Drag the end of the line. All the ends of the grid lines will be moved.

 

End of Page

Draw walls

Draw walls KCTang

Go to End

Select structural wall tool

Left-click floor plan, e.g. Level 1

Left-click: Architecture - Wall > Wall: Structural:

or

Left-click: Structure - Wall > Wall: Structural

Define wall placement options

Left-click Height to draw wall from floor to ceiling:

Left-click Level 2 as the top constraint, i.e. stopping wall at Level 2 floor level:

Left-click Core Face Exterior to locate the exterior face of core of wall relative to the reference line:

Draw external walls in clockwise direction

Left-click: Type Selector > Basic Wall - Exterior - Render on Brick on Block:

Left-click Draw - Line:

ZR > Left-click and Drag a region to zoom in to the region:

Left-click a point anywhere in the Drawing Area (e.g. on a grid intersection) > Drag downward > Left-click to end wall > Esc to finish command:

Left-click another point > Drag upward this time to draw another wall > Left-click > Esc:

Left-click View Control Bar - Detail Level: Medium to see the component layers of the wall:

Note that the walls face different directions.

Left-click View Control Bar - Visual Style: Shaded to see the wall orientation clearer:

This demonstrates that external walls should be drawn in clockwise direction to make them face outward.

Flip wall orientation

Left-click: wall to be flipped > double arrow to flip the wall > Esc:

Change wall type

Left-click wall to be changed:

Left-click: Type Selector > Basic Wall - Generic - 200mm:

Esc to finish:

Create wall

Left-click: Type Selector > Basic Wall - Generic - 200mm > Edit Type:

Left-click Duplicate:

Edit Name:

Change to "WA-C40-130" > OK:

where

  • WA = Structural wall
  • C40 = Reinforcement concrete C40
  • 130 = 130 mm thick

Left-click Structure Parameter - Edit:

Edit Thickness:

Change thickness to "130.0" > OK:

OK:

The wall type will be changed:

 

End of Page

Duplicate floors

Duplicate floors KCTang

Go to End

Extend gridlines first

Select an elevation or a section view:

Left-click a vertical gridline:

Move the cursor arrow to the small circle below the bubble of the gridline > Press left mouse button > Move mouse up

Duplicate levels

Select the top level:

More than one level can be selected if copying of more than one level is desired.

The Modify | Grids ribbon will show up.

Left-click: Modify > Copy

A dotted box will show up around the selected level:

Press left mouse button > Move mouse up:

Left-click the new level > storey height dimension box > Enter storey height:

The storey height should be the same as that of the floor to be duplicated.

Left-click the name of the new level > Change the name as appropriate:

Repeat for the next new level.

The storey height and the name of the level can be revised after adding each or all levels.

Create floor plan views

Left-click: View > Create:

Left-click: Plan Views > Floor Plan:

Newly added levels without views created yet will be listed.

Select one or levels to create views:

Duplicate floors

Press left mouse button > Move from top level to bottom right > Select the entire floor to be duplicated:

Press Ctrl-C to copy.

Left-click: Modify > Clipboard > Paste:

Left-click: Aligned to Selected Levels:

Select one or more levels where you would duplicate the selected floor:

Take care not to duplicate the same elements at the same level more than once.

The duplicated floors will show on the elevation.

Note in this example that the 1/F has not been created.The storey height of the 2/F has not been set to be equal to the storey height of the 1/F. This leaves a gap between the top of the duplicated floor and the level line above. This should actually be avoided.

(First posted: 1/4/2017)

End of Page

Schedule Revit for QTO

Schedule Revit for QTO KCTang

Go to End

Note

2 Mar 2022: Expanded to include previous presentation materials titled "Minimalist Modelling and Coding of Revit for Quantities" presented in February 2014 and January 2015 both in Kuala Lumpur, and on 6 April 2016 in Hong Kong and 2 March 2022 at HKIS.

12 Mar 2015: Created. Titled "Export Revit schedules to Excel.

Intro

One can model BIM to the last bolt and nut and can use third party software to take-off quantities from the BIM model, but this would mean extra work and more license fees.

This article would show how a Revit model and its families of building blocks can be built, coded and scheduled in a minimalist and self-explanatory manner appropriate and sufficient enough for producing auditable dimensions and quantities for costing.

Overview

Capabilities of Revit

Can Revit produce Bills of Quantities from Revit model with the press of a button?

  • No.
  • It is a modelling software, not a BQ production software.

Can Revit model provide quantities?

  • Yes.
  • Revit being a building information modelling (“BIM”) software defines its building blocks (“elements”) with parameters which contain a lot of information including quantities of work and materials.
  • That’s why BIM is called “parametric modelling”.

Are the quantities in compliance with the standard method of measurement?

  • No.
  • The SMMs of different countries vary.

Are the quantities provided by a Revit model sufficient and ready enough to be converted to quantities according to the standard method of measurement?

  • No.
  • Some parameters are not schedulable.
  • The lengths, areas and volumes of elements provided by a Revit model may not be the desired lengths, areas and volumes for SMM purposes.
  • Concrete shoulders at junctions of different mixes are not available.
  • Formwork areas are not available.
  • Wall and ceiling finish areas are not readily available.

Then, how can we use Revit model to produce quantities for estimates or BQ?

  • There are third party quantity take-off software which can help extract quantities from a Revit model and provide them for estimates, bills of quantities and other uses.
  • However, one would still need to write the descriptions and do some linking between the descriptions and the modelling elements.
  • The linking resembles on-screen taking-off.
  • Depending on the suitability of the model, the linking process may be quick or tedious.
  • For some software, extensive formulae would need to be set-up.
  • This is difficult to check individually and is therefore prone to errors.
  • The beauty of such QTO software is that once the descriptions and linking are done, any changes to the models can be monitored.
  • The downside is one has to invest in the license and training costs.

When descriptions are required to be written and quantities required to be classified according to the SMM, Quantity Surveyors are still required.

Can we still get something useful from Revit models without third party QTO software?

  • Yes, it is the purpose of this article to explain.

Should QS build models?

Are Revit models readily available from Architects and Engineers?

  • Probably not yet for most of the cases.
  • While QTO software can handle 2D CAD drawings, the on-screen taking-off process would be more tedious for 2D CAD drawings.

Without a BIM model, should QS build up models?

  • QS has evolved from dimension sheet, cut-and-shuffle, schedule, scale rule, curvimeter, planimeter, Lotus 1-2-3 spreadsheet, Excel worksheet, digitizer, on-screen taking off, etc.
  • There is no reason why the QTO must be textural and not graphical.
  • Having learned the basic tools, modelling the basic features with Revit is easier than with 2D CAD software.
  • It should be within the capability of the average QS to learn, only if he or she has time.
  • For the bulk items like structure, fabric and finishes, the time to model and get quantities would be shorter than the time to do manual taking off or on-screen taking off from 2D CAD drawings.
  • Even if models are provided by Architects and Engineers, they may not have been modelled in such a way suitable for QTO.
  • QS should be able to inspect and understand the models in order to use the models.
  • Furthermore, in order not to disturb the integrity of the models provided by the Architects and Engineers, QS would probably need his own set of “QS parameters” and adjust the parameters for his own purposes.
  • Therefore, the answer should be "yes".
  • QS should build up models in the absence of models or should be able to modify models to suit.

Should QS model every detail?

  • No.
  • Items like windows, doors, fittings and furniture vary in details between different projects and take some longer time to model.
  • All that QS needs is the number for writing up full descriptions or measuring the component quantities per number with reference to the detailed drawings provided by the Architects and Engineers.
  • It should however be noted that the level of details of the models if provided by the Architects and Engineers should be no less than those traditionally provided for 2D CAD drawings for estimating, tendering and construction. This should be a simpler benchmark than whatever Level of Development or Level of Details (LOD) or Level of Information Need definitions.

How much do we need to measure?

We may measure every bit of concrete, formwork, finishes, etc. exactly net when we measure the concrete members or room finishes.

However, see the following table for the inter-relationship between dimensions and quantities:

Description

Primary Qty

Multiplier

Unit

Wall - grade C40 - T thick (centre line area)

A

 

Super

  • Reinforced concrete Grade C40

A

T

Cube

  • Wall formwork

A

2

Super

  • To deduct junction with slab if wall measured through slab

 

 

 

  • To adjust for openings

 

 

 

  • To measure end of wall

 

 

 

Column - grade C40 - W wide x D deep (height)

H

 

Run

  • Reinforced concrete Grade C40

H

W x D

Cube

  • Column formwork (junction with slab to deduct if measured through slab)

H

(W + D) x 2

Super

  • To deduct junction with slab if column measured through slab

 

 

 

Suspended beam - grade C30 - W wide x D deep - S slab (length)

L

 

Run

  • Reinforced concrete Grade C30

L

W x (D – S)

Cube

  • Beam formwork below slab

L

W + (D – S) x 2

Super

  • Deduct slab formwork

L

W x -1

Super

  • To adjust for shoulders to higher grade walls or columns

 

 

 

Suspended slab - grade C30 - S thick (area)

A

 

Super

  • Reinforced concrete Grade C30

A

S

Cube

  • Slab formwork

A

 

Super

  • To deduct junctions with walls, columns and beams

 

 

 

  • To adjust for openings

 

 

 

Room - finishes group A - net plan area

A

 

Super

  • Floor finishes

A

 

Super

  • Ceiling finishes

A

 

Super

  • To adjust for beam sides

 

 

 

  • To adjust for door opening

 

 

 

  • To adjust for work behind fixtures

 

 

 

Room - finishes group A - perimeter including columns - H room height - S skirting height

L

 

Run

  • Skirting

L

 

Run

  • Wall finishes

L

H – S

Super

  • To adjust for beam sides and ends

 

 

 

  • To adjust for openings

 

 

 

  • To adjust for work behind fixtures

 

 

 

Window W1 - W wide x H high opening - T thick concrete wall - Room A

N

 

Nr

  • Window W1, fully described

N

 

Nr

  • Glazing

N

Detailed dimensions of W1

Super

  • Deduct T wall concrete

N

W x H x T x -1

Cube

  • Deduct wall formwork

N

W x H x 2

Super

  • Add jambs and soffit formwork, T thick (or boxing number as appropriate)

N

W + H x 2

Run

  • Deduct Room A wall finishes (assuming no dado)

N

W x H x -1

Super

  • Add Room A wall finishes to window reveal

N

(W + H x 2) x reveal width

Run

  • Add Room A window cill

N

W

Run

Door D1 - W wide x H high opening - T thick brickwall - Room finishes group A

N

 

Nr

  • Door D1, fully described

N

 

Nr

  • Deduct T thick brickwall

N

W x H x -1

Super

  • Add lintol

N

W + end laps x 2

Run

  • Deduct Room A skirting

N

W

Run

  • Deduct Room A wall finishes

N

W x H x -1

Super

  • Add Room A floor finishes

N

W x part of T as appropriate

Run

  • Door frames, architraves, painting, dowels, holdfasts, etc.

N

Detailed dimensions of D1

As appropriate

The above shows that:

  • We may measure the:
    • aggregate areas of different wall and slab thicknesses,
    • aggregate lengths of different column and beam sections,
    • aggregate plan areas and girths of rooms of the same finishes first (we may call these “primary quantities”, those without bullets),
    • before converting them into concrete, formwork and finishes quantities (we may call these “secondary quantities”, those with bullets).
  • We may measure the overall gross quantities first before making detailed adjustments.
  • Some adjustments can be made when we measure other elements, e.g.:
    • deduct slab formwork using beam quantities,
    • adjust for wall openings when using window and door quantities, etc.
  • The descriptions can be very short only to the extent of containing sufficient information for the purposes of the multiplier.

It follows that instead of expecting a Revit model to provide the quantity of every BQ item, we can just:

  • extract the primary quantities adequately described from the Revit model; and
  • use Excel to handle the secondary processing.

The need for modelling to the last bolt and nut is reduced.

Excel in fact is more powerful for setting up complicated formulae, and for sorting and filtering rows.

Coding and why?

To convey the information from Revit to Excel, it would be good if the information is described in a concise, precise and consistent manner.

All Revit elements are classified and described by Family (Floor, Basic Wall, M_Fixed in the following images) and Types (those under the Search prompts in the images), but these descriptions may not contain the information the way we want and we would need to change them anyway.

Furthermore, if the model is provided by the Architect or Engineer and we do not want to change their descriptions of Families and Types, we may need to create a parameter to contain the precise and consistent information we need.

The following coding (“QS Desc”) should be sufficient and self-explanatory enough yet short and simple to represent the primary quantities in the above table:

  • WA-C40-100
  • CL-C40-500x600
  • BM-C30-300500 : 120SL
  • SL-C30-120
  • RM-F-A
  • RM-P-A
  • WD-W1-1200x1500 : IWConc100-RoomA
  • DR-D1-920x2200 : IWBrick125-RoomA

This way of coding should be more intuitive and understandable than those cryptic codes using (alpha) numeric codes.

CIC BIM Standards promote the use of FLIP as the element names. It is not that suitable for QS use. Conversion from FLIP to "QS Desc" would be necessary.

It should be easier to do the conversion in bulk with Excel than with Revit schedules.

Schedules / Quantities

Revit schedules

Revit has the capabilities to produce many schedules, under the project browser:

With so many schedules to represent a modelled project, the choices of the columns in the schedules must be well co-ordinated.

We cannot practically transfer the individual total quantity from the schedules manually one by one for billing purposes.

This would be prone to errors.

The above schedule has been designed such that:

  • The left 6 columns are consistently designed for all schedules.
  • The Level and Mark are for locational identification of the quantities, like our dimension sheets, for traceability.
  • Only the Type, QS Tag, QS Qty and QS Unit are really essential for billing.
  • The other columns are there for calculating the QS Qty or cross-checking, and can vary from schedules to schedules.

Export function provided by Revit

Revit can also export the schedules to a txt file which can then be imported by Excel to become a worksheet for use:

However, the export can only handle one schedule at a time.

This would be a tedious process to export many schedules one at a time and merge all schedules together.

Use macro to export to Excel

A macro (see later below) has been written whereby:

  • All the schedules will be exported by a single command to one Excel file with one worksheet per schedule.
  • Schedules intended to provide the uniform left 6 columns for billing should have their names prefixed by “Dim – ” and the macro will combine the 3 columns of Type, QS Tag and QS Unit into a single “QS Desc” column in the style of “Type : QS Tag : QS Unit”.
  • An “All Dim” worksheet will be created to repeat all information contained in the “Dim – ” schedules:

  • A “QS Desc” worksheet will be created to contain a list of the unique QS Desc and their total QS Qty:

  • The total QS Qty will be useful for quick reference.
  • The Excel file name will contain the time down to the second it is created so that a re-export will not overwrite an existing Excel file.

This macro vastly reduces the time to export Revit schedules to Excel worksheets.

Billing Workflow

Overall

The primary quantities in the “All Dim” worksheet can be further processed for billing. The workflow are as follows:

  • Data --> (extraction from Revit schedules) --> Primary Qty --> (processing ) --> Secondary Qty --> (processing ) --> Estimate or BQ.
  • Data --> (direct measurement without using Revit) --> Primary Qty --> (processing ) --> Secondary Qty --> (processing ) --> Estimate or BQ.

Primary worksheet

The first 5 columns only of the “All Dim” worksheet shown above are copied to the lower region of a “Primary worksheet”:

The item sequence can be kept unchanged for easy referencing, or may be sorted temporarily.

The Seq column helps re-sort them back to the original sequence.

Highlighted columns are not used for data exported from Revit Schedules because they are reserved for direct measurement at the upper region of the worksheet, where the formula used for Row Qty, say at Row 6, is =PRODUCT(E6:J6), meaning product of Dim1 …. Times3:

Secondary worksheet

Column A only of the “QS Desc” worksheet shown above is copied to Column B in the lower region of a “Secondary worksheet”:

right portion:

The upper region of the Secondary worksheet is similar to the upper region of the Primary worksheet for direct measurement which can straightly go to the Estimate or BQ without further processing like the lower region:

`

Further processing of the Primary Qty is done in the lower region.

By using a special formula in Column D in the lower region, each of the Primary Qty here is the total of the Primary Qty of the same QS Desc in the Primary worksheet.

There is no need to sort and group the lines in the Primary worksheet in order to give group total per each QS Desc.

The special formula is actually very simple.

For example,

  • The Primary Qty at Row 14 is: =SUMIF(Primary!$J$5:$J$181;$C14;Primary!$K$5:$K$181)
  • where $C14 is the QS Desc on the same row,
  • Primary!$K$5:$K$181 is the range of QS Desc in the Primary worksheet, and
  • Primary!$J$5:$J$181 is the range of Row Qty in the Primary worksheet.
  • If the QS Desc in the Primary worksheet matches the QS Desc in the Secondary worksheet,
  • then add in the corresponding Row Qty in the Primary worksheet.

The Code will be the code of the Estimate or BQ items.

Again, the Row Qty is the product of all Dims and Times of the same row, using the “=PRODUCT()” function.

They are also called Secondary Qty.

The columns like Times Used in BQ, BQ Unit, BQ Descriptions are making reference to the Estimate or BQ worksheet for error checking.

The Floor columns are for analysis of quantities by floors.

Estimate or BQ worksheet

The Estimate or BQ worksheet is like this:

Similar to the Primary Qty or the Secondary worksheet, by using a special formula, each of the Qty here is the total of the Secondary Qty of the same Code in the Secondary worksheet.

The special formula is in the form of:

  • =ROUND(SUMIF(Secondary!$J$6:$J$176;$C41;Secondary!$L$6:$L$176);0)

Basically, it means that if the Code in the Secondary worksheet matches the Code in the Estimate or BQ worksheet, then add in the corresponding Row Qty in the Secondary worksheet.

The Floor columns are for internal references only.

When issuing the Estimate or BQ in Excel softcopy, the formulae should be changed to values and other internal reference data should be removed with the empty columns hidden.

Setting Revit Schedules

Project units

Revit schedules show the units against numerical values by default.

It would not be convenient if the numerical values are exported to Excel worksheet for further calculations because they would not be recognised as numerical values unless the units are removed

A solution would be to define two decimal places for Area and three decimal places for Volume with the units hidden, so as to make them self-explanatory without the need of units.

To define the project units (in metric): click Manage > Project Unit icon:

Parameters

Parameters provided by Revit are called system parameters, which cannot be changed though some permit entry of values.

There are two types of parameters which one can define at the Family, Type or Instance level:

  • Project Parameters: can appear in schedules but not in tags, but cannot be shared by other projects and families.
  • Shared Parameters: can appear in schedules and tags, shared by multiple projects and families, and exported to ODBC.

Shared Parameters are more versatile and useful.

For some Families and Types, a shared parameter can be added to the properties directly.

However, for others, only project parameters can be added to the properties, but a project parameter can borrow a shared parameter, so the shared parameter can still be used but indirectly.

Project parameters

To add project parameters: select Manage > Settings > Project Parameters:

Note from the above that either a project parameter or a shared parameter can be added.

Shared parameters

To add shared parameters: select Manage > Settings > Shared Parameters:

Select Create, go to a convenient folder, name a Shared Parameter file, e.g. "QS_shared_params", which is a txt file, save and return back to the screen on the left:

Select New under Group, name a New Parameter Group, e.g. "QS", and select OK.

Select New under Parameters, name a new parameter, e.g. “QS Tag”, select Common under Discipline, select Text under Type of Parameter, and select OK:

Defining schedule columns

Revit schedule columns (fields) can be selected from “Available fields” (parameters).

If there are no suitable fields available, new columns can be defined either by “Add Parameter” or “Calculated Value”:

Level and Mark

Level and Mark parameters are generally available with elements.

Type

Elements are classified by Family and generally have a Type parameter available for use in the schedules.

However, instead of using Family and Type as provided by Revit, short-code-like-descriptions are used for Type.

To simplify matters, such descriptions should represent both the information of Family and Type.

QS Tag

QS Tag is a new parameter specially added to supplement the information of “Type”.

Select Add Parameter as shown above to open the Parameter Properties window.

Select Shared parameter > Select to open another window.

Select the Parameter Group QS if it already exists, otherwise create it as described for Shared Parameters.

Select QS Tag if it already exists, otherwise create it as described for Shared Parameters by selecting Edit.

Select OK to go back to the Parameter Properties window.

Check “Add to all elements in the selected categories” and Instance.

Select Identity Data under “Group parameter under”, and select OK.

Move up the newly created parameter on the menu to the desired position.

QS Qty and QS Unit

QS Qty is a calculated field borrowing its value from other parameters like Count, Length, Area, Volume, etc.

The unit of QS Qty can be Nr, m, m2, m3, i.e. a mixture.

However, Revit does not permit a column of such mixed nature.

Since QS Qty should have 2 decimal places, therefore, it is artificially defined as an Area parameter which according to the setting of the Project Units described earlier will show 2 decimal places.

However, tricks have to be done as shown below to make their numerical values still correct even though they are recognised by Revit as Area parameters:

 

QS Unit is a calculated field specially used to tell the real unit of QS Qty. The formulae are simply “m” for “m”, “m2” for “m2”, “m3” for “m3”, “Nr” for “Nr”, etc.

 

It may be possible for some elements that we need their Count, Length, Area as QS Qty, e.g. Column Nr and Column Length, Wall Area and Wall Length. To handle this, the same schedule can be duplicated only with the QS Qty and QS Unit suitably adjusted to suit while all other fields can be kept the same.

Example schedules

Wall schedules

A Wall Area schedule gives wall areas as QS Qty for the generation of concrete volume and formwork area:

A Wall Length schedule gives wall lengths as QS Qty for the processing of quantities at junctions with slabs:

Level is actually the base constraint renamed in the schedule heading. This is not absolutely necessary for billing purposes.

 

QS Tag is for entering information like the slab thickness and whether the wall is at slab edge to facilitate adjustment for slab and wall junctions.

Length, Width (i.e. thickness), Area and Volume are system parameters.

Note that Area is not always equal to the elevation areas along the centre line as explained later and would need special treatment.

Wall height is not available probably because the height can vary for a wall.

Lengths at wall ends are not available.

This is to be resolved.

Lengths around openings are not available.

This is to be resolved through giving more information on the Door and Window Schedules.

For blank openings, this is still to be resolved.

QS Mean Area is equal to Volume / Width.

“Mean Area / Length” is equal to QS Mean Area / Length.

Representation of wall length, area and volume

Note the wall length, area and volume have the following representations:

 

 

Wall length given

Area given

Volume given

Straight wall

e.g. 12 m long x 4 m high x 300 mm thick

Centre line of wall

12 m

Elevation area on one face

= 12 x 4 m

48 m2

Area along centre line x wall thickness

= 12 x 4 x 0.3 m

14.4 m3

Wall L-shaped on plan with mitre joint

e.g. 400 mm wall 8 m long + 300 mm wall 5 m long, both x 4 m high

Centre line of wall with the corner shared between the two wings

= 7.85 + 4.80 m

12.65 m

Elevation area based on the extreme length of each wing

= 8 x 4 + 5 x 4 m

= 32 + 20 m2

52 m2

Area along centre line with the corner shared x wall thickness

= 7.85 x 4 x 0.4 + 4.80 x 4 x 0.3

= 12.56 + 5.76 m3

18.32 m3

Wall L-shaped on plan with butt joint

e.g. 8 m400 mm wall + 4.6 m300 mm wall, both x 4 m high

Same as above

Elevation area based on the self length of each wing

= 8 x 4 + 4.6 x 4 m

= 32 + 18.4 m2

50.4 m2

Area based on self length x wall thickness

= 8 x 4 x 0.4 + 4.6 x 4 x 0.3

= 32 x 0.4 + 18.4 x 0.3

= 12.80 + 5.52 m3

18.32 m3

Wall L-shaped on plan with butt joint

e.g. 7.7 m400 mm wall + 5 m300 mm wall, both x 4 m high

Same as above

Elevation area based on the self length of each wing

= 7.7 x 4 + 5 x 4 m

= 30.8 + 20 m2

50.8 m2

Area based on self length x wall thickness

= 7.7 x 4 x 0.4 + 5 x 4 x 0.3

= 30.8 x 0.4 + 20 x 0.3

= 12.32 + 6 m3

18.32 m3

Wall T-off from another wall

e.g. 4.6 x 300 mm wall T-off from 400 mm wall

 

Centre line of T-off wall measured to centre line of main wall

= 4.6 + 0.2 = 4.8 m

Elevation area based on the self length of T-off wall

= 4.6 x 4 m

18.4 m2

Area based on self length x wall thickness

= 4.6 x 4 x 0.3

5.52 m3

The Area and Volume do not make deduction at the junction with floor slab.

Whether the L-shaped wall is mitre or butt jointed, it does not make any difference to the Volume, but the Areas are different for the three cases. 
The area of formwork to sides of wall should be equal to the elevation area along the centre line x height x 2 = (7.85 + 4.8) x 4 x 2 = 50.6 m2 x 2.

The Areas given by Revit for the three cases of L-shaped wall are useless for this purpose.

Wall junctions on plan:

  • It is preferred to use mitre joints at corner junction of walls.
  • To change the type of wall junctions on plan: select a wall > Wall Joins:
  • Select Butt to give a butt joint:
  • Select Previous or Next to change the direction of the joint:
  • Select Miter for a mitre joint:

After all these discussions, it seems that Volume is a more reliable value to use than Area.

Therefore, QS Qty using Wall Area for Estimate and BQ purposes takes the value of Volume / Width, i.e. the QS Mean Area.

QS Qty using Wall Length is to be used for adjustments for the wall and slab junction, it appears that Length is not accurate enough but close enough and is the only choice available. It is to be addressed.

Architectural walls

Architectural walls can be modelled just like a structural wall.

However, unlike structural walls which can be taken as going up to the floor level because they usually have stronger concrete grade, architectural walls should go up to beam or ceiling soffit only and not the floor level.

Revit does not have a feature to let architectural walls automatically go up and stop there.

Therefore, architectural walls have to be modelled one by one to ensure correct height.

With so many architectural walls within a building, this is a time consuming process and is therefore prone to errors.

A solution is to model architectural walls like structural walls up to the floor level above, and select the Join > Switch Join function so that the slabs and beams will override the walls so that the wall volumes and areas reported will be those below the slabs or beams.

Floor slab and structural wall junctions

When modelling, after selecting a floor slab >

> > Yes, the following dialogue will appear and will only appear if there are structural walls underneath the slab:

If “Yes” is selected, the volume of the structural walls below will be measured to the underside of the slab, as shown for the wall on the left below.

If “No” is selected, the volume of the structural walls below will be measured to the top of the slab, as shown for the wall on the right below, but the reported volume of the slab will not be reduced.


The reported height of the structural walls when defined to be to the top of the slab will not be changed in both cases.

In theory, when a structural wall is attached to the bottom of a floor slab, the wall top will move when the floor slab is moved up or down.

Furthermore, the Modify Wall menu also has the following choices:

However, the behaviour after attaching or detaching walls using the above slab or wall commands is not quite definite every time.

Furthermore, since the slab and wall junctions will need to be adjusted in any case, when encountering the above dialogue when editing slab boundary, it is better to answer “No” to retain the default treatment.

Structural column schedules

A Structural Column Length schedule gives column lengths as QS Qty for the generation of concrete volume and formwork area:

A Structural Column Number schedule gives column numbers as QS Qty for the processing of quantities at junctions with slabs:

 

Column Location Mark is a system parameter which gives the grid line references.

This is used here instead of the usual Mark.

QS Tag is for entering information like the slab thickness and whether the column is an edge or corner column to facilitate adjustment for slab and column junctions.

For a column defined to be of floor to floor height, Volume is a system parameter which gives the volume of concrete below slab, while Length is a system parameter which gives the floor to floor height.

Since the floor to floor height is needed, therefore “QS Qty” takes the value of Length for Column Length schedule. 
It is strange that the column width (b) and depth (h) are not available to the properties window and schedules.

Therefore, two shared parameters QS Width and QS Depth have been added to the Family Type parameters to make them available to the schedules to facilitate error checking.

QS App Slab Tk = Length - Volume / (QS Width * QS Depth) which is useful for indicating the approximate slab thickness for counter-checking any errors in positioning the columns.

Vol / (Wi x Dp) = Volume / (QS Width * QS Depth) gives the length of column below slab.

Structural framing length schedule

Structural Framing Length schedule is basically a beam length schedule:

For beams, there are two parameters of Length and Cut Length.

Only the Cut Length is the length between supporting columns or walls.

QS Qty for Beam Length takes the value of Cut Length.

Similar to structural columns, the beam width (b) and depth (h) are not available to the properties window and schedules.

Therefore, two shared parameters QS Width and QS Depth have been added to the Family Type parameters to make them available to the schedules to facilitate error checking:

Floor slab area schedule

A Floor Slab Area schedule can be:

QS Tag is for the entry of information about the strutting height.

QS Qty takes Area.

Door and window schedules

A Door Number schedule can be:

The values of “From Room : Wall Finish” and “To Room : Wall Finish” are obtained with the help of a self-written macro to facilitate adjustment of wall finishes on both sides of the windows.

A Window Number schedule can be:

QS Tag is for the entry of information about the walls housing the doors and windows to facilitate future measurement of formwork to jambs and soffit, boxing and lintels.

Room schedules

The default room schedules provided by Revit can give Floor Area and Perimeter, but not the Nett Ceiling and Beam surface areas, nor wall and column surface areas:

By defining the floor level above a room as the Upper Limit, and entering the slab thickness in negative value as the Limit Offset, the reported Unbounded Height will give the floor to ceiling soffit height, which should be good for generating the wall and column surface areas.

Adjustment would need to be made for the beam surfaces and end junctions.

Adjustment for window and door openings may be taken care of when processing the window and door quantities.

To provide QS Qty for floor, wall, ceiling and skirting, 4 separate schedules are adapted from the Room Schedule.

Room Floor Finishes Area schedule:

Room Ceiling Finishes Area schedule:

Room Wall Finishes Area schedule, with skirting area to be deducted from wall area:

Room Perimeter Length schedule, for skirting:

Room elements do not have a Type parameter.

A calculated field has been created for Type, which takes the names of the finishes as its values.

Conclude

Having set up the Revit schedules and the corresponding Excel worksheets once, they can be re-used as a set of templates for other Revit models.

The number of chains of QS Desc --> secondary calculations --> Codes can be expanded as and when they are encountered and retained in the templates to serve future use to reduce the burden of re-defining every time.

Get into modelling which is easy and powerful as soon as possible.

Understand it, identify the limitations and suggest solutions to make it really productive.

Macro

A Macro to Export all Revit Schedules to a Single Excel File in One Go is given below.

Original Revit View Schedule

Exported to Excel Worksheet

with columns "Type", "QS Tag" and "QS Unit" combined as column D followed by column "QS Qty" as column E:

"All Dim" Worksheet

containing contents of all worksheets beginning with "Dim - ":

 

"QS Desc" Worksheet

containing all unique descriptions of "Type : QS Tag : QS Unit" with total "QS Qty"

 

Codes

Revit Macro KCTCL (20150524a).txt

/* Export All Revit Schedules to One Excel file
* Written by: K C Tang
* Using: SharpDevelop.
*
* Date last revised: 24/5/2015
* Revision notes: Handle errors when there are no "Dim - " schedules to
*    fill the "All Dim" worksheet to serve as the source of
*    the pivot table on the "QS Desc" worksheet.
*    Handle errors when the folder is read only,
*    such as a folder of the sample projects provided by Revit.
* Revision notes on 6/5/2015:
*    Speed drastically increased (reduced to 1/4) by using Excel functions
*    as much as possible instead of manipulating Excel file cell by cell.
*    Pivot table used for "QS Desc" worksheet.
*    Sheet header added.
*    Frozen panes set.
*    Page setup set.
* Revision notes on 19/1/2015:
*    Bug fixing and general improvements.
* Date first released for use : 31/12/2014
*    Notes: Export all Revit view schedules to one Excel file.
*    Schedules with names beginning with "Dim - " will have:
*    - columns "Type", "QS Tag" and "QS Unit" combined into one column;
*    - column "QS Qty" moved to next to the combined column;
*    - an "All Dim" worksheet created to contain all these schedules; and
*    - a "QS Desc" worksheet created to contain unique list of "Type : QS Tag : QS Unit".
*
*/
// using libraries
using System;
using System.Collections;
using System.Collections.Generic;
using System.Linq;
using Autodesk.Revit.DB;
using Autodesk.Revit.DB.Architecture;
using Autodesk.Revit.UI;
using Autodesk.Revit.UI.Selection;
using Excel = Microsoft.Office.Interop.Excel;
/* Microsoft.Office.Interop.Excel must be added separately
* by selecting SharpDevelop's menu: Project > Add References,
* and searching for it, then selecting it.
*/
namespace KCTCL
{
  [Autodesk.Revit.Attributes.Transaction(Autodesk.Revit.Attributes.TransactionMode.Manual)]
  [Autodesk.Revit.DB.Macros.AddInId("E77FD3DE-05E8-4FD3-B85A-116F5B6F2EEF")]
  public partial class ThisApplication
  {
    private void Module_Startup(object sender, EventArgs e)
    {
    }
    private void Module_Shutdown(object sender, EventArgs e)
    {
    }
    #region Revit Macros generated code
    private void InternalStartup()
    {
      this.Startup += new System.EventHandler(Module_Startup);
      this.Shutdown += new System.EventHandler(Module_Shutdown);
    }
    #endregion
    public void ExportAllSchedulesToOneExcel()
    {
      // all data names must be intialized first and have their types declared with type names before them
      // define row number to insert column header
      const int col_header_row = 3; // const int = integer constant type
      // keep the starting time
      DateTime time_start = DateTime.Now; // Datetime = datetime type
      // select active Revit document
      Document doc = this.ActiveUIDocument.Document; // Document = document type
      // get filename from doc.Title
      string filename_no_ext = doc.Title; // string = string type
      // add ".rvt" temporarily to doc.Title not ending with ".rvt"
      // because file explorer may have been set to hide the extension
      if (!filename_no_ext.EndsWith(".rvt")) // ! = not
      {
        filename_no_ext = filename_no_ext + ".rvt"; // + = join text together
      }
      // get active folder name by removing the full file name
      // from the full pathname which contains the full file name
      string folder_name = doc.PathName.Replace(filename_no_ext, ""); // replace filename with nothing
      // change file extension to the current datetime string
      // to avoid overwriting existing files
      filename_no_ext = filename_no_ext.Replace(".rvt",
        DateTime.Now.ToString("-yyyyMMdd-HHmmss")); // line considered complete only if ending with ";"
      // initilize Excel variables
      Excel.Application xlApp;
      Excel.Workbook xlWorkBook;
      Excel.Worksheet xlWorkSheet;
      Excel.Worksheet xlWorkSheetAllDim;
      Excel.Range xlRange;
      Excel.Range xlRange2;
      Excel.QueryTable xlQuery;
      xlApp = new Excel.Application();
      // check whether Excel is installed
      if (xlApp == null)
      {
        TaskDialog.Show("ExportAllSchedulesToOneExcel", "Excel is not installed!!");
        return;
      }
      // define an object to represent default value
      object default_value = System.Reflection.Missing.Value; // object = object type
      // create new workbook, which by default contains at least 1 worksheet
      xlWorkBook = xlApp.Workbooks.Add(default_value);
      // initialize 2 worksheet variables, all referring to Sheet1 for the time being
      xlWorkSheetAllDim = (Excel.Worksheet)xlWorkBook.Worksheets.get_Item(1);
      xlWorkSheet = (Excel.Worksheet)xlWorkBook.Worksheets.get_Item(1);
      // rename Sheet1 to contain contents of all future worksheets
      // with names starting with "Dim - "
      xlWorkSheetAllDim.Name = "All Dim";
      // maximize workbook window
      xlApp.ActiveWindow.WindowState = Excel.XlWindowState.xlMaximized;
      // show menu bars
      xlApp.Visible = true;
      // read viewschedules in Revit active document
      ViewScheduleExportOptions opt = new ViewScheduleExportOptions();
      FilteredElementCollector collector = new FilteredElementCollector(doc).OfClass(typeof(ViewSchedule));
      if (collector.ToElementIds().Count == 0) // == means compare for equality
      {
        TaskDialog.Show("ExportAllSchedulesToOneExcel", "No schedule available!!");
        // close workbook without saving
        xlWorkBook.Close(false, default_value, default_value);
        xlApp.Quit();
        // release objects
        releaseObject(xlWorkSheet);
        releaseObject(xlWorkSheetAllDim);
        releaseObject(xlWorkBook);
        releaseObject(xlApp);
        return;
      }
      // sort elements in collector in ascending order
      IOrderedEnumerable< ViewSchedule > sorted_collector =
        from ViewSchedule view_schedule in collector orderby view_schedule.Name ascending select view_schedule;
      // process schedule in ascending order
      int all_dim_new_row = 0;
      foreach (ViewSchedule view_schedule in sorted_collector)
      {
        // check if schedule name too long
        if (view_schedule.Name.Length > 31 )
        {
          TaskDialog.Show("ExportAllSchedulesToOneExcel",
            view_schedule.Name + "\n" + "Schedule name should not be more than 31 characters!!");
          // release objects
          releaseObject(xlWorkSheet);
          releaseObject(xlWorkSheetAllDim);
          releaseObject(xlWorkBook);
          releaseObject(xlApp);
          return;
        }
      }
      foreach (ViewSchedule view_schedule in sorted_collector)
      {
        if (view_schedule.Name.StartsWith("<"))
        {
           // skip schedule with name beginning with "<", such as "<Revision Schedule>"
        } else
        {
          // reduce filename length longer than 31
          if (31 < view_schedule.Name.Length )
          {
            view_schedule.Name = view_schedule.Name.Substring(0, 14) + " name length > 31";
          }
          // replace special character with "_"
          view_schedule.Name = view_schedule.Name
            .Replace( ':', '_' )
            .Replace( '*', '_' )
            .Replace( '?', '_' )
            .Replace( '/', '_' )
            .Replace( '\\', '_' )
            .Replace( '[', '_' )
            .Replace( ']', '_' );
          // export schedule to txt file
          try {
            view_schedule.Export(folder_name, filename_no_ext + ".txt", opt);   
          } catch (Exception) {
            TaskDialog.Show("Exporting view schedules",
                            "Errors occurred -\n" +
                            "possibly the folder is read only\n" +
                            "e.g. in the case of sample projects provided by Revit,\n" +
                            "save the project to another folder first.\n\n" +
                            "Close to exit program.");
            // release objects
            releaseObject(xlWorkSheet);
            releaseObject(xlWorkSheetAllDim);
            releaseObject(xlWorkBook);
            releaseObject(xlApp);
            return;
          }
          // add a worksheet
          xlWorkSheet = (Excel.Worksheet)xlWorkBook.Worksheets.Add(default_value);
          // move it to become the last worksheet
          xlWorkSheet.Move(default_value, xlWorkBook.Worksheets[xlWorkBook.Worksheets.Count]);
          // name worksheet as schedule name
          xlWorkSheet.Name = view_schedule.Name;
          // import txt file into worksheet starting at cell at column A, one row above col_header_row
          xlQuery = xlWorkSheet.QueryTables.Add(
            "TEXT;" + folder_name + filename_no_ext + ".txt",
            xlWorkSheet.get_Range("A" + (col_header_row - 1)));
          xlQuery.RefreshStyle = Excel.XlCellInsertionMode.xlInsertEntireRows;
          xlQuery.Refresh(false); // false means refresh but not return until refresh is finished
          xlQuery.Delete(); // delete the query
          // input into All Dim worksheet for schedules with names starting with "Dim - "
          if (view_schedule.Name.StartsWith("Dim - "))
          {
            // insert blank new column A
            xlWorkSheet.get_Range("A1").EntireColumn.Insert();
            // find Type, QS Tag and QS Unit columns
            int col_Type = 0;
            int col_QS_Tag = 0;
            int col_QS_Unit = 0;
            int col_QS_Qty = 0;
            col_Type = xlColumnFindExact(xlWorkSheet, "Type", col_header_row);
            col_QS_Tag = xlColumnFindExact(xlWorkSheet, "QS Tag", col_header_row);
            col_QS_Unit = xlColumnFindExact(xlWorkSheet, "QS Unit", col_header_row);
            // define cell formula of column A starting from col_header_row
            xlRange = xlWorkSheet.Range["A" + col_header_row]; // source range to copy from
            xlRange2 = xlWorkSheet.Range["A" + col_header_row, "A" + xlRowLast(xlWorkSheet)]; // target range to copy to
            string range_formula = "=";
            string colon = "&\" : \"&"; // which stands for quote &" : "& unquote
            if (col_Type != 0)
            {
              range_formula += xlColumnAddress(col_Type) + col_header_row;
               }
               if (col_QS_Tag != 0)
               {
              range_formula += colon + xlColumnAddress(col_QS_Tag) + col_header_row;
            }
               if (col_QS_Unit != 0)
            {
              range_formula += colon + xlColumnAddress(col_QS_Unit) + col_header_row;
            }
            if (range_formula != "=")
            {
              xlRange.Formula = range_formula;
              xlRange.AutoFill(xlRange2, Excel.XlAutoFillType.xlFillCopy);
            }
            // remove cell formula and leave value for the combined column A
            xlRange2.Value2 = xlRange2.Value2;
            // remove Type, QS Tag and QS Unit columns
            col_Type = xlColumnFindExact(xlWorkSheet, "Type", col_header_row);
            if (col_Type != 0)
            {
              xlRange = (Excel.Range)xlWorkSheet.Cells[1, col_Type];
              xlRange.EntireColumn.Delete(default_value);
            }
            col_QS_Tag = xlColumnFindExact(xlWorkSheet, "QS Tag", col_header_row);
            if (col_QS_Tag != 0)
            {
              xlRange = (Excel.Range)xlWorkSheet.Cells[1, col_QS_Tag];
              xlRange.EntireColumn.Delete(default_value);
            }
            col_QS_Unit = xlColumnFindExact(xlWorkSheet, "QS Unit", col_header_row);
            if (col_QS_Unit != 0)
            {
              xlRange = (Excel.Range)xlWorkSheet.Cells[1, col_QS_Unit];
              xlRange.EntireColumn.Delete(default_value);
            }
            // move QS Qty column to column D, but if it is before column D,
            // move to column E to compensate the shifting of columns after cut
            col_QS_Qty = xlColumnFindExact(xlWorkSheet, "QS Qty", col_header_row);
            if (col_QS_Qty < 4)
            {
              xlColumnMove(xlWorkSheet, col_QS_Qty, 5);
            } else
            {
              xlColumnMove(xlWorkSheet, col_QS_Qty, 4);
            }
            // move combined column A to column C
            xlColumnMove(xlWorkSheet, 1, 4);
            // bold down to col_header_row
            xlRange = xlWorkSheet.get_Range("A1", "A" + col_header_row);
            xlRange.EntireRow.Font.Bold = true;
            // copy whole worksheet to All Dim to the next new row
            all_dim_new_row += 1;
            xlWorkSheet.UsedRange.Copy(xlWorkSheetAllDim.get_Range("A"+all_dim_new_row));
            all_dim_new_row = xlRowLast(xlWorkSheetAllDim);
          } else
          {
            // bold down to col_header_row
            xlWorkSheet.get_Range("A1", "A" + col_header_row).EntireRow.Font.Bold = true;
          }
          // delete txt file
          System.IO.File.Delete(folder_name + filename_no_ext + ".txt");
        }
      }
      // move it to become the first worksheet
      xlWorkSheetAllDim.Move(xlWorkBook.Worksheets[1]);
      // add and name a worksheet to contain unique QS Desc
      xlWorkSheet = (Excel.Worksheet)xlWorkBook.Worksheets.Add(default_value);
      xlWorkSheet.Name = "QS Desc";
      // generate pivot table if "All Dim" has data rows
      if (xlRowLast(xlWorkSheetAllDim) > col_header_row)
      {
        // define pivot table data source
        xlRange = xlWorkSheetAllDim.get_Range("C" + col_header_row,"D" + xlRowLast(xlWorkSheetAllDim));
        Excel.PivotCache xlPivotCache = xlWorkBook.PivotCaches().Add(Excel.XlPivotTableSourceType.xlDatabase, xlRange);
        Excel.PivotTables xlPivotTables = (Excel.PivotTables)xlWorkSheet.PivotTables();
        // define pivot table in the QS Desc worksheet
        Excel.PivotTable xlPivotTable = xlPivotTables.Add(xlPivotCache, xlWorkSheet.Range["A2"], "QS Desc", default_value, default_value);
        xlPivotTable.SmallGrid = false;
        xlPivotTable.ShowTableStyleRowStripes = true;
        xlPivotTable.TableStyle2 = "PivotStyleLight1";
        Excel.PivotField xlPivotField = (Excel.PivotField)xlPivotTable.PivotFields("Type : QS Tag : QS Unit");
        xlPivotField.Orientation = Excel.XlPivotFieldOrientation.xlRowField;
        xlPivotTable.AddDataField(xlPivotTable.PivotFields("QS Qty"), "Sum of QS Qty", Excel.XlConsolidationFunction.xlSum);
      }
      // format QS Qty column
      xlRange = xlWorkSheet.get_Range("B1");
      xlRange.EntireColumn.NumberFormat = "#,##0.00";
      // move it to become the first worksheet
      xlWorkSheet.Move(xlWorkBook.Worksheets[1]);
      // loop through all worksheets
      int loop_A_Mx = xlWorkBook.Worksheets.Count;
      for (int loop_A = loop_A_Mx; loop_A >= 1; loop_A--)
      {
        // get worksheet
        xlWorkSheet = (Excel.Worksheet)xlWorkBook.Worksheets.get_Item(loop_A);
        // freeze top rows
        ((Excel._Worksheet)xlWorkSheet).Activate(); // cast to Excel._Worksheet to avoid the ambiguity that "Activate" is also used as an event
        xlWorkSheet.Application.ActiveWindow.SplitRow = col_header_row;
        xlWorkSheet.Application.ActiveWindow.FreezePanes = true;
        // insert new column A
        xlWorkSheet.get_Range("A1").EntireColumn.Insert();
        // assign column A with row number
        int last_row = xlRowLast(xlWorkSheet);
        xlWorkSheet.Cells[1,1] = 1;
        xlRange = xlWorkSheet.get_Range("A1","A" + xlRowLast(xlWorkSheet));
        xlRange.Font.Bold = false;
        xlRange.DataSeries(default_value,
          Excel.XlDataSeriesType.xlDataSeriesLinear,
          Excel.XlDataSeriesDate.xlDay,
          "1", default_value, default_value);
        // autofit column widths
        xlWorkSheet.Columns.EntireColumn.AutoFit();
        // assign cell B1 with filename
        xlWorkSheet.Cells[1,2] = filename_no_ext.ToUpper();
        xlWorkSheet.get_Range("B1").Font.Bold = true;
        // define page setup
        xlWorkSheet.PageSetup.Orientation = Excel.XlPageOrientation.xlLandscape;
        xlWorkSheet.PageSetup.PrintTitleRows = "$1:$" + col_header_row;
        xlWorkSheet.PageSetup.LeftFooter = filename_no_ext;
        xlWorkSheet.PageSetup.RightFooter = "&P/&N";
        xlWorkSheet.PageSetup.Zoom = false; // needs to be false for FitToPagesWide to work
        xlWorkSheet.PageSetup.FitToPagesTall = false; // need to be false for FitToPagesWide to work
        xlWorkSheet.PageSetup.FitToPagesWide = 1;
      }
      // save workbook
      xlWorkBook.SaveAs(folder_name + filename_no_ext,
        default_value, default_value, default_value,
        default_value, default_value,
        Excel.XlSaveAsAccessMode.xlNoChange,
        default_value, true, default_value,
        default_value, true);
      // release objects
      releaseObject(xlWorkSheet);
      releaseObject(xlWorkSheetAllDim);
      releaseObject(xlWorkBook);
      releaseObject(xlApp);
      TaskDialog.Show("Export All Schedules To One Excel",
        "Finished!" + "\nTime Spent " + DateTime.Now.Subtract(time_start).Seconds + " seconds");
    }
    private string xlCellAddress(int row, int col)
    {
      // change cell address from (100, 1) to (A100) style
      string prompt = (row + "\n\t" + col + "\n\t");  
      if (row < 1 || row > 1048576)
      {
        TaskDialog.Show("Excel Row Number", "Error - must be within 1 - 1048576!!");
        return null;
      }
      // append row number to alphabetical column reference
      return xlColumnAddress(col) + row.ToString();
    }
    private string xlCellValue2(Excel.Worksheet w_s, int row, int col)
    {
      // return value of worksheet cell
      Excel.Range xlRange = (Excel.Range)w_s.Cells[row,col];
      if (xlRange.Value2 != null)
      {
        return xlRange.Value2.ToString();
      } else
      {
        return "";
      }
    }
    private string xlColumnAddress(int col)
    {
      // convert column number to alphabetical reference
      if (col < 1 || col > 16384)
      {
        TaskDialog.Show("Excel Column Number", "Error - must be within 1 - 16384!!");
        return null;
      }
      int remainder = 0;
      string result = "";
      for (int loop_A = 0; loop_A < 3; loop_A++)
      {
        // get remainder after division by 26
        remainder = ((col - 1) % 26) + 1;
        if (remainder != 0)
        {
          // match the remainder to alphabets A to Z where A is char 65
          // precede the alphabet to the previous result
          result = Convert.ToChar(remainder + 64).ToString() + result;
        }
        col = ((col - 1) / 26);
        // do it three times
      }
      return result;
    }
    private int xlColumnFindExact(Excel.Worksheet w_s, string find_what, int which_row)
    {
      object default_value = System.Reflection.Missing.Value;
      Excel.Range xlFound = w_s.get_Range(which_row + ":" + which_row);
      xlFound = xlFound.Find(find_what, default_value,
        Excel.XlFindLookIn.xlValues,
        Excel.XlLookAt.xlWhole,
        Excel.XlSearchOrder.xlByRows,
        Excel.XlSearchDirection.xlNext,
        false, default_value, default_value);
      if (xlFound != null)
      {
        return xlFound.Column;
      } else
      {
        return 0;
      }
    }
    private void xlColumnMove(Excel.Worksheet w_s, int col_from, int col_to)
    {
      if ((col_from != 0) & (col_to != 0) & (col_from != col_to))
      {
        Excel.Range from_range = (Excel.Range)w_s.Cells[1,col_from];
        Excel.Range to_range = (Excel.Range)w_s.Cells[1,col_to];
        to_range.EntireColumn.Insert(Excel.XlInsertShiftDirection.xlShiftToRight, from_range.EntireColumn.Cut());
      }
    }
    private int xlRowLast(Excel.Worksheet w_s)
    {
      // return last used row number of worksheet
      return w_s.Cells.SpecialCells(Excel.XlCellType.xlCellTypeLastCell,Type.Missing).Row;
    }
    private void releaseObject(object obj)
    {
      try
      {
        System.Runtime.InteropServices.Marshal.ReleaseComObject(obj);
        obj = null;
      }
      catch (Exception ex)
      {
        obj = null;
        TaskDialog.Show("Excel file created","Exception Occurred while releasing object " + ex.ToString());
      }
      finally
      {
        GC.Collect();
      }
    }
  }
}

Installation Procedures

Change Project Units

As described above.

Open Macro Manager

Select Application Tab

Create C# Module called "KCTCL" (all in capital letters)

 

Default codes provided

 

Copy and paste the Codes above

Add Reference

 

Select Microsoft.Office.Interop.Excel

Build Solution

Run

 

End of Page

Read Standards

Read Standards KCTang

Read papers

Read papers KCTang

Paper presented at the BIM Seminar Kuala Lumpur 2015 – 5D BIM for the Construction Industry organized by RISM on 22/1/2015

Paper presented at the International Workshop for QS BIM Education & Training Content Development organized by RISM on 20/2/2014

Evaluate apps

Evaluate apps KCTang

Go to End

Scheduling Apps

Schedule Importer / Exporter by NPO Sodis (Free) - evaluated on 16/1/2014

  • Can only export schedules already created in Revit to Excel.
  • Cannot define its own schedule.
  • Can select schedules in view.
  • Can only select and export one schedule at a time.
  • Cannot export more than one schedule to one Excel file.
  • Cannot partially select and re-order the elements already in the schedule.
  • An extra column added for ElementGUID.

Schedule Sync by BIMCODER (Free) - evaluated on 16/1/2014

  • Can only export schedules already created in Revit to Excel.
  • Cannot define its own schedule.
  • Can select schedules not in view.
  • Can only select and export one schedule at a time.
  • Cannot export more than one schedule to one Excel file.
  • Can partially select and re-order the elements already in the schedule.

End of Page

Common Errors in Use of English

Common Errors in Use of English KCTang

Go to End

Note

9 Jan 2022: "compensation" and "reimbursement" added to common errors.

12 Nov 2020: "claim" and "rock-socket" added to common errors. "request" in common errors corrected (reversed). "hardware", "ironmongery", "knowledge", and "software" added to uncountable nouns.

25 Dec 2014: Converted from wiki.

Common Errors

Key word

Correct

Incorrect

about

about to leave

about to leaving

above-mentioned

above-mentioned clause

clause mentioned above

clause above-mentioned

absent

absent from the meeting

absent at the meeting absent in the meeting

accept

accept something 

agree to do something

accept to do something

accord

of his own accord

on his own accord

accuse

accuse somebody of something

accuse somebody for something

accustom

accustom myself to something

am accustomed myself to something

accustomed

accustomed to something

accustomed with something

accustomed

accustomed to doing

accustomed to do

address

at [address]

in [address]

advise

advise on something

advise somebody on something

advise whether advise that the cost is

advise something

afford

afford to pay

afford paying

apply

apply paint

apply technique 應用

 

apply

apply for payment 申請

apply of payment

apply payment

appendix

appendix to

appendix of

appendix

in the Appendix

in Appendix

appendix

in Appendix A

in the Appendix A

assessment

assessment of

assessment on

attached

attached, as adjective 附貼的(形容詞)

 

attached

the attached, as noun 附貼的東西(名詞)

 

attached

in the attached Appendix A

in attached Appendix A

below

as below

as belows

bill

in Bill No. 1

in the Bill No. 1

build

unit rate build-up, as noun

unit rate built-up

built

is built up as the attached

is build up as the attached

cast

cast in-situ

casted in-situ

comment

comments, usually in plural

 

complete

complete with, as adjective

completed with

compensation

compensation for loss

compensation of loss

comprising

comprising x and y

comprising of x and y

condition

the condition of the Contract

the condition of Contract

Conditions

the Conditions of Contract

the Condition of Contract

claim (as verb)

claim time and costs

(but make or submit a claim for time and costs)

claim for time and costs

Clause

in Clause 10

in the Clause 10

Clause

Conditions of Contract Clause 10

the Conditions of Contract Clause 10

Clause

Clause 10 of the Conditions of Contract

the Clause 10 of the Conditions of Contract

concur

concur with your opinion

concur your opinion

confirm

confirm the validity

confirm on the validity

consider

consider using

consider to use

consisted

subject consisted of

subject was consisted of

correspondence

correspondence

correspondences

cost

cost of

cost for

damage

physical damage

physical damages

damages

liquidated damages

liquidated damage

demand, as verb

demand money

demand for money

demand, as noun

the demand for money

 

desire, as verb

desire money

desire for money

desire, as noun

the desire for money

 

description

description of someone or something

description on someone or something

despite

despite his being late

despite he was late despite [followed by a clause]

despite

despite something in spite of something

despite of something

detail

describe in detail

describe in details

details

give further details

give further detail

deter

deter somebody from using

deter somebody to use

dining

dining

dinning

Documents

the Contract Documents

the Contract Document

Documents

the Tender Documents

the Tender Document

duly

duly

duely

enter

enter the Site

enter into the Site

enter

enter into a contract

enter a contract

experience

experience of something

 

experienced

experienced in something

 

file

file of tender report, file of [document] for [purpose]

file for tender report

floor

on the 2/F

at the 2/F

following

the following

the followings

follows

as follows

as follow

implication

implication of A on B

implication to

inclement

inclement weather

increment weather

including

including making good

including make good

including

including taking down and clearing away

including take down and clear away

information

information on or about

 

interest

interested audience

listening to interesting stories

interesting audience listening to interested story

interest

are interested to tender

are interesting to tender

ironmongery

ironmongery

ironmongeries

knowledge

knowledge of something

 

let

let me go

let me to go

let

let us sing

let me to sing

lighting

lighting fittings

light fittings

look forward

looking forward to seeing

looking forward to see

Lot

on Lot …

in / at Lot …

mark

marked up copies

mark-up copies

over

over 100 m3

above 100 m3

panel

panel, as wood panel

pannel

portable

portable computer 可移動

potable computer

potable

potable water for drinking 可飲用

portable water for drinking

precast

precast concrete

precasted concrete

price

price for [constructing one house]

price of [constructing one house]

price

price of [one house]

 

proceed

proceed with the work

proceed the work

provide

provide something to somebody

 

provide

provide somebody with something

 

possibility

possibility of doing

possibility to do

quantity

quantity of concrete

quantity for concrete

school

absent from school

absent from the school

rate

unit rate for concrete

unit rate of

rate

rate of liquidated damages

rate for liquidated damages

reason

reason for doing something

reason of doing something

regard

in regard to

in regards to

reimbursement

reimbursement for costs

reimbursement of costs

reply

reply to the question

reply the question

request (as verb)

request quotation

request extension of time

(but make a request for quotation, or submit a request for extension of time)

request for quotation

request for extension of time

respond (verb)

respond to the question

respond the question

response (noun)

in response to the question

in respond to the question

rivet

riveted, riveting

rivetted, rivetting

rock-socket

rock-socketed pile

rock-socketted pile

take

take down and clear away

take down and clearing away

taking

taking down and clearing away

taking down and clear away

time

all the time

all the times

work

work, an item of work 工作項目

 

Works

the Works, the whole of the Works 整個工程

the Work

British and American English

British

American

aluminium

aluminum

autumn

fall

cheque

check

dialled

dialed

homogeneous

homogenous

practise, as verb

practice, as verb

practice, as noun

practice, as noun

programme

program

consult his adviser

consult with his adviser

construction programme

construction schedule

Brand Names

They should be capitalized:

  • Corian
  • Durasteel
  • Promat

Screed?

  • Tiling and screed (usually without "ing") - as in "ceramic tiling" and "cement and sand screed"
  • Plaster and paint - as in "internal plaster" and "emulsion paint"
  • Rendering and paint - as in "cement and sand rendering" and "cement paint"
  • Don't say "screed and paint"
  • Paving (to floor) or rendering (to floor, wall or ceiling) if not to receive tiling

Article "a" or "an"?

  • a university ("u" pronounced as "you")
  • a uniform ("u" pronounced as "you")
  • an honest ("h" not pronounced)
  • an hour ("h" not pronounced)
  • an MPF scheme ("M" pronounced as "am")
  • an MSc degree ("M" pronounced as "am")

Time

  • in the morning / afternoon / evening / week / month / year
  • on the morning / afternoon / evening of 1st May
  • in a day, in one day, in two days
  • on the same day
  • on the date to be instructed
  • within a day or two, within a week or so
  • for a long time
  • at this moment
  • at present
  • in the past
  • in future
  • on time, punctual, right on time
  • in time, early enough, just in time

Uncountable nouns

used as singulars, i.e. not preceded by "a" or "an"; followed by verb "is" not "are"; can use forms like "some", "a piece of", "several pieces of"

  • advice
  • cladding
  • compensation
  • damage, when referring to breakage, loss and harm and not compensation
  • duration
  • equipment
  • furniture
  • hardware
  • information (about)
  • ironmongery
  • knowledge (of)
  • plant, when referring to construction plant and not vegetation or factories
  • scaffolding ("scaffold" is countable)
  • software
  • work

Words with silent b

  • aplomb 沉著
  • bdellium 沒藥樹脂
  • bomb 炸彈
  • catacomb 地下墓穴
  • climb 爬
  • crumb 麵包屑
  • comb 梳子
  • debt 債務
  • doubt 疑問
  • dumb 啞
  • lamb 羊肉
  • limb 肢
  • numb 麻木
  • plumb 垂直, plumber 管道工, plumbing 水管工程
  • subtle 微妙
  • succumb 屈服於
  • thumb 拇指
  • tomb 墓
  • womb 子宮

Words with silent h

  • aghast 駭然
  • chameleon 變色龍, chaotic 亂, chorus 合唱團, chrome 鍍鉻
  • exhaust 排氣
  • heir 繼承人, honest 誠實, hour 小時, honour 榮譽
  • ghastly 可怕的, ghoul 食屍鬼, ghost 幽靈, gherkin 小黃瓜, ghetto 貧民窟
  • khaki 卡其色
  • piranha 食人魚
  • pharaoh (after "o") 法老
  • rhinoceros 犀牛, rhizome 根莖, rhodium 銠, rhododendron 杜鵑花, rhubarb 大黃
  • vehement 激烈, vehicle 汽車(but not vehicular)
  • whale 鯨, what 什麼, why 為什麼

Words with silent gh

  • daughter 女兒
  • dough 麵團
  • freight 貨運
  • night 晚上
  • ought 應
  • right 權
  • thought 思想
  • through 通過
  • weight 重量

End of Page

Assessment of Professional Competence 專業評核試

Assessment of Professional Competence 專業評核試 KCTang

Competency Standards expected of APC Candidates

Competency Standards expected of APC Candidates KCTang

Go to End

Note

Source: The Hong Kong Institute of Surveyors' Quantity Surveying Division's Rules and Guide to the Assessment of Professional Competence dated May 2012.

1. Core Competencies 核心技能

1.1 Measurement and billing 计算工程量及编清单

  1. Able to apply knowledge in construction materials and sciences, construction technologies and building services
  2. Able to identify, ask for, register, interpret, and raise queries to clarify drawings, specifications, variation instructions, works orders and other information necessary for measurement
  3. Able to apply the industry standard methods of measurement or project specific methods of measurement
  4. Able to measure quantities from drawings, and draft and edit item descriptions to reflect specification requirements for the purposes of preparation of bills or schedule of quantities, remeasurement of provisional quantities, variations, works orders, claims or final accounts
  5. Able to measure approximate quantities for bulk-checking of quantities and understand quantity factors such as concrete steel ratios, quantities per floor areas, etc.
  6. Able to prepare pro-forma schedules of rates (without quantities)
  7. Able to interpret preliminaries and preambles and add special provisions to suit the specific circumstances
  8. Able to undertake quantity and other checks for any input document discrepancies and/or omissions and final output document completeness, spelling, omissions, etc.
  9. Able to organize and supervise the measurement, billing, editing, checking, printing and dispatch processes
  10. Able to use bill production, CAD and BIM software to assist

1.2 Pre-contract cost data handling 合同前成本数据处理

  1. Able to retrieve past cost data of similar work and apply in new work
  2. Able to carry out arithmetic and consistency checking on the cost data on returned tenders or vendors’ quotations
  3. Able to compile cost data or pricing comparison from among returned tenders or vendors’ quotations
  4. Able to enquire, search and analyse cost data including building cost and tender price indices
  5. Able to apply discounts, mark-ups, margins and other adjustment factors
  6. Able to appreciate the approximate order of costs for major construction works

1.3 Pricing 计价

  1. Able to appreciate project, industrial and general economic factors affecting the unit costs and quantities of the constituent rates
  2. Able to make adjustments to past cost data or pre-fixed rates for applications in different circumstances
  3. Able to build up prime cost rates for labour, materials and plant, and all-in unit rates for works for the purposes of pricing preliminary cost estimates, bills or schedules of quantities, variations, work orders, claims and final accounts.
  4. Able to build up and analyse preliminaries items, overheads and profits
  5. Able to understand, analyse and apply quantity factors such as concrete steel ratios, quantities per floor areas, etc.
  6. Able to understand contract conditions, specification standards, preliminaries and preambles for pricing the relevant risks

1.4 Pre-contract cost planning, estimating and control 合同前成本计划、估算及控制

  1. Able to understand the build-up of properties development budget, and methods of valuation of construction costs
  2. Able to use cost data including adjustments to various factors such as locations, specification, time and market forces
  3. Able to demonstrate knowledge of various factors affecting economics of design and construction
  4. Able to undertake financial feasibility and comparative design studies
  5. Able to prepare cost plans, update cost plans and carry out cost checks and control
  6. Able to prepare cost estimates by various estimating techniques
  7. Able to evaluate alternative design solutions and life cycle costs
  8. Able to prepare and interpret cash flow projections and profit/loss forecasts
  9. Able to prepare cost reconciliation statements with previous cost estimates and with costs of similar projects
  10. Able to prepare cost analyses
  11. Able to prepare and submit cost data to in-house and/or external data collection agencies
  12. Able to use cost estimating, CAD and BIM software to assist

1.5 Procurement 采购

  1. Able to understand the general principles of laws relevant to the construction industry
  2. Able to apply knowledge in various forms of construction and installation contracts including main contracts, nominated and domestic subcontracts, supply contracts, and maintenance term contracts, etc.
  3. Able to assess the rationale for using different procurement methods to suit the specific project requirements and prevailing circumstances
  4. Able to apply the above knowledge in formulating and implementing the appropriate tendering procedures and contractual arrangements
  5. Able to apply the principles, practices and procedures of various forms of tendering process
  6. Able to prepare the appropriate tender documentation including main contracts, nominated and domestic subcontracts, supply contracts and maintenance term contracts, etc. (excluding “Measurement and billing” under competency 1)
  7. Able to co-ordinate the tendering process including pre-qualification of tenderers, invitation to tenders, dispatch and receipt of tender documents, tender addenda, tender clarification letters, tender questionnaires, tender opening meeting, etc.
  8. Able to evaluate the received tenders including the submission of the required tender information, checking of any arithmetic errors, identification of any apparently anomalous rates and pricing strategies, comparison of quantities measured by tenderers, comparison of tender rates and prices, evaluation and clarification of any qualifications submitted, and negotiation with tenderers
  9. Able to draft letters of acceptance or intent, and compile the formal contract documents from tender documents and other tender submissions
  10. Able to prepare and comment on tendering and preliminary construction programmes, and use scheduling software to assist

1.6 Contractor’s tendering and cost control 承包方投标及成本控制

  1. Able to examine tender documents received and determine the information required for estimate, workload, timetable and resource needs
  2. Able to appreciate the project including the method statement, tender programme and site visit
  3. Able to collate the data obtained from the procurement process to build up the costs
  4. Able to prepare estimator’s report and tender adjudication
  5. Able to respond to pre-qualification and invitation to tender, raise tender queries, attend tender interviews and answer tender questionnaires
  6. Able to scrutinise letters of acceptance or intent, and drafts of contract documents
  7. Able to apply principles of business management to achieve corporate objectives of contracting organizations
  8. Able to plan or program construction works, determine and purchase construction resources (i.e. labour, plant and material), and evaluate productivity methods
  9. Able to undertake financial management of contracting organizations including regular monitoring and reporting on cash flow and analysis of variances between budgeted and actual costs during construction

1.7 Contract administration 合同管理

  1. Able to survey, measure and record site information
  2. Able to monitor proposed construction methods/ sequences and report on actual requirements including preparing cost benefit reports on alternative construction methods
  3. Able to prepare valuations for interim payments
  4. Able to carry out post-contract cost control including preparation of final costs and reporting on financial effects
  5. Able to carry out day-to-day contract administration of a project including attending site meetings and drafting correspondence on contractual issues
  6. Able to prepare or interpret cost/value and other reconciliation statements for management purposes
  7. Able to report on, evaluate and negotiate contractual, financial and extra-contractual issues
  8. Able to prepare and agree final accounts and contra charges

2. Optional Competencies 选择技能

2.1 Dispute resolution 争议的解决

  1. Able to understand various techniques in dispute resolution including negotiation, mediation, conciliation, adjudication, arbitration, independent expert determination and litigation
  2. Able to apply knowledge of the practices and procedures of dispute resolution
  3. Able to apply knowledge of the relevant law governing dispute resolution procedures, including evidence of fact and expert evidence

2.2 Project management 项目管理

  1. Able to identify the client’s objectives and develop the client’s brief
  2. Able to carry out feasibility studies, including risk analysis and value analyses
  3. Able to establish the budget and project programme
  4. Able to advise on the selection of project team
  5. Able to establish the lines of communication and manage the integration and flow of design information
  6. Able to establish the time, cost and quality control systems, and monitor, control and report from inception to project completion

2.3 Facilities management 设施管理

  1. Able to apply principles of business management to achieve the client’s corporate objectives
  2. Able to apply principles of facilities management to provide solutions to issues affecting both owners and occupiers of real estate
  3. Able to keep up-to-date maintenance information to determine and implement operational maintenance
  4. Able to maintain a proper procurement system, including invitations to tender, tender enquiries, evaluation of offers received, receipt of non-compliant or alternative offers
  5. Able to manage project costs, time and quality from inception to completion, including value management, risk analysis and financial evaluation

2.4. Risk management 风险管理

  1. Able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the nature of risks in construction project
  2. Able to apply various methods and techniques used to carry out risk assessment taking into account all relevant factors
  3. Able to implement risk management system in relation to specific projects

2.5 Value management 价值管理

  1. Able to participate and contribute in value management workshops
  2. Able to organize and facilitate value management workshop, including pre-meeting and report writing
  3. Able to understand and apply value methodology

2.6 Advanced information technology 先进的资讯科技

  1. Able to write computer programmes for use on other competencies
  2. Able to set up and maintain hardware or software for servers or computer networks for use by more than one person
  3. Able to develop information technology for use on other competencies

2.7 Bankruptcy, liquidation, determination and termination 破产、清盘、解雇、终止

  1. Able to understand the precautions necessary when bankruptcy, liquidation, determination or termination is imminent
  2. Able to advise on the procedures and rights and liabilities of different parties when such events actually happen
  3. Able to carry out survey, record and value work left incomplete
  4. Able to prepare hypothetical final account and calculate respective final cost liability

2.8 Insurances and warranties 保险及担保

  1. Able to understand different types of insurances, bonds and quality warranties normally used in construction or professional services
  2. Able to procure insurances and bonds
  3. Able to vet insurance policies and bonds, draft or vet quality warranties
  4. Able to survey, record, calculate or adjust loss or damage

2.9 Third party technical or professional audits 第三者技术或专业审核

  1. Able to audit quantity surveying work done by other organizations or different departments within the same organization
  2. Able to conduct audits on quantity surveying practices on behalf of quality assurance agencies
  3. (excluding bulk checking recordable under competency 1 and organizing files subject to audit)

2.10 Green building or construction 环保楼宇或建设

  1. Able to evaluate life cycle costs of alternative environmentally friendly features
  2. Able to conduct energy audits
  3. Able to calculate scores for environmental assessment ratings
  4. Able to set up or maintain environmentally friendly features on site or at office

End of Page

Preparation for APC

Preparation for APC KCTang

Go to End

Note

Source: These notes were first released in June 2001.

Preparation before the examination

  1. Understand common practice
  2. Understand reasons behind common practice
  3. Understand possible deviations from common practice
  4. Understand reasons for deviations from common practice
  5. Distinguish between good practice from bad practice
  6. Understand that own office standard may not necessarily be reasonable practice or common practice
  7. Read more and read wide
  8. Read trade newsletters and journals
  9. Read general newspaper
  10. Watch out issues affecting the industry and the society
  11. Watch out new development in technology affecting the industry and the society
  12. Study real examples done by colleagues and others
  13. Base answers on good practice and be practical

Documents to be brougt into the examination hall

  1. Suites of standard form of contracts and sub-contracts for both Building and Civil Engineering Works
  2. Standard Method of Measurement for both Building and Civil Engineering Works
  3. Sample cost estimates
  4. Sample bills of quantities complete with preliminaries and preambles
  5. Sample specification
  6. Sample financial reports
  7. Sample final accounts
  8. Sample insurance policies, bonds, warranties, guarantees
  9. Usual reference books (citation of names of court cases would be impressive but not necessarily useful)
  10. HKIS Newsletters and Journals

Understanding the questions

  1. Number of points being asked
  2. Any tricky points
  3. Any tricky words
  4. Be careful about the relative time and dates

Time allocation

  1. Answer all the required number of questions and their sub-questions
  2. Observe that length of answers should be proportional to the number of marks
  3. Do not write excessively long for sub-questions with very few marks
  4. Reserve time to proof read final answers

Writing down brief points

  1. Address each number of points being asked with a few points (i.e. more than one) of answers
  2. Try to imagine similar situation, use common sense to judge, when faced with something that you do not know or do not have experience

Presentation

  1. Present the answers in the form of a letter, a fax, an email or a report as requested by the questions
  2. Give date, addressee, project title, subject matter, greetings, signature, c.c., cover page, contents page, as appropriate
  3. Present answers as written drafts ready for typing
  4. Do not be afraid to use cut and paste, stapling, crossing out, etc. in order to catch up time
  5. Do not use correction ink

Calculations

  1. Do not prepare a detailed cost estimate when a cost per m2 estimate is suffice
  2. Give priority to correct approach, format, formula, consistency in values, relative differentials, rather than spending too much time on improving the accuracy of individually insignificant figures
  3. Check arithmetic
  4. Check transferring
  5. Feel that the totals and proportions are making sense

Expanding points

  1. Set out the points logically, systematically
  2. Be as concise and precise as possible
  3. Be straight-forward and relevant
  4. Be fair and reasonable
  5. Watch out conflicting answers
  6. Do not write things that you do not really understand
  7. Say less rather than say wrongly
  8. Do not just list out all the points you remember from the textbooks
  9. Do not include information just to show your knowledge on contracts
  10. Do not just cite the name of court cases and give conclusion to the issue discussed
  11. Do not cause the assessors to check the casebooks
  12. Avoid putting in answers which are not realistic due to practical reasons or nature of project
  13. Do not be afraid to state reservations

Tact and sensitivity

  1. Be diplomatic, avoid upsetting or creating embarrassment to your business partners in your answers
  2. Do not downgrade the usefulness and contribution of other professions and occupations
  3. Do not simply say that this is outside your scope of work, when you are asked to give opinion on matters which are not entirely QS matters. Try to offer considered and helpful opinion but also qualify that the matters should also be reviewed by other more competent people, like architects, engineers, lawyers, insurance consultants, etc.

Assumptions

  1. Make reasonable assumptions
  2. State all necessary assumptions, which are usually expected to be given in formal answers, explicitly in the answers
  3. State that certain assumptions are subject to technical input or comments from other consultants
  4. Do not make assumptions just to make answers easy or avoid answering the real issues (Duck-outs)

Backups

  1. Do not repeat in the backups information that has been adequately covered in the front answers, assessors' task will be easier
  2. Avoid inclusion in backups some points conflicting with the front answers, without valid argument
  3. Use backups to show your thinking process and evaluation between different options before putting forward the selected single option in the front answers

Giving conclusions

  1. Give simple conclusions to various views or points expressed

Giving recommendations

  1. Do not just list out all the pros and cons
  2. Give your recommendation to solve the problems posed to you
  3. Give sensible recommendations
  4. Give practical solutions
  5. Watch out that things theoretically or contractually correct may not be practically good solutions
  6. Give theoretically or contractually correct interpretation but at the same time do not be afraid to suggest practically good or commercially viable solutions

No "right" answer

  1. Note that there may not be absolutely right or wrong answers
  2. Demonstrate that you have considered different possible interpretation or courses of actions, and explain why you would choose a particular one as your recommendation

What not to do

  1. Do not give answers to defeat the purposes and use of the QS profession
  2. Do not give answers to suggest that other professions or occupations are more superior
  3. Do not collude
  4. Do not show the name of yourself or your company in the paper

Proof reading

  1. Watch out conflicting views
  2. Watch out reversed meaning due to inclusion or omission of negative words like "no", "not", etc.
  3. Watch out empty spaces with missing words that you have blocked out by correction ink

English

  1. Be simple
  2. Use correct tense
  3. Observe grammar
  4. Avoid usual errors
  5. Number sub-paragraphs for clarity

What and what not to enclose

  1. Include in the submission all front answers and backups to your answers
  2. State the standard form of contract and the method of measurement used and do not enclose them
  3. Arrange the front answers and backups systematically to show the flow of your thinking process and to assist the assessors to follow the logic of your answers
  4. Any special notes to assessors should be given at the front of your submission
  5. Enclose only relevant information
  6. Do not enclose irrelevant information for the sake of making your submissions look more informative

Attending interview

  1. Be calm
  2. Smile
  3. Be confident
  4. Give clear expression
  5. Give reasonable length of response
  6. Share past experience
  7. Observe professional conduct
  8. Be fair and reasonable
  9. Show continuing professional development
  10. Do not change profession

End of Page

Shortfalls when Attending Professional Interviews 專業評核面試時的缺失

Shortfalls when Attending Professional Interviews 專業評核面試時的缺失 KCTang

Go to End

  1. Not prepared to answer technical questions
  2. Not bringing along own CV
  3. Only superficial knowledge of how things are usually done without knowing why
  4. Insufficient exposure to the full spectrum of quantity surveying services
  5. Unable to describe the various methods of carrying out pre-construction cost estimates
  6. Unable to describe the meaning of elemental cost estimates and cost analysis
  7. Unable to distinguish clearly the differences between lump sum contracts with and without BQ
  8. Unable to describe different types of contracts
  9. Not familiar with the private form of building contracts
  10. Unable to describe the implications of a letter of intent
  11. Unable to describe names of different types of warranties and guarantees
  12. Only superficial knowledge of the differences between on-demand and on-default bonds
  13. Unable to distinguish between the two categories of insurances under a Contractors' All Risks and Third Party Liability Insurance
  14. Unable to describe the meanings of "cross-liability clause" and "right of subrogation"
  15. Unable to fully describe the valuation rules for variations
  16. Unable to appreciate circumstances warranting a deviation from the contract rates
  17. Unable to distinguish between prime cost sum and prime cost rates
  18. Unable to describe the usual formula for adjusting prime cost rates and the rationale behind
  19. Unable to describe the situation leading to time at large and the implications of time at large
  20. Unable to describe the items admissible in the calculation of the rate of liquidated damages for delayed completion
  21. Unable to describe the procedures leading to the imposition of liquidated damages for delayed completion
  22. Unable to describe the heads of prolongation and disruption claims
  23. Unable to distinguish between head office overheads, project overheads and site overheads
  24. Unable to demonstrate awareness of the latest trends of the profession and the industry
  25. Inspired to change profession

End of Page

Articles

Articles KCTang

Go to End

Archive of Old Articles - copyrights rest with the original sources and credits go to the authors

8 Jan 2019: Updated.

23 May 2017: First created.

1990-05 The future credibility of the Code of Procedure for Single Stage Selective Tendering lies with the QS by Jonathan King (Chartered Quantity Surveyor May 1990)_1.pdf
1990-05 Looking at Professional Liability by Roger Knowles (Chartered Quantity Surveyor May 1990)_1.pdf
1990-05 Giving the Contractor Free Rein (whether the JCT Management Contract is a contractors charter) by Elizabeth Jones (Chartered Quantity Surveyor May 1990).pdf
1990-05 Finding an Alternative (three level bill of quantities) by Leslie Holes (Chartered Quantity Surveyor May 1990)_1.pdf
1990-05 Disquiet over management contracting problems by RICS News (Chartered Surveyor May 1990)_1.pdf
1983-02 The last issue of the Quantity Surveyor (Quantity Surveyor February 1983)_1.pdf
1983-01 A Hong Kong Project by George H Yeadon (Quantity Surveyor January 1983)_1.pdf
1982-12 The future for quantity surveying by A Ashworth (Quantity Surveyor December 1982)_1.pdf
1982-11 The Hong Kong Scene by P A Lancaster (Quantity Surveyor November 1982)_1.pdf
1982-09 Nomination under JCT 80 - A Practical Guide by K G Charmer (Quantity Surveyor September 1982)_1.pdf
1982-09 Correspondence (Quantity Surveyor September 1982)_1.pdf
1982-09 Contents Page (Quantity Surveyor September 1982)_1.pdf
1982-09 Cash Flow and Building Contractors by R F Fellows (Quantity Surveyor September 1982)_1.pdf
1982-08 Why Piling Tenders are Qualified by Henry Miller (Quantity Surveyor August 1982)_1.pdf
1982-05 Problems in Econometric Cost Modelling by P A Bowen (Quantity Surveyor May 1982)_1.pdf
1982-04 The Brown Clause for Loss and Expense by Paul Jensen (Quantity Surveyor April 1982)_1.pdf
1982-04 Reconstruction Costs - A Burning Issue by David Murray (Quantity Surveyor April 1982)_1.pdf
1982-04 Contents Page (Quantity Surveyor April 1982)_1.pdf
1982-03 New JCT Design Build Contract - 1981 by Harold S Crowter (second part) (Quantity Surveyor March 1982)_1.pdf
1982-03 Contents Page (Quantity Surveyor March 1982)_1.pdf
1982-02 The Quantity Surveyor and Project Management by F C Graves (Quantity Surveyor February 1982)_1.pdf
1982-02 New JCT Design Build Contract - 1981 by Harold S Crowter (first part) (Quantity Surveyor February 1982)_1.pdf
1981-11 Cost Reduction on Site - Some New Thoughts on an Old Subject by C H Burrell (The Quantity Surveyor November 1981)_1.pdf
1981-11 Contents Page (The Quantity Surveyor November 1981)_1.pdf
1981-11 A Personal View of DOM 1, the new 1980 Standard Form of Domestic Sub-contract by Harold S Crowter (The Quantity Surveyor November 1981)_1.pdf
1981-10 The Powers of Arbitrators in Continental Europe by Francesco Berlingieri (The Quantity Surveyor October 1981)_1.pdf
1981-10 Replacing the Blue Form by Roger Wakefield (The Quantity Surveyor October 1981)_1.pdf
1981-10 Cartoon by P Sheen (The Quantity Surveyor October 1981)_1.PNG


1981-08 Sub Contracting under the Terms and Conditions of the 1980 JCT Form of Contract by F H McKeag (The Quantity Surveyor August 1981)_1.pdf
1981-07 Working Capital by Williams & Glyns Bank (The Quantity Surveyor July 1981)_1.pdf
1981-07 When Will They Ever Learn (Re JCT 80) by D Phillips (The Quantity Surveyor July 1981)_1.pdf
1981-07 Postgraduate Courses in Construction Management by R F Fellows (The Quantity Surveyor July 1981)_1.pdf
1981-07 Cost Modelling for the Construction Industry by A Ashworth (The Quantity Surveyor July 1981)_1.pdf
1981-07 Correspondence (The Quantity Surveyor July 1981)_1.pdf
1981-07 Cartoon by P Sheen (The Quantity Surveyor July 1981)_1.PNG


1981-06 The Application of the 1980 JCT Form of Contract in Practice by Michael J Raven (The Quantity Surveyor June 1981)_1.pdf
1981-06 Redundancy in the Construction Professions by Frederick C Garrison (The Quantity Surveyor June 1981)_1.pdf
1981-06 Production Orientated Tendering - A Resume and Re-examination for the Early Eighties of the Issues Involved by E R Skoyles (The Quantity Surveyor June 1981)_1.pdf
1981-06 Powers of the Engineer in Settlement of Diputes under the FIDIC-Conditions by Jur P P Poetis (The Quantity Surveyor June 1981)_1.pdf
1981-06 Micros and the Surveyor - Quantity Surveying Applications - I by Brian L Atkin (The Quantity Surveyor June 1981)_1.pdf
1981-06 Correspondence (The Quantity Surveyor June 1981)_1.pdf
1981-06 Contents Page (The Quantity Surveyor June 1981)_1.pdf
1981-05 Sandwich Training - The Student Viewpoint Considered by Alexander Horne (The Quantity Surveyor May 1981)_1.pdf
1981-05 Retrospective Time Extensions in Building Contract by Chow Kok Fong (The Quantity Surveyor May 1981)_1.pdf
1981-05 Export Finance by Williams & Glyns Bank Ltd (The Quantity Surveyor May 1981)_1.pdf
1981-05 Exclusion Clauses (The Quantity Surveyor May 1981)_1.pdf
1981-05 Design and Build - The QS Opportunity (The Quantity Surveyor May 1981)_1.pdf
1981-05 Contents Page (The Quantity Surveyor May 1981)_1.pdf
1981-05 Cartoon by P Sheen (The Quantity Surveyor May 1981)_1.PNG


1981-04 The JCT Standard Form of Contract 1980 Edition - Payments by J P Morris (The Quantity Surveyor April 1981)_1.pdf
1981-04 Programmed Calculation of Nedo Price Adjustment by R W Grimes (The Quantity Surveyor April 1981)_1.pdf
1981-04 Contents Page (The Quantity Surveyor April 1981)_1.pdf
1981-04 A Model for the Design of Project Management Structures (The Quantity Surveyor April 1981)_1.pdf
1981-03 Three into One - Thoughts over the Next Decade by F Graves (The Quantity Surveyor March 1981)_1.pdf
1981-03 Management and the Quantity Surveyor by Barry Fryer (The Quantity Surveyor March 1981)_1.pdf
1981-03 Equitable Conflict and the Standard Forms of Contract by P R Hibberd (The Quantity Surveyor March 1981)_1.pdf
1981-02 Which Index Series by R F Jefferson (The Quantity Surveyor February 1981)_1.pdf
1981-02 Unconventional Alternatives (to Contractual Arrangements) by Tony Frost (The Quantity Surveyor February 1981)_1.pdf
1981-02 The Legal Operation of the Unconditional Performance Guarantee by Chow Kok Fong (The Quantity Surveyor February 1981)_1.pdf
1981-02 I.Q.S. Working Party Investigation into the Auditor's Role in the Examination of Accounts for Construction Works in the Public Sector (The Quantity Surveyor February 1981)_1.pdf
1981-01 The 1980 JCT Design and Build Contract by P R Hibberd (The Quantity Surveyor January 1981)_1.pdf
1981-01 Arbitration Systems in England and Wales and Recent Changes in Arbitration Law by Johan Steyn (January 1981)_1.pdf
1980-12 The New JCT Form - A Farrago of Obscurities by Adrian L Julian (The Quantity Surveyor December 1980)_2.pdf
1980-12 Cost Planning in the 1980s by C Hardcastle (incomplete) (The Quantity Surveyor December 1980)_2.pdf
1980-10 Trafficked Flat Roofs Water-proofed with Mastic Asphalt by G J Gillan (The Quantity Surveyor October 1980)_2.pdf
1980-10 Interim Certificates and the Common Law Remedy of Set Off by Chow Kok Fong (The Quantity Surveyor October 1980)_2.pdf
1980-10 Contents Page (The Quantity Surveyor October 1980)_2.pdf
1980-10 Cartoon by P Sheen (The Quantity Surveyor October 1980)_2.PNG


1980-10 A Degree of Competition by David Murray (The Quantity Surveyor October 1980)_2.pdf
1980-08 Plant Cost Estimating I by T M Ryan (The Quantity Surveyor August 1980)_2.pdf
1980-08 Ascertaining the Governing Law of a Building Contract by Chow Kok Fong (The Quantity Surveyor August 1980)_2.pdf
1980-08 An Appraisal of the 1980 Edition of the JCT Standard Form of Building Contract by P R Hibberd (The Quantity Surveyor August 1980)_2.pdf
1980-07 The Cost of Abortive Tendering by R G Daniels (The Quantity Surveyor July 1980)_2.pdf
1980-07 Interim Payments under Clause 60 of the ICE Conditions 5th Edition by R P Davison (The Quantity Surveyor July 1980)_2.pdf
1980-06 Professional Liability Today by Vincent Powell-Smith (The Quantity Surveyor June 1980)_2.pdf
1980-06 Contents Page (The Quantity Surveyor June 1980)_2.pdf
1980-06 Cartoon by P Sheen (The Quantity Surveyor June 1980)_2.PNG


1980-06 Assessing the Uncertainty of an Estimate by C N Stacey (The Quantity Surveyor June 1980)_2.pdf
1980-06 An Information Service for Quantity Surveyors by J Franks (The Quantity Surveyor June 1980)_2.pdf
1980-06 A Review of the 1980 JCT Standard Form of Contract by P R Hibberd (The Quantity Surveyor June 1980)_2.pdf
1980-05 Plant Costing - Tax Savings on Hire Purchase and Bank Loans by T M Ryan (The Quantity Surveyor May 1980)_2.pdf
1980-04 Interpretation of Contract Documents - The Quantity Surveyors Contribution by P R Hibberd (The Quantity Surveyor April 1980)_2.pdf
1980-04 Contents Page (The Quantity Surveyor April 1980)_2.pdf
1980-04 And Now for Something Completely Different by Tony Frost (incomplete) (The Quantity Surveyor April 1980)_2.pdf
1980-03 Variations and the Doctrine of Consideration by Chow Kok Fong (The Quantity Surveyor March 1980)_4.pdf
1980-03 Rediscovering Manpower by Mike Winney (The Quantity Surveyor March 1980)_4.pdf
1980-02 Paying the Nominated Sub-Contractor by James P Morris (The Quantity Surveyor February 1980)_4.pdf
1979-07 Correspondence on Retention of Fluctuations andd QS in Europe (The Quantity Surveryor July 1979)_5.pdf
1979-07 Claims - Prevention and Cure by J M Lenton (The Quantity Surveyor July 1979)_5.pdf
1979-07 Cartoon by P Sheen (The Quantity Surveyor July 1979)_5.PNG

1979-06 Cartoon by P Sheen (The Quantity Surveyor June 1979)_5.PNG

1979-06 Build or Lease Decision Problems by D G Banks (The Quantity Surveyor June 1979)_5.pdf
1979-06 Arbitration in Construction and Engineering Contracts by J T Edwards (The Quantity Surveyor June 1979)_5.pdf
1979-05 The Surveyor as An Expert Witness (The Quantity Surveyor May 1979)_5.pdf
1979-05 The Cost of Vandalism (The Quantity Surveyor May 1979)_5.pdf
1979-05 Clerks of Works on Building Projects Let under the JCT Standard Forms of Building Contract by A E Batty (The Quantity Surveyor May 1979)_5.pdf
1979-04 Research and the Quantity Surveyor by E R Skoyles (The Quantity Surveyor April 1979)_5.pdf
1979-03 Advocating a Change in the Present System of Tender Submission by Lai Pang Fee (The Quantity Surveyor March 1979)_5.pdf
1979-01 The Quantity Surveyor and his influence on Europe by E R Skoyles (The Quantity Surveyor January 1979)_5.pdf
1979-01 Professional Negligence and Indemnity as affecting Quantity Surveyors (The Quantity Surveyor January 1979)_5.pdf
1979-01 Practice notes on Tendering for Building Works without Bills of Quantities (The Quantity Surveyor January 1979)_5.pdf
1978-12 The Measurement of Mechanical and Engineering Services in Buildings by A C Sidwell (The Quantity Surveyor December 1978)_5.pdf
1978-12 Practice Query - Measurement of Working Space (The Quantity Surveyor December 1978)_5.pdf
1978-12 Construction and Quantity Surveying Overseas - 2 (The Quantity Surveyor December 1978)_5.pdf
1978-11 Negotiating Tenders for Building Contracts in the Republic of South Africa by Gaye K Le Roux (The Quantity Surveyor November 1978)_5.pdf
1978-11 Construction and Quantity Surveying Overseas - 1 (The Quantity Surveyor November 1978)_2.pdf
1978-10 Practice notes on Payment for on-site materials and goods (The Quantity Surveyor October 1978)_2.pdf
1978-10 Denmark - its Building Industry and Practice by E R Skoyles (The Quantity Surveyor October 1978)_2.pdf
1978-10 Comments on SMM6 by IQS UK (The Quantity Surveyor October 1978)_2.pdf
1978-09 Technical Queries (The Quantity Surveyor September 1978)_2.pdf
1978-09 Surveyors Scale Fees (The Quantity Surveyor September 1978)_2.pdf
1978-09 Review of the Sixth Edition of Standard Method of Measurement of Building Works by Roy Swanston (Chartered Surveyor September 1978)_2.pdf
1978-09 Housing in Hong Kong - the role of the Quantity Surveyor by A A Bunting (The Quantity Surveyor September 1978)_2.pdf
1978-09 Conference on avoiding a dispute by I H Seeley (The Quantity Surveyor September 1978)_2.pdf
1978-09 Bills of Quantities for Landscape Work by Waterworth and Weddle (The Quantity Surveyor September 1978)_2.pdf
1978-07 Tunnelling methods in the Hong Kong MTR (The Quantity Surveyor July 1978)_2.pdf
1978-07 Inaugurating the Hong Kong Branch of IQS by The Secretary (The Quantity Surveyor July 1978)_2.pdf
1978-06 Technical Queries (The Quantity Surveyor June 1978)_2.pdf
1978-06 Practice notes and comments on SMM6 (The Quantity Surveyor June 1978)_2.pdf
1978-06 Brick Diaphragm Walls - an alternative design for Industrial Buildings by D M Humphries (The Quantity Surveyor June 1978)_2.pdf
1978-05 The Construction Industry in the Federal Republic of Germany (The Quantity Surveyor May 1978)_2.pdf
1978-05 Technical Queries (The Quantity Surveyor May 1978)_2.pdf
1978-05 Quantity Surveying in the Republic of South Africa by J E Bowles (The Quantity Surveyor May 1978)_2.pdf
1978-04 Avoiding a Dispute by Roy Morledge (The Quantity Surveyor April 1978)_2.pdf
1978-02 Determination of Employment under the Standard Forms of Contract for Construction Works by Arthur T Ginnings (The Quantity Surveyor February 1978)_2.pdf
1978-01 Contract Insurances by T H Coad (The Quantity Surveyor January 1978)_2.pdf
1977-12 Surveyors Scale Fees (The Quantity Surveyor December 1977)_6.pdf
1977-12 Project Management and the Quantity Surveyor in Australia by Dennis C Fulcher (The Quantity Surveyor December 1977)_6.pdf
1977-12 Nigeria - A case for a new standard form of Building Contract by T C Mogbo (The Quantity Surveyor December 1977)_6.pdf
1977-10 Technical Queries (The Quantity Surveyor October 1977)_6.pdf
1977-10 Sweden - A short conspectus of its Building Practice and Industry by E R Skoyles (The Quantity Surveyor October 1977)_6.pdf
1977-10 Contracting - Organization or Annihilation by Ballin and Morledge (The Quantity Surveyor October 1977)_6.pdf
1977-09 Technical Queries (The Quantity Surveyor September 1977)_6.pdf
1977-09 Insolvency in the Construction Industry by P J Goodson, R H Hislp and D O Norman (The Quantity Surveyor September 1977)_6.pdf
1977-07 Graphical Methods for Use in Allocating Resources by P Gomez and A H Wootton (The Quantity Surveyor July 1977)_5.pdf
1977-06 The Techniques of Management by L F Murphy (Chartered Surveyor June 1977)_5.pdf
1977-06 The Quantity Surveyor and the Measurement of Engineering Services by P C Venning (Chartered Surveyor June 1977)_5.pdf
1977-06 Quality Costs in Building by W W Abbot (The Quantity Surveyor June 1977)_5.pdf
1977-06 National Joint Council for the Building Industry - Pay Settlement (The Quantity Surveyor June 1977)_5.pdf
1977-06 Formula Method of Price Adjustment of Building Works - Series II by P G Jordan (The Quantity Surveyor June 1977)_5.pdf
1977-06 Cartoon by P Sheen (The Quantity Surveyor June 1977)_5.PNG


1977-06 A Suggested Computer System for Package-deal Building Contracts by Alan Bond (The Quantity Surveyor June 1977)_5.pdf
1977-05 Technical Queries (The Quantity Surveyor May 1977)_5.pdf
1977-05 Preliminaries in Bills of Quantities for Building Works by N O M Azu (The Quantity Surveyor May 1977)_5.pdf
1977-05 Liquidated and Ascertained Damages by A E Batty (The Quantity Surveyor May 1977)_5.pdf
1977-04 Prices or Costs by E R Skoyles (The Quantity Surveyor April 1977)_5.pdf
1977-04 Check List for Final Statement by R E Jones (The Quantity Surveyor April 1977)_5.pdf
1977-03 Nominated Sub-contractors - Cash Discount etc by F E Miller (The Quantity Surveyor March 1977) _5.pdf
1977-02 The QS Function in Europe (The Quantity Surveyor February 1977) _5.pdf
1977-02 The Civil Engineering Standard Method of Measurement 1976 by G H Hughes (The Quantity Surveyor February 1977) _5.pdf
1977-01 Slip-Forming Can Save Time and Costs by W Heynisch (The Quantity Surveyor January 1977)_5.pdf
1977-01 Performance Bonds in Construction by G M Smith (The Quantity Surveyor January 1977)_5.pdf

End of Page